Entries |
Document | Title | Date |
20080198804 | HANDOVER BETWEEN AN IEEE 802.16 WiBro NETWORK AND A UMTS NETWORK USING MEDIA INDEPENDENT HANDOVER FUNCTION - A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) may include an IEEE 802.16 modem, a universal mobile telecommunication system (UMTS) modem and a media independent handover (MIH) entity. Software application programming interfaces provide the MIH entity with mechanisms to receive information about IEEE 802.16 and UMTS links, control IEEE 802.16 and UMTS modems for handover, discover an MIH server and IP multimedia system nodes, trigger mobile IP handover, etc. If an IEEE 802.16 link has been successfully established, the MIH entity starts an MIH session. When the IEEE 802.16 modem indicates that a connection is going to be terminated, the MIH entity activates the UMTS modem for handover. If the IEEE 802.16 modem indicates that a link parameter has crossed a threshold, the MIH entity sends IEEE 802.16 and WCDMA signal measurements to an MIH server. After receiving an MIH switch request, the MIH entity initiates handover to the UMTS network. | 08-21-2008 |
20080198805 | Optimized Reverse Tunnelling for Packet Switched Mobile Communication Systems - A method and a server acting as a Home Agent are provided for packet switched data transmission between a first mobile node and a correspondent mobile node in a mobile communication system comprising a plurality of mobile networks. Each of the first mobile node and the correspondent mobile node are allocated to respective home networks, and a network server is provided as a home agent to each mobile node, respectively. Then, data packets are routed from the first mobile node to the correspondent mobile node, over a first data tunnel from the first mobile node to any first one of the home agents and over a second data tunnel from said first one of the home agents to the correspondent mobile node without passing the respective other home agent. | 08-21-2008 |
20080198806 | Method and system for managing address prefix information associated with handover in networks - Method and system for managing address prefix information associated with handover in network. A fast handover process is achieved for point-to-point communication model. A mobile node send a provisional new care-of-address with an aggregate prefix part to its previous access router, which forwards the address to a new access router. The new access router in response generates a modified new care-of-address with a unique prefix part for the mobile node. Alternatively, the mobile node sends a request to the previous access router for a unique prefix. The request is forwarded from the previous access router to the new access router. The new access router assigns a unique prefix for the mobile node. | 08-21-2008 |
20080198807 | METHOD, COMPONENT AND SYSTEM FOR NETWORK-BASED HANDOVER - A method for handover in a network is provided. The method includes receiving a first message from a first access network device associated with a mobile node (MN) associated with a first access router. A second message is sent to a second access router associated with a second access network device to initiate handover. A third message in response to the second message is received to establish a tunnel between the first access router and the second access router for handover. Packets designated to the MN are forwarded from the first access router to the second access router through the tunnel. | 08-21-2008 |
20080198808 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER IN WiMAX MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is a system and a method for performing handover in a Worldwide interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMAX) mobile communication system supporting broadband wireless access. The system includes a plurality of Mobile Stations (MSs); at least one distributed antenna having the ability to perform simultaneous communications with the plurality of MSs; and a base station connected to the at least one distributed antenna through optical fibers for performing communications and handovers with the multiple MSs. | 08-21-2008 |
20080198809 | Mobile network and handover method thereof - In a mobile network and a handover method of the mobile network, the uniqueness of an Mobile Station (MS) Medium Access Control (MAC) address is verified when the MS initially enters the mobile network, so that a Duplicate Address Detection (DAD) process may be skipped when the MS hands over to another subnet in the network, thereby shortening an MS handover latency in the mobile network. | 08-21-2008 |
20080198810 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR BROADCAST OPTIMIZATION IN MOBILE IP - Methods and apparatus for supporting broadcast traffic in Mobile IP are disclosed. When a Mobile Node registers via a Foreign Agent supporting Mobile IP, the Foreign Agent receives a registration request from a Mobile Node and sends the registration request to a Home Agent. A registration reply received from the Home Agent has a network mask extension including a network mask associated with the home address of the Mobile Node. The Foreign Agent then sends the registration reply to the Mobile Node. Alternatively, the Mobile Node may register via a collocated care-of address, in which case the registration reply is received directly from the Home Agent. Once the Mobile Node has obtained its network mask, it may send packets such as broadcast packets, as well as roam to its Home Agent. Additionally, in accordance with various embodiments, the Foreign Agent duplicates broadcast packets for transmission to Mobile Nodes, rather than receiving the duplicated packets from the Home Agent. In this manner, broadcast traffic in a Mobile IP environment is optimized. | 08-21-2008 |
20080205339 | Auto-Provisioning of a Mobile Computing Device for Operation With A Wireless Network - An automatic provisioning methodology for a mobile computing device in a wireless network is disclosed herein. The mobile computing device can support open communication with a wireless switch, which is configured to function as a load request proxy between the mobile computing device and a mobile services system on the wireless network. The mobile services system sends provisioning data to the wireless switch (using secure communications), which in turn sends the provisioning data to the mobile computing device. The mobile computing device can then use the provisioning data to configure its software applications, security settings, and the like. | 08-28-2008 |
20080205340 | NEIGHBOR DISCOVERY IN A WIRELESS SYSTEM - Beacons may be grouped to facilitate neighbor discovery in a wireless network. For example, neighboring access devices such as IEEE 802.11 access points may cooperate to transmit beacons in a group. In this way, a wireless device seeking to discover the neighboring access devices may scan for the beacons for a shorter period of time. An indication may be provided to enable a wireless device to more efficiently scan the beacons. For example, the indication may indicate the channel the wireless device should scan to receive the next beacon that is to be transmitted. In addition, the indication may include information relating to the transmission time of the next beacon. | 08-28-2008 |
20080205341 | Terminal Having Sctp-Based Handover Function and Sctp-Based Handover Method of the Terminal - A terminal having a stream control transmission protocol (SCTP)-based handover function and an SCTP-based handover methods, the terminal including: a session management unit to initiate an SCTP session with a second terminal; a link layer information collection unit to store beacon signals in a link layer state information database; a signal intensity extraction unit to, if the terminal enters an overlapping area of first and second communication areas, extract an intensity of a beacon signal transmitted by a second base station managing the second communication area from the link layer state information database; and a handover unit to, if the intensity is greater than a critical value, add an IP address received from the second base station to the SCTP session, and to, if the intensity is greater than a second critical value, requests the second terminal to communicate with the terminal using the received IP address. | 08-28-2008 |
20080205342 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR HANDOFFS BETWEEN TECHNOLOGIES - Systems and methods for providing a handoff between technologies are disclosed. An intra-technology handoff occurs where the same integrated chassis handles the session for the different access technologies. In an intra-technology handoff, the same IP address and the session can be maintained through the handoff. The mobile node can undergo a handoff without issuing a registration request in some embodiments. An inter-technology handoff occurs from one integrated chassis to another integrated chassis. The integrated chassis can preserve session and context information in a session manager and in a handoff from one access technology to another the same session manager can be chosen with the session and context information remaining intact even though the access technology has changed. The integrated chassis can provide an access technology handoff where the core network does not notice any change and applications running on or delivered to the mobile node are not effected. | 08-28-2008 |
20080205343 | Method And System For Allocating SFID In A Worldwide Interoperability Microwave Access Network - A method for allocating an SFID in a WiMAX network including an ASN and a CSN may include: establishing, by the CSN a service flow in response to a service flow creation request from an MSS, and sending the service flow to the ASN; and allocating, by the ASN, a value that currently is not used by the MSS as an SFID of the service flow requested by the MSS. A system for allocating an SFID in a WiMAX network is also provided. According to the method and system for allocating an SFID in a WiMAX network, after an MSS performs a handover, it is not necessary to notify a function module generating an SFID to release the SFID, thereby simplifying the SFID management. | 08-28-2008 |
20080205344 | Method, medium, and system for searching crossover router and method, medium, and system for reserving resources in mobile network - A method, medium, and system for reserving resources in a mobile network. A mobile node reports a start of a handover to a present access router if the handover of the mobile node occurs, and the previous access router transmits specified session information to a candidate access router that has a possibility handling the mobile node's handover. A candidate crossover router, which performs a resource reservation work on a new path and a resource release on the previous path, is searched, and a localized resource reservation is established by exchanging a specified resource reservation message before the handover is completed if the candidate crossover router is determined. Accordingly, duplication of resources can be prevented, and a prompt resource reservation can be achieved during the handover. | 08-28-2008 |
20080212533 | Method For the Reconfiguration of an Information Processing Unit of a Terminal - The invention relates to a method for the reconfiguration of an information processing unit of a terminal ( | 09-04-2008 |
20080212534 | DATA FORWARDING CONTROLLER, COMMUNICATION TERMINAL APPARATUS, DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - A communication terminal apparatus of a mobile type performs data transmission/reception via a network and changes access points based on data receiving conditions. The communication terminal apparatus is configured to acquire a MAC address of a next access point to which a communication terminal apparatus is scheduled to be connected next, broadcast a handover start message containing the acquired MAC address of the next access point, and perform a handover process on condition that the communication terminal apparatus receives a handover setting completion message from a data forwarding controller as a response to the handover start message. | 09-04-2008 |
20080212535 | Controlling and enhancing handoff between wireless access points - A process of maintaining access information between wireless hotspots is disclosed. A logon request from a wireless portable device is received by a first access point of a first wireless hotspot and use of the first access point by the wireless portable device is authenticated to establish an access session. Then, information related to the access session is passed to a shared register accessible by a plurality of wireless hotspots and the access session is monitored to determine whether a disconnect by the wireless portable device occurs. Additionally, when the wireless portable device moves from a coverage area of the first wireless hotspot to one coverage area of one of the plurality of wireless hotspots, the information related to the access session may be used to facilitate access to the one of the plurality of wireless hotspots by the wireless portable device. | 09-04-2008 |
20080212536 | Policy based mechanisms for selecting access routers and mobile context - In mobile IP networks, when a mobile node (MN) moves from one cell to another, handover occurs. The result of the handover is that the MN connects to the network through a new access router (AR). The handover may occur between access routers of the same or different administrative domains. In all cases, the information related to the mobile node has to be transferred from the old AR to the new AR in order to minimize the effect of the change of access routers. | 09-04-2008 |
20080219212 | Handover Method for Mixed Mobile Communication System of Asynchronous Network and Synchronous Network - A method for improving a success rate of handover in a mobile communication system in which an asynchronous network and a synchronous network are mixed is disclosed. The method comprises the steps of: an asynchronous system instructing an asynchronous modem of a mobile station to initiate a synchronous modem according to a handover request, the handover request that is generated from the mobile station when intensions of a forwarding and receiving signals between the mobile station and a node B of the asynchronous system are less than a predetermined intension; the asynchronous system determining a cell for the handover and instructing the mobile station to handover a synchronous system; the asynchronous modem requesting the synchronous modem to receiving a current communication according to a handover request of the asynchronous system to the asynchronous modem; the mobile station accessing the synchronous system; and the asynchronous releasing the communication with the mobile station. | 09-11-2008 |
20080219213 | DYNAMIC SHARING OF WIRELESS RESOURCES AMONG DIFFERENT COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - Various embodiments are described to enable multiple, independent communication networks to share in an autonomous and dynamic manner unlicensed wireless resources. Generally, this involves determining that a first network node ( | 09-11-2008 |
20080219214 | WIRELESS WIDE-AREA COMMUNICATION NETWORK MULTIHOP RELAY STATION MANAGEMENT - A system and method for managing a multihop relay station in a wireless wide-area communication network includes determining whether any mobile stations are being served by the relay station. If not, inactivating the relay station by; inactivating transmitted signals from the relay station, leaving a receiver active, and monitoring signals on the active receiver. Whereafter, estimating a channel quality of at least one mobile station from the monitored signals by the inactive relay station, and activating the relay station in response to the monitored signals indicating that a channel quality of the mobile station will improve when being served by the relay station. | 09-11-2008 |
20080219215 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEDIA INDEPENDENT HANDOVER CAPABILITY DISCOVERY - A first media independent handover function (MIHF) receives a media independent handover (MIH) capabilities discovery request from a second MIHF and generates a MIH capabilities discovery response message, including one or more parameters. Then the first MIHF then sends the MIH capabilities discovery response to the second MIHF. Based on the information contained in the MIH capabilities discovery response, the first MIHF may receive a handover request message from the second MIHF. The one or more parameters included within the discovery response message indicates the specific technologies for which the first MIHF supports a MMB handover. The one or more parameters may include a list of the technologies for which a make-before-break (MMB) handover is supported. For example, a parameter may use a specific bit structure wherein each bit is a Boolean representation of whether MMB handover is supported for a specific type of technology. | 09-11-2008 |
20080219216 | HIERARCHICAL CELL DEPLOYMENT - A hierarchical cell structure that may be applicable to any wireless communications network utilizing cells. One or more characteristics associated with a mobile device configured to communicate with the base stations via a wireless communications protocol are determined while the mobile device is communicating with a base station. The one or more characteristics are utilized to determine a subsequent base station to be the target of a handoff procedure. | 09-11-2008 |
20080219217 | Method and system for transmitting and receiving data in a heterogeneous communication system - A method and system for transmitting/receiving data in a heterogeneous communication system. A terminal accesses a first controller of a first communication system supporting a first communication service to make a communication path to the first communication system. After making the communication path to the terminal, the first controller determines whether it is possible to provide the first communication service to the terminal over the first communication system. If it is not possible, the first controller transmits to an interworking unit a first request indicating that the terminal requires the first communication service over the second communication system. The interworking unit transmits a second request to a second controller of the second communication system in response to the first request, the second request indicating that the second controller provides the first communication service to the terminal. Upon receiving a response to the second request, the interworking unit controls the first controller to provide the first communication service to the terminal over the second communication system according to the response. | 09-11-2008 |
20080219218 | Gtp for Integration of Multiple Access - A network architecture comprising at least one core network, each core network comprising a number of packet data gateway access supporting nodes GASNs handling mobile user station access over an access network, said core network(s) further providing access to one or more global packet data communication networks (IN), and one or more nodes holding subscriber or mobile user station related information. The GASNs are further adapted to support intercommunication over a mobility protocol interface to, at reception of a request for change of access type from a mobile user station, establish information about the previous GASN of the mobile user station, and to, using the established information, update an established communication context concerning the mobile user station or create a new communication context concerning the mobile user station such that mobility between different access network types is enabled for a mobile user station without interruption of an ongoing session. | 09-11-2008 |
20080225793 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PERFORMING HANDOFF IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Method and system for performing handoff in wireless networks. According to an embodiment, the present invention provides a method for wireless communication. The method includes providing an access terminal that is configured to perform wireless IP communication. The method also includes providing a first wireless connection for the access terminal by a first access node. The method further includes providing a first network access for the access terminal by a first connectivity node. Additionally, the method includes obtaining a plurality of addresses for the access terminal. The plurality of address includes a first address and a second address. The first address is associated with a first priority level. The second address is associated with a second priority level. The method additionally includes storing the plurality address by a home agent. The method also includes initiating a handoff process for switching from the first connectivity node to a second connectivity node. | 09-18-2008 |
20080225794 | Communication method between at least one subscriber station and at least two base stations - Communication method implementing at least one subscriber station and at least two base stations synchronised and connected to each other by a communication link. | 09-18-2008 |
20080225795 | MAC AND TCP COORDINATION APPROACH FOR PERFORMANCE IMPROVEMENT IN IEEE 802.16E MOBILE BROADBAND ACCESS SYSTEMS - A mobile device includes a communications protocol stack including a MAC layer and TCP layer separated by an IP layer. A cross-layer coordination module parallel to the communications protocol stack is coupled to both the MAC layer and TCP layer. The MAC layer generates a message sent to the cross-layer coordination module indicating that the mobile device is about to engage in a communications handover from a first base station to a second base station. The cross-layer coordination module passes handover information to the TCP layer so as to inform the TCP layer of the communications handover. If the mobile device is operating as a TCP sender, the TCP layer freezes its connection and state during the communications handover. If the mobile device is operating as a TCP receiver, the TCP layer sends a TCP ACK message to a TCP sender having an advertised window size set to a zero value so as to cause the TCP sender to freeze a connection and state during communications handover. | 09-18-2008 |
20080225796 | HANDOVER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate handing over mobile device communications in a wireless network from a source base station to a target base station without using a random access channel (RACH). In this regard, the mobile device can monitor multiple base stations determining timing information related thereto and access scheduling request channels for the base stations. When ready for handover, the mobile device can request data resources over the scheduling request channel using the appropriate timing information. | 09-18-2008 |
20080225797 | Method and Apparatus for Optimizing Neighbor List Automatically in Synchronous Cdma Network - A method for automatically optimizing a neighbor list for processing handover in a synchronous CDMA (Code Division Multiple Access) network includes the steps of: collecting neighbor list data, call fault data, handover statistical data, base station location data and PN information data of each base station sector in a nationwide network; extracting all target sectors available for handover by analyzing the collected data; endowing a weighting factor to the extracted target sectors according to importance and then sorting the target sectors according to calculated results so as to determine priorities; and subsequently inputting the target sector information to the neighbor list according to the priorities. | 09-18-2008 |
20080225798 | PROACTIVE SEAMLESS SERVICE PROVISIONING IN MOBILE NETWORKS THROUGH TRANSFERRING OF APPLICATION CONTEXT - A method supporting relocation of an Internet Protocol session during a network layer handover is provided. Application context information is sent to a device. The application context information indicates activities to be executed pro-actively before a network layer handover and includes a requested communication requirement. A first message is received from the device that includes a first indicator indicating whether or not the device can satisfy the requested communication requirement. If the first indicator indicates that the device cannot satisfy the requested communication requirement, the application context information is sent to another device, and a second message is received from the other device. The second message includes a second indicator indicating whether or not the other device can satisfy the requested communication requirement. If the second indicator indicates that the other device can satisfy the requested communication requirement, the other device is selected as a target access router for the network layer handover. | 09-18-2008 |
20080232323 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDOVER IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND SYSTEM THEREOF - A method and apparatus for handover in a wireless communication system and a system thereof, in which a Base Station (BS) allocates Scheduling Request/Channel Quality Information (SR/CQI) transmission resources to a Mobile Station (MS), an SR/CQI being periodically transmitted from the MS to a target cell, determines whether control information has been received from the MS using the allocated SR/CQI transmission resources, and allocates radio resources to the MS, for transmission of a handover confirm message from the MS, upon receipt of the control information from the MS. | 09-25-2008 |
20080232324 | Handover Control Method - During handover, an origin base station saves data packets for a mobile station, as well as instructs the mobile station to switch communication to a destination base station, and requests a host station to switch the base station that communicates with that mobile station from the origin base station to the destination base station. After that, when in accordance to the switching request it is possible to save data packets, the host station begins to save the data packets for the mobile station in the place of the origin base station, and after communication between the mobile station and the destination base station has become possible, sends the saved data packets to the mobile station via the destination base station. | 09-25-2008 |
20080240035 | Method and System for Base Station Change of Packet Switched Communications in a Mobile Communications System - The invention provides a method for fastening a polymeric label to a glass, plastic, or metal container or surface by means of a water based composition containing ac least 30% by dry weight of animal glue; that is activated into an adhesive by the following steps: (a) applying a layer of a hydrophilic solid material based on at least 30% by weight on protein from animal renderings to a polymeric label to form a hydrophilic layer that acts as an adhesive layer when activated with an aqueous medium; (b) applying a low deposition of water, a water based adhesive, water containing a cross-linking agent or an adhesive containing a cross-linking agent to the activatable hydrophilic layer sufficient enough to activate it into an adhesive and form a fastenable polymeric label; (c) fastening the fastenable polymeric label to a glass, plastic or metal container or surface; and (d) allowing the polymeric label to dry on the glass, plastic or metal container or surface. | 10-02-2008 |
20080240036 | Method For Resource Management and Method For Traffic Guidance in the Multimode Radio - The application discloses a method for resource management and a method for traffic guidance in a multimode radio network comprising a plurality of mobile communication networks of different modes that share wideband transmission links and sites of centralized base stations, the centralized base stations of the plurality of mobile communication networks being connected to a common base station controller or a common radio networks controller. A mobile terminal is made to perform real-time handover among different mobile communication networks, or, the allocation of the resources among the plurality of mobile communication networks is adjusted in real time, according to at least one of the following factors or the combination thereof: the multimode supporting capability of the mobile terminal, traffics of cells, operation policies and real-time operating conditions of the plurality of networks. | 10-02-2008 |
20080240037 | Method and Apparatus to Facilitate Mobile Station Communications Using Internet Protocol-Based Communications - In a communication network ( | 10-02-2008 |
20080240038 | AIRCRAFT COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM WITH HARD HANDOFF AND ASSOCIATED METHODS - A communications system for an aircraft carrying at least some personnel having personal electronic devices (PEDs) for wireless data communications outside the aircraft includes a ground-based communications network comprising spaced apart base stations, and an access point in the aircraft for providing a WLAN for data communications with the PEDs. An air-to-ground transceiver in the aircraft cooperates with the access point for data communications with the ground-based communications network. First and second base stations define respective first and second adjacent coverage areas, and include respective first and second hard handoff controllers. The respective first and second hard handoff controllers implement a hard handoff of a data communications channel with the air-to-ground transceiver as the aircraft moves from the first coverage area to the second adjacent coverage area. | 10-02-2008 |
20080240039 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF PERFORMING A HANDOFF IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Apparatus and methods enable an efficient, low-latency handoff of a communication session, which may be especially effective in a high data rate network. The apparatus and methods provide for a source transceiver module to complete a transmission in-progress while at the same time informing a target transmission module of an end point of the transmission such that data in a shadow buffer of an anchor network function module can be sent to the target transceiver function prior to implementation of the handoff. As such, the apparatus and methods allow for an extremely quick handoff that minimizes use of a backhaul network. | 10-02-2008 |
20080240040 | IP ADDRESS ALLOCATION IN EVOLVED WIRELESS NETWORKS - A networking system includes a first wireless network module that transmits a request to attach to a network and a second wireless network module. The second wireless network module receives the request, determines whether the first wireless network module requires an IP address based on the request, and selectively allocates an IP address to the first wireless network module based on the determination. | 10-02-2008 |
20080240041 | Method and system of reducing handover time in mobile IP network - A method and system of reducing handover time in a mobile IP network. An Foreign Agent (FA), when a terminal carries out a handover between mobile Internet Protocol Version-4 (IPv4) sub-networks of the Foreign Agent (FA), identifies whether or not a registration request message from the terminal is transmitted from an entry of a visitor list of the Foreign Agent (FA). If the registration request message is transmitted from the entry of the visitor list, interface information of a corresponding one of the sub-networks, to which the terminal registered in the visitor list is connected, is updated. A registration reply message is generated in response to the registration request message, and is transmitted to the terminal. | 10-02-2008 |
20080240042 | High-Density Wireless Local Area Network - A data communication system includes an access point and a plurality of stations each for exchanging wireless data communication messages with the access point. At least some of the messages are in a format that includes at least one message header and a plurality of data units. Each of the data units includes a respective data unit header and a respective data frame. Each data unit header identifies a respective one of the stations as a recipient to receive the respective data frame of the data unit. | 10-02-2008 |
20080247359 | MOBILE DEVICE HANDOFF CONTROLLER AND METHOD AND SYSTEM INCLUDING THE SAME - A hand-off controller for use in a system including an application server, the application server being connected to a mobile device via a first network connection to conduct an application session involving data communications between the application server and the mobile device. The hand-off controller is operatively coupled to the application server and configured to recognize that a surrogate device has connected to the application server via a second network connection; recognize that the surrogate device is intended to participate in the application session in the place of the mobile device; enable data communications directed to the mobile device from the application server, in relation to the application session, to be sent to the surrogate device; and enable data communications directed to the application server from the surrogate device, in relation to the application session, to be sent to the application server, whereby the surrogate device is able to continue the application session with the application server in place of the mobile device. | 10-09-2008 |
20080247360 | Handoff of Data Attachment Point - In a communication system in which a gateway entity is linked to a plurality of infrastructure entities which in turn are operable to communicate with an access terminal, the access terminal needs first to establish a data attachment point (DAP) with one of the infrastructure entities. Handoff of the DAP from one infrastructure entity to another infrastructure entity is initiated by the access terminal. The access terminal weighs factors such as the link conditions with the various infrastructure entities, the time since the last DAP handoff, and time duration communicating with the current infrastructure entity before proceeding with the DAP handoff. | 10-09-2008 |
20080247361 | Traffic Transmission Path Relocation Method For Radio Communication System - A method for effectively relocating a traffic transmission path when a mobile terminal changes a gateway for a traffic transmission that may include: when a mobile terminal performs handover from a first radio network node to a second radio network node, determining a gateway for processing traffic most suitable for the second radio network node; changing a traffic transmission path to the determined gateway; and transmitting, by a traffic transmission node, traffic to the second radio network node through the changed traffic transmission path. | 10-09-2008 |
20080253329 | Communication Handover Method, Communication System, Communication Message Processing Method, and Communication Message Processing Program - There is disclosed a technique capable of lessening the delay which can occur in a conventional FMIP (fast handover technique) and of reducing packet loss. According to this technique, upon receipt of an FBAck message from a PAR (access router to which a mobile terminal (MN) | 10-16-2008 |
20080253330 | System and method for dynamically changing service characteristics based on device and network connectivity attributes - A system and method for dynamically changing service characteristics based on device and network connectivity attributes. For example, one embodiment of a method comprises: establishing a wireless communication channel with a wireless data processing device over a first type of wireless network; determining a first compression ratio associated with the first type of wireless network; compressing a first portion of content at the first compression ratio; transmitting the first portion of content at the first compression ratio to the data processing device; detecting that the data processing device switches from the first type of wireless network to a second type of wireless network; maintaining the wireless data processing device's online status as the wireless data processing device switches from the first type of wireless network to a second type of wireless network; determining a second compression ratio associated with the second type of wireless network; compressing a second portion of the content at the second compression ratio; and transmitting the second portion of content at the second compression ratio to the user device. | 10-16-2008 |
20080253331 | Methods and Apparatus for RF Handoff in a Multi-Frequency Network - Methods and apparatus for RF handoff in a multi-frequency network. A method includes generating seamless and partially seamless handoff tables for multiplexes carried in a current LOI, wherein the seamless and partially seamless handoff tables comprise neighboring RF channels carrying one or more of the multiplexes in the current LOI, detecting a handoff event initiated by acquisition failures on a current RF, selecting a selected RF channel from the seamless and partially seamless handoff tables, and performing a handoff to the selected RF channel. An apparatus includes processing logic configured to generate the seamless and partially seamless handoff tables, detect a handoff event initiated by acquisition failures on a current RF, and select a selected RF channel from the seamless and partially seamless handoff tables. The apparatus also includes channel switch logic configured to perform a handoff to the selected RF channel. | 10-16-2008 |
20080253332 | SELECTIVELY ACQUIRED SYSTEM INFORMATION - A method, apparatus and computer program product are provided that improve mobility procedures between base stations based on rules configurable by the operator that govern both the mobile terminal and the base stations. A method is provided in which a mobile terminal obtains system information from a neighboring base station. The system information is stored at the mobile terminal such that the mobile terminal may thereafter participate in a handover or reselection to a respective neighboring base station at least partially based upon the stored system information, typically without further verification of the system information. If desired, the mobile terminal can further determine if one or more predefined validity criterion is met with respect to the stored system information. If the predefined validity criterion is not met, the mobile terminal can then obtain system information, e.g., updated system information, from the neighboring base station. | 10-16-2008 |
20080253333 | Call Admission Control Method for Use in Packet Based Communication System - Provided is a call admission control method for use in a packet based communication system, which can secure a handoff and a quality of service (QoS) by discriminating a new call and a handoff call and borrowing a shared bandwidth, a reserved bandwidth, and a bandwidth of other service according to kinds of services and their characteristics. The call admission control method includes the steps of: a) dividing frequency band into a reservation band and a shared band for communication service handoff call and multicast service handoff call, and determining whether a call admission request of users is a new call or a handoff call; b) when the call admission request is the new call, determining whether to accept the call admission request by allocating the shared band and a band borrowed from other service; and c) when the call admission request is the handoff call, determining whether to accept the call admission request by allocating the shared band, the reserved band, and the borrowed band according to services and bandwidth resources. | 10-16-2008 |
20080253334 | Downlink Solution for Seamless and Lossless Cell Change in a Cellular System - The present invention relates to a UE, base station network node and methods thereof in a cellular mobile communication system. One method concerns handover from a first radio base station to a second radio base station wherein, it comprises the steps receiving a notification from the first radio base station that currently serves said UE, said notification indicating the last packet to be transmitted to this user equipment from said first radio base station on a first connection; and informing the second radio base station by a request to commence transmission from this second radio base station when the notified last packet is received at the UE. | 10-16-2008 |
20080259868 | Wireless communication system and associated method for routing messages to wireless networks - A wireless communication system is provided that includes a base station and a routing map. The base station is in wireless communication with a plurality of wireless networks. The routing map stores information relating to a location of a mobile station in wireless communication with a first wireless network. The base station receives a signal for the mobile station and transmits the signal to only the first wireless network, according to information retrieved from the routing map related to the location of the mobile station. The wireless network may be a wireless local area network. A handover of the mobile station from the first wireless network to a second wireless network may be made based upon a measured signal characteristic between the mobile station and the first and second wireless networks. | 10-23-2008 |
20080259869 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDOFF BETWEEN ACCESS SYSTEMS - Systems and methods for switching among networks (e.g., heterogeneous) and inter-working between a source access system and a target access system, by implementing tunneling from the AT to the target access system via the source access system. An inter-system handoff control component can facilitate setting tunneling by the mobile unit to the target access and/or between the source access system and the target access system—wherein signaling/packeting associated with the target system can be transferred over the source system. | 10-23-2008 |
20080259870 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEDIA INDEPENDENT HANDOVER - A method and apparatus for performing a handover are disclosed. An Internet protocol (IP) multimedia subsystem (IMS) client registers with an IMS network and establishes an MIH session with an MIH application server using an SIP. The IMS client establishes a session for IP-based service, (e.g., VoIP), with a communication peer using SIP messaging. MIH messages are exchanged for handover with the MIH application server over IP using SIP messages by encapsulating the MIH messages in SIP instant messages. Alternatively, the MIH messages may be exchanged with the MIH application over IP by sending equivalent SIP messages in place of the MIH messages. | 10-23-2008 |
20080259871 | Method of performing vertical handover between different wireless networks - A method of performing a vertical handover between different wireless networks based on media independent handover (MIH) includes the steps of checking a link state of the first network to transmit a handover notify message from the mobile node to an old access router when a handover is needed, and transmitting a handover request message from the old access router to a new access router to form a tunnel to exit toward the old access router. Thereafter, packets to be transmitted to the mobile node through the first network are buffered in the old access router. After changing the wireless service from the first network to the second network the mobile node, the packets buffered in the old access router is then transmitted to the new access router, and the mobile node receives the packets through the second network. | 10-23-2008 |
20080259872 | Media independent handover-based network system having a vertical handover capability and vertical handover method thereof - A heterogeneous network system performs a vertical handover based on media independent handover (MIH) in different networks in which a WiMAX (Wireless Broadband Internet) network (or a WiBro (Wireless Broadband Internet)) and a WLAN (Wireless LAN) network are coexisted. The heterogeneous network system cyclically acquires neighboring network information in advance through a media independent handover server, and performs new address (NCoA) generation at a handover preliminary time. And then DAD (Duplicate Address Detection) and BU (Binding Update) are performed. Accordingly, the vertical handover between different networks can be performed to receive packets from a switched network while a handover delay time is minimized. | 10-23-2008 |
20080259873 | Method and Apparatus for Providing Gateway Relocation - An apparatus and method for providing gateway relocation to an external network wherein a user equipment (UE) includes an initial external network connection via a source core node, comprises initializing a mobility event, reallocating the initial external network connection from via the source core node to via a target core node to create a new external network connection, allocating the new IP address to the UE for the new external network connection, and using the new IP address. | 10-23-2008 |
20080259874 | FLOW BASED LAYER 2 HANDOVER MECHANISM FOR MOBILE NODE WITH MULTI NETWORK INTERFACES - A method for handing-off a mobile node (MN) from one network interface to another network interface, the network interfaces being connected to a same level | 10-23-2008 |
20080267127 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDOVER IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for handover in a wireless communication system. A handover indication can be received from a source base station ( | 10-30-2008 |
20080267128 | Handover from E-UTRAN to UTRAN/GERAN CS - The present invention relates to a method for a handover of a UE (User Equipment) currently engaged in a voice call. More particularly, the invention relates to a handover from 1) a packet based radio where Voice Service is provided via VoIP over the radio and is controlled via Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) based signalling (e.g. LTE, E-UTRAN or WIMAX radio) to 2) a radio access network where Voice Service can be only provided via circuit switched (CS) domain (a visited mobile switching centre (VMSC) is needed) such as legacy 3GPP UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network (UTRAN)/GSM/Edge Radio Access Network (GERAN) coverage. A MSC-S entity acting as a Packet Core Control Node on a Packet Switched (PS) network and as an Anchor Visited Mobile Switching Centre (VMSC) for a handover to a Circuit Switched (CS) network on the CS domain side is proposed, the MSC-S preparing a new path with a remote UE-B and a CS domain handover towards a target legacy radio coverage before requesting a UE-A to execute the handover. | 10-30-2008 |
20080267129 | Uplink Cell Changes in a Mobile Communication Network - The present invention relates to a user equipment, UE, wirelessly connectable to a cellular mobile communication network adapted to perform uplink cell change of the UE from the first radio base station to a second radio base station. The UE comprises means for controlling the HARQ retransmissions and means for determining the time point for performing the cell change based on the controlled ongoing HARQ retransmissions of outstanding data. | 10-30-2008 |
20080267130 | HANDLING CELL RESELECTIONS AND STATE TRANSITIONS FOR HIGH-SPEED DOWNLINK PACKET ACCESS - A wireless transmit receive unit (WTRU) is configured to operate in an high speed data packet access (HSDPA) mode in a cell and/or state and to clear HSDPA resources when moving out of the cell and/or state. The WTRU is configured to clear HSDPA resources when conditions to perform high speed downlink shared channel reception are not met. | 10-30-2008 |
20080267131 | Pre-Synchronization Method for Hard Handovers in Wireless Networks - A pre-synchronization method in which the source cell chooses a signature for the user equipment (mobile) to use in the target cell for RACH access, and instructs the user equipment to perform RACH access and return to the current cell before a handover command (break command) is issued. This causes parallel execution of the UL synchronization process with the context transfer process among the two base stations. | 10-30-2008 |
20080267132 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTIVE EXAMINATION OF PPP PACKETS FOR RENEGOTIATION OF A PPP LINK ON A Um INTERFACE - A method and system that provides for efficient re-synchronization of a PPP link on a Um interface is provided. When the PPP link is connected, if an indication that the communications of the mobile station is associated with a new network server is detected, only the Um interface will undergo PPP configuration renegotiation. The method and system does not require the examination of all data packets for determining whether PPP configuration renegotiation is required. | 10-30-2008 |
20080273495 | Smooth Handover in a Wireless Local Area Network - A process for operation of a data link transmitting data packets between a base station and one or more mobile stations within transmission phases. A start signal indicates the start of each transmission phase that is managed by the base station. For preparation of a handover procedure the mobile station switches into a monitoring phase, wherein the radio traffic is listened to and another base station suitable for the data packet transmission is sought. The mobile station performs data packet transmission in every m | 11-06-2008 |
20080273496 | System For FA Relocation With Context Transfer In Wireless Networks - A system for foreign agent relocation in a wireless network. The system comprises at least one first foreign agent; at least one second foreign agent; and at least one mobile node. Relocation negotiation is performed to determine whether foreign agent relocation of the mobile node from the at least one first foreign agent to the at least one second foreign agent is agreed, and foreign agent relocation is performed if the foreign agent relocation is agreed. | 11-06-2008 |
20080273497 | Handover for DVB-H - A method of wireless handover in a broadcast network (FIGS. | 11-06-2008 |
20080273498 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSMITTING CONTENT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The present invention provides methods and systems for transmitting content in a wireless communication network. The method includes caching a content in each base station of a set of base stations in the wireless communication network. The content includes a plurality of packets. In response to caching the content, a first base station belonging to the set of base stations transmits a first group of packets of the content to a mobile station. The method further includes handing over the mobile station to a second base station. The second base station belongs to the set of the base stations. The second base station resumes transmission of a second group of packets of the content to the mobile station. | 11-06-2008 |
20080273499 | Packet Forwarding Method, Path Reconstrucitng Method and State Transition Method For Avoiding Packet Loss During Handover - Provided is a method of packet forwarding over partial mesh network to avoid packet loss during handover. The method includes: based on first trigger information of a layer 2 obtained when a mobile node (MN) moves from a domain of a currently connected first BS to another domain, expecting a second BS of the domain to which the MN moves; if the first BS acquires second trigger information of the layer 2 indicating a disconnection between the first BS and the MN, forwarding packets destined for the MN to the second BS through the links; and if the second BS buffers the packets forwarded from the first BS and third trigger information of the layer 2 indicating a connection between the second BS and the MN, transferring the buffered packets to the MN. | 11-06-2008 |
20080273500 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR VERTICAL HANDOVER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of performing a vertical handover in a terminal of a wireless communication system includes generating a care-of-address (CoA) by using neighbor network information acquired from a media independent handover (MIH) server to perform the vertical handover, transmitting handover request information and the CoA to a serving network, confirming handover support information and CoA information of neighbor networks, which are received from the serving network, and determining a target network for performing the vertical handover by using the handover support information, and performing the vertical handover to the target network by using the CoA information. | 11-06-2008 |
20080279149 | Method for Outputting a Useful Data Stream and Communications Terminal for Receiving and for Outputting a Useful Data Stream - A method and a communication terminal for emitting a data flow during the changeover between a first transmission path and a second transmission path are provided. A receiving pause for the data flow occurs in a receiver during the changeover between a receiving end of a first partial data flow of the first transmission path and a receiving beginning of a second partial data flow of the second transmission path, and the data flow is emitted on the receiver side. When the data flow is emitted, the receiving pause is filled with additional data, the additional data being produced previously from the first partial data flow received by means of the transmission path. | 11-13-2008 |
20080279150 | METHOD FOR HANDOVER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK COMPRISING A NUMBER OF SUB-NETWORKS - The present invention discloses a method for carrying out a handover process in a wireless network, wherein the wireless network comprises at least a first and a second base stations belonging each to a different subnet associated of that wireless network and communicating through a first and a second gateways or foreign agents, respectively, and wherein the first base station is used as a serving base station currently in communication with at least one mobile subscriber station (MS). The method provided comprises a step of determining a traffic conveying entity as an intermediate anchoring point, and when the MS moves to a second subnet which comprises the second base station, a path is established for conveying traffic to/from that MS from/to a remote destination. The path comprises the intermediate anchoring point and the first gateway (or the first foreign agent). | 11-13-2008 |
20080279151 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PROCESSING DATA AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM COMPRISING SUCH DEVICE - A method and a device for processing data are provided, the device includes a first network element sends a message to a second network element thereby informing the second network element about a change of attachment of a third network element. | 11-13-2008 |
20080279152 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING POWER CONSUMPTION BASED HANDOVER BETWEEN HYBRID NETWORKS - Provided are a method and apparatus for performing power consumption based handover between hybrid networks. The method includes listing candidate networks based on a traffic class and terminal power consumption expected for each of the hybrid networks, and selecting a network for the handover according to the traffic class and a user preference from among the listed candidate networks. Accordingly, power can be saved, and simultaneously a network can be effectively selected. | 11-13-2008 |
20080285516 | Transmitting Method, Receiving Method, Radio Base Station, and Mobile Station - A transmission method according to the present invention includes: concatenating CRC masking data and receiver identification information for identifying the receiver; generating CRC check bits by performing a CRC encoding processing against non-CRC masking data; masking the CRC check bits by the concatenated receiver identification information and CRC masking data; concatenating the masking result and the non-CRC masking data; generating a transmission signal by performing an FEC encoding processing against the concatenated masking result and the non-CRC masking data, which are added; and transmitting the transmission signal to the receiver. | 11-20-2008 |
20080285517 | Mobile communication terminal and content reception method therefor - It is determined whether the communication network to which a self terminal is currently connected is a subscribed-to first communication network or a second communication network at a roaming destination. When a communication signal for push delivery transmitted from the content delivery apparatus is received before downloading of the content data, if the communication network to which the self terminal is connected is the first communication network, content data downloaded from the content delivery apparatus is received via the first communication network. If the communication network to which the self terminal is connected is the second communication network, downloading of the content data is limited. | 11-20-2008 |
20080285518 | Proxy mobile IP - A system and method for route optimization in PMIP having a first mobile node having a local mobility anchor and anchored at an access router and a second mobile node anchored at an access router is presented. The method includes establishing a binding cache at one access router comprising a mapping of mobile node addresses to access router addresses, populating the binding cache, and updating the mapping of the mobile node addresses in response to a handoff of a mobile node from one access router to another access router, so that a packet is transmitted from the first mobile node to the second mobile node using the mapping in the binding cache. The second access router address is obtained by either transmitting the packet from the first mobile node to the local mobility anchor, or querying neighboring access routers, or broadcasting access router addresses from the local mobility anchor. | 11-20-2008 |
20080285519 | HANDOVER METHOD AND APPARATUS EMPLOYED BY MOBILE NODE TO REDUCE LATENCY IN INTERNET PROTOCOL CONFIGURATION - A method and apparatus perform a handover of a mobile node with a decreased latency that occurs when the mobile node performs an Internet protocol (IP) configuration. The method of performing a handover of a mobile node includes: when the mobile node is connected to a network before the handover is performed, receiving first information on an IP configuration method to be used in a new network after the handover is performed from an information server (IS); when the mobile node is connected to the new network, receiving second information on the IP configuration method of the new network from a point of attachment (PoA) of the new network; determining whether the first information and the second information are identical; and, if it is determined that the first and second information are identical, performing an IP configuration according to the first information. | 11-20-2008 |
20080285520 | METHODS, MEDIA, AND DEVICES FOR MOVING A CONNECTION FROM ONE POINT OF ACCESS TO ANOTHER POINT OF ACCESS - Systems, methods, media, and devices for providing cooperation among digital processing devices in wireless networks are provided. In some embodiments, methods for moving a connection from one point of access to another point of access are provided, sending a request for information from a first mobile node to at least one other node, wherein the request for information contains first information identifying at least one point of access; receiving a response containing second information identifying at least one point of access from the at least one other node; and establishing a connection between the first mobile node and a point of access identified in the second information. In some embodiments, devices that can move a connection from one point of access to another point of access are provided. | 11-20-2008 |
20080291874 | HANDOVER APPARATUS AND METHOD IN A HETEROGENEOUS WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a handover method, in which a call manager of a network having a Circuit Switching (CS) network, a Long Term Evolution (LTE) network, and an Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) network, provides handover, from the LTE network to the CS network, to a terminal that uses one radio channel. The handover method includes upon receiving a request for handover from the terminal via a node of the LTE network, establishing a line to a Mobile Switching Center (MSC) of the CS network; sending, to the call manager, a request for a change in a session to another party's terminal in communication with the terminal, to establish an Internet Protocol (IP) bearer between the call manager and the other party's terminal; and sending a handover command to the terminal during the establishment of an IP bearer, to establish a radio channel to the base station of the CS network. | 11-27-2008 |
20080291875 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING NEIGHBOR BS INFORMATION IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In a communication system, a base station transmits a message including neighbor base station information to a mobile station, wherein neighbor base stations in the base station include m first type neighbor base stations and n second type neighbor base stations, the message includes an identifier dedicatedly allocated to the mobile station when the mobile station can get a service from one of the n second type neighbor base stations, the first type is different from the second type, the neighbor base station information includes information on the n second type neighbor base stations, and each of m and n is an integer identical to or greater than 1. | 11-27-2008 |
20080291876 | PROTOCOL ARCHITECTURE FOR ACCESS MOBILITY IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Access-independent mobility-enabling protocol messages are mapped into DIAMETER messages and communicated with peer entities using DIAMETER. Local access-independent mobility enabling protocol messages may also be communicated using DIAMETER. In one embodiment, the IEEE 802.21 media independent handover (MIH) protocol is the access-independent mobility-enabling protocol, and MIH messages are mapped into DIAMETER messages. IEEE 802.21 information elements (IEs) are transported over DIAMETER as attribute value pairs (AVPs). New DIAMETER Command Codes and Command flags may be defined to indicate message type. In another embodiment secure IP based transport and discovery and capability negotiation may be performed using an access-independent mobility enabling protocol (such as MIH) over DIAMETER. | 11-27-2008 |
20080291877 | Method of operating a mobile wireless network - A method of operating a mobile wireless network is provided, in which, when there is a relocation, the connection may be continued essentially directly from the latest state before the relocation. User data is transmitted between a mobile station and a first base station, the user data being combined into data units, for example, packet data units, before being transmitted. For transmission of data units, transmission-specific information describing an instantaneous state of the transmission is stored in the mobile station, as well as in a first network unit at a higher level than the first base station. With the relocation of the mobile station from the first base station to a second base station having a second higher-level network unit, the transmission-specific information stored in the first higher-level network unit is transmitted to the second higher-level network unit to continue the transmission after the relocation essentially directly from its latest state. | 11-27-2008 |
20080298320 | SYSTEM TO SYNCHRONIZE A GSM DEVICE - A global system for mobile communications (GSM) mobile station ( | 12-04-2008 |
20080298321 | MULTIMODE TERMINAL FOR SUPPORTING FAST HANDOVER BETWEEN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS - A multi-mode terminal (MMT) including a plurality of interfaces which provides access capability to heterogeneous networks respectively to provide quick handover between the heterogeneous networks, is provided. In this instance, when a Binding Update (BU) message is transmitted to a home agent via each of the plurality of interfaces, routers existing in a path to the home agent may update path latency information and path bandwidth information as a Binding Unique Identifier (BID) sub-option extension of Mobile Nodes and Multiple Interfaces in Internet Protocol version 6 (MONAMI6). In this case, the home agent may receive the BU message and select a care-of address (CoA) by referring to path latency information and path bandwidth information, included in the BU message. Also, the home agent may transmit a success binding acknowledgement (BAck) message with respect to the BU message of the selected path. | 12-04-2008 |
20080304450 | Inter-Mode/Inter-Rat Handover - There is disclosed a method of packet switched handover in a communications system having at least two modes of operation, the method comprising, at a terminal of the system, associating identifiers of each mode of operation, and responsive to a packet switched connection handover to a new mode, allocating the connection from an identifier of the existing mode to the associated identifier of the new mode. | 12-11-2008 |
20080304451 | METHOD TO ALLOW HAND-OFF OF A CDMA MOBILE FROM IMS FEMTOCELL TO CIRCUIT MSC - A method for hand-off of a cell division multi-access mobile from an internet protocol base network to a circuit mobile switching center is disclosed. The system includes determining whether a hand-off is appropriate based at least in part on signal strength of a call for a mobile unit. The method continues with sending a message indicating that the mobile identification of the mobile unit and a target cell locating the circuit identification of a circuit that is available to support a hand-off. The method continues on with allocating the circuit and reconfiguring the mobile unit to a macrocell (CDMA access network) and legacy MSC via the circuit. | 12-11-2008 |
20080304452 | Method for a mobile phone to automatically adapt to different frequency bands - A wide area communication network includes a first and second local wireless communication network, each local network operating in a different frequency band. A mobile phone previously configured to operate in the frequency band of the first local wireless communication network is transported to the second local wireless communication network and after powered runs a reconfiguration routine to operate in the frequency band of the second local wireless communication network. The reconfiguration routine includes scanning the wireless medium for a signal that includes wireless LAN identification information and after receiving such a signal comparing this identification information to identification information stored in the mobile phone. If the comparison results in a match, the mobile phone can successfully associate with the second local wireless communication network. | 12-11-2008 |
20080304453 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SEQUENTIAL MESSAGES - A method and apparatus for sequential measurement reporting in media independent handover communications are disclosed. In a first embodiment a measurement time field is added to existing IEEE 802.21 measurement report messages. In a second embodiment a measurement sequence number field is added to existing IEEE 802.21 measurement report messages. Optionally, the measurement time field, or sequence number field may be included in an IEEE 802.21 message. | 12-11-2008 |
20080304454 | HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK AND METHOD FOR HANDOVER BETWEEN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS - A heterogeneous network includes a terminal side and a network side. The network side includes an original PoA and handover candidate PoAs. The terminal side is used to select the handover candidate PoAs, initiate a media independent handover request, terminate a connection with the original PoA, and establish a connection with the handover candidate PoAs. The original PoA is used to terminate the connection with the terminal side according to the media independent handover request initiated by the terminal side. The handover candidate PoAs is used to establish the connection with the terminal side according to the media independent handover request initiated by the terminal side. A method for handover between heterogeneous networks initiated by the terminal side and the network side based on the 802.21 architecture is also provided, which improves the processing of the handover process. | 12-11-2008 |
20080310365 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CACHING CONTENT ON-DEMAND IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The present invention provides methods and systems for caching content in a wireless communication network. The method includes receiving a request for a content at a first base station from a mobile station. In response to receiving the request for the content, the first base station caches a first fragment of the content. The first fragment includes a plurality of packets. Further, the first base station transmits one or more packets of the plurality of packets corresponding to the first fragment to the mobile station. The method further includes initiating a handover of the mobile station to at least one second base station. The at least one base station caches a remaining plurality of packets corresponding to the first fragment of the content in response to the handover. | 12-18-2008 |
20080310366 | MIH Pre-Authentication - A system and method for performing MIH pre-authentication, which includes providing support for both direct and/or indirect pre-authentication and providing support for both network-initiated and mobile-initiated pre-authentication. | 12-18-2008 |
20080310367 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PDCP REORDERING AT HANDOFF - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate management of data delivery and processing in a wireless communication system and, more particularly, that support Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) reordering of packets during a handoff operation. Various aspects described herein can mitigate processing delays associated with PDCP reordering of packets at handoff by determining, communicating, and/or otherwise identifying one or more indicators during handoff that facilitate lossless communication of packets to a terminal with minimal delay. These indicators can include sequence number information for a source Node B, information regarding a step or jump size applied to a sequence number by a target Node B, a reset command, and/or other suitable indicators. | 12-18-2008 |
20080310368 | DOWNLINK PACKET DATA CONVERGENCE PROTOCOL BEHAVIOR DURING HANDOVER - The present invention relates to maintaining an order of received data units during a handover procedure in a wireless communication system. The present invention includes receiving a plurality of data units from a source station according to a sequence prior to handover to a target base station, wherein each data unit includes a sequence number, receiving at least one data unit having a sequence number after handover from a target base station, and delivering to a higher layer all data units received from the source base station prior to handover and having sequence numbers smaller than a sequence number of the at least one data unit received from the target base station after handover. | 12-18-2008 |
20080310369 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR FAST HANDOVER IN HIERARCHICAL MOBILE IPv6 - A method and system for fast handover in hierarchical mobile IPv6 includes: a mobile node which transmits a proxy route request message to a previous access router of the mobile node according to a handover expectation provided by the link layer, the previous access router transmits a network prefix information of a new access router of the mobile node to the mobile node; the mobile node which generates new care-of address according to the network prefix information; after the mobile node moves to a target network, an optimistic duplicate address detection is performed on the care-of address. The disclosure can simplify the handover procedure of hierarchical mobile IPV6 of the mobile node, reduce the signaling interaction in handover process, and shorten handover delay. | 12-18-2008 |
20080310370 | Communication terminal and recording medium - A communication terminal has a plurality of wireless communication units. An access control unit determines whether or not a selected wireless interface is in a state where a connection request is possible based on communication state information on the wireless interface selected beforehand in the plurality of wireless interfaces. When determining that a connection request using the selected wireless interface is not possible, the access control unit determines whether or not to change over the wireless interface used for a communication based on a changeover availability information table set beforehand. When determining that a changeover of the wireless interface is not possible, the access control unit idles without performing a connection request to establish a communication until it is determined that a connection request through the selected wireless interface becomes possible. | 12-18-2008 |
20080310371 | Seamless multistage handoff algorithm to facilitate handoffs between hetergeneous wireless networks - A method for automatically adapting a multi-protocol wireless device to facilitate a seamless multistage handoff according to various embodiments can include initiating a seamless multistage handoff process using a multi-protocol wireless device when the multi-protocol wireless device crosses a boundary area into an overlapping region where the multi-protocol wireless device is capable of simultaneously accessing a plurality of networks; and implementing the seamless multistage handoff process by performing at least a two-stage handoff process comprising a homogeneous handoff and a heterogeneous handoff without interrupting a communication call session conducted using the multi-protocol wireless device. A multi-network client device according to various embodiments can include a controller configured to support multiple independent call sessions, wherein the independent call sessions are concurrently conducted on a single wireless device through the use of parallel communication sessions and simultaneously connect the wireless device to a plurality of different networks hosting different content services. | 12-18-2008 |
20080316968 | FAST RELAY STATION HANDOVER - A method of signalling a handover condition to a mobile station in a network, comprising the steps of determining handover conditions based on the topology in the network; and signalling a handover condition to the mobile station. A base station and relay station operating in accordance with the method are also disclosed. | 12-25-2008 |
20080316969 | CARRIER SWITCHING IN A MULTI-CARRIER WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Techniques for performing carrier switching in a multi-carrier access network are described. A terminal may be assigned to a carrier among multiple carriers having different transmit power levels, e.g., by the access network during system access or handoff. The terminal may receive a switch threshold from the access network. The terminal may periodically measure the received signal strength of the assigned carrier and may compare the received signal strength against the switch threshold. The terminal may refrain from switching to a stronger carrier if the received signal strength exceeds the switch threshold and may switch to the stronger carrier if the received signal strength is below the switch threshold. This carrier switching scheme may prevent the terminal from switching to the strongest carrier when the assigned carrier can provide satisfactory performance. The access network may also switch the terminal to another carrier by sending a carrier switch message. | 12-25-2008 |
20080316970 | INTER-NETWORK PACKET TRANSMISSION METHOD AND SYSTEM - An inter-network packet transmission method and system in a vertical handover between the two different technology networks is provided. An inter-network packet transmission method includes tunneling between gateways of heterogeneous networks though an interface, updating a routing table of at least one of the gateways by exchanging information through the interface, and transmitting packets to a user equipment based the at least one updated routing table. | 12-25-2008 |
20080316971 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RESOURCE MANAGEMENT IN HANDOVER OPERATION - A method and apparatus for resource management during handover operation includes initiating a handover from a first access network to a second access network. A policy update message is sent and a policy update confirmation message is received. A general packet radio service (GPRS) tunneling protocol (GTP) message and a radio access bearer (RAB) release message is sent and a GTP and RAB release acknowledgment is received. Connectivity is established for uplink and downlink transmission in the second access network. | 12-25-2008 |
20080316972 | RESOURCE MANAGEMENT FOR MOBILITY BETWEEN DIFFERENT WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS ARCHITECTURES - A method of and apparatus for handover between a 3GPP based network and a non-3GPP network is disclosed where a policy update to a new gateway is requested. A confirmation of the policy update is sent from the policy and charging rules function (PCRF) to the 3GPP packet data network gateway (PDN GW). The new gateway also confirms the policy update to the currently serving gateway. The tunnel endpoints and radio resources are released between the PDN GW and the evolved Packet Data Gateway (ePDG), thereby freeing the resources previously used by the wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU). A release acknowledgement is sent from the serving gateway to the PCRF confirming the policy update process is complete. The method may be used for handover between 3GPP and non-3GPP networks and vice versa. The method and apparatus may be practiced over the S | 12-25-2008 |
20080316973 | Method and Apparatus for Supporting a Handover Using an Interactive Channel in a Dvb-H Cbms System - An apparatus and method for continuously providing a selected service being watched when a user moves out of a cell or network in a Digital Video Broadcasting-Handheld (DVB-H) Convergence of Broadcasting and Mobile Service (CBMS) system. Information required for a handover is provided to a terminal using an interactive channel. The handover for the terminal can be performed using a conventional scheme and an enhanced scheme even when the user moves to a new cell while watching the selected service. As the enhanced handover scheme is provided, the user can receive a seamless service. In a mobile environment, a handover scenario for the terminal can be efficiently provided. | 12-25-2008 |
20080316974 | VERTICAL HANDOFF - Methods, Mobile Node and Mobility Access gateway for enabling vertical handoff of the Mobile Node between a first and second network interfaces using a pad translator. | 12-25-2008 |
20090003277 | System, Method and Computer Program Product for Providing Increased Bandwidth in a Broadband Wireless Communication System - A system, method and computer program product is described that facilitates the provision of increased bandwidth in a broadband wireless communication system, such as a WiMAX communication system, by initiating and performing a hot handover of an active mobile communication session from a first base station to a second base station. The first base station may be a low-capacity base station and the second base station may be a high-capacity base station. The hot handover occurs even in instances where the mobile station is receiving a stronger signal from the first base station than the second base station. The hot handover is initiated by an entity separate from the mobile station. This entity makes the handover decision based upon inputs from the broadband wireless communication network and optionally from overlay Operations Support System (OSS) and/or Business Support System (BSS) components. | 01-01-2009 |
20090003278 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF COMMUNICATING WITH A FIRST AND SECOND NETWORK BY A COMMUNICATION DEVICE - The invention relates to a system and method for maintaining a first connection to a first network and a second connection to a second network by a communication device. The method comprises: conducting a first activity to maintain or establish the first connection in a series of spaced, timed segments, such that the segments represent a timeframe of an original activity that would span a continuous period that would cause a transmission conflict with the second connection; and conducting a second activity for the second network only between two of consecutive segments of the series of segments. The first network may be a 802.11-class network; the first activity may be a beacon scan for a channel of the 802.11-class network; the second network may be a Bluetooth network; and the second activity may be transmission of an Advanced Audio Distribution Profile data to a second device through the Bluetooth network. | 01-01-2009 |
20090003279 | Method and Apparatus For Dynamically Creating and Updating Base Station Neighbor Lists - The invention includes a method and apparatus for creating a base station neighbor list at a target base station in a wireless network including a plurality of base stations. A method includes obtaining information for creating the base station neighbor list, creating the base station neighbor list using the obtained information, and storing the base station neighbor list. The obtained information includes at least one of geographic locations of ones of the base stations, network status information associated with the wireless network, and pilot signal strength measurement feedback information. The base station neighbor list includes a subset of the base stations of the network. The base stations of the base station neighbor list may be prioritized using at least a portion of the obtained information. The base station neighbor list may be updated periodically, or in response to changes to the obtained information. The base station neighbor list is distributed from the base station to wireless user devices served by the base station for use by the wireless user devices in making handoff decisions. | 01-01-2009 |
20090003280 | Packet Transfer Control Method, Communication Message Processing Method, Access Router, and Mobile Terminal - There is disclosed a technique for eliminating buffer and transfer of a packet which is not required for an MN in a handover mechanism in which a packet to be sent to the MN performing handover is buffered and the buffered packet is supplied to the MN after the handover. According to the technique, before the handover, a mobile terminal (MN) ( | 01-01-2009 |
20090003281 | Location context service handoff - A location service providing system and method for repeatedly providing a location service. | 01-01-2009 |
20090003282 | LEARNING-BASED SEMI-PERSISTENT SCHEDULING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Systems and methods are provided for a learning-based determination of semi-persistent scheduling of data-packet flow wireless communication. A packetized data flow served to a wireless terminal is fully scheduled for an initial period of time in order to collect statistics associated with scheduled packet sizes (Ss) and inter-packet times (Ts). Analysis of a cumulative distribution of {S, T} pairs indicate whether a characteristic packet size (S | 01-01-2009 |
20090003283 | RE-USING SEQUENCE NUMBER BY MULTIPLE PROTOCOLS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Techniques for re-using sequence number by multiple protocols in a protocol stack are described. In one design, at least one protocol data unit (PDU) from a first protocol may be received as at least one service data unit (SDU) at a second protocol, with each PDU being assigned a different sequence number by the first protocol. A sequence number for each SDU may be determined based on a sequence number for a corresponding PDU from the first protocol. A PDU may be formed by the second protocol based on the at least one SDU. A header may be generated for the PDU and may include (i) the sequence number and possibly a segment offset for the first SDU and (ii) a header block for each remaining SDU, which may include a segment length, a sequence number offset, and a segment offset for that SDU. | 01-01-2009 |
20090010222 | VoWLAN ROAMING CONTROLLER WITH STATION PRE-AUTHENTICATION - A method of triggering handoff of a mobile station to a candidate BSS, for VoWLAN communication, uses a roaming controller for monitoring link qualities of the serving and candidate BSS by selective/controlled fast scanning through RSSI screening at each packet reception. Using link qualities, a list of candidate BSSs for handoff is maintained. The controller selects a candidate BSS for handoff and completes pre-authentication of the mobile station with the selected best candidate BSS. When the link quality of the of the selected candidate BSS becomes better than that of the serving BSS, handoff is triggered. Link qualities may be monitored by screening a metric other than RSSI. When no candidate BSS is found, scanning is reduced/temporarily interrupted, to conserve power. When the serving BSS link quality is above a given threshold when the mobile station is in the serving BSS center, the functions of fast scanning and pre-authentication are interrupted. | 01-08-2009 |
20090010223 | Communication Management Method and Communication Management Device - The avoidance of congestion between a mobile node (MN) and an access router (AR), connected to each other through radio communication, is achieved by reducing the volume of information to be transmitted between the MN and the AR. In particular, for the purpose of realizing the reduction of the information volume to be transmitted between a mobile router (MR) and an access router and the avoidance of congestion, an MR | 01-08-2009 |
20090010224 | CHANNEL DEPENDENT CREDIT ACCUMULATION FOR MOBILE HANDOVER - Channel dependent credit accumulation for determining a mobile handover is provided herein. In some aspects, a characteristic(s) of a source channel(s) serving a mobile device and of one or more target channels can be evaluated. Magnitudes of the evaluated characteristics can be utilized to generate handover credits associated with the target channel(s) (e.g., based on some function of a difference in the magnitudes). If a concurrent number of credits associated with a target channel equals or rises above one or more threshold levels, a mobile device can initiate a handover. As described, disparity in source and target channel quality, signal strength, etc., can be determined to increase probability of a handover based on channel degradation over one or more time intervals. | 01-08-2009 |
20090010225 | Methods and Apparatus for RF Handoff in a Multi-Frequency Network - Methods and apparatus for RF handoff in a multi-frequency network. In an aspect, a method includes generating a content preserving handoff table that includes a current LOI and neighboring LOIs carrying at least the same wide and local content multiplexes as the current LOI, and determining that handoff conditions are met for a content preserving handoff, selecting a selected LOI from the content preserving handoff table and a selected RF channel associated with the selected LOI, and performing a handoff to the selected RF channel in the selected LOI if the selected LOI is different than the current LOI. An apparatus includes means for generating a content preserving handoff table, means for determining that handoff conditions are met for a content preserving handoff, means for selecting a selected LOI and a selected RF channel, and means for performing a handoff to the selected RF channel in the selected LOI. | 01-08-2009 |
20090010226 | Communication Terminal, Access Point Switching Method, and Access Point Switching Control Program - [Subject] To realize optimum handover in consideration of not only reception environment of a communication terminal itself but also situations on the other party of communication. | 01-08-2009 |
20090016296 | POWER OPTIMIZED STATION CONNECTION MANAGER IN IEEE 802.11 TYPE STATIONS - A method of managing a mobile station (e.g., IEEE 802.11 station) having a serving BSS, uses a station connection manger and initially maintains a default idle stable state with minimum power to receive incoming calls. While idle, the station periodically polls and scans a detected BSS (Access Point) to detect messages using DTIM (Delivery Traffic Indication Message). A null frame sent, triggers corresponding frame transmission at an Access Point. If the null frame is acknowledged, the station switches to the active state until end of packet exchange. With no null frame acknowledged, scanning is resumed to update a BSS list prior to joining a newly found BSS via authentication and association states. When no candidate BSS is found, a time out period is used before next polling. After the last message frame is transmitted, the station resumes the default idle state. The station manager conserves battery power in the station. | 01-15-2009 |
20090016297 | HARD HANDOVER PROTOCOL TO ACHIEVE EARLY MAC READINESS - A technique to reduce the service disruption time of a mobile station (MS) when the MS performs a hard handover (HHO) is provided. An MS receives MAC context information that is necessary to connect to the target base station (BS) through the serving BS during the HHO preparation time instead of HHO execution time. The HHO preparation phase refers to the stage where a handover is initiated but the MS is still connected with the current serving BS. On the other hand, once the HHO execution begins, the MS must disconnect from the serving BS in order to establish the communication with the target BS. | 01-15-2009 |
20090016298 | COMMUNICATION HANDOVER METHOD AND COMMUNICATION MESSAGE PROCESSING METHOD - A technique is disclosed whereby a mobile communication apparatus (MN) having a plurality of interfaces (IFs) performs fast handovers (FMIP) and changes a packet transfer destination using its own multiple IFs, so that packet transmission/reception using an appropriate IF for the MN is enabled. According to this technique, an MN | 01-15-2009 |
20090016299 | WIRELESS SYSTEM, BASE STATION AND MOBILE STATION - Disclosed herewith is a wireless system capable of reducing packet sending delay occurrence and packet sending delay jittering at the time of hand-over processing executed therein. In the wireless system, upon estimating occurrence of a hand-over event, a subject mobile station and its base station extend the packet buffering period respectively and furthermore, the base station changes the current burst scheduling method for another. The base station and the mobile station then exchanges messages required to execute the hand-over procedure in a period between when sending of a burst ends and when sending of the next burst begins. | 01-15-2009 |
20090016300 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FAST INTER-SYSTEM HANDOVER - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate inter-system handover in a wireless communication system. Various aspects described herein provide for handover techniques that enable a target system to be prepared by a mobile device via a source system in order to minimize specific changes required to source system and/or target system. Techniques are described herein in which the radio link of a source system can be utilized to tunnel signaling messages which are in a format understood by a destination node in a target system. Further, fast inter-access handover can be facilitated by establishing a simple generic transmission tunnel between respective network nodes in source and target systems that handle intra-system mobility and providing a Layer 2 (L2) tunneling mechanism over the radio interface of each involved system technology. | 01-15-2009 |
20090016301 | PACKET DATA CONVERGENCE PROTOCOL OPERATIONS - The application discloses techniques for determining where to locate and how to fit the duplicate detection functionality within the PDCP architecture as well as determining when to activate or deactivate various PDCP functions, such as the PDCP reordering function. These mechanisms can be implemented in wireless devices such as a WTRU, or in any wireless network nodes. | 01-15-2009 |
20090016302 | OPTIMIZED MOBILITY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES USING PRE-REGISTRATION TUNNELING PROCEDURES - A method and apparatus for optimizing mobility management procedures comprises establishing a tunnel between a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) and a target system core network (CN). The WTRU is handed over from a source system CN system to the target system CN. | 01-15-2009 |
20090016303 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING SOFTER HANDOVER IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is a method of performing softer handover in a broadband wireless communication system. The method includes granting identification numbers to neighbor antennas around a mobile station currently performing communication, and transmitting a neighbor base station advertisement message including the identification numbers of the neighbor antennas, receiving a handover request message including an identification number of a particular antenna from the mobile station, determining if the particular antenna is located within a current coverage area of the base station, and adding the particular antenna to a diversity set and notifying information on multiple antennas included in the diversity set to the base station when the particular antenna is located within the current coverage area of the mobile station; multicasting an identical frame to the multiple antennas included in the diversity set and receiving a handover indication message from the mobile station. | 01-15-2009 |
20090022103 | DUAL-MODE DEVICE AND METHOD FOR HANDOVER OF SESSION FROM VOIP INTERFACE TO CELLULAR INTERFACE - A method and dual-mode device for handing over an active call from the device's VoIP interface to its cellular interface. The active call is placed on hold and a second call is established from the VoIP interface to the cellular interface of the dual-mode device, wherein the second call includes a VoIP leg from the VoIP interface of the dual-mode device to a communications server. The remote device involved in the VoIP call is then instructed to initiate a new call to the communications server referencing the second call and causing the communications server to replace the VoIP leg of the second call with the new call, thereby joining the remote party to the second call connected to the cellular interface of the dual-mode device. The active call is then terminated. | 01-22-2009 |
20090022104 | METHOD OF ESTABLISHING AN HRPD SIGNAL LINK | 01-22-2009 |
20090022105 | SYSTEM FOR MANAGING SERVICES OF WiMAX BASE STATIONS - A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, a Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMAX) base station having a wireless transceiver, and a controller to manage the wireless transceiver. The controller can direct a communication device requesting wireless access to another WiMAX base station upon determining that granting wireless access to the communication device reduces an operating performance of the WiMAX base station below its operating threshold. Additional embodiments are disclosed. | 01-22-2009 |
20090022106 | CROSSOVER NODE DETECTION METHOD AND CROSSOVER NODE DETECTION PROGRAM FOR CAUSING COMPUTER TO EXECUTE THE METHOD - There is disclosed a technique that provides a crossover node detection method, etc., that enables a mobile node that performs a handover to quickly find a CRN, so that, after the handover is completed, the mobile node can still receive quickly and continuously additional service that was received before the handover. This technique includes the steps of: a mobile node | 01-22-2009 |
20090022107 | COMPRESSION STATIC AND SEMI-STATIC CONTEXT TRANSFER - Systems, methodologies, and devices are described that facilitate transferring a subset of compression context from a source base station to a target base station during an inter-base station handover of a mobile device to facilitate establishment of compression context between the mobile device and target base station. The source base station can transfer a subset of compression context comprising static and semi-static context to the target base station during inter-base station handover to at least partially establish compression context between the mobile device and target base station prior to or during handover. The source base station can transmit, to the mobile device, indicator information related to compression context transferred. The target base station can at least partially establish compression context based on received subset of compression context to facilitate efficient communication with the mobile device and can establish any remaining portion of compression context with the mobile device after handover. | 01-22-2009 |
20090028110 | Seamless Establishment and Maintenance of Network Connections for Mobile Applications - This invention provides a seamless mobile connection system that can maintain connectivity as a cell phone's Internet protocol changes due to changes in its user's location. This system can operate with multiple applications on a cell phone, and achieves Internet connectivity through a 3G IP based network. This invention solves the seamless mobility problem where network connectivity is lost due to changes in network settings produced by changes in a user's location. | 01-29-2009 |
20090028111 | NODE B AND RNC ACTIONS DURING A SERVING HSDPA CELL CHANGE - An apparatus and method in accordance with the present invention reduce the amount of data that is stalled in a source Node B after a serving HS-DSCH cell change in a communication system that includes a serving RNC and at least one Node B. In a first embodiment, the RNC temporarily suspends data transmissions from the RNC to the Node B. In a second embodiment, the activation time is used in data scheduling. In a third embodiment, a more robust MCS level is selected. In a fourth embodiment flow control is employed for the data transmitted between the RNC and the Node B. | 01-29-2009 |
20090034469 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SEARCHING TARGET CELL BY USING MULTIMODE-MULTIBAND TERMINAL IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION ENVIRONMENT - Disclosed is a method for searching for a target cell by using a multimode-multiband terminal in mobile communication environments, in which a mobile communication system improves a handover success rate and communication quality by reducing time required for searching for the target cell, the mobile communication system including a CDMA-2000 system and a WCDMA system, the CDMA-2000 system including a base-station transmission system and a base station controller and providing a CDMA-2000 service to a terminal requesting access, the WCDMA system including an RTS and an RNC and providing a WCDMA service to the terminal requesting the access. The method including: (a) receiving WCDMA signals transmitted from the WCDMA system through a WCDMA modem in order to measure an E | 02-05-2009 |
20090034470 | FORWARDING BROADCAST/MULTICAST DATA WHEN WIRELESS CLIENTS LAYER 3 ROAM ACROSS IP SUBNETS IN A WLAN - In a network comprising a first subnet comprising a first WLAN associated with a home wireless switch a second subnet comprising a second WLAN associated with a first current wireless switch and a third subnet comprising a third WLAN associated with a second current wireless switch, methods are provided for forwarding a Broadcast/Multicast (BCMC) packet generated by a first wireless client device when the first wireless client device roams from the first subnet to the second subnet and a second wireless device roams from the first subnet to the third subnet. Other methods are provided for forwarding a BCMC packet generated by a wired host to a first wireless client device when the first wireless client device roams from the first subnet to the second subnet and to a second wireless device when the second wireless device roams from the first subnet to the third subnet. | 02-05-2009 |
20090034471 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR HANDOFF BETWEEN WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method and system for operating a standalone client in a dual-mode mobile communications device to hand off a call between first and second wireless networks operating under different communications protocols, using SIP and ISUP signaling. | 02-05-2009 |
20090034472 | System and Method for Handing Over Sessions Between Networks - A system comprising a component to assign a unique session identifier to each of a plurality of sessions between a wireless device and a correspondent node. | 02-05-2009 |
20090034473 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING MOBILE TERMINAL AND HANDOVER CONTROL METHOD - A mobile communication system includes a plurality of base station apparatuses; and a mobile terminal configured to perform HSDPA (High Speed Downlink Packet Access) communication between the mobile terminal and the plurality of base station apparatuses. The mobile terminal has a receiving section configured to receive HS-SCCH (High Speed Shared Control Channel) signals from the base station apparatus as a source of handover and the base station apparatus as a destination of the handover at a same time. | 02-05-2009 |
20090034474 | Method and apparatus for dynamic adjustment of uplink transmission time - Systems and methods for dynamically adjusting the transmission time interval (TTI) for a communications system are presented. The described aspects provide for dynamically adjusting the TTI in a communication session between a base station or nodeB and a wireless device or user equipment between a shorter TTI, which can provide increased data throughput and lower power consumption, and a longer TTI, which can provide more rugged communication link connections. By dynamically adjusting the TTI, the communications link can be optimized for the given communication channel conditions. Determinations, based on indicia related to the communications system conditions, can be employed in dynamic TTI adjustment. These determinations can be formed centrally at the Radio Network Controller (RNC), at the RNC supplemented with user equipment (UE) available information, or formed in a distributed manner between the RNC and UE across a communications system. | 02-05-2009 |
20090034475 | Soft Handoff Using A Multi-Beam Antenna System - A method for providing soft handoff between antennas in a multi-antenna system is provided according to some embodiments of the disclosure. A first packetized digital data stream may be received from a satellite using a first antenna and the data stream may include a plurality of packets that each include a header and data. The data may be provided, forwarded or stored in memory. In the meantime, a second packetized digital data stream is monitored. The second packetized digital data stream may be received from the satellite using a second antenna. The phase difference between the first packetized digital data stream and the second packetized digital data stream may be determined and added or subtracted from the second packetized digital data stream. The second packetized digital data stream may then be provided, forwarded or stored in memory. | 02-05-2009 |
20090034476 | PACKET DATA CONVERGENCE PROTOCOL PROCEDURES - Method and an apparatus for activating a packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) reordering in a wireless transmit receive unit (WTRU) which receives a handover command message, resets a radio link control (RLC) entity of the WTRU, collects a PDCP sequence number (SN) and a range of the SN of out-of-sequence service data units (SDUs), reports the PDCP SN to a radio resource control (RRC) layer of the WTRU, transmits a handover confirm message along with a first unacknowledged PDCP SN uplink (UL), and activates the PDCP reordering based on the PDCP-SN-UL is disclosed. The WTRU includes PDCP entity including a control plane (C-plane) and a user plane (U-plane). Also, a robust header compression (RoHC) entity, a user ciphering entity, and an entity for the user plane data/control is also described. | 02-05-2009 |
20090034477 | TERMINAL DEVICE AND METHOD FOR USE IN MEDIA ACCESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Terminal devices F and G store statistical information related to interference from an external communication system, and notify the stored statistical information to a master station E. The master station E determines the terminal device G as a candidate station for a master station capability handover destination based on collected statistical information. The master station E requests to hand over a master station capability to the terminal device G. If it is determined that the terminal device G accepts handover of the master station capability, the terminal device G starts to act as the master station. | 02-05-2009 |
20090034478 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DISTRIBUTING DATA TO A MOBILE DEVICE USING PLURAL ACCESS POINTS - A system and method for providing connectivity between mobile devices and access points of a network without redundant solicitation of communication by the mobile device at each access point is described. The method involves receiving a data packet at a first access point in a control group; transmitting the data packet from the first access point to the mobile device; determining if the mobile device acknowledges receipt of the data packet; responsive to determining that the mobile device failed to acknowledge receipt of the data packet, forwarding the data packet to a second access point; and transmitting the data packet from the second access point to the mobile device. | 02-05-2009 |
20090040981 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR IN-ORDER DELIVERY OF DATA PACKETS DURING HANDOFF - Methods, apparatus, systems and computer program products are defined that provide for in-order deliver of data packets during hand-off. The aspects provide for in-order delivery at Forward Link Serving eBS/Data Attachment Point (FLSE/DAP) switch and Reverse Link Serving eBS/Data Attachment Point (RLSE/DAP) switch. As such, present aspects provide for significant improvement in the throughput of applications, such as applications relying on Transmission Control Protocol (TCP), during handoff, in such networks as Ultra Mobile Broadband (UMB) and the like. | 02-12-2009 |
20090040982 | Handover In A Wireless Data Packet Communication System That Avoid User Data Loss - An apparatus, method, processor(s), and computer program product avoids user data loss by network-controlled, user equipment assisted handover in a wireless data packet communication system. A wireless receiver receives radio link control (RLC) packet data units (PDUs) from user equipment (UE) being served by a source node. A wireless transmitter commands the UE to handover. A network communication interface transmits RLC Uplink (UL) context from the source node to the target node, and transmits RLC Downlink (DL) initialization message and buffered in-transit DL RLC PDUs from the source node to the target node. | 02-12-2009 |
20090040983 | Apparatus and method for managing quality of service of service flow in wireless communication system - An apparatus and method for managing quality of service (QoS) of a service flow in a wireless communication system are provided. A method of operating a base station (BS) in a wireless communication system includes receiving QoS policy information of mobile stations (MSs) from a network entity including a policy decision function (PDF) or from neighbor BSs, and storing the QoS policy information; detecting a mobile station attempting connection re-establishment; upon detecting the mobile station attempting connection re-establishment, evaluating a QoS policy of the mobile station; and controlling a state of a service flow generated for the mobile station according to the QoS policy. | 02-12-2009 |
20090046654 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND HANDOVER METHOD - A wireless communication apparatus capable of shortening the handover time and preventing the connection from being interrupted during telephone communication. In this apparatus, an HO part ( | 02-19-2009 |
20090046655 | Mobility Mechanism for Service Continuity - A system comprising an inter-RAT/inter-network redundancy controller (IRC) is provided. The IRC is configured to communicate with a source gateway in communication with a source radio access network (RAN) using a first radio access technology (RAT). The IRC is further configured to communicate with a target gateway in communication with a target RAN using a second RAT. The IRC is further configured to promote a handover of a user equipment from the source RAN connected to the source gateway to the target RAN connected to the target gateway when the source gateway fails. | 02-19-2009 |
20090046656 | DELIVERY OF HANDOVER COMMAND - A delta configuration is transmitted to a UE requesting a handover wherein the delta configuration details changes that are required for the current UE configuration in order to execute the handover. The handover is initiated via a measurement report transmitted to a currently serving source eNode B from the UE. The measurement report can comprise one or more of current radio conditions, current UE configuration or a preferred target eNode B if the handover is a inter eNode B handover. In a inter eNB handover, the current UE configuration is forwarded to the preferred target eNode B by the source eNode B. The target eNode B generates the delta configuration and transmits it to the source eNode B in a transparent container which is subsequently forwarded to the UE. | 02-19-2009 |
20090046657 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING MESSAGES IN COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A method of transmitting messages for acquisition of information related to a specific network entity or a link network during network selection in a mobile terminal is disclosed. The method of transmitting messages for acquisition of information related to a network entity or a link network during network selection in a mobile terminal comprises generating, in an upper management entity, a first primitive for requesting information related to the network entity or the link network through an access point (AP), delivering the first primitive to a media access control (MAC) layer, transmitting a first request message including contents of the first primitive to the access point to request the information, receiving a second response message from the access point, the second response message including information related to the specific network entity or the link network, and delivering a third primitive from the MAC layer to the upper management entity, the third primitive including contents of the second response message. | 02-19-2009 |
20090046658 | HANDOFF AT AN AD-HOC MOBILE SERVICE PROVIDER - An ad-hoc service provider is configured to support pre-authentication with a server for the purpose of receiving a handoff of a mobile client from another ad-hoc service provider. The ad-hoc service provider is further configured to enable the mobile client to maintain a session with the server while receiving the handoff from said another ad-hoc service provider. | 02-19-2009 |
20090046659 | Message transfer for in-band signaling messages in radio access networks - A method and apparatus for handling in-band signaling messages in radio access networks is provided. The method and apparatus may setup a logical channel, where the logical channel provides packet data control protocol in-band signaling for radio bearers, provide a unique logical channel identifier for the logical channel, receive a packet with a logical channel identifier tag and identify a packet data unit of the packet as a signaling packet data unit. | 02-19-2009 |
20090046660 | Handover method and apparatus in a wireless telecommunications network - According to an aspect of the invention, a method for handover of a mobile terminal from a source node to a target node in a wireless telecommunications network includes the steps of making data forwarding of fresh data optional irrespective of the RLC mode, which may involve RLC-UM or RLC-AM bearers. | 02-19-2009 |
20090046661 | Handover method and apparatus in a wireless telecommunications network - In handover in a wireless telecommunications network, dummy packets, or data packets with a last used sequence number indicator are transmitted from a source node eNB | 02-19-2009 |
20090046662 | Handover Method and apparatus in a wireless telecommunications network - In handover in a wireless telecommunications network, dummy packets, or data packets with an indicator bit, are transmitted from a gateway node MME/SAE GW | 02-19-2009 |
20090046663 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR WIRELESS NETWORK CONNECTIVITY - Methods and apparatus which allow a wireless terminal ( | 02-19-2009 |
20090046664 | PACKET TRANSFER CONTROL DEVICE AND MOBILE NODE - A technique is disclosed, by which it is possible to perform retransmission control of a packet effective for a mobile node in a home agent. According to this technique, after being intercepted, among the packets encapsulated and transmitted and addressed to MN | 02-19-2009 |
20090052392 | RETRANSMISSION CONTROL METHOD, BASE STATION AND MOBILE STATION - A base station, a mobile station and a retransmission control method for enabling communication to be more efficiently performed. In a communication system comprising a base station ( | 02-26-2009 |
20090052393 | METHOD FOR SECURE TRANSFER OF DATA TO A WIRELESS DEVICE FOR ENABLING MULTI-NETWORK ROAMING - Disclosed is a method for secure transfer of data for enabling roaming of the wireless device between a plurality of wireless networks. The wireless device data from an authentication server via a first channel. The authentication server sends the request for the data to an information server using a second channel. The information server generates the data bases on parameters of the wireless device and provides the data to the wireless device through the authentication server. The secure transfer of data to the wireless device enables roaming of the wireless device in a plurality of wireless networks. | 02-26-2009 |
20090052394 | HIERARCHICAL MODULATION REVERSE LINK INTERFACE NODE PROVIDING MULTIPLE SERVICE LEVELS - A wireless communication device transmits a hierarchically modulated reverse link (RL) WWAN signal comprising a lower modulation order component corresponding to first service level data and a higher modulation order component corresponding to second service level data. An interface node receives and demodulates the hierarchical modulated signal to recover second service level data. The interface node sends second service level data to a recipient. | 02-26-2009 |
20090052395 | Femto-BTS RF access mechanism - Femto cells that extend mobile network coverage into customer premises operate in a frequency band typically assigned to a macro network. As disclosed, to facilitate system discovery and registrations of mobile stations with femto cells, a carrier designates one the channels within the band as a primary channel for its femto cells. For example, neighbor list messages transmitted by macro network base stations can provide frequency and PN code information directing mobile stations to search the primary channel for a PN code of the femto cells. Also, a mobile station PRL may identify femto cells by SID/NID. The SID is that of the carrier's macro network, whereas the NID may be a NID of the macro network or one specifically assigned to femto cell operations. The PRL uses frequency acquisition information for the femto cells that is the same as or similar to that for one of the macro networks. | 02-26-2009 |
20090052396 | Telecommunication System and Method for Controlling Switching of User Terminal Between Two Networks - A user terminal is switched between a cellular network and a worldwide interoperability for microwave access radio network within a telecommunication system. An authentication, authorization and accounting (AAA) server which is designed for use with both of these networks is disposed in the telecommunication system in such a way that user data of the user terminal stored in the AAA server can be accessed from both of these networks, thereby advantageously ensuring uninterrupted switching between the two networks free of loss. | 02-26-2009 |
20090052397 | OPTIMIZING IN-ORDER DELIVERY OF DATA PACKETS DURING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION HANDOVER - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate processing service data units (SDU) in-order during communication handover in wireless networks. In particular, for mobile devices using re-transmission schemes, SDUs can be processed in-order by indicating to a target base station an index of a last SDU received in-order before handing off communication to the target base station. Additionally, SDUs received subsequent to one or more non-acknowledged SDUs can be forwarded to the target base station. Utilizing this information, the target base station can determine one or more SDUs the mobile device is preparing to re-transmit and can wait for this SDU before processing subsequently received SDUs. Also, a timer can be utilized to end a waiting period for the SDU. | 02-26-2009 |
20090052398 | METHOD OF PERFORMING A HANDOVER - The invention concerns a method of performing a handover ( | 02-26-2009 |
20090052399 | System, Method and Computer-Readable Medium for Provisioning Dual-Homed Voice Call Continuity - A system, method and computer-readable medium for concurrent support of Voice Call Continuity (VCC) capabilities in both the enterprise space and the carrier space are provided. The enterprise VCC functionality is used when the user is located in the enterprise domain which does not impact the carrier's network while the carrier VCC capability is used when the user is located in the carrier domain to support seamless handover between the wireless networks that the carrier may offer. The carrier VCC anchoring point and the enterprise VCC anchoring point may communicate with each other to confirm and inform the other anchoring point that a call handover is occurring or will occur. | 02-26-2009 |
20090052400 | REPAIRING ERRORS IN DATA OF MBMS SERVICE - In order to guarantee service quality for a terminal for a particular point-to-multipoint service, a broadcast or multicast radio terminal system is characterized in that after the corresponding session is complete, information regarding the data that the terminal did not properly receive is informed to the UTRAN, and then the corresponding data is received upon re-transmission from the UTRAN. | 02-26-2009 |
20090052401 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION CONTROLLER, MOBILE DEVICE, HANDOVER CONTROL METHOD, AND PROGRAM - The present invention provides a mobile communication system which can perform handover without deleting user data in an HSDPS system. | 02-26-2009 |
20090052402 | TECHNIQUE FOR CONFIGURING LINK LAYER ENTITIES FOR A HANDOVER - A technique of configuring link layer entities for a handover is described. In a method embodiment, the technique includes receiving from a recipient of protocol data units a supplemental status report for an existing ARQ connection in context with an imminent handover, determining service data units corresponding to buffered protocol data units taking into account information included in the supplemental report, and transferring the determined service data units to a link layer entity which is to establish a new ARQ connection to the recipient. The forced status synchronisation that is based on the supplemental report prevents the transfer of service data units that have already been successfully received at the recipient. | 02-26-2009 |
20090059861 | BLIND HANDOVER USING LOAD COMPENSATED MEASUREMENTS - A method of initiating handover in a cellular radio system with CDMA access technology. A mobile station is present in a serving cell and handover should be made from a serving cell to a target cell. Before the handover is made the signal quality from the target cell is estimated. The mobile measures the signal quality, preferably Ec/Io of the pilot tone, from the serving cell. An RNC node calculates the estimated signal quality as a function of the measured signal quality, a load dependent quantity at the serving and target cells and decides to initiate the handover when the estimated signal quality at the target cell is better than a predefined minimum value or is better than the measured signal quality. As load dependent quantity the total output transmission powers P | 03-05-2009 |
20090059862 | Method for Efficient Delivery of Clustered Data Via Adaptive TCP Connection Migration - The present invention relates generally to a method for efficient I/O handling in a cluster-based architecture. According to one aspect, the invention enables efficient scheduling of TCP connection migrations within a cluster. According to another aspect, the invention enables I/Os performed as TCP handoff operations to coexist on the same TCP/IP connection with I/Os performed as remote operations. | 03-05-2009 |
20090059863 | Method and system of wireless communication for mobile voice data - The present invention relates to a method and a system of wireless communicating voice data. When wireless communicating voice data, there is no need to collect the related information of the voice data into a multiple voice packet. Therefore, the ratio of the voice data in the multiple voice packet is increased remarkably to improve the efficiency of the wave band of the wireless communication. This method and the system therefore will provide high speed VoIP voice hand-over capability such that when the handset end-user is in high speed moving condition, the voice package can hand-over from one base station to next base station. For low power system such as WiFi, this method and the system thereof provides the best voice mobility capability. | 03-05-2009 |
20090059864 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING MOBILITY IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING PROXY MOBILE INTERNET PROTOCOL - A system is provided for managing mobility of an Access Terminal (AT) in a Proxy Mobile Internet Protocol (PMIP) communication system. As the AT performs a handoff, a target Signaling Radio Network Controller (SRNC) delivers session information of the AT, acquired from a source SRNC of a source network, to a target Access Network (AN). An Authentication, Authorization and Accounting server (AAA) performs an AT access authentication process. Then, a target Access Gateway (AGW) performs a proxy registration procedure, with the target AN, and receives, from the AT, a message indicating a need to establish an interface with the HA. A Home Agent (HA) performs mobility management for the AT, receives a message for requesting proxy registration for mobility management for the AT, sends an access request message to the AAA, receives an access accept message, and sends a response message for proxy registration to the target AGW. | 03-05-2009 |
20090059865 | Seamless Handover Method and System - The present invention provides a communication system for performing the seamless handover of a mobile station between at least a first wireless access point and a second wireless access point within wireless LAN. The mobile station is in the coverage of at least the first wireless access point for receiving and/or sending the data from and/or to the first wireless access point. The system comprises a first server for storing data from a data source; a switch for exchanging the data between the first server and the first and second wireless access points; and a second server coupled to the switch, for receiving the data from the first server via a switch when the mobile station roams from one access point to another one, and transferring the stored data to the mobile station through the switch after the roaming. | 03-05-2009 |
20090059866 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR IMPLEMENTING FAST HANDOVER - A method, a system and an apparatus for fast handover, and relates to the field of mobile communication. The method is to create a fixed tunnel relationship between the PAR and the NAR, where a current host route of an MN at the access routers PAR and NAR is created; and the access routers (PAR and NAR) and the MN encapsulating a message according to the current host route information of the MN, and transferring the message through a tunnel. The apparatus includes a tunnel creating module, a host route creating module, a neighbor relationship creating module, and a transferring module. The technical solution under the present disclosure needs to create only one tunnel, which improves the router efficiency greatly and makes the handover process smoother. | 03-05-2009 |
20090067385 | Apparatus and method for obtaining information on neighbor network for vertical handover in a wireless communication system - A wireless communication system supporting Media Independent Handover (MIH) is provided. The system comprises an MIH Function (MIHF) for receiving an MIH query message requesting Layer-2 (L2) information from an MIHF of a neighbor network, and extracting the contents of the query from the MIH query message, a converter for transmitting a network specific request message which contains the contents of the query, and a point of attachment (PoA) for providing the L2 information which is requested by the network specific request message. | 03-12-2009 |
20090073933 | INTER-SYSTEM HANDOFFS IN MULTI-ACCESS ENVIRONMENTS - Systems and methods according to these exemplary embodiments provide for methods and systems for handing off user equipment between different access systems, e.g., a high rate packet data (HRPD) system and a long term evolution (LTE) system. Resources to be used in the target system can be allocated prior to breaking the serving radio connection to minimize “break before make” time associated with the handoff. | 03-19-2009 |
20090073934 | DYNAMIC COMPENSATION FOR RESOURCE STEALING IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A scheduler associated with a base station of a wireless communication network dynamically compensates for uplink bandwidth that has been re-assigned (stolen) by a mobile station (MS) to transmit a control message. The scheduler allocates a preset amount of bandwidth to the MS for data transmission. The scheduler detects bandwidth stealing activity and evaluates when bandwidth stealing is justified on he part of the MS. The scheduler provides additional bandwidth to appropriately compensate for the stolen bandwidth when bandwidth stealing is justified, in order to maintain the quality of service of the data traffic connection. | 03-19-2009 |
20090073935 | APPARATUS AND METHODS OF PMIPv6 ROUTE OPTIMIZATION PROTOCOL - A network component is provided. The network component is configured to receive a handover context from a first access network device. The network component is capable of sending a first proxy binding update message to a second access network device to initiate a proxy care-of test; receiving a care-of keygen token from the second access network device in response to the first proxy binding update. The network component is configured to send a second proxy binding update message in response to the care-of keygen token to the second access network device to initiate a complete proxy binding update exchange. The network component is configured to receive a proxy binding acknowledge (PBA) message from the second access network device to establish a direct route between the network component and the second access network device. | 03-19-2009 |
20090073936 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTER-TECHNOLOGY HANDOFF OF A USER EQUIPMENT - In order to facilitate a handoff of a communication session between a legacy circuit switched network and a packet data network such as a 3GPP LTE, 3GPP2 UMB, or WiMAX network, which communication session is anchored in an IMS Voice Call Continuity Application Server (VCC AS), a Circuit Switched Proxy (CS Proxy) is provided in the packet data network that communicates with a Mobile Switching Center (MSC) of the circuit switched network. The CS Proxy allows the packet data network to communicate with the VCC AS, the MSC to communicate with the packet data network, and the MSC to communicate with the VCC AS via the packet data network, thereby allowing an exchange of handoff-related information between the packet data network and the VCC AS, the packet data network and the circuit switched network, and the circuit switched network and the VCC AS via the packet data network. | 03-19-2009 |
20090073937 | Method, Apparatus And System For Obtaining MIH Service Information - A method, an apparatus and a system for obtaining a Media Independent Handover (MIH) service information. The method including: receiving an MIH service information request message from a mobile node; obtaining the MIH service information requested by the mobile node; and sending a response message to the mobile node, with the obtained MIH service information carried in the response message. | 03-19-2009 |
20090073938 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR OPTIMIZING CALL ANCHORING IN VOICE CALL CONTINUITY - The present invention provides a method and system for optimizing call anchoring in VCC, a VCC anchoring optimization function entity, and a routing control entity, with a view to correlating the call anchoring with the processing of a service potentially influential in anchoring a call. The method includes: the VAO function entity perceives the service information of a called party; and the VAO function entity optimizes the call anchoring when determining that the service subscribed to by the called party may affect anchoring of the current call. The present invention enables correlation between the call anchoring and the processing of the service influential in anchoring the call, and optimizes the call anchoring. | 03-19-2009 |
20090080381 | PACKET COMMUNICATION ROAMING METHOD AND SYSTEM - A method of roaming in a packet communication system during a call is disclosed. The method of roaming has a scanning process and a connection process. During the scanning process, one or more available access points (AP's) are scanned-for. The one or more available AP's are prioritized into a prioritized AP list based on at least one criterion in addition to a received signal strength indicator (RSSI). During the connection process, a decision is made to roam from an existing AP to a new AP. A connection is made to the new AP, wherein the new AP is selected from the prioritized AP list. Associated methods, systems, and data signals are also disclosed | 03-26-2009 |
20090080382 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTER-TECHNOLOGY HANDOFF OF A USER EQUIPMENT - In order to facilitate a handoff of a communication session between a legacy circuit switched network and a packet data network such as a 3GPP LTE, 3GPP2 UMB, or WiMAX network, which communication session is anchored in an IMS Voice Call Continuity Application Server (VCC AS), a Circuit Switched Proxy (CS Proxy) is provided in the packet data network that communicates with a Mobile Switching Center (MSC) of the circuit switched network. The CS Proxy allows the packet data network to communicate with the VCC AS, the MSC to communicate with the packet data network, and the MSC to communicate with the VCC AS via the packet data network, thereby allowing an exchange of handoff-related information between the packet data network and the VCC AS, the packet data network and the circuit switched network, and the circuit switched network and the VCC AS via the packet data network. | 03-26-2009 |
20090086674 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING VOICE CALL CONTINUITY - A method and system for providing circuit-switched to IP Multimedia Subsystem voice call continuity with a single radio are provided. The exemplary embodiment takes advantage of a standard RANAP signaling procedure called “directed retry” to perform a much better coordination between the change in radio mode and the transfer of the media path. With the use of “directed retry”, the transfer of the media path does not begin until the handover procedure is complete, thus significantly reducing the likely amount of media disruption. | 04-02-2009 |
20090086675 | Handover processing system in mobile communication system - A handover processing system in mobile communication system, implemented in gateway connected to subscriber network including base station in the mobile communication system, public network and IP network and accompanied by movement of radio terminal in the mobile communication system, wherein the gateway comprises line exchanger performing line exchange processing, VoIP connection unit controlling communication function to transmit/receive IP-packetized data to make communication and call control function for the VoIP communication function, handover detector determining whether or not call originating request from the base station is handover call, communication call detector determining whether or not communication source call of handover is present, call information storage unit storing call information, handover source call retriever retrieving handover source call in IP network, and handover processor taking over communication call from communication partner to continue the communication, and performing handover processing of VoIP communication call. | 04-02-2009 |
20090086676 | METHODS FOR INTRA BASE STATION HANDOVER OPTIMIZATIONS - The method and apparatus as described are directed toward techniques and mechanisms to improve efficiency in wireless communication networks through optimization of handover scenarios. Determining whether an intra-base station or inter-node-B handover is too performed, and determining the protocol layers to reset during the handover based at least in part on the type of handover to be performed increases the overall efficiency of the wireless network. | 04-02-2009 |
20090086677 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR IN-ORDER DELIVERY IN DOWNLINK DURING HANDOVER - Systems and methods that manage effects of discarded SDUs during handover. Aspects of the subject innovation maintain order for arrival of PDCP SDUs when a UE encounters a lost PDCP, which has resulted from a dropped SDU at the source eNB—before assignment of an associated PDCP SN. By initially assigning all SDUs corresponding PDCP SNs, a PDCP SN gap or hole can then be encountered upon dropping of a PDCP SDU. To manage PDCP SN gaps or holes thus generated, an internal time out can be designated to terminate an associated UE's delay for such SN hole(s) via a time out. Other aspects enable the source eNB to send a PDCP Status Message to the UE (via the target eNB) to abort the SN gaps or holes resulting from a dropped PDCP SN. | 04-02-2009 |
20090086678 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR FEEDING BACK LINK PARAMETER CONFIGURATION RESULT - A method for feeding back a link parameter configuration result includes the following steps. After receiving a configuration request for at least one link parameter from the higher layer to the lower layer, a media independent handover layer instructs the lower layer to perform link parameter configuration, and the lower layer returns the configuration result for each link parameter to the media independent handover layer after the link parameter configuration completes; the media independent layer receives the configuration result for each link parameter, and feeds back the configuration result for each link parameter to the higher layer. The method overcomes the disadvantages in the prior art, and achieves the objective that the configuration results are fed back accurately when configuration requests to a plurality of link parameters is brought up simultaneously and the configuration of some parameters is successful, failed, or rejected, thereby enabling the higher layer to obtain the accurate configuration results for link parameters. | 04-02-2009 |
20090086679 | Apparatus and method for supporting vertical handover on a wireless communication system - A broadband wireless communication system is provided. An apparatus for an information server (IS) comprises an event module for determining whether updating the network information of at least one access network (AN) is needed, a generator module for generating at least one Information_Get_Request packet for requesting the network information of the at least one AN when the updating is needed, a communication module for transmitting at least one Information_Get_Request packet to the at least one AN, and a database (DB) module for storing network information within an Information_Get_Response packet received from the at least one AN. | 04-02-2009 |
20090092093 | Handoff of dual mode mobile device between an IP network and a PLMN - A device and a method for handoff of a VoIP internet telephone call from an IP network to a cellular network and for hand-back of the call to the IP network, in which during or after hand-off of the call an identifier of the hand-off call is obtained and stored and the identifier is used during hand-back of the call to the IP network. | 04-09-2009 |
20090092094 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IDENTIFYING MOBILE NETWORK PROTOCOL CAPABILITIES - A method and apparatus for improving handover in an IEEE 802.21 compliant communication network. A query is transmitted from a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) to a media independent handover (MIH) server (MIHS). The WTRU includes a target point of attachment (PoA) and/or a preferred mobile inter protocol (MIP) method. The WTRU receives a response from the MIHS indicating the MIP method supported by the target PoA. Based on the received response, the WTRU may make an informed decision regarding handover. | 04-09-2009 |
20090092095 | COMMUNICATION METHOD, MOBILE AGENT DEVICE, AND HOME AGENT DEVICE - In a communication system including a MN, a MFA connected to the MN, and a HA connected to a home network of the MN, the HA holds a layer | 04-09-2009 |
20090092096 | AUTOMATIC PROVISIONING OF FEMTOCELL - Automatic provisioning of an access point base station or femtocell. The method may include the femtocell transmitting first information (e.g., location information, signal measurement information, capability information, etc.) to a service provider (e.g., over an IP network). The femtocell may receive second information from the service provider, where the second information includes one or more operational parameters. The operational parameters may include hand-off parameters, admission policy information, PN or scrambling codes, power parameters, and/or other parameters. The femtocell may operate according to the received parameters to provide access for a plurality of access terminals in a local area. | 04-09-2009 |
20090092097 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT IN A TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The described technology generally relates to method(s) and arrangement(s) for access control during relocation of a user equipment (UE) into a femto base station (FBS) and dynamic triggering of the relocation into the FBS. A white list is maintained in the UE. The white list includes information on a list of FBSs that the UE is allowed to relocate. The UE detects a target FBS and reports target FBS to a source macro base station (MBS). The source MBS makes a relocation request to a mobility controller. The mobility controller grants or denies the requests or allows the target FBS to make the decision. Upon grant, the UE is relocated to the target FBS. Otherwise, the white list is updated in the UE. | 04-09-2009 |
20090092098 | System and method for updating neighbor base station information in a communication system - A method is provided for updating neighbor base station (BS) information by a serving BS in a communication system. The method includes acquiring a neighbor BS list from a base station controller (BSC); sending a request message for requesting an update of information on a neighbor BS to the at least one neighbor BS included in the neighbor BS list; checking if a report message including the neighbor BS's information is received from the neighbor BS; when the report message is received, sending to the neighbor BS a confirm message indicating the normal receipt of the report message; and updating the neighbor BS's information according to the received neighbor BS's information. The neighbor BS list is a list of BSs with which a mobile station (MS) located in a cell of the serving BS can perform a handover. | 04-09-2009 |
20090092099 | Method and Apparatus of Shifting Functional Entity In Wimax Network - A method and apparatus for shifting functional entity in WiMAX network is disclosed. A functional entity at the network side is set to be master functional entity or slave functional entity. The method includes: setting a binding relationship between a master functional entity and at least one slave functional entity; triggering the master functional entity to shift, combining a context of the slave functional entity bound with the master functional entity and a context of the master functional entity to form a context message that is required by the master functional entity for the shift, and forwarding the context message according to the course of shifting the master functional entity. | 04-09-2009 |
20090097448 | Methods for idle registration and idle handoff in a femto environment - In a method for configuring a wireless network, a radio access network establishes a first color code for a femto subnet and a second color code for a macro subnet. The femto subnet includes a plurality of femto cells, and the macro subnet includes at least one macro cell. The macro subnet borders the femto subnet. The radio access network identifies the plurality of femto cells bordering the macro subnet, and assigns the established first and second color codes to the identified border femto cells, while assigning only the first color code to non-bordering femto cells. | 04-16-2009 |
20090097449 | METHOD FOR HANDOVER USING RELAY STATION - A method for controlling handover using a Relay Station (RS) whose coverage includes at least one mobile station is provided. In the method, the RS monitors an uplink band allocated to a mobile station and obtains a Connection ID (CID) and a Medium Access Control (MAC) address the mobile station. The RS transmits a scanning request message including the MAC address of the mobile station to a base station. The RS then receives a scanning response message including scanning timing and scanning interval information from the base station and scans neighbor base stations using the information included in the scanning response message. This method more efficiently performs handover of mobile stations in the RS coverage. | 04-16-2009 |
20090097450 | PROVIDING VOICE CALL CONTINUITY - The present disclosure includes a system and method for enhanced voice call continuity. A method includes receiving a request to handover a call session from a radio access network to an IP-CAN. The method further includes handing over the call session to the IP-CAN independent of an Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (IMS). | 04-16-2009 |
20090097451 | IDENTIFICATION OF TARGET NODE FOR WIRELESS HANDOFF - Identification of an access point to which an access terminal is to be handed-off involves, in some aspects, identifying one access point of a set of access points that may have been detected by an access terminal. For example, an access terminal may receive a signal having an identified characteristic (e.g., a particular phase offset) from an access point. Each access point of a set of access points associated with the identified characteristic may be directed to attempt to decode a signal from the access terminal. The access point of the candidate set to use for the handoff operation may then be determined based on the signal received from the access terminal, if any, by each of the candidate access points. | 04-16-2009 |
20090097452 | FEMTO CELL SYNCHRONIZATION AND PILOT SEARCH METHODOLOGY - A system, a method and computer product for synchronizing of a femto cell with a macro cell, the method comprising: placing a forward link receiver into the femto cell; receiving by a micro cellular network the femto cell transmission timing; and synchronizing the femto cell transmission timing with the macro cellular network transmission timing in reliance on the forward link receiver signal. Further, a system, a method and computer product for allocating pilot phases to femto cells, the method comprising: creating at least as many new potential pilot phases for femto cells as there are for macro cells; and allowing a mobile device on a macro cell to search and find a femto cell pilot without explicitly listing femto pilot phases in the neighbor list. | 04-16-2009 |
20090097453 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR FAST HANDOVERS USING DYNAMIC ROUTER ADVERTISEMENTS - The invention relates to a method for managing the movement of a mobile node from a first router in a first network to a second router in a second network, wherein the mobile node communicates with a corresponding node. In order to enable seamless communication between the mobile node and the corresponding node, the second router is dynamically configured by the first router to transmit a router advertisement message to the mobile node, the router advertisement message comprising a subnet prefix of an IP address of the mobile node, said subnet prefix belonging to the first network. A layer 3 link change as observed by the mobile node can be postponed and a default router of the mobile node can be changed to the new access router immediately after the layer 2 handover, thus enabling very fast handovers without requiring modifications to the mobile node implementations. | 04-16-2009 |
20090103489 | Arrangement and Method for Dual Mode Operation in a Communication System Terminal - An arrangement and method for discontinuous software FDD monitoring during TDD call allows removal of a conventional external notch filter in a dual mode WCDMA and PCS/DCS handset. The WCDMA RX frame is allowed to have a few slots corrupted by the PCS/DCS transmitter noise during DCS transmission, and a scheme is used to recover the required information by not considering the corrupted slots. Due to the fact that during WCDMA FDD RX monitoring, the processing required is performed in stages, and since the information that is measured during a WCDMA frame is repeated in every frame, the scheme of the invention is based on the idea that if a given slot is corrupted in a WCDMA frame, in the next WCDMA frame the slot will be no more corrupted due to the difference in timing between the PCS/DCS transmitter protocol and the WCDMA timing protocol. | 04-23-2009 |
20090103490 | Forwarding data path optimization in a distributed environment for achieving micro-mobility - A method and apparatus of updating a forwarding plane of a network element in response to receiving a mobility event is described. The network element receives a mobility message indicating a mobile node has coupled to a new access port associated with the network element. The message further indicates that the mobile node moved from an old access port to a new access port. The network element adds an entry in a forwarding table of the old egress engine to redirect a set of packets destined to the mobile node to a new egress engine, where the new egress engine is associated with the new access port. Furthermore, the network element redirects the set of packet from the old egress engine to the new egress engine. | 04-23-2009 |
20090103491 | LINK LAYER QUALITY OF SERVICE PARAMETER MAPPING - A detailed QoS parameter mapping of 3GPP QoS parameters to IEEE 802.21 MIH link QoS parameters. The detailed mapping includes an IEEE 802.21 Supported Number of Class of Service (CoS) parameter to indicate supported 3GPP QoS classes (conversational, streaming, interactive, and background). IEEE 802.21 MIH capable networks may use the detailed mapping to improve access-independent mobility management. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU), an access point, and other network infrastructure capable of performing the detailed QoS parameter mapping are also disclosed. | 04-23-2009 |
20090103492 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK BASE STATION EXTENSION - Apparatus and methods to permit the deployment of wireless base stations, where a deployed remote base station is backhauled to the core network over a wireless connection to an operatively attached donor base station using protocols that encapsulate backhaul communications within standard subscriber communication protocols. | 04-23-2009 |
20090103493 | Method and Apparatus of Handling Data Decryption for a Packet Data Convergence Protocol Layer in a Wireless Communication System - The present invention provides a method of handling data decryption for a Packet Data Convergence Protocol layer of a user equipment upon handover in a wireless communication system for increasing the validness of deciphering packages in the wireless communication system, which includes using a security variables corresponding to a source base station for deciphering the packets received from the source base station when the user equipment performs a handover procedure. | 04-23-2009 |
20090103494 | SOFT HANDOFF FOR OFDM - The present invention relates to soft handoffs in an OFDM system. Each mobile terminal measures pilot signal strengths of transmissions from adjacent base stations. If the pilot signal strength for a base station exceeds the defined threshold, that base station is added to an active set list. Each mobile terminal notifies the base stations of their active set lists. By providing the set list to the base station controller and the servicing base station, the mobile terminal identifies the sole servicing base station or triggers a soft handoff mode when multiple base stations appear on the active set list. The soft handoff mode uses a combination of scheduling and space-time coding to affect efficient and reliable handoffs. | 04-23-2009 |
20090103495 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR USER INITIATED INTER-DEVICE, INTER-SYSTEM, AND INTER-INTERNET PROTOCOL ADDRESS HANDOFF - Apparatus and method by which Internet Protocol (IP) traffic can be transferred (i.e. handoff) between two different terminals operating according to two different technology standards in two different systems with two different IP addresses. For example, a session handoff can be made between a terminal in Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) a terminal in a 3GPP UMTS or between a terminal in CDMA2000 and a terminal in a 3GPP UMTS. These terminals can be either physically separate entities or logical entities that are encapsulated within a common enclosure. | 04-23-2009 |
20090109921 | Content-Based Handover Method and System - A handover of a wireless communication device is performed between a first wireless band and a second wireless band when a detected feature occurs within a content stream being communicated with the wireless communication device. | 04-30-2009 |
20090109922 | METHOD OF INTEGRATING FEMTOCELLS IN A PACKET CABLE MULTIMEDIA ARCHITECTURE - The present invention provides a method for implementation in a cable modem termination system that is communicatively coupled to a first wireless access device configured to provide wireless connectivity to at least one mobile unit. The method includes receiving a request to allocate resources to the first wireless access device for a wireless connection to the mobile unit. The requested resources are determined based upon a quality of service associated with the mobile unit. The method also includes determining whether to grant the request for the resources based on policy information received from a policy server and providing information indicating whether the requested resources have been granted. | 04-30-2009 |
20090109923 | Base Station of Mobile Communication System - A base station of a mobile communication system which allocates a bandwidth for handover ranging or bandwidth request ranging in response to a code transmitted from a mobile station that is selected by the mobile station from a plurality of codes includes a ranging allocating unit configured to allocate, to a mobile station performing handover, at least one of a dedicated ranging code and a dedicated ranging slot that are exclusively used and not used by any mobile stations other than the mobile station, and that are provided separately for each of a plurality of base stations to which the mobile station is to be possibly connected. | 04-30-2009 |
20090109924 | PACKET COMMUNICATION METHOD, PACKET COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS TERMINAL, AND PACKET COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A packet communication system having a wireless terminal, a plurality of wireless access networks, and a packet communication device connected to the respective wireless access networks, that includes a unit controlling handover processing for handover of the wireless terminal to a different wireless access network. Also included is a unit checking whether a handover destination wireless access network supports a header compression or decompression method used in a first packet communication performed through a handover source wireless access network, at a time of the handover. Also included is a unit controlling an execution point for processing corresponding to the header compression or decompression method to be specified at the packet communication device for a second packet communication performed through the handover destination wireless access network, when the above network does not support the method. | 04-30-2009 |
20090109925 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND GATEWAY APPARATUS - A relay gateway apparatus HO-GW is provided between heterogeneous access networks (a WiMAX access network and a UMB access network). The HO-GW performs conversion of a movement control signal (an Inter-AGW handover control signal) and relay of communication data. When the relay is performed, user data from a CN reaches a wireless terminal MN through an HA of a core network, an access router ASN-GW, the HO-GW, and a base station eBS. | 04-30-2009 |
20090109926 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR IN-ORDER DELIVERY DURING HANDOFF USING A TIMER IN MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS - Systems and methods for managing packetized data handoff between base stations in a mobile communication system are described. In one aspect, a timer is utilized to decide when to perform path switch from serving traffic forwarded by the source station to traffic received by the serving gateway, and to preserve, to a large degree, the packet order from a gateway device to a terminal, during the handoff between base stations. When handoff is indicated, the timer is started and only packets that are received by the source base station is forwarded to the terminal, while the timer runs. When the timer expires, the target station switches to transmit fresh packets received from the serving gateway. The timer can be adjusted “on the fly” and has been demonstrated to maximize TCP throughput as compared to a fixed switch timer. | 04-30-2009 |
20090109927 | Method and apparatus for updating network information using mobile terminal - An apparatus for updating network information in wireless networks includes a control module for, when a media independent handover (MIH) mobile terminal connects to an access network in the wireless networks, judging whether the access network is managed by a media independent handover information service (MIIS) server. The apparatus further includes a collection module for collecting network information on the access network if the access network is not managed by the MIIS server, and a communication module for sending the collected network information to the MIIS server to update network information being managed by the MIIS server. | 04-30-2009 |
20090109928 | H.323 User, Service and Service Provider Mobility Framework for the Multimedia Intelligent Networking - The present invention provides a method and system for assuring H.323 alias address portability to an H.323 user in real-time H.323 multimedia communications where the H.323 user is registered with a home gatekeeper for the home zone of the H.323 user. Alias address portability may be obtained using a central database that is known to the administrative zones and is used for alias address mapping, or alternatively, may be obtained by using a distributed database. The method may be implemented by: sending, by the H.323 user, a message with a called H.323 entity's alias address, to the home gatekeeper to originate a call to the called H.323 entity; confirming that the alias address, services, and service providers are portable; converting the alias address to a called routable alias address for the called H.323 entity and sending the alias address to the H.323 user; and placing the call to the called H.323 entity. | 04-30-2009 |
20090116445 | ACTIVE HANDOFFS IN A NETWORK - Techniques for transferring a communication connection for a client device from a source network device to a target network device include receiving first and second sequence numbers and applying a first processing technique to data segments associated with sequence numbers that succeed the first and the second sequence numbers. | 05-07-2009 |
20090116446 | CROSSOVER NODE DETECTING METHOD, CROSSOVER NODE DETECTING PROGRAM FOR EXECUTING THAT METHOD BY USE OF COMPUTER, AND MOBILE TERMINAL AND RELAY APPARATUS USED IN CROSSOVER NODE DETECTING METHOD - The present invention provides a new technique on a crossover node detecting method and the like, by which a mobile terminal (mobile node) to perform a handover can quickly find out CRN so that the mobile terminal can quickly and continuously receive additional services, which the mobile node has been receiving before the handover, even after the handover. According to this technique, the crossover node detecting method comprises a step where a mobile node | 05-07-2009 |
20090116447 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR MOBILITY SUPPORT BETWEEN NETWORK DOMAINS - Described aspects provide for improving the mobility of wireless communication devices between one network domain and another network domain, specifically, but not limited to, between a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) and a cellular network and the like. Present aspects provide for services to be moved seamlessly and in a reliable manner between the cellular and WLAN domains in order to minimize service disruption for the end user and provide the requisite Quality of Service (QoS) for the different applications. The aspects herein presented provide for various mechanisms that serve to improve the decision points related to when and what technology each service is expected to be associated with and provides better techniques to move the wireless communication device between cellular and WLAN domains when in-traffic and when idle. | 05-07-2009 |
20090116448 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF CHANGING ACCESS POINT IN WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEM - An apparatus and method of changing an access point in a wireless network system is provided. The wireless network system includes a first access point existing on a wireless network, and a user terminal accessing the first access point. The first access point transmits information on a second access point, which is one of a plurality of access points accessible by the user terminal, to the user terminal, and the user terminal determines whether to access the second access point and accesses the second access terminal in accordance with the determination result. | 05-07-2009 |
20090116449 | CHANNEL TRANSMISSION METHOD AND BASE STATION - A channel transmission method of a base station used in a communication system employing orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) is disclosed. The channel transmission method includes the steps of selecting sectors where soft-combining is to be performed based on location information of a mobile station and/or the type of a channel to be transmitted; generating transmission signals each including a pilot signal for demodulation and data of the channel to be soft-combined and transmitting the generated transmission signals to the respective selected sectors; and causing the mobile station to receive and combine the transmission signals arriving from the selected sectors within a guard interval. | 05-07-2009 |
20090116450 | Method and apparatus for improving a mobile station cell change operation in the general packet radio system (GPRS) - A mobile station executed method, wherein upon changing from a current cell to a new cell in a wireless packet data network the mobile station enters the new cell; generates a cell change packet data unit (PDU) message for informing the network of the location of the mobile station in the new cell; buffers the cell change PDU message into a PDU transmit queue before any buffered PDUs that were present before the mobile station entered the new cell; and transmits the buffered cell change PDU before any of the buffered PDUs that were present before the mobile station entered the new cell. In accordance with another method for informing the wireless network of the MS cell change, the following steps are executed: (i) in response to the MS making access in a new cell, sending a Channel Request that indicates a Cell Update operation; (ii) establishing an uplink (UL) Temporary Block Flow (TBF) for transferring Logical Link Control (LLC) Packet Data Units (PDUs) from the MS to the network; (iii) in response to the network receiving an unknown Temporary Logical Link Identifier (TLLI) from the MS, sending a message to a Serving GPRS Support Node (SGSN) and (iv) based on the message, determining with the SGSN the new cell location of the MS. | 05-07-2009 |
20090116451 | MOBILE TERMINAL APPARATUS AND HAND-OFF METHOD THEREOF - A mobile terminal that ensures smooth, continuous communications sessions even when in transit, regardless of base station capabilities and functionalities, in a packet-switched data communications network. With this terminal, each of a plurality of lower interfaces | 05-07-2009 |
20090116452 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR A MOBILE NODE ROAMING IN AN IPv6 NETWORK - The present invention discloses an apparatus and method for a mobile node roaming in an Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) network. The apparatus includes a foreign home agent (FHA). The method includes: when a mobile node (MN) moves from an Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4) network to an IPv6 network, a FHA exchanges messages with the MN and the IPv4 home agent (HAv4) of the MN to register tunnels at the IPv6 network interface and the IPv4 network interface. The method further includes: the MN sends a Binding Update (BU) message that carries an IPv4 registration option of the MN, when the MN moves from the IPv4 network to the IPv6 network. With the present invention, the routing scheme for a dual-stack MN to roam from an IPv6 network to an IPv4 network is implemented. | 05-07-2009 |
20090116453 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING REGISTRATION OF MOBILE STATION AND GENERIC ACCESS NETWORK CONTROLLER - A method for controlling registration of an MS and a Generic Access Network Controller (GANC) is provided. The method includes a GANC receiving a registration message from an MS, when there is an ongoing service between the GANC and the MS, the GANC triggers a handover procedure, or the GANC does not respond to the registration message. The GANC includes a receiving unit, a transmitting unit, a determining unit adapted to determine whether a registration request message should be redirected according to current network condition and registration information of an MS, and a cont rolling unit adapted to instruct the message transmitting unit, according to the determined result to send a notification message to the MS instructing MS's corresponding operation. | 05-07-2009 |
20090122759 | Network-Based System and Method for Global Roaming - A system and method of mobile communication roaming where a subscriber's home network and a roaming network used by the subscriber do not have a roaming agreement. The roaming network sends a “Send Authentication/Parameters” request to the home network via an intelligent roaming system on or attached to the backbone. The home network sends an authentication response to the “Send Authentication/Parameters” request from the home network to the roaming network via the backbone and intelligent roaming system. The roaming network sends a “Update Location” request from the roaming network to the intelligent roaming system. The visitor locator register (VLR) address in the “Update Location” request is replaced with the VLR address of the intelligent roaming system to create a modified update request. The modified update request is sent from the intelligent roaming system to the home network. The home network sends an update response to the modified update request to the roaming network via the backbone and intelligent roaming system. | 05-14-2009 |
20090122760 | Method and Apparatus for Association Control in Mobile Wireless Networks - A method for association of a mobile terminal with an access point (AP) includes determining a set of available APs. The AP from among the available APs that has the coverage area that is likely to encompass the mobile terminal for the greatest period of time or distance is selected. The selected AP is associated with the mobile terminal. | 05-14-2009 |
20090122761 | Personalised Heterogeneous Network Handover Alert Scheme - A communications system comprising a plurality of local area networks (LAN) within a wide area network (WAN). The mode of communication used in said LANs differs from the mode of communication within said WAN. One of the LANs comprises a home LAN which is associated with a user identity (e.g. a subscriber for that LAN in the communications system). The user identity is directly or indirectly also associated with a wide area network. The invention provides a method of configuring an alert to devices operated by other user identities which have performed a handover operation either into or from said home network of the subscriber. The alert is configured by said subscriber (e.g., by a user identity of the home network) either as a default to all ‘visitors’ or in dependence on one or more of the other user identities. In this way, each user identity visiting the subscriber's home network receives an alert which is capable of being specific to the visitor. The subscriber may select the form of alert to be provided to another user based individually on the other user's identity in the communications network or for a group of users. The method thus enables alerts to distinguish different users or groups of users. The form of alert provided may over-ride any personal preferences configured for the mobile communications devices of the visiting users. | 05-14-2009 |
20090122762 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR HFN HANDLING AT INTER-BASE STATION HANDOVER IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - Systems and methods for addressing the de-synchronization of the cryptosync between the network and the mobile stations (eNB) that can occur at mobility are addressed. De-synchronization is resolved by forwarding HFN and PDCP Sequence Number(s) from the source eNB to the target eNB. In order to avoid re-use of a cryptosync for a given key, a backward offset from the initial COUNT value is used by the target eNB. These approaches do not require an over-the-air signaling and the COUNT value handling in the network is transparent to the mobile station. | 05-14-2009 |
20090122763 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL DEVICE AND METHOD - Included are a communication control device applied to a wireless communication system | 05-14-2009 |
20090129334 | Soft handoff in Ofdma system - The soft handoff in an OFDMA system. If the pilot signal strength for a base station exceeds the defined threshold, the base station is added to an active set list. Subcarriers in a plurality of orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols are divided and allocated into subchannels. The OFDM symbols are divided and multiplexed. A soft handoff zone with a first dimension of the subchannels and a second dimension of the divided and multiplexed OFDM symbols is defined. The soft handoff zone have subcarriers with a subchannel definition, for example, an identical permutation. | 05-21-2009 |
20090129335 | METHOD FOR HANDOVER IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus is provided to enable a network to more efficiently determine whether additional reverse links can be assigned. Various methods are presented that allow a network to determine either the transmission power or power headroom of a mobile terminal based on information that is provided at session startup and information provided periodically. The number of additional reverse links that can be assigned to the mobile can then be estimated from the transmission power and head-room of the mobile terminal. | 05-21-2009 |
20090129336 | SYSTEM, METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM FOR USER EQUIPMENT HANDOFF FROM A MACROCELLULAR NETWORK TO AN IP-FEMTOCELL NETWORK - A system, method, and computer readable medium for handoff of a user equipment from a macrocellular system to a femtocell system is provided. A micro-pilot assisted handoff routine may be implemented to facilitate handoff of a user equipment from a macrocellular system to a femtocell system. The femtocell system may transmit very low power pilot, paging, and synch channels on a common frequency used by the macrocellular system. In another embodiment, a mobile assisted handoff routine facilitates handoff of a user equipment from a macrocellular system to a femtocell system. The user equipment's preferred roaming list includes an entry for the femtocell system and specifies a SID/NID and pseudo-noise offset for the femtocell system. The user equipment is configured to periodically enter a search mode to attempt to locate the femtocell system by switching to a femto carrier that is specified in the preferred roaming list. | 05-21-2009 |
20090129337 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING PICONET COORDINATOR HANDOVER IN WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORK - Provided are a method and an apparatus for performing a piconet coordinator (PNC) handover in a wireless personal area network (WPAN) in which devices using various PHY transmission modes coexist. A device that enters the WPAN transfers information about its PHY transmission mode to the PNC through an association request message so that a problem that conventional services are not provided to a user in the WPAN due to a difference in PHY transmission modes of the devices during the PNC handover can be solved. | 05-21-2009 |
20090129338 | UTILIZING BROADCAST SIGNALS TO CONVEY RESTRICTED ASSOCIATION INFORMATION - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate transmitting access point types and/or restricted association parameters using broadcast signals, such as beacons, pilot signals, etc. The type or restricted association information can be indicated by one or more intrinsic aspects of the signal, such as specified parameters. In addition, the type or information can be indicated by one or more extrinsic signal aspects, such as frequency, interval, periodicity, etc. Using this information, a mobile device can determine whether an access point implements restricted association. If so, the mobile device can request an access point or related group identifier before determining whether to establish connection therewith. The identifier can be verified against a list of accessible access points and/or groups to make the determination. | 05-21-2009 |
20090129339 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR STATE/MODE TRANSITIONING - A method and network element for sending a transition indication to transition a user equipment to a different state or mode, the method receiving a configuration message from a network; and transmitting a transition indication from the user equipment, the transition indication only includes a cause if the configuration message contains an inhibit transition indication. Also, a method and user equipment for processing a transitioning indication from a user equipment indicating the user equipment desires a transition to a different state or mode, the method comprising: receiving the transition indication from the user equipment; if the transition indication contains a cause: releasing a signaling connection of the user equipment or transitioning the user equipment to a different state or mode; and if the transition indication does not contain the cause: releasing the signaling connection. | 05-21-2009 |
20090129340 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING USE OF SERVICE - A communication apparatus, connected to a first network configured to control use of a service provided in the first network from a second network, sends a first signal to the second network for ending a data request from the second network issued to the service in the first network using a first protocol for connecting the first network with the second network if the type of the service is the data supply service when the service in the first network has ended. Furthermore, the communication apparatus sends a second signal for ending the service in the first network after sending the signal for ending the data request using a second protocol for controlling the service in the first network. | 05-21-2009 |
20090129341 | SOURCE INITIATED COMMUNICATION HANDOVER - In a handover operation an access terminal is handed over from a source access point to a target access point. To facilitate efficient identification of a target access point, a handover operation may be initiated by the target access point. A candidate frequency search also may be invoked to confirm that an access terminal identified by a target access point for a handover is in the vicinity of the target access point. A source access point may verify whether an access terminal is in a vicinity of a target access point to determine whether to perform a handover operation. A source access point may handle potential ambiguity between several target access points by sending handover commands to each of these target access points. An access terminal also may assist in the determination of whether to perform a handover operation. | 05-21-2009 |
20090129342 | Mapping quality of service for intersystem handover - In accordance with the exemplary embodiments of the invention there is a method, executable computer program, and apparatus for receiving information including at least one packet data protocol context of a target network, and based on the information, for mapping in a source network at least one bearer to the at least one packet data protocol context. In addition, in accordance with another exemplary embodiment of the invention there is a method, executable computer program, and apparatus for receiving from a source network device information comprising an indication of at least one bearer mapped to the at least one packet data protocol context of a target network, and storing the received information for use in a handover. | 05-21-2009 |
20090129343 | Mobile communication terminal, incoming data detecting method and incoming data detecting program - Included are a system information receiving unit for receiving, from a first base station or a second base station, system information including a PI within a PICH and a PCH, and a cell reselecting unit for executing a cell reselection process for switching from a wireless communication with the first base station to that with the second base station if a mobile communication terminal fails to obtain local incoming information due to unsuccessful reception of the PCH, which is made by the system information receiving unit, after receiving a notification that incoming data exists by receiving the PI within the system information received by the system information receiving unit within the first service area. Consequently, the mobile communication terminal and incoming data detecting method and program, which can securely receive incoming data even if the mobile communication terminal fails to receive the PCH although receiving incoming information with the PI. | 05-21-2009 |
20090135782 | Correlator for primary cell search using memory architecture - An apparatus including a second stage correlator for receiving input data from a first stage correlator, wherein said second stage correlator includes a memory is described. A method for performing a second stage correlation on data including resetting a read pointer and a write pointer, alternatively multiplexing input data into one of a pair of storage registers, concatenating contents of the pair of storage registers, writing the concatenated contents into a memory in accordance with the write pointer, outputting the concatenated contents from the memory into a read register in accordance with the read pointer, updating the read address pointer and updating the write address pointer is also described. | 05-28-2009 |
20090135783 | FMIPv6 Intergration with Wimax - A fast handover protocol standard implemented on WiMAX networks integrating Internet protocol fast handover messaging. A standard for performing handover in four scenarios is offered with an embodiment for the message flow to perform the handover. The four scenarios include a mobile subscriber station initiated predictive hand-off, a network initiated predictive hand-off, a mobile subscriber station initiated reactive hand-off, and a network initiated reactive hand-off. In general, Internet Protocol control messages for fast hand-off or handover are used on the WiMAX network. Fast binding and fast binding acknowledge messages are exchanged between two WiMAX access networks in all four scenarios. Other messages used include hand-off initiate, hand-off acknowledge, proxy router advertisement, session information request, and release resources Internet Protocol control messages are integrated with WIMAX control messages to perform the fast handover protocol. | 05-28-2009 |
20090135784 | CLASSIFYING ACCESS POINTS USING PILOT IDENTIFIERS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate grouping pilot identifies to indicate type and/or classification information regarding one or more access points. The access points can select or be assigned pilot identifiers from the group indicating a type or classification related to the access points. Thus, identifiers can be grouped into macrocell and/or femtocell groups or ranges such that an access point can indicate, and mobile devices can efficiently determine, whether the access point provides macrocell or femtocell coverage based on a range from which its pilot identifier is selected or assigned. In addition, the pilot identifiers can be utilized to indicate restricted association information regarding the access points. | 05-28-2009 |
20090141682 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO CONTROL AUDIO SWITCH DURING CALL HANDOFF - A method and system of controlling an audio switch at a receiving unit during handoff is disclosed herein. The method can include the step of—at a receiving unit with an audio call active on a first network supporting a first audio protocol—setting up a second audio call on a second network supporting a different audio protocol. The method can further include the steps of monitoring for one or more events, detecting one or more of the events, and in response to the detection of one or more of the events, switching an audio path of the receiving unit from the first network to the second network. | 06-04-2009 |
20090141683 | METHOD OF BEST EFFORT HANDOFF TO MAINTAIN RADIO BEARER AND MIP SESSION CONTINUITY FOR MULTI-MODE MOBILE UNITS - The present invention provides a method of best effort hand off that is implemented in a mobile unit capable of communicating with a network according to multiple wireless access technologies. The method includes performing a handoff of the mobile unit from a first wireless communication link established according to a first wireless access technology to a second wireless communication link established according to a second wireless access technology. The method also includes transmitting, over the second wireless communication link, a de-registration message requesting de-registration of the first wireless communication link in response to performing the handoff. | 06-04-2009 |
20090141684 | Mobile communication system - A mobile communication system has a plurality of nodes, hierarchically connected to each other, including a source base station and a target base station. A U-plane management station includes detecting unit detecting a handover for the mobile terminal, and a Bi-casting unit redundantly transmitting, when detecting the handover for the mobile terminal, the same user data addressed to the mobile terminal toward both of the source base station and the target base station. The target base station includes a retaining unit receiving the user data addressed to the mobile terminal, which is transmitted by the U-plane management station, and retaining the user data, and a wireless transmitting unit wirelessly transmitting, when the mobile terminal is wirelessly connected after moving, the user data requested by the mobile terminal in the user data retained by the retaining unit and addressed to the mobile terminal. | 06-04-2009 |
20090141685 | MOBILE STATION HANDOVER USING TRANSFERRABLE VIRTUAL ACCESS POINT ADDRESS FOR WIRELESS NETWORKS - Various example embodiments are disclosed herein. According to an example embodiment, an apparatus may include a wireless transceiver, memory and a controller. The apparatus may be configured to assign, by a first physical access point (AP), a unique transferrable virtual AP address to one associated mobile station address; and perform, in response to a network request for handover, a handover for the associated mobile station address including: transferring the transferrable virtual AP address assigned to the associated mobile station address from a first physical AP to a second physical AP; and providing association state information for the associated mobile station address to the second physical AP. | 06-04-2009 |
20090141686 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A mobile communication apparatus includes a registration request part ( | 06-04-2009 |
20090141687 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS - When a network pages the temporary user mobile identifier of a mobile station, the mobile station sends a response to the network. Next, the network checks the authenticity of the user using a ciphering key, corresponding to the temporary user mobile identifier and a random number. If the temporary user mobile identifier is authenticated, a normal incoming call acceptance procedure is executed. If the mobile station is authenticated although the temporary user mobile identifier is wrong, the network reassigns a new temporary user mobile identifier to the mobile station and stops the current communication. In communication, the network and the mobile station mutually notify encipherment-onset time and negotiate about encipherment manner with each other. In addition, diversity handover is commenced upon a call attempt. Furthermore, if a branch replacement is necessary, the current branch is replaced by new branches capable of executing the diversity handover. Additionally, when a new call occurs to or from the mobile station capable of treating a plurality of calls simultaneously, the mobile station uses the same branch structure and the same communication frequency band for all of calls. Additionally, when a new call occurs to or from the mobile station capable of treating a plurality of calls simultaneously, a branch structure and a communication frequency band, which can continue all of the calls, are selected and used. Therefore, the mobile communications system is suitable for transmission of various sorts of data in accordance with the development of multimedia. | 06-04-2009 |
20090141688 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SECURING PROXY MOBILE IP - An invention is disclosed that enables proxy Mobile IP registration to be performed in a secure manner. Various security mechanisms may be used independently, or in combination with one another, to authenticate the identity of a node during the registration process. First, an Access Point receiving a packet from a node verifies that the source MAC address identified in the packet is in the Access Point's client association table. In addition, as a second mechanism, the Access Point ensures that a one-to-one mapping exists for the source MAC address and source IP address identified in the packet in a mapping table maintained by the Access Point. As a third mechanism, a binding is not modified in the mobility binding table maintained by the Home Agent unless there is a one-to-one mapping in the mobility binding table between the source MAC address and the source IP address. Similarly, the Foreign Agent may also maintain a mapping between the source IP address and the source MAC address in its visitor table to ensure a one-to-one mapping between a source IP address and the associated MAC address. The MAC address is preferably transmitted in a MAC address extension to the registration request and registration reply packets. In this manner, the Access Point, Home Agent, and Foreign Agent may ascertain the node's MAC address and ensure a one-to-one mapping between the IP address and the MAC address during the registration process. | 06-04-2009 |
20090147750 | Handover Process And Information Support for Communication Transfer Between Telecommunication Networks - This invention discloses an automatic and network-transparent “handover convenience information support” method (HOCIS method) for a subscriber (SUBC) of a primary communications process (alias primary telecommunications process alias primary TC process, PTCP) in which an HO takes place—wherein this HO process can comprise arbitrary times prior or after the “actual HO”. | 06-11-2009 |
20090147751 | METHOD OF APPLYING FAST MOBILE IPV6 FOR MOBILE NODES IN MOBILE NETWORKS, MOBILE ROUTER THEREFOR, AND MOBILE NETWORK THEREFOR - Provided are a method of applying fast mobile IPv6 (FMIPv6) to a mobile node in order to prevent loss of packets transmitted during a handover of a mobile router from a first access router to a second access router, and a mobile router and a mobile network therefor. Specifically, the mobile router receives, from the first access router, a message containing a prefix corresponding to the second access router, transmits, to the mobile node, a message containing the prefix and information indicating that the prefix is received from the first access router, transmits, to the first access router, a message for FMIPv6, and transmits, to the mobile node, a message to set a zero lifetime for a prefix corresponding to the first access router. Furthermore, the mobile node transmits a message for FMIPv6 to the first access router when the mobile node receives the message containing the prefix. | 06-11-2009 |
20090147752 | Method, apparatus and system for assigning internet protocol address in communication system based on media independent handover - Provided is a method, apparatus and system for assigning an IP address in a communication system based on a Media Independent Handover (MIH). In the method, information about a neighbor network is obtained through an MIH service. In the event of a handover to a heterogeneous network, one or more New Care of Addresses (NCoAs) are generated using the information about the neighbor network. The generated NCoA is transmitted to a candidate network through the MIH service. A Duplicate Address Detection (DAD) operation is performed on the NCoA. | 06-11-2009 |
20090147753 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, GATEWAY, CONCENTRATOR, AND HANDOVER CONTROL METHOD - According to this invention, there is provided a method applicable to the system which comprises a plurality of base stations each forming radio zones and storing a mobile terminal, and a gateway being connected to a packet communication network and relaying packet communication between the packet communication network and the mobile terminal. The method comprises buffering packets transmitted by a downlink to the mobile terminal in a packet buffer, requiring retransmission of unarrived packets in handover accompanied by movement among the radio zones, reading the packet required from the mobile terminal to retransmit the packet to the mobile terminal that is a request source, and assigning serial identification numbers to packets at least in a start to an end of the handover. When the identification numbers of the reached packets are discontinuous, the mobile terminal requires retransmission of packets needed to eliminate the discontinuity. | 06-11-2009 |
20090147754 | USER EQUIPMENT, CALL CONTINUITY APPLICATION SERVER, AND NETWORK HANDOVER METHOD - A network handover method applicable to network handover in ringing/ring back tone (RBT) or call hold is provided. According to this method, in ringing/RBT, one party performs a session negotiation with an Other End Point (OEP) via a call continuity application server, and then sends an off-hook signal to the OEP via the call continuity application server after the negotiation succeeds. Further, a call continuity application server and a user equipment (UE) are provided. According to the present disclosure, in ringing/RBT or call hold, even if the network coverage is not good, the UE may also be handed over to another network through call continuity, so as to effectively prevent the UE from dropping a call in ringing/RBT or call hold and thus improve the conversation quality of the user. | 06-11-2009 |
20090154420 | METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING NEIGHBOR NODE HAVING SIMILAR CHARACTERISTIC TO THAT OF ACTIVE NODE AND COMPUTER-READABLE RECORDING MEDIUM HAVING RECORDED THEREON PROGRAM FOR EXECUTING THE METHOD - A method and apparatus for managing a neighbor node having a similar characteristic to that of an active node, the method including: generating a neighbor list containing information about at least one neighbor node; selecting at least one parent node from among the at least one neighbor node; determining fitness parameters using a characteristic value of the active node, characteristic values of the at least one neighbor node included in the neighbor list of the active node, and characteristic values of at least one neighbor node included in a neighbor list of each parent node; and updating the neighbor list of the active node according to values of the determined fitness parameters. | 06-18-2009 |
20090154421 | METHOD FOR HANDOVER BETWEEN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS USING LINK TRIGGER SIGNAL IN MULTI-INTERFACE MOBILE ROUTER - Provided is a method for handover between heterogeneous networks using a link trigger signal in a multi-interface mobile router. The method includes: maintaining a state of a second network access interface in a sleep state, activating a first network access interface, receiving and transmitting the first network service to a subordinate node in the mobile router located in a first network; when the mobile router senses a second network link-up trigger signal while moving to the second network, changing the state of the second network access interface into an active state and performing handover; and receiving a second network service through the activated second network access interface in the mobile router performing the handover and transmitting the second network service to the subordinate node. | 06-18-2009 |
20090154422 | METHOD OF PROVIDING SEAMLESS QOS GUARANTEES IN INTERNET PROTOCOL (IP) NETWORK WHEN IP-BASED MOBILITY SERVICE IS PROVIDED - Provided is a method of providing an Internet Protocol (IP)-based mobility service, particularly, a method of providing seamless quality of service (QoS) guarantees when an IP-based mobile service is provided. The seamless QoS management method includes: a method of providing seamless QoS guarantees when an Internet Protocol (IP)-based mobility service is provided, including: determining whether a terminal is newly registered in a network connecting unit; and providing QoS information of the newly registered terminal to the network connecting unit. Therefore, a user can successively receive a Service Level Agreement (SLA)-based service for which he or she subscribes, while moving to other places. | 06-18-2009 |
20090154423 | METHOD OF ACCESSING OPTIMAL ACCESS NETWORK USING ACCESS GATEWAY IN MOBILE TERMINAL - Provided is a method of causing a mobile terminal to access an optimal access network using an access gateway. By searching for neighboring access network nodes periodically to select an optimal access network node when the mobile terminal accesses a serving access network node or when the mobile terminal performs handover, and accessing the selected optimal access network node through the access gateway to communicate with the optimal access network, it is possible to reduce communication costs and provide high-quality communication services to users without installing any additional apparatus require for heterogeneous networking. Furthermore, by performing authentication, registration, and QoS control in advance before accessing the optimal access network node, it is possible to reduce a time consumed to access the optimal access network node. | 06-18-2009 |
20090154424 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING A HANDOVER THAT SWITCHES CONNECTION FROM A SOURCE BASE STATION APPARATUS TO A DESTINATION BASE STATION APPARATUS, AND CONTROL APPARATUS AND TERMINAL APPARATUS UTILIZING THE SAME - An interface unit receives a scheduled timing with which to execute a handover and a transmission delay time present in a communication with a terminal apparatus, from the terminal apparatus via a source base station apparatus. A switching control unit sorts out original data, to be transmitted to the terminal apparatus, into first data to be transmitted via the source base station apparatus and second data to be transmitted via a destination base station apparatus, based on the scheduled timing and the transmission delay time received. The interface unit outputs the sorted-out first data to the source base station apparatus and outputs the sorted-out second data to the destination base station apparatus. | 06-18-2009 |
20090161624 | REGISTERING A MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE WITH AN ACCESS NETWORK - A method (500, 600, 700) of registering a mobile communication device (102, 104, 106, 108) with an access network (112) can include receiving a request for a client mobile internet protocol (IP) registration from the mobile communication device. The method can also include performing a proxy mobile IP registration on behalf of the mobile communication device and sending a confirmation of the client mobile IP registration to the mobile communication device. | 06-25-2009 |
20090161625 | SEAMLESS MOBILITY FOR NON-MOBILE INTERNET PROTOCOL CAPABLE WIRELESS DEVICES IN A TIME DIVISION DUPLEX SYSTEM - A method, base station, and wireless communication system provide seamless mobility in a time division duplex system. The method includes determining a mobility capability of the wireless communication device ( | 06-25-2009 |
20090161626 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DUAL-MODE HANDOFF - Exemplary embodiments include methods and systems for a deterministic facilitating for a dual-mode handoff between a local area network (LAN) and a wide area network (WAN). The hand-off method may include associating identification information with a mobile user device and locating the mobile user device within a local area network based at least in part on the identification information associated with the mobile user device. The hand-off method may also include moving the mobile user device outside a coverage area of the local area network, associating the mobile user device with a wide area network based at least in part on the identification information associated with the mobile user device, and updating a wide area network server of a location associated with the mobile user device. | 06-25-2009 |
20090161627 | Switching communication networks in a mobile device - Methods and corresponding systems in a mobile station for switching communication networks include scheduling an alternate network period during a first communication session between a mobile station and a first network transceiver in a first network, wherein the first network uses a first protocol. During the alternate network period the mobile station searches for a transmission from a second network transceiver in a second network, wherein the second network uses a second protocol. A second communication session is requested between the mobile station and the second network transceiver. A second communication session is initiated between the mobile station and the second network transceiver. | 06-25-2009 |
20090161628 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND INFORMATION MANAGEMENT METHOD - An integrative radio base station holds station data required for operation including information on the cell managed by itself and the information on the cells managed by an adjacent integrative radio base stations. If information on the cells of the destination of a mobile terminal is not held at the time of the handover of the mobile terminal, the information is acquired from a station data management device. The station data management device manages station data for each integrative radio base station and transmits information on the cell requested from the integrative radio base station to a source that made the request. | 06-25-2009 |
20090161629 | MEDIA INDEPENDENT HANDOVER FOR SMART PHONE ARCHITECTURE - A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) may include two or more modems, each configured to link to a different network, and a media independent handover (MIH) client. An application programming interfaces (API) may provide the MIH client with mechanisms to receive information about links, control the modems for handover, discover a MIH server and IP multimedia system nodes, trigger mobile IP handover, etc. If a link has been successfully established, the MIH client may start a MIH session. When the modem indicates that a connection is going to be terminated, the MIH client may activate the second modem for handover. If the first modem indicates that a link parameter has crossed a threshold, the MIH client may send signal measurements to a MIH server. After receiving a media independent handover switch request, the MIH client may initiate handover to the second network. | 06-25-2009 |
20090161630 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication apparatus holds information concerning a second network reported from a specific wireless terminal that has left a first network. In accordance with predetermined criteria, the communication apparatus decides a wireless terminal that is to be allowed to join the second network and notifies this wireless terminal so as to cause the specific wireless terminal to return to the first network. This wireless terminal uses the held information concerning the second network to discriminate the communication status of the second network and requests the specific wireless terminal to return in accordance with the communication status discriminated. | 06-25-2009 |
20090161631 | BROADBAND TELECOMMUNICATION SERVICE WITH PERSONALIZED SERVICE CAPABILITY FOR TERMINALS - Embodiments of a system and method of providing broadband telecommunication services over a packet-switched network enable enhanced personalization. A mobile terminal is registered in a first remote environment, where the mobile terminal has a home environment and a home service capability. The telecommunication services are provided to the mobile terminal in the first remote environment in accordance with the home service capability. | 06-25-2009 |
20090168719 | Method and apparatus for adding editable information to records associated with a transceiver device - Methods and apparatus for adding static information to records generated by an access point are disclosed. According to one aspect of the present invention, a wireless transceiver device that interfaces with a roaming device includes computer code for causing input information to be accepted from an external source, and a memory that includes an editable field and is arranged to store data. The computer code for causing the input information to be accepted from the source causes the input information to be stored in the editable field. The wireless transceiver device also includes computer code for causing a record associated with the roaming device to be generated. The record includes the input information stored in the editable field and the data, and the computer code for causing the record to be generated also causes the record to be stored on the memory. | 07-02-2009 |
20090168720 | Mobile node, a method or handover and a computer program - A mobile node comprising a handover engine configured to control the handover of the mobile node from one access node to another access node, said handover engine being arranged to provide TCP window size information to a TCP endpoint node, to which the mobile node is connected via a connection, before said handover engine initiates registration of a new location address for said connection. | 07-02-2009 |
20090168721 | Telecommunications System and Method - A telecommunications system is arranged to provide a mobile communications session to a mobile node using an internet protocol. The telecommunications system includes a home packet data network operable to communicate internet packets to and from the mobile node to provide the communications session, when the mobile node is affiliated with the home packet data network. The home packet data network includes a home agent of the mobile node. The telecommunications system also includes a visited packet data network operable to communicate internet packets to and from the mobile node to provide the communications session, when the mobile node is affiliated with the visited packet data network. One of the home packet data network or the visited packet data network includes a packet data gateway operable to control the communication of the internet packets to and from the home packet data network from and to the visited packet data network. Upon receipt of a binding update internet packet providing a care of address of the mobile node following a change of affiliation from the home packet data network to the visited packet data network, the packet data gateway and the home agent are operable to establish a route for the internet packets between the home agent and the mobile node via the packet data gateway, to the effect that the packet data gateway can control the communication of the internet packets from the home packet data network to the mobile node when affiliated with the visited packet data network and internet packets received from the mobile node via the visited packet data network. As a result, if the mobile node roams from, for example, a 3GPP network to a non-3GPP network or to a 3GPP network from a non-3GPP network; the packet data gateway is able to control the communication of internet packets, using resources on the 3GPP network by the mobile node. | 07-02-2009 |
20090168722 | HANDOVER PROCEDURE - Various example embodiments are disclosed. One example embodiment may include determining, by a serving base station in a wireless network, to hand a mobile station over to a target base station. This example may further include receiving a base station-to-base station handover message from the target base station, the base station-to-base station handover message including at least one connection identifier (CID) associated with the target base station. This example may further include sending a base station-to-mobile station handover message to the mobile station based on the determining, the handover message including the at least one CID. | 07-02-2009 |
20090168723 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDLING OUT-OF-ORDER PACKETS DURING HANDOVER IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Techniques for sending packets and maintaining synchronization during handover is described. A user equipment (UE) may be handed over from a source base station to a target base station. The source base station may forward packets for the UE to the target base station, which may receive the packets out of order. In one design, the target base station may determine whether each packet can be sent in order to the UE, send the packet if it can be sent in order, and discard the packet otherwise. In another design, the target base station may re-order packets received within a re-ordering window and may send the re-ordered packets to the UE. In yet another design, the target base station may process each packet received out of order as if the packet is in order, e.g., by incrementing a hyper-frame number (HFN) or re-assigning the packet with a later sequence number. | 07-02-2009 |
20090168724 | USER APPARATUS, BASE STATION AND METHOD FOR USE IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A user apparatus includes a handover request signal transmission unit configured to transmit a request signal to a source base station for handover to a target base station, a handover command reception unit configured to receive a handover command from the source base station, a PDCP reordering function execution unit configured to execute a PDCP reordering function of determining sequence of packets in a PDCP sublayer and deferring to deliver the packets to an upper layer until the packets become in-sequence, a handover complete signal transmission unit configured to report completion of the handover to the target base station, a PDCP reordering function activation unit configured to activate the PDCP reordering function, and a PDCP reordering function inactivation unit configured to inactivate the PDCP reordering function in response to expiration of a predefined time period or in response to receipt of a notification from the target base station. | 07-02-2009 |
20090168725 | COMMUNICATION HANDOVER MANAGEMENT - As a communication is engaged upon a mobile device, data can be relayed through a base station. Determining which base station the mobile device should use can be based upon location and velocity of the mobile device. Other factors can be taken into account in determining a base station, such as power output of the mobile device and base station, load balancing, mobile device trends, and the like. Based upon these various factors, a determination can be made if the mobile device should transfer base stations. | 07-02-2009 |
20090175239 | METHOD OF SUPPORTING QUALITY-OF-SERVICE APPLICATION SESSION CONTINUITY DURING INTER-TECHNOLOGY HANDOVER USING A COMMON PACKET DATA FUNCTION - The present invention provides a method of handing off a mobile unit that supports multiple quality-of-service (QoS) application layer clients that operate according to multiple wireless access technologies in a packet-switched communication system. The method includes receiving information indicating a request to hand off the mobile unit from a first access network that operates according to a first wireless access technology to a second access network that operates according to a second wireless access technology. The mobile unit established a first session according to the first wireless access technology at a first QoS level. The method also includes establishing, concurrently with the first session and in response to receiving the handoff request, a second session according to the second wireless access technology at the first QoS level. The method further includes communicating with the mobile unit at the first QoS level using the first and second sessions. | 07-09-2009 |
20090175240 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO BASE STATION CONTROLLER, AND RELOCATION METHOD - Radio base stations connect by radio lines with radio terminals in cells that make up each radio base station and relay data communication realized by the radio terminals on bearers on radio lines. Base station controllers record correspondence information of the data flow of data communication with the radio terminals and the bearers on the radio lines and, by referring to the correspondence information, effects termination of data communication with the radio terminals. When, in a state in which a drift base station controller relays and transfers data communication between radio base stations to which the radio terminals are connected and a serving base station controller, the serving base station controller is transferred to the drift base station controller, the plurality of base station controllers then report to the drift base station controller the correspondence information from the serving base station controller. | 07-09-2009 |
20090175241 | METHOD FOR DROPPING PACKET DATA, RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A control method in a mobile communication system with a buffer unit for temporarily storing packet data to be sent, includes dropping the packet data stored in the buffer unit before sending when a drop timer corresponding to the packet data before sending reaches a given value or when a drop condition required by a drop mechanism accompanying the buffer unit is satisfied, and dropping the packet data stored in the buffer unit after sending when a drop timer corresponding to the packet data after sending reaches a given value. | 07-09-2009 |
20090175242 | FLOATING IP ADDRESS FOR ROAMING INTERNET CONNECTED SUBSCRIBER UNITS - A system apparatus for wireless communication that includes receiving, receiving data for a subscriber, determining the subscriber to whom the data is addressed, determining which cell the subscriber currently resides, and transmitting the data accordingly. | 07-09-2009 |
20090180437 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND HANDOVER METHOD - A communication apparatus controls the timing of switching data paths in an upper-layer apparatus so as to inhibit the data from being transferred from the network host of a handover source to the network host of a handover destination, thereby effectively utilizing the resource of the network host of the handover source, while eliminating the processing load accompanying the data transfer. In this apparatus, a handover deciding part ( | 07-16-2009 |
20090180438 | WIRELESS TERMINAL AND WIRELESS BASE STATION - In a case where a switching source wireless communication system is a wireless communication system in which a transmission timing of a packet or data rate can be controlled in a wireless base station, the switching source wireless communication system, which notifies information on a timing when a wireless terminal communicates the switching destination wireless communication system with respect to the switching source wireless communication system in advance, starts time-division communication between switching destination and switching source wireless communication systems, and receives the timing information, controls a transmission timing or a data rate in accordance with the timing information. | 07-16-2009 |
20090180439 | METHOD OF DETERMINING A LOCATION OF A BASE STATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND BASE STATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The present invention relates to a method of determining a location of a base station ( | 07-16-2009 |
20090180440 | Client-Based Multimode Handover in Communication Systems - A communication system having a first communication device being in communication with a second communication device via a communication connectivity to a first communication network. The first communication device having a first handover module operable to handover communication connectivity from the first communication network to a second communication network. The second communication device having a second handover module cooperatively operable with the first handover module to maintain communication between the second communication device and the first communication device while the first handover module operates to handover communication connectivity from the first communication network to the second communication network. | 07-16-2009 |
20090180441 | HANDOVER METHOD AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In a mobile communication system utilizing Mobile IP, information on the access network is exchanged between access routers. And when a mobile terminal performs a handover, the previously exchanged information on the neighbor access routers and the access network information are provided to the mobile terminal. By so doing, the mobile terminal can determine a destination access router in advance, enabling to realize an efficient handover processing. | 07-16-2009 |
20090180442 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF HANDLING IP LAYER MOBILITY IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A system and method for facilitating the efficient operation of a mobile station as it transfers from communicating via one wireless data network to another. A session control node is coupled to the mobile node in such a manner that it selectively buffers data being transmitted to the mobile node, at least while the network transfer is being executed. When the mobile node had dropped its communication session with a first wireless network and established a new communication session with a second wireless network, the buffered data is read out and transmitted to the mobile node. The session control node may be coupled with a home network associated with the mobile node or a control node may be associated with the mobile node on an ad hoc basis. | 07-16-2009 |
20090180443 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - Upon handover, a mobile station receives, from the movement origin base station, information on the movement destination base station and information relating to a sequence to be used for transmitting a random access signal to the movement destination base station. The mobile station receives a synchronization channel signal transmitted from the movement destination base station. The mobile station transmits the random access signal to the movement destination base station at a timing offset by a prescribed period from a timing of receiving a synchronization channel and at a frequency corresponding to that of the synchronization channel. A position of the timing/frequency used for transmitting the random access signal for the handover is used exclusively by the random access signal transmitted from the mobile terminal for which a handover is being performed or is used exclusively at the same time by a plurality of mobile stations for which handovers are performed. | 07-16-2009 |
20090185535 | DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD IN MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - In a wireless mobile communications system, a method of transmitting uplink data during a handover of a mobile terminal. When the mobile terminal changes its connection from a source base station to a target base station, either the source base station or the target base station transmits a reordering indication for performing a reordering process by the gateway while transmitting a received data unit from the mobile terminal to the gateway regardless of data unit sequence number, thereby optimizing data unit transmission efficiency. | 07-23-2009 |
20090185536 | Apparatus, system and method capable of pre-allocating and communicating IP address information during wireless communication - An embodiment of the present invention provides an apparatus, comprising a wireless station (STA) operable to communicate with a first access point (AP) and roam to a next access point (AP), wherein said next AP pre-caches a number of IP addresses from a backend Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server; and wherein said wireless station (STA) gathers IP layer address and sub-network information from said next Access Point (AP) during roaming. | 07-23-2009 |
20090185537 | Reestablishing Communication By A Mobile Node Upon Recovery From An Abrupt Shut Down - When a mobile node suffers an abrupt shut down while operating in a foreign network and recovers in its home network, the present invention enables the mobile node to reestablish communication capability, without time delay, with the nodes that had established one or more communication sessions with the mobile node prior to the abrupt shut down. The mobile node of the present invention includes an update module that determines whether additional information needs to be sent to the nodes in communication with the mobile node prior to the mobile node suffering an abrupt shut down. Based on that determination, the update module may provide additional information to such nodes. | 07-23-2009 |
20090185538 | MOBILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR INTERNET PROTOCOL BASED LOW POWER WIRELESS NETWORK - A mobility management system and method is provided for efficiently support mobility to an IPv6 based LoWpan. The mobility management method for Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) based personal area network (PAN) moving with a mobile router according to the present invention includes detecting, at a mobile terminal, movement of the mobile router; determining whether the movement is an intra-network movement or an inter-network movement, transmitting, when the movement is an intra-network movement, a neighbor discovery request message to a gateway of a currently attached network and receiving a neighbor discovery response message containing a temporary address transmitted by the gateway in response to the neighbor discovery request message. When the movement is an inter-network movement, the gateway receives the binding acknowledgement message from a home agent and establishes a bidirectional tunnel with the home agent. | 07-23-2009 |
20090185539 | Handover Method and Base Station - To provide a method for suitably enabling the resources of a handover-source base station to be released and the post-handover processes of a handover-destination base station to be executed by securely determining a transfer of Last Packet without increasing a packet transmission delay in a handover process in a mobile communication system where a mobile station makes a communication with packets, a base station is provided with a Last Packet determination timer, and the handover source base station or the handover-destination base station activates the timer upon receipt of a handover completion acknowledgment transmitted from an upper node station or according to a resource release instruction after the reception of the handover completion acknowledgment, and determines that Last Packet has been received, upon expiration of the timer. | 07-23-2009 |
20090190549 | System for packet data service in the mixed network of asynchronous communication network and synchronous communication network and hand-over method thereof - Disclosed herein is a mobile communication terminal and handover method therefor. In the mobile communication system, a Gateway GPRS Support Node (GGSN) of the asynchronous network is connected to a Packet Data Service Node (PDSN) of the synchronous network. Accordingly, as a mobile communication terminal, using packet data service in the asynchronous mobile communication system, moves into an area of a synchronous mobile communication system, the synchronous mobile communication system sets control signals and traffic to transmit packet data in response to a request from the asynchronous mobile communication system. Further, if forward and reverse channels are assigned between the mobile communication terminal and the synchronous mobile communication system, call setup is performed to provide the packet data service, and then a node B of the asynchronous mobile communication system releases the connection to the mobile communication terminal. | 07-30-2009 |
20090190550 | Handover information sent over a public wide area network (e.g. internet) - A basestation ( | 07-30-2009 |
20090190551 | Route Setting Method and Route Management Device - A technology is disclosed in which a QoS path related to a mobile terminal is established via an aggregation domain. When the QoS path is modified in accompaniment to the movement of the mobile terminal, a crossover node present within the aggregation domain is discovered. According to the technology, when a new QoS path is established between a QNE (local terminal) | 07-30-2009 |
20090190552 | FLEXIBLE MOBILE IP FOREIGN AGENT ARCHITECTURE FOR ENABLING CONVERGED SERVICES - A method and apparatus for flexible Mobile IP foreign agent architecture for enabling converged services are described herein. According to one embodiment of the invention, a packet is received over a circuit bound with a converged services domain of a network element. The converged services domain enables forwarding of wired and wireless traffic to a plurality of destination network elements. Upon determining that the circuit is capable of carrying Mobile Internet Protocol (IP) packets, the packet is processed according to an entry ma Mobile IP forwarding information base upon determining that the packet has a corresponding entry in the Mobile IP forwarding information base, and the packet is processed according to a different entry in an IP forwarding information base upon determining that the packet does not have an entry in the Mobile IP forwarding information base. Other methods and apparatuses are also described. | 07-30-2009 |
20090190553 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO TERMINAL, BASE STATION, AND BASE STATION SEARCH METHOD - A wireless communication system includes a wireless terminal and a plurality of base stations that can communicate with each other via a predetermined communication path that is different from the wireless communication path to the wireless terminal. The wireless terminal transmits a request signal to one of the base stations to request a response signal from another base station. The one base station transfers the received request signal to the other base station via the predetermined communication path. Upon reception of the request signal transferred from the one base station, the second base station transmits a response signal to the wireless terminal via the predetermined channel. The wireless terminal receives the response signal transmitted from the second base station via the predetermined channel. | 07-30-2009 |
20090190554 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER PROCEDURE AND CREATING DATA - A method and device for performing handover by a mobile terminal from a source base station to a target base station, the mobile terminal having a RRC layer, a RLC layer and an PDCP layer. The method includes receiving a handover initiation message; and performing handover from the source base station to the target base station, including reassembling RLC SDUs from at least one PDU when possible and delivering the reassembled RLC SDUs from the RLC layer to an upper layer. | 07-30-2009 |
20090190555 | Handover Method in Wireless Communication System, Mobile Station, and Wireless Communication System - A handover method, in a wireless communication system having a mobile station and a plurality of base stations, for performing handover of the mobile station from a connected base station to a neighbor base station, the method having the steps of: deciding that neighbor base station information non-reception handover is establish; searching a connectable neighbor base station; acquiring identification information for the neighbor base station; transmitting a handover request including the acquired identification information; transmitting, in the connected base station received the handover request, to the mobile station, service level information included with in a handover response, and deciding a handover destination based on the service level information. | 07-30-2009 |
20090190556 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO FACILITATE HANDOVER - A method and apparatus for handing over a mobile node from a source access point to a target access point is provided herein. During operation the source access point will create handover messages on behalf of the mobile node. When the source access point detects that handover is taking place, the source access point will transmit the appropriate handover message to the mobile node's anchor node. Because the source access point may not have the necessary security credentials to create messages on behalf of the mobile node, in an alternate embodiment of the present invention, the messages are created by the mobile node and stored at the source access point until needed. | 07-30-2009 |
20090190557 | METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR SENDING A RESET MESSAGE SEQUENCE NUMBER DURING SWITCHING - A method of sending reset message sequence number is provided. During a connected state handoff of an access terminal (AT) between a source access network (AN) and a target AN, the source AN sends a reset message sequence number of the AT to the target AN. The source AN adds the reset message sequence number of the AT to the message sent to the target AN. Thereby, the problem in the existing systems that, the source AN cannot send the reset message sequence number of the AT to the target AN, and thus the target AN cannot perform a reset process on the AT when the AT is switched from the source AN to the target AN is thus solved. An access network (AN) and a communication system are also provided. | 07-30-2009 |
20090196251 | MANAGEMENT OF A MULTI-APPLICATION MOBILE CARRIER TREE - Efficient utilization and management of integrated mobile base station carrier trees is provided herein. Such trees provide an organizational structure for allocating calls in a code division, tone division, time division and/or like mobile infrastructure. Calls can be allocated to portions of the carrier tree as a function of characteristic(s) associated with the call. Accordingly, like calls are grouped within the carrier tree with like calls. In addition, portions of the carrier tree can be re-allocated to different types of traffic to meet fluctuations in traffic demand. Further, calls can be re-packed from existing segments of the carrier tree to other segments to maintain calls having common characteristics in contiguous groups, and to maintain idle segments another contiguous group(s). Accordingly, the wireless carrier tree can be packed and managed more efficiently, providing greater throughput and reduced contention for resources. | 08-06-2009 |
20090196252 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING A SEQUENCE OF DATA UNITS BETWEEN A WIRELESS DEVICE AND A NETWORK - Wireless communication method for transmitting a status report for a sequence of data transmitted along a wireless communication link between a wireless device and a network having a plurality of base stations, the wireless communication link having a transmitting side and a receiving side. The method comprises: on the receiving side, determining status information on data units of the sequence, indicating whether each data unit has been received or not on the receiving side; and transmitting, from the receiving side to the transmitting side of the wireless communication link, a status report containing a pointer designating a first non-received data unit in the sequence and a bitmap providing the status information for a set of data units following said first non-received data unit in the sequence. | 08-06-2009 |
20090196253 | Location based femtocell device configuration and handoff - Methods and apparatus for configuring femtocell devices for performing handoffs in a communication system. The communication system is provided with a plurality of macrocell base stations, a femtocell device, a wireless softswitch and a mobile node. In the communication system, each macrocell base station serves a macro cell, and the femtocell device serves a femto cell and is disposed in one of the plurality of macro cells. The wireless softswitch is communicatively connected with the plurality of macrocell base stations and the femtocell device, and stores geographic coverage area information for each of the plurality of macrocell base stations. The mobile node is originally disposed within the femto cell and moves out of the femto cell. The mobile node transmits a registration message to the femtocell device. The femtocell device forwards the registration message and geographical location information for the femtocell device to the wireless softswitch. The wireless softswitch determines which one of the plurality of macrocell base stations covers the macro cell where the femtocell device is disposed, in dependence upon the received geographical location information for the femtocell device and the stored geographic coverage area information for each of the plurality of macrocell base stations. Then, the wireless softswitch forwards the registration message to the macrocell base station determined. | 08-06-2009 |
20090196254 | METHOD OF PERFORMING HANDOVER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a handover method of a mobile station in a wireless communication system, and a base station and a mobile station for the same. A list of neighboring base stations that can accept a handover of a mobile station is shared by the mobile station and a serving base station before the mobile station performs the handover so as to reduce handover delay time in a high speed environment through addition, the active base station set managed by the mobile station and the serving base station can be managed with consideration of radio signal quality and resource state of each of the neighboring base stations included in the active base station set, and thus when the mobile station attempts a network re-entry process to a target base station that is not ready for the handover of the mobile station due to a loss of a handover control message, a handover failure due to a lack of radio resources can be prevented, thereby increasing a handover success rate. | 08-06-2009 |
20090196255 | Differentiating GGSN terminated PDP context from PGW terminated EPS bearer during inter-RAT handovers - A method and apparatus that can be used for differentiating a GGSN terminated PDP context from a PGW terminated EPS bearer during the Inter-RAT handovers are provided. The method can include checking an access point name received from a first network entity. The method can also include, when the access point name does not contain an evolved packet system specific label, initiating a context deactivation. | 08-06-2009 |
20090196256 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENABLING CELL RESELECTION FOR WTRU OPERATING IN DISCONTINUOUS RECEPTION - A method for discontinuous reception (DRX) implemented in a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) during cell reselection including initiating cell reselection; disabling DRX operation, wherein disabling DRX operation enables continuous reception; transmitting a CELL UPDATE message; receiving a CELL UPDATE CONFIRM message; and enabling DRX operation based on the received CELL UPDATE CONFIRM message. | 08-06-2009 |
20090196257 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER OF TERMINAL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided are an apparatus and a method for performing a handover of a terminal in a wireless communication system. In the method, a ranging code is transmitted to a target base station on which a handover is to be performed. A ranging response message comprising Connection Identification (CID) update information is received from the target base station together with resource assignment information for transmission of a ranging request message. Therefore, fast resumption of downlink data reception of the terminal can be supported through fast CID update during a handover. | 08-06-2009 |
20090201878 | Low latency handover between wireless communication networks using different radio access technologies - A communications system for providing a user's mobile station (MS) with an Internet Protocol (IP) connectivity, has an IP network gateway for allocating an IP address to the MS to enable it to access an IP network. First and second base stations are respectively configured to support communications of the MS over first and second radio access networks using different radio access technologies. A first access gateway provides an interface between the IP network gateway and the first radio access network, whereas a second access gateway provides an interface between the IP network gateway and the second radio access network. A handover interface is provided between the first access gateway and the second access gateway for enabling the MS to switch between the first and second radio access networks with minimum latency. | 08-13-2009 |
20090201879 | INTEGRATION OF 802.21 MEDIA INDEPENDENT HANDOVER FUNCTIONALITY TO RADIO INTERFACE LAYER AND TELEPHONY SERVER - A radio interface layer media independent handover (RIL MIH) client functionality enables transparent inter-system handover of a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) between different radio access technologies (RATs), without user intervention. The RIL MIH client interacts with RIL drivers and proxies, informs the RIL proxies of the handover status, then the proxies interact with a new driver in use. A WTRU is modified to add MIH functionality to a telephony server to support inter-system handover. | 08-13-2009 |
20090201880 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SIGNALING IN MULTIPLE USER ONE-SLOT OPERATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Disclosed are multiple embodiments of method and apparatus to facilitate Multiple Users Reusing One Timeslot (MUROS) operation in wireless communications. A pair of wireless transmit/receive units (WTRUs) may be multiplexed onto a timeslot using a same pulse format. A WTRU may communicate on a network using MUROS technology both on the downlink (DL) and the uplink (UL), and may use a first pulse format on the DL and a second different pulse format on the UL. Pulse format support information to facilitate MUROS operation may be communicated between a network and a WTRU. The support information may be communicated in Radio Resource Control (RRC) messages. A network may allow for concurrent operation of WTRUs using different types of MUROS technology. For example, a network may include WTRUs using MUROS based on orthogonal sub-channels (OSC) while other WTRUs use MUROS based on an interference-canceling technology such as Downlink Advanced Receiver Performance (DARP) Phase I or Phase II. | 08-13-2009 |
20090201881 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROCESSING HANDOVER PROCEDURE THEREOF - A method for processing a handover procedure in a mobile communication system is disclosed. After a type of handover is recognized based on information included in a handover command, a radio resource reconfiguration operation is selectively performed or a data transmission start point is adjusted, to thereby minimize an unnecessary operation occurring in the handover process and optimize a data transmission between a user equipment and a base station. | 08-13-2009 |
20090201882 | METHOD OF EXECUTING SCANNING IN BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - The primitives between an upper management layer and the MAC layer within a mobile station and a base station are defined in order to specify and clarify the operations within the protocol stack layers in a broadband wireless access system to allow a mobile station to perform scanning procedures. Media Independent Handover (MIH) procedures can be achieved because the NCMS and MIH layer can communicate through use of these primitives. | 08-13-2009 |
20090201883 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR HANDOVER BETWEEN DIFFERENT TYPES OF ACCESS SYSTEMS - A method for handover between different types of access systems in some embodiments consistent with the present invention includes: when the UE hands over between different types of access systems, the UE accesses the IASA connected with the UE in the source access system through the destination access system. Furthermore, the present invention discloses a handover system, and a UE that includes an IASA address storing module and an IASA address sending module. The handover system includes: a destination access system, and a source IASA. | 08-13-2009 |
20090207804 | Handover Method for Communication Networks - A method of performing a handover process in a wireless multi-hop communication network, the method comprising requesting neighborhood communication information regarding channel condition among access stations in the neighborhood of a mobile station, the neighborhood communication information including communication information related to a link between a first station and a second station in the wireless multi-hop communication network, obtaining the communication information related to the link between the first station and the second station, sending the communication information from the first station to a mobile station in the wireless multi-hop communication network, and configuring the mobile station based on the communication information so as to switch the mobile station to the second station. | 08-20-2009 |
20090207805 | Pre-registration, storing of pre-registration session information and session transfer in a wireless communication system - Example embodiments are directed to a system and methods of pre-registration, storing of pre-registered session information and session transfer, which may occur when an access terminal is in close proximity to a border area between a first radio access technology (RAT) area and a second RAT area. A method includes obtaining pre-registration session information if an access terminal enters a pre-registration zone, starting a pre-registration session information timer associated with the obtained pre-registration session information, and storing the obtained pre-registration session information until the associated pre-registration information timer expires. Further, both an access terminal and an access network include one or more memories configured to store more than one group of pre-registration session information and more than one timer. Each of the timers are associated with a corresponding set of pre-registration session information. | 08-20-2009 |
20090207806 | IP mobility multihoming - The present application relates to a method for arranging IP mobility multihoming. A plurality of IP mobility configuration parameter sets is accessed, each of the sets being associated with a destination network. One of the IP mobility configuration parameter sets is selected for an IP data connection, the selected IP mobility configuration parameter set being associated with a destination network of the IP data connection. An IP mobility protocol instance associated with the destination network is activated on the basis of the selected IP mobility configuration parameter set. | 08-20-2009 |
20090207807 | INTER-SUBSYSTEM TRANSFERS - In general, the present invention provides for a direct inter-subsystem transfer of an active communication session, such as a call, between a packet subsystem (PS) and a circuit-switched subsystem (CS) in an efficient and effective manner while maintaining service control and continuity. Further, the inter-subsystem transfer may take place between a PS of one generation and a CS of another generation. | 08-20-2009 |
20090207808 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTER-TECHNOLOGY HANDOFF OF A MULTI-MODE MOBILE STATION - A communication system reduces set up time for an inter-technology handoff of a multi-mode mobile station (MS) from a source network associated with a first radio frequency (RF) technology to a target network associated with a second RF technology by pre-establishing, prior to a determination to handoff the MS, a registration state of the MS and an authentication of the MS in association with the target network and second RF technology. In order to pre-establish the registration state and authentication, the MS exchanges messaging of the second RF technology with the second network via the first network and first RF technology. To facilitate the exchange, the MS includes shims in a second protocol stack associated with the second technology, which shims intercept second protocol stack signaling and redirect the intercepted signaling to a first protocol stack of the MS, associated with the first technology, for tunneling to the source network. | 08-20-2009 |
20090207809 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR REDUCING HANDOVER DELAY IN BROADBAND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for reducing a handover delay in a broadband wireless communication system are provided. In a method for operating a terminal to reduce a handover delay in a broadband wireless communication system, a handover procedure is performed with a serving Base Station (BS) to obtain a dedicated ranging code and a Connection ID (CID). The dedicated ranging code is transmitted to one or more target BSs using the CID. Whether the dedicated ranging code is received is determined. Therefore, a handover delay and a chance of malfunction can be reduced. | 08-20-2009 |
20090207810 | METHOD AND BASE STATION FOR FORWARDING RETRANSMISSION PROTOCOL RELATED DATA - The present invention relates to a method for controlling a radio cell change of a communication terminal from a first radio cell to a second radio cell, wherein the first and the second radio cell is controlled by at least one base station of a mobile communication system. The present invention further provides a base station and a communication system comprising a plurality of base stations and a communication terminal adapted to execute the control method. To overcome negative impacts of data loss and delay during a cell change procedure the protocol context of a retransmission protocols are transferred from a source base station to a target base station upon an cell change of a communication terminal in issue. | 08-20-2009 |
20090213808 | Maintenance of data connections during the changeover of a communication access network - A method for maintaining at least one data connection to a terminal during a changeover from a first communication access network to at least one second communication access network, comprising at least two private user identities and at least two IP addresses are allocated to the terminal in order to form a public user identity for the user of the terminal, wherein the terminal registers itself in an IP communication network in parallel per communication access network with in each case one private user identity and with the common public user identity and an IP address for the first communication access network and the at least one second communication access network. | 08-27-2009 |
20090213809 | METHOD OF PERFORMING HANDOVER FOR A DUAL TRANSFER MODE IN A WIRELESS MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of performing Dual Transfer Mode (DTM) handover by a mobile station (MS) in a wireless mobile communication system is disclosed. More specifically, the MS receives information of neighbor cells, wherein the information is a list of neighbor cells whose signal strengths the MS should measure and transmits a message including results of the measured neighbor cells. Furthermore, the MS receives a message from a network, wherein the message is a DTM Handover Command message which instructs the MS to perform a DTM handover procedure with one of the neighbor cells. Lastly, the MS performs the DTM handover procedure. | 08-27-2009 |
20090213810 | TRANSFER OF COMMUNICATION SESSIONS BETWEEN BASE STATIONS IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method and devices are provided to enable continuing a communication session currently carried by a mobile subscriber station (MSS) while switching from a first base station to a second base station. During the communication session that is being held with the MSS, a first IP datagram is determined from among a plurality of IP datagrams associated with that communication session and received at a network gateway adapted to convey IP traffic received from the MSS. Following that determination, IP datagrams that will be received at that network gateway after that first IP datagram and which are addressed to the MSS are backed up. Upon establishing a connection between the MSS and the second base station, the first base station ceases to convey uplink traffic originated by the MSS, the IP datagrams that were backed up are forwarded to the MSS, and all further IP datagrams which are addressed to the MSS and received at that network gateway after establishing the connection between the MSS and the second base station, will be forwarded to the MSS through the second base station. | 08-27-2009 |
20090213811 | Roaming encoded information reading terminal - A portable encoded information reading (EIR) terminal for incorporation in a data collection system having a host computer, a plurality of peer EIR terminals, and a plurality of interconnected networks including one or more wireless networks, can comprise a central processing unit (CPU), a memory, an encoded information reading (EIR) device configured to output raw message data containing an encoded message or decoded message data corresponding to an encoded message, and at least one wireless communication interface. The EIR terminal can provide IEEE 802.11-conformant wireless distribution system services, including association, disassociation, distribution, integration, and re-association, to the peer EIR terminals. The EIR terminal can be associated with a home network and have a home address belonging to the address range associated with the home network. The EIR terminal can participate in one or more communication sessions and exchange messages, at least one of which can include decoded message data corresponding to an encoded message, with the host computer. The EIR terminal can maintain active communication sessions using its home address when roaming between the interconnected networks. | 08-27-2009 |
20090213812 | METHOD OF SCANNING CELLS BASED ON LBS INFORMATION AND SELECTING HETEROGENEOUS CELLS - A method of scanning cells based on location based service (LBS) information and selecting heterogeneous cells is provided. The method includes, at a mobile station, setting a supplementary field of a registration request message and notifying a base station whether or not handover based on location information is supported, while performing a network entry process, generating location based service (LBS) information while scanning is performed using the coordinates of base stations of an LBS advertisement message received from the base station, if channel quality measured by the mobile station is less than a threshold value, including the generated LBS information in a scanning report message and transmitting the scanning report message to the base station, receiving recommended base station information of the heterogeneous cells selected based on the LBS information from the base station, and performing the scanning on the basis of the recommended base station information. By this configuration, it is possible to reduce a time consumed for the scanning performed by the mobile station and reduce the latency of cell selection/reselection/handover, by reducing the number of target cells which will be scanned by the mobile station on the basis of the LBS information of the mobile station in the scanning process which is performed before the cell selection/reselection/handover between the heterogeneous cells. | 08-27-2009 |
20090219886 | Arrangements and Method for Handling Macro Diversity in UTRAN - The present invention relates to a Diversity Handover, DHO, node adapted to execute a macro diversity functionality in a mobile telecommunication system and a method and a computer program product thereof. The DHO node comprises means for performing an uplink combining of Dedicated Channel, DCH, frames wherein said DHO node comprises means for estimating the size of an adaptive receive window for receiving said DCH frames, the adaptive receive window comprises a starting point, denoted ref, and an end point for receiving a next DCH frame or a next set of DCH frames to be combined having a Connection Frame Number n, CFN | 09-03-2009 |
20090219887 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF PROCESSING NON-STICKY ASSIGNMENTS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method and apparatus for management of Non-Sticky Assignments in a wireless communication system comprising receiving Non-Sticky Forward Link Assignment block with matching broadcast or unicast MACID, determining value of FLImplicitDeassignEnabled and determining TunedAway indication. | 09-03-2009 |
20090219888 | System and Method for Providing Connection Handoffs in Wireless Networks - System and method for providing connection handoffs from macrocell to femtocell in wireless networks. A method comprises determining a group identifier from a received pseudorandom number sequence, determining a list of access points from a plurality of access points, wherein the access points in the list of access points are all identified by a group identifier, transmitting a request for detecting an identifier of the communications device to each access point in the list of access points, receiving a positive acknowledgement from a locating access point in the list of access points, and locating the communications device in a coverage area of the locating access point. The acknowledgement indicates that the locating access point successfully detected the identifier. | 09-03-2009 |
20090219889 | Method and Apparatus for Utilizing Synchronization Information - A communication method and system are provided that include providing synchronization information about a co-sited downlink carrier. This information may be transmitted to from a base station to a mobile device. The mobile device may receive this information and perform handover or measurements based on the received synchronization information. | 09-03-2009 |
20090219890 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING S1 SIGNALING CONNECTION IN AN EVOLVED NETWORK - A method, apparatus and system for establishing S1 signaling connections in an evolved network are disclosed. A source evolved NodeB (eNodeB) sends a HANDOVER REQUEST message that carries original S1 signaling connection parameter information to a target eNodeB to initiate a process that a user equipment (UE) is handed over to the target eNodeB. When the UE enters the target cell, the target eNodeB allocates a new S1 signaling connection parameter and sends a HANDOVER COMPLETE message that carries the original S1 signaling connection parameter and the new S1 signaling connection parameter of the new eNodeB to an evolved packet core (EPC). The EPC receives the HANDOVER COMPLETE message that carries the new S1 signaling connection parameter and the original S1 signaling connection parameter. With the present disclosure, the inability of the target eNodeB to establish an S1 signaling connection with the EPC in the related art is effectively solved. | 09-03-2009 |
20090232088 | Network Selection - A mobile station MS | 09-17-2009 |
20090232089 | Fast synchronised transparent handover method and system - A mobile communications system ( | 09-17-2009 |
20090232090 | Performing Handovers For Fixed Mobile Convergence Networks - According to one embodiment, an anchor access gateway receives packets from a home agent. The packets are destined for an access terminal, and the anchor access gateway serves the access terminal. The packets are forwarded to the access terminal. The anchor access gateway receives a handoff request from a target access gateway. The handoff request requests a handover from the anchor access gateway to the target access gateway. The packets are forwarded to the target access gateway in accordance with the handoff request. | 09-17-2009 |
20090232091 | PRECEDENCE AND PREEMPTION EXTENSION FOR REMOTE TERMINALS - Precedence and preemption may be extended for remote terminals. In an example embodiment, a communication node implements a method with respect to a communications system that implements an enhanced multi-level precedence and preemption (eMLPP) scheme. The method includes acts of receiving, mapping, and transmitting. An incoming connection establishment communication having a priority-header value that indicates a priority for a connection to be established is received at the communication node. The priority-header value is mapped to an eMLPP value that indicates a precedence and preemption level for the connection to be established. An outgoing connection establishment communication having the eMLPP value is transmitted from the communication node. | 09-17-2009 |
20090232092 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMPROVING TRANSMISSION RELIABILITY IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - There is provided a method and apparatus for allocating transmission resources in a wireless network in which some of the terminals communicate with the base station by exchanging communication frames that are compatible with a first communication protocol while other terminals receive communications from the base station that are compatible with a second communication protocol by using non-standardized communication frames or communication frames that are compatible with another standardized protocol. The base station transmits a plurality of frames, some of which are compatible with the first communication protocol while others—with the second communication protocol. The terminals that are operative to receive frames of the second communication protocol are capable of decoding frames that are compatible with both communication protocols, whereas terminals that are operative to receive frames of the first communication protocol are capable of decoding only standardized communication frames of the first communication protocol. | 09-17-2009 |
20090232093 | HEADER COMPRESSION OPTIMIZATION METHOD DURING AND AFTER HANDOVERS IN CELLULAR COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The present invention concerns a method for optimizing ROHC RTP (Robust Header Compression Real Time Protocol) compression applied to IP header of data packets stream so as to use more compact formats enable to remain in a steady state, to never discard received packet, and to serve radio resources without requiring to modify ROHC specification. In the method, when handover or mobility procedure is started, new reference values are normally added to a sliding compression window, but no reference value is removed from the window as long as the handover or mobility procedure is on going. After the handover or mobility procedure is complete, when the number of values transmitted on the new radio link are appropriate to cope against the error properties on the new link, all older values can be removed at once from the compression window, thereby reverting to normal window operation. | 09-17-2009 |
20090232094 | METHOD AND FUNCTION FOR MAINTAINING MAPPING BETWEEN MEDIA INDEPENDENT HANDOVER FUNCTIONS AND TRANSPORT ADDRESSES - A media-independent handover (MIH) environment supports a MIH function that uses a mapping table to communicate with other MIH functions using a MIH transport protocol. The MIH function updates the mapping table upon receipt of a message having fields to invoke an operation. The operation can update an existing mapping or delete a mapping. The operation also can update a lifetime value for a mapping for a particular address. The mapping table includes mappings. A mapping includes a MIH function identifier, a list of transport addresses, and a lifetime value. | 09-17-2009 |
20090232095 | METHOD FOR RESOLVING COLLISION OF UPLINK SIGNALS - A method for processing data in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes receiving a first uplink scheduling command indicating a first radio resource, receiving a second uplink scheduling command indicating a second radio resource through a random access response, and stopping a procedure associated with the second uplink scheduling command when the first radio resource and the second radio resource collide. | 09-17-2009 |
20090232096 | BASE STATION, MOBILE TERMINAL, AND PROGRAM STORAGE MEDIUM - There is provided a base station that includes a search request receiving unit configured to receive from a mobile terminal a search request requesting search of a candidate base station for a handover target; an examination request transmitting unit configured to transmit to other base stations an examination request for checking whether or not the mobile terminal is present in the coverage areas of the other base stations when the search request has been received; an examination result receiving unit configured to receive, from the other base stations, examination result information showing whether or not the mobile terminal is present in the coverage areas of the other base stations; and a search response transmitting unit configured to identify one of the other base stations whose coverage area contains the mobile terminal as the candidate base station, and transmit, to the mobile terminal, information on the identified candidate base station. | 09-17-2009 |
20090232097 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for performing handover by wireless User Equipment (UE) is provided. The UE includes a Long Term Evolution-Mobile Extreme Convergence (LTE-MXC) application processor, a LTE processor and a Digital Signal Processor (DSP). The UE buffers a set of IP packets when a Radio Access Technology (RAT) indicator is less than a pre-defined threshold and sends the set of IP packets to the LTE processor and the DSP. The LTE processor transmits the set of IP packets to the LTE network and sends acknowledgement signals to the LTE-MXC application processor and the DSP. When the handover is complete, the LTE processor sends the transmission status of the set of IP packets to the DSP. The UE also includes multimode Radio Resource Control (RRC) and Non-Access Stratum (NAS) modules. | 09-17-2009 |
20090238138 | Relocation Method of Serving Radio Network Controller to Avoid the Interference Caused by UE Measurement Report - A relocation method of SRNC to avoid the interference caused by UE measurement report. For the relocation process of SRNC without other accompanying flow, or the relocation process accompanying with cell update or registration area update, firstly, by sending measurement control when start to relocate, UE does not report the measurement report in SRB2 during he interactive course of UE and UTRAN; then after finishing the relocation, set the UE measurement again. The present invention is easily to realize, the method of the invention can effectively avoid the interference to the relocation SRNC process caused by UE measurement report, and thus improves the stability of the WCDMA system. | 09-24-2009 |
20090238139 | Apparatus and Method for Providing Service for Media Independent Handover - A service providing method and apparatus provides a service for a media independent handover (MIH). A first node receives a first message from a second node, the first message including information about whether the second node supports a service through first layer and whether the second node supports a service through second layer, and the first node selects a service transport layer for providing a service from the first and second layers and provides a service to the second node through the service transport layer. Accordingly, the first node may effectively perform an MIH because it may easily understand the MIH capability of the second node. | 09-24-2009 |
20090238140 | Gateway apparatus and handover method - A gateway apparatus for exchanging packet between a home agent and a mobile station, and being a destination gateway apparatus to which the mobile station is connected by handover, having a transmission unit which transmits to the home agent a simultaneous registration request requesting simultaneous registration of a bi-directional tunnel at both an old route via a source gateway apparatus to which the mobile station is connected before handover, and a new route via the destination gateway apparatus; and a packet control unit which discards one downlink packet of a duplicated downlink packet addressed to the mobile station, when the simultaneous registration is maintained. | 09-24-2009 |
20090238141 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDOVER IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate system frame number (SFN) indication and identification during a random access procedure (e.g., associated with a handover). As described herein, a target cell can configure one or more Random Access Responses (RARs) designated for transmission to a terminal during the access phase of a handover to include the SFN of the target cell. Techniques are further described herein by which the target cell can include SFN information in a sub-header associated with a RAR, in the payload of a RAR, and/or in other appropriate manners. In addition, the target cell can configure one or more flags of the RAR to indicate the presence of SFN information. Upon receiving a RAR with embedded SFN information, a terminal can utilize the SFN for operations such as frequency hopping or uplink resource configuration as described herein. | 09-24-2009 |
20090238142 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING PDCP STATUS REPORT - A method of transmitting PDCP (Packet Data Convergence Protocol) status reports, is performed by a mobile terminal by receiving, from an upper layer, a request for PDCP (Packet Data Convergence Protocol) re-establishment; detecting whether there are any out-of-sequence PDCP SDUs (service data units) stored; and if there is at least one out-of-sequence PDCP SDU stored, allocating a bitmap field of length in bits equal to the number of PDCP SNs from and not including the first out-of-sequence PDCP SDU up to and including a last out-of-sequence PDCP SDU. | 09-24-2009 |
20090238143 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO ENABLE FALLBACK TO CIRCUIT SWITCHED DOMAIN FROM PACKET SWITCHED DOMAIN - A method and apparatus are used to perform a Circuit Switched (CS) fallback in wireless communications. The Non-Access Stratum (NAS) of the apparatus determines whether to perform a CS fallback based on an Internet Protocol (IP) Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) registration status, and sends a service request indicating a request to perform the CS fallback when the WTRU is attached to a CS domain. The apparatus also includes an Access Stratum (AS) that receives the CS service request from the NAS, sends an indication of the CS service request in a Radio Resource Control (RRC) message to an Evolved Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN), wherein the RRC message includes CS service information, and receives a handover command in response to the CS service request. | 09-24-2009 |
20090238144 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF FEEDBACK SIGNALING - A method and apparatus of feedback signaling using a high speed dedicated physical control channel (HS-DPCCH) includes transmitting to a first cell a first uplink feedback signal that includes channel quality information (CQI) associated with the first cell. A second uplink feedback signal that includes CQI information associated with a second cell is transmitted to the second cell. | 09-24-2009 |
20090238145 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION WITH LOW-OVERHEAD MOBILITY MANAGEMENT - A method and apparatus for supporting handover of mobile communications is provided. A router performs routing services in a service area. The router maintains a location table configured to store current router addresses of mobile nodes that have the router as a home router. The router receives data intended for mobile nodes that are listed in the location table and are in the routers service area. The router receives a user datagram protocol (UDP) message from a mobile node when it leaves the service area. The UDP message includes an IP address of a new router in the mobile node's new service area. The router updates the location table with the new IP address and transmits data intended for the mobile node to the new router until the data is redirected at the source. | 09-24-2009 |
20090238146 | OPTIMIZED DATA RECONNECT - A method of optimizing reconnection of a point to point protocol link layer in a mobile device comprising the steps of: monitoring whether the mobile device has entered a new zone; starting a stabilization period when the mobile device enters a new zone; checking whether the mobile device enters a different zone during the stabilization period; if the mobile device enters a different zone during the stabilization period, restarting the stabilization period and performing the checking step; and if the mobile device does not enter a new zone during the stabilization period, determining whether the mobile device is in a new zone, reconnecting to the new zone if the mobile device is in the new zone, and otherwise performing no reconnection. | 09-24-2009 |
20090238147 | System and Method of Transitioning Between Cellular and Voice Over Internet Protocol Communication - A computer implemented method includes determining, at a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) base station, that a mobile device capable of communicating via a Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) and via the WLAN is within a range of the WLAN base station. The computer implemented method includes sending a registration message including an Internet Protocol (IP) address from the WLAN base station to the mobile phone device. The mobile device sends a call forwarding message from the mobile phone device to a network element of the WWAN after receiving the registration message. The call forwarding message redirects a call destined for the mobile phone device to the WLAN base station for transmission to the mobile phone device. The computer implemented method includes receiving the redirected call from the WWAN. The computer implemented method includes sending the redirected call to the mobile phone device when the mobile phone device is within the range of the WLAN base station, but not sending the redirected call from the WLAN to the mobile phone device when the mobile phone device is outside the range of the WLAN base station. | 09-24-2009 |
20090245199 | WIRELESS HAND-OVER IN MOBILE DEPLOYMENTS - The network communication system includes a wireless interface to exchange wireless signals during at least one network connection, and a handover controller that uses a route profile identifying access points distributed over a given route or region that are capable of supporting the network connection, and to handover the network connection between access points as the device travels along the given route or through a region according to the route profile. | 10-01-2009 |
20090245200 | Method and apparatus for communication between wireless telecommunications networks of different technology types - For handover between wireless telecommunications networks of different technology types, an air interface is set up between a first node | 10-01-2009 |
20090245201 | BASE STATION, PATH CONTROL APPARATUS AND HANDOVER CONTROL METHOD - A path control apparatus includes a sequence number assignment unit assigning successive sequence numbers to respective user data packets transmitted from an upper layer; and a transmission unit transmitting the user data packets with the assigned sequence numbers to a handover source base station or a handover target base station. A base station includes a sequence correction unit sorting at least one of a user data packet transmitted from a path control apparatus and a user data packet transferred from a handover source base station in a correct order in accordance with sequence numbers successively assigned to respective user data packets; and a transfer unit transferring one or more user data packets of the user data packets having the assigned sequence numbers, wherein the handover source base station has not transmitted the one or more user data packets or waits for transmission acknowledgement for the one or more user data packets. | 10-01-2009 |
20090245202 | TUNNEL HANDOVER BETWEEN A WLAN AND A CELLULAR NETWORK - A method, dedicated to the management of the interworking between a wireless local area network and a mobile network, consists, in case of reception by an SGSN node (S | 10-01-2009 |
20090245203 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING A SERVING HS-DSCH CELL CHANGE - A method and apparatus for performing a serving high speed downlink shared channel (HS-DSCH) cell change from a source cell to a target cell are disclosed. A radio network controller (RNC) may pre-load a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) with HS-DSCH configuration for the target cell. The WTRU receives and stores the pre-loaded HS-DSCH configuration. The WTRU may start monitoring a high speed shared control channel (HS-SCCH) on the target cell using the pre-loaded HS-DSCH configuration for the target cell on a condition that a measurement report is triggered by the event | 10-01-2009 |
20090245204 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR CARRYING OUT A HANDOVER BETWEEN BASE STATIONS OF A MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK FOR A MOBILE TERMINAL - A method and system for carrying out a handover between base stations of a telecommunication network. Each mobile terminal is in communication with a set of base stations including at least a first and a second base stations, the first base station receiving downlink data to be transmitted within data packets bearing a downlink sequence number to a first mobile terminal from an access gateway of the telecommunication network. The method includes determining a downlink sequence number, sending a handover request message to the second base station comprising the determined downlink sequence number and information related to the set of base station, requesting the second base station to receive data to be transmitted to the first mobile terminal from the access gateway, and stopping building data packets if the built data packets would bear a sequence number equal or higher than the determined downlink sequence number. | 10-01-2009 |
20090245205 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING REVERSE-LINK DATA TRANSMISSION RATE DURING HANDOFF - Method and apparatus for controlling data transmission rate in a wireless communication system during handoff comprises a terminal recognizing an active set comprising a serving base station and at least one non-serving base station with respect to the terminal communicating with the network at a first data transmission rate, receiving a first rate control parameter from the serving base station and a second rate control parameter from the at least one non-serving base station, wherein the first and second rate control parameters are associated with determination of a second data transmission rate of the terminal during the handoff and determining the second data transmission rate in response to the first and the second rate control parameters, wherein the second data transmission rate is one of increased rate, decreased rate and same rate from the first data transmission rate. | 10-01-2009 |
20090245206 | METHOD FOR SEARCHING FOR RADIO NETWORK, AND SYSTEM, AND MULTIMODE DEVICE - A method for searching for a radio network, and system, and a multimode device, which shortens the delay of handing over the multimode device between networks and reduces the power consumption of the multimode device in searching for the network. In the embodiments of the present invention, the multimode device uses the second network as an area reference. A correlation is preset between each area in the second network and the radio network parameters of the first network in the area. Therefore, the multimode device searches the first network according to the radio network parameters of the first network correlated with the current area in the second network when it moves. The correlation information may be stored in the management device of the first network, or the management device of the second network, or stored in the multimode device directly. | 10-01-2009 |
20090252113 | Radio Communication System, Base Station, Mobile Device, and Handover Control Server - A handover control server calculates a weight function of each peripheral cell of a cell to which a mobile device is currently connected, and notifies a cell list to the mobile device. The mobile device measures wireless-line qualities of peripheral cells registered in the cell list and the currently connected cell, calculates a peripheral-cell selection parameter of each cell based on a measured wireless-line quality, the cell list, weight function information, and a wireless-access capacity of the mobile device, and selects candidate cells of a handover destination based on a calculated peripheral-cell selection parameter. | 10-08-2009 |
20090252114 | Method and System for Supporting Seamless Handover of Mobile Node Using Mobile Stream Control Transmission Protocol - A method and system for supporting a seamless handover of a mobile node using a mobile Stream Control Transmission Protocol (mSCTP) to support the mobility of the mobile node are provided. In the method and system, a change in data link layer information, which occurs when the mobile node moves into a new sub-network, is detected and changed data link layer information is transmitted to a network layer. A new Internet protocol (IP) address for the new sub-network is acquired in the network layer using the changed data link layer information. The new IP address is transmitted to a transport layer and dynamic address setting is performed in the transport layer using the mSCTP. | 10-08-2009 |
20090252115 | Handoff Preparation Method in a Radio Communication System - In a wireless communication system, signals within a connection on a wireless interface are transmitted exclusively in a packet-switched manner between a user station and an access device located on the network. The user station signals a need to measure signals to the access device, the access device sends measurement signaling to the user station, and the user station measures signals of at least one additional access device located on the network at a second frequency range while receiving data packets within the connection at a first frequency range based on the received measurement signaling, the second frequency range being disjunct from the first frequency range. | 10-08-2009 |
20090252116 | Multiple Action Times in Mobile WiMAX Fast Handover - A base station and a method for handover of a mobile station from a serving base station to a target base station of a mobile telecommunication network. Invitations may be sent from a base station to the mobile station, and the invitations may be invitations to send a request for a fast handover procedure from the mobile station to a base station. | 10-08-2009 |
20090252117 | MODULAR CELL PHONE FOR FIXED MOBILE CONVERGENCE - A communication system including a communication system, including a modular cell phone, including a baseband modem for connecting to a core mobile network via a cellular network, and a connector for physically connecting the modular cell phone to a port of a mobile electronic device, and a mobile electronic device, including a modem for connecting to the core mobile network via an IP access network, a port for physically connecting the modular cell phone to the mobile electronic device, and a connection enhancer for receiving a connection of an ongoing cellular phone call, between the modular cell phone and the core mobile network via the cellular network, and seamlessly handing over the ongoing phone call to a voice over IP connection, between the mobile electronic device and the core mobile network via the IP access network, in response to the modular cell phone being connected with the mobile electronic device port. A method is also described and claimed. | 10-08-2009 |
20090252118 | HANDOFF BETWEEN PACKET-SWITCHED NETWORK AND CIRCUIT-SWITCHED NETWORK - Techniques for supporting handoff of terminals between a packet-switched network and a circuit-switched network are described. In an aspect, handoff between packet-switched and circuit-switched networks may be facilitated by a designated network entity in the packet-switched network. The designated network entity may interface with both the packet-switched network and the circuit-switched network, perform circuit-switched call origination, and perform handoff procedure. In one design, a first terminal may communicate with the packet-switched network for a packet-switched call with a second terminal. The first terminal may initiate handoff to the circuit-switched network via the designated network entity. The first terminal may perform handoff from the packet-switched network to the circuit-switched network based on an inter-MSC handoff procedure. The first terminal may then communicate with the circuit-switched network for the circuit-switched call with the second terminal after the handoff. | 10-08-2009 |
20090252119 | PROCEDURE FOR NON SYNCHRONIZED RADIO ACCESS (NSRA) RESOURCE ASSIGNMENT - A procedure for RACH initial access in a mobile terminal is provided such that necessary information is conveyed the for the initial access procedure with less overhead. The method allow an accurate choice of the uplink transport format by allowing the mobile terminal to determine by itself whether a certain transport format may be used for the transmission of a message prior to the first preamble transmission and prior to the power ramping. | 10-08-2009 |
20090252120 | METHOD OF COMMUNICATION SUPPORTING MEDIA INDEPENDENT HANDOVER - The present invention relates to performing handover of a mobile terminal to a network. Preferably, the present invention generates a first heterogeneous protocol message from a heterogeneous network handover module to a medium access control (MAC) of the mobile terminal, wherein the heterogeneous network handover module is configured to provide convergence of information from at least one network interface module associated with one of a homogeneous and heterogeneous network into a unified presentation. A management request associated with a handover process is then transmitted to a serving network, wherein the management request comprises the first heterogeneous protocol message. Accordingly, messages can be remotely exchanged via a radio section between heterogeneous network handover modules of a mobile terminal and a serving network. Therefore, messages are transferred faster and media independent handover is performed more quickly. | 10-08-2009 |
20090252121 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING A MEDIA INDEPENDENT HANDOVER MESSAGE - A method for transmitting a media independent handover (MIH) message includes the following steps: The MIH message is divided into segments and the segments are encapsulated into transmission control protocol (TCP) segments; the TCP segments are then encapsulated into Internet protocol (IP) data packets; the IP data packets is transmitted to a receiving end. The method, system, and device for transmitting an MIH message described herein provide flow controls for the MIH message transmission, thereby enhancing the transmission efficiency of the MIH message. | 10-08-2009 |
20090257397 | Method for proactive coordinator appropriation for wireless personal area network - Provided is a method for switching a piconet device to a coordinator in a piconet. The method receives the latest order of precedence as the next PNC information from the current PNC. Thereafter, the method detects a P-CTA allocated to devices of the piconet using a beacon of a superframe received from the PNC. On failing to receive a beacon from the PNC, the method detects whether “beacon non-receipt” indicating information that is transmitted between piconet devices during the detected P-CTA. If the “beacon non-receipt” indicating information is not detected, the method does not perform a PNC appropriation operation. If the “beacon non-receipt” indicating information is detected, the method determines that the PNC has left the piconet without performing a normal PNC handover procedure and thus performs a PNC appropriation operation according to the order of precedence information. | 10-15-2009 |
20090257398 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A radio communication system includes a plurality of base stations with supporting a plurality of radio access schemes. Two or more base stations support a predetermined radio access scheme in common. A mobile station makes initial connection to one of the two or more base stations according to the predetermined radio access scheme, to allow communication with the one base station. | 10-15-2009 |
20090257399 | Method and Apparatus for Handling Handover Procedure - The present invention provides a method for handling a handover procedure for a Radio Resource Control (RRC) layer in a user equipment (UE) of a wireless communication system. The method includes steps of indicating occurrence of a handover procedure to a Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) layer of the UE when receiving an RRC Connection Reconfiguration message for triggering the handover procedure, applying a new security configuration to the PDCP layer if the RRC Connection Reconfiguration message includes an information element (IE) for providing the security configuration, and requesting a Medium Access Control (MAC) layer of the UE to initiate a random access procedure for the handover procedure. | 10-15-2009 |
20090257400 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDOVER BETWEEN A NETWORK SUPPORTING PROXY MOBILE IP AND A NETWORK SUPPORTING MOBILE IP - A method and an apparatus for supporting handover between a first network supporting proxy mobile Internet Protocol (IP) (PMIP) and a second network supporting mobile IP (MIP) are disclosed. A PMIP entity in the first network may perform home agent (HA) discovery such that the PMIP entity may select an HA that responds with a pre-determined code indicating that a binding entry for the WTRU exists in the HA. The PMIP entity may store the HA IP address in an authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) server. The PMIP entity may retrieve the HA IP address for the WTRU from the AAA server when the WTRU is readmitted, and perform a binding update using the HA IP address. A media independent handover (MIH) client may trigger an HA discovery to obtain an HA IP address without performing MIP registration. The MIP client may retain the HA IP address when disabled. | 10-15-2009 |
20090257401 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE ROUTER AND HOME AGENT - The present invention provides a new technique, according to which inefficient and redundant routing can be eliminated, which may occur when the fast handover is applied to network mobility and which may cause delay. According to this technique, a mobile router (MR) | 10-15-2009 |
20090257402 | INTRA-SYSTEM HANDOFF METHOD - The present invention provides an intra-system handoff method, comprising the following steps: S | 10-15-2009 |
20090257403 | METHOD OF COMMUNICATING IN WIRELESS NETWORK - The present invention relates to a handover method that a current coordinator transfers a coordinating function of controlling a network to a different device configuring the network. The present invention relates to a method of selecting an optimal device as a coordinator in selecting the different device using priority information decided by a prescribed evaluation reference. And, the present invention relates to a method of simplifying a procedure in a manner of transmitting relevant information together with a handover request message. In a wireless network including a coordinator, a secondary coordinator is decided in advance. If the coordinator is suddenly unable to perform a function, the present invention relates to a method of enabling the function of the coordinator to be performed by the decided secondary coordinator. Thus, a process for transferring the coordinating function without the handover process is called a recovery process. The present invention relates to the recovery method and a method of deciding a secondary coordinator to perform a recovery. In the method of deciding the secondary coordinator, a method of deciding a more proper coordinator using information on coordinator priority is provided. | 10-15-2009 |
20090257404 | GENERATING A PUBLIC LONG CODE MASK IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A method of generating a public long code mask (PLCM) in a mobile station in a wireless mobile communication network is provided. The method comprises receiving a message in the mobile station from a base station when the mobile terminal is handed off, the message comprising a first field including a first value, a second field including a second value, and a third field including least significant bits of the PLCM; and generating the PLCM using the least significant bits included in the third field. | 10-15-2009 |
20090262701 | DATA TRANSFER METHOD AND BASE STATION - The present invention relates to a data transfer method which transfers user data of a mobile station, which is stored in a buffer of the handover source base station, from a handover source base station to a handover target base station, when the mobile station performs a handover. The data transfer method according to the present invention includes: determining, at the handover source base station, a transfer order of the user data; and transferring, at the handover source base station, the user data to the handover target base station based on the transfer order. | 10-22-2009 |
20090262702 | Method and Apparatus for Direct Transfer of RANAP Messages in a Home Node B System - Some embodiments are implemented in a communication system that includes a first communication system comprised of a licensed wireless radio access network and a core network, and a second communication system comprising a plurality of user hosted access points and a network controller. In some embodiments, each access point operates using short range licensed wireless frequencies to establish a service region. In some embodiments, the network controller communicatively couples the core network to the plurality of access points. The method establishes a communication through a Radio Access Network Application Part (RANAP) message from an access point to the network controller to explicitly indicate the start of a communication session. The method then passes a set of direct transfer messages, comprised in part of the RANAP message, to the core network. | 10-22-2009 |
20090262703 | Method and Apparatus for Encapsulation of RANAP Messages in a Home Node B System - Some embodiments are implemented in a communication system that includes a first communication system comprised of a licensed wireless radio access network and a core network, and a second communication system comprising a plurality of user hosted access points and a network controller. In some embodiments, each access point operates using short range licensed wireless frequencies to establish a service region. In some embodiments, the network controller communicatively couples the core network to the plurality of access points. The method creates a data structure comprised of a header with a core network domain identity and a context identifier, and payload data which contains the RANAP message. | 10-22-2009 |
20090262704 | Method and Apparatus for Establishment of Asynchronous Transfer Mode Based Bearer Connection between a Network Controller and Core Network - Some embodiments are implemented in a communication system that includes a first communication system comprised of a licensed wireless radio access network and a core network, and a second communication system comprising a plurality of user hosted access points and a network controller. In some embodiments, each access point operates using short range licensed wireless frequencies to establish a service region. In some embodiments, the network controller communicatively couples the core network to the plurality of access points. The method establishes, at a network controller, a bearer connection between an access point and the core network indicating an asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) based bearer connection. The method also establishes an internet protocol (IP) based bearer connection. The method also establishes a user plane between the access point and the core network and routes user plane data to the core network through the ATM based bearer connection. | 10-22-2009 |
20090262705 | SYSTEM FOR HANDOVER IN BWA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD THEREOF - A handover method and system in a communication system. In the method, a serving Base Station (BS) broadcasts neighbor BS information including BS identifiers and preamble indices of a plurality of neighbor BSs, receives a handover request message from a Mobile Station (MS), the handover request message including a first set of at least one BS identifier and at least one preamble index for at least one neighbor BS among the plurality of neighbor BSs, and transmits a handover response message to the MS, the handover response message including a second set of at least one BS identifier and at least one preamble index for at least one recommended neighbor BS. | 10-22-2009 |
20090262706 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR CONVERTING SESSION CONTROL SIGNALING - A method, system, and device for converting session control signaling are provided. The method includes at least one of the following steps: a first adaptation unit converts a session control signaling message of a circuit switched (CS) session leg into a session control signaling message of an IP multimedia subsystem (IMS) session leg; or the first adaptation unit converts a session control signaling message of an IMS session leg into a session control signaling message of a CS session leg. In embodiments of the present invention, an adaptation unit intercepts a CS signaling message after an inter-mobile switching center (MSC) handover, and converts CS signaling messages to IMS signaling messages and vice versa, so that the IMS domain may continue to control a session after the inter-MSC handover. | 10-22-2009 |
20090268687 | METHOD OF SUPPORTING HANDOVER IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of supporting handover at a user equipment in a mobile communication system is disclosed according to the present invention. The method comprises receiving, from a source network node, first identification information identifying at least one data block transferred from the source network node to a target network node during handover, transmitting, to a target network node, second identification information identifying at least one data block to be received from the target network node during the handover, and receiving a data block from the target network node, the data block being transmitted by the target network node based on the second identification information. | 10-29-2009 |
20090268688 | ACTIVE SET THRESHOLD ADJUSTMENT METHOD FOR USE IN WIRELESS INTERNET SYSTEM - Provided is an active set threshold adjustment method for use in a wireless Internet system. The method includes: calculating a resource utilization RU of a base station; calculating an average resource utilization RU | 10-29-2009 |
20090268689 | Forwarding learnt state information to target node at mobility - A method for handover in a telecommunication system is disclosed. The method determines a traffic time pattern in a handover situation where a user equipment is handed over from a source cell to a target cell in the telecommunication system. History information relating to a traffic time pattern used in the source cell by the user equipment being handed over is forwarded from a controller node of said source cell to a controller node of said target cell. In the target cell, a traffic time pattern to be used by said user equipment in said target cell after the handover is estimated by taking into consideration at least said history information. | 10-29-2009 |
20090274114 | METHOD FOR UPDATING DNS ADDRESS IN MOBILE IP TERMINAL - The present invention relates to a method for updating a domain name server (DNS) address by obtaining the DNS address when an IP address is allocated by using a mobile IP address in a mobile terminal using the portable internet based on a wireless mobile network. In the method at least one DNS address connected to the wireless mobile network is sampled (S | 11-05-2009 |
20090274115 | WLAN Roaming and Selection Using Managed WLAN Handover Process - This patent application discloses a “netsurfing” method for a terminal system A | 11-05-2009 |
20090274116 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETECTING POSITION OF MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL BY USING PILOT STRENGTH MEASUREMENT MESSAGE - There is provided a system for detecting a location of a mobile station (MS) by using a pilot strength measurement message (PSMM) in a mobile communication system providing a location-based service in a mobile communication network, comprising: a position determination entity (PDE) for detecting the location of the mobile station, collecting PSMM information from the mobile station, the location detection of which is required, and obtaining the location of the mobile station by using collected PSMM information. | 11-05-2009 |
20090274117 | Handover Method in Mobile Phone Network - The invention provides for a handover method for use in relation to a mobile radio communications device arranged for communication with an access service gateway by way of an eNodeB arrangement and comprising the steps of, subsequent to the receipt of a handover request at the mobile radio communications device from a eNodeB, delivering a handover indication message to the access service gateway and prior to completion of the handover, the handover indication serving to prevent transmission of downlink data from the access service gateway and at least until further eNodeB messaging is received, and the invention also providing for a related mobile radio communication network arrangement and a eNodeB arrangement. | 11-05-2009 |
20090274118 | METHOD FOR PREVENTING PIN-PONG HANDOVER EFFECT IN MOBILE WIMAX NETWORKS - To prevent a handover ping-pong effect between base-station in WiMAX-compliant networks, a priority level is firstly assigned to the trigger causes for handover, and the prioritized causes are coded. Then codes are subdivided into a first class of unrestricted handovers and a second class of handover subjected to restriction. The first class includes the highest priority handovers. The second class includes a given subset of handovers with a high or normal priority intended for optimizing resources. Outside this subset the second class also includes handovers for power budget having a normal priority level. When an outgoing handover is decided, the actual serving BS either permits or selectively suppresses the Handover Request to the target BS when the latter is corresponding to the preceding serving BS for that mobile. The selection mechanism operates on the second class of restricted handovers, during a penalty time triggered by the occurrence of handover causes included in the given subset of the second class. | 11-05-2009 |
20090274119 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR RF HANDOFF IN A MULTI-FREQUENCY NETWORK - Methods and apparatus for RF handoff in a multi-frequency network. A method includes detecting a mobility event associated with a detection of a new wide area operating infrastructure (WOI), updating a current WOI identifier to a new WOI identifier, acquiring control channel information associated with the new WOI identifier, determining if an active registered flow list has been updated based on the control channel information, and performing an acquisition procedure to acquire one or more registered flows if it is determined that the active registered flow list has been updated. Another method includes detecting a mobility event associated with a detection of a new local area operating infrastructure (LOI), updating a current LOI identifier to a new LOI identifier, acquiring control channel information, determining if an active registered flow list has been updated, and performing an acquisition procedure to acquire one or more registered flows. | 11-05-2009 |
20090274120 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MULTICARRIER UPLINK CONTROL - An uplink control method for use in a communication system based on multiple carriers. The method includes allocating different types of random access channels for different types of uplink operations. | 11-05-2009 |
20090274121 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY MONITORING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A method and apparatus are provided for radio access technology (RAT) monitoring, in a wireless system environment having wireless communications equipment and at least two different RATs that coexist for providing to the equipment access to one or more communications networks. The equipment has at least two subsystems, each adapted for establishing and maintaining an active communications connection with a certain one of the different RATs. The equipment selects at least a first RAT, among all the RATs available in a certain geographical area, for establishing the active communications connection, according to a monitored characteristic of the first RAT. The method includes scanning a characteristic of a second RAT available for communication in the geographical area while the equipment maintains an active communications connection with the first RAT, and performing the scanning step when the equipment does not transmit signals through the active communications connection maintained with the first RAT. | 11-05-2009 |
20090274122 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILITY MANAGEMENT NETWORK ELEMENT AND METHOD FOR PROCESSING RESOURCE - A method for processing resource, a communication system, and a mobility management network element are provided. The method includes: receiving, by a mobility management network element in a packet switched (PS) network, a Release Request message sent by an access network of the PS network or a Handoff Complete message sent by a circuit switched (CS) network when a user equipment (UE) is handed over from the PS network to the CS network; and processing, by the mobility management network element of the PS network, resources of the UE in the PS network. Thus, the processing of resources of the UE in the PS network is achieved when the UE is handed over from the PS network to the CS network. A communication system and a mobility management network element are also provided. | 11-05-2009 |
20090279502 | INTERNETWORKING BETWEEN WMAN AND WLAN NETWORKS - According to one general aspect, a method of using a base station (BS) comprising receiving, by the BS of a first wireless network, a notification that a mobile station (MS) is entering a semi-idle state with respect to the first network, wherein the semi-idle mode is also associated with the MS performing a handover from a first wireless network based upon a first networking standard to a second wireless network based upon a second networking standard. Further comprising storing a portion of a set of context information associated with the MS. Also comprising allocating uplink resources for the MS only to receive location update messages from the MS. And, maintaining at least some of the context information of the MS. | 11-12-2009 |
20090279503 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MULTIMODE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION HANDOFF - Methods and apparatus for base-station-assisted handover between WiMAX (Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access) and CDMA (Code Division Multiple Access) EVDO (Evolution-Data Optimized) or 1xRTT (one times Radio Transmission Technology, or 1x) networks during normal operation of a dual-mode mobile station (MS) are provided. By having a base station (BS) using one radio access technology (RAT) broadcast information about a BS in a neighboring cell employing a different RAT, the methods and apparatus may improve service continuity during handover. | 11-12-2009 |
20090279504 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MULTIMODE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION HANDOFF - Methods and apparatus for autonomous handover between WiMAX (Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access) and CDMA (Code Division Multiple Access) EVDO (Evolution-Data Optimized) or 1×RTT (one times Radio Transmission Technology, or 1×) networks during normal operation of a dual-mode mobile station (MS) are provided. The methods and apparatus may improve service continuity during handover and need not require any changes to the WiMAX or CDMA standards. | 11-12-2009 |
20090279505 | SERVICE ZONE SWITCHING METHOD BASED ON LOAD CONSIDERING INTER-CELL INTERFERENCE IN 802.16/WIBRO SYSTEMS - There is provided a method of switching a zone through which services are provided to subscriber stations (SS) in an environment using an FRF-1 zone and an FRF-3 zone based on traffic load of each zone in order to reduce the inter-cell interference in 802.16/WiBro systems. The service zone switching method based on load considering inter-cell interference in 802.16/WiBro systems may be useful to minimize the inter-cell interference, enhance the capacity of cells and improve users' transmission quality in the cells by determining whether the services are provided through one out of an FRF-1 zone (a zone where users in 3 sectors of one cell can use all subchannels) and an FRF-3 zone (a zone where users in each of 3 sectors of one cell can use one third of all subchannels; 3 sectors of one cell use 3 channel group, respectively), which are present in one frame, based on the distribution and traffic load of subscriber stations (SS) present in one cell, which consists of 3 sector units, under the environment of the 802.16/WiBro systems, and providing services through the selected zone. | 11-12-2009 |
20090279506 | FIXED-MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS WITH MID-SESSION MODE SWITCHING - A method for performing mode-agile communications during a communications session is disclosed. A communications terminal device supporting multiple modes of access is configured to determine when, during a session involving a first mode of access communications, a second mode of access is available and is to be used for subsequent communications for the session. The communications terminal device initiates or controls switchover from one mode of access to another. | 11-12-2009 |
20090285174 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL APPARATUS, CONTROL STATION, AND MULTICARRIER COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication terminal apparatus wherein a base station apparatus uses only subcarriers, which provide good propagation circumstance for the communication terminal apparatus, to transmit data, thereby improving the transmission efficiency of the whole system and wherein the frequency scheduling is performed in view of whether the user exists in a handover area, thereby providing a site diversity effect and hence improving the reception quality and the throughput. In this apparatus, a cell-# | 11-19-2009 |
20090285175 | Efficient Handover of Media Communications in Heterogeneous IP Networks - Methods and systems are provided for efficient handover of a media session between heterogeneous IP networks. A mobile device with Internet access can operate a software program to communicate with a corresponding node. The corresponding node may access the Internet through either (i) a NAT router or (ii) a public IP address. The mobile device establishes a media session with a corresponding node via the transmission of a first media stream and receipt of a second media stream, and a media control channel can optionally be implemented. The mobile device can acquire Internet access through a second IP address, and packets routed between the second IP address and the Internet may traverse a NAT router. A software routine can determine that handover of the media session from the first IP address to the second IP address is preferred. The mobile device may begin transmitting a third media stream to the corresponding node before the first media stream stops. The corresponding node can transmit a fourth media stream to the second IP address before terminating the transmission of the second stream to the first IP address. Software operating at the mobile device may include a handover predictive jitter buffer. | 11-19-2009 |
20090285176 | FRAMEWORK FOR INTERNETWORKING BETWEEN WMAN AND WLAN NETWORKS - According to one general aspect, a method of using a customer premises equipment (CPE) to represent a mobile station (MS) to a base station (BS) is described. Wherein the CPE and the BS are part of a first wireless network based upon a first networking standard, and the MS and the CPE are part of a second wireless network based upon a second networking standard. The method comprising associating the MS with the CPE. The method further comprising indicating to the BS that the CPE is acting as an agent for the MS on the second wireless network. Also comprising acting as an agent, on the second wireless network, for the MS. And comprising, storing context information related to the MS, wherein the context information includes MS context information related the first network and MS context information related the second network. | 11-19-2009 |
20090285177 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR ACCELERATING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION HANDOVER - Methods and apparatus for ranging with one or more neighboring sectors during normal operation of a mobile station (MS) with its serving sector are provided. The ranging results may be frequently updated in an effort to accelerate the handover process to another base station (BS) providing coverage for one of the neighboring sectors. | 11-19-2009 |
20090285178 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR MOBILE WIMAX THREE-WAY DOWNLINK CONCURRENT PROCESSING AND THREE-WAY HANDOVER - Methods and apparatus for establishing multiple connections between a wireless device and multiple base stations and transferring data using these connections via different segments of an orthogonal frequency division multiple access (OFDMA) frame are provided. The multiple connections may be used for multi-way (e.g., three-way) concurrent processing, multi-way (e.g., three-way) handover, or a hybrid between concurrent processing and multi-way handover in an effort to increase data throughput for the wireless device. | 11-19-2009 |
20090285179 | Long-Term Evolution (LTE) Packet Data Network Gateway (PDN-GW) Selection - The current 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) long-term evolution reference architecture defines a packet data network gateway (PDN-GW) selection function which is responsible for allocation of a packet data network gateway that provides packet data network connectivity for 3GPP and non-3GPP access for a given session. Systems and methods are provided for moving the PDN-GW selection function to a centralized network element (the HSS network element) for both 3GPP and non-3GPP access. | 11-19-2009 |
20090285180 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACCESSING A RANDOM ACCESS CHANNEL BY SELECTIVELY USING DEDICATED OR CONTENTION-BASED PREAMBLES DURING HANDOVER - A method and apparatus for accessing a random access channel (RACH) during handover are disclosed. A handover procedure is initiated and a maximum handover interruption timer is activated. A dedicated preamble is transmitted in an attempt to access the RACH on a condition that the dedicated preamble is reserved in a current random access opportunity and the maximum handover interruption timer has not expired. A contention-based preamble is transmitted in an attempt to access the RACH on a condition that a dedicated preamble is not reserved in a current random access opportunity. If the maximum handover interruption timer has expired, a contention-based preamble is transmitted in an attempt to access the RACH. | 11-19-2009 |
20090285181 | IP Mobility - A method of forwarding IP packets, sent to an old care-of-address of a mobile node, to the mobile node following a handover of the mobile node from a first old access router to a second new access router. The method comprises, prior to completion of said handover, providing said first router or another proxy node with information necessary to determine the new IP care-of address to be used by the mobile node when the mobile node is transferred to the second access router. At said first router or said proxy node, the new care-of-address for the mobile node is determined using said information and ownership of the new care-of-address by the mobile node confirmed, and subsequently packets received at said first access network and destined for said old care-of-address are forwarded to the predicted care-of-address address. | 11-19-2009 |
20090285182 | METHOD, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND NETWORK ENTITY FOR GROUP NODES HANDOVER - A method, a communication system, and a network entity for group handover are provided. The method includes the following steps. A first tunnel connection is established between a mobile relay station (MRS) and a serving entity (SE). A target entity (TE) obtains group information about the group to be handed over, and the group information includes information about a first tunnel. According to the group information, the TE configures information about a second tunnel for the group, and the information about the second tunnel is required for group handover. The group nodes are handed over from the SE to the TE according to the information about the second tunnel. Thereby, the group information that needs to be transmitted in a handover process is reduced, and problems resulting from the number of handovers can be avoided. | 11-19-2009 |
20090285183 | METHOD AND NETWORK DEVICE FOR CREATING AND DELETING RESOURCES - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method for creating resources, a method for deleting resources, and a network device. The method for creating resources includes: notifying, by a first network element, a second network element at network side of a process type for creating resources for a UE; and performing, by the second network element, a process for creating resources for the UE according to the process type. With the embodiments of the present invention, a problem in the prior art that the network element at network side (i.e., the second network element at network side) cannot differentiate different access requests (i.e., initial access request and access request caused by handover between access systems) and thus corresponding resources cannot be created with respect to different access requests may be overcome. | 11-19-2009 |
20090290554 | SYSTEM, METHOD AND COMPUTER ACCESSIBLE MEDIUM FOR DETERMINING ACTION TIME IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Exemplary embodiments of system, method and computer accessible medium are provided for determining an action time in a communication network is described. For example, it is possible to estimate, in a target network arrangement, a value for an action time, with the value for the action time corresponding to the value for a handover time interval related to the target network node. The handover time interval can be a time interval starting substantially at the time when a first signal is received by a serving network node, which includes information about the value for the action time. For example, the handover time interval can have a duration during which the target network node is prepared to receive a handing over user equipment and the first signal. Further, the first signal can include information about the value for the action time, and such signal may be transmitted from a target network node to a serving network node. | 11-26-2009 |
20090290555 | Autonomous anonymous association between a mobile station and multiple network elements in a wireless communication system - A novel and useful autonomous association mechanism for use in user equipment (UE) network connections in one or more cellular communications systems. The handover process is optimized by improving the selection of target base stations and optimizing the discontinuity period from the time of disconnection from a serving base station and connection to a target base station and by establishing anonymous bidirectional communications with base stations. The mechanism facilitates multiple cell association in a network unaware manner while preserving single endpoint connectivity. The UE does not need to negotiate for or receive pre-allocated opportunities from the network for making associations with neighboring base stations. Association opportunities are created by the UE autonomously in accordance with UE activity patterns. Association opportunities are used to exchange preliminary information needed for handover between the UE and candidate base stations over the same or a plurality of access technologies. The information includes any parameter that can affect the handover process, e.g., link quality, etc. | 11-26-2009 |
20090290556 | WIRELESS NETWORK HANDOVER WITH SINGLE RADIO OPERATION - Briefly, in accordance with one or more embodiments, a handover of a wireless device from a first network to a second network may be implemented via operation of a single radio in the wireless device. A network architecture capable of implementing such a single radio handover operation may comprise a mobility management entity of a first network and an interworking function device capable of emulating an authenticator and/or protocol translation device of the first network or a second network. First switching logic is capable of exchanging information between the mobile station and the internetworking function device during a handover operation, and second switching logic is capable of exchanging information between the internetworking function device and an ASN, RNC, and/or SGSN of the target network. | 11-26-2009 |
20090290557 | CALCULATION OF A DESTINATION TIME ALIGNMENT VALUE TO BE USED BY A USER EQUIPMENT IN A DESTINATION CELL AFTER A HANDOVER - The invention relates to a method and arrangement for managing a calculation of a destination time alignment value TA | 11-26-2009 |
20090296652 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTING SCANNING RATES IN A MULTI-MODE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method and system for selecting scanning rates in a multi-mode communication device is disclosed herein. The method can include the step of—at a multi-mode communication device—measuring at least one parameter associated with an interaction between a first network and the multi-mode communication device. The method can further include the step of—in response to measuring the parameter—selecting a scanning rate of the multi-mode communication device for a second, different network that interacts with the multi-mode communication device. In the method, the first network and the second network can have independent synchronization procedures. | 12-03-2009 |
20090296653 | METHOD OF EXECUTING HANDOVER BETWEEN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS AND METHOD OF SUPPORTING THE SAME - A method of executing a handover between heterogeneous networks and method of supporting the same are disclosed, by which the handover can be smoothly performed between a wireless mobile communication network and a wireless LAN. A method of executing a handover between heterogeneous networks, in which a user equipment communicating with a wireless mobile communication network performs the handover into a wireless LAN, includes the steps of making a request for information for at least one cell neighbor to the wireless LAN to a second mobile communication network node via a first mobile communication network node, receiving the information for the at least one cell via the first mobile communication network node from the second mobile communication network node, and executing the handover to the wireless LAN using the received information. | 12-03-2009 |
20090296654 | CALL CONTINUITY - A method is provided of transferring a call connection with a mobile terminal from a first network to a second network. The first network is capable of handling both circuit-switched and packet-switched modes of connection. The second network is capable of handling one of the packet-switched or circuit-switched modes of connection but not both. The terminal is capable of both packet-switched and circuit-switched call modes of connection. The method comprises the first network: identifying the location of the mobile terminal with respect to at least one of the networks, identifying the mobile terminal as being in a mode of connection not usable in the second network, instructing the mobile terminal to transfer the call connection to the other mode of connection, and transferring the call connection to the second network. | 12-03-2009 |
20090296655 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD - A mobile communication system enables data reception in correct order, with regard to a reversed data order caused by a route change in data transfer from a source base station to a target base station and in direct transmission from a gateway to a target base station is provided. In the mobile communication system, at the time of handover processing performed accompanying a movement of the user equipment from the source base station to the target base station, the source base station transfers to the target base station, a part of packet data not yet transmitted to the user equipment, among packet data received from the upper-level device, and when transferring the part of packet data, the source base station assigns transfer start information, indicating a start of transfer, to a header in a top packet of the untransmitted packet data. | 12-03-2009 |
20090296656 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, SYSTEM, METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A wireless communication apparatus includes a first storage unit configured to store each of a plurality of upper limit values of absolute values of additional signals that are set for a corresponding one of a plurality of first wireless communication apparatuses and are added when a plurality of modulation symbols to be transmitted to the first wireless communication apparatuses are precoded, a coding unit configured to decide each of a plurality of first values of the additional signals for a corresponding one of the first wireless communication apparatuses within ranges defined by the upper limit values, and precode the modulation symbols using the first values to obtain a plurality of transmission signals, and a first transmission unit configured to transmit, using multi-user MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output), the transmission signals to the first wireless communication apparatuses. | 12-03-2009 |
20090296657 | System And Method For Providing Remote Data Access And Transcoding For A Mobile Communication Device - A system for providing information content over a network to a mobile communication device includes a transcoding system and a first network device. The transcoding system includes a plurality of transcoders. Each transcoder is operable to transcode the information content from a respective input content type into a respective output content type. The first network device is in communication with the transcoding system and includes a connection handler system. The first network device is operable to receive a first connection request that includes transcoder request data and to select a corresponding connection handler. The connection handler is operable to select one or more transcoders from the plurality of transcoders based on the transcoder request data. | 12-03-2009 |
20090296658 | Methods, Apparatuses and Systems Facilitating Client Handoffs in Wireless Network Systems - Methods, apparatuses, and systems directed to facilitating roaming and client handoffs in wireless networks. In one implementation, the present invention is directed to a coordination mechanism facilitating handoffs of wireless clients in a wireless network infrastructure. In one implementation, the coordination mechanism minimizes the use of group- or multi-casting to provide a scalable wireless network roaming infrastructure. | 12-03-2009 |
20090296659 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING A FAST HANDOVER IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A broadband wireless access (BWA) communication system includes a mobile subscriber station (MSS), a serving base station (BS) with which the MSS performs communication, and a plurality of neighbor BSs. The serving BS transmits, to the MSS, a handover request message including information on at least one recommended BS to which the MSS can perform a handover, among the neighbor BSs, and indication information indicating a fast handover, and transmits, to each of the recommended BSs, a handover confirm message indicating that the MSS will perform the fast handover. | 12-03-2009 |
20090303962 | Method and a Network Node for Managing Handovers in a Packet Data Communication Environment - The invention deals with managing handovers between access networks in a packet data communication environment. According to the invention, the possibility to control access network resources will improve by having a mobility manager node ( | 12-10-2009 |
20090303963 | Method for providing seamless transition between networks following different protocols - Example embodiments provide methods for handling the transition of a mobile device from a first network to a second network, the second network operating according to a different communications protocol from the first network. One example embodiment includes terminating forwarding of the data packets from the first network to the mobile device; rebuilding headers of unforwarded data packets at the first network; and sending the rebuilt data packets from the first network to the second network. Another example embodiment includes resetting a header compression state at the second network; receiving unforwarded data packets from the first network at the second network, the unforwarded data packets being data packets the first network had not yet forwarded to the mobile device; and sending the unforwarded data packets from the second network to the mobile device. | 12-10-2009 |
20090303964 | Switching of Multimedia Sessions from a Mobile Terminal - A method of switching a multimedia session from a mobile terminal ( | 12-10-2009 |
20090303965 | RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD AND RADIO COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A radio communication method for performing radio communication in a terminal apparatus and a base station apparatus, including: allocating a first access slot to each of the terminal apparatus, and a second access slot to a plurality of the terminal apparatuses, out of access slot to be used when the terminal apparatus is connected to the base station apparatus, in the base station apparatus; transmitting an information of the allocated access slot to the terminal apparatus, in the base station apparatus; an receiving the information of the allocated access slot sent from the base station, and sending a signal to establish connection to the base station apparatus based on the received information of the access slot, in the terminal apparatus. | 12-10-2009 |
20090303966 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTER-NETWORK HANDOFF - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate inter-network handoff in a wireless communication system. Various aspects described herein provide for handoff techniques that enable a target system to be prepared by an access terminal via a source system in order to minimize specific changes required to source system and/or target system. Techniques are described herein in which the protocols of a source system can be utilized with an interworking unit to tunnel signaling messages which are in a format understood by a target network. | 12-10-2009 |
20090303967 | USER EQUIPMENT (UE) ASSISTED SYSTEM DATABASE UPDATE - A wireless communication system includes a base station that receives information regarding neighboring wireless systems and updates and stores this information for use in handover of user equipments (UEs). | 12-10-2009 |
20090310559 | Seamless Handover of a Mobile Station from a Macro Base Station to a Privately Accessible Femto Base Station - In an embodiment, a method is provided that includes receiving a handover request for a mobile station to be handed over to a macro base station. Identification information for the mobile station is received. The identification of the mobile station is compared with stored association information that includes identification information of a femto base station, and identification information for a particular mobile station. The method further includes identifying that the mobile station identification information matches the identification information for an associated mobile station using the stored association information. The information regarding the associated femto base station is transmitted to the associated mobile station. | 12-17-2009 |
20090310560 | Provisional hand-off mechanism in a heterogeneous mac protocol for wireless networks - This disclosure describes a provisional hand-off mechanism to transfer handsets between base stations for a MAC protocol that combines contention-free and contention-based MAC protocols for use in wireless VoIP systems with multiple base stations that reduces packet overhead thus allowing for transmission of high bit-rate data to multiple users over wired and wireless means. | 12-17-2009 |
20090310561 | MOBILE DEVICES WITH FEMTO CELL FUNCTIONALITY - Aspects describe communications environments in which femtocell capability is provided to devices within the communications network. A non-femto enabled device and/or a femto enabled device can communicate with a femto enabled device in the same geographical area for femto-enabled peer-to-peer communication. Two non-femto enabled devices can be provided femto functionality through utilization of a femto enabled device, which operates as a hub between the two devices. Other aspects relate to enhanced position determination, adaptive coverage enhancement, local mobile networks, open access femtocells without a backhaul, and local broadcast of media though utilization of femto enabled devices. | 12-17-2009 |
20090310562 | Wireless subscriber inter-technology handoff - Embodiments for a method and apparatus of a wireless subscriber unit triggering an inter-technology handoff are disclosed. One method includes estimating a signal quality of first technology communication signals received from a serving base station. Information of neighboring base stations is received from the serving base station. Based on the information of the neighboring base stations, a signal quality of first technology communication signals received from each of the neighboring base stations is estimated. An inter-technology handoff is triggered based on a function of the signal quality of communication signals received from a serving base station and the signal quality of communication signals received from each of the neighboring base stations. | 12-17-2009 |
20090310563 | Scanning and handover operation in multi-carrier wireless communications systems - A comprehensive solution is provided for multi-carrier scanning and handover operations in OFDM wireless systems. A multi-carrier scanning is any scanning operation that involves multi-carrier radio frequency carriers. In one embodiment, a mobile station communicates with a serving base station over a primary carrier, and performs scanning over one or more determined carriers. A multi-carrier handover is any handover operation that involves multiple radio frequency carriers. In a first embodiment, a break-before-entry (BBE) handover procedure with fast synchronization is provided. In a second embodiment, an entry-before-break (EBB) handover procedure through unavailable intervals is provided. In a third embodiment, EBB handover procedures for both inter-FA and intra-FA using multiple carriers are provided. Finally, in a fourth embodiment, intra-BS handover procedures are provided. The multi-carrier handover procedures may be applied to 2-to-2 or N-to-N carriers handover situation. The overall scanning time and handover interruption time may be reduced through the provided procedures. | 12-17-2009 |
20090310564 | FAST HANDOVER SYSTEM AND METHOD THEREOF - Disclosed are a fast handover system and a method thereof. The fast handover method can include: allowing a mobile node (MN) to transmit a handover information message to a previous mobile access gateway (PMAG); allowing the PMAG to transmit a fast proxy binding update (FPBU) message to a local mobility anchor (LMA) on the basis of the handover information message received from the MN; allowing the LMA to transmit a handover initiation (HI) message including MN-ID and proxy-care-of address (CoA) of the PMAG to a new MAG (NMAG); transmitting a position update message to the NMAG if the MN is attached to a target BS that is connected to the NMAG; and allowing the NMAG to deliver a buffered packet to the MN. | 12-17-2009 |
20090310565 | System And Method For Selecting Parameters In Wireless Communication - According to one embodiment, a method for wireless communication comprising coupling a base station to a network access device. The network access device provides the base station access to a wireless service provider network via an Internet service provider network. The method includes determining, at the base station, a plurality of available communication channels of the wireless service provider network that may be utilized to communicate with an endpoint. The method also includes determining, at the base station, a plurality of segment power measurements for at least one channel of the plurality of channels. In addition, the method includes automatically selecting, at the base station, a channel and segment index for communication with the endpoint in response to determining the plurality of segment power measurements. Further, the method includes providing, by the base station, the endpoint access to the wireless service provider network utilizing the Internet service provider network via the selected channel and segment index. | 12-17-2009 |
20090310566 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING MOBILITY INFORMATION SUPPORTING HANDOVER AND/OR ROAMING IN DIGITAL BROADCASTNG SYSTEM - Disclosed is a method and an apparatus for transmitting/receiving mobility information to support the handover and roaming in a digital broadcasting system. The transmission method includes the steps of setting mobility information including information elements for indicating at least one handover/roaming type according to whether or not support of an interactive network is available for handover/roaming; inserting the mobility information into at least one of an ESG regarding broadcasting services, a notification message, and an independent signaling message so that the mobility information is transmitted to at least one terminal; and conducting handover or roaming of the terminal according to the mobility information. | 12-17-2009 |
20090310567 | Global network neighborhood: Scheme for providing information about available networks in a geographical location - A method and apparatus supporting a discovery technique of multiple available networks is disclosed. A global network neighborhood data depository contains attributes of multiple networks that are available in a geographic region. The attributes aid in network discovery and selection of an optimum network for communication for devices capable of communicating via multiple networks. | 12-17-2009 |
20090316648 | METHOD OF UPLINK PACKET SCHEDULING AND SUPPORTING THEREOF IN WIRELESS MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of uplink packet scheduling in a wireless mobile communications system and method of supporting the same are disclosed, scheduling efficiency can be enhanced in case that one base station schedules uplink packet transmission to a user equipment which is in soft handover with a plurality of base stations. A method of uplink packet scheduling, which is for a user equipment in a soft handover state in a wireless mobile communications system, includes the steps of transmitting a NACK signal in response to an uplink packet transmitted from the user equipment, receiving instruction information for a reception result of the uplink packet in at least one base station from the user equipment or at least one different base station, and performing the uplink packet scheduling for the user equipment by considering the instruction information. | 12-24-2009 |
20090316649 | SELF-CONFIGURATION FOR FEMTOCELLS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate automatically configuring femtocells based at least in part on signals transmitted by other femtocells and macrocells. In particular, a femtocell can receive signals from neighboring cells, much like a mobile device, and determine communications parameters used. The parameters can be channel identifiers, pseudo-noise (PN) offsets, and the like. The femtocell can subsequently configure its communication parameters to vary from those detected in the neighboring signals, or to match those of neighboring signals where the parameters relate to the communications environment, for example. Thus, the femtocell self-configures to mitigate interference with surrounding femtocells and/or macrocells. | 12-24-2009 |
20090316650 | FAST HANDOVER METHOD USING L2/L3 COMBINATION - Provided is a fast handover method using a layer 2 (L2) and layer 3 (L3) combination. When a mobile node moves from a present region to another region, fast handover of the mobile node is provided using a location update function between handover control agents (HCAs), and data bicasting from an old HCA wherein the mobile node performs handover to a new HCA. | 12-24-2009 |
20090316651 | METHOD OF MULTI-PHASE CALL ADMISSION CONTROL ON WIRELESS INTERNET SYSTEM USING ACTIVE SET - Provided is a method of multi-phase call admission control on a wireless Internet system using an active set. The method includes the steps of: a) periodically checking, at one base station, active user sets of the base station and neighboring base stations to extract at least one terminal existing simultaneously in the respective active user sets of the predetermined base stations among the checked base stations for a predetermined period of time, and managing the extracted terminal as a stationary active user set; b) checking whether resources for the stationary active user set are available upon exhaustion of resources reserved for new and handover calls; and c) accepting a corresponding call when the resources are available, and rejecting the corresponding call when the resources are not available. | 12-24-2009 |
20090316652 | UTILIZING SYSTEM ACCESS SEQUENCES TO REQUEST RESOURCES FOR GCI REPORTING IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate indicating global cell identifier (GCI) reporting in wireless communication to mitigate confusion caused by physical cell identifier (PCI) reporting in heterogeneous deployments. In particular, mobile devices can report GCI of access points to disparate access points to facilitate communication therebetween, such as during handover. Mobile devices can indicate GCI reporting during a system access request by selecting an access sequence corresponding to subsequent GCI reporting. Based on the access sequence, an access point can grant additional resources to receive the GCI, and the mobile device can communicate GCI over the resources. Using the GCI, the access point can communicate with a disparate access point related to the GCI. | 12-24-2009 |
20090316653 | Methods and Apparatuses for Performing Random Access in a Telecommunications System - The present invention relates to methods and apparatuses (radio base station and UE) for enabling a UE to perform a contention-based random access. According to embodiments of the present invention, a non-dedicated random access preamble identifier is determined by a radio base station and the determined preamble is transmitted in a message to the UE which selects a non-dedicated random access preamble based on the received preamble identifier and performs a contention-based random access using the selected preamble. | 12-24-2009 |
20090316654 | ACCESS TERMINAL ASSISTED NODE IDENTIFIER CONFUSION RESOLUTION USING A TIME GAP - Confusion resulting from assigning the same node identifier to multiple nodes is resolved through the use of confusion detection techniques and the use of unique identifiers for the nodes. In some aspects a network may provide a time gap (e.g., an asynchronous time gap) during which an access terminal may temporarily cease monitoring transmissions from a source node so that the access terminal may acquire a unique identifier from a target node. In some aspects an access terminal may commence handover operations at a target node after determining whether the access terminal is allowed to access the target node. In some aspects a source node may prepare several target nodes for potential handover in the event confusion is detected or likely. Here, the source node may send information relating to the preparation of the potential target nodes to the access terminal whereby the access terminal uses the handover preparation information to initiate a handover at that target node. | 12-24-2009 |
20090316655 | ACCESS TERMINAL ASSISTED NODE IDENTIFIER CONFUSION RESOLUTION - Confusion resulting from assigning the same node identifier to multiple nodes is resolved through the use of confusion detection techniques and the use of unique identifiers for the nodes. In some aspects a network may provide a time gap (e.g., an asynchronous time gap) during which an access terminal may temporarily cease monitoring transmissions from a source node so that the access terminal may acquire a unique identifier from a target node. In some aspects an access terminal may commence handover operations at a target node after determining whether the access terminal is allowed to access the target node. In some aspects a source node may prepare several target nodes for potential handover in the event confusion is detected or likely. Here, the source node may send information relating to the preparation of the potential target nodes to the access terminal whereby the access terminal uses the handover preparation information to initiate a handover at that target node. | 12-24-2009 |
20090316656 | Mechanism for 3rd Generation Partnership Project Multiple Inter-Network Quality of Service Continuity - A system to promote connectivity for inter-radio access technology (RAT) handover from a first radio access network (RAN) to a second radio access network (RAN) is provided. The system comprises a component configured such that for each access point name (APN) in communication with the first radio access network (RAN), the maximum bit rate (MBR) for each active non-guaranteed bit rate (non-GBR) bearer in the second radio access network (RAN) is determined based on each respective access point name's (APN's) used aggregate maximum bit rate (AMBR) and the number of active non-guaranteed bit rate(s) (non-GBR) bearers for the respective access point name (APN). | 12-24-2009 |
20090316657 | CONCENTRATOR FOR MULTIPLEXING ACCESS POINT TO WIRELESS NETWORK CONNECTIONS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate multiplexing communications from multiple downstream access points to one or more mobility management entities (MME). In particular, a concentrator component is provided that can establish a single transport layer connection with an MME along with multiple application layer connections over the single transport layer connection for each of multiple downstream access points and/or related mobile devices. The downstream access points and/or mobile devices can provide identifiers to the concentrator component, which can utilize the identifiers to track communications with the MME. In this regard, the MME can additionally include identifiers received from the concentrator component in subsequent communications to facilitate identifying the appropriate downstream access point and/or mobile device. | 12-24-2009 |
20090323630 | Communication Methods and Terminals For Improving The Transfer of Connection Between Cells Belonging to Different Networks - This method, which can be implemented by a terminal, includes a step (E | 12-31-2009 |
20090323631 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR CREATING A MESH NETWORK OF WIRELESS SWITCHES TO SUPPORT LAYER 3 ROAMING IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS (WLANs) - Techniques are provided for techniques are provided for creating a mesh network in wireless local area network comprising a plurality of wireless switches. An IP address of the registration server can be configured on each of the wireless switches and used to open an IP socket from each of the wireless switches to the registration server. Each of the wireless switches register with a registration server by communicating configuration information about each of the wireless switches to the registration server. In one implementation, the configuration information for each switch comprises a switch IP address and a list of subnets the switch supports. The configuration information can be used by the registration server to create a wireless switch list which includes a listing of each of the wireless the switches in the wireless local area network. The configuration information about each of the wireless switches and the wireless switch list can then be communicated to each of the wireless switches. Each wireless switch can use the configuration information from each of the other wireless switches to create a mesh network of wireless switches. In one implementation, each of the wireless switches can use the configuration information and the wireless switch list to open a UDP/IP socket to each of the other wireless switches. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323632 | Efficient Handover of Media Communications in Heterogeneous IP Networks using LAN Profiles and Network Handover Rules - Methods and systems are provided for efficient handover of a media session between heterogeneous IP networks. A mobile device with Internet access can operate a software program to communicate with a corresponding node. The corresponding node may access the Internet through either a NAT router or a firewall. The mobile device establishes a media session with a corresponding node via the transmission of a first media stream and receipt of a second media stream, and a media control channel can optionally be implemented. The mobile device can acquire Internet access through a second IP address, and packets routed between the second IP address and the Internet may traverse a NAT router. The mobile device can evaluate the type of NAT at the second IP address from a stored LAN profile. A software routine can determine that handover of the media session from the first IP address to the second IP address is preferred. A software routine can determine efficient handover procedures according to Network handover rules. The mobile device may begin transmitting a third media stream to the corresponding node and the corresponding node can transmit a fourth media stream to the second IP address. A media control channel is optionally supported. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323633 | FEMTOCELL HAND-OFFS - An exemplary method of facilitating hand-offs between Femtocells includes receiving an indication of a cell identifying code detected by a mobile station currently communicating with a serving Femtocell. A determination is made whether the received cell identifying code corresponds to a known Femtocell. The known Femtocell becomes a target Femtocell if a successful hand-off was previously made from the serving Femtocell to the known Femtocell. A hand-off is instigated to the target Femtocell. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323634 | METHOD OF PERFORMING PROCEDURES FOR INITIAL NETWORK ENTRY AND HANDOVER IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - Disclosed is a method of performing procedures for network entry of a mobile station in a broadband wireless access system. The method includes being allocated with transmission parameters from a base station, at least one time performing a request of an uplink band for transmission of an uplink management message to the base station, and receiving a downlink message for next procedure from the base station if the uplink band is not allocated even after the lapse of a preset time period. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323635 | METHOD OF MANAGING INTER WORKING FOR TRANSFERRING MULTIPLE SERVICE SESSIONS BETWEEN A MOBILE NETWORK AND A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK, AND CORRESPONDING EQUIPMENT - A method is dedicated to managing interworking between a WLAN network and a mobile network both connected to a core network comprising at least two GGSN nodes (G | 12-31-2009 |
20090323636 | ROAMING GATEWAY - A roaming gateway has at least one IP network interface, and at least one cellular network interface, and inter-working functions for inter-working between a wireless IP network and a cellular network. The inter-working functions communicate with user devices in an IP network according to a machine-level subscribe-and-notify event package protocol for managing handover of mobile devices roaming between IP and cellular networks. They also poll a cellular network for subscriber status on that cellular network in the absence of a mobility event package. The inter-working functions comprise HSS functionality programmed to access data on a HLR of a cellular network and to perform HSS operations using said data. The gateway applies routing policies specific to call types, allowing or disallowing the anchoring of calls originating in either an IP network or a cellular network based on number prefixes. The inter-working functions comprise an application server programmed to communicate with a user device as a client. The server provides a staging point for cellular supplementary services while anchoring calls, retrieving configurations from cellular network elements and applying appropriate routing based on these configurations and the current state of a call. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323637 | Radio Communication Method, Base Station Controller and Radio Communication Terminal - The present invention is summarized as a radio communication method including the steps of: calculating a transmission power difference between a transmission power value of a first carrier and a transmission power value of a second carrier; determining whether or not the transmission power difference exceeds a threshold set on the basis of a maximum transmission power difference allowable between the first carrier and the second carrier; and when the transmission power difference exceeds the threshold set on the basis of the maximum transmission power difference, transmitting a handoff instruction for one of the first carrier and the second carrier that has a higher transmission power value. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323638 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR AUTOMATIC HANDOVER OPTIMIZATION - A method for wireless communications is provided. The method includes determining a set of handover parameters that facilitate a handover between cells in a wireless network and analyzing the set of handover parameters. The method includes dynamically adjusting the parameters to mitigate handover failures between the cells. | 12-31-2009 |
20090323639 | FAST SERVING CELL CHANGE METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A serving cell change method and apparatus is provided for efficiently performing the serving cell change in a mobile communication system. The UE receives a cell change control information including an activation time from a serving cell, when a downlink channel status of the serving cell is inferior to a downlink channel status of a target cell, reports a measurement result to the serving cell while performing data communication with the serving cell, monitors receipt of a cell change indicator transmitted by the target cell before the expiration of the activation time while performing the data communication with the serving cell, and when the cell change indicator is received, communicates data with the target cell by sending an acknowledgement in response to the cell change indicator and switching to the target cell. | 12-31-2009 |
20100002650 | FACILITATING METHOD FOR HANDOVER OF A MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - In a method of facilitating handover of a mobile communication device from a source node to a target node, the method includes buffering received user data packets in the target node during handover prior to sending to the mobile device. | 01-07-2010 |
20100002651 | HANDOVER METHOD AND APPARATUS IN A WIRELESS TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A wireless telecommunications network may include parts that operate at different packet transfer delays, so that a mobile terminal undergoing handover from one node to another experiences different delays before and after handover. An additional delay is applied during the handover process to packets sent to the mobile terminal via the node at the smaller delay so as to reduce the difference between the two delays. The additional delay may be applied at an anchor node connecting parts of the wireless network of different radio access technology types or at other parts of the network. Information regarding packet transfer delays may stored and accessed to determine the delays for nodes involved in handover and/or obtained by measurements made during a call, for example. | 01-07-2010 |
20100002652 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND ACCESS ROUTER - A technology is disclosed in which, when a normal mobile node (that does not newly provide a dedicated function) is used, signaling for reconfiguring a tunnel during a mobile node movement is reduced and, furthermore, packet loss is reduced. In the technology, when an MN moves from under the control of an AR | 01-07-2010 |
20100002653 | Method for handoff during connected mode of a multimode mobile station in a mixed deployment - Methods for handoff of a multimode mobile station (MS). The MS, in connected mode, moves from a cell of a legacy base station to a cell of an ABS and scans base stations from a list of neighbouring base stations, wherein at least the ABS is listed as another legacy base station in the list of neighbouring base stations. The MS performs the handoff to connect to a legacy zone of the ABS. Further, the multimode MS switching from the legacy zone of the ABS to a advanced zone of the ABS based on a Zone Switch request or command is triggered by either the multimode MS or the ABS. The Zone Switch request is triggered after detecting capabilities of either the multimode MS or the ABS that they support advanced zone. The capabilities are detected by using MAC versions of the multimode MS and the ABS or an indicator for the advanced zone. The multimode MS can also performs handoff to the advanced zone from the cell of the legacy base station by receiving one or more information for ranging in the advanced zone from the ABS during the handoff. | 01-07-2010 |
20100008322 | Data Transmission Device and Method for Data Transmission between a Network and a Mobile Data Transmission Unit - A data transmission device has a network, a mobile data transmission unit, and a driver. The network has at least two access points for establishing a wireless connection to the data transmission unit. The data transmission unit has an application generating user data, wherein the application is connected by an interface to the driver. The data transmission unit has at least two modules for transmitting data, wherein the at least two modules are connected to the driver. The data transmission unit has a switching device for switching between the at least two modules. The switching device operates such that in any switching state of the switching device user data generated by the application are transmitted by only one of the at least two modules. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008323 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FEMTO CELL DEPLOYMENT USING NEIGHBOR LIST MESSAGES AND ITS USE IN FEMTO CELL SYSTEM SELECTION - A femto cell neighbor list message for a wireless communication system that includes the frequencies and pseudonoise offsets reserved for macro cells and femto cells is disclosed. When the user equipment discovers the femto cell, the user equipment can read the Femto Cell Identification Message and present the identification information to the subscriber. In absence of this knowledge, a manual femto cell search must search all frequencies and all pseudonoise offsets resulting in lengthy search times. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008324 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING INFORMATION FOR INTER-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY HANDOVER - A method for transmitting and receiving inter-radio access technology (RAT) information for inter-RAT handover between a mobile station and a base station in a radio access system. A method for transmitting inter-RAT information for inter-RAT handover comprises: receiving a super frame header (SFH) including a flag indicating whether the inter-RAT information is transmitted in a current superframe and a start frame number field indicating a predetermined frame at which the inter-RAT information is transmitted, and if the flag is set, acquiring the inter-RAT information at a predetermined frame indicated by the start frame number field. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008325 | OVERLAY HANDOVER IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS NETWORK - Overlay handover is generally presented. In this regard, a method is introduced including storing a broadband wireless network composite signal in a sample buffer, processing the sample buffer using subcarriers associated with a serving base station to determine a bandwidth grant from a first MAP, and reprocessing the sample buffer using subcarriers associated with a neighboring co-channel base station to determine a bandwidth grant from a second MAP. Other embodiments are also described and claimed. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008326 | RECOVERY SCHEMES FOR GROUP SWITCHING PROCEDURES FOR MULTI-GROUP FREQUENCY DIVISION DUPLEX WIRELESS NETWORKS - Various example embodiments are disclosed herein. According to an example embodiment, a method may include receiving at a mobile station from a base station in a wireless network, a message including a group switch instruction instructing the mobile station to switch from a current group to a new group, attempting, by the mobile station, to switch to the new group in response to receiving the group switch instruction, and sending, from the mobile station, an acknowledgement message that acknowledges either the success or failure of the attempting to switch to the new group. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008327 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ASSIGNING MOBILE STATION IDENTIFIER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and a method for providing a handover using an Mobile Station IDentifier (MS ID) in a wireless communication system are provided. In the method, at least one Base Station (BS) ID index assigned to a serving base station by at least one neighbor base station is confirmed. A target base station for a handover is confirmed. A temporary MS ID is formed using a BS ID index assigned to the serving base station by the target base station, and an MS ID index assigned to the mobile station by the serving base station. A network re-entry procedure with the target base station is performed using the temporary MS ID. Communication with the serving base station is performed until the network re-entry procedure with the target base station is completed. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008328 | HANDOVER TECHNIQUES BETWEEN LEGACY AND UPDATED WIRELESS NETWORKS - According to an example embodiment, an apparatus may include a processor. The apparatus may be configured to transmit a handover request message from a legacy serving base station to a target updated base station, the request message including an indication that a mobile station is compliant with an updated specification; and receive a handover response message at the legacy serving base station from the target updated base station, the handover response message including one or more updated system parameters assigned to the mobile station for an updated time zone of the target base station. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008329 | ACCESS STRATUM MANAGER - A multi-mode mobile communication device may include a processing device, a memory sub-system, a communication sub-system operable to communicate with the plurality of wireless access networks, and a protocol stack stored in the memory sub-system and executed by the processing device. The protocol stack may include a first access stratum, a second access stratum, a non-access stratum and an access stratum manager. The first access stratum may communicate with a first wireless access network via the communication sub-system. The second access stratum may communicate with a second wireless access network via the communication sub-system. The non-access stratum may communicate with a core network. The access stratum manager may interface the non-access stratum with the first and second access strata, and may be operable to activate the first access stratum to establish a communication link with the core network over the first wireless access network. The access stratum manager may be further operable to maintain the communication link between the non-access stratum and the core network while transferring the communication link from the first access stratum to the second access stratum. | 01-14-2010 |
20100014482 | RADIO BASE STATION AND RADIO COMMUNICTION SYSTEM FOR STARTING INTER-SYSTEM HANDOFF - It is possible to forcibly cause a terminal to perform an inter-system handoff for system control in a region where service areas of a plurality of radio access systems are overlapped. When it is detected that communication resource of the radio base station is insufficient, a communication terminal which can be replaced by a communication using other system is selected and an inter-system handoff is started. | 01-21-2010 |
20100014483 | Network Selection - A wireless user device, in radio communication with a first access point of one or more networks with which it could communicate via at least one of a plurality of access points, sends a network selection request to the first access point. If the network wishes to initiate a response from another access point in the same or another network, the first access point forwards the network selection request to one or more neighboring access points, in the same or another network. If any of the neighboring access points is able to communicate with the user device, that neighboring access point sends a response directly to the wireless user device and the wireless user device chooses the most suitable network from the responses sent. | 01-21-2010 |
20100014484 | HANDOFF CONTROL METHOD AND A MOBILE STATION EMPLOYING THE SAME - There is disclosed a handoff control method for registering a CDMA mobile station in such a way that battery power wastage is prevented if successive attempts to register the station fail. If it is judged that registration fails (step S | 01-21-2010 |
20100014485 | BUFFERING PACKETS DESTINED FOR A MOBILE DEVICE WHILE THE MOBILE DEVICE MOVES FROM ONE NETWORK TO ANOTHER NETWORK TO PREVENT HANDOFF PACKET LOSS - A method and system for preventing packet loss during handoff of a mobile host between access networks. In accordance with an aspect of the invention, a home agent on a network maintains a FIFO (First In-First Out) buffer for every mobile host that it serves. When a packet destined for a particular mobile host is received at the home agent, it is assigned an incremental sequence number, encapsulated as an IP packet, and forwarded to the mobile host with the sequence number as an identifier. The packet and sequence number are thereafter stored in the buffer for a period of time after the packet was forwarded to the mobile host. After hand-off to the arriving network is completed, the mobile host sends the sequence number of the last-received IP packet to the home agent and the new care-of IP address. Using this sequence number, the home agent then determines whether any incoming packets had been routed to the previous care-of IP address. These are retrieved from the buffer, and resent to the new care-of IP address. | 01-21-2010 |
20100020761 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE TRANSCEIVER STATION, MOBILE STATION, AND DATA TRANSFER METHOD - A communication system that includes a plurality of base transceiver stations and a mobile station, the communication system including a second base transceiver station that broadcasts identification information to be used to specify the second base transceiver station itself, a mobile station that receives and transfers the identification information that has been broadcasted from the second base transceiver station, and a first base transceiver station that specifies the second base transceiver station as a handover target of the mobile station based on the identification information transferred from the mobile station. | 01-28-2010 |
20100020762 | CONVERSION OF VOICE-OVER-IP MEDIA CONTROL MESSAGING INTO MOBILE CONTROL CHANNEL SIGNALING USING A VOICE-OVER IP GATEWAY - A gateway serving as an interface between a mobile network and a wireless network can be configured to send a signal strength indicator to the mobile network thereby causing the mobile network to recognize the gateway as a valid path for handing off a call. The wireless network can be configured according to one of the 802.11 wireless communications protocols. The gateway can route the call from the mobile network to a wireless access point of the wireless network via a packet-switched network, such that the call is conducted via a wireless communications link with the wireless access point. | 01-28-2010 |
20100020763 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND COMMUNICATION NETWORK SYSTEM - To provide a technology with which a large number of wireless communication networks can be efficiently used while the size of a device operated by a user is reduced and power is saved by providing a communication terminal whose connection with a different wireless communication network can be dynamically reconfigured. A communication terminal | 01-28-2010 |
20100020764 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, ITS CONTROL DEVICE, HANDOVER CONTROL METHOD, AND MOBILE TERMINAL - According to one embodiment, a mobile communication system includes base stations each forming a wireless zone for wirelessly accommodating mobile terminals, and a control device accommodating the base stations. The control device includes a construction module, a prediction module and an instruction module. The construction module constructs a database regarding a history of handovers by the mobile terminals. The prediction module predicts a base station of the next connection destination of a mobile terminal being in communication and timing of a handover to the base station of the next connection destination on the basis of the database. The instruction module instructs the handover to the predicted base station to the mobile terminal being in communication before the timing comes. | 01-28-2010 |
20100020765 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR CONCURRENT DATA AND SIGNALING METHODOLOGY FOR WIMAX HANDOVER - Techniques, systems and methods for concurrent data and signaling for WiMAX handover are disclosed herein. The serving base station may receive a handover request message from a mobile station and transmit a parameter to the mobile station to indicate a time to suspend a first set of one or more service flows between the serving base station and the mobile station during a handover procedure and continue data exchange between the mobile station and the serving base station for a second set of one or more service flows during the handover procedure. The proposed techniques reduce the service suspension time during the handover procedure. | 01-28-2010 |
20100020766 | MOBILE NETWORK SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROCESSING IP HANDOFF THEREOF - Provided are a mobile network system capable of processing a high-speed handoff by dividing into a data packet path between mobile nodes and a handoff packet path of the mobile node, and a method for processing IP handoff thereof. The system includes a MAP broadcasting a handoff registration request and reply between a foreign agent and a home agent, and an additional handoff signal path between the MAP and a mobile agent operating as a foreign agent and a home agent by means of a HAAP and VPN technology to be physically distinguishable from a data path. Therefore, limitation in a head of line can be resolved and the IP handoff can be promptly provided. | 01-28-2010 |
20100020767 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND RADIO TRANSMISSION PATH CONTROL METHOD - An IP address is assigned to each of IP bearers, and a mobile anchor device (GWN) | 01-28-2010 |
20100020768 | METHOD AND TERMINAL FOR RESTRICTION OF DOMAIN TRANSFER - A method and mobile terminal for controlling a voice call continuity (VCC) operation, are provided. According to an embodiment, the invention is directed to a method for controlling a voice call continuity (VCC) operation between a mobile terminal and a network, the method comprising: receiving operator policy via an OMA Device Management (DM) method during at least one call or session established between the mobile terminal and the network, the operator policy including domain transfer restriction information; evaluating the domain transfer restriction information of the operator policy; and selectively initiating a domain transfer according to the evaluated domain transfer restriction information of the operator policy, wherein the domain transfer restriction information indicates that a domain transfer from CS domain to IMS domain is restricted or not or a domain transfer from IMS domain to CS domain is restricted or not. | 01-28-2010 |
20100027503 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REDUCING DATA LOSS DURING HANDOVER IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Techniques for buffering and resending data in order to reduce data loss during handover are described. A network controller may determine whether or not to buffer data for a user equipment (UE). The network controller may continuously buffer a predetermined amount of latest data sent to a serving Node B if a decision is made to buffer the data for the UE. In one design, the network controller may send data for the UE to a source Node B, perform handover of the UE from the source Node B to a target Node B, resend to the target Node B a portion of the data sent previously to the source Node B, and send new data for the UE to the target Node B. e.g., after the resent data. The buffer and resend feature may be selectively enabled or disabled for each data flow for the UE. | 02-04-2010 |
20100027504 | Method and Apparatus for Throttling Persistent Always On Applications - An apparatus and method for facilitating inter-technology handoff from a home wireless network comprising comparing a parameter of a home signal to a threshold, wherein the home signal is from the home wireless network where the data session of a persistent always ON application is established; throttling the persistent always ON application; and attempting to acquire a first alternative signal acceptable to the persistent always ON application from a first alternative wireless network using a single RF chain. | 02-04-2010 |
20100027505 | Handover in a Radio Communication System - In a method for communication by radio a first network radio station allocates radio resources to a subscriber station and communicates with the subscriber station using a portion of the radio resources. A second network radio station uses another portion of the radio resources to send a signaling signal which is intended exclusively for the subscriber station. The first network radio station and/or the second network radio station receives a message from the subscriber station, acknowledging receipt of the signaling signal. In response to the message from the subscriber station, the communication of the subscriber station is handed over from the first network radio station to the second network radio station. | 02-04-2010 |
20100027506 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND CELL STATION, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system for TDMA communication with use of one or more communication channels among at least one of a plurality of cell stations and a wireless communication terminal. The wireless communication terminal includes a link-channel-allocation requesting unit that transmits a link-channel allocation request signal upon handover without specifying a destination cell station, using a handover control channel included in the communication channels which is used for transmitting control information concerning handover and has a unique channel number in the wireless communication system. The one of the cell stations includes a link-channel allocating unit that transmits, to the wireless communication terminal, a link-channel allocation signal including link-channel allocation information using the handover control channel upon receiving the link-channel allocation request signal. | 02-04-2010 |
20100027507 | HANDOVER PROCESSING METHOD, ENB AND NETWORK COMMUNICATION SYSTEM THEREOF - Embodiments of the present invention includes a handover processing method, a source eNB, a neighboring eNB and a network communication system. In one embodiment of the handover processing method, a source eNB selects a target eNB from neighboring eNBs that can accept a handover request from a mobile terminal, and notifies a selection result to the mobile terminal; if handover information corresponding to the mobile terminal is received by an neighboring eNB that can accept the handover request of the mobile terminal within a preset handover waiting time, the neighboring eNB determines that it is a target eNB and cooperates with the mobile terminal to perform a handover; otherwise, the neighboring eNB determines that it is a prepared eNB and reduces its resources reserved for the mobile terminal. The present invention can effectively improve the successful handover probability. | 02-04-2010 |
20100027508 | FAST HANDOVER METHOD AND SYSTEM USING NETWORK-BASED LOCALIZED MOBILITY MANAGEMENT - The present invention relates to a method in which a mobile node having mobility performs handover in a mobile communication system, and more particularly, to a fast handover method and system using network-based localized mobility Management. According to an exemplary embodiment of the present invention, in a network access process between a mobile node and a base station, the base station sends a message allowing network access to the mobile node and a link-up message to an access router. Then, the access router sends a location registration message, which includes a mobile node identifier, a target base station identifier, a localized mobility anchor identifier, and access permission flag information, to a localized mobility anchor (LMA), and receives an acknowledgement (Ack) message including network prefix information. Accordingly, when a router advertisement (RA) message is sent to the base station, the mobile node performs duplicate address detection (DAD). Accordingly, fast handover is performed to reduce packet loss and delay that occur when the mobile node moves between networks, thereby minimizing the packet loss and delay. | 02-04-2010 |
20100027509 | LOCAL MOBILITY ANCHOR RELOCATION AND ROUTE OPTIMIZATION DURING HANDOVER OF A MOBILE NODE TO ANOTHER NETWORK AREA - The invention relates to a method for managing the mobility of a mobile node that moves to a different network, but keeps the same IP address. It is proposed to perform route optimization by a Proxy MIP agent on behalf of the MN, thereby shortening the data-path while allowing network-based mobility. At session setup with a correspondent node, the PCC system in the home network derides whether route optimization is to be performed for the communication session. The PMIPa requests relevant information for the route optimization, including the decision for route optimization and the addresses of MN and CN, from the PCC system in the home network, when the MN attaches to the new network area. Accordingly, route optimization is performed by using the Return Routability Procedure according to MIPv6, thereby applying the MN's IP address as Home Address, and the PMIPa's address as Care-of Address of the MN. | 02-04-2010 |
20100034166 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SUPPORTING CALL CONTINUITY - A method and system for supporting a handover between a circuit-switched (CS) domain and an Internet protocol (IP) multimedia subsystem (IMS) domain to provide call continuity are disclosed. The system includes a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) and a wireless network. The WTRU includes a call continuity control entity for supporting call continuity between a CS domain and an IMS domain, and a media independent handover (MIH) entity configured to provide MIH services for providing information in a media independent manner. The wireless network includes an MIH entity for providing MIH services for collecting and forwarding information in a media independent manner. A handover between the CS domain and the IMS domain is triggered based on information obtained via MIH services from the MIH entities. The information may be exchanged via an MIH information server. | 02-11-2010 |
20100034167 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO BASE STATION AND HANDOVER CONTROL METHOD - According to one aspect of the present invention, a mobile communication system is used for transmission and reception of a data PDU (Protocol Data Unit) in a radio link control (RLC) sublayer between a radio base station and a mobile station. The present system includes a function of feeding back a control PDU to a transmitting side, the control PDU indicating a decoding result of a data PDU at a receiving side. In the present system, in response to an instruction from an upper layer of the RLC sublayer, the transmitting side triggers the receiving side to feed back the control PDU. | 02-11-2010 |
20100034168 | System and Method for Enabling SR-VCC with Shared IMPU - Embodiments of the present invention provide a system and method for identification of a UE for session transfer requests initiated by an MSC Server using a GRUU. The UE provides the GRUU to an MME upon IMS Registration, and the MME provides the GRUU to the MSC Server as part of a handover request. The MSC Server may use an Mg or Mw SIP interface, or an ISUP interface to initiate a session transfer. If the MSC Server has an Mg or Mw SIP interface, the GRUU is asserted in a SIP message, e.g., an INVITE message, sent to initiate session transfer. If the MSC Server does not have the SIP interface, i.e., uses ISUP to initiate session transfer, then the GRUU is passed via a gsmSCF into an SCC AS. The SCC AS uses the GRUU to identify the UE for which the session transfer request is being initiated. | 02-11-2010 |
20100034169 | PACKET DATA CONVERGENCE PROTOCAL END OF HANDOVER INDICATION - Explicit signaling of End of Handover (EoH) advantageously indicates when user equipment (UE) has stopped using Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) handover mode. Radio Link Control (RLC) Acknowledge Mode (AM) delivers in order ensuring that all reordered packets have been received with no risk of delivering a gap packet when no longer in handover mode that would otherwise cause Hyper Frame Number (HFN) to be out of synchronization. Substantially at a time evolved Base Node (eNB) determines a gap will not be filled, eNB can convey an EoH indication to a served UE and can then deliver the PDCP Service Data Units (SDUs) with gaps to upper layers without delay. | 02-11-2010 |
20100034170 | Network Node and Mobile Terminal - Disclosed in a technique for more accurately checking a network condition such as a transmission delay generated in packet transmission between two nodes and other network conditions. A buffering node | 02-11-2010 |
20100034171 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING SERVING HIGH SPEED DOWNLINK SHARED CHANNEL CELL CHANGE - A method and an apparatus for serving high speed downlink shared channel (HS-DSCH) cell change are disclosed. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) receives pre-configured serving cell information for a target cell. The WTRU reports a measurement report and starts monitoring a high speed shared control channel (HS-SCCH) on the target cell. The WTRU may receive an HS-SCCH order over the target cell and/or a radio resource control (RRC) reconfiguration message over a source cell indicating a serving HS-DSCH cell change to the target cell. The WTRU may act upon all information elements of the RRC reconfiguration message in case that the RRC reconfiguration message is received prior to the HS-SCCH order, and act upon the pre-configured serving cell information in case that the HS-SCCH order is received prior to the RRC reconfiguration message. | 02-11-2010 |
20100034172 | PROVIDING AND MAINTAINING FORWARD LINK PACKET DATA SERVICE IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Various embodiments are described herein to address the need for providing and maintaining F-PDCH service to an MS ( | 02-11-2010 |
20100040016 | Wireless Network Handoff Method and Mobile Device Using Same - In a method for wireless network handoff a mobile device scans for candidate wireless networks and authenticates for a access session with discovered networks as soon as the networks are discovered regardless of the presence of a handoff condition. | 02-18-2010 |
20100040017 | METHOD OF CONTROLLING HMIPV6 NETWORK-BASED HANDOVER, AND ACCESS ROUTER AND MOBILE NODE THEREFOR - Disclosed herein are a method of controlling Hierarchical Mobile IPv6 (HMIPv6) network-based handover and an Access Router (AR) and Mobile Node (MN) therefor. The method include the steps of a first AR, to which a MN is connected, receiving an L3 handover initiation message, including a Media Access Control (MAC) address of the MN and the ID of a target Base Station (BS); the first AR creating a Local Care-of Address (LCoA) based on the MAC address of the MN and the ID of the target BS, and performing Binding Update (BU) on a Mobility Anchor Point (MAP) using the created LCoA; when an L2 handover completion message is received from the target BS of the MN, a second AR creating an LCoA and transmitting the LCoA to the MN; and the MN receiving the LCoA from the second AR and configuring the received LCoA as its own LCoA. | 02-18-2010 |
20100040018 | Apparatus and Method for Personality Modification During Handoff - A method and apparatus for facilitating access terminal handoff between access networks is provided. The method may comprise: receiving, at a first access network (AN), an access channel message from an access terminal, wherein the access channel message includes information corresponding to a communication session between a second AN and the access terminal, wherein the communication session includes at least an active personality negotiated with the second AN, obtaining at least one personality, associated with the access terminal, previously negotiated by the first AN, determining if one of the at least one personalities is substantially similar to the active personality, and upon a determination that one of the at least one personalities is substantially similar to the active personality, transferring the communication session to the first AN with the substantially similar personality as the active personality. | 02-18-2010 |
20100040019 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS WITH FEMTO NODES - Systems and methods for performing a handoff of an access terminal from a macro node to a femto node are disclosed. In one embodiment, the femto node is configured to transmit a predetermined signal for determining signal quality and an identifier that uniquely identifies the femto node to the access terminal. The access terminal is configured to transmit the identifier to the macro node. The femto node is identified as a hand in target based on the transmitted identifier and the macro node is configured to hand in the access terminal to the femto node. | 02-18-2010 |
20100040020 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTER-TECHNOLOGY HANDOFF OF A USER EQUIPMENT - A communication system is provided that implements an inter-technology SRVCC handoff without the need for an SRVCC indicator. A user equipment (UE) establishes a communication session that comprises a voice component in a packet data network. In response to determining to handoff the session to a target network, the communication system determines that the session comprises a voice component based on a call-type identifier, preferably a QoS Class Identifier (QCI), that is associated with a voice call and further determines that a target network is a circuit switched network based on configuration information maintained in association with the target network. In response to determining that the session comprises a voice component, that the target network is a circuit switched network, and, based on a profile of the UE, that the UE is capable of operation in single radio mode, the communication system determines to implement a SRVCC handoff procedure. | 02-18-2010 |
20100040021 | COMMUNICATION METHOD, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE NODE, PROXY NODE, AND MANAGEMENT NODE - A technique of acquiring a binding ID when a mobile node performs handover is disclosed. According to the technique, when an MN | 02-18-2010 |
20100040022 | Random Access Aligned Handover - A method and apparatus for reducing handover interruptions when a mobile device executes handover including a random access procedure is described herein. When handover is desirable, a time offset associated with a random access opportunity is determined. The time offset relates the timing of the next random access opportunity to the frame timing of a target access point. Based on the time offset, a network element, e.g., the mobile device, a serving access point, or a mobility management entity, determines a handover start time. Handover is executed at the determined start time to generally align the beginning of the handover execution with the beginning of the next random access opportunity, and therefore, to reduce handover interruption. | 02-18-2010 |
20100040023 | Method and Apparatus for Inter Home Node B Handover in a Home Node B Group - A method of handing over in a communication system that includes a first wireless communications system that has a core network and a second wireless communications system that includes several short range access points using licensed wireless frequencies and a network controller for communicatively coupling a user equipment to the core network. The method receives a relocation required message when a first access point determines to handover the UE to a second access point. The UE has at least one ongoing session with the core network through the first access point, the relocation required message includes a domain identifier for the session. The method sends a relocation request message including the domain identifier to the second access point. The method sends a relocation command message to the first access point for sending to the UE to handover from the first access point to the second access point. | 02-18-2010 |
20100040024 | METHOD, SYSTEM, AND APPARATUS FOR REGISTRATION PROCESSING - A registration processing method, a handover processing method, a system, and an apparatus are disclosed herein to enable the network to distinguish between different registration processing types. The method includes: receiving information about a processing type of registering a UE into a network, where the information is reported by the UE in the process of the registration; and identifying the processing type of the registration according to the information about the processing type. The system includes: a UE, adapted to report information about the processing type of registering the UE into a network in the process of the registration; and a network, adapted to identify the processing type of the registration according to the received registration processing type information reported by the UE. | 02-18-2010 |
20100040025 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR EXTENDED NETWORK ACCESS NOTIFICATION VIA A BROADBAND ACCESS GATEWAY - A system and method supporting extended network access notification via a broadband access gateway is disclosed. A representative embodiment of the present invention may comprise a wireless interface and may be capable of exchanging multimedia communication between the wireless interface and a broadband network. The gateway may support multimedia communication via access devices that may seamlessly hand off from a wireless wide area network to a personal area network supported by the wireless interface. The hand off may be coordinated by the gateway and the wireless wide area network via the broadband network. A user of an access device may be notified when such a hand off has been automatically initiated, and a user may configure aspects of such hand offs. | 02-18-2010 |
20100046466 | HANDOVER CONTROL METHOD - There is provided a handover control method in a mobile communication network wherein an IP packet is exchanged between an access router and a base station, comprising the steps of: receiving a handover request from a mobile station; discarding a packet presently retransmitted and a packet waiting to be scheduled; and switching between cells. | 02-25-2010 |
20100046467 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR HANDOVER AUTHENTICATION - A handover authentication method includes performing, by a wireless network server, a first authentication between a client and the wireless network server via a first network gateway; obtaining first authentication keys for the wireless network server and the client based on the first authentication; determining, by the wireless network server, a need to handover the client from the first network gateway to a second network gateway; deriving, by the wireless network server and from the first authentication keys, a handover authentication key shared by the client and the wireless network server; obtaining, by the wireless network server, second authentication keys for the network server and the client; and serving, by the wireless network server, the client via the second network gateway. | 02-25-2010 |
20100046468 | Apparatus and method to dynamically handover master functionality to another peer in a wireless network - An embodiment of the present invention provides a method of dynamically handing over master functionality from a wireless station configured as a master station to another peer station in a wireless network, comprising, discovering the peer station's Master/AP capability, which may be, but is not required to be, via a (Re)Association request, selecting the peer station to be a new master station based on predetermined parameters, passing the basic service set (BSS) context from the master station to the new master station in a master station Role Request message before transitioning, notifying the new master station to activate its master station role via the master station Role Request message, and switching by the client station to the role of new master station upon receipt of an AP Role Activation message and starting to send Beacons with a BSSID that is the same as used in Beacons of the previous master station. | 02-25-2010 |
20100046469 | IP HANDOFF PROCESS METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONNECTION OF INTERNET PROTOCOLS BETWEEN MOBILE AGENTS IN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK - An IP handoff process method and Internet service system are provided. In the IP handoff process method, a registration request message for multiple IP handoff is received from a mobile station having a plurality of Internet protocol (IP) addresses through a currently-moving mobile agent of the mobile station. Then, the registration request for multiple IP handoff is processed according to information included in the received registration request message. A reply message thereof is transmitted according to the result of updating the information to the mobile station through the currently-moving mobile agent. Then, the received registration request message is transmitted to a previous mobile agent of the mobile station before moving and a home agent of the mobile station as it is. | 02-25-2010 |
20100046470 | WIRELESS MOBILE STATION, WIRELESS BASE STATION CONTROL DEVICE, WIRELESS SYSTEM AND WIRELESS CELL MANAGEMENT METHOD - A wireless mobile station ( | 02-25-2010 |
20100046471 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS BASE STATION, AND WIRELESS TERMINAL STATION - A downlink data frame addressed to a terminal is copied and obtained downlink data frames are transmitted through different APs, respectively. When a plurality of same uplink data frames are received through the different APs, any one uplink data frame selected out of the uplink data frames is transmitted to its destination. An uplink data frame received from the terminal is copied and obtained uplink data frames are transmitted through different STAs, respectively. When a plurality of same downlink data frames are received through different STAs, any one downlink data frame selected out of the downlink data frames is transmitted to the terminal. | 02-25-2010 |
20100046472 | METHOD OF MANAGING DATA BLOCKS DURING HANDOVER - A method of enabling a source base station (BS) to manage an uplink data block during handover from the source BS to a target BS in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes informing the target BS of a sequence number of a uplink data block to be received from a user equipment (UE) and receiving from the target BS the uplink data block corresponding to the sequence number. Data is properly shared by a source base station (BS) and a target BS during handover. Thus, processing capacity of the target BS can be reduced and overhead on network interface can also be reduced. | 02-25-2010 |
20100046473 | MOBILE TERMINAL - When handover is performed from a first network to a second network, a terminal transmits a reply request message to a home agent through the first network after new configuration of a tunnel for transmitting and receiving a packet through the second network. If the terminal receives a reply message corresponding to the reply request message through the first network, the terminal detects that the configuration of the tunnel for transmitting and receiving the packet through the first network can be deleted, and deletes the configuration of the tunnel. | 02-25-2010 |
20100046474 | HOME AGENT - When handover is performed from a first network to a second network, a home agent transmits a reply request message to a terminal through the first network after new configuration of a tunnel for transmitting and receiving a packet through the second network. If the home agent receives a reply message corresponding to the reply request message through the first network, the home agent detects that the configuration of the tunnel for transmitting and receiving the packet through the first network can be deleted, and deletes the configuration of the tunnel. | 02-25-2010 |
20100046475 | Wireless communication system, server and mobile station therefor - This invention provides a wireless communication system wherein a network to which a mobile station should be handed over can be selected, using parametric data collected from network components other than the mobile station. Time taken for a handover between different types of network systems is reduced. The wireless communication system of the present invention comprises a mobile station equipped with multiple wireless interfaces, a server connected to a fixed network, and multiple access points. The mobile station determines available wireless interfaces and sends notification of the available interfaces' identifiers to the server. The server collects managerial data from network components and selects a wireless interface, based on the notification from the mobile station and the managerial data. The mobile station registers its locations in visiting networks corresponding to multiple available wireless interfaces with the server. The server retains the registrations of mobile station locations for the above wireless interfaces. | 02-25-2010 |
20100046476 | SYNCHRONIZATION METHOD, COMMUNICATION HANDOVER METHOD, RADIO NETWORK AND NODE - A synchronization method, a communication handover method, a radio network, and a RAN node are disclosed. The interface information synchronization method includes: determining whether a condition for initiating interface information update is fulfilled; and sending information about the S1 interface between the RAN node and the core network node, and/or information about the X2 interface between the RAN node and the neighboring RAN node to the neighboring RAN node if the condition for initiating interface information update fulfilled. | 02-25-2010 |
20100054204 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF SERVING GATEWAY HAVING MOBILE PACKET PROTOCOL APPLICATION-AWARE PACKET MANAGEMENT - Mobile protocol packets, with a header field and a payload field, are communicated from a user mobile equipment to an application-aware serving gateway. The application-aware mobile protocol serving gateway detects header information in the header field and application information in the payload field to manage the mobile protocol packets based on a policy. | 03-04-2010 |
20100054205 | HANDOFF MANAGEMENT FOR MULTIMODE COMMUNICATION DEVICES BASED ON NON-TRAFFIC STATE UPLINK SIGNALS - An access node receives a non-traffic state WWAN uplink signal transmitted from a multimode wireless communication device to a base station. In response to the reception of the non-traffic state uplink signal, the base station transmits a search message to the multimode wireless communication device to adjust a searching scheme. The WWAN can be notified of the reception of the non-traffic state WWAN uplink signal by a device proximity message that is sent by the access node to the WWAN in response to the reception of the non-traffic state WWAN uplink signal. | 03-04-2010 |
20100054206 | HANDOFF MANAGEMENT BASED ON NON-TRAFFIC STATE UPLINK SIGNALS - A detecting base station receives a non-traffic state uplink signal transmitted from a wireless communication device to an originating base station. The originating base station transmits a search message instructing the wireless communication device to search for an alternate base station. | 03-04-2010 |
20100054207 | L2 Tunneling-based Low Latency Single Radio Handoffs - An example of this invention provides low latency handovers between Mobile WiMAX and 2G/3G/LTE networks with only a single radio transmitting at any given point in time, by establishing L2 tunnel between 3GPP MME and WiMAX ASN for control plane signaling to perform pre-registration, pre-authentication and context transfer to the target network, while UE maintains its connection to the source network, and by setting up bearer path for packet forwarding between Servicing Gateway and WiMAX ASN. An example of this invention uses a virtual eNB to facilitate low latency L2 handoffs to legacy 2G/3G networks with minimum impact to SGSN and MME. | 03-04-2010 |
20100054208 | BASE STATION AND SERVICE FLOW ESTABLISHMENT METHOD - A base station includes a determining unit that determines whether a competition occurs between an identifier of a first service flow established with respect to a mobile station and an identifier of a second service flow which is requested to newly establish with respect to the mobile station; a changing unit that changes the identifier of the first service flow or the identifier of the second service flow, when the determining unit determines that the competition of the identifiers occurs; and an establishing unit that establishes the second service flow by using the identifier of the second service flow with the competition being eliminated against the first service flow through the change by the changing unit. | 03-04-2010 |
20100054209 | System and Method for SR-VCC of IMS Emergency Sessions - Methods and apparatuses for enabling Single Radio (SR)-Voice Call Continuity (VCC) of emergency calls are provided. More specifically, the methods and apparatuses provide continuity of IMS emergency sessions established in 4G access for mobility to 3G/2G access. Generally, a Mobility Management Entity (MME) in the packet switch (PS) domain provides a handover request to a Mobile Switching Center (MSC) Server in the circuit switch (CS) domain. The handover request includes an indication that the call is an emergency call and may include an indication that a Packet Switched Network Induced Location Request (PS-NI-LR) or similar location reporting procedure is required and/or a Gateway Mobile Location Center (GMLC) address. The MSC Server facilitates the handover to the CS domain via the Mg and/or Mw interface. | 03-04-2010 |
20100061335 | Method and System for the Reduction of Scanning Time While Roaming - Described are systems, methods, and devices used for reducing scanning time while communicating between wireless mobile computing devices within a wireless communications network. The method includes the following step(s): receiving communication data from one or more APs within a network, the communication data being specific to each of the one or more APs and transmitting the communication data to an MU within the network. The MU is associated with a first AP and the MU associates with a second AP based on the communication data as the MU roams to the second AP. The method further includes the steps of: associating, by an MU, with a first AP within a network, receiving communication data from the first AP, the communication data including information specific to each of one or more further APs, and associating with one of the further APs based on the communication data. | 03-11-2010 |
20100061336 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING CONTROL INFORMATION OF MULTIMODE MOBILE TERMINAL - A multi-mode mobile subscriber station (MSS) composed of several interfaces, and a method for acquiring/updating information in the case of a handover between heterogeneous networks are disclosed. A method for transmitting/receiving control information of a multi-mode mobile subscriber station (MSS) including at least two interfaces, includes: a) requesting first control information, associated with a new access point detected by a link scanning, from a network entity for providing information associated with a specific network; b) acquiring the requested first control information and second control information supplied from the new access point; and c) performing a connection to the new access point according to the first control information and the second control information. | 03-11-2010 |
20100061337 | Cell Selection/Reselection Mechanism for a Mobile Communication System - A method and mobile station for operating within one or more radio access networks. The radio access network broadcasts system information messages which indicate whether the network or cell supports a packet-switched handover procedure. The mobile station receives the system information messages and utilizes the indicated support as a factor in selecting a cell or routing area of a radio access network within which to camp. | 03-11-2010 |
20100061338 | System and method for performing a handover in an enhanced multicast broadcast system (E-MBS) - A wireless communication network comprising a plurality of base stations capable of wireless communication with a plurality of subscriber stations within a coverage area of the network, wherein at least one of the plurality of base stations is capable of transmitting an edge-zone indicator which indicates the proximity of the at least one base station to an edge of an enhanced multicast broadcast system (E-MBS) zone. | 03-11-2010 |
20100061339 | HANDOVER METHOD WITH MOBILE RELAY STATION - There is provided a handover method by a mobile relay station (MRS) or base station (BS) so as to effectively perform a handover of the MRS and mobile stations (MSs) in an environment in which data is communicated through a relay of the MRS. There is also provided a handover method capable of securing backward compatibility of an MS during a handover. There is provided a handover method in which an MRS is considered. It is possible to improve the efficiency of the handover by allowing handovers of the MRS and MSs to which the MRS relays to be initiated by the MRS or BS. It is possible to secure the backward compatibility of the MSs by allowing the MRS to generate and manage a mapping relation between information on communication identifiers (CIDs) of the MSs, which are changed during the handover, and information on previous CIDs of the MSs. | 03-11-2010 |
20100061340 | ARRANGEMENT AND METHOD RELATING TO DIRECT TUNNELLING IN CONNECTION WITH HANDOVER IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - The present invention relates to a packet data support node ( | 03-11-2010 |
20100061341 | INTRA-CELL COMMON REUSE FOR A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - To avoid or reduce intra-cell interference, each sector of a cell is associated with a sector-specific set of system resources (e.g., subbands) and at least one non-overlapping common set of system resources. Each common set for each sector includes system resources observing little or no interference from at least one other sector in the cell. The channel condition for a terminal in a given sector x is ascertained based on forward and/or reverse link measurements for the terminal. The terminal is assigned system resources from a common set or a sector-specific set for sector x based on the terminal's channel condition. For example, if the terminal observes high interference from another sector y, then the terminal is assigned system resources from a common set that observes little or no interference from sector y. The techniques may be used for an OFDMA system that uses frequency hopping. | 03-11-2010 |
20100061342 | EFFICIENT WIRELESS TRANSMISSION OPPORTUNITY HANDOFF - Circuits, methods, and apparatus that provide high-throughput control fields that, among other functions, provide efficient TXOP handoffs in wireless networks. A handoff may be made by setting one or more bits in a field in a QoS frame, such as the HT control or other appropriate field. Various conditions may be placed on a handoff by a granting station. For example, conditions specifying where a station receiving a TXOP handoff may send data, what the receiving station may do with any remaining TXOP, or what types of data may be transmitted by the receiving station may be imposed. These various conditions may be combined or omitted in any logic combination. | 03-11-2010 |
20100067481 | DATA RETRANSMISSION METHOD, NETWORK CONTROLLER, MOBILE STATION AND BASE STATION - An RNC creates a packet of a desired size from a data packet and transmits the packet to a BTS that controls a UE as a destination of the packet. The BTS transmits the received packet to the UE and notifies the RNC of a packet reception result received from the UE. The RNC determine whether a data packet corresponding to a packet transmitted to the BTS has correctly reached the UE based on the received reception result. When the UE performs handover from the BTS to a handover-destination BTS, the RNC retransmits a data packet that has not correctly reached the UE via the handover-destination BTS. | 03-18-2010 |
20100067482 | Method And Apparatus For Estimating A Position Of An Access Point In A Wireless Communications Network - The present invention describes a method for estimating a position of an Access Point in a wireless communications network. The Access Point, used for connecting wireless networks to a core network, is being equipped with a User Equipment module, UE module. The UE module is used for scanning, for example upon a triggering event, a surrounding environment of the Access Point to identify neighbour Radio Base Stations. The Access Point then creates a neighbour list including information relating to neighbour Radio Base Stations. The Access Point forwards the neighbour list to the Network Control Node, wherein the Network Control Node uses the information in the neighbour list to estimate a position of the Access Point. | 03-18-2010 |
20100067483 | HANDOVER HANDLING - A system is proposed to provide handover in a mobile telecommunications environment, particularly applicable to 3GPP networks, which does not increase signalling overhead but minimises user data loss during handover. In the modified system, PDCP SDUs with Sequence numbers are buffered and retransmitted as necessary. At the time of handover, SDUs not received by the user device are forwarded to the target base station for forward transmission to the UE. The handover procedure is designed to minimise packet loss whilst keeping to a minimum the duplication of packet transmission over the air interface. | 03-18-2010 |
20100067484 | BASE STATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION CONTROL SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND INTER-STATION CONTROL METHOD - A base station apparatus includes a determining unit that determines whether a direct link has been established between the base station apparatus and another base station apparatus, when a mobile device makes a request to switch a communication recipient from the base station apparatus to the other base station apparatus; a link information acquiring unit that acquires, indirectly from the other base station apparatus, link information necessary for establishing the direct link to the other base station apparatus, when the determining unit determines that no direct link to the other base station apparatus has been established; and a link requesting unit that requests the other base station apparatus to establish the direct link to the base station apparatus, based on the link information of the other base station apparatus acquired by the link information acquiring unit. | 03-18-2010 |
20100067485 | Cache With Variable Lifetime For Storing Overhead Messages For Femto Deployments - Aspects describe separate caches that can be utilized to retain overhead information while device is in idle mode. A first cache can be associated with a first timer and can be utilized when a device is performing idle handoff. A second cache, associated with a second timer can be utilized when a device is not performing idle handoff. Second timer can have a longer period of validity than first timer. The separate caches can be utilized in networks that include femto cell topography, wherein re-use of pilot PN codes are at a greater frequency than the re-use frequency in macro cell topography. | 03-18-2010 |
20100067486 | HANDOVER METHOD IN WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM AND APPARATUS USED IN HANDOVER METHOD - When a mobile station moves from a communication area of a first access point to a communication area of a second access point, an information processing device provided for the second access point functions as an extraction device, a request device, and a communication device. The extraction device extracts first access point identification information identifying the first access point from a connection request message received from the mobile station. The request device requests the first access point to transmit the control information relating to the communication of the mobile station using the first access point identification information. The communication device establishes a link to the mobile station using the control information acquired from the first access point. | 03-18-2010 |
20100067487 | Wireless Communication Terminal, Hand-Off Method in Wireless Communication Terminal, and Wireless Communication System - It is possible to provide a wireless communication terminal, a handoff method in the wireless communication terminal, and a wireless communication system which can suppress the affect of an instantaneous disconnection in a hard handoff. The wireless communication terminal ( | 03-18-2010 |
20100067488 | WIRELESS TERMINAL AND HANDOVER METHOD OF WIRELESS TERMINAL - A wireless terminal includes a data transmitting/receiving function and a handover control section. The handover control section scans channels to detect the existence or non-existence of the handover destination candidate on all available wireless channels. The handover control section acquires the handover destination candidate, by scanning the existence or non-existence of the handover destination in advance before handover execution. The verification scan is carried out to check whether or not the candidate is in a communicable area with the terminal. Then, based on the execution result of the verification scan, it performs a handover. | 03-18-2010 |
20100067489 | Selective Packet Forwarding for LTE Mobility - Methods and devices are disclosed for forwarding data packets during handover in a packet-switched wireless communications system, such as a 3GPP Long-Term Evolution/System Architecture Evolution system. In an exemplary method, a source base station node ( | 03-18-2010 |
20100067490 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING SERVICE CONTINUITY OF MULTICAST AND BROADCAST SERVICES IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - There is provided a method of handing over a provided service from a serving base station to a target base station, the service including streaming content sent to a mobile station. The method includes receiving, at the target base station, a handover request from the serving base station, the handover request identifying the streaming content being provided to the mobile station by the serving base station, and an interrupt data packet, of the streaming content, last transmitted to the mobile station. The method includes sending a handover response to the serving base station and receiving a notification from the serving base station indicating that the target base station is selected for handover. The method includes receiving, from the serving base station, subsequent data packets of the streaming content that are later in time than the interrupt data packet and sending the received subsequent data packets to the mobile station. | 03-18-2010 |
20100074218 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PILOT CAPTURE FOR WIRELESS INTERSYSTEM HANDOVER - The present invention provides a method and apparatus applied to pilot capture for handover between wireless communication networks. In the method, when a mobile station needs to hand over from a GSM system serving as current service network to another wireless communication network, the GSM system and the mobile station will update the logic location of the first idle frame to be met subsequently, which will be inserted after the TDMA frame where the corresponding starting point of pilot capture resides, then the mobile station utilizes idle timeslots after the starting point to form a pilot capture time window with a predefined length, eventually the mobile station captures the pilot signal of the another wireless communication network in the pilot capture time window. Comparing to conventional pilot capture method, with the method provided by the present invention, the mobile station not only capture the complete pilot signal of target handover network, but also achieve the whole pilot-capture process with relatively short time. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074219 | Methods and Apparatus for Reverse Link Timing Correction - Methods and apparatus for reverse link timing correction in a wireless communication device. In particular, when a handoff of the device from a first sector currently serving the device to a second sector not currently serving the device is detected, a first function linking timing correction of a reverse link of the device to forward link timing corrections is changed to a second function for timing correction. In particular, the second function is configured to correct reverse link timing during a time period of either during or for a predetermined period after a handoff of the device from the first sector to the second sector, where the second function is based on a criterion different from criteria of the first function. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074220 | HANDOVER METHOD BETWEEN SYSTEMS OF MULTI-MODE TERMINAL - The present invention relates to a handover method between systems of a multi-mode terminal. A multi-cast based protocol is added to an Internet protocol (IP) based wireless network to cooperate with the wireless access protocol of the terminal. In addition, minimized processes are added to use the wireless access protocol having wide area coverage. Accordingly, the handover between the systems may be performed while packet loss or service delay caused by a movement of a user may be minimized, and terminal complexity may not be increased. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074221 | APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING HANDOVER BETWEEN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS, METHOD OF PERFORMING HANDOVER BETWEEN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS, AND MOBILE ROUTER - Provided are an apparatus for controlling handover between heterogeneous networks, a method of performing handover between heterogeneous networks in a mobile router, and a mobile router. The method includes determining whether a handover to a network employing a different method from a network to which the mobile router belongs is required based on information prestored in the mobile router, the network to which the mobile router belongs determined by current location information of the mobile router and performing the handover according to the result of the determination. Mobility detection time can be reduced by applying the handover technique between wireless/satellite networks based on link trigger and location to a mobile router moving at high speed. Thus, service interruption can be prevented regardless of movement speed, even in a satellite shadow region such as a station. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074222 | METHOD FOR IMPROVING BUFFER STATUS TRIGGERING MECHANISM IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND RELATED COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method for improving a buffer status triggering mechanism for a mobile device of a wireless communication system comprises triggering a buffer status report when uplink data becomes data available for transmission and a logical channel corresponding to data of the uplink data has higher priority than logical channels corresponding to data available for transmission already existed in a transmission buffer if there is already data available for transmission other than the uplink data included in the UE transmission buffer. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074223 | CS to IMS Hand-Back and Hand-in for IMS Systems for Legacy CS UE with Home Node B Access - A system and method for allowing legacy circuit switch user equipment (CS UE) to operate via a packet switch system, such as an IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) system, is provided. The mobility and session control aspects of communications with the legacy CS UE is separated. A user agent is placed in the receiving node (e.g., a home node B) that acts as the SIP agent for the CS UE for session control. An interworking function is provided to allow mobility between the macro CS network and the PS (e.g., IMS) network. Hand-back and hand-in procedures with service continuity are also provided. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074224 | IMS to CS Handover for IMS Systems for Legacy CS UE with Home Node B Access - A system and method for allowing legacy circuit switch user equipment (CS UE) to operate via a packet switch system, such as an IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) system, is provided. The mobility and session control aspects of communications with the legacy CS UE is separated. A user agent is placed in the receiving node (e.g., a home node B) that acts as the SIP agent for the CS UE for session control. An interworking function is provided to allow mobility between the macro CS network and the PS (e.g., IMS) network. Hand-back and hand-in procedures with service continuity are also provided. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074225 | SYSTEM AND METHODS OF INTEGRATING AN OVERLAY WIRELESS DATA NETWORK CANOPY INTO A HIGH BANDWIDTH FTTX (FIBER-TO-THE PREMISES / CURB / NEIGHBORHOOD) NETWORK - An approach to integrate a wireless data network canopy into the high-capacity fixed FttX (Fiber-to-the-Premises/Curb/Neighborhood) network at intersection points throughout the overlay rather than interconnecting them as two disparate networks in order to provide a plurality of data containing video, audio, voice communications, broadcast radio programming, and data both fixed and mobile. This approach is applicable to active networks. Considerations must still be made for security. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074226 | Proxy based approach for IP address assignment to decrease latency of hand-offs in mobile IP telephony - A mechanism for decreasing the latency in an IP address assignment process for mobile systems using IP as network layer protocol is described. The proposed system is aimed at supporting seamless hand-offs for real-time applications like VOIP. A set of optimized messages is defined to eliminate the need for exchanging long DHCP messages to acquire an IP address. The mechanism involves splitting the IP address assignment functionality into two parts, with the base station being responsible for assigning IP addresses to individual end user devices, and the Mobile Switching Center assigning a block of IP addresses to each base station. | 03-25-2010 |
20100074227 | METHOD AND A NETWORK NODE FOR CONTROLLING OUTPUT UPLINK AND DOWNLINK POWER LEVELS IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - The present inventions relates to a method and a network node for controlling an output uplink power level of a mobile station and for controlling an output downlink power level of a target base station in a target cell of a mobile communications system. The method comprises receiving at the network node a message indicating that a handover of the mobile station from an originating cell to the target cell is completed; and commanding the target base station to use an initial output downlink power level and the mobile station to use an initial output uplink power level, wherein the initial output downlink power level and the initial output uplink power level are based on at least previous power control levels used a time after previous handovers were completed between the originating cell and the target cell. | 03-25-2010 |
20100080190 | HANDOFFS IN HIERARCHICAL MOBILITY LABEL-BASED NETWORK - A system establishes a communication path between a mobile node and a first label edge router, registers the mobile node at the first label edge router, and creates a mobility binding at the first label edge router. The system also establishes a label switched path between the first label edge router and a second label edge router by propagating the mobility binding in the system, and establishes communication between the mobile node and a corresponding node over the label switched path. The system further maintains the communication between the mobile node and the corresponding node over the system when the mobile node moves from one physical location to another physical location and causes a handoff of the mobile node between two layer 2 grooming networks. | 04-01-2010 |
20100080191 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS BASE STATION, AND TRANSMISSION RATE ALLOCATION METHOD - In the present invention, a base station comprises: an RTWP measurement unit that measures RTWP of the base station; a monitoring unit that monitors the start and the removal of the Gating state by each of a plurality of mobile stations; a threshold setting unit that lowers a threshold by the amount of an offset, which is equivalent to the difference in the transmission rate of the mobile station that is decreased as the mobile station starts the Gating operation, if any of the plurality of mobile stations starts the Gating operation; and a scheduling unit that allocates a transmission rate, which is equivalent to the difference between the RTWP of the base station and the threshold, to a mobile station other than the mobile station in the Gating state among the plurality of mobile stations if the RTWP of the base station is less than the threshold. | 04-01-2010 |
20100085935 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING SHORT BURST MESSAGES OVER WIRELSS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A multi-mode mobile station may include an extended preferred roaming list (PRL). The extended PRL may include an extended system table. The extended system table may include at least one WiMAX extended system record and at least one CDMA extended system record. The extended PRL may also include an extended acquisition table. The extended acquisition table may also include at least one WiMAX extended acquisition record and at least one CDMA extended acquisition record. | 04-08-2010 |
20100085936 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR OPTIMIZING NETWORK ENTRY DURING HANDOFFS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for optimizing network entry during handoffs in a wireless communication network ( | 04-08-2010 |
20100085937 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR INBOUND ROAMING IN IP MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM NETWORKS - A system and method for enabling a UE to roam to a visited IMS-based network from a home network that does not have an IMS infrastructure. A visiting UE sends to an Intelligent Roaming Application Server (I-RAS) in the visited network, a first SIP Registration message that includes a SIP URI identifying the UE as a visitor from a home network that does not have an IMS infrastructure. The I-RAS rejects the registration, but includes a temporary Tel URI in the rejection message. The UE sends a second Registration message using the temporary Tel URI, which is forwarded to a Visited S-CSCF for authentication. The S-CSCF returns authentication vectors, which the UE uses to compute ciphering parameters and establish an IPSEC connection with a Visited P-CSCF. The UE then sends a third Registration message, which is accepted, and registration in the visited network is complete. The I-RAS acts as a pseudo Visited MSC/VLR and performs an update location procedure with the visiting UE's home network. | 04-08-2010 |
20100085938 | WiFi network system for performing a high-speed handover of voice and multimedia data and method applied to the same - A WiFi network system for performing a high-speed handover of voice and multimedia data includes a wireless station (STA), a network router for connecting to the Internet; first and second smart base stations respectively connected with the Internet through the network router, wherein the second smart base station is adjacent to the first smart base station. Each of the smart base stations covers an area in order to register the STA located in the area and connect the STA with the Internet through the first or a second smart base station and the network router. | 04-08-2010 |
20100085939 | METHOD FOR SUPPORTING MOBILITY FOR VERTICAL HANDOVER OF MOBILE NODE - A method for supporting mobility for a vertical handover of a mobile node (MN) includes dividing service domains of respective first and second networks in different layers when an external correspondent node (CN) and the MN communicate with each other through the first network. When the MN moves to the second network, a care of address (CoA) newly allocated from the second network and a home address (HoA) of a home agent | 04-08-2010 |
20100085940 | HANDOFF PROCEDURES AND INTRA-NETWORK DATA ROUTING FOR FEMTOCELL NETWORKS - The present invention is directed toward a system and method for enabling handoffs of a connected mobile device between an external macrocell access point and a local femtocell access point without interrupting data communication sessions occurring on that connected mobile device. In some embodiments, this entails maintaining an IP address assigned to the connected mobile device during and after the handoff procedure. In further embodiments, this process is enabled by providing a virtual private network link between the external support node and a local access point controller. | 04-08-2010 |
20100091732 | SYSTEM AND METHOD TO PROVIDE FAST WIDE-AREA MOBILE IP HANDOFFS - A system, device, and method for real-time handoff in a mobile IP network is provided. In an embodiment, an indication that a mobile device is in a new network is sent out more often in a beacon than in an IRDP message in order to provide an effective seamless connectivity between service areas for wireless communications. | 04-15-2010 |
20100091733 | METHOD FOR HANDOVER BETWEEN HETEROGENOUS RADIO ACCESS NETWORKS - A method for handover between heterogeneous radio access networks is disclosed. When a multi-mode mobile station performs Inter-RAT handover, pre-authentication is performed before implementing a link layer handover procedure with a target access point. The pre-authentication method has as little an effect on currently served quality of service as possible and the handover is efficiently performed using the pre-authentication method. The pre-authentication is performed through medium independent handover (MIH) and various MIH primitives for pre-authentication are provided. | 04-15-2010 |
20100091734 | PACKET FORWARDING METHOD IN THE CASE OF THE HANDOVER BETWEEN BASE STATIONS - A method for forwarding packets in handover between base stations (eNBs) is provided. A source eNB confirming handover success sends control data indicating an EOD of a forwarding packet to a target eNB when there are no more packets to be forwarded to the target eNB, and the target eNB receiving the control data recognizes from the control data that there are no more packets to be forwarded from the source eNB, thus preventing delay in the handover between the eNBs. | 04-15-2010 |
20100091735 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DATA IN SOFT HANDOFF OF A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method of transmitting and receiving data in soft handoff of a wireless communication system. According to an aspect of the present invention, in the method of receiving data in soft handoff of a wireless communication system, a mobile station receives a first sequence being generated by interleaving transmission data using a first interleaver pattern, and also receives a second sequence being generated by interleaving the transmission data using a second interleaver pattern. Then, the mobile station combines and decodes the first sequence and the second sequence before receiving an entire frame having the first sequence allocated thereto. | 04-15-2010 |
20100091736 | SYSTEM FOR PACKET DATA SERVICE IN THE MIXED NETWORK OF ASYNCHRONOUS COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND SYNCHRONOUS COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND HAND-OVER METHOD THEREOF - Disclosed herein is a mobile communication terminal and handover method therefor, which enable handover of a mobile communication terminal that is using a packet data service or is in a dormant state in a mobile communication network in which asynchronous and synchronous networks coexist. In the handover method, if a channel is assigned between a mobile communication terminal and a synchronous mobile communication system in response to a request from an asynchronous mobile communication system as a mobile communication terminal using packet data service in the asynchronous mobile communication system moves into an area of the synchronous mobile communication system, call setup is performed. A node B of the asynchronous communication releases a connection to the mobile communication system and assigns a new mobile IP to the mobile communication terminal, thus providing continuous packet data service to the mobile communication terminal. | 04-15-2010 |
20100091737 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR HANDOVER/ROAMING DURING FILE DOWNLOADING/STREAMING - Apparatuses and methods for handover or roaming during a file download or streaming. A streaming roaming method in a Convergence of Broadcast and Mobile Services (CBMS) system includes generating a Session Description Protocol (SDP), a fragment, or a notification message indicating streaming roaming or handover information, and transmitting the SDP, the fragment, or the notification message to a terminal. | 04-15-2010 |
20100091738 | Methodology for base station assisted channel selection for interference handling in mobile networks - A mechanism is disclosed where a Base Station provides assistance to a mobile device in the channel-switch process because a mobile device might have to perform frequent channel switches to overcome adverse channel conditions due to interference in the 900 MHz ISM band. The Base Station broadcasts channel-specific information that will be used by all mobile devices to accurately select prospective channels for future channel-switches, thereby cutting down the latency that is experienced during an actual switch. | 04-15-2010 |
20100098021 | POLICY-DRIVEN LAYER 3 HANDOFF FOR MOBILE SERVICES - In one embodiment, an apparatus can include an input configured to receive a request for available layer 3 points of attachment from a mobility anchor, and logic configured to provide a list of layer 3 points of attachment based at least upon a set of dynamic network conditions. | 04-22-2010 |
20100098022 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ROUTING A PACKET IN MOBILE IP SYSTEM - The invention relates to a method, apparatus and system to preferably route a packet via an IP network, and more particularly to a routing entity having a buffer storing packets from/to a mobile entity. An initiation unit ( | 04-22-2010 |
20100098023 | MAINTAINING CIRCUIT SWITCHED CONTINUITY IN AN ENHANCED UNIVERSAL TERRESTRIAL RADIO ACCESS NETWORK - A method for implementing a fallback procedure from a packet switched (PS) radio access technology (RAT) to a circuit switched (CS) RAT is disclosed. A paging message is received at a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) via the PS RAT, the paging message including a WTRU identifier and a domain indicator, wherein the domain indicator indicates whether the paging message is related to a service on the CS RAT. If the WTRU identifier in the paging message matches a stored identifier of the receiving WTRU, then a fallback procedure to the CS RAT is performed. The WTRU responds to the paging message using a CS RAT-based identifier assigned to the WTRU. | 04-22-2010 |
20100098024 | BASE STATION AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A packet storage unit stores therein a data packet and an inter-base-station transfer packet assigned with sequence numbers. When the inter-base-station transfer packet is stored in the packet storage unit, a packet reading unit reads the inter-base-station transfer packet in order of the sequence number, and then reads the data packet in order of receiving the data packet. A packet transmitting unit transmits the inter-base-station transfer packet and the data packet read by the packet reading unit to a destination mobile terminal. The packet reading unit determines whether all inter-base-station transfer packets are read based on the sequence numbers. | 04-22-2010 |
20100098025 | Method and appartus for handover between IEEE 802.16E and 802.16M systems - Methods for a mobile station to handover between IEEE 802.16e and 802.16m systems are provided. The mobile station is served by an IEEE 802.16e-only base station or an IEEE 802.16e zone of a 16e/16m-conexistence base station. In a zone-switch based handover procedure, the mobile station first performs an IEEE 802.16e legacy handover procedure such that the mobile station handovers from the serving base station to an IEEE 802.16e zone of a target base station. The mobile station then performs a zone-switch procedure such that the mobile station switches from the IEEE 802.16e zone to an IEEE 802.16m zone of the target base station. In a direct handover procedure, the mobile station performs an IEEE 802.16m handover procedure such that the mobile station handovers from the serving base station to the IEEE 802.16m zone of the target base station directly. | 04-22-2010 |
20100098026 | PARTNER NODE MIGRATION CONTROL UNIT AND METHOD - Disclosed is a migration communication control device constructed to control a continuous communication between a mobile node and a node unaffected the mobile node's migration. The migration communication control device comprises a first migration control unit, a second migration control unit on the mobile node, and a third migration control unit on the partner node. The first migration control unit comprises a packet transfer unit and an address post unit. The packet transfer unit receives a packet which was destined for an outdated address of the mobile node, generates a conversion packet which holds an updated address instead of the outdated address, and then transmits the conversion packet, while an address post unit transmits an address post message which indicates the updated address to the third migration control unit. The second migration control unit comprises a migration post unit and a packet resumption unit. The migration post unit transmits to the first migration control unit a migration post message which indicates the updated address when the mobile node migrates to another network while a packet resumption unit receives the conversion packet from both the first migration control unit and the third migration control unit and resumes an original packet from the conversion packet. The third migration control unit comprises a packet conversion unit which converts a destination address of a packet into the updated address, then transmits it to the mobile node. | 04-22-2010 |
20100098027 | Media independent trigger model for multiple network types - A media independent trigger model for multiple network types is disclosed. A change in communication environment trigger is communicated from a media dependent interface to an upper media independent application. The communication environment trigger may be from a local event detected by the interface or may be a remote trigger received from another device. The upper media independent application adjusts operations according to the communication environment trigger. | 04-22-2010 |
20100098028 | Communication System, Mobility Management Network Element and Method for Processing Resources - A method for processing a resource receiving, by a mobility management network element of a packet switched (PS) network, a Release Request message sent by an access network of the PS network when a user equipment (UE) is handed over from the PS network to a CS network. After receiving the Release Request message, resources of the UE are processed in the PS network. | 04-22-2010 |
20100103903 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR HANDOVER USING INCREASED PROBABLITY FOR FAST RANGING SUCCESS - Techniques presented herein disclose handover using increased probability of the fast ranging success. Propagation delay of the RF signal transmitted from an MS to a target BS may be estimated based on a known propagation delay to a current serving BS and a relative difference in propagation delays to the current serving BS and the target BS, for example, as indicated by different receive times of preamble sequences transmitted from the current serving BS and the target BS. | 04-29-2010 |
20100103904 | ENHANCED FORWARD LINK TRANSMISSION - A method for processing forward link channel signals generated by a CDMA base station includes time sharing by several mobile stations of spreading codes, which are orthogonal codes such as Walsh Code, and code-combining soft/softer handoff across sectors in the mobile station active set to increase dimensions on the CDMA2000 and WCDMA downlink while minimizing intra-sector interference. Since different parts of a packet or frame are transmitted to the user by the different base stations in the active set, earlier decoding and therefore early packet termination is enabled. | 04-29-2010 |
20100103905 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SERVICE LINK HANDOVER - A method and a system for service link handover are provided. The method and the system are in a communication technical field. The method is as follows. Apply for service processing resources of a second service processing unit. A service link establishment message is sent to the second service processing unit, in which the message carries link address information of a first service node and a second service node, such that the second service processing unit binds link addresses of the first service node and the second service node. A response message from the second service processing unit is received, and a link handover indication message is sent to the first service node and the second service node, such that the first service node and the second service node hand over link connections to the second service processing unit. Thus, an efficiency of a rolling upgrade is improved and a service interruption possibly caused by the rolling upgrade is avoided when units in the same resource pool perform the rolling upgrade. | 04-29-2010 |
20100111032 | METHOD FOR HANDLING RANDOM ACCESS RESPONSE RECEPTION AND AN E-UTRAN AND USER EQUIPMENT THEREOF - A method for handling Random Access Response reception in a user equipment (UE) when communicating with a E-UTRAN includes transmitting a RA preamble to the E-UTRAN for initialing a random access (RA) procedure according to a received trigger event; receiving a RA response from the E-UTRAN corresponding to the RA preamble; and determining whether a MAC PDU or another RA preamble need to be transmitted according to an UL grant in the RA response and the trigger event. | 05-06-2010 |
20100111033 | MULTISERVICE COMMUNICATION DEVICE WITH DEDICATED CONTROL CHANNEL - A multiservice communication device includes a plurality of transceivers that wirelessly transceive data with a corresponding plurality of networks in accordance with a corresponding plurality of network protocols. A control channel transceiver transceives control channel data with a remote management unit including local control data sent to the management unit and remote control data received from the management unit. A processing module processes the remote control data and generates a least one control signal in response thereto, the at least one control signal for adapting at least one of the plurality of transceivers based on the remote control data. | 05-06-2010 |
20100111034 | MANAGEMENT UNIT FOR FACILITATING INTER-NETWORK HAND-OFF FOR A MULTISERVICE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A management unit allocates network resources to a plurality of multiservice communication devices capable of communicating via a plurality of networks. The management unit includes a communication device interface for facilitating a bidirectional data communication with the plurality of multiservice communication devices via a wireless control channel, the bidirectional data communication including outbound control data sent to at least one of the plurality of multiservice communication devices and inbound control data received from at least one of the plurality of multiservice communication devices, wherein the wireless control channel is separate from the communication between the plurality of multiservice communication devices and the plurality of networks. A network interface receives network resource data from the plurality of networks. A management processing unit generates the outbound control data in response thereto, wherein the management processing unit facilities the handoff of a real-time service accessed by the at least one of the plurality of multiservice communication devices via a first network of the plurality of networks to a second network of the plurality of networks. | 05-06-2010 |
20100111035 | LOCATION-BASED HANDOVERS FROM A MACROCELL TO A FEMTOCELL USING PERIODIC MEASUREMENT REPORTING - The present invention provides a method for implementation in user equipment that is configured to communicate with a wireless communication system that includes macro-cells femtocells. The method includes determining a distance between the user equipment and the femtocell(s). The method also includes periodically transmitting first measurement reports from the user equipment to the macrocell(s) at a selected time interval. The first measurement reports include information indicating the distance between the user equipment and the femtocell(s). The method also includes receiving a request to hand off from the macrocell(s) to the femtocell(s). The request is generated by a radio network controller based on the periodically transmitted measurement reports. | 05-06-2010 |
20100111036 | BASE STATION, USER APPARATUS, AND METHOD - A base station comprises a transmission buffer configured to store a service data unit received from the access gateway; a retransmission buffer configured to store a packet data unit to be retransmitted in a radio downlink; a scheduler configured to determine assignment of radio resources to user apparatuses and supply scheduling information; and a transmitted signal processing unit configured to generate a transmitted signal including data stored in the transmission buffer or the retransmission buffer in accordance with the scheduling information. The scheduler is configured to determine the scheduling information to transmit data destined for a user apparatus requesting handover in priority to data destined for a user apparatus that does not request handover. | 05-06-2010 |
20100111037 | Communication System, Base Station and Mobile Station Used in the Communication System, and Base Station Switching Method - There are provided an OFDMA communication system capable of reducing a time necessary for a handover without releasing a wireless communication with a base station as a handover source to search base stations, a base station and a mobile station used in the communication system, and a base station switching method. | 05-06-2010 |
20100111038 | METHOD FOR MANAGING INTERNET PROTOCOL HANDOFF IN NETWORK SYSTEM - There is provided a method of processing Internet Protocol (IP) handoff of a mobile node in a network system, in which the IP handoff is processed distinguishing a signal packet path for the IP handoff from a data packet path the method including receiving a registration request message when the mobile node moves to an arbitrary mobile agent, the message received from the mobile node via the mobile agent to which the mobile node moves; transmitting the received registration request message to a mobile agent where the mobile node is previously located, without change, according to whether an entry with respect to the mobile node exists in preset visitor list; and transmitting a registration reply message with respect to the registration request message to the mobile agent without change. | 05-06-2010 |
20100111039 | Method and apparatus for controlling discontinuous reception in mobile communication system - A method and apparatus is configured to control a discontinuous reception (DRX) in a mobile communication system. The method includes: interrupting the DRX operation when a radio resource control (RRC) connection reestablishment procedure is initiated; transmitting an RRC connection reestablishment request message from the user equipment to an evolved node B (ENB); receiving an RRC connection reestablishment message from the ENB to the user equipment; and resuming, if the received RRC connection reestablishment message contains new DRX setting information, the interrupted DRX operation according to the new DRX setting information. The DRX operation can be interrupted or resumed at a proper time point when an RRC connection is reestablished or reconfigured or a handover is performed, thereby reducing power consumption in the user equipment. | 05-06-2010 |
20100111040 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FAST BREAK-BEFORE-MAKE MEDIA INDEPENDENT HANDOVER - A method and apparatus may be used to perform a Media Independent Handover. Data may be received from a source node in a source network serving a WTRU. The WTRU may transmit a first message to an intermediary node and receive a second message in response. The WTRU may establish connectivity on a target network and receive data from a target node. | 05-06-2010 |
20100111041 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD THEREOF - A communication system and data transmission method thereof are provided. The method includes adding an end marker to the end of source data and transmitting the source data and the end marker for a Packet data network GateWay (PGW) to a source evolved Node B (eNB) if a handover is carried out from the source eNB to a target eNB while the PGW is transmitting the source data to the source eNB, forwarding the source data and the end marker from the source eNB to the target eNB, transmitting target data immediately following the source data from the PGW to the target eNB, and transmitting the source data and the target data, which is classified into the source data by the end marker and immediately follows the end of the source data, from the target eNB to user equipment. | 05-06-2010 |
20100118830 | Mobile Intelligent Roaming Using Multi-Modal Access Point Devices - A system and method are provided in which access point (AP) devices in a wireless local area network (WLAN) are typed or configured into one of three measurement and reporting roles: Monitor-Mode AP (MMAP), Portal AP (PAP), a Border AP (BAP) or an Interior AP (IAP). APs are assigned specific link measurement requirements according to their assigned type or role. In general, MMAPs and PAPs have the greatest measurement and reporting responsibilities, BAPs have less measurement and reporting responsibilities than PAPs and IAPs have the least measurement and reporting responsibilities. The APs generate measurements that are supplied to appropriate equipment to facilitate handover decisions with respect to a dual-mode wireless client device that roams between the WLAN and another network or vice versa. As a result, link measurements are only performed by APs in locations where such measurements are necessary for handover service, thus reducing the overall processing load on the WLAN infrastructure. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118831 | Method For Network Layer Handoff Over a Wireless LAN and an Associated Access Point Device - A method and a wireless access point device for a network layer handoff of a wireless mobile node over a wireless local area network. The method includes detecting a wireless mobile node that has moved into the coverage area of the wireless access point device; maintaining an available IP address pool; selecting a temporary IP address from the IP access pool in response to the detection of the mobile node moving into the coverage area; and assigning a temporary IP address to the mobile node for use by the node during an interim period. The method produces a network layer handoff of a wireless mobile node over a local area network. Also provided is a computer readable article of manufacture tangibly embodying computer readable instructions for executing the steps of the method. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118832 | Method for connection termination in mobile IP - A method is provided for optimizing the sending of a Mobile IP Revocation Reply. According to the invention methodology, a Foreign Agent operating as the care-of address for a given mobile unit will send to the Home Agent for that mobile unit a Revocation Acknowledgement message immediately after receiving a Revocation message from the Home Agent, without awaiting the conclusion of the Foreign Agent's tear-down steps. After sending that immediate acknowledgement to the Home Agent, the Foreign Agent independently proceeds with its regular procedures of forwarding the Revocation message to the client (as needed), waiting for a response from the client (including retransmitting the request to the client on a timer if no response received), and tearing down the user plane. With the method of the invention, the latency of the latter procedures would not result in a delay in sending the Revocation Acknowledgement from the Foreign Agent to the Home Agent. | 05-13-2010 |
20100118833 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING INITIAL RANGING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of performing initial ranging in a wireless communication system includes transmitting a ranging request message and receiving a ranging response message including a temporary identifier for a mobile station which transmits the ranging request message. By using the temporary identifier which identifies the mobile station before establishing authentication, it is possible to prevent the MAC address from being exposed to a malicious attacker through a wireless interface and to secure location privacy. | 05-13-2010 |
20100124200 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PREDICTING HANDOVER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and apparatus for predicting a handover of a Mobile Station (MS) of a plurality of MSs to one or more target Base Stations (BSs) of a plurality of BSs in a wireless communication network. The method includes predicting a need for a handover of a MS to one or more target BSs selected from the plurality of BSs based on a handover threshold. The handover threshold is associated with a quality of a signal received by the MS. The method further includes transferring datapath associated with the MS to one or more of the one or more target BSs and one or more gateways prior to the handover of the MS. The one or more gateways are associated with one or more of a serving BS associated with the MS and the one or more target BSs. The plurality of BSs includes the serving BS. | 05-20-2010 |
20100124201 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS USING SAME BASE STATION CARRIER HANDOFF FOR MULTICARRIER SUPPORT - Certain embodiments of the present disclosure provide a method for switching radio frequency (RF) carriers that serve communication between a base station (BS) and a mobile station (MS). The switching of carriers can be viewed as a handoff procedure between two different RF carriers within the same BS. A simplified handoff procedure for switching of RF carriers can be applied when the MS switches its physical connection from a primary RF carrier to a secondary RF carrier, as well as in the case when the BS decides to move the MS from one primary RF carrier to another primary RF carrier. | 05-20-2010 |
20100124202 | RTP voice packets for base station hand-off in mobile IP telephony - In wireless networks where the goal is to support a large number of VOIP based cellular calls, large overhead headers in RTP voice packets are not acceptable. In wireless networks where multiple base stations are deployed, handsets may handoff from one base station to the other while in a voice call creating a large overhead. This disclosure describes an efficient way to extend a header compression algorithm and lower the overhead when the handset is in a voice call and hands off from one base station to another. | 05-20-2010 |
20100124203 | CONDITIONAL ACCESS TERMINAL INITIATION OF DELAYED HANDOVER - The number of handover-related failures that occur in a communication system may be reduced by taking target access point conditions into account when declaring radio link failure and/or by delaying certain handover operations. In some aspects, criteria for radio link failure detection and access terminal-controlled mobility may take into account access point parameters related to neighboring cells that may be available as mobility targets. For example, filtering mechanisms for detecting radio link failure based on radio layer problem reports may also take into account the availability of various neighbor access points and their measured signal strengths. In addition, a handover command may be sent earlier than in conventional systems (e.g., the handover command may be sent even though the target access point is weaker than the source access point) and include an indication that instructs the access terminal to delay handover until a specified condition is met. For example, handover may be delayed until the target access point becomes stronger than the source access point. | 05-20-2010 |
20100128694 | SELECTION OF PACKET DATA PROTOCOL CONTEXT FOR HANDOVER FROM CELLULAR NETWORK TO FEMTO CELL - System(s) and method(s) are provided to manage packet data protocol (PDP) contexts upon cellular-to-femto handover, wherein femto network has disparate capabilities to support applications with distinct access point names (APNs) and quality of service (QoS) profiles. Based at least on activity factors of applications associated with PDP contexts, a QoS-based ranking of PDP contexts, and subscriber input, cellular network platform selects active PDP contexts to retain and suspend upon handover. A group of active PDP contexts is handed off in accordance with femto coverage capability, with remaining active PDP contexts suspended during handover. When a suspended PDP context, and application associated therewith, is resumed through femto coverage, a PDP context modification is conducted with a new APN and the application is routed to a corresponding femto gateway node and application server. Additionally, femto network platform performs a radio access bearer reconfiguration to meet QoS requirements of the resumed PDP context. | 05-27-2010 |
20100128695 | AIR INTERFACE SELECTION BETWEEN NODES IN PEER-TO-PEER/AD-HOC NETWORKS - Aspects describe pairs of nodes negotiating air interfaces in a peer-to-peer and/or ad hoc network. The negotiation can take into account the capability of each node. The negotiation can be performed on a default link and after negotiation, the nodes can facilitate a communication handoff to the negotiated link. Further, one or more nodes can support multiple air interfaces, wherein nodes that support multiple air interfaces can establish more than one air interface with peer nodes over similar air interfaces or over different air interfaces as a function of negotiation between the nodes. | 05-27-2010 |
20100128696 | MANAGEMENT OF SEAMLESS HANDOVER BETWEEN DIFFERENT COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS IN AN IP DUAL-MODE TERMINAL - A dual-mode terminal designed to connect to an IP-based network via a first communication system and a second communication system, the dual-mode terminal including a first physical network interface module adapted to establish a packet-based communication with the IP-based network via the first communication system, the first physical network interface module being accessible via a first physical network interface having a first physical network address; a second physical network interface module adapted to establish a packet-based communication with the IP-based network via the second communication system, the second physical network interface module being accessible via a second physical network interface having a second physical network address; an IP-based protocol stack adapted to operate between a software application in the dual-mode terminal and the first and second physical network interface modules; and a system for performing a seamless handover between the first communication system and the second communication system during a connection to the IP-based network. | 05-27-2010 |
20100135243 | POLICY MANAGEMENT IN MULTI-ACCESS SCENARIOS - The invention comprises methods and arrangements for Policy Decision Point discovery in a roaming or handover scenario in an IP network (IN) comprising a plurality of network elements. The invention introduces a Re-direct Policy Decision (RPDF) Function which can deliver addresses to PDPs associated to a certain Mobile Terminal. The RPDF comprises a memory for storing addresses (APDPA, SPDPA | 06-03-2010 |
20100135244 | REDUCTION OF HANDOVER DELAYS IN NESTED PROXY MOBILE IPv6/MOBILE IPv6 NETWORKS - A method for reducing handover delays of a mobile node moving from a first domain to a second domain, those domains being nested in a network, comprises, in a network node that manages connectivity between the first and second domains: establishing procedures for handover of the mobile node in the second domain, wherein establishing the procedures comprises receiving a binding request issued on behalf of the mobile node; and in response to the received binding request, establishing binding procedures in the first domain. Establishing the procedures for handover of the mobile node and the binding procedures occur in an overlapping manner. The network node for carrying such a method comprises a processing module for establishing procedures for handover in the second domain; and a binding processing module, responsive to the received binding request, for establishing binding procedures in the first domain. The processing and binding modules work in an overlapping manner. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135245 | Method for Avoiding Resource Being Released Mistakenly during Tracking Area Update or Handover Process - A method for avoiding resource being released mistakenly during tracking area update or handover process comprising: determining, by a target Mobility Management Entity MME, whether to use an old System Architecture Evolution Serving GW or to reselect a new Serving GW; if the target MME determines to select a new serving GW, notifying the original MME, the original MME sending a request for deleting bearer to the old Serving GW. The technical scheme of the present invention can avoid that the original MME will still send a request for deleting subscriber context to the old Serving GW when the target MME still uses the old Serving GW rather than selects a new one during tracking area update or handover process of the subscriber, which results in the appearance of a problem that the resource related to the subscriber in the old Serving GW is released mistakenly. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135246 | MOBILITY SOLUTION SELECTION FOR VOICE OVER EPS - A method and apparatus for determining handover (HO) signaling in a communications network. The method of the present invention examines the International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) of a user equipment (UE) during HO and, based on the examination, determines whether Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SRVCC) or circuit switched (CS) over Long Term Evolution (LTE) using a Generic Access Network Controller (GANC) should be used in the HO. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135247 | System and method for base station assisted mobility detection for mobile handsets - In this disclosure a technique of base station assisted mobility detection of handsets is described. More specifically by transmitting the subnet ID in the Beacon, a base station simplifies the process of network detection. This also leads to a significant reduction in handoff latency by giving the handset ample time to prepare for the impending handoff. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135248 | Mobile Communication Terminal and Communication Device - Disclosed is a technique for reducing delay when a mobile communication terminal starts communication and reducing consumption of a power resource of the mobile communication terminal. An MN (mobile node) ( | 06-03-2010 |
20100135249 | Method and Apparatus for Seamless Handover in a Wireless Communication Network - In a wireless communication network where base stations receive protocol data units (PDUs) from mobile stations for decompression and deciphering for ordered, sequential transfer as service data units (SDUs) to an associated core network, the teachings presented herein provide a method of supporting seamless handover of a mobile station from a source base station to a target base station. By way of example, the teachings herein apply to a network based on the E-UTRA specifications, as promulgated by the 3GPP. However, that example is non-limiting, as the teachings herein apply to any network that employs in-sequence data delivery and duplicate data detection at handover. Broadly, the source base station forwards out-of-sequence SDUs and corresponding sequence number information to the target base station in support of seamless handover, and the target base station uses that information to request retransmissions as needed for packet reordering. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135250 | MOBILE SWITCHING CENTER, RADIO BASE STATION, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - A mobile exchange ( | 06-03-2010 |
20100135251 | FAST UPLINK DATA TRANSMISSION USING E-DCH ENHANCED RANDOM ACCESS WITHOUT A UE SPECIFIC E-RNTI - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate communicating user plane data over common control resources by specifying a UTRAN radio network temporary identifier (U-RNTI). In this regard, a Node B or an RNC receiving the user plane data can associate the data to the UE based on the U-RNTI. The user plane data can be transmitted in a control message with the associated U-RNTI, such as a CELL UPDATE message or another message having a U-RNTI specified in a media access control (MAC)-i header or other header in the message. The control message can also include parameters regarding the existence and specifications of the user plane data. In this regard, a UE can communicate user plane data when in a (UTRAN) registration area paging channel (URA_PCH) or other relatively inactive state though it has not received an enhanced radio network temporary identifier (E_RNTI). | 06-03-2010 |
20100135252 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR REDUCING MAC LAYER HANDOFF LATENCY IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - In accordance with the present invention, computer implemented methods and systems are provided for reducing handoff latency in a wireless network. In response to detecting that a handoff is necessary, the present invention uses a selective scanning algorithm that includes the use of a channel mask and/or a caching algorithm for detecting one or more new access points. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135253 | METHOD OF PROVIDING SESSION MOBILITY AND USER TERMINAL - A method of providing session mobility and a user terminal are provided. The method includes, when a session is set through one interface, receiving a request for session transfer to a network corresponding to another interface, checking the available resource capacity of the network to which the session will be transferred, and determining whether or not to transfer the session based on the result of the check operation and establishing a session with the network. The method can improve the reliability of an Internet protocol (IP) multimedia subsystem (IMS) service continuity function. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135254 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR REDUCING SIZE OF RANGING RESPONSE SIGNAL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and a method for performing network re-entry of a terminal in a base station of a wireless communication system are provided. In the method, when a RaNGing-REQuest (RNG-REQ) signal is received from the terminal, a Connection IDentifier (CID) is assigned to at least one Service Flow (SF) whose service providing is accepted of one or more SFs that have been serviced by the terminal. A bit map sequentially representing CID assignment information of SFs according to an SF index is generated. A RaNGing ReSPonse (RNG-RSP) signal including the bit map and the assigned CID information is generated. The RNG-RSP signal is transmitted to the terminal. | 06-03-2010 |
20100135255 | METHOD FOR DETACHING USER EQUIPMENT - A method for detaching User Equipment (UE) is disclosed to detach the UE in case of signaling reduction. The method includes the following steps: a UE detachment operation of a first network access control entity is triggered, where the detachment operation is a complete detachment operation; the first network access control entity detaches the UE according to the detachment operation type, and triggers the complete detachment of a second network access control entity; and the second network access control entity performs the detachment operation according to the trigger operation of the first network access control entity. Thus, after the UE is detached from a network access control entity, the network access control entity may notify another network access control entity by various means, so that another network access entity implements subsequent processes. | 06-03-2010 |
20100142477 | Wireless Communication Terminal and Method of Controlling the Same - It is judged whether a mobile node | 06-10-2010 |
20100142478 | NEIGHBOR NETWORK ADVERTISEMENT - A method and apparatus for enabling a network to provide information associated with neighboring network(s) of different access technologies to the wireless device, prior to the wireless device determining the need for a handover. When a determination is made by the network that a handover to a new access network is required, the network may send a message to the wireless device that commands the wireless device to leave a currently used access network. Alternatively, the network may send a message to the wireless device that guides or obligates the wireless device to select one of the access networks in the list, provided by the network, in case the wireless device chooses to make a handover. Upon receipt of a command message, the wireless device leaves a currently used access network either immediately or a reasonable time after having set up a connection to a new access network for ensuring smooth handover. | 06-10-2010 |
20100142479 | INTERFERENCE CANCELLATION FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Techniques for improving the capacity of a wireless communications system using interference cancellation (IC). In an early decoding and IC aspect, a frame transmitted from a user to a base station may be decoded prior to the entire frame being received by the base station. The remaining portion of the frame may then be re-constructed at the base station prior to its reception, and cancelled from the receive signal to reduce the interference to frames received from other users. In a power control aspect for early decoding and IC, the power control target level at a local base station may be adjusted in response to successfully early decoding a frame, without affecting the overall outer loop power control operation. Further aspects include late decoding techniques for utilizing the IC of other users' signals to improve the probability of decoding a given user's frames, as well as techniques for traffic channel demodulation using channel re-estimation. | 06-10-2010 |
20100142480 | METHOD OF SEAMLESS VERTICAL HANDOVER FOR SDR TERMINAL AND SCA BASED SDR TERMINAL FOR THE SAME - The present invention provides a method of seamless vertical handover for an SDR terminal and an SCA based SDR terminal for the same. A method of seamless vertical handover for an SDR terminal of the present invention includes: determining whether a download of a waveform application related to a peripheral access network is needed by collecting peripheral access network information prior to requesting vertical handover; if it is determined that the download is needed, downloading and storing the waveform application; and performing the seamless vertical handover using the pre-stored waveform application upon request the vertical handover. Therefore, the seamless vertical handover for the SDR terminal can be efficiently performed. | 06-10-2010 |
20100142481 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING SIGNAL FOR HANDOFF IN BROADCASTING NETWORK - An apparatus for transmitting a signal for handoff in a transmitter of a broadcasting network where a plurality of center frequencies exist includes: a baseband broadcasting signal generation unit configured to generate a baseband broadcasting signal from broadcasting data to be transmitted; a transmitter identification signal sequence generation unit configured to generate a transmitter identification signal of the transmitter; a first transmission unit configured to combine the baseband broadcasting signal and the transmitter identification signal, and up-convert the combined signal to a center frequency of the transmitter; and a second transmission unit configured to modulate the transmitter identification signal, and up-convert the modulated transmitter identification signal to center frequencies of adjacent transmitters. | 06-10-2010 |
20100142482 | OPEN WIRELESS ARCHITECTURE (OWA) UNIFIED AIRBORNE AND TERRESTRIAL COMMUNICATIONS ARCHITECTURE - This invention relates to an Open Wireless Architecture (OWA) unified airborne and terrestrial communications architecture providing optimal high-speed connections with open radio transmission technologies (RTTs) between aircrafts and ground cells, and between different aircrafts in Ad-Hoc or Mesh network group, to construct the multi-dimensional unified information delivery platform across the airborne networks and the terrestrial networks wherein the same OWA mobile device or OWA mobile computer can be used seamlessly and continuously both in the aircrafts and on the ground. | 06-10-2010 |
20100142483 | GENERIC ACCESS NETWORK AND METHOD FOR IMPLEMENTING SERVICES BY USING GENERIC ACCESS NETWORK - A Generic Access Network (GAN) and a method for implementing services by using the GAN are disclosed. The GAN is configured to connect a generic IP network with a target network, and includes a Generic Access Network Controller (GANC) configured to enable a User Equipment (UE) to access the target network via the generic IP network. The GANC includes: a user interface, configured to connect the UE; and a Policy and Charging Control (PCC) interface, configured to trigger a process of establishing bearers of the generic IP network. | 06-10-2010 |
20100142484 | CONTEXT TRANSFER IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK COMPRISING PLURAL HETEROGENEOUS ACCESS NETWORKS - The present invention relates to a method for a context transfer in a communication network including a plurality of heterogeneous access networks, wherein a mobile terminal is attached to one of the access networks. Further, the present invention relates to a context transfer manager performing the method. Moreover, the present invention relates to a mobile terminal specially adapted to perform the provided method for a context transfer. To facilitate a context transfer between heterogeneous access networks, the present invention introduces a context transfer manager generating at least one context based on capabilities and parameters associated to the mobile terminal and capabilities and parameters of the neighboring access networks taking into account the respective access technology. Further the context transfer manager is common to the heterogeneous access networks in the communication network and performs the context transfers related to a particular mobile terminal. | 06-10-2010 |
20100142485 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for performing a handover by a user equipment from a serving base station to a target base station includes transmitting a random access preamble to the target base station, receiving a random access response in response to the random access preamble; after receiving the random access response, transmitting a handover confirm message for indicating completion of the handover between the user equipment and the target base station, and transmitting a packet data sequence number report message indicating packet data received from the serving base station in a process of performing the handover. Repeated transmission of downlink data or uplink data can be avoided during a handover procedure. | 06-10-2010 |
20100150102 | ADAPTIVE HANDOVER MECHANISM FOR HETEROGENEOUS WIRELESS NETWORK - The claimed subject matter provides a system and/or a method that facilitates optimizing handover in connection with an access network. An access network can include at least one device exchanges data therewith, wherein the device communicates with at least one access station within the access network to exchange data. A rules engine can create a user-defined rule based upon at least one of a resource requirement for a device application or a user input related to a quality of service (QoS) experience with the device. The rules engine can enforce the user-defined rule to employ handover related to the device and at least one of an access station within the access network or a disparate access network. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150103 | System and Method for Initial Access to Relays - A user agent (UA) in a wireless communication system. The UA is configured to transmit a preamble on a random access channel (RACH) to an access node in order to attach to the access node. The UA transmits a message to the access node, wherein the message contains an identity of one or more relay nodes to which the UA can be transferred. The UA requests the access node to hand-over the UA to one relay node of the one or more relay nodes. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150104 | DEEP PACKET INSPECTION DEVICE AND METHOD - The present invention relates to a deep packet inspection method and device of a wireless communication system. The deep packet inspection method includes: receiving a first deep packet inspection result for a packet of a terminal from a first subnet before a handover when the handover occurs; receiving a second deep packet inspection result for the packet of the terminal from a second subnet after the handover; and coordinating the first deep packet inspection result and the second deep packet inspection result when the handover occurs. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150105 | Apparatus And Method For Splicing Multimedia Session On Communication Networks - The present invention relates to an apparatus and method for splicing multimedia session on communication networks. The apparatus comprises a handoff manager, a session migration manager and a session splicing module. The handoff manager monitors whether a mobile host is roaming to other subnets or not, and acquires a new IP address and issues a control signal when a handoff event is triggered. When a user triggers a migration action, the session migration manager, based on the monitoring status of an ongoing session, sends a state message to a target host for performing session migration, enables a media player, and issues another control signal. The session splicing module respectively receives the two control signals, and performs a corresponding session splicing for each control signal to persist session connection. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150106 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING ASSIGNMENT DURING HANDOFF IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method and apparatus for managing assignment during handoff in a wireless communication system is described. It is determined if a forward link shared signaling (FLSS) Changed Indication is received from a RCC MAC protocol. The forward link access terminal assignments (FL-ATAs) associated with the FLSS is cleared. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150107 | Inter-Access Network Handover - In a wireless network environment comprising first and second packet-switched access networks, each access network using a tunnelling-type micro-mobility protocol and a Quality of Service (QoS) routing protocol to route packet data to and from mobile nodes attached thereto, and each access network comprising an access router to which a mobile node may attach, a mobility agent with which said mobile node may register and a gateway, a method of facilitating network layer handover of said mobile node from said first access network to said second access network, said mobile node registered in said first access network with a serving mobility agent, which method comprises the steps of: said mobile node receiving a router advertisement from said second access network, which router advertisement comprises a network-layer address of a target mobility agent in said second access network with which said mobile node may register; and said mobile node forwarding said network-layer address to said serving mobility agent, whereby said serving mobility agent may communicate with said target mobility agent to facilitate network-layer handover of said mobile node to said second access network. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150108 | Network Mobility - In a wireless network environment comprising a mobile router serving a moving network, said mobile router for attaching to a packet-switched access network that uses a micro-mobility protocol and a Quality of Service (QoS) protocol to route packet data to and from said mobile router, wherein said mobile router has a QoS aggregate requirement generated by nodes attached thereto, a method of handover of said mobile router to a mobility agent in said access network, which method comprises the steps of: (i) said mobile router sends a QoS request message to said mobility agent, which QoS request message comprises a QoS parameter representing said QoS aggregate; (ii) upon receipt by said mobility agent, said access network takes a QoS admission decision on the basis of said QoS parameter; and (iii) said mobility agent sends a QoS acknowledgement to said mobile router whereby said mobility agent informs said mobile router of the outcome of said QoS admission decision; characterized by the step of (iv) if said QoS admission decision is that said mobility agent cannot handle all of said QoS aggregate, said QoS acknowledgement comprises an identity of one or more alternative mobility agent that might meet at least a part of said QoS aggregate that will not be provided by said mobility agent. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150109 | METHOD OF IDENTIFICATION OF A FEMTOCELL BASE STATION AS A HANDOVER TARGET, AND APPARATUS THEREFOR - A method is provided of identifying which one of a plurality of femtocell base stations neighbouring a first femtocell base station is to be the target for handover of a call connection with a user terminal from the first base station. The neighbour femtocell base stations use the same primary scrambling code as each other. The femtocell base stations use code-division multiple access, CDMA. Each of the neighbour femtocell base stations transmits a respective broadcast signal that include timing information such that each neighbour femtocell base station transmits a broadcast signal having different timing information to that of the other neighbour femtocell base stations. The user terminal receives broadcast signals, determines the timing information of at least one of the received broadcast signals and reports the timing information to the first femtocell base station. The first femtocell base station identifies the target femtocell base station for handover from the timing information. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150110 | Seamless Handoff Across Heterogeneous Access Networks Using a Handoff Controller in a Service Control Point - In a telecommunications network in which a mobile handset is capable of communicating in both an IP domain and a non-IP domain, the handoff of an existing communications session between the mobile handset and a fixed user is facilitated by a handoff controller implemented in a service control point. The handoff controller implements different handoff methods depending on the status of the fixed user and the transition of the mobile user. Additionally 802.21 Media Independent Handover Function in conjunction with SIP is used to facilitate handover between IP and Non-IP points in the system. | 06-17-2010 |
20100150111 | System and method for adaptive proactive scanning to support fast handoffs in mobile networks - A scanning technique to select the best channel a mobile handset needs when approaching handoff is described. More specifically a system and method for an adaptive proactive scanning mechanism in which the rate of scanning is determined by the necessity to handoff and battery power is disclosed. | 06-17-2010 |
20100157938 | METHOD AND APPARATUS APPLIED TO IDENTIFICATION FOR HANDOVER BETWEEN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - The invention provides a method and apparatus to be executed in a first UE (User Equipment), applied to identification for handover from a current serving network to a target network, the method comprising the steps of: acquiring handover status information for a second UE communicating with it; and sending identity confirmation information to the second UE according to the handover status information so that the second UE can validate its identity, wherein the handover status information and the identity confirmation information are transmitted via different networks. With the proposed method and apparatus, the handover procedure between two wireless networks can be facilitated even in the case of not providing identification information of the calling party of the handover call. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157939 | CROSSOVER NODE DETECTION PRE-PROCESSING METHOD, CROSSOVER NODE DETECTION PRE-PROCESSING PROGRAM FOR EXECUTING THIS METHOD BY COMPUTER, AND MOBILE TERMINAL USED IN THIS METHOD - A technology is disclosed providing a crossover node detection pre-processing method and the like in which, when a MN performs a handover and detects a CRN, a layer, among an aggregation overlapping such as to be nested (a plurality of network layers), up to which a process for detecting the CRN is performed is decided and a number of layers from the outermost layer of the aggregation to the decided layer is decided. As a result, the CRN detection is not time-consuming, double reservation can be kept to a minimum, and QoS failure can be avoided. The technology includes a step of deciding, by a mobile node | 06-24-2010 |
20100157940 | DATA GENERATION APPARATUS, DATA GENERATION METHOD, BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION, SYNCHRONICATION DETECTION METHOD, SECTOR IDENTIFICATION METHOD, INFORMATION DETECTION METHOD AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - [Problems] To reduce a cell search process including sector identification without increasing a load on a transmission/reception device. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157941 | ACCESS TERMINAL HAND-OFF METHODS IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - This description relates to access terminal hand-off methods in wireless networks. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157942 | Method for FMIPv6 Handover in UMTS Network and Apparatus for the Method - The present invention is related to FMIPv6 handover method and apparatus for the method in UMTS network. The present invention comprises obtaining lower layer information about a target RNS from a current RNS; obtaining upper layer information about a target core network from a current core network; establishing a tunnel between a current core network and a target core network by using the lower layer information and allocating a target RNS; and after allocation of a target RNS, transmitting a message notifying a target core network of connection to the target RNS and receiving packet data from the target core network. The present invention supports efficient handover in UMTS network by using MIH service and reduces handover delay | 06-24-2010 |
20100157943 | ACCESS POINT HANDOVER CONTROL BASED ON CLOSED SUBSCRIBER GROUP SUBSCRIPTION INFORMATION - One or more nodes in a network provide access control for an in-bound handover of an access terminal to a closed subscriber group. For example, at least one of a source access point, a network node, or a target access point may determine whether handover is allowed based on whether a closed subscriber group identifier of the target access point is listed in closed subscriber group subscription information for the access terminal. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157944 | HANDOVER CONTROL BASED ON CLOSED SUBSCRIBER GROUP SUBSCRIPTION INFORMATION - One or more nodes in a network provide access control for an in-bound handover of an access terminal to a closed subscriber group. For example, at least one of a source access point, a network node, or a target access point may determine whether handover is allowed based on whether a closed subscriber group identifier of the target access point is listed in closed subscriber group subscription information for the access terminal. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157945 | Apparatus and method for changing serving cell in a high speed wireless communication system - A Radio Network Controller (RNC) in a high speed wireless communication system includes an apparatus to perform method for changing a serving cell in the high speed wireless communication system. The RNC receives UpLink (UL) cell change determination information representing UL channel states from a serving Base Station (BS) and a target BS. The UL is received if a UL soft handover of a Mobile Station (MS) is initiated depending on a DownLink (DL) channel quality of the MS. The RNC can determine UL cell change timing of the MS using the UL cell change determination information. Thereafter, the RNC can send an instruction of a UL cell change of the MS to the serving BS and the target BS. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157946 | Methods and Apparatuses For CDMA2000/GPRS Roaming - IIF architectures and corresponding call flows are provided for CDMA2000/GPRS roaming scenarios such as GPRS foreign mode with Mobile IPv4, GPRS foreign mode with Simple IPv4 or IPv6, CDMA2000 packet data foreign mode with Mobile IPv4, and CDMA2000 packet data foreign mode with Simple IPv4 or IPv6. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157947 | System, Apparatus, and Methods for Proactive Allocation of Wireless Communication Resources - A system for communication between a mobile node and a communications network is provided for use with a communications network having one or more communications network nodes that define a foreign agents and that communicate with the mobile node in a predefined region. The system includes a ghost-foreign agent that advertises a foreign agent so that the mobile node is aware of the foreign agent when the mobile node is located outside the predefined region. The system further includes a ghost-mobile node that signals the foreign agent in response to the foreign agent advertising and based upon a predicted future state of the mobile node. | 06-24-2010 |
20100165946 | METHOD OF PERFORMING SESSION HANDOVER BETWEEN TERMINALS, NETWORK SYSTEM, AND PROGRAM - It is difficult to perform handover between mobile terminals. In addition, when a session handover is performed between terminals whose mobilities are managed by individual Mobile IP HAs, it is difficult for an IETF standard to normally treat an Uplink packet. A network system includes: a function | 07-01-2010 |
20100165947 | Network Discovery Mechanisms - In some of the preferred embodiments, a method for network discovery of a mobile device to use at least one of a plurality of access networks within an IP network includes: obtaining specified network information in the vicinity of a given location based on a set of criteria when a mobile is connected to the IP network from any location. | 07-01-2010 |
20100165948 | FAST COMBINATIONAL VOICE CALL CONTINUITY FROM LTE TO 2G/3G CS DOMAIN - The invention proposes a method for handing over a session between a source network which provides a first connection type domain and a target network which provides the first connection type domain and a second connection type domain, comprising informing a network node (e.g., a user equipment (UE)), before performing forming a handover from the source network to the target network, a preferred transfer domain in the target network. The invention also proposes a corresponding network node and a network control element. | 07-01-2010 |
20100165949 | SPACE TIME TRANSMIT DIVERSITY FOR TDD/WCDMA SYSTEMS - A circuit is designed with a matched filter circuit including a plurality of fingers ( | 07-01-2010 |
20100172319 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND MOBILE TERMINAL - A mobile communication method which allows a mobile station and a base station to communicate based on an HSDPA communication mode with a possibility of erroneous base station switching due to erroneous detection of a signal reduced to improve reliability of a mobile communication system, in which, when the mobile station moves from one base station into an area of other base station (S | 07-08-2010 |
20100172320 | HANDOVER CONTROL DEVICE, METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A handover control device that conducts switching-over base station(s), in which a mobile station | 07-08-2010 |
20100172321 | RADIO TERMINAL AND COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A radio terminal | 07-08-2010 |
20100172322 | RADIO TERMINAL AND COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A radio terminal | 07-08-2010 |
20100172323 | METHOD OF HANDOVER OF CIRCUIT-SWITCHED VOICE CALL TO PACKET-SWITCHED VOICE CALL - A method, for example, is described in the present application. Such a method can include detecting or establishing a circuit-switched call. The method can also include establishing a voice-over-internet-protocol standby call in parallel to the circuit-switched call. The method can additionally include activating the voice-over-internet-protocol standby call to become an active voice-over-internet protocol call when a handover situation is detected. The method can further include releasing resources of the circuit-switched call when the voice-over-internet-protocol standby call becomes the active voice-over-internet protocol call. | 07-08-2010 |
20100172324 | TELECOMMUNICATIONS - The present invention relates to apparatus for and methods of performing a binding procedure in respect of a mobile node in a foreign packet data network, the mobile node having roamed from a an home packet network and having a home packet data protocol address, the method comprising the steps of: the mobile node sending its home packet data protocol address to a node of the network responsible for allocating packet data protocol address to mobile nodes for use in the foreign network (the allocating node); the allocating node allocating or participating in the allocation of a packet data protocol address to the mobile node; the allocating node receiving a packet data protocol address of a receiving node; and in dependence on the received home packet data protocol address, the receiving node packet data protocol address, and the allocated packet data protocol address, the allocating node sending or arranging for another network node to send a message to the receiving node, the message indicating a binding between the allocated packet data protocol and the home packet data protocol address of the mobile node. | 07-08-2010 |
20100172325 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING ZONE SWITCHING IN BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - A device, system and method for performing zone switch based handover in a legacy serving base station by an advanced mobile station (AMS), the method including receiving a ranging response (RNG-RSP) message including a zone switching TLV parameter necessary to perform zone switching to an advanced mobile station support zone (MZone) from a legacy zone (LZone) of a target advanced base station (ABS), and requesting a bandwidth for transmitting an advanced air interface ranging request (AAI_RNG-REQ) message to the MZone using the zone switching TLV parameter. | 07-08-2010 |
20100172326 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR OPTIMIZING HANDOVER IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed are a system and a method for optimizing a handover process in a mobile broadband wireless access system. The method performs handover in a mobile communication system including a mobile subscriber station, a serving base station currently providing service to the mobile subscriber station, and at least one neighbor base stations adjacent to the serving base station. The method includes the steps of receiving a handover request from the mobile subscriber station by the serving base station; instructing the mobile subscriber station to perform handover by the serving base station in response to the handover request from the mobile subscriber station and performing by the mobile subscriber station a network reentry process for fast handover in accordance with information included in a handover instruction from the serving base station. | 07-08-2010 |
20100172327 | METHOD FOR RECEIVING BROADCASTING SIGNAL AND BROADCASTING RECEIVER - A method for receiving a broadcasting signal and a broadcasting signal receiver are disclosed. Even when a cell is changed while an emergency alert is output, the emergency alert can be continuously output using emergency alert table information included in the broadcasting signal and channel information of the cell. The emergency alert table information may include a cell identifier and the channel information of the cell may include virtual channel information of the cell. | 07-08-2010 |
20100177733 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING STATUS REPORT OF PDCP LAYER IN MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND RECEIVER OF MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS - Disclosed is a status report transmission of the PDCP layer for a PDCP status report which can reduce radio resources, by transmitting the reception success or failure of a series of PDCP SDUs in the form of a bitmap when configuring the PDCP status report for reporting a reception status of the PDCP SDU to another party in the PDCP layer in the LTE system. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177734 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - The communication device according to the present invention comprises a packet reception unit | 07-15-2010 |
20100177735 | AUDIOVISUAL SESSION SWITCHOVER FROM A FIRST ACCESS NETWORK TO A SECOND ACCESS NETWORK - The invention relates to a method of switching over an audiovisual session in a telecommunications network ( | 07-15-2010 |
20100177736 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR INDICATING DATA RE-TRANSMISSION WHEN AREA SWITCHING IN LTE SYSTEM - A method and device for indicating data re-transmission when area switching in LTE system, wherein the method comprises the following steps: S_eNB sends PDCP-SDU CN report to T_eNB in order to announce PDCP-SDU SN received, and T_eNB announces PDCP-SDU SN received by S_eNB to UE. Thereby, UE would not re-transmit PDCP-SDU corresponding to received SN, which avoids re-transmission of useless PDCP-SDU, and saves radio resources comparing with prior solutions. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177737 | CONTEXT FETCHING AFTER INTER-SYSTEM HANDOVER - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate fetching a native security context between network nodes in a core network after an inter-system handover of a mobile device. For instance, a mobility message that is integrity protected by a security context (e.g., the native security context, a mapped security context, . . . ) can be obtained at a network node from the mobile device. Further, the network node can send a request to a disparate network node within a core network. The request can include information that can be used by the disparate network node to establish that the mobile device is authenticated. Moreover, the native security context can be received from the disparate network node in response to the request. Accordingly, the native security context need not be recreated between the network node and the mobile device. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177738 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR OPERATING MOVING NETWORK IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for operating a moving network in a mobile communication system are provided. A method of a Base Station (BS) for operating a Moving Network (MN) includes determining an operation mode of the MN in a cell by collecting information of the cell, and transmitting the determined operation mode to the MN. The operation mode includes at least one of an Operation ON mode in which the MN maintains links to Mobile Stations (MSs) in a service coverage area of the MN, and an Operation OFF mode in which the MN turns off the links to the MSs in the service coverage area of the MN. | 07-15-2010 |
20100177739 | METHOD AND ENODEB FOR FORWARDING DOWNLINK AND UPLINK PACKETS BASED ON S1 HANDOVER - A method for forwarding downlink packets based on S1 handover is disclosed. The method includes: numbering a packet not processed by using PDCP according to a message that carries PDCP Serial Number (SN) information if downlink packets to be forwarded include the packet not processed by using PDCP; and sending the downlink packets to the UE according to the PDCP SN corresponding to the packet included in the downlink packets. A method for forwarding uplink packets based on S1 handover is disclosed. The method includes: receiving state report information of the packet sent by the target eNodeB; and sending the packet according to the state report information of the packet. Another method for forwarding downlink packets based on S1 handover and an eNodeB are disclosed. Through the embodiments of the present invention, the packets are forwarded without loss in the case of S1 handover. | 07-15-2010 |
20100182977 | IMAGE DISPLAY DEVICE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention includes a receiving antenna receiving information while changing plural different wireless base stations; a seat information acquiring unit acquiring position information of a destination seat paired; a wireless base station selecting unit selecting a wireless base station to be connected on the basis of position information; and a directivity switching unit changing directivity of the receiving antenna on the basis of position information, which transmits at least one of video information and audio information from a wireless base station to a user seated on the seat. | 07-22-2010 |
20100189070 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR COMBINING SERVICE FLOW ADDITION/CHANGE WITH HANDOVER IN WIMAX SYSTEMS - The present disclosure proposes a method for incorporating a procedure of adding/changing a service flow of a mobile station into a handover process in order to avoid problem that the mobile station can handover to a neighbor base station that do not support the requested service flow operation. Furthermore, the proposed disclosure can reduce the processing delay by combining the handover process of the mobile station and the procedure of adding/changing the service flow. | 07-29-2010 |
20100189071 | RE-SYNCHRONIZATION OF TEMPORARY UE IDS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Techniques for re-synchronizing Cell Radio Network Temporary Identifiers (C-RNTIs) in a wireless communication system are described. In one design, a user equipment (UE) sends a random access preamble for random access. A base station receives the random access preamble, assigns a Temporary C-RNTI to the UE, and sends a random access response including the Temporary C-RNTI. The UE uses the Temporary C-RNTI as a C-RNTI for itself if a valid C-RNTI is not already available. The UE discards the Temporary C-RNTI and uses the valid C-RNTI if available. The UE sends a transmission after receiving the random access response, and the transmission may include the valid C-RNTI if available. For handover, the base station (a target base station) receives a handover request from a source base station, assigns the valid C-RNTI to the UE, and sends the valid C-RNTI to the source base station for forwarding to the UE. | 07-29-2010 |
20100189072 | Mobility for IMS Users - A method of selecting an access domain for sending information between a wireless terminal and a core network, sessions between the wireless terminal and the core network being established and controlled using an IP Multimedia Subsystem. The method comprises maintaining within the IP Multimedia Subsystem a database holding information on real-time packet-switched service capabilities of a plurality of access domains, and interrogating said database based upon currently used and/or available access domains and selecting an access domain for use by the wireless terminal based upon the results of the interrogation. | 07-29-2010 |
20100189073 | Method for IP address management in networks using a proxy based approach in mobile IP telephony - A system and method for a mobile switching center to efficiently manage; assign; and reclaim the IP addresses is described. The procedure utilizes a mechanism that involves splitting the IP address assignment functionality into two parts, with the Base Station being responsible for assigning IP addresses to individual end user devices and the mobile switching center assigning a block of IP addresses to each Base Station and includes a methodology for the mobile switching center to efficiently manage; assign and reclaim the IP addresses. | 07-29-2010 |
20100189074 | Improved Resource Reservation During Handover in a Wireless Communications System - A serving base station provides time slot allocation information to a target base station for a mobile station that will likely undergo handover. The target base station uses the time slot allocation information to determine when resources should be reserved to facilitate the handover of the mobile station. | 07-29-2010 |
20100189075 | BASE STATION AND METHOD FOR MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A base station for a mobile communication system includes a scheduling unit configured to obtain scheduling information of radio bearers at least for each user and to allocate radio resources to the radio bearers based on the scheduling information. When a user is handed over from a cell of the base station to a cell of a target base station, the base station reports a part of previous scheduling information of the user via an inter-base-station interface to the target base station. | 07-29-2010 |
20100189076 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROCESSING GTP IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A system for processing General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) Tunneling Protocol (GTP) for a handover in a mobile communication system is provided. The system includes an Evolved Packet Core (EPC), a source base station, and a target base station. The EPC transmits an end data indication message to a source base station of a user terminal to inform of an update for a user plane when receiving an update request message for the user plane of the user terminal from the target base station. The source base station forwards the remaining data destined for the user terminal to the target base station when receiving the end data indication message from the EPC, and transmits the end data indication message to the target base station upon completion of the forwarding. The target base station transmits data destined for the user terminal and stored in a buffer to the user terminal when receiving the end data indication message from the source base station, and releases resources set for the forwarding with the source base station upon completion of the data transmission to the user terminal. | 07-29-2010 |
20100189077 | SUPPORTING HANDOVER OF MOBILE TERMINAL - The present invention relates to supporting a handover of a mobile terminal. Preferably, the present invention performs a scan of a neighboring network different from a current network of the mobile terminal to determine the presence of an accessible link of the neighboring network for performing a handover, wherein the mobile terminal comprises a heterogeneous network handover module that is configured to provide convergence of information from at least one network interface module associated with one of a homogeneous and heterogeneous network into a unified presentation. An information message is then received from the neighboring network, wherein the information message comprises an information element associated with whether the neighboring network is capable of communicating with the heterogeneous network handover module of the mobile terminal. | 07-29-2010 |
20100189078 | SEAMLESS MOBILITY FOR A MULTIPLE INTERFACE DEVICE IN A CO-LOCATED WIRELESS ENVIRONMENT - Data packets are transmitted from a first access network to a first interface of a multiple interface device (MID), and identical data packets are transmitted concurrently from a second access network to a second interface of the MID. Some of the data packets that are transmitted to the MID from the first access network are not received by the first interface. The MID inspects identifiers of data packets from the first and second interfaces in order to send to the application a stream including all of the data packets. For example, the MID sends to the application the data packets from the first interface, buffers the data packets from the second interface, and sends data packets from the buffer to the application upon detecting that data packets in the buffer were transmitted to the first interface but not received by the first interface. | 07-29-2010 |
20100195616 | Handover From Circuit Switched Over Packet Switched Domain to Circuit Switched Domain - A method for initiating handover of a circuit switched service using a packet switched bearer of a mobile station ( | 08-05-2010 |
20100195617 | METHOD FOR HANDLING CORRECTLY RECEIVED BUT HEADER COMPRESSION FAILED PACKETS - A data processing method for a mobile communication system is provided. In a method in which a source base station processes data in a mobile communication system, a first data block including a full header and at least one second data block on which header compression was performed based on the first data block are transmitted to a user equipment and the first data block and the at least one second data block are then forwarded to a target base station during a handover procedure when the first data block was not correctly received and one or more of the at least one second data block was correctly received by the user equipment. | 08-05-2010 |
20100195618 | METHOD OF PERFORMING CELL RE-SELECTION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of performing cell re-selection in a wireless communication system considering mobility of a user equipment comprises detecting cells having signal strength greater than a certain level for a first time interval and a second time interval, determining mobility of the user equipment using at least one of a change level in the number of cells detected for the first time interval and the second time interval and information related to variation of a signal characteristics value of at least one cell commonly detected for the first time interval and the second time interval, and performing cell re-selection considering mobility of the user equipment. | 08-05-2010 |
20100195619 | METHOD AND A DEVICE FOR ADJUSTING THE TRANSMISSION POWER OF SIGNALS - The present invention concerns a method for transferring information enabling the adjustment of the transmission power of the signals transferred and/or received by a first base station through a wireless interface, a cell of the first base station being at least partly comprised in a cell of a second base station. A mobile terminal for which a handover has been or has to be conducted between the first and second base stations obtains information related to the path between the second base station and the mobile terminal and transfers information to the first base station. | 08-05-2010 |
20100195620 | METHODS AND DEVICES TO SUPPORT MOBILITY OF A CLIENT ACROSS VLANS AND SUBNETS, WHILE PRESERVING THE CLIENT'S ASSIGNED IP ADDRESS - The present invention relates to methods and devices that support mobility of a client across a campus, particularly mobility across VLANs and subnets, while preserving the client's assigned IP address. Both layer 2 and layer 3 packets are supported. Mobility support most clearly applies to wireless clients, but could apply to other kinds of mobile connections, even to wired connections. A smart server is adapted to support multiple VLANs and to modify and redirect packets in sessions with a client that moves from one VLAN to another, preserving the client's assigned EP address. Two or more smart servers, in cooperation with a smart manger, modify packets and tunnel them between smart servers when a client that moves from one VLAN to another and from one smart server to another, again preserving the client's assigned IF address. A similar approach applies to support mobility of a client that moves between subnets that are supervised by two smart servers, with the second smart server acting on behalf of the first smart server and tunneling packets back and forth to the first smart server. Particular aspects of the present invention are described in the claims, specification and drawings. | 08-05-2010 |
20100202402 | System And Method For Non-Contention Based Handover Based On Pre-Reserved Target Cell Uplink Allocations In Communication Systems - In accordance with aspects of the present invention, a method, apparatus and system for non-contention based handover based on pre-reserved target cell uplink allocations in communication systems. In one embodiment, the apparatus includes a transceiver ( | 08-12-2010 |
20100202403 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR LOCATION UPDATE IN NETWORKS - A method, system and devices are provided for location update in an e.g. WiMAX based network. An authenticator function is informed on the location of a data path function after a handover has taken place. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202404 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR IMPLEMENTING HARD HANDOVERS BETWEEN ACCESS NETWORKS - A method and a system for implementing hard handovers between access networks are provided, and the method includes: the access network on the target side obtaining the loop round trip delay of the pilot of the access network on the target side, and setting a center of a searching window of the pilot of the access network on the target side according to the obtained loop round trip delay of the pilot of the access network on the target side, so as to carry out the hard handovers between the access network on the source side and the access network on the target side. With the invention, the hard handovers between access networks could be implemented successfully. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202405 | ACCESS NETWORK HANDOVER FOR A MOBILE TELEVISION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus are described for performing a handover in a content delivery system, including performing the handover from a first network to a second network at a protocol layer determined based on whether a content stream identification file used by said first network is paired with a content stream identification file used by said second network. Also described are a method and apparatus for performing a handover in a content delivery system, including performing the handover from a first network to a second network at a protocol layer determined based on whether a same content stream identification file used by the first network is used by the second network. Further described are a method and apparatus for performing a handover in a content delivery system, including performing the handover from a first network to a second network at one of an application layer, a network layer and a media access control layer. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202406 | Method And Apparatus For Managing Mobility Transactions Among Fixed/Nomadic Wireless Terminals - A method is provided for managing the mobility attempts for a Fixed/Nomadic wireless terminal so as to substantially limit those attempts to only requests for handoff to base stations within a restricted set to which handoff of the wireless terminal is permitted. In a particular embodiment, the method of the invention operates to prune the allowed base-station scan list, for a particular Fixed/Nomadic wireless terminal, when the particular wireless terminal requests a grant of scan durations from the serving base station. Since differentiation/restriction is applied at the scanning stage itself, the mobility attempts by the Fixed/Nomadic wireless terminal is limited and much more controlled, thus reducing spurious handoff attempts that need to be rejected by the serving base station or the serving gateway. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202407 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MAINTAINING LOCATION CONTINUITY FOR A UE FOLLOWING HANDOVER - Techniques for maintaining location continuity for a user equipment (UE) following handover are described. The UE communicates with a first radio access network (RAN) and is served by a source serving node and a source location server prior to handover. The UE communicates with a second RAN and is served by a target serving node and a target location server after the handover. In an aspect, location continuity may be maintained for the UE by transferring an identity of the target serving node to a location server during handover of the UE. In one design, the target serving node sends its identity to the target location server, which updates a Location and Routing Function (LRF) serving the UE. In another design, for handover from packet-switched domain to circuit-switched domain, the source serving node sends the target serving node identity to the source location server, which updates the LRF. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202408 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR AUTOMATIC CHANGING NETWORK IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A method and apparatus for automatically changing a network in a mobile communication terminal are provided. The method includes determining whether the network needs to change, transmitting location information of the terminal to a server when the network needs to change, receiving network information based on the location information from the server, and setting network connection information of the terminal based on the received network information. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202409 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHODS AND COMPONENTS THAT IMPLEMENT HANDOFF IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS - This invention relates to wireless local area networks, and particularly to the IEEE 802.11 family of standards. It consists of a method and apparatus that can be implemented in access points (APs) and subscriber wireless transmit/receive units (WTRUs), in order to allow an AP to initiate re-association of a WTRU to itself or a different AP. The invention improves the robustness of the network by enabling more efficient load balancing, congestion control, and roaming, without compromising the user experience. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202410 | Communication System - A source eNB determines whether an X2 interface is established between the source eNB and a target eNB when the source eNB performs a handover of a UE under the control of the source eNB to the target eNB. When the X2 interface is not established between the source eNB and the target eNB, the source eNB inquires with an address management node about the IP address of the target eNB. Upon receipt of the IP address of the target eNB from the address management node, the source eNB accesses the target eNB using the IP address and establishes the X2 interface. After establishing the X2 interface, the source eNB performs a handover of the UE to the target eNB. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202411 | Method and Apparatus for Responding to a Scanning Request - Methods and apparatus are provided to respond to a scanning request to further improve the utilization rate of air interface resources. A scanning response message is sent to a mobile station in response to a scanning request received from the mobile station. The scanning response message can be in the form of a MOB_SCN_RSP message that includes a BS ID sequence indication field that maps the BS IDs carried in the MOB_SCN_REQ message. | 08-12-2010 |
20100202412 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING SCANNED OBJECTS - A method for determining scanned objects is disclosed. According to the method, a Mobile Station (MS) receives an MOB_NBR_ADV message sent by a Base Station (BS). The MOB_NBR_ADV message contains BS IDs. The method includes the following steps: setting a BS Bitmap field in a scanning process message; and mapping the BS Bitmap field to the BS IDs contained in the MOB_NBR_ADV message and determining scanned objects according to the mapping. With the method, a minimum of one bit may be mapped to one of the BS IDs, and thus scanned objects are determined. In addition, an apparatus containing BS Bitmap units is disclosed. When scanned objects are determined with the method and apparatus, the length of a scanning process message can be shortened, thus improving the air-interface resource usage of the wideband radio access system to a great extent. | 08-12-2010 |
20100208690 | Fast Handover Protocols for Wimax Networks - A method performs handover of a mobile station (MS from a current base station (BSC) connected to a target base station (BST) via a backbone in a Worldwide interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMAX) mobile communication network. The MS, before handover, transmits a Connection Identifier Request (CID-REQ) to the BST via the BSC, and receiving a Connection Identifier Response (CID-RSP) from the BST via the BSC. The MS, before handover, transmits a Subscriber Station (SS) Basic Capability Request (SBC-REQ), and receives a SS Basic Capability Response (SBC-RSP) from the BST via the BSC. Then, the MS transmits a Ranging Request (RNG-REQ) to the BST, and receives a Ranging Response (RNG-RSP) from the BST. During the handover, the MS transmits a Registration Request (REG-REQ) to the BST, and receives a Registration Response from the BST to establish the connection between the MS and the BST. | 08-19-2010 |
20100208691 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CONTROL APPARATUS AND ROUTER USING NETWORK-BASED IP MOBILITY PROTOCOL AND COMMUNICATION METHOD FOR THE SAME - When an MN is handed over from an MAGa to an MAGb, a network-based IP mobility protocol processor of an LMA transmits a header compression information forward command to MAGa, and a network-based IP mobility protocol processor of MAGa transmits header compression information to MAGb. MAGb having received the header compression information stores the information into a storage and performs a compression and extension process of the data associated with MN by referring to the information. | 08-19-2010 |
20100208692 | Apparatus and method for supporting intra-base station handover in a multi-hop relay broadband wireless communication system - An apparatus is capable of supporting an intra-BS handover of a Mobile Station (MS) that can distinguish a Relay Station (RS) and a Base Station (BS) in a multi-hop relay broadband wireless communication system. A handover of an MS in a multi-hop relay wireless communication system includes receiving a neighbor advertisement message. When a handover command message that initiates a handover to a target node is received, information on a target node is acquired, and an upper BS of the target node is identified. When the identified upper BS of the target node is the same as an upper BS of the serving node, control information that has been previously used in a serving node is used in the target node, and communication with the target node is performed. | 08-19-2010 |
20100208693 | NEIGHBOUR CELL LIST CREATION/MAINTENANCE AND NEIGHBOUR CELL NODE INTERFACE ESTABLISHMENT - Apparatus, including means for providing connectivity information for at least one neighbour cell in a neighbour cell list, said information being dependent on the result of a connectivity check carried out to measure the performance of a route between the apparatus and a respective base station associated with the at least one neighbour cell. | 08-19-2010 |
20100208694 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, CORE NETWORK, USER EQUIPMENT, AND PROGRAM - A core network includes an external network reception section which receives data from an external network, a connection instruction processing section which transmits a paging request directed to user equipment upon receipt of the data and also transmits a connection instruction of a second radio communication type, a connection management section which registers a connection by the second radio communication type upon receipt of a connection request, and a transmission section which transmits the data. The user equipment includes a first radio communication type communication section which receives the paging request and receives the connection instruction, a second radio communication type connection section which uses the second radio communication type to transmit the connection request according to the received connection instruction and causes the communication state to transition to a reception enabled state, and a second radio communication type communication section which receives the data when the communication state of the second communication type is the reception enabled state. This makes it possible to provide the user equipment of an idle state with communication data using a radio communication type having no paging function. | 08-19-2010 |
20100208695 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING BAND HANDOVER IN BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM AND MOBILE STATION SUPPORTING THE SAME - A method for performing band handover in a broadband wireless access system is provided. In this method, a terminal in a band AMC mode in which the terminal transmits and receives data through a band selected from among bands to which a modulation scheme and a coding rate are adaptively applied receives channel status information of each band of a neighboring base station. The terminal then performs handover to the neighboring base station while maintaining the band AMC mode if it is determined based on the received channel status information that a channel status of each band of the neighboring base station satisfies a predetermined condition. This band handover method enables handover to be performed for each specific frequency band of a mobile terminal. | 08-19-2010 |
20100208696 | METHOD OF FAST UPLINK DATA TRANSMISSION FOR HANDOVER - A fast uplink data transmission method for a handover is disclosed. This method effectively uses a handover signal when there is data to be transmitted to an uplink during an Intra Radio Access Technology (I-RAT) handover, such that it quickly transmits and receives uplink data. The method of transmitting uplink data in a wireless access system includes, transmitting a message including an information bit to a target base station by a mobile station during a handover, wherein the information bit indicates whether the uplink data is present, and receiving a radio resource for transmitting the uplink data from the target base station, if the information bit indicates the uplink data is present, wherein the radio resource is allocated by the target base station. So, uplink user data can be quickly transmitted to a destination while the UE performs the handover. | 08-19-2010 |
20100208697 | QoS RESOURCE RESERVATION METHOD AND MOBILE TERMINAL USED IN THE METHOD - Disclosed is a technique to provide a QoS resource reservation method and the like, which will not generate a delay in establishing a QoS reservation and can avoid the waste of QoS resources. According to the technique, the method includes: a step of causing a mobile node | 08-19-2010 |
20100208698 | DATA FLOW MOBILITY - A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) may communicate using a data flow that is defined according to flow identification information (FII). The WTRU may participate in the transfer of the data flow between access networks of diverse radio access technologies. The WTRU may communicate with a mobility function to obtain access network and mobility policy information. The mobility function may be, for example, an Access Network Discovery Function (ANDSF). The mobility policy information may describe the conditions by which the transfer of data flows between access networks may be permitted. | 08-19-2010 |
20100208699 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND HANDOVER METHOD THEREOF - A method of performing handover of a mobile terminal includes performing a registration procedure by accessing a first network, storing registration information in the first network, and performing handover to a second network upon completion of the registration procedure in order to perform data communication by accessing the second network. The method also includes determining if handover from the second network back to the first network is necessary while the mobile terminal accesses the second network and performing the handover to the first network using the registration information stored in the first network if it is determined that handover from the second network back to the first network is necessary. | 08-19-2010 |
20100208700 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR SELECTING A HANDOVER BASE STATION IN MOBILE WIMAX - Methods and apparatus for improving performance and robustness of a handover procedure. For example, by handing over to a target base station (BS) that is co-located with a serving BS (i.e., a BS located in the same physical node as the serving BS), mobile station (MS) context transfers, handover preparation and downlink (DL) data continuity between the serving BS and the target BS may be simplified because the serving BS and the target BS are in the same physical node. Further, a location-based services advertisement (LBS-ADV) message may be enhanced to include sector center directions of the serving BS and neighboring BSs. Using this information, an MS may determine neighboring BSs that are adjacent to the serving BS and limit scanning operations and handovers to these adjacent BSs, thereby reducing the processing for those operations. | 08-19-2010 |
20100208701 | High Rate Packet Data (HRPD) Idle State Handout From Femto Access Point to Macro Access Network - Systems and methods for identifying an address of a femto node during handoff of an access terminal from a femto node to a macro node. In one embodiment, the femto node assigns a unique identifier to the access terminal. The access terminal passes the unique identifier to the macro node. The macro node partitions the unique identifier to determine the address of the femto node. In another embodiment, the femto node registers its address with a domain name system. The macro node queries the domain name system to obtain the address of the femto node. In another embodiment, the macro node sends the unique identifier to a proxy. The proxy partitions the unique identifier to determine the address of the femto node. | 08-19-2010 |
20100208702 | High Rate Packet Data (HRPD) Idle State Handout From Femto Access Point to Macro Access Network - Systems and methods for identifying an address of a femto node during handoff of an access terminal from a femto node to a macro node. In one embodiment, the femto node assigns a unique identifier to the access terminal. The access terminal passes the unique identifier to the macro node. The macro node partitions the unique identifier to determine the address of the femto node. In another embodiment, the femto node registers its address with a domain name system. The macro node queries the domain name system to obtain the address of the femto node. In another embodiment, the macro node sends the unique identifier to a proxy. The proxy partitions the unique identifier to determine the address of the femto node. | 08-19-2010 |
20100208703 | High Rate Packet Data (HRPD) Idle State Handout From Femto Access Point to Macro Access Network - Systems and methods for identifying an address of a femto node during handoff of an access terminal from a femto node to a macro node. In one embodiment, the femto node assigns a unique identifier to the access terminal. The access terminal passes the unique identifier to the macro node. The macro node partitions the unique identifier to determine the address of the femto node. In another embodiment, the femto node registers its address with a domain name system. The macro node queries the domain name system to obtain the address of the femto node. In another embodiment, the macro node sends the unique identifier to a proxy. The proxy partitions the unique identifier to determine the address of the femto node. | 08-19-2010 |
20100208704 | Data Processing Method and Device - A data processing method is provided for forwarding data in the case of handover between heterogeneous networks. The data processing method includes: when a user equipment (UE) is handed over from an originating network to a receiving network, receiving, by the originating network, a data forwarding address obtained by the receiving network; creating a data forwarding tunnel between an originating network gateway and a receiving network gateway according to the data forwarding address; and forwarding data to the receiving network through the data forwarding tunnel. A data processing device is also provided. The lossless data processing solution can overcome the problem of data loss in the case of handover between heterogeneous networks in the existing technology, reduces the time of user service interruption and enhances the user experience. | 08-19-2010 |
20100215018 | CS HANDOVER FROM IMS FEMTO TO MACRO - Systems and methods for performing a cellular call handover from a home node b (HNB) to a macro cellular communication node (e.g., a base station or radio access network) are disclosed. An interworking function (IWF) is provided in the HNB and acts as an anchor mobile switching center (MSC) for a user device served by the HNB, and communicates with a visited MSC for the HNB. The IWF sends a request to a target MSC (which may be the visited MSC) serving the HNB, to handover the call to the macro node. The call is then handed over to the macro communication node by the target MSC. In this manner, the IWF facilitates providing the described handover in conformity with existing 3GPP standards, without requiring additional standards to be generated and without requiring additional system components. | 08-26-2010 |
20100215019 | DETECTION OF MOBILITY FUNCTIONS IMPLEMENTED IN A MOBILE NODE - The invention relates to a method for configuring an IP address of a mobile node attaching to a first access network during an inter-access technology handover from another, second access network. Moreover, the invention relates to a mobile access gateway and a mobile node that participate in this method. First and second access network belong to a network domain offering a network-based mobility function. In order to detect whether a mobile node implements a network-based mobility function a virtual interface discovery is performed by checking whether the mobile node also configures the address according to the home network prefix offered to the mobile node before the handover on its interface to the first access network. In parallel, an address configuration is performed. Based on the detection of whether a virtual interface is implemented at the mobile node, the mobile access gateway may decide whether to use network-based mobility or client-based mobility and change the address configuration. | 08-26-2010 |
20100215020 | METHOD OF PACKET REORDERING AND PACKET RETRANSMISSION - A packet reordering method and a packet transmission method to implement reliable data communication are disclosed. The method of transmitting packets at a serving base station in case of a mobile station performing handover include, receiving a series of packets from an upper layer entity, and transmitting the series of packets one after the other to a target base station, wherein a packet of the series of packets includes an information field which represents whether the packet is the last transmitted packet. When the mobile station performs the I-RAT handover, the target serving station pre-reorders PDU packets, and transmits the reordered PDU packets to the mobile station, such that the mobile station can quickly transmit data without reordering the packets. | 08-26-2010 |
20100215021 | ACCESS NETWORK HANDOVER FOR A MOBILE TELEVISION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus are described for content delivery, including receiving content from a first network, moving into a coverage area of a second network, performing a handover, receiving content from the second network and dropping any duplicate content packets. Also described are a method and apparatus for content delivery including receiving content from a first network, performing a handover, receiving content from a second network, determining if any content is missing and requesting the missing content. | 08-26-2010 |
20100215022 | Method and Apparatus for Determining Coverage and Switching Between Overlay Communication Systems - Techniques to determine whether or not a terminal is under the coverage of a current wireless communication system (e.g., a packet data system) and to switch from the current system to another wireless communication system (e.g., a voice/data system). In one method, at least one measurement of at least one parameter for at least one base station in the current system is initially obtained. The measurement(s) may be SNR measurements. A metric is derived based on the measurement(s) and used (typically along with a metric threshold and a timer) to determine whether or not the terminal is within the coverage of the current system. A switch to another system is initiated if the terminal is deemed to be outside the coverage of the current system. The two systems provide at least one common service (e.g., packet data service). | 08-26-2010 |
20100220687 | SPECTRUM MANAGEMENT ACROSS DIVERSE RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGIES - A network management node may manage a network of base stations and wireless transmit/receive units (WTRUs) that operate using diverse radio access technologies. The network management node may communicate with other network management nodes to manage spectrum usage across their respective managed networks. The network management node may acts as a proxy for cellular-capable WTRUs that operate within the managed networks. The network management node may perform handovers of Peer-to-Peer (P2P) groups that operate within the managed networks. The WTRUs may include WTRUs that operate at Very High Frequency (VHF) or Ultra High Frequency (UHF) spectrum (“white space”) frequencies. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220688 | DISTRIBUTED INFRASTRUCTURE FOR WIRELESS DATA COMMUNICATIONS - A mobile user terminal | 09-02-2010 |
20100220689 | RESOURCE RELEASE CONTROL METHOD, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND DEVICE - A resource release control method, a communication system, and a device are configured to delete a bearer context on an original-side heterogeneous-system management network element (NE) even if a target-side management NE does not support interaction with a serving gateway (S-GW) and does not support an idle mode signaling reduction (ISR) mechanism. The resource release control method includes: acquiring version information of a target-side management NE, when a user equipment (UE) activating an ISR mechanism is handed over from an original-side network to a target-side network; and deleting a bearer of an original-side heterogeneous-system management NE, if the version information indicates that the target-side management NE does not interact with an S-GW and does not support the ISR mechanism. Meanwhile, a communication system and a relevant device are also provided. | 09-02-2010 |
20100226338 | COMMUNICATION METHOD, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, HOME AGENT, MOBILE NODE, AND COMMUNICATION NODE - A new technique is disclosed, by which it is possible to prevent the occurrence of unnecessary traffic from a mobile node when a path is switched over by path selecting policy of a home agent itself or a correspondent node itself. According to this technique, in a communication system where a mobile node | 09-09-2010 |
20100232389 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR HIGH SPEED INTRA-DOMAIN MOBILITY MANAGEMENT USING DUAL INTERFACES IN WIRELESS LAN/MAN - The present invention relates to a fast intra-domain mobility management method and system. The fast intra-domain mobility management method and system are configured to enable handover stably and intelligently with respect to complicated electric wave characteristics in such a manner that in order to provide an efficient inter-AP handover function at high speed without data loss or delay upon movement, two LAN/MAN interfaces, operating according to the alternate make-before-break principle, is mounted in the existing wireless communication terminal, PDA, notebook, or smart phone without changing the infrastructure of the wireless LAN and MAN, and in order to minimize unnecessary handover due to an abrupt change of the electric wave intensity, in a sleep state, whether to enter a preparation state is determined by comparing an estimated value of a moving average value with a preparation threshold value Tp set in memory, and in the preparation state, a probe message is sent to an AP, and the electric wave intensity of an AP that is in use or a switch threshold value Ts set in the memory is compared with the electric wave intensity of an AP that is in the preparation state for the handover, and fast switching is then performed. Accordingly, handover can be performed stably at high speed while saving power consumption when the mobile node moves. In particular, a ping-pong phenomenon that may occur when the mobile node frequently moves between the same neighboring cells can be reduced. | 09-16-2010 |
20100232390 | LOAD BALANCING MULTIPLE AMONG MULTIPLE CARRIERS IN A SECTOR - A method of operating a communication system is disclosed. A first set of wireless devices is communicated with using a first frequency range. A second set of wireless devices is communicated with using a second frequency range. A first air-interface utilization associated with the first frequency range is determined. The first air-interface utilization is determined to satisfy a criteria. A second air-interface utilization associated with the second frequency range is determined. A subset of the first set of wireless devices is selected. The subset is selected to have a total air interface utilization that exceeds one-half of the difference between the first air-interface utilization and the second air-interface utilization. The subset of wireless devices is controlled to use the second frequency range. | 09-16-2010 |
20100232391 | Method And System For Intra E-Utran Handover - The invention regards a handover method for a data packet based wireless mobile communications network. The network comprises a core network (CN) and a radio area network (RAN). The core network (CN) comprises a control plane node (MME) intercommunicating with a user plane node (UPE). The radio area network comprises a mobile user equipment (UE) intercommunicating with a source radio base transceiver station, eNOdeB, (source eNodeB), wherein payload data is routed via a tunnel between the user plane node (UPE) and the source eNodeB (source eNodeB), wherein the handover comprises the step of establishing a temporary tunnel between the user plane node (UPE) and a target eNodeB (target eNodeB), the handover being initiated by the target eNodeB (target eNodeB) transmitting an unreliable uplink data signal to the user plane node (UPE) comprising handover information. | 09-16-2010 |
20100232392 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING A HANDOVER FROM A WCDMA SYSTEM TO A CDMA SYSTEM IN A MULTI-MODE MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A method of performing a handover from a Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA) system to a Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) system in a multi-mode terminal having a WCDMA module and a CDMA module includes determining whether a handover to the CDMA system is necessary during a call through a WCDMA system; acquiring a pilot signal from the CDMA system by activating the CDMA module if it is determined that the handover to the CDMA system is necessary; receiving a sync signal if the pilot signal from the CDMA system is acquired; transmitting information for handover to the WCDMA system through the WCDMA module; allowing the CDMA module to enter a CDMA traffic state using handover information if the handover information is received from the WCDMA system through WCDMA module; and releasing a traffic state of the WCDMA module. | 09-16-2010 |
20100232393 | Method, Device and System for Implementing Optimized Inter-RAT Handover - A method, device and system for implementing optimized inter-RAT handover are disclosed. When a user equipment or a source network prepares for a handover to a target network, a corresponding target network ID is obtained from a configured mapping between cell IDs and target IDs according to a received cell ID, target network bearers are established following identification of an access node of the target network, and the user equipment is connected to the target network after handover preparation is complete. With the present invention, when a user equipment is handed-over from a source network to a target network, service continuity can be maintained with an enhanced quality of user experience. | 09-16-2010 |
20100232394 | MOBILE CONTROL DEVICE AND HANDOVER CONTROL METHOD - The present invention is a handover control method in a mobile communication system that performs handover control by switching base stations that communicate with a mobile terminal as the mobile terminal moves. In this handover control method, a mobile control device selects one or more handover base station candidates based on the communication state, and based on the communication capabilities of the handover base station candidates, decides a transmission rate for multicasting communication data, and transmits communication data to each of the handover base station candidates at the decided transmission rate, and a handover base station candidate that is decided as a handover base station sends the saved multicast communication data to the mobile terminal. | 09-16-2010 |
20100238897 | MOBILE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD OF CARRYING OUT HANDOVER IN THE SYSTEM - When a strength of an electric field for receiving wireless in downlink is equal to or smaller than a predetermined strength, the mobile communication terminal device | 09-23-2010 |
20100238898 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR EXTENDING THE RESOURCE RETAIN TIME IN A HANDOVER - A mobile station may send a first handover indication message to a serving base station. The first handover indication message may include a first resource retain time. The mobile station may start a resource retaining timer using the first resource retain time. The mobile station may perform handover procedures. The mobile station may determine whether the resource retaining timer is within a threshold of expiring. The mobile station may send a second handover indication message to the serving base station if the resource retaining timer is within the threshold of expiring. | 09-23-2010 |
20100238899 | System and Method of Automatically Optimizing an Operational Radio Access Network - Systems and methods of automatically optimizing an operational radio access network are provided. Objective and operational cost functions for the radio access network are generated, and a deviation between the generated cost functions is determined. At least one aspect of the radio access network is adjusted in order to minimize the determined deviation between cost functions. | 09-23-2010 |
20100238900 | Wireless Handover Optimization - Aspects of the present invention relate to improved systems and methods for handing over a UE from a source node to a target node. In some embodiments, the target node receives UL and DL count information directly from the UE being handed over, rather than from the source node or from a core network node. | 09-23-2010 |
20100238901 | SYSTEMS, APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR INTERFERENCE MANAGEMENT IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Systems, apparatus, methods and computer program products are provided. In some embodiments, a method for facilitating interference management in an unplanned wireless communication system is provided. The method can include a non-serving base station obtaining information about a user equipment served by a serving base station; and determining signal information based, at least, in part, on the information. The method can also include the non-serving base station disallowing access to the user equipment due to restricted access rules for the non-serving base station. The method can also include the non-serving base station performing interference management of the user equipment served by the serving base station. The interference management can be performed based, at least, in part, on the determined signal information. | 09-23-2010 |
20100238902 | Channel Structures for a Quasi-Orthogonal Multiple-Access Communication System - A channel structure has at least two channel sets. Each channel set contains multiple channels and is associated with a specific mapping of the channels to the system resources available for data transmission. Each channel set may be defined based on a channel tree having a hierarchical structure. To achieve intra-cell interference diversity, the channel-to-resource mapping for each channel set is pseudo-random with respect to the mapping for each remaining channel set. In each scheduling interval, terminals are scheduled for transmission on the forward and/or reverse link. The scheduled terminals are assigned channels from the channel sets. Multiple terminals may use the same system resources and their overlapping transmissions may be separated in the spatial domain. For example, beamforming may be performed to send multiple overlapping transmissions on the forward link, and receiver spatial processing may be performed to separate out multiple overlapping transmissions received on the reverse link. | 09-23-2010 |
20100246529 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - To reduce power consumption for scanning and maintain communication quality by reducing the time for scanning or connection when a wireless communication terminal switches between networks or base stations. A wireless communication terminal | 09-30-2010 |
20100246530 | Handover From Circuit Switched Domain to Circuit Switched Service Over Packet Switched Domain - A method for initiating handover of a circuit switched service using a circuit switched bearer of a mobile station from a circuit switched to a packet switched domain in a mobile communications network, the mobile communications network comprising a radio network and a core network, the radio network comprising a controlling node, the mobile station being o allocated an IP address and access port, said method comprising the controlling node communicating to the core network a relocation/handover required message; said relocation/handover required message comprising an indication of the IP address and access port allocated to the mobile station. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246531 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING SIGNALS - A signal receiving method includes allocating a communication resource corresponding to a mobile station over a plurality of frames, transmitting allocation information on the communication resource to the mobile station, and receiving a transmitted signal through the communication resource. Therefore, the resource allocated on the frequency axis is minimized by allocating the resource to the mobile station over a plurality of frames, and the resource is allocated within the limited power of the mobile station, thereby improving radio performance. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246532 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR IMPLEMENTING MEDIA INDEPENDENT HANDOVER BETWEEN TECHNOLOGICALLY DIVERSIFIED ACCESS NETWORKS - A wireless communication method and device may be used to perform a media independent handover between technologically diversified access networks. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) may be configured to communicate with a plurality of technologically diversified access networks, such as Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 802.X networks and Third Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) networks. The WTRU may include a plurality of access network specific protocol stacks and a media independent handover (MIH) function. The WTRU may be configured to communicate information with each of the plurality of access network specific protocol stacks using protocols specific to each to the plurality of access network protocol stacks. | 09-30-2010 |
20100254345 | METHODS FOR SUPPORTING MOBILE NODES IN INDUSTRIAL CONTROL AND AUTOMATION SYSTEMS AND OTHER SYSTEMS AND RELATED APPARATUS - A method includes providing wireless service to a mobile leaf node using at least one first infrastructure node in an industrial control or monitoring system. The method also includes detecting movement of the mobile leaf node away from the at least one first infrastructure node. The method further includes handing off the mobile leaf node to at least one second infrastructure node in the industrial control or monitoring system so that the at least one second infrastructure node provides the wireless service to the mobile leaf node. The wireless service provided to the mobile leaf node remains deterministic. Various techniques can be used to detect the movement of the mobile leaf node. Also, the first and second infrastructure nodes could be in different clusters of nodes, and various techniques can be used to support handoffs between infrastructure nodes in different clusters. | 10-07-2010 |
20100254346 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING PROACTIVE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION HANDOFFS USING A MOBILE CLIENT'S ROUTE INFORMATION - A method of handing off radio resources from a first base station to a second base station includes transmitting route information and speed information associated with a client device from the client device to the first base station or to an application server. A time is selected at which the radio resources are to be handed off from the first base station to the second base station. The selection is performed by the first base station or the application server. The selection is performed dependent upon the route information and speed information. | 10-07-2010 |
20100254347 | Support for Continuity of Tunnel Communications for Mobile Nodes Having Multiple Care of Addressing - The present invention solves communication disruption problems during the hand-off transition period by using a pre-handoff registration of a new foreign agent on behalf of the mobile node The pre-handoff registration message should: (1) identify itself as a pre-hand off registration message, (2) indicate direction of traffic for the pre-handoff registration time period, and (3) specify a lifetime or time period when the pre-handoff registration request will continue to be considered valid The local mobility anchor will accept traffic using the pre-handoff registration care-of address depending on the directionality indicator, but the communication traffic to or from the mobile node will not be disrupted during the transition period. Because the care-of address for the mobile node on the new foreign network can be used to direct communication traffic to or from the mobile node during this transition time period, no disruption of service will be encountered. | 10-07-2010 |
20100254348 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO ENABLE MULTIPLE NEIGHBOUR ACCESS POINTS PREPARATION FOR HANDOVER ROBUSTNESS - Systems and methods are disclosed to enable multiple neighbour base stations or access points (APs) preparation for handover robustness. The systems and methods include generating a handover request message at a source base station (BS) for user equipment (UE) if the UE detects at least one neighbour BS. The handover request message may include a handover imminent flag. The handover request message is transmitted to the neighbour BS, wherein if the handover imminent flag indicates that the handover is not imminent, the neighbour BS does not reserve a radio network temporary identifier (RNTI) for the UE. | 10-07-2010 |
20100254349 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD TO PERFORM HANDOVER OF COMMUNICATION USING DIFFERENT COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Disclosed is that when the first wireless communication apparatus is connected to a terminal apparatus such as a wireless access point wirelessly, the second wireless communication apparatus performs the communication with the first wireless communication apparatus by a short distance wireless communication, then the first wireless communication apparatus transmits participation information to participate in the network to the second wireless communication apparatus by the short distance wireless communication, and the second wireless communication apparatus is connected to the network based on the received participation information so as to communicate with the first wireless communication apparatus through the terminal apparatus. | 10-07-2010 |
20100254350 | Fast Handoff Using GPS Technology for Mobile Telematics - The present invention relates to the reduction of handoff delays for mobile telematics applications. In particular, the present invention provides a method employing GPS technology to define IP addresses in a mobile environment in order to reduce delays and transient data loss caused by handoff from one network to another. | 10-07-2010 |
20100260139 | HANDOVER IN A WIRELESS NETWORK BACK TO A RESTRICTED LOCAL ACCESS POINT FROM AN UNRESTRICTED GLOBAL ACCESS POINT - The invention concerns methods, a device and computer program products for simplifying handover back to a restricted local access point from an unrestricted global access point as well as to a device implementing a restricted local access point for provision in a wireless network and a wireless network. In the network a restricted local access point hands over a mobile station to an unrestricted global access point and provides data enabling the restricted local access point to be identified as a candidate access point. A device for simplifying handover back determines that the restricted local access point is a candidate for further handover based on this data and informs the mobile station about the restricted local access point via the unrestricted glob access point. Thereby hand over may be considered also to the restricted local access point in addition to other surrounding access points. | 10-14-2010 |
20100260140 | Apparatus, Method and Computer Program Product Providing Non-Synchronized Random Access Handover - A method is provided including sending a source Node-B a target Node-B cell-specific unique identifier for a user equipment to be handed over to the target Node-B, sending the source Node-B a predetermined access preamble sequence for the user equipment to be handed over to the target Node-B, and in response to receiving the predetermined access preamble sequence from the user equipment, sending the user equipment handover related information in association with the cell-specific unique identifier for handing over to the target Node-B. | 10-14-2010 |
20100260141 | LOCATION REPORTING IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Location reporting in long term evolution (LTE) wireless networks is provided. Systems and methods are disclosed to provide support of location reporting and messaging at a mobility management entity (MME) to allow location updates to serving gateways (SGWs) and packet data network gateways (PGWs), and for the SGWs and PGWs to activate and de-activate location reporting. The MME also supports detection and communication with the LTE radio access network to provide location reporting back to the communication network. The MME and the accompanying messaging can provide location reporting including enhanced cell global identity (ECGI) and tracking area identity (TAI) information. | 10-14-2010 |
20100260142 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING UNCONTROLLED HANDOVER - A device, system and method for performing an uncontrolled handover in a mobile station, a ranging request message including an identifier of a serving base station and a first identifier used in the serving base station is transmitted to a first target base station to perform network (re)entry to the first target base station, and a ranging response message including security information and a second identifier for identifying the mobile station is received from the first target base station. | 10-14-2010 |
20100260143 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - A radio communication system includes an EPC | 10-14-2010 |
20100260144 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR THE HANDOVER - Consistent handover can be provided between a plurality of objects by providing handover mode control information defining an object for initiating handover from among at least one object in a system environment including the at least one object, wherein the at least one object is able to initiate handover between heterogeneous networks. | 10-14-2010 |
20100260145 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE OPERATION OF A BASE STATION OF A WIRELESS CELLULAR TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and a device for controlling operation of a base station of a wireless cellular telecommunication network including a network server. The network server: transfers a location request message to the base station; receives in response, a certificate originated by a third party; checks validity of the certificate; obtains information representative of the location of the base station; checks if the base station is located in a given geographical area; and transfers a command control message enabling the base station to transfer radio signals if the certificate is valid and if the base station is located in the given geographical area. | 10-14-2010 |
20100260146 | SEAMLESS HANDOFF SCHEME FOR MULTI-RADIO WIRELESS MESH NETWORK - A mobile device communicates with a first mesh access point (AP) via a first radio frequency (RF) interface of the mobile device over a first wireless connection, where the first mesh AP is one of mesh APs of a first mesh cell of the wireless mesh network. It is detected that signal quality of the first wireless connection drops below a predetermined threshold as the mobile device moves from the first mesh cell towards a second mesh cell. In response to the detection, it is established via a second RF interface of the mobile device a second wireless connection with a second mesh AP of a second mesh cell of the wireless mesh network, while concurrently maintaining the first wireless connection with the first mesh AP via the first RF interface. | 10-14-2010 |
20100265912 | Method and Apparatus for Secure Handover in a Communication Network - In at least one embodiment taught herein, the point in a packet transmission sequence space at which hyper frame numbers are incremented is changed at least temporarily as part of handover processing, where a mobile station ( | 10-21-2010 |
20100265913 | INTER-FREQUENCY INDICATION OF ASSOCIATION DATA FOR MULTI-CARRIER WIRELESS DEPLOYMENTS - Providing for user equipment mobility in a multi-carrier wireless network deployment is described herein. By way of example, data pertinent to mobile cell selection can be shared among base stations operating on different carrier frequencies either over-the-air or via a wired backhaul, and distributed by a base station to mobile terminals served by the base station. In one aspect, the data can be distributed over a wireless channel reserved for inter-carrier association data, whereas in other aspects, the data can be unicast to particular mobile terminals served by the base station. This can reduce or avoid a need for individual mobile terminals to tune away to a non-serving carrier for inter-carrier association or handover determinations. Accordingly, gaps in signal analysis on a serving carrier can be reduced or avoided, improving overall quality of wireless communication in a multi-carrier environment. | 10-21-2010 |
20100265914 | SYSTEMS, METHODS, AND DEVICES TO ENABLE SELECTION OF RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY - In some embodiments, an access terminal is configured to select a first set of system resources, and communicate a message to acquire access to the first set of system resources, wherein the message conceals that the access terminal is capable of communication with a second set of system resources. In one embodiment, the first set of system resources includes circuit-switched system resources, the second set of system resources includes packet-switched system resources, and an access terminal conceals from the network that it is operable using the packet-switched system resources in order to acquire and/or maintain connected mode access to the circuit-switched system resources. Such embodiments allow an access terminal to use circuit-switched system resources even if the network does not support CS fallback or has refused a CS fallback request. | 10-21-2010 |
20100265915 | METHOD TO FACILITATE USER EQUIPMENT HANDOFF WITHIN A PACKET DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method to facilitate user equipment (UE) handoff within a packet data communication system includes receiving at the Evolved NodeB (eNB) via a serving relay node an indication that the UE will undergo a handoff from the serving relay node to a target node; receiving at the eNB first packet data having a first payload and a first Internet protocol (IP) header identifying an address of the eNB; extracting, at the eNB, the first payload from the first packet data to form a first packet data unit (PDU) including the extracted first payload and a second IP header identifying the address of the eNB and an address of the target node; and transmitting, from the eNB to the target node, the first PDU to permit the target node to transmit the first payload of the first PDU to the UE, the target node being identified using the second IP header. | 10-21-2010 |
20100265916 | TUNNEL MANAGEMENT METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REDUCING PACKET LOSSES OF MOBILE NODE IN MOBILE IP ENVIRONMENT - Provided is a method of managing a tunnel to provide mobile node mobility when a mobile node moves from an existing visiting network to a visiting network which supports a mobile IP, the method comprising: (a) a mobile node detecting a movement of the mobile node and configuring a care-of address (CoA) and thereafter transmitting a location registration (Binding Update) message to a home agent; (b) the mobile node creating a second tunnel in the visiting network and setting the second tunnel as a receiving-only tunnel while maintaining a first tunnel which is already used in the existing visiting network; (c) the mobile node receiving a location registration completion (Binding Acknowledgement) message from the home agent; and (d) the mobile node changing the second tunnel to the tunnel capable of transmitting/receiving by modifying a routing table, and canceling the first tunnel. | 10-21-2010 |
20100265917 | APPARATUS, AND AN ASSOCIATED METHOD, FOR PRESERVING COMMUNICATION SERVICE QUALITY LEVELS DURING HAND-OFF OF COMMUNICATIONS IN A RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile station is configured to transmit a sequence of data packets over a wireless network. The station includes a data sequence expander. The expander receives an indication of a pending hand-off for the mobile station from a first network access point to a second network access point and estimates an amount of time prior to occurrence of the hand-off. The expander inserts a number of delay packets into the sequence of data packets in response to receiving the indication of the pending hand-off. The number of delay packets is determined based on the estimated amount of time prior to the occurrence of the hand-off such that the insertion of the delay packets into the sequence of data packets will cause a delay that corresponds to the amount of time prior to occurrence of the hand-off. | 10-21-2010 |
20100272060 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING CODE DIVISION MULTIPLE ACCESS REGISTRATION ON A MULTI-TECHNOLOGY HANDSET - Embodiments of the present invention are directed to controlling CDMA registration on a multi-technology handset. By controlling CDMA registration on a multi-technology handset, efficient handoffs between different technologies can occur. In one embodiment, the multi-technology handset operates using CDMA and at least one second technology. The second technology can be wireless fidelity (WiFi) or worldwide interoperability for microwave access (WiMAX), for example. The multi-technology handset includes at least a dual mode controller (DMC), a CDMA controller, a second technology controller, as well as radios for the CDMA and the second technology. | 10-28-2010 |
20100272061 | Support for Multi-Homing Protocols - The present invention solves these problems with a new proxy binding update request and proxy binding acknowledgment messages having new indicators and identification information. Namely, the home agent/local mobility anchor will exchange proxy binding update messages and proxy binding acknowledge messages that include information such as mobile node identification (MN-ID), home network prefix (HNP), but can also include selective information fields such as, access type, handover indicator (HO), and interface identification (interface ID) By including new access type, indicator, and identification information, the local mobility anchor can respond to a binding update request message with a better understanding of the new connectivity request from the mobile node. | 10-28-2010 |
20100272062 | ROUTE OPTIMIZATION CONTINUITY AT HANDOVER FROM NETWORK-BASED TO HOST-BASED MOBILITY - To achieve this object the current invention provides a method, a mobile node, a mobile access gateway, a home agent and a communication system for handover of a mobile node between access networks either supporting network based mobility or not supporting network based mobility, in a packet switched communication network comprising at least the mobile, mobile access gateway, a correspondent node and a home agent. The method comprises the steps of performing proxy route optimization towards the correspondent node on behalf of the mobile node, performing handover from a current access network to a target access network, and determining whether the proxy route optimization is needed after the handover. If the proxy route optimization is needed after the handover, it is determined whether return routability based route optimization or home based route optimization are to be carried out, and if return routability based route optimization is to be carried out information regarding the proxy route optimization is sent to the mobile node by the home agent. If home agent based route optimization is to be carried out the method further comprises the following steps of generating and managing a route optimization state in a mobile node by the mobile node's home agent, and updating the correspondent nodes routing state with the mobile node's new location. | 10-28-2010 |
20100272063 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDLING A LOCAL BREAKOUT SESSION - A method and apparatus for handling a Local Break Out (LBO) session taking place in a first network between a user equipment and a corresponding node (CN) is provided. For the downlink packets, embodiments include: converting, in a node in the first or the second network, the IP address of the downlink packets from an LHoA to a Global Home Address (GHoA) and routing, from the first node to a second node in the second network, any downlink packets being sent from the corresponding node, so that the downlink packets will arrive at the user equipment having a GHoA. For the uplink packets embodiments include: converting, in a node in the first or the second network, the IP address of the uplink packets from a GHoA to an LHoA and routing, from the second node to the first node, any uplink packets being sent from the user equipment; so that the uplink packets will arrive at the corresponding node with a source address that is an LHoA. | 10-28-2010 |
20100272064 | Method of Handling Cell Change and Related Communication Device - A method of handling cell change for a mobile device compatible with a plurality of radio access technologies (RATs) including a first RAT supporting reception and transmission on a plurality of component carriers and a second RAT supporting reception and transmission on a single component carrier, in a wireless communication system, the method includes determining that cells using the first RAT have higher priority for cell selection or cell reselection than cells using the second RAT. | 10-28-2010 |
20100272065 | DATA FORWARDING APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR REDUCING HANDOVER INTERRUPTION TIME IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A data forwarding apparatus and method for reducing a HandOver (HO) interruption time in a wireless communication system where a macro cell and a femto cell coexist are provided. An operation method of a Mobile Station (MS) for data forwarding in a wireless communication system includes synchronizing with a serving Base Station (BS) after completing a HO procedure with a target BS, and receiving data packets existing in a queue through an air link directly from the serving BS. | 10-28-2010 |
20100272066 | BASE STATION ASSISTANCE FOR RANDOM ACCESS PERFORMANCE IMPROVEMENT - A base station (BS) may be configured to assist in the detection of a random access (RA) request failure and in clued an antenna configured to receive a RA request; a processor configured to decode the RA request; and a transmitter configured to transmit an aggregate RA response message comprising one or more RA responses that respond to one or more received and decoded RA requests. | 10-28-2010 |
20100272067 | Carrier assignment with mobility support in multi-carrier OFDM systems - Carrier pre-assignment is applied in multi-carrier handover operation to mitigate the impact to the user experience during handover and to achieve various objectives of call admission control in wireless multi-carrier OFDM networks. With carrier pre-assignment, a mobile station communicates its multi-carrier information to a target base station. The target base station pre-assigns secondary carriers to fulfill the requirements of the mobile station. In a first embodiment, a break-before-entry (BBE) multi-carrier handover procedure with carrier pre-assignment is provided. In a second embodiment, an entry-before-break (EBB) multi-carrier handover procedures for both inter-FA and intra-FA with carrier pre-assignment are provided. The multi-carrier handover procedures with carrier pre-assignment may be applied to 2-to-2 or N-to-N carriers handover situation. Because target secondary carriers are pre-assigned before handoff, the mobile station is ready for data transmission over multiple carriers after handover without additional carrier assignment procedure. | 10-28-2010 |
20100272068 | METHOD FOR SUPPORTING MULTIPLE INTERFACES IN PROXY MOBILE IPV6 - The present invention is related to a method for managing mobility of a mobile node and a system using the method employing Proxy Mobile IP technology. A method for managing mobility of a mobile node and a system using the method according to the present invention minimizes overhead imposed on LMA (Local Mobility Anchor) when a mobile node carries out handover or multiple connections and complements a drawback observed when LMA of Proxy Mobile IP carries out multiple connections. To achieve the above advantages, in a method for managing mobility of a mobile node and a system using the method according to the present invention, LMA and MAG utilizes connection type information of a mobile node. | 10-28-2010 |
20100272069 | Method and System for Idle Mode Signaling Reduction - A method and a system for idle mode signaling reduction (ISR) are provided. The method includes obtaining ISR activation information of a source network, and setting an ISR status of a user equipment (UE) in a target network according to the obtained ISR activation information of the source network. Thus, the ISR status of the UE can be processed when the UE is handed over between networks. | 10-28-2010 |
20100278140 | NETWORK DELAY SHAPING SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR BACKHAUL OF WIRELESS NETWORKS - A distributed or centralized network backhaul delay system includes a plurality of cellular base transceiver stations. Each cellular base transceiver station includes a network backhaul delay element. The network backhaul delay element is configured to calculate delay information associated with network delays between cell sites. The network backhaul delay element is configured to adjust and shape the relative network delays to minimize network delays between cell sites to enable soft handoff to be performed. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278141 | ACCESS CONTROL FOR MACROCELL TO FEMTOCELL HANDOVER - System(s) and method(s) are provided to control access to a femtocell as part of handover of a mobile device from macrocell to femtocell. Macro network platform issues a handover (HO) request towards femto network platform and a single virtual femto node, which represents a plurality of femto access points (APs). Location estimate(s) for the mobile device drives selection of a target femto AP. Selection of the target AP results in acceptance of the HO request. The mobile device also can request macro-to-femto (MTF) handover. HO neighbor list(s) is generated by decoding a network-issued identifier for each femto APs in a set of femtocells, and selectively ranking each femto AP based at least on channel quality; access privileges of the mobile device to each of the identified femto APs determines selectivity. Validation of mobile device's access right(s) drives acceptance of the MTF HO request to a top ranked femto AP. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278142 | Systems and Methods for Mobile Stations to Identify Radio Access Technologies - A mobile station capable of being served via a first radio access technology (RAT) and a second RAT. The mobile station includes a component configured to receive a permission to identify a cell of the first RAT in absence of a first radio access type neighbour cell list for a serving cell of the second RAT. The mobile station also includes a component configured to identify a cell of the first RAT after receiving the permission. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278143 | METHOD OF PERFORMING HANDOVER AND CONTROLLING THEREOF IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is method of controlling handover of a user equipment in a first base station connected with the user equipment (UE) in a mobile communication system. The first base station transmits state information to a second base station after determining handover to the second base station, wherein the state information includes at least one of information related to a connection setup state between the user equipment (UE) and the first base station and information related to a data transmission and reception state. The first base station transmits action information to the user equipment (UE), the action information being related to action to be performed by the user equipment (UE) after the user equipment (UE) performs handover. The information related to the connection setup state includes information as to whether the user equipment (UE) is in an uplink synchronized state or an uplink non-synchronization state before performing handover. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278144 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR GENERATING A SET OF TARGET CELLS SUITABLE FOR HANDOVER FROM A SOURCE CELL IN A CELLULAR COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method for generating a set of target cells suitable for a handover from a source cell in a cellular communication system, said communication system including a plurality of cells, each of said cells including at least one radio transmitter for providing communication with at least one user entity in a coverage area. The method further comprises, in said user entity, when in a coverage area of said source cell, receiving signals transmitted from at least one of said cells, wherein said signals include cell-specific data from which a representation of a relationship of said cell with respect to said source cell can be derived, and generating a set of target cells in said user entity, based on said signals transmitted from said at least one cell. The present invention also relates to a system, a user entity, a computer program and a computer program product. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278145 | Label Switched Packet Transfer Device - A device for connecting base station(s) to a cellular label switched network in a cellular network. The cellular network includes: base station(s), the connecting device(s); cellular label switched network(s); and service area(s). The base station(s) communicates with mobile terminals using wireless technology. The wireless technology uses a protocol layer architecture that includes at least one of the following: a wireless physical layer; a wireless medium access control protocol layer; a radio link control layer; and a network layer. The connecting device(s) include: a first interface to connect to the base station(s); a second interface to connect to cellular label switched network(s); and a label forwarding layer that: forwards packets between base station(s) and cellular label switched network(s); attaches label(s) to packets and removes label(s) from packets. A service area divided into a multitude of cells through which mobile terminals can move through and communicate with base station(s). | 11-04-2010 |
20100278146 | CELL SELECTION SYSTEM, CELL SELECTION METHOD, AND MOBILE TERMINAL - A cell selection system is for selecting a cell to be used for communications by a mobile terminal ( | 11-04-2010 |
20100278147 | ACCESS MODE-BASED ACCESS CONTROL - Access control for an access point (e.g., a cell of the access point) may be based on an access mode associated with the access point. For example, depending on the access mode, access control may involve performing a membership check for the access point. Such a membership check may be performed at a network entity, a source access point, or some other suitable location in a network. In some aspects, access control may involve performing a membership check for an access point in conjunction with a context fetch procedure. Such a procedure may be performed, for example, when an access terminal arrives at the access point after experiencing RLF at another access point. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278148 | CODE DIVISION MULTIPLE ACCESS MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In a mobile communication system using a code division multiple access (CDMA) method, spreading code detection and frame/slot timing synchronization (cell search) is conducted by using a long code masked symbol. The spreading factor of the long code masked symbol is set to a value lower than spreading factors of other ordinary symbols. As a result, it becomes possible to reduce the circuit scale and power dissipation of the mobile terminal and raise the speed of cell search. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278149 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING REVERSE-LINK DATA TRANSMISSION RATE DURING HANDOFF - Method and apparatus for controlling data transmission rate in a wireless communication system during handoff comprises a terminal recognizing an active set comprising a serving base station and at least one non-serving base station with respect to the terminal communicating with the network at a first data transmission rate, receiving a first rate control parameter from the serving base station and a second rate control parameter from the at least one non-serving base station, wherein the first and second rate control parameters are associated with determination of a second data transmission rate of the terminal during the handoff and determining the second data transmission rate in response to the first and the second rate control parameters, wherein the second data transmission rate is one of increased rate, decreased rate and same rate from the first data transmission rate. | 11-04-2010 |
20100284365 | Node And A Method Relating To Handover Within Mobile Communication - The present invention relates to a packet data support node ( | 11-11-2010 |
20100284366 | Multiple location retrieval function (LRF) network having location continuity - An IMS emergency call is reliably handed off within the PS domain or from the PS domain to the CS domain, by providing continuous support of location of a user device on behalf of a PSAP. The invention provides for handover of an IMS emergency call with EPS/GPRS access in a multi-LRF environment. Emergency location services for CS based emergency and/or IMS based emergency location services are often provided by multiple emergency location service providers. The information element that is critical for supporting Location Continuity in Multi-LRF environment can be either the assigned ESQK or the Serving LRF address. ESQK is assigned by the Serving LRF during IMS emergency call setup, and is used to uniquely identify the emergency service provider that operates the serving LRF. A simpler implementation uses the Serving LRF's address to identify the Serving LRF during and after the handover (PS-PS or PS-CS). | 11-11-2010 |
20100284367 | System and Method for Handovers in a Multi-Carrier Wireless Communications System - A system and method for handovers in multi-carrier wireless communications systems is provided. A method for communications device operation includes computing a bandwidth requirement, transmitting a handover request to a server controller, receiving a response responsive to the handover request, and in response to determining that the handover request was granted, initiating a handover. The handover request includes the bandwidth requirement. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284368 | Wireless LAN Mobility - A method of performing hand-off of a Mobile Node from a previous Access Point to a new Access Point within a WLAN domain, where the previous and new Access Points are connected respectively to previous and new Access Routers. The method comprises, following a MAC authentication exchange between the Mobile Node and the new Access Point, sending a MAC Reassociation Request from the Mobile Node to the New Access Point, forwarding said Reassociation Request to said new Access Router, and sending the Reassociation Request from said new Access Router to said previous Access Router within an IP hand-off request, and authenticating the Reassociation Request at the previous Access Router and initiating the tunnelling of IP packets received at the previous Access Router and destined for said Mobile Node, towards said new Access Router. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284369 | Optimization method of multiple service flows operation for WiMAX system - An optimization method of multiple service flows operation for a WiMAX system includes: adding a resource combination indication to a hand-off request message, a path pre-registration request message and a path registration request message; hand-off request processing: when multiple service flows are handed off by a mobile station from a current serving network to a target network, determining whether the mobile station is allowed to hand off to a target network according to the resource combination indication in the hand-off request message and whether the handoff of the multiple service flows is accepted by the target network; path pre-establishment processing and path establishment processing: when the mobile station is allowed to hand off multiple service flows from the current serving network to the target network, determining whether data paths between the target network and the network where a data management unit is located can be pre-established/established according to the resource combination indication in the path pre-registration request message and the path registration request message and whether the data path pre-registration/registration of the multiple service flows can be established. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284370 | WIRELESS NETWORK INTER-TECHNOLOGY HANDOFFS - In general, a method is described for handing off a communication session associated with a mobile device from a first network running a first technology to a second network running a second technology different from the first technology, the method comprising: establishing a communication channel with the mobile device through the first network; and enabling, through the communication channel, a handoff of the communication session associated with the mobile device from the first network to the second network. | 11-11-2010 |
20100284371 | USING THE REPETITION OF AN ERASURE INDICATOR BIT TO ENHANCE A POWER CONTROL COMMAND DURING HANDOFF - A wireless communication network ( | 11-11-2010 |
20100290427 | APPARATUS, METHOD AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT PROVIDING SYNCHRONIZED HANDOVER - A method is described which provides a synchronized HO of a mobile device. The method includes receiving a HO command. A determination is made of whether the HO command includes an indication of UL resource allocations. A C-RNTI is waited for in DL signaling if the HO command does not include the indication of UL resource allocations. If the HO command includes the indication of UL resource allocations, transmitting occurs based on the UL resource allocations. The method may be performed as a result of execution of computer program instructions stored in a computer readable memory medium. An apparatus is also described. | 11-18-2010 |
20100290428 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION DEVICE, AND HANDOVER METHOD - A communication path between base stations is switched so as to prevent data transmitted from a mobile station undergoing handover from being lost. A base station ( | 11-18-2010 |
20100290429 | Method of Handling Handover Message Decoding and Related Communication Device - A method of handling handover message decoding for a mobile device in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method includes via a first radio access technology (RAT), receiving a handover message associated with a handover from the first RAT to a second RAT supporting services of a packet switched (PS) domain and a circuit switched (CS) domain, wherein the handover message comprises type information and an inter-RAT message generated based on the second RAT, and determining a switched domain type of the inter-RAT message according to the type information. | 11-18-2010 |
20100290430 | Apparatus and method for handover in wireless communication system - An apparatus and method provide an effective handover of a User Equipment (UE) in a wireless communication system from a macro evolved Node-B (eNB) to a relay eNB). In a method of supporting a handover of a User Equipment (UE) by a macro evolved Node-B (eNB) in a wireless communication system, a handover of the UE to a relay eNB is determined. A handover request and RRC connection setup message is transmitted to the relay eNB by integrating a handover request message for requesting a handover of the UE and an RRC connection setup message for requesting RRC connection setup between the macro eNB and the relay eNB. A handover request response and RRC connection setup response message are received from the relay eNB by integrating a handover request response message and an RRC connection setup response message. | 11-18-2010 |
20100290431 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR FAST HANDOVER BETWEEN DIFFERENT NETWORKS - A method for fast handover between a 3GE network and a WLAN is provided. When a network change event that represents that a received WLAN signal can disappear or be captured is generated based on the WLAN signal, a terminal receives information on a new access router (NAR) to be used after handover from a previous access router (PAR) to which the terminal is currently connected using a network identifier, and all packets transmitted from the terminal to the PAR are buffered in the NAR. The NAR transmits all the buffered packets to the terminal when receiving a fast neighbor advertisement (FNA) message from the terminal to perform fast lossless handover. | 11-18-2010 |
20100290432 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL PROGRAM - Provided is a communication system capable of performing handover control using MGWs. The communication system includes communication control devices (MGW | 11-18-2010 |
20100290433 | SINGLE RADIO VOICE CALL CONTINUITY (SR-VCC) - The present invention discloses a node ( | 11-18-2010 |
20100296481 | METHODS IN MIXED NETWORK- AND HOST-BASED MOBILITY MANAGEMENT - A first aspect of the invention relates to a method for improving security at a local mobility anchor implementing both a network-based and a host-based mobility management scheme for managing the mobility of a mobile node. It suggests a method for verifying an attachment of a mobile node (MN) to a network element in a network. A second aspect of the invention relates to a method to be implemented in a mobility anchor node, which detects whether a race condition between registration messages occurs and resolves the most recent location of a mobile node. A third aspect of the invention relates to a method for detecting whether a binding cache entry for a mobile at a correspondent node has been spoofed and to a method for registering a care-of address of a mobile node at a correspondent node. | 11-25-2010 |
20100296482 | SELECTION OF A COMMUNICATION DEVICE FOR A USER BY A BASE STATION IN RESPONSE TO RECEIVING A COMMUNICATION SESSION HAND-OFF - A first base station wirelessly transmits media to a first communication device for a communication session. The first base station hands off the communication session to a second base station. The second base station wirelessly transmits the media to the first communication device for the communication session. In response to the hand-off, the second base station selects a second communication device based on the type of media and transmits a prompt to the first communication device to transfer the communication session to the second communication device. In response to a user instruction, the second base station transmits the media to the second communication device for the communication session. | 11-25-2010 |
20100296483 | METHOD FOR CONSERVING RESOURCES DURING WIRELESS HANDOVER OF A DUAL MODE MOBILE STATION - A method is described that is for handing over a multi-mode mobile device from a first network technology to a second network technology. The method includes initiating by the multi-mode mobile device a first packet session in a first wireless network in an area of multi-technology wireless coverage and detecting by a multi-mode mobile device a second wireless network supporting a different access network technology than the first wireless network. The method also includes determining a Quality of Service requirement for services supported by the session, and completing initial network entry and session establishment procedures by the multi-mode mobile device for a second session in the second wireless network when the first session includes at least one of a QoS sensitive service and real time service by the first wireless network and mobile device, and not completing initial network entry and session establishment procedures by the multi-mode mobile device when no QoS sensitive service and real time services are supported by the mobile device and first wireless network. | 11-25-2010 |
20100296484 | METHOD OF HANDLING CALL IN HANDOVER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE USING THE SAME - A method of handling at least a call in handover in a wireless communication system and a communication device using the same are proposed. The wireless communication system includes at least a wireless communication network and a wireless communication device. The method includes the following steps. First, a wireless communication device receives a message for switching at least a packet-switched (PS) call to at least a circuit-switched (CS) call from the wireless communication network. Further, the wireless communication device sets a stream identifier of each of the CS calls to an identifier value. The method enables smooth single radio voice call continuity (SRVCC) handover from the PS call in one wireless communication network to the CS call in another wireless communication network. In addition, the method also enables SRVCC multicall handover from the PS call in one network operation mode to the CS call in another wireless communication network. | 11-25-2010 |
20100296485 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS AND HARD HANDOVER PROCESSING METHOD - A mobile communication system includes a radio base station apparatus performing hard handover processing in synchronization with a mobile terminal under radio communication therewith; and a control apparatus transmitting first hard handover processing start timing to the radio base station apparatus, wherein the radio base station apparatus decides a possibility of handover processing delay according to the first hard handover processing start timing, and on deciding there is a possibility of delay, performs the hard handover processing at second hard handover processing start timing later than the first hard handover processing start timing. | 11-25-2010 |
20100296486 | Method, Apparatus and Computer Program for Handover From A First Access Point To A Second Access Point - A handover method from a first access point to a second access point for a first node having a first original address in communication with a second node having a second original address, wherein the first and second nodes operate over a plurality of communication layers, each communication layer supporting one or more communication protocols. The method includes requesting a handover to the second access point from the first access point for the communication; determining a first new address for the first node based on the request for handover; routing the communication using the first new address, such that on reception of the communication the second node recognizes the first original address of the communication and can route the communication using the received first new address for one or more predetermined communication protocols. | 11-25-2010 |
20100303039 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING COMPONENT CARRIER-SPECIFIC RECONFIGURATION - Techniques for component carrier-specific reconfiguration are disclosed. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) is capable of transmitting or receiving via multiple component carriers. The WTRU may perform component carrier reconfiguration on a component carrier basis to add, remove or replace a component carrier. Discontinuous reception (DRX) and/or discontinuous transmission (DTX) may be performed on at least one component carrier, wherein DRX and/or DTX patterns on the component carriers may not overlap each other. A random access procedure may be performed at the target cell on one component carrier while other component carriers are inactive. The component carrier-specific reconfiguration or handover of a component carrier or a channel may be implemented in coordinated multiple point transmission (CoMP), wherein a handover of a control channel, not a traffic channel, may be performed. Alternatively, a handover of a traffic channel may be performed. | 12-02-2010 |
20100303040 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - According to one embodiment, a mobile communication terminal comprises a first section which scans the access points to search for a targeted access point when activated and senses strength of signals received from the access points while scanning, wherein the first section is activated periodically, a second section which performs radio communication after the targeted access point is detected by means of the scanning by the first section, and a controller which specifies the home access point as the targeted access point upon identifying that the mobile communication terminal is out of a service area of the targeted access point from the signal strength sensed by the first section, and supplies the second section with power after the home access point is detected by means of the scanning. | 12-02-2010 |
20100303041 | INTER-DOMAIN COORDINATION FOR MT AND MO CALLS - A mobility management entity (MME) for setting up a call includes a first network interface which receives a tracking area update (TAU) request from a user equipment (UE). The MME includes a processing unit which translates the TAU request into a location area update (LAU) request. The MME includes a second network interface in communication with the processing unit which sends the LAU request to a mobile switching center (MSC) selected as a tracking MSC thereby establishing the MME as a network node through which the UE is paged. The second network interface receiving a LAU response from the tracking MSC that includes at least information identifying one or more suitable location area identifiers (LAI(s)) to which handover is allowed and Network Resource Identifier (NRI) information where the information indicates that the tracking MSC controls the suitable LAI(s), and the processing unit translating the LAU response into a TAU response which is sent through the first network interface to the UE. A user equipment (UE) includes a processing unit which transmits a tracking area update (TAU) request. The UE includes a network interface in communication with the processing unit which sends the TAU request to a mobility management entity (MME), and receives a TAU response having suitable location area identifiers (LAIs) and TMSI/network resource identifier (NRI). The UE includes a memory in communication with the network interface which stores the suitable LAIs and TMSI/NRI. A method for a mobility management entity (MME) for setting up a call. A method for a user equipment (UE). | 12-02-2010 |
20100309877 | RANDOM ACCESS SIGNALING TRANSMISSION FOR SYSTEM ACCESS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Techniques for transmitting random access signaling for system access are described. In an aspect, random access signaling may be sent based on at least one transmission parameter having different values for different user equipment (UE) classes. At least one parameter value may be determined based on a particular UE class, and the random access signaling may be sent based on the determined parameter value(s). The random access signaling may be a random access preamble, and the at least one transmission parameter may include a target SNR, a backoff time, and/or a power ramp. The random access preamble may then be sent based on a target SNR value, a power ramp value, and/or a backoff time value for the particular UE class. In another aspect, a message for system access may be sent based on a power control correction received in a random access response for the random access preamble. | 12-09-2010 |
20100309878 | MOBILITY ACCESS GATEWAY - A gateway for mobile access includes a foreign agent that receives user profile data and session state data from a home authentication, authorization and accounting (AAA) system of a mobile node, and a dynamic packet filter that performs multi-layer filtering based on the user profile data. The foreign agent transfers a session from a first network to a second network without session interruption, using the session state data, when the mobile node moves from the first network to the second network. The packet filter permits Internet access by the mobile node without passing Internet data requested by the mobile node through the first network. | 12-09-2010 |
20100309879 | ROUTING IN COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - When a connection is established between user terminals in a system supporting the separation of control traffic and user traffic into separate network nodes, the routing of user traffic is optimized by not reserving resources for the user traffic in the home network (H-MSC) of a user terminal if the user terminal is roaming ( | 12-09-2010 |
20100309880 | CONNECTION STATE REPORTING METHOD AND MOBILE TERMINAL USED IN THE METHOD - A technology is disclosed for providing a connection status notifying method and the like that can infer that a new connection will become usable shortly based on a predetermined action, and give notification thereof. The technology includes a step at which a mobile node | 12-09-2010 |
20100309881 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND TUNNEL MANAGEMENT METHOD THEREOF - The present invention relates to a mobile communication system and a tunnel management method thereof. In the tunnel management method, tunnel information update request having a user equipment identifier of the user equipment is received at a serving gateway from a mobility managing device when the user equipment performs handoff. Then, tunnel information is updated by changing address information of data destination for all tunnels having the user equipment identifier. | 12-09-2010 |
20100309882 | HANDOVER METHOD FOR MOBILE WIRELESS NETWORK - Provided is a handover method for a mobile wireless network. The handover method for a mobile wireless network, including: receiving, by a mobile node, information on a new access router by requesting the information necessary for the handover from a previous access router in accordance with a handover initiation; sending a fast binding update message to the previous access router via the new access router by connecting to the new access router; receiving a packet from the new access router; and disconnecting from the previous access router. | 12-09-2010 |
20100309883 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A wireless communication apparatus is provided with a wireless communication unit ( | 12-09-2010 |
20100309884 | Methods for surreptitious manipulation of CDMA 2000 wireless devices - Techniques for generating an interloping beacon which can control the behavior of a target wireless device on a CDMA frequency channel without noticeably altering the behavior of non-target wireless devices which share the frequency channel of the target wireless device's live beacon. The interloping beacon is an override beacon which overrides the live beacon's pilot channel and a control message on a code channel on which control messages may be addressed to the target wireless device. The override beacon provides the overriding pilot and the overriding control message only as long as is required for the target wireless device to respond to the overriding control message. The period of time during which the overriding pilot and the overriding control message are generated for the override beacon is so short that only the target wireless device responds without noticeable effect on collateral wireless devices. | 12-09-2010 |
20100316018 | Network-based handover control mechanism - A method of performing network-based handover control in respect of a mobile node | 12-16-2010 |
20100316019 | METHOD FOR DETECTING A DUPLICATE ADDRESS, MOBILE STATION, NETWORK ELEMENT AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention proposes a method for detecting a duplicate address, a mobile station, a network element for controlling access of a mobile station to a wide area network and a communication network comprising a mobile station and at least two network element, wherein said mobile station is moving from a second access network pertaining to a second network element into a first access network pertaining to a first network element. Said method for detecting a duplicate address comprises: the mobile station sends a request message to the first network element; the first network element, generates and sends a first message to the mobile station upon reception of said request message, said first message designating an explicit address configuration and including prefix information; the mobile station checks out the explicit address configuration, generates an address based on said prefix information and sends a message containing the generated address to the first network element for indicating that the mobile station requires registering the generated address with the first network element; and the first network element creates an entry for the mobile station if the generated address is not found in its address table, or generates and sends a second message to the mobile station for indicating that the generated address is a duplicate address if it is found in its address table and discards data packets with the duplicate address sent from the mobile station. | 12-16-2010 |
20100316020 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE TERMINAL AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication system includes a first base station for communicating complying with a first communication protocol, a second base station for communicating by using radio frames complying with a second communication protocol and transmitting synchronization signals complying with the first communication protocol, the synchronization signals synchronizing the transmitted radio frames, and a mobile terminal for communicating according to the process includes: receiving the synchronization signals from the second base station while communicating with the first base station, estimating transmitting timing of the radio frames including symbols on the basis of the received synchronization signals, measuring a receiving signal strength of the symbol on the basis of the estimated timing, and controlling a handover from the first base station to the second base station on the basis of the measurement result by the measurement of the receiving signal strength of the symbol. | 12-16-2010 |
20100316021 | TECHNIQUE FOR TRANSFERRING DATA BETWEEN AN APPLICATION AND A NETWORK - A technique for transferring data between an application and at least two Radio Access Technology (RAT) modules selectively connectable to a network is described. A device embodiment of this technique comprises a storage adapted to hold data from the application, the data being intended to be transmitted via at least one of the RAT modules. Furthermore, the device comprises a first control mechanism adapted to initiate holding of the data in the storage when the RAT modules assume the same connection state. The connection state is selected from a connected state in which data transmission via the respective RAT is enabled and a disconnected state in which data transmission via the respective RAT is disabled. The device also comprises a second control mechanism adapted to initiate sending of the data held in the storage to the RAT module assuming the connected state when the RAT modules assumed different connection states again. | 12-16-2010 |
20100322185 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR COMPONENT CARRIER SELECTION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present disclosure relates to component carrier (CC) selection in a wireless communication system. A user equipment (UE) that is in idle mode may receive a reference signal (RS) from an evolved Node B (eNB), obtain signal quality measurements with respect to the RS, and switch to a new CC based on the signal quality measurements. For a UE that is in connected mode, an eNB may obtain uplink channel condition information corresponding to uplink CCs, obtain downlink channel condition information corresponding to downlink CCs, and select a CC pair for the UE to use based on the uplink channel condition information and the downlink channel condition information. | 12-23-2010 |
20100322186 | IP HANDOFF METHOD IN MOBILE AGENT PLATFORM ENVIRONMENT - Provided is an Internet protocol (IP) handoff method in a mobile agent platform (MAP). Accordingly, when an IP address of a mobile node (MN) is changed while the MN moves from an MAP to an adjacent MAP, the two MAPs generate border lists so as to share information on the MN, so that it is possible to perform a rapid IP handoff. | 12-23-2010 |
20100322187 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, AND MOBILE STATION - A base station divides a packet into a plurality of wireless transfer blocks, determines a priority of a wireless transfer block based on a delivery acknowledged amount accumulated value, allocates wireless resources to the wireless transfer blocks based on determined priority, and transmits generated wireless transfer blocks by using allocated wireless resources. A mobile station transmits a delivery acknowledgement to the base station when the wireless transfer block is properly received and a re-transmission request when the wireless transfer block is not properly received, and reproduces the packet from received wireless transfer blocks. | 12-23-2010 |
20100322188 | PACKET PRIORITY CONTROL METHOD AND BASE STATION - A handover-source base station transfers a data packet destined to a mobile device received from a base station control device to a handover-destination base station as an inter-base-station transfer packet during a stopping period for which the handover-source base station stops a wireless transmission of a data packet to the mobile device. The handover-destination base station calculates a wireless transmission priority for the inter-base-station transfer packet based on a station retention time in the handover-destination base station and an estimated value of a retention time in the handover-source base station. | 12-23-2010 |
20100322189 | SUPPORTING OPTIMIZED HANDOVER OF A USER EQUIPMENT BETWEEN DISSIMILAR NETWORKS - A method and a mobility management entity (MME) are provided for supporting optimized handover of a user equipment (UE) session between radio access networks (RAN) that may offer different radio access technologies. The MME provides mobility management for the UE session. To support eventual handover tunneling between a first radio network, in which the session is set up, and a second radio network, in which the session may continue, an uplink generic routing encapsulation (GRE) key is reserved upon session set up. The MME requests a packet data gateway (PGW) to allocate and reserve the uplink GRE key, early on in the UE session setup process. Upon handover, the MME provides the reserved key to the second radio network. | 12-23-2010 |
20100322190 | MOBILE TERMINAL IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, TRANSMISSION TIMING ADJUSTMENT APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ADJUSTING TRANSMISSION TIMING - A mobile terminal includes: a detection unit configured to detect reception timing of radio frames transmitted from first and second base stations; and an adjustment unit configured to adjust transmission timing of a radio frame transmitted from the mobile terminal to the first base station so that predetermined relationship between transmission timing of a radio frame transmitted from the first base station to the mobile terminal and the reception timing of a radio frame received by the first base station is satisfied, wherein the adjustment unit adjusts transmission timing of a radio frame transmitted from the mobile terminal to the second base station based on the adjusted transmission timing to the first base station and a difference between the reception timing of a radio frame transmitted from the first base station and the reception timing of a radio frame transmitted from the second base station detected by the detection unit. | 12-23-2010 |
20100322191 | PHYSICAL CHANNEL ESTABLISHMENT - There is disclosed a method of controlling physical channel establishment in a wireless communication system, which method comprises: a.) determining if decoding of a system frame number is required as part of an initialization of a physical channel establishment procedure; b.) if decoding of the system frame number is not required, initializing a decoding of a system frame number for the channel to be established; and c.) if the decoding of the system frame number fails, terminating the channel establishment procedure. | 12-23-2010 |
20100322192 | BASE STATION CONTROLLER AND WIRELESS PACKET PROCESSING DEVICE - Call connection processing is performed and a message is processed in a different subnet without UATI reassignment and takeover of a wireless session. RANs that belong to different subnets and are adjacent to each other use messages to exchange ColorCode, IP addresses of base station controllers, wireless resource information of base station transceiver subsystems and the like. When the RAN receives, from an AT, a message having ColorCode that is different from ColorCode of the RAN, the RAN transfers the message to a base station controller included in the RAN having ColorCode that matches the ColorCode included in the message. | 12-23-2010 |
20100322193 | Mechanisms for Data Handling During a Relay Handover with S1 Termination at Relay - An access node, comprising at least one component configured to support forwarding of data packets to a user agent connected to a relay node, wherein the relay node is a termination point for a first tunneling path from a core network, and wherein the relay node is connected to the access node and the access node is on the first tunneling path. | 12-23-2010 |
20100322194 | Mechanisms for Data Handling During a Relay Handover with S1 Termination at Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network Access Node - An access node comprising at least one component configured to support forwarding of data packets to a user agent connected to a relay node, wherein the relay node is connected to the access node, and wherein the access node is a termination point for a first tunneling path from a core network. | 12-23-2010 |
20100322195 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MAPPING 3GPP SERVICE PRIMITIVES TO MEDIA INDEPENDENT HANDOVER EVENT SERVICES - A Third Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) media independent handover (MIH) service access point (SAP) is configured to provide MIH event services, (e.g., IEEE 802.21 event services), by mapping service primitives to the MIH event services. The service primitives may be 3GPP service primitives which originate from at least one of a radio resources (RR) layer, a logical link control (LLC) layer, a general packet radio service (GPRS) mobility management (GMM) layer, a session management (SM) layer, a non-access stratum (NAS), an access stratum (AS) and an evolved universal terrestrial radio access (E-UTRA)/evolved core network (E-CORE) system. The event services may include a link parameter change event service, a link up event service, a link going down event service, a link down event service, a handover complete event service and a link detected event service. | 12-23-2010 |
20100329205 | SERVICE CONTINUITY DURING OUTBOUND HANDOVER FROM A HOME NETWORK BASE STATION WITH LOCAL INTERNET PROTOCOL ACCESS - A method, a mobile system, and a home network base station are disclosed. A mobile management entity | 12-30-2010 |
20100329206 | DUAL IDLE-TRAFFIC STATE OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A wireless communication device maintains a dual idle-traffic state where the wireless communication device is in an idle state relative to a first transceiver node and is in a traffic state relative to a second transceiver node. First control signals are received from the first transceiver node and second control signals are received from the second transceiver node where the second control signals are different from the first control signals. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329207 | CALL ESTABLISHMENT AND MAINTENANCE IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Techniques to configure quality of service (QoS) and utilize radio resources for a call in a WLAN are described. In an aspect, a station ensures that an access point in the WLAN is suitable for receiving service prior to performing registration to receive services via the WLAN. In another aspect, the station first requests for radio resources for traffic flows, then requests for radio resources for signaling flows, and sends signaling as best effort traffic if radio resources are not granted for the signaling flows. In yet another aspect, the station aggregates QoS for multiple applications and requests for radio resources based on the aggregated QoS. In yet another aspect, the station releases extra radio resources corresponding to the difference between the QoS granted by the WLAN and the QoS proposed by a remote terminal for the call. In yet another aspect, the station requests for the same QoS or lower from a new access point during handoff. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329208 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, GATEWAY, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - The radio communication system of the present invention includes a base station ( | 12-30-2010 |
20100329209 | CONNECTION HANDOVER HANDLING - A method in a server for handling a connection between a mobile communication device and a second communication device, said server being connected to a wireless local area network and a wireless wide area network, said method comprising receiving a signal indicative of a status of the connectivity between said mobile communication device and said wireless local area network; and depending on said connectivity status, controlling a sticky handover process, wherein in a case the connectivity status of the connection between the mobile communication device and the wireless local area network is bad and the mobile communication device is connected to the wireless local area network, handing over the connection from the wireless local area network to said wireless wide area network; and in a case the connectivity status of the connection between the mobile communication device and the wireless local area network is good and the mobile communication device is not connected to the wireless local area network, handing over the connection to the wireless local area network is provided. A device and computer program product thereof is also provided. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329210 | Resource Release At Source System During Handoff to Multi-Radio Access Technology Target System - Aspects describe coordination of resource release on a source system. An aspect relates to a network based coordination. Another aspect relates to a mobile device based coordination. Also provided is a network and mobile device coordinated approach. An un-coordinated approach is also provided. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329211 | Method and Apparatus for Handling Inter-RAT Handover - A method for handling inter-RAT handover in a user equipment (UE) of a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method includes steps of performing a handover procedure to handover the UE from other communication system to the wireless communication system; receiving an RRC Connection Reconfiguration message, and configuring radio link failure timers and constants of the UE according to whether the RRC Connection Reconfiguration message includes an UE specific configuration parameter for the radio link failure timers and constants. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329212 | METHOD OF COMMUNICATING IN WIRELESS NETWORK - The present invention relates to a handover method that a current coordinator transfers a coordinating function of controlling a network to a different device configuring the network. The present invention relates to a method of selecting an optimal device as a coordinator in selecting the different device using priority information decided by a prescribed evaluation reference. And, the present invention relates to a method of simplifying a procedure in a manner of transmitting relevant information together with a handover request message. In a wireless network including a coordinator, a secondary coordinator is decided in advance. If the coordinator is suddenly unable to perform a function, the present invention relates to a method of enabling the function of the coordinator to be performed by the decided secondary coordinator. Thus, a process for transferring the coordinating function without the handover process is called a recovery process. The present invention relates to the recovery method and a method of deciding a secondary coordinator to perform a recovery. In the method of deciding the secondary coordinator, a method of deciding a more proper coordinator using information on coordinator priority is provided. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329213 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION DEVICE, MOVE CONTROL NODE, AND METHOD OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - The wireless communication system of the present invention includes a base station ( | 12-30-2010 |
20100329214 | DATA TRANSFER MANAGEMENT IN A RADIO COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A mobile communications system including a network with a source network node and a target network node that supports a handover procedure, and a mobile terminal that is allowed to access the source network node and access the target network node according to the handover procedure, in which information related to a reception status of user data is delivered between at least two among a group including the mobile terminal, the source network node, and the target network node such that the target network node may receive status information from the source network node and the target network node may receive a status report from the mobile terminal. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329215 | Multi-Beam Cellular Communication System - A cellular communication system comprising a plurality of geographically spaced base stations ( | 12-30-2010 |
20110002295 | INFRASTRUCTURE ASSISTED NETWORK TRANSITION - An infrastructure assisted network transition scheme is provided. In a multi-mode wireless communication device, handover threshold data is received from a management server associated with a first wireless network comprising one or more wireless access points. The multi-mode wireless communication device receives signals from the one or more wireless access point devices of the first wireless network and generates data representing the received signals. The multi-mode wireless communication device analyzes the data representing the received signals with respect to the handover threshold data to determine when the multi-mode wireless communication device should initiate hand-in to the first wireless network and when to initiate hand-out from the first wireless network to the second wireless network. Functions are provided at the management server to enable the generation of the handover threshold data from network configuration information associated with the first wireless network. | 01-06-2011 |
20110002296 | Method and transcoder entity for tandem free operation in a telecommunication network - A method is described for engaging a first transcoder entity in a tandem free operation session with a second transcoder entity. The transcoder entities control the tandem free operation session and the insertion of transcoders into the session. They also perform a synchronization procedure of the first transcoder entity and the second transcoder entity and send tandem free operation frames. The tandem free operation frames are sent from the first transcoder entity to the second transcoder entity during execution of the synchronization procedure. A transcoder entity and a program embodying the invention is also described. | 01-06-2011 |
20110002297 | GATEWAY ASSOCIATION - Embodiments provide components of a communication network that may facilitate efficient optimization of the communication network. In various embodiments, network gateway selection for incoming subscriber stations may be allocated to one or more components that make intelligent allocation determinations. Additionally, in various embodiments, control of the communication network may also be allocated to various components. | 01-06-2011 |
20110002298 | Reducing Overhead in Wireless Communications - Stations in a wireless network may communicate directly using MAC management messages. As examples, servers may communicate using MAC management messages with mobile stations, base stations may communicate using MAC management messages, and relay cells may communicate using MAC management messages. | 01-06-2011 |
20110002299 | HANDOVER FOR CELLULAR RADIO COMMUNICATIONS - An improved handover process is described for a cellular wireless network. In one example, a method includes registering a mobile station to a first base station and a first gateway, handing the mobile station over to a second base station coupled to the first gateway, selecting a second gateway coupled to the mobile station, registering the mobile station to the second gateway, de-registering the mobile station from the first gateway, and handing the mobile station over to a third base station coupled to the second gateway and not coupled to the first gateway. | 01-06-2011 |
20110002300 | METHOD OF PERFORMING HANDOVER AND NETWORK SYSTEM OF ENABLING THE METHOD - A method of performing a handover is provided. The method of performing the handover includes: a mobile terminal transmitting an access stop message to a first Access Point (AP) when the mobile terminal moves from a first AP area to a second AP area; the first AP transmitting a handover start message to a first Mobility Access Gateway (MAG) corresponding to the first AP in response to the access stop message; the first MAG transmitting the handover start message to a Local Mobile Anchor (LMA); and the LMA performing a buffering of a data packet to be transmitted to the mobile terminal. | 01-06-2011 |
20110002301 | Handover in Core-Edge Separation Technology in Wireless Communications - In one embodiment of the invention, a method for wireless communication includes receiving a packet destined to a destination node at a first egress router. The destination node is supported by a second egress router. A destination address of the packet is the first egress router. The received packet is redirected to the second egress router. | 01-06-2011 |
20110002302 | NETWORK HANDOVER METHOD, COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM, AND RELEVANT DEVICES - A network handover method, a communications system, and relevant devices are provided, so as to implement handover between a Wireless Fidelity (WiFi) network and a Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMAX) network. The method specifically includes the following steps. A user terminal determines a target network access point (AP) and acquires a tunnel destination address. A signaling transmission tunnel between the user terminal and the target network AP is established through a current network according to the tunnel destination address. The user terminal executes a network access operation with the target network AP through the signaling transmission tunnel. The communications system and the relevant devices are further provided. Thus, the handover between the WiFi network and the WiMAX network can be implemented. | 01-06-2011 |
20110002303 | RANGING BY MOBILE STATION IN FEMTO SYSTEM - A ranging method in a mobile station of a femto system is disclosed. According to the present invention, a femto base station enables non-synchronized ranging channel (NS-RCH) information to be carried on S-SFH SP | 01-06-2011 |
20110002304 | ENHANCED DELAY MANAGEMENT - A method to facilitate user equipment (UE) handoff within a packet data communication system includes determining, at a source relay node, that the UE is to undergo a handoff from the source relay node to a target entity and sending, by the source relay node, a first request to a network node serving the UE. The sending is performed responsive to the determination that the UE is to undergo the handoff, such that the first request is configured to cause the network gateway node to store packet data addressed to the UE. Further operations include sending, by the target entity, a second request to the network, such that the second request is configured to cause the network to forward the stored packet data to the target entity, and receiving, at the target entity from the network, the stored packet data for wirelessly transmitting to the UE. | 01-06-2011 |
20110002305 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING INTER-RAT HANDOVER - An Inter-RAT handover method is disclosed. A method for supporting an Inter-RAT handover by an IEEE 802.16m MS includes performing, by the MS, pre-registration in an Inter-RAT target BS using a tunneling, if a channel quality of an Inter-RAT neighbor cell is higher than a pre-registration threshold, and transmitting a handover request message for a handover to the target BS to a serving BS, if a channel quality of the neighbor cell is equal to or higher than a handover threshold during a time duration in a scanning of the neighbor cell and a channel quality of the target BS is equal to or higher than that of the neighbor cell. This handover method reduces a time required for a handover from an IEEE 802.16m network to a Non-802.16m network, provides a seamless service, supports a rapid recovery in case of a radio link failure, and increases handover reliability. | 01-06-2011 |
20110002306 | A Bearer Establishing Method and System Based on Handover - The present invention discloses a bearer establishing method and system based on handover, wherein the method comprises: an MME transmits the handover required message to the target base station, and carries aggregate maximum bit rate information, namely AMBR information of the UE in the handover required message. In virtue of the above technical scheme, the AMBR information is transmitted to the target base station through the interface S | 01-06-2011 |
20110007705 | MOBILITY ACCESS GATEWAY - A gateway for mobile access includes a foreign agent that receives user profile data and session state data from a home authentication, authorization and accounting (AAA) system of a mobile node, and a dynamic packet filter that performs multi-layer filtering based on the user profile data. The foreign agent transfers a session from a first network to a second network without session interruption, using the session state data, when the mobile node moves from the first network to the second network. The packet filter permits Internet access by the mobile node without passing Internet data requested by the mobile node through the first network. | 01-13-2011 |
20110007706 | RADIO ACCESS NETWORK (RAN) CAPACITY/RESOURCE DETERMINATION - A device receives code division multiple access (CDMA) capacity/resource information via a first direct interface with a radio network controller (RNC) associated with a CDMA radio access network (RAN), and determines, based on the CDMA capacity/resource information, a capacity associated with the CDMA RAN. The device also determines, based on the CDMA capacity/resource information, a resource availability associated with the CDMA RAN, and determines, based on the capacity and the resource availability associated with the CDMA RAN, a CDMA RAN resource allocation. | 01-13-2011 |
20110007707 | Time-Alignment at Handover - Time-aligned handover for a mobile device is described herein. The time-aligned handover is achieved by determining a time difference between serving and target cells and determining a target propagation delay based on the time difference. In some cases, the target propagation delay may further be determined based on a serving propagation delay between the serving cell and the mobile device. A target transmission time is calculated based on the target propagation delay. The mobile device uses the target transmission time to time align transmissions to the target cell during handover. | 01-13-2011 |
20110007708 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND RADIO BASE STATION - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes the steps of: (A) calculating, at the radio base station (eNB | 01-13-2011 |
20110007709 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, METHOD OF HANDOVER BETWEEN DIFFERENT TYPES OF ACCESS NETWORKS, MOBILE TERMINAL, AND SERVER - Because attachment processing is executed as a trigger of handover between different types of access networks by the Proxy MIP, not only link set-up but also various processing including authentication processing and IP acquisition processing are required to make a handover time longer. | 01-13-2011 |
20110007710 | COMMUNICATION METHOD FOR DETERMINING THE START OF A HANDOVER AND RADIO APPARATUS USING THE METHOD - A notification unit conveys a transmit timing of a signal to a target radio apparatus. A receiver receives the signal transmitted from the target radio apparatus with a neighborhood of the transmit timing conveyed. A demodulation unit derives a difference between the receive timing and an estimated timing. A determining unit determines a new transmit timing for the target radio apparatus, based on the difference and outputs the new transmit timing determined to the notification unit. When a state in which the receive timing lags the estimated receive timing occurs more than a predetermined frequency, the determining unit instructs the target radio apparatus to start a handover. | 01-13-2011 |
20110007711 | Support for Multi-Homing Protocols Using Transient Registration and Expanded Binding Revocation Messages - The present invention solves these problems with a new proxy binding update request and proxy binding acknowledgement messages having new indicators and identification information. Namely, the home agent/local mobility anchor will exchange proxy binding update messages and proxy binding acknowledge messages that include information such as mobile node identification (MN-ID), home network prefix (HNP), but can also include selective information fields such as, access type, handover indicator (HO), and interface identification (interface ID). By including new access type, indicator, and identification information, the local mobility anchor can respond to a binding update request message with a better understanding of the new connectivity request from the mobile node. The invention also includes a binding revocation message with expanded trigger field information sent from the local mobility anchor to the mobile access gateways. | 01-13-2011 |
20110013586 | METHOD FOR LOSSLESS HANDOVER IN VEHICULAR WIRELESS NETWORKS - A lossless handover method in vehicular wireless networks is disclosed which is capable of reducing a handover delay and reducing overhead caused by duplicate address detection (DAD) for a new Care-of-Address (CoA) by dividing a handover process into handover at road-sections and handover at intersections. In the handover method, a vehicle continues to use an original CoA configured at an original access router at road-sections even though an AR is changed, thereby reducing a handover delay. A new CoA is configured only at intersections to reduce a binding update time of a home agent which is remotely present in an external network at road-sections. When performing the DAD for a new CoA at intersections, since the vehicle performs the DAD as a background process while performing communication using an original CoA, overhead caused by the DAD can be reduced. | 01-20-2011 |
20110013587 | INTER-NETWORK HANDOVER SYSTEM AND METHOD - There is described a method of facilitating handover of a user device between a source base station component in a first communications network of a first network type and a target base station component in a second communications network of a second network type. The method includes determining an identifier of at least one target gateway component connected to the target base station component in the second communications network. A handover request message is then generated in the first communications network, the handover request message incorporating the identifier of the at least one target gateway component. The handover request message is then transmitted to the second communications network. Apparatus for performing this and other related methods is also described, for example eNodeB, gateway and user device components. | 01-20-2011 |
20110013588 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SWITCHING FREQUENCY ASSIGNMENT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for FA switching in a wireless communication system are provided. The apparatus includes a base station for broadcasting a neighbor list, which includes a base station identifier, an FA identifier, and a preamble index corresponding to a first FA, and neighbor base station information, to mobile stations that the base station provides a service for, one of, unicasting a scanning indication message for the first FA to each of the mobile stations and broadcasting the scanning indication message to the mobile stations, for temporarily switching a second FA, which is being currently used, to the first FA, for transmitting a preamble signal corresponding to the first FA to the mobile stations by using the FA identifier and the preamble index during a preset scanning time interval, and for switching the second FA to the first FA according to a scanning result received from the mobile stations in response to the scanning indication message. | 01-20-2011 |
20110013589 | Method of Handling Long Term Evaluation Positioning Protocol Data and Related Communication Device - A method of handling long term evaluation positioning protocol (LPP) data for a communication device in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises setting that a first message of a non-access stratum (NAS) layer has higher transmission priority than a second message of a long term evaluation positioning protocol (LPP) layer. | 01-20-2011 |
20110013590 | METHOD FOR HANDOVER OF TERMINAL, NETWORK ELEMENT, BASE STATION, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method for handover of a mobile terminal from a first network to a second network, a network element, a mobile terminal, a base station and a communications system as well as a computer program product and a storage medium. The method comprises the steps of: determining a WDP including an unnecessary handover probability and a missing handover probability according to conditions of the first network and the second network; detecting at least of the following: whether the unnecessary handover probability is greater than the missing handover probability, whether the unnecessary handover probability is greater than a specific threshold and whether the missing handover probability is smaller than a specific threshold; and making a handover decision based on the detection result. The present invention can select a more suitable target network for handover at a more suitable time, thus ensuring the continuity of a mobile user's call. | 01-20-2011 |
20110013591 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, METHOD, PROGRAM, RECORDING MEDIUM, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A wireless communication terminal ( | 01-20-2011 |
20110013592 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION DEVICE, MOBILE STATION DEVICE, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - A mobile communication system includes a mobile station device and a base station device. The base station device includes a cell identification information transmission unit which transmits cell identification information of base station devices transmitting radio signals of the same synchronization channel, to the mobile station device when there are at least two base station devices transmitting radio signals of the same synchronization channel within a predetermined communication area. The mobile station device includes a measurement result transmission unit which performs a measurement process based on the cell identification information of the base station devices and transmits the measurement result acquired by the measurement process to the base station device. | 01-20-2011 |
20110013593 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND RADIO BASE STATION - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes: the steps of: (A) transferring, from a first radio base station (S-eNB) to an upper level node (S-GW), consecutive uplink data received from a mobile station (UE) with their sequence numbers being consecutive, by use of a resource allocated by the upper level node (S-GW), when the first radio base station (S-eNB) determines that the mobile station (UE) is to perform a handover; (B) transmitting, from the first radio base station (S-eNB) to the upper level node (S-GW) transfer completion notification data after the transfer of the consecutive uplink data to the upper level node (S-GW) is completed; and (C) releasing, at the upper level node (S-GW), the resource when receiving the transfer completion notification data. | 01-20-2011 |
20110013594 | Handoff Between Base Stations of Different Protocol Revisions in a CDMA System - Techniques for supporting handoff of a terminal between base stations of different protocol revisions (P_REVs) in a CDMA system. The terminal is handed off from a first base station (with a first P_REV) to a second base station (with a second P_REV) while it is in an active (data or voice) call with the first base station. The second P_REV is later than the first P_REV. The active call may be maintained between the terminal and second base station using a first service configuration previously established via the first base station for the active call. A second service configuration may be established via the second base station for the active call. This may be achieved by ( | 01-20-2011 |
20110013595 | METHOD FOR REDUCING HANDOVER INTERRUPTION TIME IN TERMINAL - A method for reducing handover interruption time in a mobile station is disclosed, in which a mobile station performs a ranging procedure using a dedicated ranging code previously allocated from a target base station. The dedicated ranging code allocated by the target base station may be provided through the serving base station, or may directly be provided from the target base station. | 01-20-2011 |
20110013596 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER TO REDUCE INTERRUPTION TIME - A method for performing handover to reduce an interruption time is disclosed. A method for performing handover using a variable uplink grant time comprises transmitting a handover request message to a base station, receiving a handover response message from the base station, the handover response message including an uplink grant time, and receiving an uplink grant from the base station if the uplink grant time comes, and transmitting a handover indication message to the base station. Thus, an unnecessary interruption time during hard handover can be reduced by efficiently improving use of an action time, and an action suitable for a frame structure of the IEEE 802.16m can be performed. | 01-20-2011 |
20110013597 | METHOD AND ENTITIES FOR INTER-DOMAIN HANDOVER - Aspects of the present invention relate to methods and entities involved in enabling and improving inter-domain handover. A PS based RAN such as eUTRAN can identify which potential handover to prepare and which handover to initiate, PS-PS or SR-VCC based on: (1) the UE's SR-VCC capabilities, (2) “SR-VCC indication” from the MME, (3) active VoIP bearer, and (4) target cell capabilities. | 01-20-2011 |
20110013598 | PERFORMING PROCESSING WITH RESPECT TO AN OVERHEAD MESSAGE FOR A MOBILE STATION IN TUNNEL MODE - A mobile station determines whether the mobile station is receiving an overhead message in tunnel mode during a handover procedure of the mobile station from a source wireless access network to a target wireless network. The source and target wireless access networks are according to different technologies. In response to determining that the mobile station is in the tunnel mode, tunnel mode processing of the overhead message is performed. In response to determining that the mobile station is not in the tunnel mode, different processing of the overhead message is performed. | 01-20-2011 |
20110019638 | Scrambling Code Allocation and Hand-In For Wireless Network Radio Access Points - Techniques are provided herein to allow more than a fixed number of radio access point devices to be deployed within a macro cell. At a controller apparatus, a registration request is received from a radio access point device configured to operate in a wireless network to serve one or more wireless client devices in the wireless network in respective relatively small coverage areas. The registration request comprises a macro cell identifier associated with a macro base station apparatus configured to operate in the wireless network to serve one or more wireless client devices in a relatively large coverage area, a radio access point cell identifier associated with the radio access point device, and a particular primary scrambling code selected for use by the radio access point device. When the particular primary scrambling code is not available for use, methods are provided to allocate it in a shared manner but without degrading handover service. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019639 | Enterprise Level Management in a Multi-Femtocell Network - Aspects of a method and system for enterprise level management in a multi-femtocell network are provided. In this regard, one or more endpoint devices may receive traffic management information from a hybrid network controller for enabling handoff of calls and/or communication sessions among femtocells and/or access points. The received traffic management information may comprise set-up instructions, handoff instructions, transmit power, neighbor list information, signal quality thresholds, frequency assignments, transmission time, code assignments and/or antenna pattern assignments. The endpoint device may control handoffs between a communication device external to the communication system and the femtocells, access points and/or end-point devices. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019640 | MOBILE NODE, TAKE-OVER POINT OF ATTACHMENT AND HANDOVER METHOD THEREOF FOR USE IN A HETEROGENEOUS WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEM - A mobile node (MN), a take-over point of attachment (PoA) and handover methods thereof for use in a heterogeneous wireless network system are provided. The heterogeneous wireless network system comprises a gateway, a first wireless network and a second wireless network which is heterogeneous to the first wireless network. The first wireless network and the second wireless network comprise the take-over PoA and an original PoA respectively. The take-over PoA and the original PoA have an overlapping service area. The MN receives a network service from the gateway via the original PoA so far. As soon as the MN enters the overlap service area, the MN builds a link with the take-over PoA in the data-link layer immediately so that the original PoA may handover to the take-over PoA without interrupting the network service. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019641 | MOBILE NODE, WiMAX BASE STATION, Wi-Fi ACCESS POINT AND HANDOVER METHOD THEREOF FOR USE IN A HETEROGENEOUS WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEM - A mobile node (MN), a WiMAX base station (BS), a Wi-Fi access point (AP) and a handover method therefore, for use in a heterogeneous wireless network system, are provided. The heterogeneous wireless network system comprises a gateway. The WiMAX BS and the Wi-Fi AP can interchange messages with each other via the gateway. There is an overlap service area between the WiMAX BS and the Wi-Fi AP. The MN accepts a network service, which is provided by the gateway, via the WiMAX BS. When the MN enters the overlap service area, it may handover to the Wi-Fi AP without interrupting the network service so that the gateway may provide the network service for the MN via the Wi-Fi AP. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019642 | HANDOVER CONTROLLING METHOD, RADIO BASE STATION, AND MOBILE STATION - A radio base station ( | 01-27-2011 |
20110019643 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDOVER IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for minimizing data forwarding between Evolved Node Bs (ENBs) during handover. A User Equipment (UE) sends a status report for RLC PDUs that have suffered a change in status, to an ENB of a source cell immediately before handover occurs, thus preventing RLC PDUs which have been successfully transmitted, but for which ACK signals have not yet been received, from being forwarded. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019644 | METHOD FOR SWITCHING SESSION OF USER EQUIPMENT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND SYSTEM EMPLOYING THE SAME - A system and method for switching a session of a User Equipment (UE) in a wireless communication system are provided. According to the method, if the UE performs a handover from a macro base station of a macro cell to a femto base station of a femto cell, a femto base station transmits a path switch request message, which includes a serving gateway relocation Information Element (IE), to a Mobility Management Entity (MME) of the macro cell, in order to request a switching from an existing session of the UE to a new session managed by the femto base station. Then, in response to the path switch request message, the MME switches the existing session of the UE to the new session and transmits a path switch approval message to the femto base station. The serving gateway relocation IE includes information requesting relocation of a serving gateway of the UE to a femto serving gateway within the femto cell. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019645 | METHOD OF EXCHANGING MESSAGE AND DEVICES IN WIRELESS NETWORK - A method of exchanging messages at a device in a wireless network comprises transmitting a change request message for requesting a change of a beacon position among configuration parameters of the wireless network to a coordinator; and receiving a response message in response to the request message from the coordinator. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019646 | METHOD OF EXCHANGING MESSAGE AND DEVICES IN WIRELESS NETWORK - A method of exchanging messages at a device in a wireless network comprises transmitting a change request message for requesting a change of a beacon position among configuration parameters of the wireless network to a coordinator; and receiving a response message in response to the request message from the coordinator. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019647 | COMMUNICATION SERVICE HANDOVER SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION SERVICE HANDOVER METHOD - To achieve communication service handover in which a communication service used by a user by a certain device can be continuously used by another device, without adding functions on a network side. The system at least has: a service providing means for providing user with service; a move management means for managing move of client on the server side; a means installed in a device A for generating a file access log by a process; a means for determining a process to be handed over by user specification; a means for stopping a process and the like; a means for closing a socket and the like; a means for transmitting necessary data to a device B; a means for requesting the device B to update a socket; a means for transmitting, on a client side, a position registration message to the move management means; a means for constructing a session to use service with the service providing means; a file generation means for generating a file handled by the process; a means for communicating with outside of the device; a means installed in the device B for controlling the process; a file update means for applying a file received from the device A; a means for applying socket information received from the device A; a means for transmitting, on the client side, a position registration message; and a means for communicating with outside of the device. | 01-27-2011 |
20110026484 | MOBILITY MANAGEMENT IN TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A mobile telecommunications network includes a core network and a plurality of eNode Bs. A mobile terminal communicates with the core network via one of the eNode Bs. In an embodiment, when the mobile terminal is in a connected state and there is a pause in data transfer, during which the mobile terminal is handed over from one eNode B to another eNode B, the first eNode B informs the new eNode B of the pause in data transmission so that an optimal length of the pause in data transmission can be maintained before the idle state is entered. In another embodiment, an element of the telecommunications network stores a history of movement of the mobile terminal and passes this to a new eNode B. In another embodiment, when handover occurs, the first eNode B provides the new eNode B with radio quality information relating to the mobile terminal. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026485 | MOBILE STATION HANDOFF WITH FLEX DUPLEX CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Disclosed is a method for mobile station hard handoff from a source base station to a target base station of a Flex Duplex call in a CDMA wireless communication network that includes a step of establishing Flex Duplex capabilities of the mobile station. A next step includes sending the Flex Duplex capabilities of the mobile station to the target base station. A next step includes configuring the mobile station and the target base station for the handoff of the call using the Flex Duplex capabilities. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026486 | LOCATION INFORMATION ACQUISITION METHOD AND MOBILE STATION - Provided is a mobile communication method including: a step in which a first radio base station S-eNB transmits a handover instruction which instructs a mobile station UE performing communication via a first cell under control of a first radio base station SeNB, so as to perform a handover to a second cell under control of a second radio base station TeNB; a step in which the mobile station UE performs a handover from the first cell to the second cell in accordance with the handover instruction; a step in which the mobile station UE acquires a global cell ID which can uniquely identify a second cell in at least one mobile communication system; and a step in which the mobile station UE reports a global cell ID which can uniquely identify the acquired second cell, to a position information management server. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026487 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING A MESH NETWORK USING A PLURALITY OF WIRELESS ACCESS POINTS (WAPs) - A first access point located in a first cell may be coupled to a second access point located in a second cell. Service may be initially provided to an access device by the first access point cell. The access device may subsequently be serviced by a second access point whenever a signal for the access device falls below a specified threshold level. The second cell may be a neighboring cell, which may be located adjacent to the first cell. A first signal may be transmitted from a first beamforming antenna coupled to the first access point, to the second access point via an uplink channel. Similarly, a second signal may be transmitted from a second beamforming antenna coupled to the second access point, to the first access point via a downlink channel. The uplink and downlink channels may be a backhaul channel. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026488 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR ACHIEVING ROUTE OPTIMIZATION AND LOCATION PRIVACY IN AN IPV6 NETWORK - Methods and apparatus for performing proxy registration on behalf of a node with a Home Agent supporting Mobile IP are disclosed. A first registration request is composed on behalf of the node and transmitted to the Home Agent via a first Local Mobility Anchor, wherein the first Local Mobility Anchor is a regional controller via which registration is performed when the node moves within a region associated with the first Local Mobility Anchor. When the node moves within a region or between regions, the node is re-registered. Specifically, a second registration request is composed and transmitted to the first Local Mobility Anchor when the node moves within the region associated with the first Local Mobility Anchor. When the node moves into a second region associated with a second Local Mobility Anchor and outside the first region associated with the first Local Mobility Anchor, a second registration request is composed and transmitted to the Home Agent via the second Local Mobility Anchor, wherein the second Local Mobility Anchor is a regional controller via which registration is performed when the node moves within a region associated with second first Local Mobility Anchor. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026489 | OPTIMIZED DATA RECONNECT - A method of optimizing reconnection of a point to point protocol link layer in a mobile device comprising the steps of: monitoring whether the mobile device has entered a new zone; starting a stabilization period when the mobile device enters a new zone; checking whether the mobile device enters a different zone during the stabilization period; if the mobile device enters a different zone during the stabilization period, restarting the stabilization period and performing the checking step; and if the mobile device does not enter a new zone during the stabilization period, determining whether the mobile device is in a new zone, reconnecting to the new zone if the mobile device is in the new zone, and otherwise performing no reconnection. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026490 | METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING AND RADIO STATION THEREFOR - The present invention relates to method for communicating between a primary station and a secondary station comprising (a) at the secondary station, upon arrival of a data packet to be transmitted to the primary station, buffering said data packet in a buffer, and transmitting to the primary station a request for an uplink transmission resource if a request condition is satisfied, said request condition being based on at least one previous grant of uplink transmission resource, (b) at the primary station, granting to the secondary station an uplink transmission resource to be used. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026491 | ALLOCATION METHOD AND BASE STATION APPARATUS USING THE SAME - A base station apparatus and an allocation method are provided. The base station apparatus includes an allocation unit and a communication unit. The allocation unit allocates, in a frame, different channels for data between a base station apparatus and a terminal device and control information about the data, the frame formed with a plurality of time slots being time-multiplexed, each time slot formed with a plurality of channels being frequency-multiplexed. The communication unit performs communication with the terminal device by using the control information and the data, to which a channel is allocated. The allocation unit, while securing at least the control information, releases at least one data which is not secured, and instructs the terminal device to perform handover process by using a time slot, in which no data is allocated. | 02-03-2011 |
20110026492 | Method and Arrangement for Handling Handover Related Parameters in a Mobile Communications Network - The invention relates to methods and arrangements for handling handover-related parameters. A radio base station of a mobile communications network is arranged to serve at least a first cell, and to make handover decisions based on handover-related parameters. The radio base station comprises means for receiving handover related feedback from a radio base station serving a second cell after handover of a UE from said first cell to said second cell; means for using the handover related feedback received from the base station serving said second cell to adjust the handover-related parameters; and further by means for sending handover related feedback to a radio base station serving a second or another cell after handover of a UE to said first cell from said second or another cell. | 02-03-2011 |
20110032901 | System and Method for Communication Handoff - A system and method for performing a handoff is presented. A preferred embodiment comprises initiating a pre-handoff registration of a piece of user equipment prior to the actual handoff in order to pre-register the piece of user equipment with the new access network. During the handoff a tunnel may be created from the original access network to the new access network in order to tunnel data packets that would otherwise have been lost prior to the completion of the handoff. | 02-10-2011 |
20110032902 | METHOD FOR DISPLAYING NETWORK NAME IN MOBILE TERMINAL AND SYSTEM THEREOF - A system and method for displaying a network name in a mobile terminal that can receive a message regarding a network name from a base station during a camp-on procedure of the portable terminal. The method for displaying a network name in a mobile terminal preferably includes receiving a specific message with a network name from a base station during a camp-on procedure; analyzing a field of the specific message to extract the network name; and displaying the extracted network name on an idle screen. | 02-10-2011 |
20110032903 | CONNECTION INITIATION IN WIRELESS NETWORKS INCLUDING LOAD BALANCING - Disclosed embodiments include a method for establishing a wireless communication session between a base station unit and a mobile unit wherein a system controller determines which base station unit of multiple base station units is an optimal base station unit to establish the session. The method includes the system controller receiving commands from each of multiple BSUs that have received a request for wireless service from a mobile unit. The commands include information, such as a unique identifier for the sending BSU, signal strength information for the sending BSU, and channel availability for the sending BSU. The system controller directs the optimal BSU to respond to the request, and directs every other BSU to ignore the request. In at least one embodiment, Bluetooth commands are used. | 02-10-2011 |
20110032904 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO CONTROL HANDOFF BETWEEN DIFFERENT WIRELESS SYSTEMS - A wireless communications network includes a first base station system that performs wireless communications according to a first protocol (e.g., 1xEV-DO protocol) and a second base station system that performs wireless communications according to a second, different protocol (e.g., IS-2000). A link is provided between the first and second base station systems to enable a network-initiated handoff procedure. If a source base station system detects that a handoff of a mobile station to a target base station system is required, the source base station system exchanges messaging over the link with the target base station system to perform the handoff. In one example, the handoff is a hard handoff. | 02-10-2011 |
20110032905 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND MOBILE STATION PERFORMING DIVERSITY HANDOVER - A mobile station for communicating with base stations simultaneously in diversity handover. The mobile station monitors radio condition quality corresponding to a plurality of branches, selects one or more addition branch candidates based on the monitored radio condition quality. The mobile station arranges the addition branch candidates in order of the monitored radio condition quality; notifies a center of information on said plurality of branches including said addition branch candidates, the addition branch candidates being notified in the arranged order. Alternatively, the mobile station obtains a relative value of each of the addition branch candidates indicative of order of precedence to be used for the diversity handover based on the monitored radio condition quality of said addition branch candidates; and notifies a center of information on said plurality of branches including said addition branch candidates and their relative values. | 02-10-2011 |
20110032906 | Correlating Communication Sessions - The present invention relates to a session handling entity in a communication system, the session handling entity (S-CSCF) maintain a relationship between at least one public user identity, at least one private user identity and at least one contact address of a user of a communication system. Then receives from a subscription entity an indication of a correlation identity associated with the user, and stores the indication of the correlation identity as part of the relationship maintained by the maintaining means. When a session request of the user is received, determining the correlation identity for the user based on a contact address of the user included in the session request and the indication of a correlation identity associated with the user take place, and the correlation identity is included in the session request. | 02-10-2011 |
20110032907 | Mobile Communication System, Base Station Device and Channel Allocation Method - A base station sends to a target base station a switching request which contains a time slot used in communication with a mobile station. The base station allocates to the mobile station at least one idle communication channel included in time slots different from the time slot contained in the switching request received from the base station. | 02-10-2011 |
20110038347 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS OF MAINTAINING CORE NETWORK STATUS DURING SERVING RADIO NETWORK SUBSYSTEM RELOCATION - A system and method enable wireless user equipment (UE) to undergo a serving radio network subsystem (SRNS) relocation to a radio network controller (RNC) that does not support a fast dormancy feature while maintaining synchronization with the packet-switched domain of the core network. The UE is made aware of whether the target RNC supports the fast dormancy feature by way of an indication provided to the UE in a reconfiguration message provided by the source RNC, that is, the RNC to which the UE was connected prior to the SRNS relocation. In this way, the UE can behave accordingly whether or not the target RNC supports the fast dormancy feature. | 02-17-2011 |
20110038348 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING DISCONTINUOUS RECEPTION - Methods and apparatus for controlling discontinuous reception (DRX) in mobile devices are disclosed. An example method for controlling discontinuous reception includes entering a packet transfer mode, receiving a network message that indicates that the mobile station is to utilize an optimized DRX mode, and entering DRX mode immediately upon leaving packet transfer mode. | 02-17-2011 |
20110038349 | Multiple Simultaneous Wireless Connections In A Wireless Local Area Network - Multiple simultaneous associations with Wireless Access Points (WAPs) may be formed by a given wireless client to enable handoffs between the WAPs to be accelerated and, optionally, to enable both WAPs to provide simultaneous wireless services to the wireless client. Upon forming a primary association with one WAP the wireless client scans for beacon signals from other WAPs. Upon detecting another WAP, the wireless client transmits a Request To Send (RTS) message to the new WAP indicating the identity of the primary WAP. The wireless client may also identify the new WAP to the primary WAP using a RTS message. The primary and secondary WAPs exchange information so that, in the event of a handoff, the required information has already been shared with the new WAP. Optionally, the several WAPs may provide simultaneous service to the wireless client. | 02-17-2011 |
20110038350 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR RF HANDOFF IN A MULTI-FREQUENCY NETWORK - Methods and apparatus for RF handoff in a multi-frequency network include selecting an RF channel from wide and local seamless and partially seamless handoff tables. A method includes generating seamless and partially seamless handoff tables RF channels, and selecting an RF channel for a handoff so that RF channels with common wide content are given higher priority over RF channels with common local content. | 02-17-2011 |
20110038351 | Mobile Station Device and Transmission Power Control Method - A mobile station which performs a handover from a base station to a base station calculates the transmission loss of a broadcast control channel sent from the target base station, and corrects the transmission power of an uplink ANCH to the target base station, based on a known base station desired receive power and the calculated transmission loss. Alternatively, the mobile station may correct the transmission power of the uplink ANCH to the target base station, based on the transmission power of an uplink signal to the serving base station, the transmission loss of a downlink signal sent from the serving base station, and the transmission loss of a broadcast control channel sent from the target base station. | 02-17-2011 |
20110038352 | TTI BUNDLING INDICATION TO NON-SERVING BASE STATION - The technology applies to a cellular radio communication system in which a mobile radio terminal transmits information in transmission time intervals (TTIs) that is received by a serving base station and by one or more non-serving base stations. A number N of hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) transmissions transmitted together by the mobile terminal is determined. An HARQ transmission includes a first transmission, one or more retransmissions of the first transmission, or both. An indication of the number N of HARQ transmissions is provided either directly or indirectly to the one or more non-serving base stations so that the one or more non-serving base stations can take the number N into account when combining HARQ transmissions received from the mobile terminal. | 02-17-2011 |
20110044283 | METHOD OF COLLECTING PER-USER PERFORMANCE DATA - The present invention provides a method for implementation in a wireless communication system including a plurality of base stations, a plurality of gateways, and a plurality of mobility management entities. The method includes receiving, at a first mobility management entity and from a first base station, measurement data collected by the first base station for a first mobile unit having a connection to the wireless communication system via the first base station. The measurement data includes a temporary identifier associated with the first mobile unit for the duration of the connection. The method also includes identifying the first mobile unit using the temporary identifier and forming a first record associated with the first mobile unit. The first record includes the measurement data collected by the first base station for the first mobile unit and previously collected measurement data for the first mobile unit. | 02-24-2011 |
20110044284 | Energy-Saving Mechanisms in a Heterogeneous Radio Communication Network - There is provided support mechanisms for at least one adding and removing a cell from operation in a heterogeneous radio network having a first type of basic cell for providing basic radio coverage and a second type of cell associated to a basic cell as a capacity enhancing cell. A capacity enhancing cell is selectively switched on and off (S | 02-24-2011 |
20110044285 | Apparatus and method for handover optimization in broadband wireless communication system - A method and apparatus optimize handover optimization in a broadband wireless communication system. Operations of a base station includes determining whether at least one of a plurality of time intervals included in a total time taken by handover, exceeds a threshold time. Whether to advance or delay a handover point is determined based on which at least one of the time interval exceeds the threshold time. And at least one handover parameter is changed to advance or delay the handover point. | 02-24-2011 |
20110044286 | ATTACHMENT INDICATOR FOR HANDOVER BETWEEN HETEROGENOUS NETWORKS - In some embodiments a method comprises receiving, in a WiMAX Signaling forwarding function (SFF) node, a preregistration request for a mobile station, in response to the preregistration request, generating a flag to indicate whether the request is being processed by the WiMAX Signaling forwarding function node, and forwarding a preattachment request from the WiMAX Signaling forwarding function node to an access gateway, wherein the preattachment request comprises the flag. Other embodiments may be described. | 02-24-2011 |
20110044287 | METHOD FOR REDUCING HANDOVER LATENCY - The present invention relates to a handover procedure, and more particularly, to a method of reducing latency in performing handover using fast ranging. The present invention includes the steps of receiving a handover message including a specific ranging code and uplink resource information from a serving base station and transmitting the specific ranging code to a target base station using the uplink information. | 02-24-2011 |
20110044288 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - In order to perform handover from a first wireless communication network to a second wireless communication network, a handover control unit obtains a handover preparation time to handover, and by receiving data via the first wireless communication network and the second wireless communication network separately obtains a delay time difference between the networks based on reception times of the same data. Based on such information obtained and an amount of the data in a jitter buffer at a point to determine to start handover preparation, the handover control unit controls a reproduction speed of an application being executed. Thereby, it is possible to perform handover to a different wireless communication network without deteriorating reproduction quality and real-time property and causing packet loss. | 02-24-2011 |
20110044289 | VOICE SYNCHRONIZATION DURING CALL HANDOFF - A method, mobile electronic device and system for synchronizing hand-off of a voice media session between a WAN/cellular network and a WLAN network. When a hand-off occurs, the connection with both networks is temporarily maintained and the voice data on both connections compared to determine differences in the delays experienced over both connections. The timing of one or both voice streams is adjusted to synchronize the voice streams, and then the handoff is completed. | 02-24-2011 |
20110051682 | Assignment and Handover in a Radio Communication Network - A network entity for a radio communication network includes a processing unit which causes a first resource and a second resource for a terrestrial interface of the radio network to be seized, where the first resource is distinct and different from the second resource. The entity includes a network interface through which a handover request or an assignment request message identifying the first and the second resource is sent. A network entity for a radio communication network includes a network interface which receives a handover request message or an assignment request message identifying a first resource and a second resource. The first resource is distinct and different from the second resource. The entity includes a processing unit that selects one of the first and second resources, allocates a radio channel associated with the handover or assignment, selects a bearer for a terrestrial interface and seizes resources for the interface. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051683 | INTER-TECHNOLOGY HANDOVERS FOR WIRELESS NETWORKS - Systems and methods for improved inter-technology handovers between wireless networks are disclosed, in which a source radio access network operates on a first technology and a target radio access network operates on a second technology, and both radio access networks are managed at a single packet serving gateway. A foreign agent receives a mobile subscriber identifier during a handover of a mobile device from the source radio access network to the target radio access network and sends the mobile subscriber identifier to the packet serving gateway, and the packet serving gateway locates at least one process instance running on the packet serving gateway that is routing existing packet flows to the mobile device based on the mobile subscriber identifier. The packet serving gateway then transfers control of the at least one process to a control process. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051684 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO SUPPORT COORDINATED INTERFERENCE MITIGATION IN MULTI-TIER NETWORKS - For use in a wireless network, a femtocell base station in communication with at least one first mobile station is provided. The femtocell base station is configured adjust a resource of the femtocell base station to mitigate interference at a second mobile station. In certain embodiments, the femtocell base station is configured to coordinate a handover of the at least one first mobile station from the femtocell base station to a neighboring base station. In certain embodiments, the femtocell base station is configured to transmit a message regarding the resource adjustment to the at least one first mobile station. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051685 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A radio communication system includes: a first base station for communicating with a mobile station in a first area; and a second base station for communicating with the mobile station in a second area; the first base station including: a first receiving unit for receiving connection control information from the second station; a first setup unit for generating scheduling information; and a first transmitting unit for transmitting the generated scheduling information to the second base station and for transmitting the data decided to send to the mobile station on the basis of the scheduling information; the second base station including: a second transmitting unit for transmitting the connection control information and for transmitting the data decided to send to the mobile station on the basis of the scheduling information; and a second receiving unit for receiving the scheduling information from the first base station. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051686 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF PERFORMING HANDOVER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of performing a handover procedure of a handover performing apparatus in a wireless communication system in which a macro base station and a femto base station coexist is provided. The method of performing the handover procedure of the handover performing apparatus includes detecting an uplink signal transmitted from a terminal to the macro base station, sending a report message including information about the uplink signal to the macro base station, and performing the handover procedure with the terminal when the macro base station triggers handover based on the report message. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051687 | COMMUNICATION METHOD AND TERMINAL APPARATUS USING THE SAME - A radio unit and other units communicate with a base station apparatus. The radio unit and other units are capable of performing multiple types of communications. An acquisition unit acquires communication quality and moving speed. A determination unit determines the execution of a handover based on acquired quality and moving speed. The determination unit specifies, from among acquired quality and moving speed, a parameter used to determine the execution of a handover, based on the type of performed communication. An instruction unit instructs the radio unit and other units to perform a handover. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051688 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ALLOCATING RANGING CHANNEL FOR SYNCHRONIZED MOBILE STATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for allocating a ranging channel for a synchronized mobile station in a wireless communication system is provided. A base station (BS) allocates the ranging channel for the synchronized mobile station in a first subframe and a first subband. An index of the first subframe and an index of the first subband are determined respectively based on an index of a second subframe and an index of a second subband in which a ranging channel of a non-synchronized mobile station is allocated. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051689 | Method for Reserving the Network Address During a Vertical Handover - A method for allocating the same network address to a first network interface and to a second network interface of a host is described. The method includes connecting the host to a first network (RANI) via the first network interface and connecting the host to a second network (RAN | 03-03-2011 |
20110051690 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, TERMINAL, RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A radio communication system includes a terminal and a base station that reports power information in the base station to the terminal. The terminal includes a prediction unit that, at the time of handover, predicts the timing at which power information is to be reported next based on the report period for reporting power information by the base station, and a switching unit that, at the time of handover, carries out switching to a handover target base station before the timing that was predicted. | 03-03-2011 |
20110051691 | CIRCUIT SWITCHED DOMAIN CODEC LIST FOR SINGLE RADIO VOICE CALL CONTINUITY - A Circuit Switched (CS) domain codec list for Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SR-VCC) is provided An apparatus providing such a list can include prepaπing a list of circuit switched capabilities of a terminal device, sending the list to a network device dunng attachment, receiving the list at the network device, stoπing the list in the network device, sending the list to a second network device, receiving the list at the second network device, and using the list in handing over the terminal device to the second network device. | 03-03-2011 |
20110058529 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE STATION APPARATUS, BASE STATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A mobile station apparatus acquires handover information when a handover instruction message is received and continues a reception process in a source cell until handover execution time when the handover is determined to be a synchronous handover. When it is handover execution time, the mobile station apparatus follows handover information to perform cell switch control and starts a downlink synchronization establishment process for a target cell. When downlink synchronization establishment has succeeded before the expiration of a handover protection time and when the mobile station apparatus determines that downlink synchronization establishment has succeeded within a downlink synchronization establishment expected time, the mobile station apparatus determines that uplink synchronization establishment is not necessary for the target cell and executes a synchronous handover process that does not require random access. On the other hand, when determining that the downlink synchronization establishment has not succeeded, the mobile station apparatus determines that uplink synchronization establishment is necessary for the target cell and executes a handover process that requires random access transmission. | 03-10-2011 |
20110058530 | System and method for supporting robust header compression in wireless communication system - A system and method support robust header compression (ROHC) for a mobile station (MS) handover in a wireless communication system. If a mobile station (MS) accesses a base station (BS) controlled by the ASN-GW through a handover, ROHC parameter information is received from a previous ASN-GW controlling a previous BS accessed by the MS before the handover. An ROHC parameter for ROHC-based communication with the MS is determined on the basis of the ROHC parameter information received from the previous ASN-GW. The determined ROHC parameter is transmitted to the MS by using a path modification request message for an ROHC service flow. | 03-10-2011 |
20110058531 | SINGLE RADIO WIMAX INTERWORKING - In some embodiments a method comprises establishing a layer 2 tunnel between a mobile station coupled to a E-UTRAN and a WiMAX base station, implementing a first signaling interface through the layer 2 tunnel between a mobility management entity (MME) and the WiMAX base station, and preregistering the mobile station with the WiMAX access service network gateway at least in part via the layer 2 tunnel. Other embodiments may be described. | 03-10-2011 |
20110058532 | HANDOFFS IN A HIERARCHICAL MOBILITY LABEL-BASED NETWORK - A system establishes a communication path between a mobile node and a first label edge router, registers the mobile node at the first label edge router, and creates a mobility binding at the first label edge router. The system also establishes a label switched path between the first label edge router and a second label edge router by propagating the mobility binding in the system, and establishes communication between the mobile node and a corresponding node over the label switched path. The system further maintains the communication between the mobile node and the corresponding node over the system when the mobile node moves from one physical location to another physical location and causes a handoff of the mobile node between two layer 2 grooming networks. | 03-10-2011 |
20110058533 | METHOD OF ALLOCATING RESOURCE AND METHOD OF FORMING RANGING CHANNEL - An access point allocates a resource for ranging to an access terminal included therein, and receives a ranging channel that includes an identifier of the access terminal and a plurality of pilots. The AP checks the access terminal by using the received identifier, and measures a round trip delay of the access terminal based on the received pilots. | 03-10-2011 |
20110064046 | User plane emergency location continuity for voice over internet protocol (VoIP)/IMS emergency services - Continuity of location information relating to an IMS emergency call during their IMS emergency call is maintained by triggering, during an IMS emergency call, a request to a location service based on an occurrence of a handover of an IMS emergency calling mobile device. A physical user plane location server initiates a user plane positioning request, and an updated location of the IMS emergency call is obtained during the IMS emergency call but after the handover. Updated location information relating to an IMS emergency caller is kept track of during IMS handover during their IMS emergency call by mapping access network information relating to a mobile IMS emergency calling device. Coverage information relating to a plurality of location servers is maintained, and a currently serving location server is associated with an updated location of the IMS emergency caller as the IMS emergency caller changes location during an IMS emergency call. | 03-17-2011 |
20110064047 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSFERRING A COMMUNICATION SESSION BETWEEN DATA SOURCES - To transfer a communication session from a first data source to a second data source, the following operations are carried out when a radio terminal is handed over from a first base station to a second base station: the session settings and status information related to the communication session are transferred ( | 03-17-2011 |
20110064048 | Wireless Terminal, Wireless Base Station and Communication Method in Wireless Communication System - In a wireless communication system, time point information is transmitted from a second wireless base station. The time point information indicates a time point at which service information is transmitted from the second wireless base station. Moreover, at the time point indicated by the time point information, the service information is transmitted from the second wireless base station. On the wireless terminal side, firstly, the time point information is obtained in a first non-communication period in which communication with the first wireless base station is temporarily stopped. Then, the service information is obtained in a second non-communication period which is ensured in accordance with the time point indicated by the time point information. | 03-17-2011 |
20110064049 | METHOD OF HANDOVER BETWEEN COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND BROADCAST NETWORK FOR PROVIDING BROADCAST CONTENT, COMMUNICATION NETWORK HANDOVER CONTROLLER, AND BROADCAST NETWORK HANDOVER CONTROLLER - Provided is a method for performing handover between a communication network and a broadcast network by a handover controller of a first network corresponding to either the communication network or the broadcast network. The method for performing handover includes: searching for a second network capable of providing the same broadcast content broadcasted over the first network; performing a handover preparation procedure between the communication network and the broadcast network with a handover controller of the second network; delivering the broadcast content broadcasted over the first network to the handover controller of the second network; and sending a message requesting a terminal to watch, over the second network, the broadcast content broadcasted over the first network. | 03-17-2011 |
20110064050 | BROADCAST SERVICE HANDOVER - A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) may receive a broadcast service via a broadcast system. The broadcast service may be handed over from the broadcast system to a second broadcast system, and the WTRU may receive the broadcast service via the second broadcast system. The WTRU and/or the broadcast system may change broadcast service configuration parameters (such as video encapsulation format, video codec, frame rate, audio codec) to receive and/or display broadcast service data received via the second broadcast system. Additionally, a WTRU may receive a broadcast service via a broadcast system that includes more than one broadcast transmission network. The broadcast service may be handed over from a first broadcast transmission network in the broadcast system to a second broadcast transmission network in the broadcast system. The WTRU may change broadcast service configuration parameters to receive and/or display broadcast service data received via the second broadcast transmission network. | 03-17-2011 |
20110064051 | CLUSTERED MULTI-CELL MULTI-USER MULTIPLE INPUT MULTIPLE OUTPUT COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING CELL-EDGE USER SELECTION SCHEME - Provided is a control method of a control apparatus for a multi-cell communication system including a plurality of cells, the method including determining a cell edge terminal or an inner cell terminal from each of terminals included in each of the cells, and selecting, from base stations included in the plurality of cells, a first base station and a second base station. The first base station may serve all of a corresponding cell edge terminal and a corresponding inner cell terminal, and the second base station may serve only the corresponding inner cell terminal between the corresponding cell edge terminal and the corresponding inner cell terminal. | 03-17-2011 |
20110064052 | CELL RESELECTION METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PACKET DATA SERVICE IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A cell reselection method and apparatus for a packet data service in a mobile communication terminal are provided. The cell reselection method for the packet data service in the mobile communication terminal includes if a Circuit Switch (CS) call ends, determining whether the ended call is a CS fallback call, if it is determined that the ended call is the CS fallback call, determining whether an accessible Evolved Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN) cell exists by measuring signals received from neighbor cells, and reselecting the accessible E-UTRAN cell. | 03-17-2011 |
20110064053 | HANDOVER MANAGEMENT METHOD IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a handover management method that can reduce a service interruption time due to handover of a mobile station in a wideband wireless access system. A handover management method according to an exemplary embodiment of the present invention includes receiving a handover request message from a serving base station, transmitting a handover response message that includes a basic channel identifier to be allocated to a mobile station, receiving a ranging request message from the mobile station using the basic channel identifier, and using the basic channel identifier to start uplink/downlink communication with the mobile station. | 03-17-2011 |
20110064054 | Method and System for Maintaining Multiple PDN Network Connection During Inter-Technology Handover in Idle Mode - The present invention provides a method and system for supporting an optimized an idle mode handoff of user equipment from a 3GPP (EUTRAN) to a non-3GPP system (HRPD, cdma2000) where the user equipment washes to maintain connectivity with multiple PDN networks. Namely, during an idle mode registration of the user equipment with the non-3GPP system, the user equipment will provide an indication to the access node on the non-3GPP system so that the access point in that non-3GPP system contacts the appropriate entity (HSS or AAA) on the home network for the user equipment to download the addresses of the multiple PDN gateway addresses that are currently in use by the user equipment. This indication to the non-3GPP access node, the contact message from the access node to the home network, and the response from the home network to the access node on the non-3GPP system are novel features that are not shown in the prior art, and provide the access node with sufficient information to maintain multiple PDN connectivity to the user equipment during an idle mode handover. | 03-17-2011 |
20110064055 | HANDOFF METHOD IN FMIPV6 FOR SEAMLESS TCP PACKET TRANSMISSIONS - A handoff apparatus and method in FMIPv6 for seamless TCP packet transmissions. The handoff method includes steps of intercepting by a previous access router certain TCP packets sent from a correspondent node to a previous temporary address of a mobile node; and creating a TCP ACK by the previous access router in response to the certain TCP packets and sending by the previous access router the created TCP ACK to the correspondent node every time the certain TCP packets are forwarded to a new access router through a bi-directional tunnel. The handoff method has an advantage in that the packet transmission rate can be secured at the same level as the mobile node stays still during the performance of the handoff of the mobile node since the previous access router instead of the mobile node creates and sends the TCP ACK to the correspondent node during the performance of the handoff of the mobile node. | 03-17-2011 |
20110064056 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR RESELECTION OF A PACKET DATA NETWORK GATEWAY WHEN ESTABLISHING CONNECTIVITY - A network control module includes an access module that determines whether a first packet data network gateway communicating with a first packet data network also communicates with a second packet data network. The network control module also includes a selection control module in communication with a mobile wireless terminal. The mobile wireless terminal attempts to access the second packet data network by establishing a connection with a second packet data network gateway that communicates with the second packet data network. In response to the access module determining that the first packet data network gateway also communicates with the second packet data network, the selection control module commands the mobile wireless terminal to access the second packet data network through the first packet data network gateway. | 03-17-2011 |
20110064057 | METHOD OF ACQUIRING BROADCAST INFORMATION - In a method of acquiring broadcast information acquisition, the terminal receives partial broadcast information from a base station, and transmits an initial access message including indication for the partial broadcast information to the base station. The terminal receives an initial access response message including broadcast information other than the partial broadcast information. | 03-17-2011 |
20110069673 | LOCAL ROUTING OF VOICE CALLS BY A FEMTO GATEWAY - A femto gateway enables local routing of voice calls for users communicating through the same femto gateway, without passing through a mobile switching center. Local routing reduces costly switching of calls, and can provide better quality of service and more innovative service plans to subscribers. | 03-24-2011 |
20110069674 | ROUTING OF CALLS TO CORE NETWORK BASED ON THE LOCATION OF THE FEMTO CELL - A femto gateway maintains information about the location of femto cells and areas served by mobile switching centers. The gateway maintains a mapping so that it selects a desired mobile switching center (MSC) and SGSN that is likely to be used if the user equipment leaves the coverage area of the femto cell and enters a macro cell or vice versa. | 03-24-2011 |
20110069675 | METHOD FOR TRANSITIONING OF STATE MACHINES AFTER RADIO ACCESS NETWORK IS RESELECTED AND TERMINAL - A method for transitioning of a state machine after a radio access network (RAN) is reselected includes: generating first information when a mobile terminal reselects from an HRPD network to an LTE network; after receiving the first information, setting, by a Signaling Adaptation Protocol (SAP) of the HRPD module air interface protocol, the TunnelModeEnabled parameter to a first identifier, so that air interface related sub-protocols of an HRPD module know that the mobile terminal has reselected to the LTE network. | 03-24-2011 |
20110069676 | INFORMATION SERVICE AND EVENT SERVICE MECHANISMS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - A WTRU includes a transceiver and a media independent handover (MIH) function (MIHF), which transmits via the transceiver a request to set information in an external device. The MIHF receives a response to the request to store the information in the network node indicating that the request to store the information in the network node was successful. | 03-24-2011 |
20110069677 | Systems and Methods for Handoff in Wireless Network - Methods performed by a mobile node (MN) in a secured network for handoff of communication from a serving access point (AP) to a target AP are provided. In a bounded delay channel switching (BDCS) method, the MN periodically switches between a first channel and one of multiple other channels during handoff, utilizes the first channel to transmit/receive packets to/from a corresponding node (CN) via the serving AP and utilizes one of the other channels to perform the handoff procedure to the target AP. In a dual-MAC switching (DMS) method, the MN employs a first MAC (medium access control) address to transmit/receive packets to/from the serving AP and a second MAC address to perform the handoff procedure to the target AP. The BDCS and DMS methods may be used concurrently, and may be used in a secured network that complies with, e.g., the IEEE 802.11, IEEE 802.1x or IEEE 802.11i plus IEEE 802.11f standards. | 03-24-2011 |
20110069678 | WIRELESS METROPOLITAN AREA NETWORK ARCHITECTURE FOR MANAGING NETWORK RESOURCES AND MOBILITY - The present invention proposes an infrastructure to enable seamless mobility for wireless metropolitan area networks (WMANs) and to provide for management of spectrum and network resources. An WMAN reference model is introduced where the radio resource management (RRM) and handover (HO) sub-layer is introduced into the protocol stack. The WMAN management plane is responsible for the RRM and HO management. Several physical and logical network architecture options for WMAN management are proposed. | 03-24-2011 |
20110069679 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, NODE APPARATUS, AND INTER-NETWORK HANDOVER CONTROL METHOD - A mobile communication system includes at least one mobile terminal that can access a circuit switched network and a wireless broadband network, and a node apparatus. The node apparatus integrates, into one physical node, a first gateway node interconnecting the circuit switched network and an IP network and a second gateway node interconnecting a core network accommodating the wireless broadband network and an external packet data network. When the mobile terminal performs handover from one of the circuit switched network and the wireless broadband network to the other network, one of the first gateway node and the second gateway node, being a handover-destination node, allocates call connection path node identification information managed by the other gateway note being a handover-source node, as new call connection path node identification information of the handover-destination node. | 03-24-2011 |
20110075630 | ENABLING INTER FREQUENCY ASSIGNMENT SCANNING WHILE REMAINING AT ONE FREQUENCY - Techniques for enabling inter frequency assignment scanning while remaining at one frequency are described. In one embodiment, for example an apparatus may include a wireless interface subsystem, a memory and a processor. The memory may include data and instructions to operate the processor to communicate with a first fixed device at a first frequency during a first communication session, scan for one or more first preambles at the first frequency from a second fixed device and scan for one or more second preambles at the first frequency from a third fixed device. In an embodiment, the second fixed device may operate at a second frequency and the third fixed device may operate at a third frequency. The apparatus may include a processor operative to perform a handover based on the one or more first preambles and the one or more second preambles for a second communication session. | 03-31-2011 |
20110075631 | Method for improved handover in multiple interface application - A method is provided for establishing a backup interface among multiple interfaces serving a mobile node, for a handover that is undetectable in advance. The invention methodology operates to cause a Foreign Agent associated with the multiple interfaces to keep a binding record of each of the multiple interfaces for which the mobile node has successfully completed the registration process. A novel Mobile IP extension is also added to facilitate the backup FA binding of the invention methodology. | 03-31-2011 |
20110075632 | HETEROGENEOUS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CIRCUIT SWITCHED HANDOVER - A heterogeneous communication system of performing a handover from a WiMAX communication system to a LTE communication system includes a UE adapted to request a handover connection establishment to the LTE communication system while receiving a CS service from the WiMAX communication system, request an authentication to the first WiMAX system, preferentially perform the handover to the LTE communication system, and switch to the LTE communication system in response to a handover message; and a GANC adapted to deliver the request of the handover connection establishment to the LTE communication system, notify the procedure of the authentication to the LTE communication system and provide the handover command message to the UE to switch to the LTE communication system, thereby providing the CS service to the UE through the LTE communication system. A handover from an LTE communication system to a WiMAX communication system is also disclosed. | 03-31-2011 |
20110075633 | Data Forwarding During Handover in a Self-Backhauled Cell - A method is implemented in an anchor eNodeB of a network, where the anchor eNodeB communicates with a self-backhauled eNodeB via a radio interface and where the network further includes another eNodeB. The method includes determining whether a user equipment (UE) is being handed off from the first self-backhauled eNodeB to the other eNodeB. The determining is based on: receiving ( | 03-31-2011 |
20110075634 | HANDOVER METHOD, RADIO BASE STATION, AND MOBILE TERMINAL - It is determined whether or not to perform a handover to switch a destination of connection of a mobile terminal ( | 03-31-2011 |
20110080890 | Handover Mechanisms With Synchronous PDCP Protocol Under Various Relay Architectures - A method is provided for handing over a user equipment (UE). The method includes a donor access node with which the UE is in communication via a relay node receiving UE handover context information. The method further includes the donor access node using the UE handover context information to identify data packets that belong to the UE and are to be forwarded from the donor access node to a target access node. | 04-07-2011 |
20110080891 | System and Method for Handover Between Relays - A method is provided for handing over a user equipment (UE). The method includes a donor access node with which the UE is in communication via a serving relay node receiving UE context information. The method further includes the donor access node using the UE context information to identify data packets that belong to the UE, wherein the data packets are forwarded from the serving relay node to a target relay node. | 04-07-2011 |
20110080892 | Architecture For Termination At Access Device - A method is provided for handing over a user equipment (UE). The method includes a donor access node with which the UE is in communication via a relay node receiving UE context information from the relay node. The method further includes the donor access node using the UE context information to identify data packets that belong to the UE. | 04-07-2011 |
20110080893 | Methods and apparatus for wireless communication - One method of wireless communication involves acknowledging that an anchor base station received a handover indication signal. Another method involves: receiving, from base stations of an active set, offset signals identifying a respective differences in time between a reference time and respective times when the base station received a ranging signal from a mobile station; and transmitting, to the mobile station, a ranging control signal in response to the respective offset signals. Another method involves transmitting, to a mobile station in response to an active set signal, a system configuration information signal including system configuration information of a base station in an active set. Another method involves determining an uplink control channel power parameter in response to channel condition signals received from base stations in an active set. Another method involves transmitting a control signal to base stations in an active set on respective control channels. Apparatuses are also disclosed. | 04-07-2011 |
20110080894 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, MOBILE STATION, AND WIRELESS ACCESS NETWORK APPARATUS - When a mobile station (UE) is camping on a system of the LTE scheme, a function (EMM) is configured to transmit a service request signal including a “CSFB” to an MME; the NNE is configured to transmit setup information including a “CSFB” to an eNB in response to the service request signal transmitted by the function (EMM); the eNB is configured to transmit, to a function (AS) , instruction information instructing to select a cell in a system of the WCDMA/GSM scheme in response to the setup information transmitted by the MME; | 04-07-2011 |
20110085517 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR DETACHING USER EQUIPMENT - A method and device for detaching a user equipment (UE) are disclosed in the present invention. The UE is registered with a mobility management entity (MME) in a packet switched (PS) network and a mobile switching center (MSC) in a circuit switched (CS) network. When the UE needs to detach from the PS network, the MSC receives a Detach Request with a Detach Type indicating the detaching from the PS network only; after receiving the Detach Request, the MSC deletes the context of the PS core network entity and clears the connection between the MSC and the MME. An MME for performing UE detachment is also disclosed in the present invention. The present invention helps reduce the time delay during the subsequent handover and quickly provide users with communications services, so as to improve user's experience and meet the carriers' requirements. | 04-14-2011 |
20110090864 | Method and apparatus for facilitating handover from a WCDMA public land mobile access network to a generic access network - Handover is improved from a 3 G WCDMA UTRAN to a generic access network (GAN) cell. For handover, mobile stations measure signal level from neighbor cells. In a WCDMA UTRAN, measurement of cells having a frequency number different from the serving cell, require the network to generate time gaps so the mobile station can perform measurements on different frequencies. GAN cells do not transmit on their allotted frequency number. This number together with an identifier is used to identify the GAN cell between the MS and RNC. A modified registration procedure permits GAN cells to always have the same frequency number as neighboring UTRAN cells, wherein the MS communicates the current UTRAN cell frequency number to the GAN controller, which adopts this number, and determines the corresponding identifier. The identifier may be the same for all GAN cells, or can be obtained from a mapping table, which maps an identifier to each frequency. | 04-21-2011 |
20110090865 | Technique for Providing Network Access To Different Entities - A technique for providing network access to an external device is described. A modem device for realizing this technique comprises a first mobile platform module adapted to support network access via a first radio access technology (RAT) and comprising a first data interface towards the external device, as well as a second mobile platform module adapted to support network access via at least one second RAT and comprising a second data interface towards the external device. | 04-21-2011 |
20110090866 | METHOD, USER EQUIPMENT AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR INTER-RAT HANDOVER IN 3G LTE - The invention provides a method for enabling inter-RAT handover in a communication system comprising a first network utilizing a first radio access technology and a second network utilizing a second radio access technology. When a user equipment moves from the first network into the second network and a handover is to be made, processing protocol data units (PDUs) in non-IP packet format and buffered in the first network or in the user equipment into IP packets in response to a handover confirmation (HOcfm) sent by the second network; forwarding the processed IP packets from the first network to the second network if the PDUs are buffered in the first network; and retransmitting the processed IP packets after the user equipment is switched to the second network. An user equipment and a communication system corresponding with the method of the invention are also provided. | 04-21-2011 |
20110090867 | Communication Terminal, Communication System, Handover Process Method, and Program - It is possible to provide a communication terminal, a handover process method, a communication system, and a program which can reduce a transmission delay accompanying a handover process in a mobile communication and perform a high-speed high-quality data communication. A mobile telephone ( | 04-21-2011 |
20110090868 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REGISTRATION, COMMUNICATION AND HANDOVER OF MOBILE NODE - The present invention relates to mobile communication technologies, and discloses a method and an apparatus for registration, communication, and handover of a Mobile Node (MN). The present invention is intended to overcome the bottlenecks of data traffic and processing capability in the home network in the prior art. A distributed mobility management system is provided herein. The system includes at least two Mobility Management Anchors (MMAs): any two MMAs are interconnected; at least one terminal exists in each MMA connection; each MMA stores a terminal binding relationship table; and the terminal binding relationship table records identifiers (IDs) and Internet Protocol (IP) addresses of terminals. The distributed mobility management system under the present invention can balance load, improve the data processing capability, simplify the signaling interaction in various procedures, and improve the system processing capability. | 04-21-2011 |
20110090869 | METHOD AND SYSTEM SUPPORTING HANDOVER FROM MACRO NODE B TO HOME NODE B - A method for supporting handover from macro Node B to home Node B is proposed according present invention, comprising: informing, by a source radio network control node of a UE1 the UE of configuration parameters of a cell to be measured and indicating the UE to report a unique ID of the measured cell; measuring, by the UE, a signal from the home Node B, and after reading the home Node B's unique ID from the home Node B's system information, reporting the measurement result to said source radio network control node of the UE, said measurement result including the home Node B's unique ID; and sending, by said source radio network control node, a message to a destination radio network control node of said home Node B specified by said unique ID, so that the destination radio network control node can establish radio bearer in the home Node B for the UE. | 04-21-2011 |
20110090870 | ENHANCED SAE MOBILITY - The present invention relates to a solution for handling seamless handover between a 3GPP network and a non-3GPP network or two non-3GPP networks. The solution uses a new state information informing about a UE being in an Idle state in relation to the network not currently communicating through. Thus the UE is not immediately detached from the old network but may keep a logical connection and quickly re-attach to the old network if of interest. | 04-21-2011 |
20110096749 | Method For Simple Retrieval Of Network Access Selection Information - The invention relates to a method and system for network access selection comprising an Access Selection Server (ASS) ( | 04-28-2011 |
20110096750 | DYNAMIC GATEWAY SELECTION PROCESS - A selection mechanism and a selection process are disclosed that provide the selection of a network device based on defined criteria to allow efficient use of the network and load balancing. In one embodiment, a method is disclosed that includes receiving an initial attachment at a gateway including an identifier of a radio attachment point, obtaining a name for the radio attachment point based on the identifier, accessing a list of names of packet data network gateways (PGWs) that can serve the initial attachment to provide a network connection, comparing the name for the radio attachment point with the list of names of the PGWs to determine at least one PGW that provides a closest match to the name for the radio attachment point, and selecting at least one PGW that provides the closest match to establish the network connection. | 04-28-2011 |
20110096751 | SOFT HANDOFF FOR OFDM - The present invention relates to soft handoffs in an OFDM system. Each mobile terminal measures pilot signal strengths of transmissions from adjacent base stations. If the pilot signal strength for a base station exceeds the defined threshold, that base station is added to an active set list. Each mobile terminal notifies the base stations of their active set lists. By providing the set list to the base station controller and the servicing base station, the mobile terminal identifies the sole servicing base station or triggers a soft handoff mode when multiple base stations appear on the active set list. The soft handoff mode uses a combination of scheduling and space-time coding to affect efficient and reliable handoffs. | 04-28-2011 |
20110096752 | HANDOVER SUPPORT METHOD USING DEDICATED RANGING CODE - The present invention discloses a variety of methods of supporting handover in a wireless access system. A handover support method according to an embodiment of the present invention includes the steps of: transmitting a handover request message to a first base station (serving base station); receiving a handover response message (UL grant or UL-MAP message) containing authentication information (M) from a second base station (target base station); deriving a dedicated code index (DCI) for instructing a dedicated ranging code by using the authentication information (M); transmitting the dedicated ranging code to the second base station on a non-contention basis; and receiving a ranging response message as a response for the dedicated ranging code. | 04-28-2011 |
20110103344 | Neighbor Discovery Message Handling to Support Roaming of Wireless Mobile Client Devices - Techniques are provided herein to support roaming of wireless mobile client devices from one wireless local area network access point device to another wireless local area network access point device. Neighbor discovery messages are received from wireless mobile client devices. A neighbor discovery message specifies a target address for a neighbor discovery function. A response to a neighbor discovery message is sent to a wireless mobile client device such that the response message appears to have been sent by a wireless mobile client device that has an address that corresponds to the target address of the neighbor discovery message. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103345 | Method of packet switched handover - A method of packet switched handover in a mobile communication system comprising a terminal, a source node and a destination node comprises negotiating protocol parameters for the destination node on behalf of a new network entity, by communicating with an old network entity whilst the terminal is still connected to the source node; and completing the packet switched handover, such that service interruption on handover is reduced. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103346 | Encapsulating Upper Layers of CDMA Signaling Between a Multi-mode Device and a Signaling Gateway - Methods and systems are provided for encapsulating upper layers of CDMA signaling messages between a multi-mode device and a signaling gateway. In an exemplary embodiment, a multi-mode device has a CDMA mode and a Wi-Fi mode. In Wi-Fi mode, the device generates an upper-layer portion of a CDMA signaling message. The device then encapsulates the first upper-layer portion in at least one packet-switched-protocol, such as SIP. The device then transmits the encapsulated upper-layer portion of the CDMA signaling message via a Wi-Fi network and a packet-switched network to a signaling gateway, which then translates the upper-layer portion into an SS7 message, and transmits the SS7 message over an SS7 network. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103347 | Adaptation of Handover Command Size In A Mobile Telecommunication Network - The present invention relates to a method and a base station for determining a handover command based on mobility related parameters such as a handover margin or a time value required to trigger the handover. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103348 | HANDOVER PROCESSING METHOD, AND MOBILE TERMINAL AND COMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT DEVICE USED IN SAID METHOD - Provided is a technique to provide a handover processing method that allows a mobile terminal to be handed over seamlessly while preventing occurrence of double reservation. The method includes a step where a mobile terminal ( | 05-05-2011 |
20110103349 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROCESSING HANDOVER IN HETEROGENEOUS MOBILITY PROTOCOL MIXED NETWORKS AND MIP CLIENT DEVICE - Provided are a method for processing handover to provide IP mobility for mobile user equipment, a system thereof, and a Mobile IP (MIP) client device. The method processing handover at a home agent in a heterogeneous protocol mixed network includes: at a home agent, creating a Proxy Mobile IP (PMIP) tunnel when user equipment accesses a PMIP network; at the home agent, creating a Client Mobile IP (CMIP) tunnel when a CMIP network is accessed due to handover of the user equipment; and at the home agent, severing the PMIP tunnel when the user equipment completes performing handover. | 05-05-2011 |
20110110326 | Handover Of Circuit-Switched Call To Packet-Switched Call, And Vice Versa - A method includes, during an ongoing call of a wireless user terminal in one of a circuit switched domain or a packet switched domain, initiating a handover procedure; setting parameters allowing the other domain to determine the actual resources needed to continue the call in the other domain, sending an indication of these parameters towards a network element of the other domain and completing the handover procedure. When the ongoing call is in the circuit switched domain completing the handover procedure results in handing over the ongoing call to the packet switched domain, and when the ongoing call is in the packet switched domain completing the handover procedure results in handing over the ongoing call to the circuit switched domain. For example, the circuit switched domain may be a GERAN network and the packet switched domain may be an E-UTRAN (LTE) network. In the GERAN network the handover procedure may be accomplished at least in part through a Gs interface between a mobile switching center and a serving general packet radio system support node and/or through a Gb interface between a base station system and the serving general packet radio system support node. The handover procedure is accomplished at least in part by signaling conducted over an S | 05-12-2011 |
20110110327 | SYSTEM INFORMATION ACQUISITION IN CONNECTED MODE - A method of wireless communication includes acquiring at least one non-required system information from a cell while in a radio resource control connected state. The non-required system information is system information that is not required in the radio resource control connected state. The method includes transitioning from the radio resource control connected state to a radio resource control idle state on the cell without acquiring the at least one non-required system information. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110328 | Method and Apparatus for Providing WiMAX (Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access) Anchor Mode Service on a System with Distributed Forwarding Planes - Transferring a mobile node from one ASN-GW (anchor access service network gateway) to another ASN-GW is referred to as a hand-over. To facilitate transfer of data for the hand-over, a GRE (generic routing encapsulation) tunnel is established between the two ASN-GWs. Traffic through the GRE tunnel arriving at a line card of an ASN-GW is redirected from the arrival line card to the one line card that contains information for the mobile node. The redirection is based on traversal of one or more tables on the line cards. These tables are indexed according to GRE keys corresponding to the mobile nodes. Therefore, the appropriate line card for the traffic can be identified quickly and efficiently using a distributed forwarding plane with minimal provisioning overhead, resulting in lower latency during the hand-over. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110329 | SECURITY UPDATE PROCEDURE FOR ZONE SWITCHING IN MIXED-MODE WIMAX NETWORK - A zone switching method is disclosed for use in a mixed-mode WiMAX environment. The zone switching method is useful in a WiMAX network having both 802.16e (legacy) and 802.16e/802.16m (mixed-mode, or advanced) entities, including mobile stations, base stations, and access service network entities. The zone switching method includes anchor authenticator relocation, dual security context maintenance, and security updates for both entry-before-break-capable mobile stations and for those mobile stations with slower switching speeds. The zone switching method enables an advanced mobile station to seamlessly switch from legacy to mixed-mode operation once the mixed-mode entities are available to service the 802.16m operations. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110330 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REDUCING LOSS OF MEDIA DATA WHILE HANDOVER IS PERFORMED - A method of reducing an amount of media data lost when a next handover is performed, wherein the method is performed by a first terminal for transmitting and receiving the media data to and from a second terminal, the method including: predicting an amount of the media data that may be lost when the next handover is performed; generating control information for reducing the amount of the media data lost when the next handover is performed by using the predicted amount of the media data lost when the next handover is performed; and reducing the amount of the media data lost when the next handover is performed by using the generated control information while the next handover is performed. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110331 | Handover Delay Optimization - A method of anchoring a packet switched session of a subscriber comprises receiving a packet switched request for a session setup, and anchoring the packet switched session in a control node (MSC-S) of a visited network of the subscriber. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110332 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER IN MULTI-MODE TERMINAL - A method for performing handover in a dual-mode terminal is disclosed. The method for performing handover in a dual-mode terminal includes receiving an Internet Protocol (IP) packet from a personal computer (PC), and transmitting the received IP packet to a serving network; upon receiving a handover message from the serving network, stopping reception of the IP packet from the PC; forwarding residual packets from a first processor corresponding to the serving network to a second processor corresponding to a target network; upon handover completion and completion of the forwarding of the residual packets, restarting reception of the IP packet from the PC; and transmitting the residual packets to the target network. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110333 | DISTRIBUTED MOBILE AGENT - Systems, apparatus, and methods for forwarding data packets towards a mobile node roaming in a foreign packet-switched data network are disclosed. The data packets having been addressed to a home address of the mobile node, the mobile node being provided with a care of address for use in the foreign network, the systems, apparatus, and methods comprise various features. | 05-12-2011 |
20110110334 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION PROCESSING DEVICE AND AUTHENTICATION PROCESSING DEVICE - Disclosed is a technique to enable a session handover between devices with different key generation functions in an authentication protocol. According to the technique, when a session where a UE ( | 05-12-2011 |
20110110335 | INTER-DOMAIN CONTEXT TRANSFER USING CONTEXT TRANSFER MANAGERS - A method and apparatus for improved context transfer in heterogeneous networks is presented. Context information is collected from source entities in a first access network by a context transfer manager and transmitted to a context transfer manager of a second access network which forwards the context information to target entities therein. In one of the context transfer managers at least a part of the context information is translated from a format supported in the first access network to another format supported in the second access network. The method may be carried out proactively preceding a handover or reactively following a handover. In one embodiment, context transfer within one access domain is performed directly between access routers, whereas context transfer between different access domains is performed via the context managers. In another embodiment, beacons from access points are counted in order to determine candidates for a pending handover. | 05-12-2011 |
20110116468 | Handover of user equipment - The invention relates to supporting a handover of user equipment ( | 05-19-2011 |
20110116469 | LOCAL INTERNET PROTOCOL ACCESS/SELECTED INTERNET PROTOCOL TRAFFIC OFFLOAD PACKET ENCAPSULATION TO SUPPORT SEAMLESS MOBILITY - A method, a mobile system, and a mobility management entity are disclosed. A transceiver | 05-19-2011 |
20110116470 | OPTIMIZED RESOURCE ALLOCATION FOR WIRELESS DEVICE IN PACKET TRANSFER MODE - A system and method allows a network, in response to a cell reselection notice, to serve a wireless, wireless device sufficient data to complete a pending data transfer instead of performing the immediate cell change. Appropriate allocation of radio resources to the wireless device in the current serving cell and before cell change allows reduced packet data transfer latencies for small data sessions, better load balancing and traffic resourcing between cells, appropriate allocation of uplink resources in the new target cell, and enhanced control over network congestion. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116471 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TEMPORARILY SUSPENDING A NETWORK CONNECTION - Method for temporarily suspending a network connection is provided, which connection uses a Media Independent Handover Function ( | 05-19-2011 |
20110116472 | HANDOVER PROCESSING IN MULTIPLE ACCESS POINT DEPLOYMENT SYSTEM - This disclosure relates to method, device and system for performing handover processing. A roaming list is configured at a receiver which includes multiple entries. Each entry of the roaming list includes receive parameters. A measurement operation is performed on an entry of the roaming list. A transmitter is set based on the measurement operation. Finally, an uplink signal is transmitted to an access point at a time based on a slot start time and a random timing offset. The uplink signal is transmitted while a second signal is transmitted from another node. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116473 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTER-DEVICE HANDOVER (HO) BETWEEN INTERNET PROTOCOL (IP) MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM (IMS) AND CIRCUIT SWITCHED (CS) WIRELESS TRANSMIT/RECEIVE UNITS (WTRUs) - A method and apparatus for Inter-User Equipment Transfer (IUT) of an IP Multimedia (IM) Subsystem (IMS) session between a circuit switched (CS) wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) and an IMS-capable WTRU. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116474 | OPTIMIZED RESOURCE ALLOCATION FOR WIRELESS DEVICE IN PACKET TRANSFER MODE - A method and system for a wireless device configured to communicate with a network is presented. The network is communicated with at a radio link control layer. An indication is communicated to the network that a higher layer protocol is operating in an acknowledged mode. The higher level protocol is above the radio link control layer. In some implementations, the higher level protocol terminates at a device located outside the network. A resource allocation is received from the network. The resource allocation is at the RLC layer. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116475 | VERTICAL HANDOFF METHOD, VERTICAL HANDOFF SYSTEM, HOME AGENT, AND MOBILE NODE - The invention provides a technique to reduce a packet size of signaling to request vertical handoff in case a mobile node has static vertical handoff rules. According to this technique, MN | 05-19-2011 |
20110116476 | HANDOVER PROCEDURE AND METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING TRANSMITTER POWER OF FEMTO BASE STATION IN BROADBAND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for controlling transmitter power of a femto base station in a broadband wireless communication system are provided. In the method, a femto base station receives a signal having an intensity of a threshold or more from UE and transmits a message reporting power-on of a transmitter to a femto base station controller. The UE transmits a message reporting downlink signal measurement results of femto base stations to the femto base station controller via a macro base station. The femto base station controller determines a femto base station which becomes a handover target of the UE using report messages of the femto base stations and the UE. The femto base station controller transmits a handover procedure start message to the macro base station and the determined femto base station. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116477 | CLOSED SUBSCRIBER GROUP INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD, ACCESS CONTROL METHOD, SYSTEM, AND DEVICE - A Closed Subscriber Group (CSG) information processing method, an access control method, and the corresponding system and devices are disclosed herein. The CSG information processing method includes: obtaining modified CSG information of User Equipment (UE); and sending a message that carries the CSG information to the UE. The method and the corresponding system and devices enable the UE to know the change of the stored CSG information. The access control method includes: obtaining modified CSG information; and detaching a UE from an accessed CSG area when discovering that the UE is not allowed to access the accessed CSG area any longer according to the modified CSG information. The access control method and the corresponding system and devices implement access control under a CSG mechanism. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116478 | METHOD AND MOBILE MANAGEMENT ENTITY FOR OBTAINING BEARER CONDITION DURING HANDOVER OF USER EQUIPMENT - The present invention provides a method for obtaining bearer condition during a handover of UE. The method includes: receiving, by a mobile management entity (MME), information of at least one bearer allowed to be accepted by a target base station (eNB) when the eNB makes an admission control for a UE based on received bearer information of the UE during handover of the UE; updating, by the MME, a UE-AMBR used by the target eNB based on the received at least one bearer. The present invention also provides an MME which enables the target side obtain actual bearer condition during handover of a UE. | 05-19-2011 |
20110122839 | Inter-bss packet-switched handover - A mobile communication system of packet switched handover in GERAN A/Gb mode, the handover comprising: means for transmitting an exchange identification command to a mobile station for any created packet flow context prior to connection of the mobile station in a target cell. | 05-26-2011 |
20110122840 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING INTER-FREQUENCY HAND-OFF IN COGNITIVE RADIO BASED CELLULAR RELAY COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - There is provided a method for controlling inter-frequency hand-off in a cognitive radio based cellular relay communications network, the method including: receiving the inter-frequency hand-off request from mobile stations and receiving information on RS-signal strength and BS-signal strength, from the mobile stations; when the base stations receive the inter-frequency hand-off request, acquiring empty channel information receiving cognitive radio band information including the empty channel information by requesting the cognitive radio band information to the relay stations having the empty channel information based on a cognitive radio technology; calculating RS-throughput corresponding to data throughput between the relay stations and BS-throughput corresponding to data throughput between the base stations by using the information on the RS-signal strength and the BS-signal strength and empty channel state information in the cognitive radio band information; and when the RS-throughput is higher than the BS-throughput, instructing the mobile station to perform the inter-frequency hand-off. | 05-26-2011 |
20110122841 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND NETWORK DEVICE - A mobile communication system in which a home cell limits access from a first mobile station, and when the first mobile station communicating via a macro cell using the same frequency as the home cell enters a predetermined area near the home cell, the first mobile station is caused to perform handover to a different-frequency macro cell selected from among macro cells covering the predetermined area and using frequencies different from that used in the home cell. | 05-26-2011 |
20110122842 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CHANGING SERVING BASE STATION IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of changing a serving Base Station (BS) in a mobile communication system, and a mobile communication system for implementing the method, are provided. The method includes setting a minimum UpLink (UL) quality value, receiving DownLink (DL) quality values for a current serving BS of a User Equipment (UE) and respective BSs included in an active set of the UE from the UE periodically based on a predefined first period, receiving UL quality values for the serving BS and the respective BSs included in the active set from the serving BS and the respective BSs included in the active set periodically based on a predefined second period, determining if the UL quality value for the serving BS is less than the minimum UL quality value, when, as a result of the determination, the UL quality value for the serving BS is less than the minimum UL quality value, selecting BSs, which have UL quality values equal to or greater than the minimum UL quality value among the BSs included in the active set, as candidate BSs, and determining a BS, which has a maximum DL quality value among the candidate BSs, as a new serving BS of the UE, wherein the active set represents a set of BSs that can provide DL/UL service to the UE. | 05-26-2011 |
20110122843 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - In a mobile communication method according to the present invention includes the steps of: transmitting, from a handover source radio base station to a switching center, a handover request including an NCC, a PCI and a K | 05-26-2011 |
20110122844 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TRAFFIC LOCALIZATION - Systems and methods for bridging packet flows to bypass call legs and/or tunnels are provided. A tunnel initiator, which can be an access gateway, a foreign agent, and a mobility anchor point, for example, provides a bypass for certain packets that have a destination serviced by the same tunnel initiator. The bridge allows the packets to bypass a backhaul loop and reduces latency and frees bandwidth for other purposes in the network. The bridging can be implemented in a tunnel initiator for mobile to mobile packet flows, mobile to land line packet flows, and land line to mobile packet flows. Route optimization can also be provided in certain embodiments. | 05-26-2011 |
20110128934 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING CO-LOCATED COEXISTENCE MODE - A method and apparatus for reducing interference between systems when a plurality of wireless access systems are co-located are disclosed. To support CLC mode, an MS in the CRC mode transmits a handover request message to a first Base Station (BS) to initiate a handover process, receives a handover command message acknowledging the handover request message from the first BS, transmits a ranging request message to second BS at network reentry after handover, and receives from the second BS a ranging response message including CRC start time information that set by the second BS. | 06-02-2011 |
20110128935 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR HANDOVER OF MS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for handover of a Mobile Station (MS) in a wireless communication system are provided. The method includes, if a ranging request signal is received from the MS attempting access through a handover, determining if the BS and a serving BS of the MS are the same BS based on the ranging request signal, and, if the BS and the serving BS are the same BS, determining the effectiveness of a Cipher-based Message Authentication Code (CMAC) included in the ranging request signal using previous authentication information of the MS. The serving BS denotes a BS from which the MS has been serviced before the handover. The previous authentication information of the MS denotes authentication information that the serving BS has used for authenticating the MS. | 06-02-2011 |
20110128936 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING IDLE MODE HANDOVER IN HETEROGENEOUS WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - A method for supporting an idle mode handover of an Single Radio Mobile Station (SR MS) by a target Access Service Network GateWay (ASN_GW) in a heterogeneous wireless communication system is disclosed. The method includes, upon detecting that an operation mode of the SR MS is to be changed from an idle mode to an active mode, acquiring an address of a Home Agent (HA) of the SR MS from a preregistered ASN_GW with which the SR MS has performed a preregistration operation, upon detecting that a Base Station (BS) is to set up a path with the preregistered ASN_GW, transmitting a message, including the address of the HA and requesting to set the target ASN_GW as a new Foreign Agent (FA) of the SR MS, to the preregistered ASN_GW, and upon receiving a message, requesting to register the target ASN_GW as the new FA of the SR MS, from the preregistered ASN_GW, setting up a data path with the HA, and then registering the target ASN_GW as the new FA of the SR MS. | 06-02-2011 |
20110128937 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, RADIO BASE STATION, AND MOBILE STATION - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes steps of: generating, at a HO-source radio base station, an intermediate key (K | 06-02-2011 |
20110128938 | HANDOVER PROCESSING IN MULTIPLE ACCESS POINT DEPLOYMENT SYSTEM - This disclosure relates to method, device and system for performing handover processing. A roaming list is configured at a receiver which includes multiple entries. Each entry of the roaming list includes receive parameters. A measurement operation is performed on an entry of the roaming list. A transmitter is set based on the measurement operation. Finally, an uplink signal is transmitted to an access point at a time based on a slot start time and a random timing offset. The uplink signal is transmitted while a second signal is transmitted from another node. | 06-02-2011 |
20110134880 | LONG TERM EVOLUTION (LTE) MOBILE ANCHORING - A device receives roaming information associated with a user equipment (UE), a current eNodeB conducting a current Internet protocol (IP) session with the UE, and a plurality of eNodeBs that are neighboring the current eNodeB. The device also selects, based on the roaming information and from the plurality of eNodeBs, an optimal eNodeB to which to handover the UE, and establishes a preemptive IP session with the optimal eNodeB. The device further initiates a handover of the current IP session and the UE from the current eNodeB to the optimal eNodeB, where the current eNodeB acts as an anchoring point for a bearer path associated with the UE during the handover. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134881 | Method for handling hand off of a mobile device using reverse link quality measurements as trigger - In one embodiment a first comparison result is determined based on a link quality metric and a first threshold value. Based on the first comparison result, a second base station is selected, and the mobile device is instructed to switch from communicating wirelessly with the first base station to communicating wirelessly with the second base station | 06-09-2011 |
20110134882 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, TERMINAL DEVICE, BASE STATION, COMMUNICATION QUALITY MANAGEMENT METHOD, AND PROGRAM - In a communication system ( | 06-09-2011 |
20110134883 | NETWORK BASED MOBILITY SYSTEM AND HANDOVER METHOD THEREOF - A network-based mobility system and a handover method in the system are provided. If a mobile terminal having interfaces of different service providers establishes a connection between domains of the different service providers, a new domain to which the mobile terminal is connected sends a notification of the new connection to the existing domain to which the mobile terminal has been connected. If there is a flow binding switch operation caused by the new connection, the existing domain sends a flow binding setup request to the new domain. The new domain sets up flow binding for the mobile terminal. A tunnel for the corresponding flow is set up between the new domain and the existing domain, whereby packets transmitted to the existing domain are forwarded to the new domain through the tunnel. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134884 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING COMMUNICATION, WIRELESS DEVICE, AND BASE STATION - A wireless device transmits first information, representing whether the wireless device expects to receive data from a base station, to the base station before receipt of an inquiry from the base station about whether the wireless device expects to receive the data, and on receipt of the inquiry from the base station, restricts transmission of a response to the inquiry to the base station if the first information is not changed. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134885 | ROUTE OPTIMIZATION METHOD AND SYSTEM - In the field of communication technologies, a route optimization method and system are provided, so as to improve the data transfer efficiency between a Mobile Node (MN) and a Corresponding Node (CN). The method includes: acquiring location information of a current access device of the CN, by a current anchor device of the MN (S | 06-09-2011 |
20110134886 | METHOD OF EXECUTING HANDOVER IN BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - The primitives between an upper management layer and the MAC layer within a mobile station and a base station are defined in order to specify and clarify the operations within the protocol stack layers in a broadband wireless access system to allow a mobile station to execute handover. Media Independent Handover (MIH) procedures can be achieved because the NCMS and MIH layer can communicate through use of these primitives. | 06-09-2011 |
20110134887 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR HANDOVER IN BROADBAND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR SUPPORTING MOBILE RELAY STATION - An apparatus and a method for handover in a broadband wireless communication system supporting a Mobile Relay Station (MRS) are provided. The method includes transmitting a Connection ID (CID) of Mobile Stations (MSs), the CIDs pre-allocated by a target BS, to the MSs; sending a resource allocation message comprising uplink resource allocation information for bandwidth request of the MSs, to the MSs; receiving a bandwidth request message which comprises security authentication information of each MS, from the MSs using an uplink resource allocated through the uplink resource allocation information; and aggregating bandwidth request messages of the MSs and sending a ranging request message comprising the security authentication information and bandwidth request information of the MSs to the target BS. Thus, the handover delay time, which is inevitable for the bandwidth request in the conventional connection set-up procedure, can be reduced, and the handover with the reliability guaranteed can be achieved by allowing the security related processing in the network re-entry procedure. | 06-09-2011 |
20110142004 | SMALL BASE STATION APPARATUS AND CELL SEARCH METHOD - A small base station apparatus includes: a communication unit for collecting system information of a neighboring cell through mobile communication terminals being connected to a cell of the small base station apparatus; a memory unit for storing the system information of the neighboring cell; and a controller for checking whether or not a mobile communication terminal is allowed a handover connection to the neighboring cell based on the system information of the neighboring cell, registering the neighboring cell in a handover candidate list of the mobile communication terminal if the mobile communication terminal is allowed the handover connection, selecting one of neighboring cells registered in the handover candidate list, and performing handover of the mobile communication terminal to the selected neighboring cell. | 06-16-2011 |
20110142005 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR FAST LAYER 3 HAND-OVER - The present invention relates to a method of seamlessly providing a satellite multimedia Internet service to a fixed subscriber belonging to a lower user network even in a satellite shadow environment and shortening a hand-over processing time between heterogeneous networks by applying a fast layer 3 hand-over technology between satellite and wireless networks in a mobile satellite terminal device. | 06-16-2011 |
20110142006 | Techniques for Optimizing Efficiency in a Situation for a Possible Handover of a Mobile Terminal - A technique is proposed for optimizing efficiency in a situation for a possible handover of a mobile terminal ( | 06-16-2011 |
20110142007 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING MULTIPLE WIRELESS RESOURCES DURING A SOFT HANDOFF - In a wireless communications system operating according to CDMA or the like, when one terminal simultaneously performs communication using multiple wireless resources (e.g., multiple carriers), there was a problem that when it was attempted to guarantee network mobility by the same soft handoff system as in the case where communication was performed using only one wireless resource, efficiency suffered from the viewpoint of network forwarding load, processing load and wireless resource occupancy time. Soft handoff termination is judged and soft handoff is forcibly terminated according to whether or not the data rate obtained for all resources on the network side satisfies a requested rate, based on a reception state notification from a terminal concerning wireless resources. By performing this processing, the soft handoff period is shortened, sufficient received strength in the terminal is maintained and terminal mobility is guaranteed, while at the same time network forwarding load, terminal processing load and wireless resource occupancy time are suppressed to the absolute minimum. | 06-16-2011 |
20110149904 | HANDOVER SCHEMES FOR WIRELESS SYSTEMS - One method of wireless communication involves acknowledging that an anchor base station received a handover indication signal. Another method involves: receiving, from base stations of an active set, offset signals identifying a respective differences in time between a reference time and respective times when the base station received a ranging signal from a mobile station; and transmitting, to the mobile station, a ranging control signal in response to the respective offset signals. Another method involves transmitting, to a mobile station in response to an active set signal, a system configuration information signal including system configuration information of a base station in an active set. Another method involves determining an uplink control channel power parameter in response to channel condition signals received from base stations in an active set. Another method involves transmitting a control signal to base stations in an active set on respective control channels. Apparatuses are also disclosed. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149905 | HANDOVER METHOD BETWEEN eNBs IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for processing a handover procedure in a mobile communication system includes: receiving a message having radio access bearer information for radio resource re-establishment and packet forwarding from a target base station; searching uplink (UL) packet forwarding indicator information included in the message including the radio access bearer information; and forwarding UL/DL packets at a source base station when the UL packet forwarding information is set to ON. The method further includes, when UL packet forwarding indicator is set to ON, having bitmap information, which indicates whether or not to receive uplink (UL) packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) SDU packets, in an SN status transfer message transmitted to the target base station from the source base station. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149906 | METHOD FOR REDUCING PACKET ORDERING TIME OF LAYER 3 HANDOVER AND MOBILE SATELLITE TERMINAL USING THE SAME - There are provided a method for reducing a packet ordering time of layer 3 handover and a mobile satellite terminal using the same. The method for reducing a packet ordering time of layer 3 handover of a mobile router in a home agent of a satellite network connected with the mobile router includes: transmitting a first packet and a second packet to the mobile router through a satellite link of the mobile router; transmitting a sequence control packet to the mobile router through the satellite link; and transmitting a third packet to the mobile router via a wireless link of the mobile router. The sequence control packet provides a reference time for rapidly reordering the second and third packets which reach the mobile router in a reverse sequence. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149907 | CALL SETUP FOR ACCESS DIVISION MULTIPLEXING - A wireless terminal ( | 06-23-2011 |
20110149908 | GSM AND LTE MULTIPLEXING - In a method of operating a wireless terminal, the wireless terminal ( | 06-23-2011 |
20110149909 | METHOD OF BINDING NETWORK-BASED FLOW THROUGH NOTIFICATION OF TERMINAL - A method of binding a network-based service flow is provided. The method binds a network-based service flow through notification of a terminal by allowing the terminal to notify a mobile access gateway (MAG) of binding information of a desired service flow at a specific moment by allowing intervention of the terminal, and allowing the MAG to again notify a local mobility anchor (LMA) of corresponding service flow binding information. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149910 | METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION CHANNEL CONTROL - A base station designates an identification symbol section in each communication frame in order to identify a plurality of transceivers, transmits a predetermined transceiver identification signal through subcarriers granted to the plurality of transceivers by granting a combination of subcarriers to be used in an identification symbol section to each of the plurality of transceivers, generates and stores terminal connection information for each of the plurality of transceivers by receiving information on evaluation of reception quality for the transceiver from the terminal and using the received information, and allocates a communication resource so as to use the subcarrier of the transceiver connected with the terminal for communicating with the terminal. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149911 | Method and System for Mobile Station Handover, and Mobile Station - In a method embodiment, the current serving BS of the MS obtains information about neighboring BSs, and broadcasts the information about the neighboring BSs. The MS scans the neighboring BSs according to the neighboring BS information broadcast by the current serving BS. If no neighboring BS having the same bandwidth as the current serving BS fulfills requirements, the MS scans and measures signal quality of neighboring BSs with a different bandwidth and selects several BSs compliant with signal quality requirements and suitable as target BSs to make up a target BS list. The MS performs handover to a target BS in the target BS list. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149912 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING HANDOVER IN A MULTI-CARRIER COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to an apparatus and method for supporting handover in a communication system using a multi-carrier approach. The method includes transmitting a handover request message to a serving base station (BS) through a first carrier; receiving a handover response message including neighboring base station information and temporary carrier information capable of performing a handover procedure from the serving base station through the first carrier; selecting a target base station (BS) through the neighboring base station information received from the serving base station; transmitting a handover (HO) indication message indicating a handover to the target base station to the serving base station through the first carrier; transmitting a ranging request message for synchronizing an uplink channel with the target base station to the target base station through the temporary carrier; and receiving a ranging response message from the target base station. | 06-23-2011 |
20110158201 | RADIO TERMINAL AND COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A radio terminal ( | 06-30-2011 |
20110164588 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND METHOD OF PERFORMING HANDOVER - Enclosed are a mobile terminal and a method of performing handover. The mobile terminal is connected to a selected network among a plurality of networks sensed in accordance with the movement of the mobile terminal so that handover is performed between different networks and that a service used by the mobile terminal is continuously provided. Therefore, the convenience of a user is improved and network utility is improved. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164589 | CONTROLLING TRANSMISSION CONTROL PROTOCOL (TCP) TRANSMISSIONS IN HANDOVER - Methods and apparatuses are provided that pausing transmission control protocol (TCP) transmissions during or following handover to prevent unwarranted duplicated acknowledgement transmission, which can cause decrease in TCP window size. During handover, transmission on-hold commands can be sent to a TCP layer that indicate to prepare to pause TCP transmissions, immediately pause TCP transmissions, and/or the like. Transmission resume commands can be sent to the TCP layer following handover. In addition, TCP transmissions can be paused following handover to allow data forwarding data to be provisioned to a device from a target base station without duplicated acknowledgement transmission. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164590 | METHOD FOR UE HANDOVER BETWEEN HOME NODE BS - The present invention provides a method for User Equipment (UE) handover between home Node Bs, comprising steps of: sending, by a source home Node B that stores the ID of the connected gateway, a message to the gateway, the message including the gateway ID and a destination home Node B ID; sending by the gateway a message to the destination home Node B identified by the destination home Node B ID to establish a radio bear of the destination home Node B for the UE; sending by the destination home Node B the radio bearer allocated to the UE to the gateway; sending by the gateway the radio bearer to the source home Node B; sending by the source home Node B the radio bearer to the UE; and completing by the UE a handover to the destination home Node B. With the present invention, successful handover between home Node Bs under the same access control can be guaranteed in the case of the same gateway. Meanwhile, it is not necessary to make any modification to the current 3GPP protocol signaling, and the present invention is compliant with the protocol signaling for interfaces Uu and Iu. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164591 | METHOD FOR USER RELOCATION TRIGGERED BY HOME NODE B GATEWAY - A method for user relocation triggered by a Home NodeB Gateway (HGW) is provided, which comprises steps of: transmitting, by the HGW, a relocation request message to a Home NodeB (HNB) to which a User Equipment (UE) belongs; triggering, by the HNB, a relocation procedure to relocate the UE to another NodeB; and transmitting, by the HNB, a relocation response message corresponding to the relocation request message to the HGW. With the present invention, it is possible in a HNB system to implement a UE relocation triggered by a HGW for new scenarios. This scheme enhances the Iu-h interface and facilitates the improvement of service quality of users. Additionally, it is capable of providing users with continuous services in different scenarios. The present method is easy to implement and effective in improving the stability and performance of HNB system. | 07-07-2011 |
20110164592 | HANDOVER METHOD AND MOBILE STATION - A handover method and a mobile station are disclosed in the present invention, and the method includes: the mobile station handing over from a service station to a legacy zone of a target station, and sending a first ranging request message on the legacy zone; the mobile station receiving a first ranging request response message, and acquiring relevant information of the target zone carried in the first ranging request response message; the mobile station switching to the target zone according to the relevant information. The unnecessary procedures in the two handover processes can be reduced and the handover efficiency of the compatible telecommunication system can be enhanced through above technical scheme. | 07-07-2011 |
20110170516 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COORDINATED MULTI-POINT NETWORK OPERATION TO REDUCE RADIO LINK FAILURE - A system and method for implementing call handover (HO) is disclosed. A user equipment (UE) is configured to communicate with a wireless communication network. The UE is configured to transmit a measurement report to at least one of a serving cell and at least one cell of a coordinated multi-point (CoMP) cell set. The UE is also configured to listen for control channel transmissions from at least one of the serving cell and a first cell in the CoMP cell set, receive a resource allocation from at least one of the serving cell and the first cell in the CoMP cell set, and receive an HO command jointly from the serving cell and the first cell in the CoMP cell set. The HO command identifies a target cell. The UE is also configured to perform handover to the target cell identified in the HO command. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170517 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ENABLING SESSION CONTEXT CONTINUITY OF LOCAL SERVICE AVAILABILITY IN LOCAL CELLULAR COVERAGE - Local IP Access (LIPA) allows an IP-capable user equipment (UE) connected via a femto cell direct access to other IP-capable devices in the local IP network. Selected IP Traffic Offload (SIPTO) is used to offload selected types of IP traffic towards a defined IP network close to the UE's point of attachment to the access network. LIPA PDN Connectivity indicates a PDP Context or a PDN Connection that gives access to services located in the local IP network of the femto cell subsystem. SIPTO PDN Connectivity indicates a PDP Context or PDN Connection that allows offload of selected types of IP traffic towards a defined IP network close to the UE's point of attachment to the access network. Systems, devices and methods are described herein that enable the identification of the type of connectivity available to a UE and enable session continuity for local cellular coverage. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170518 | MULTI-MODE TRAFFIC ENGINEERED HANDOVER MANAGEMENT DEVICE AND METHOD FOR A BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS NETWORK - A handover management device (D | 07-14-2011 |
20110170519 | Method and System for Intra Base Station Carrier Handover - A method and a system for intra-BS carrier handover are provided. The method comprises: a mobile station scanning predetermined carriers within the base station based on predetermined rules; obtaining a scanning report comprising channel quality information of part of or all of the predetermined carriers; and sending the scanning report to the base station; the base station obtaining the channel quality information in the scanning report; selecting a target carrier from the predetermined carriers; and informing the mobile station of the selected target carrier via a message; and the mobile station handing over to the target carrier in a predetermined manner in response to the message. By using the method, seamless handover of intra-BS carriers can be performed in a multi-carrier system for ensuring the service continuity of the mobile station to eliminate carrier handover time delay. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170520 | Adaptive Beamforming Configuration Methods And Apparatus For Wireless Access Points Serving As Handoff Indication Mechanisms In Wireless Local Area Networks - In one illustrative example, a technique for use in operating a wireless access point (AP) for serving as a handoff indication mechanism in a first wireless network is described. The handoff indication mechanism is configured to communicate handoff indications in response to mobile devices leaving coverage of the first wireless network, via an RF coverage region of the AP, for mobile device handoff to a second wireless network. The AP is provided in an ingress or egress region of the first wireless network, where it receives RF signals from one or more communication devices and determines and sets wireless transceiver parameters for adjusting boundaries of its RF coverage region. The AP also operates with the adjusted RF coverage region to serve as part of the handoff indication mechanism in the first wireless network, so that the handoff indications are communicated in response to the mobile devices leaving coverage of the first wireless network, via the adjusted RF coverage region, for mobile device handoff to the second wireless network. | 07-14-2011 |
20110176509 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR INFORMING SERVING CELL OF TARGET CELL HANDOVER CAPABILITY - Systems and methods of informing a serving cell of a target cell handover capability are provided. In some cases, a mobile station determines whether inbound handover is possible and communicates this to the serving cell. The mobile station may make this determination based on broadcast information from the target cell. Alternatively, the mobile station may make this determination based on a message generated by a target cell controller that is sent to the mobile station through the serving cell. In another example, the mobile station construes the absence of a response to a cell change notification as an indication that inbound handover to the target cell is not possible. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176510 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR HANDOVER AND DOMAIN TRANSFER IN A TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - The invention relates to a method and a system for a packet switched handover and a domain switch for a wireless communications network comprising a user equipment (UE), a packet switched domain ( | 07-21-2011 |
20110176511 | REDUCING RESOURCE ALLOCATIONS FOR INTER-TECHNOLOGY HANDOVER BETWEEN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - Disclosed is a method for reducing resource allocations for inter-technology handover between heterogeneous wireless communication networks. The method includes a first step of completing network entry and new session registration procedures for a mobile station with a handover target technology network. A next step includes defining an activity mode of the new session. A next step includes waiting for the expiration of a resource timer at the target network. A next step includes assigning the resources for the new session upon the expiration of the timer. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176512 | 1X MESSAGE BUNDLING - A method includes receiving, at a network entity, a circuit switched paging request, wherein the paging request is for a UE that is attached to a packet data network and is registered to a circuit switched network. The method also includes obtaining a calling party number from the circuit switched network, the calling party number being information corresponding to a call from a party calling the UE, and generating a circuit service notification application message comprising more than one message of the circuit switch technology, such that one of message comprises the calling party number. Another operation relates to transmitting, from the network entity to the UE, the circuit service notification application message, the transmitting occurring while the UE is attached to the packet data network and while the UE is operating in an active state for receiving and/or transmitting packet data or signaling messages. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176513 | METHOD FOR PREPARING RANDOM ACCESS PROCEDURES AND TERMINAL THEREOF - A random access procedure between a mobile terminal and a network is performed based upon the characteristics of a RACH preamble. If the RACH preamble was explicitly signaled by the network, a downlink channel is monitored until a new transmission is indicated according to radio resource allocation information received from the network. If the RACH preamble was not explicitly signaled by the network, a contention resolution timer is started and the downlink channel is monitored until the contention resolution timer expires. Such monitoring of downlink channels in a more efficient manner, results in effective reduction in power consumption. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176514 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR FAST NETWORK REENTRY IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A system and method for fast network re-entry in a broadband wireless access communication system. A mobile station transmits a first message requiring fast network re-entry to a base station and performs the fast network re-entry together with the base station when receiving a second message approving the fast network re-entry from the base station. The base station receives the first message, authenticates the first message using final session information of the mobile station that is previously stored in the base station, transmits the second message to the mobile station when succeeding in authentication of the first message, and performs the fast network re-entry together with the mobile station. | 07-21-2011 |
20110182267 | Method, System and Devices for Supporting Handover in Mobile Communication Networks - Handover of a mobile station (MS) from a serving base station (BS) to a target base station in a mobile communication system supporting both MS-initiated handover and BS-initiated handover, is coordinated by ensuring that, both in the case of BS-initiated handover and in the case of MS-initiated handover the mobile station (MS) and the base station (BS) share information, either via a MO_BSHO-REQ message sent from the BS to the MS in the case of BS-initiated HO or via a MO_MSHO-RETQ message sent from the MS to the BS in the case of MS-initiated HO, indicating a target base station for the mobile station (MS) to attempt handover; and the mobile station (MS) sends an information message (MOB_HO-IND) indicating the base station to which handover was attempted. | 07-28-2011 |
20110182268 | OPTIMIZATION OF NON-OPTIMIZED HANDOFF FROM A FIRST ACCESS TECHNOLOGY TO A SECOND ACCESS TECHNOLOGY - A UE and a method are described herein for optimizing a non-optimized handoff from a first access technology (e.g., E-TRAN, WiMAX, UMTS, WiFi, UMB and E-UTRAN) to a second access technology (e.g. 1× RTT, 1× EVDV, HRPD or eHRPD). In one embodiment, the “optimized” non-optimized handoff effectively decreases the mute time that is experienced by the UE during the handoff from the first access technology to the second access technology from around 628 ms to less than 500 ms which is a marked improvement. | 07-28-2011 |
20110182269 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND MOBILE STATION - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes the steps of: transmitting, from an LTE-AS function to an EMM function, a reconnection request, when the LTE-AS function detects that an RRC connection is chanted to an idle state; and transmitting, at the EMM function, a service request, when the EMM function receives the reconnection request and detects that the LTE-AS function is in a coverage area. | 07-28-2011 |
20110182270 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SWITCHING A RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY BETWEEN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS WITH A MULTI-MODE WIRELESS TRANSMIT/RECEIVE UNIT - A method and system for switching a radio access technology (RAT) between wireless communication systems connected to each other while implementing different RATs with a multi-mode WTRU are disclosed. A plurality of wireless communication systems are deployed with overlapping coverage areas wherein each system implements different RATs and are connected to each other such that a service that is provided by one system may be provided through the other system. Each wireless communication system transmits an indication of the existence of an inter-working wireless communication system in a coverage area of each system. The WTRU receives the indication and information regarding the inter-working wireless communication system. The WTRU then initiates a handoff to the inter-working wireless communication system using the received information, whereby the WTRU continues to receive the same services that the WTRU receives from the currently connected wireless communication system through the inter-working wireless communication system. | 07-28-2011 |
20110188468 | RETURNING USER EQUIPMENT TO A SOURCE RADIO ACCESS NETWORK - A device receives a request for a service for a user equipment associated with a source radio access network, and establishes a connection with the user equipment via a circuit switched fallback procedure. The device also receives, from the source radio access network, information associated with one or more source cells, and provides the service to the user equipment through a target radio access network. The device further uses the information to select one of the one or more source cells for the user equipment to return after the service terminates, terminates the service, and returns the user equipment to the selected source cell. | 08-04-2011 |
20110188469 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COMMUNICATION BETWEEN WIRELESS TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS OF DIFFERENT TECHNOLOGY TYPES - For handover between wireless telecommunications networks of different technology types, an air interface is set up between a first node | 08-04-2011 |
20110188470 | HANDLING MOBILE TERMINATED CIRCUIT-SWITCHED CALLS USING AN 802.21 MEDIA INDEPENDENT HANDOVER (MIH) FRAMEWORK - A Media Independent Handover (MIH) server communicates with nodes in a cellular network to perform handover of a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) in the event of an incoming circuit-switched (CS) call. A Gateway Mobile Switching Center (GMSC) and/or Home Location Register (HLR) receive an indication of an incoming call, and may communicate with the MIH server. A determination is made regarding whether the WTRU is active in the cellular network. When required, the MIH server initiates an MIH handover of the WTRU to the cellular network. The WTRU hands over to the cellular network and receives the call. Additionally, an MIH server and a HLR communicate location information associated with a WTRU. The location information may be used by the MIH server and HLR to perform their respective MIH and HLR functionality, and/or to handover the WTRU to a cellular network in the event of an incoming CS call. | 08-04-2011 |
20110188471 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDOVER IN A MOBILE STATION SUPPORTING RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY - A method and apparatus supports Inter-Radio Access Technology (IRAT) Packet Switch (PS) handover during a simultaneous voice and data (SVD) mode in a mobile station that supports a Radio Access Technology (RAT). The method includes determining a state in which a data call is connected through a first system and a voice call is connected through a second system. The MS determines whether handover to the second system should be performed for the data call. A measurement report message that indicates a set of active base stations (BSs) of voice call connection in the second system is generated. And the measurement report message is transmitted to a serving BS of the data call connection in the first system. | 08-04-2011 |
20110188472 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDOVER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus ensure efficient handover in a wireless communication system even when a User Equipment (UE) moves at a high speed. A serving eNB receives interference power information of an uplink (UL) signal and interference increase/decrease information of the UL signal from at least one adjacent eNB. an adjacent eNB, for which the received interference power information indicates that interference power of the UL signal is equal to or greater than a threshold value, is selected as a target eNB for a User Equipment (UE) among the at least one adjacent eNB. Whether handover of the UE is delayed is determined based on the interference increase/decrease information received from the target eNB. And if the handover of the UE is delayed, a handover parameter is transmitted to the UE to perform handover to the target eNB. | 08-04-2011 |
20110188473 | SELF CONFIGURING AND OPTIMIZATION OF CELL NEIGHBORS IN WIRELESS TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS - The present invention relates to a cellular communications network and in particular to the problem of identifying cells for neighbor lists, or handover candidates when the cells are identified by a limited number of non-unique identities. The present invention includes a method for a radio base station, wherein the base station receives reports from one or more terminals in neighbor cells quality and non-unique identities. The match is sought in a neighbor cell list non-unique identity with a unique cell identity. If the match cannot be made without ambiguity, the base station causes the terminal to detect the unique cell identity. If the reason for the ambiguity is the particular cell is not included in the neighbor cell list it is included when its unique identity has been established. The uniquely identified cell is used if it is determined to perform a handover. | 08-04-2011 |
20110188474 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SYNCHRONIZING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICES - According to the present invention, Bluetooth master device offset information is determined and distributed among the master devices within a Bluetooth network. The system either provides an offset to each master device or determines master device offsets and distributes this information to master devices within the system to allow or efficient hand-offs of a slave between master devices. | 08-04-2011 |
20110188475 | APPARATUS, AND AN ASSOCIATED METHOD, FOR PRESERVING COMMUNICATION SERVICE QUALITY LEVELS DURING HAND-OFF OF COMMUNICATIONS IN A RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile station is configured to transmit a sequence of data packets over a wireless network. The station includes a data sequence expander. The expander receives an indication of a pending hand-off for the mobile station from a first network access point to a second network access point and estimates an amount of time prior to occurrence of the hand-off. The expander inserts a number of delay packets into the sequence of data packets in response to receiving the indication of the pending hand-off. The number of delay packets is determined based on the estimated amount of time prior to the occurrence of the hand-off such that the insertion of the delay packets into the sequence of data packets will cause a delay that corresponds to the amount of time prior to occurrence of the hand-off. | 08-04-2011 |
20110188476 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS BASE STATION, WIRELESS TERMINAL, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - The controller of the wireless base station includes: the handover source down link data transfer unit configured to transfer the down link data from the upper layer network to the handover source wireless base station in a case where a connection destination of the wireless terminal is the handover source wireless base station; and the handover target down link data transfer unit configured to switch a transfer destination of the down link data from the handover source wireless base station to the handover target wireless base station and then transfer the down link data to the handover target wireless base station in a case where the connection destination of the wireless terminal needs to be switched from the handover source wireless base station to the handover target wireless base station, and also where the down link data is specific data. | 08-04-2011 |
20110194529 | RANGING BY MOBILE STATION IN LEGACY SUPPORT MODE - Ranging by a mobile station in a legacy support mode is disclosed. According to embodiments of the present invention, S-SFH information transmitted by a base station in a system operating in FDM based uplink mixed mode is configured in a manner different from that of the FDM based uplink mixed mode. And, a mobile station performs a ranging by interpreting S-SFH differently according to a presence or non-presence of the mixed mode. Therefore, the present invention efficiently manages the ranging of the mobile station and reduces unnecessary signaling overhead. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194530 | Systems and Methods of Advertising Handoff - A heterogeneous communication system enables femto Access Points (APs) to advertise handoff related information on a first Radio Access Technology (RAT), such as for receipt by a multi mode mobile device (e.g., a mobile device capable of operation on a plurality of RATs), wherein the handoff related information permits the multi mode mobile device to identify the femto access point on a second RAT. The multi mode mobile device can be connected to a macro node (e.g., a macro base station, an evolved Base Node, etc.) using the first RAT via a Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) air-interface (e.g., 1×, HRPD, eHRPD), while independently reading/decoding overhead messages on the second RAT for connection thereto (e.g., connection to the femto access point on the second RAT.) The second RAT can be another WWAN, a Wireless Local Access Network (WLAN) or a Personal Access Network. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194531 | METHOD OF NETWORK RE-ENTRY IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - A method of performing network re-entry of a mobile station based on restart of a base station and an apparatus for performing the same are disclosed. The method comprises the steps of receiving a first message from a base station, the first message including a restart count of which value is varied whenever the base station is restarted; comparing the restart count value with a count value previously stored; and transmitting a second message to the base station if the count values are different from each other, the second message including a first identifier for identifying the mobile station in respect of connection information (context) of the mobile station and a ranging purpose indication field set to a value indicating network re-entry due to restart of the base station. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194532 | SMART ROAM SYSTEM AND METHOD - Systems and methods for determining when to switch wireless access points from a current wireless access point to a new wireless access point are disclosed. In various embodiments the systems and methods monitor a signal strength received from the current wireless access point, monitor a signal strength received from the new wireless access point and compare the signal strength received from the wireless access points. Switching from the current wireless access point to the new wireless access point can occur, for example, when the signal strength received from the new wireless access point is greater than the signal strength received from the current wireless access point by a first pre-determined value. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194533 | Method of Handling Radio Resource Reconfiguration - A method of handling radio resource reconfiguration for a mobile device in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method includes establishing at least one data radio bearer (DRB) and an Evolved Packet System (EPS)-bearer identity of the least one DRB, wherein the least one DRB is associated with a first radio resource configuration; indicating that establishment of the at least one DRB and the EPS-bearer identity of the at least one DRB is illegal when the mobile device reverts back to a second radio resource configuration from the first radio resource configuration. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194534 | ESTABLISHING COLOCATED SECOND CELL USING A SECOND SCRAMBLING CODE BY A FEMTO BASE STATION - In a cellular communications network, it may be desirable for a large number of basestations to share one or a small number of scrambling codes. When a basestation identifies a desired scrambling code, which is also being used by another nearby basestation, steps are taken such that a location area update is triggered whenever a mobile communications device moves from a coverage area of the nearby basestation into a coverage area of said basestation. Further, the basestation establishes a first cell, using the desired scrambling code, and also establishes a second cell also served by the basestation, using a second scrambling code. By ensuring that mobile devices are preferentially served by the second cell, the possibility of interference with the nearby basestation is reduced. | 08-11-2011 |
20110194535 | QoS Management for Self-Backhauling in LTE - A method manages bearers over a first wireless link between a self-backhauled base station and a base station, where the self-backhauled base station serves one or more user equipments (UEs) via one or more second wireless links in a network. The method is implemented at the self-backhauled base station and includes identifying changes in numbers and/or characteristics of UE bearers multiplexed onto a backhaul bearer associated with the first wireless link. The method further includes dynamically reconfiguring resources allocated to the backhaul beare | 08-11-2011 |
20110200005 | METHOD OF SUPPORTING MOBILITY USING SECURITY TUNNEL - Enclosed is a method of supporting mobility using a security tunnel. For the movement of a terminal in a local network and the movement of a terminal to an external network, an active tunnel and a standby tunnel are set to provide mobility to the terminal. When the local network moves, mobility for the local network is provided. The stability of a network is guaranteed using security connection. | 08-18-2011 |
20110200006 | HANDOVER METHOD OF MOBILE TERMINAL BETWEEN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS - The present invention relates to a handover method of a mobile terminal between heterogeneous networks. The present invention may provide a handover method ensuring service continuity between heterogeneous networks by transmitting an IP address of a mobile terminal to a mobile IP management server and activating or inactivating a PDP context when the mobile terminal connected to one of a mobile communication network or a wireless LAN is handed over to the other. | 08-18-2011 |
20110200007 | INTERWORKING BETWEEN SYSTEMS USING DIFFERENT IP MOBILITY MANAGEMENT PROTOCOLS - Systems and methods allow 3GPP and non-3GPP access with interworking between GTP-based networks and PMIP-based networks. For handover attachment of a UE, an IWP can be provided the address of the PGW which was used in the initial attachment of the UE so that, for example, an IP address can be maintained for an ongoing data connection established with the UE. Alternatively, the same IWP can operate as the proxy for all data connections with the UE such that the IWP is aware of the PGW used for the initial attachment and can reuse the same PGW for handover. | 08-18-2011 |
20110200008 | MEDIA INDEPENDENT HANDOVER FOR MOBILITY - A method and apparatus for establishing a wireless communication link using a radio access technology selected from a plurality of radio access technologies are provided. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) may include a plurality of network devices, each configured to communicate via a different radio access technology. The WTRU may transmit measurement information including measurement reports for the plurality of radio access technologies to a network device. The WTRU may receive a link selection decision from the network device and may establish a wireless communication link in response to the decision. The link may be established for handover of a communication session from another radio access technology. | 08-18-2011 |
20110200009 | NAT TRAVERSAL FOR MOBILE NETWORK DEVICES - Traversal of a Network Address Translator (NAT) can be facilitated for a mobile device configured to communicate with one or more other devices over a network via one or more wireless access points. A direction of travel can be estimated for the mobile device. One or more wireless access points the mobile device is likely to encounter can be predicted using the estimated direction of travel. Information regarding behavior of one or more NATs associated with the predicted wireless access point(s) can be predicted. Such information can be stored in such a way that the information is retrievable by one or more other devices or using the information to traverse one or more of the NATs. Alternatively, information can be retrieved regarding behavior of one or more NATs associated with the predicted wireless access points. This information can be used to traverse one or more of the NATs. | 08-18-2011 |
20110200010 | Method, System, and Device for Network Handoff - A method, a system, and a device for network handoff is disclosed. A first evolved Access Network (eAN) sends a session transfer request to the target eAN that corresponds to the network handoff request. The first eAN receives a session transfer response from the target eAN. The first eAN sends a Traffic Channel Assignment (TCA) message to a User Equipment (UE) based on the session transfer response, so that the UE can switch from a Long Term Evolution (LTE) network to an evolved High Rate Packet Data (eHRPD) network based on the TCA message. | 08-18-2011 |
20110200011 | METHODS, APPARATUSES AND COMPUTER SOFTWARE FOR EXTENDING THE MME-GANC INTERFACE TO REPORT WHICH UES HAVE REGISTERED FOR THE GAN TO TUNNEL CS VOICE OVER EVOLVED PACKET SYSTEM (EPS) - A system and method for handing over a User Equipment (UE) from a Packet-Switched network to a Circuit-Switched network. A Generic Access Network Controller (GANC) receives a registration message from the UE with a temporary UE identity (GUTI) and uses the GUTI to identify a Mobility Management Entity (MME) controlling a connection with the UE. The GANG informs the MME whether the UE is registered to use Circuit Switched over Long Term Evolution (CS over LTE) signaling using a Generic Access Network (GAN). If so, the MME selectively directs to the GANG, handover signaling relating to the handover of the UE. If not, the MME selectively directs the handover signaling to a Mobile Switching Center (MSC). If the UE changes to a new MME, the new MME is informed whether the UE is registered to use CS over LTE using the GAN. | 08-18-2011 |
20110200012 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, GATEWAY APPARATUS, TERMINAL ALLOCATION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A wireless communication system of the present invention includes: terminals; a base station that performs wireless communication with the terminals; a gateway apparatus that manages the terminals and the base station; and a server apparatus that authenticates the terminals. The gateway apparatus includes: at least one C-plane processor that processes C-plane; and N U-plane processors that process U plane. Each of the N U-plane processors notifies the C-plane processor of its own load status. The server apparatus notifies the C-plane processor of service levels of target terminals that try to perform entry to a network in which the base station and the gateway apparatus are located. The C-plane processor allocates, based on the load status of each of the N U-plane processors and the service levels of the target terminals, one of the N U-plane processors as an entry destination to the target terminals. | 08-18-2011 |
20110200013 | HANDOVER CONTROL SYSTEM, USER TERMINAL, SIGNALING RELAY APPARATUS, AND SESSION CONTROL APPARATUS - The invention discloses a technique to adequately control a handover of a user terminal in a data communication network and to decrease the number of signalings. According to this technique, when address of a user terminal (UE ( | 08-18-2011 |
20110206001 | Methods and Apparatus for Reliable Inter Radio Access Network Handover - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, a method comprises receiving at a first network node an inter-radio access technology (RAT) signaling message from a source node, a handover signaling message including inter-RAT handover information including a START packet switched (START PS) value; determining whether the START PS value is reliable prior to handing over to a second network node at least based in part on the source node from which the START PS value is received and inter-RAT handover information reliability indicator; building an inter-RAT handover information reliability indicator to indicate whether the START PS value is reliable and including the inter-RAT handover info reliability indicator in a second signaling message; and forwarding the second signaling message to the second network node. | 08-25-2011 |
20110206002 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDOVER BETWEEN COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND BROADCAST NETWORK - An exemplary embodiment of the present invention provides a method of commanding, by a handover control apparatus, a group of terminals to perform handover from a broadcasting network to a communication network, the method comprising generating a handover indication message including service information for identifying the group of terminals and transmitting the handover indication message to the group of terminals. | 08-25-2011 |
20110206003 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDLING SRVCC IN AN INTER RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY HANDOVER - The techniques introduced herein provide a system and method for determining whether an inter-RAT handover is an SRVCC handover, and for performing the subsequent SRVCC handover. The techniques include receiving a handover command message that does not include SRVCC related information elements, for example “RAB info to replace,” but continuing with an SRVCC handover using a circuit-switched RAB provided in the information for setup. The techniques also include receiving a handover command message that does include SRVCC related information elements and performing the SRVCC handover by an alternative method. | 08-25-2011 |
20110206004 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING HAND-OVER - A method of performing hand-over in a personal basic service set (PBSS) including a plurality of stations and one coordinator is provided. An association request frame comprising PCP capability information, and requesting to associate to the PBSS, is received from each of the stations. The PCP capability information comprises information regarding at least one of whether each of the stations supports a power source capability of continuous power supply, whether each of the stations supports a channel time allocation function, and whether each of the stations supports a network clustering function. An association response frame, indicating whether the association request received from each of the stations is approved, is transmitted to each of the stations, and a priority to be a coordinator of the stations is determined based on the PCP capability information. Hand-over is performed with one of the stations according to the determined priority. | 08-25-2011 |
20110206005 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, MOBILE SWITCHING CENTER, AND MOBILE STATION - Disclosed is a mobile communication method having: a step wherein, when the bearer status changes for a cell under the control of a WCDMA mobile communication system while the location of a mobile station (UE) is registered with a WCDMA mobile switching center (SGSN) and an LTE mobile switching center (MME), a synchronization process is performed on the bearer status of the mobile station (UE) between the WCDMA mobile switching center (SGSN) and the LTE mobile switching center (MME); and a step wherein the WCDMA mobile switching center (SGSN) notifies the mobile station (UE) that the synchronization process has occurred. If the bearer status has changed and the mobile station (UE) has received the aforementioned notification, the location of the mobile station (UE) is not registered with the LTE mobile switching center (MME) when moved from a cell under the control of the WCDMA mobile communication system to a cell under the control of the LTE mobile communication system. | 08-25-2011 |
20110206006 | SIGNALING EXCHANGE FOR HANDOVER CONTROL FOR WIRELESS NETWORKS - Various example embodiments are disclosed herein. According to an example embodiment, a technique may include transmitting, from a mobile station to a base station in a wireless network, a message (e.g., a subscriber station basic capability (SBC) request message) indicating whether or not the mobile station supports base station-controlled handover for the mobile station. The technique may also include receiving, by the mobile station from the base station, a message (e.g., a subscriber station basic capability (SBC) response message) indicating whether or not the base station supports base-station controlled handover. | 08-25-2011 |
20110206007 | Active Set Management Enhancement for Reliable Soft Handoff in 1XEV-DO System - A method and system for connection management in a wireless data network, such as a 1×EV-DO network adds connections to new network sectors upon receipt of a connection request from an active terminal, but removes data connections that the active terminal requests to be dropped only after confirmation from the active terminal that a channel allocation message has been received and applied. The active network maintains an active set of connections that is at least as large as the active set maintained by the active terminal and does not initiate a connection termination if no confirmation of the channel allocation message is received. This allows for a reduction in the number of dropped connections. | 08-25-2011 |
20110206008 | PACKET SWITCHED RADIO TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING HARD HANDOVER AND METHOD FOR HARD HANDOVER - A packet switched radio telecommunication system supporting hard handover adapts Always_on technology to a link between a target packet data serving node (PDSN) and a support PDSN. The support PDSN assigns a temporary IP address to a mobile terminal in its service area, and transmits handover data and the mobile terminal's temporary IP address to the target PDSN via a direct link when the mobile terminal leaves the service area. The target PDSN, upon receiving a registration request for the temporary IP address from the mobile terminal moved to its service area, temporarily registers the temporary IP address in an IP pool. The target PDSN receives down-link frame data for the mobile terminal at the temporarily registered IP address from the support PDSN via the direct link. A new temporary IP address is assigned by the target PDSN when data transmission/reception is complete to the mobile terminal. | 08-25-2011 |
20110206009 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTER-SYSTEM HANDOVER - An inter-system handover system for a wireless communication system supports hand-down and hand-up of user equipment (UE) to different radio access technologies, including synchronous and asynchronous systems. Latency and handover connection failures are reduced by an access node (nodeB) broadcasting information about neighboring systems (targets) when the UE reception (RX) capability is both inside or outside the reception range of the target. A single RX chain is sufficient, although transitioning between a wireless wide area network (WWAN) to a wireless local area network may (WLAN) may advantageously benefit from simultaneous operation on two Rx chains. Optimized list of neighboring RAT systems (targets) are broadcast from the network, including measurement parameters and reporting instructions. Thereby, UE-driven reporting minimizes latencies. UE reports other-system searches to network only if needed for a handover. In addition, handover requests can be bundled with other-system measurement information, if necessary, for additional efficiencies. | 08-25-2011 |
20110206010 | Method and apparatus for SR-VCC Revocation procedure - The basic concept of the invention is to expand the capabilities of the MSC Server enhanced for SR-VCC and of the SCC AS to support a “session transfer revocation” procedure. To allow for such procedure it is envisaged that a MSC-Server enhanced for SR-VCC being involved in a Handover procedure for a call from a source RAN, e.g. E-UTRAN/UTRAN HSPA, to a target RAN, e.g. GERAN/UTRAN CS, sends an indication that a session transfer for said call should be performed towards the target RAN. Once the MSC-Server receives from a mobility management entity, such as MME or SGSN, of the source RAN an indication that a relocation request having initiated the session transfer indication is canceled, the MSC-Server may send an indication that the session transfer should be cancelled towards the SCC AS in the IMS which has performed the session transfer. | 08-25-2011 |
20110206011 | RADIO TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING APPARATUS AND METHOD, TERMINAL APPARATUS, BASE STATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A terminal apparatus ( | 08-25-2011 |
20110211553 | Enabling IPV6 Mobility with NAT64 - A method for maintaining connectivity between a mobile node and a corresponding node when the mobile node connects to a foreign network, where the foreign network and the home network are Internet protocol version 6 (IPv6) networks but the corresponding node is an Internet protocol version 4 (IPv4) node. The method includes receiving at the home agent node an IPv6 care-of address, determining that the IPv6 care-of address belongs to the foreign network and that the foreign NAT64 node has a prefix to to generate virtual IPv6 addresses and sending a prefix binding request message to a home NAT64 node to bind the prefix to the home address of the mobile node for translation between IPv6 and IPv4. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211554 | Method and Device for Selecting a Network Node for Handover and Communication System Comprising Such Device - A method and a device are provided for selecting a network node for handover of a mobile terminal is provided, wherein said selection is based on a profile information of said mobile terminal including at least two networks that are coupled with different levels of integration. Furthermore, a communication system comprising such device is suggested. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211555 | METHOD TO HANDOVER A SUBSCRIBER BETWEEN DIFFERENT BASE STATIONS IN A MULTI-LAYERED WIRELESS NETWORK - A method and system are provided for enabling an MS operative in a multi-layer wireless network, to be handed over to a target BS associated with another one of the multi-layers. By the method provided, if it is required that the MS which has not yet been provided with information that relates to a potential target BS associated with a layer different from the one with which its currently serving BS, be handed over to such a target BS, then upon receiving an acknowledgement from the target BS indicating its capability to provide service to the MS, a message is transmitted to the MS that comprises information to enable the MS to perform a fast network re-entry in order to communicate with the target BS. Next, a handover procedure between the MS and the target BS is initiated, during which the MS performs a fast network re-entry. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211556 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR CELL HANDOVER - A method apparatus and system for cell handover are provided. The method includes the following steps. User equipment (UE) initiates a cell handover. If the UE is not in a downlink discontinuous reception state, the cell handover is performed when the UE is not in the downlink discontinuous reception state. If the UE is in a downlink discontinuous reception state, the UE exits the downlink discontinuous reception state and performs the cell handover when the UE is not in the downlink discontinuous reception state. The embodiments of the present invention prevent the problem that the UE cannot receive a handover indication command during the cell handover in time because the UE is in the downlink discontinuous reception state, thus reducing time delay of the cell handover, avoiding longer service interruption, and reducing the call drop rate. | 09-01-2011 |
20110211557 | HANDOVER PROCESSING METHOD, AND MOBILE NODE, CONNECTION MANAGING APPARATUS AND BASE STATION USED IN THAT METHOD - Disclosed is a technique which provides a handover processing method and the like which enable a smooth handover without service interruption and allow a desired handover to be performed. The technique includes the steps of: generating by a mobile node | 09-01-2011 |
20110211558 | HANDOVER METHOD AND MOBILE TERMINAL AND HOME AGENT USED IN THE METHOD - Disclosed is a technique to provide a handover method that can improve the communication efficiency by reducing tunnel overhead between a mobile node and a home agent. When the mobile node (UE) ( | 09-01-2011 |
20110211559 | DATA FORWARDING METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR VERTICAL HANDOVER - A data forwarding method and system is provided for avoiding data loss during a vertical handover by forwarding data through an IP tunnel established between a newly introduced network entity called a Data Forwarding Function of the serving network and a Forward Attachment Function of a target network. A data forwarding method of a data forwarding unit located in a serving network for a vertical handover according to the present invention includes receiving an address of a forwarding attachment unit located in a target network and a data forwarding preparation request that are transmitted by a user equipment; establishing an Internet Protocol (IP) tunnel to the forwarding attachment unit according to the data forwarding preparation request; and forwarding, when a vertical handover is initiated, handover packets to the forwarding attachment unit through the IP tunnel. | 09-01-2011 |
20110216735 | LEGACY AND ADVANCED ACCESS SERVICE NETWORK INTERNETWORKING - Embodiments of the present disclosure describe methods, apparatus, and system configurations for transferring wireless connections among legacy and advanced access service networks. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216736 | System and Method for Supporting Bandwidth Requests in a Handover - A system and method for supporting bandwidth requests in a handover are provided. A method for mobile station operations includes transmitting a first message, receiving a second message responsive to the first message, and initiating a handover with the target controller and a serving controller. The first message includes an incremental bandwidth request, the second message includes an indicator indicating that a target controller has allocated resources at least equal to a total bandwidth required by the mobile station, and the total bandwidth required by the mobile station is provided by a serving controller or maintained by the target controller. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216737 | SYSTEMS, METHODS, AND MEDIA FOR IMPLEMENTING CALL HANDOFF BETWEEN NETWORKS - Systems, methods, and media for implementing call handoff between networks are provided, in some embodiments, systems for implementing call handoff between networks are provided, the systems comprising.: at least one device that: receives a call from a first endpoint; establishes a connection between the first end-point and a conference; calls a second endpoint: establishes a connection between the second end point and the conference; and when one of the first endpoint and the second endpoint is able to be connected to a different network from a current network which the one of the first endpoint and the second endpoint is connected to the conference: establishes a connection between the conference and the one of the first endpoint and the second endpoint via the different network; and removes the connection via the current network between the one of the first endpoint and the second endpoint and the conference. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216738 | Method and System for Mobile Station Acquisition - A system and method for mobile station acquisition are presented. A preferred embodiment comprises a control message that contains additional information than would be found in a neighbor advertisement MAC management message. This control message contains enough information to allow the mobile station to locate, synchronize, and acquire service from a separate base station for a handoff process. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216739 | RESOURCE ALLOCATION METHOD FOR CONTROL MESSAGE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention realtes to a resource allocation method of a base station. The method includes generating a packet data unit that includes a first field and a downlink control message, wherein the first field indicates whether unsolicited resource is to be allocated for an uplink control message, transmitting the generated packet data unit to the terminal, allocating resources for the uplink control message, and transmitting the allocated resources to the terminal. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216740 | HANDOVER BETWEEN LEGACY AND NON-LEGACY WIMAX NETWORKS - Embodiments of a system and method for handover and zone switching between legacy and non-legacy base stations are provided. In certain embodiments, a fast ranging IE allocation is used to transfer a dedicated allocation to a mobile station for ranging with a target base station. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216741 | SEAMLESS CELL RECONFIGURATION IN BROADBAND WIRELESS NETWORKS - Embodiments of a system and method for wireless communication are provided. In certain embodiments, systems and methods for providing seamless reconfiguration of a network which incorporate known features of the network. In some embodiments, the mobile station implements a hand over from one physical base station to the same physical base station, so as to allow that base station to reconfigure and update configuration parameters. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216742 | METHOD FOR SUPPORTING HANDOVER MECHANISMS - A method for supporting handover mechanisms, in particular Media Independent Handover (MIH) mechanism according to the IEEE 802.21 standard, wherein a user equipment (UE) attaches to an access network (AN) via points of attachment (PoAs), wherein signalling messages are exchanged between the entities participating in the handover process, in particular between the user equipment and the points of attachment, and wherein the handover mechanism supports changing the network connection of the user equipment from one of the points of attachment—current point of attachment (PoA)—to another one of the points of attachment—target point of attachment—while maintaining all ongoing communication of the user equipment, is characterized in that information about the user equipment's ongoing communication is added to the signalling messages exchanged in the handover process, wherein the information is employed to treat individual traffic flows of the user equipment's ongoing communication selectively during the handover process. | 09-08-2011 |
20110216743 | OPTIMIZATION OF HANDOVERS TO UNTRUSTED NON-3GPP NETWORKS - The invention relates to a method for ensuring IP session continuity upon a handover of a mobile node to a non-3GPP network, wherein an ongoing IP session of the mobile node goes via a packet data network gateway. For non-3GPP networks it is necessary to discover a security gateway and to then establish the corresponding tunnels to the ePDG to form the new data path; a security tunnel between the mobile node and the security gateway, and an IP tunnel between the packet data network gateway and the security gateway. In order to prepare the handover to possible non-3GPP accesses, the two tunnels are pre-established, however maintained deactivated until their use is actually needed. Accordingly, when handing over to the non-3GPP network, the IP session may be continued without any significant interruption by activating the already established tunnels. | 09-08-2011 |
20110222508 | HANDOFF METRIC FOR MULTIPLE TRANSMISSION TECHNOLOGIES - Provided are methods and systems of managing a handoff in a multimedia communication network. Embodiments include estimating the voice quality of a communication route in the network. The voice quality may be estimated by using a total voice quality metric involving subtracting various impairments to the voice signal. Impairments may result from the type of vocoder in a communication route, the error or loss associated with RF links and network links, and delays in the communication route. After subtracting the impairments to obtain the total voice quality metric for the communication route, the total voice quality metric may be compared with a threshold and/or other total voice quality metrics of other communication routes to determine whether and when a handoff should be made. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222509 | FAST RESELECTION TO OTHER RAT AFTER CSFB - A wireless apparatus having one or more first radios, one or more second radios, interface control, and a processor. The one or more first radios are coupled to one or more first communication links. The one or more second radios are coupled to one or more second communication links. The interface control is coupled to the radios, and selects and executes communications over a specific one of the one or more second communication links following termination of a fallback session over one of the one or more first communication links, where RAT information is employed by the interface control to select the specific one of the one or more second communication links. The processor receives, processes, and provides to the interface control the RAT information, where the RAT information is received prior to termination of the fallback session or as part of termination of the fallback session. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222510 | Wireless Network for Automation, Realtime and/or Industrial Applications - The present invention describes a wireless network, in particular for automation, realtime and/or industrial applications, having at least two access network nodes and at least one radio station for wireless communication with at least one of the at least two access network nodes, wherein each of the at least two access network nodes uses a data channel selected from a set of available selectable data channels for wireless communication with a radio station assigned to it in each case, wherein a control communication channel which is distinct from the selectable data channels is provided in addition, and each of the at least two access network nodes is embodied for wirelessly sending information messages over the control communication channel and the at least one radio station is embodied for receiving the control communication channel. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222511 | Method, System, and Apparatus for Tracing User Equipment in a Network - A method, system, and apparatus for tracing a user in a network are provided. The method includes activating a task for tracing a user in a network according to a tracing task message sent by an Element Management System (EMS), and sending the tracing task to an Evolved NodeB (eNodeB) through an S1 link. Therefore, the activated task for tracing user in a network can be sent through the S1 link, so as to realize tracing the user in the network in the network. | 09-15-2011 |
20110222512 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR USE IN A CONNECTED STATE HANDOFF OF AN ACCESS TERMINAL - A method of sending reset message sequence number is provided. During a connected state handoff of an access terminal (AT) between a source access network (AN) and a target AN, the source AN sends a reset message sequence number of the AT to the target AN. The source AN adds the reset message sequence number of the AT to the message sent to the target AN. Thereby, the problem in the existing systems that the source AN cannot send the reset message sequence number of the AT to the target AN and, thus, the target AN cannot perform a reset process on the AT when the AT is switched from the source AN to the target AN, is solved. An access network (AN) and a communication system are also provided. | 09-15-2011 |
20110228743 | HANDOVER FROM SERVING BASE STATION TO TARGET BASE STATION - The present invention relates to a method and system for performing a handover from a serving base station to a target base station. The method for performing handover includes: transmitting a signal for detecting a base station searching signal (BS-SS) from the serving base station to a user equipment, wherein the user equipment receives the signal for detecting the BS-SS and broadcasts the BS-SS to the plurality of base stations; receiving from a target base station a request for the signal for detecting the BS-SS, wherein the target base station is one of the plurality of base stations; transmitting the signal for detecting the BS-SS from the serving base station to the target base station; receiving a receipt signal of the BS-SS from the target base station; identifying the user equipment, which had broadcasted the BS-SS to the plurality of base stations, based on the receipt signal of the BS-SS; and performing a handover from the serving base station to the target base station based on the confirmation of the serving base station. | 09-22-2011 |
20110228744 | Application Identification in Mobile Networks - An apparatus includes a unit configured to perform an application identification on a traffic flow, and a unit configured to generate identification information as a result of the application identification. A unit is configured to store identification information, and a unit is configured to provide identification information during a connection handover procedure. | 09-22-2011 |
20110228745 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSMITTING A HOPPING PILOT BEACON AND METHOD FOR DIRECTING A TERMINAL HANDOFF - The present invention discloses a method for transmitting a Hopping Pilot Beacon (HPB). The method includes the following steps: an HPB cell selects one resource among remaining resources used to transmit a traffic carrier frequency; the HPB cell uses the selected resource to transmit information on each of HPB frequencies rotationally and periodically, where the information on each of HPB frequencies includes the same SYNC, PILOT, and PAGING channel parameters. The present invention also discloses a method for directing a Mobile Station (MS) in an idle state to complete an inter-frequency handoff, an HPB transmitting apparatus, and a communications system thereof. The present invention helps to reduce the system cost and can direct an MS in the idle state to complete an inter-frequency handoff quickly. | 09-22-2011 |
20110228746 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING PDCP STATUS REPORT - A method of transmitting PDCP (Packet Data Convergence Protocol) status reports, is performed by a mobile terminal by receiving, from an upper layer, a request for PDCP (Packet Data Convergence Protocol) re-establishment; detecting whether there are any out-of-sequence PDCP SDUs (service data units) stored; and if there is at least one out-of-sequence PDCP SDU stored, allocating a bitmap field of length in bits equal to the number of PDCP SNs from and not including the first out-of-sequence PDCP SDU up to and including a last out-of-sequence PDCP SDU. | 09-22-2011 |
20110235614 | TECHNIQUE FOR AT COMMAND HANDLING IN RELATION TO AN EPS PACKET DOMAIN - A method and system of facilitating the use of AT commands specified for a General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) packet domain in relation to an Evolved Packet System (EPS) packet domain is provided. An embodiment of the present invention comprises defining, in response to an AT command directed to the definition of a secondary Packet Data Protocol (PDP) context, an EPS Service Data Flow (SDF) on the basis of the secondary PDP context. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235615 | MANAGEMENT OF WLAN AND WWAN COMMUNICATION SERVICES TO A MULTI-MODE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A mesh network communication system includes a plurality of access points connected to a wireless local area network (WLAN) controller where at least one of the plurality access points is a detection access point (DAP) that receives reverse link (RL) wireless wide area network (WWAN) signals transmitted from a multi-mode wireless communication device. Based on an intercepted RL WWAN signal, the DAP forwards reverse link (RL) information to the WLAN controller. Based on the RL information, the WLAN controller generates and sends, to the WWAN communication system, a device to access point association list (device-AP association list) comprising one or more device identifiers associated with one or more target access point identifier. The device identifier uniquely identifies a multi-mode wireless communication device within a maximum proximity of a target access point identified by the target access point identifier. The WWAN system applies the device-AP association list to efficiently manage handoffs from the WWAN system to access points in the mesh network. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235616 | HANDOFF BETWEEN BASE STATIONS OF DIFFERENT PROTOCOL REVISIONS IN A CDMA SYSTEM - Techniques for supporting handoff of a terminal between base stations of different protocol revisions (P_REVs) in a CDMA system. One technique includes performing a handoff of the terminal from a first base station to a second base station. The handoff is performed while the terminal is in an active call using a first service configuration with the first base station. The first base station supports a first protocol revision and the second base station supports a second protocol revision that is later than the first protocol revision. A first message is sent indicative of a change in packet zone. A request is received to originate a new call with a second service configuration. The new call is maintained with the second service configuration between the terminal and the second base station. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235617 | CENTRALIZED RADIO NETWORK CONTROLLER - In a radio access network, novel systems and methods reduce processing delay, and improve integration with IP networks, by separating user data from connection management and control data at a Node B or at a base station. The user data are routed to an IP (Internet Protocol) switch, whereas the connection management and control data are routed to a centralized radio network controller (RNC). Pursuant to a second embodiment of the invention, a centralized RNC provides improved radio resource management (RRM) functionality by handing all connection management and control data for a plurality of Node B's, thereby simplifying the switching of user data throughout the radio access network. Pursuant to a third embodiment of the invention, a smart IP switch is equipped to switch user data without core network (CN) involvement. Downlink user data are switched independently of uplink user data. | 09-29-2011 |
20110235618 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SOFT HANDOFF IN MOBILE BROADBAND SYSTEMS - The present invention provides a method and system for facilitating efficient handoff and data throughput in mobile broadband communication systems. Methods implemented by a system constructed in accordance with the principles of the present invention include selectively enabled soft handoff, performing Layer 2 bearer functions at the base station and using the mobile device to coordinate soft handoff and interference avoidance without the need for a centralized coordination function. | 09-29-2011 |
20110243093 | Method and Apparatus for Pre-Uplink Synchronization in TD-SCDMA Handover - Certain aspects of the present disclosure propose techniques and apparatus for pre-uplink synchronization in Time Division Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access (TD-SCDMA) handover. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243094 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO FACILITATE SUPPORT FOR MULTI-RADIO COEXISTENCE - A method of wireless communication includes identifying at least one current resource for which a coexistence issue is present. The method also includes submitting a message to a base station that includes information indicative of the coexistence issue for the current resource(s). The handover request may include information indicative of the resource for which the coexistence issue is present and/or a desired future resource. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243095 | Facilitating Baton Handover in Multi-Carrier TD-SCDMA Communications Systems - Handover processes in multi-carrier carrier time division-synchronous code division multiple access (TD-SCDMA) systems include a two-step handover process. When handover of a user equipment is warranted, a hard handover is performed within a source cell of the system from a first frequency to a second frequency. A baton handover is then performed from the second frequency at the source cell to the second frequency at a target cell. In another aspect, a user equipment receives an assignment of an uplink time slot at a target cell that was selected to prevent the uplink time slot from being proximal to a downlink time slot of a source cell. The user equipment then performs the inter-frequency baton handover using the uplink time slot. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243096 | NETWORK APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING A MESSAGE TO A TARGET NETWORK APPARATUS IN THE WIMAX SYSTEM - A network apparatus for transmitting a message to a target network apparatus is described, which may comprise a trigger device, a target profile determining device, a message preparation device and a message transmitting device. The trigger device may be adapted for determining and/or detecting a trigger for transmitting a message. The target profile determining device may be adapted for determining a profile of the target network apparatus. The message preparation device may be adapted for preparing a message for transmitting the message to the target network apparatus in accordance with the determined profile of the target network apparatus. The transmitting device may be adapted for transmitting the prepared message to the target apparatus. | 10-06-2011 |
20110243097 | Interface Setup for Communications Network with Femtocells - A method of operating a communications network comprises determining that an interface needs to be established between a femto radio base station gateway ( | 10-06-2011 |
20110249649 | Methods and Systems for Transitioning a Communication Session from a Source Base Station to a Target Base Station without Terminating the Session - Methods and systems are provided for transitioning an active communication session of a mobile station from being conducted over a communication path that includes a source base station to being conducted over a communication path that includes a target base station, without terminating the communication session. A wireless communication device situated within a source coverage area of a source base station operates as a clone of the mobile station that is situated within a source coverage area of the source base station and also within a target coverage area of the target base station. The transition involves the clone relaying the communication session between the source base station and the mobile station; meanwhile, the target base station (i) establishes an air-interface connection with the mobile station and (ii) detects a handoff-completion trigger, and responsively serves the mobile station over the air-interface connection with respect to the communication session. | 10-13-2011 |
20110249650 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING A RICH CALL CAPABILITY INDICATION IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The invention relates to a method for establishing a circuit switched call between a first electronic device and a second electronic device over a circuit switched communication system, exchanging of capabilities of the first electronic device and the second electronic device, establishing a media component between the first electronic device and the second electronic device over a packet switched communication system. In the method also radio access network information is obtained to the first electronic device. The first electronic device requests an in-band signal to the second electronic device for indicating an availability of a type of the media component. The second electronic device detects the in-band signal in the second electronic device and indicates the availability of the type of the media component on a user interface of the second electronic device. | 10-13-2011 |
20110249651 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING COOPERATIVE HANDOVER IN BROADBAND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for supporting a cooperative handover in a broadband wireless communication system. A method for operating a mobile station (MS) for a cooperative handover in a broadband wireless communication system includes determining a handover to a target BS and omitting a CID update process of the MS during the handover process to the target BS, wherein the CID of the MS is shared beforehand between a serving BS and the target BS. | 10-13-2011 |
20110249652 | Methods and Apparatuses for Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SRVCC) from CS to LTE - A method for a call control node (MSC Server) enhanced for Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SRVCC) allowing for a session transfer of a call involving a User Equipment (UE) of a handover party from a circuit switched (CS) access towards a target packet switched (PS) access is provided, the call involving said handover party and another party, said call being anchored in an Service Centralization and Continuity Application Server (SCC AS) of the IP-Multimedia-Subsystem (IMS), the method comprising the steps of receiving ( | 10-13-2011 |
20110249653 | SECURE AND SEAMLESS WAN-LAN ROAMING - Systems and methods are described for secure and seamless roaming between internal and external networks. Double and triple tunnels may be used to connect a mobile node to a correspondent host. A mobile node may include the ability to connect to two networks simultaneously to enable seamless roaming between networks. | 10-13-2011 |
20110249654 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR IMPLEMENTING USER EQUIPMENT HANDOVER - A method, an apparatus, and a system for implementing User Equipment (UE) handover are disclosed. A Mobility Management Entity (MME) obtains address information of a serving Interworking Function (IWF) by interacting with a function entity in a network and notifies the IWF to process handover according to the obtained IWF address information, so that the MME is capable of obtaining the address information of the serving IWF. Therefore, the normal proceeding of a UE handover procedure in a Circuit Switched over Packet Switched (CSoEPS) scenario is ensured. | 10-13-2011 |
20110255506 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR INTEGRATION OF IP-BASED DATA LINK MANAGEMENT IN EXISTING AVIONICS ARCHITECTURES - Systems and methods for integration of IP-based data link management in existing avionics architectures are provided. In one embodiment, a communications management unit comprises: a legacy router providing access to a first set of air-ground data links; an internet protocol router providing access to a second set of air-ground data links; an applications and routing policy that provides criteria for selecting of a data link from one of the first set of air-ground data links or the second set of air-ground data links; and a data link manager that selects the data link from either the first set of air-ground data links and second sets of air-ground data links based on information provided by the applications and routing policy and controls the legacy router and the internet protocol router to route communication messages via the selected data link. | 10-20-2011 |
20110255507 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR HANDLING QOS FLOWS WHEN MOVING BETWEEN SYSTEMS - When a mobile device moves from a first QoS-aware system to a second QoS-aware system, QoS flows may or may not be moved properly. To deal with this, the mobile device requests de-allocation of flows in the second QoS-aware system, and then initiates reservation of flows in the second QoS-aware system. After this, the mobile device will know for certain which QoS flows exist in the second QoS-aware system and can behave accordingly. | 10-20-2011 |
20110255508 | MOBILE STATION AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - A mobile station according to the present invention includes: a communication unit ( | 10-20-2011 |
20110255509 | METHOD FOR RESELECTION AMONG HOME BASE STATION CELLS - The present invention discloses a method for reselection among home base station cells, which comprises the following steps that: a user terminal camps on a Closed Subscriber Group (CSG) cell (S | 10-20-2011 |
20110255510 | GRE User-Plane - The present invention relates to providing a generic control plane in a GTP mobility protocol in a core network. When a type of user plane is detected, a user plane parameter is provided in a control plane message header. The user plane message indicates the type of user plane. Functions, parameters and messages are provided according to the indicated type of user plane. Thus, e.g. easier hand over between different access networks can be provided and an optimization of the user plane implementation in an edge node. | 10-20-2011 |
20110255511 | HANDOVER METHOD AND MOBILE TERMINAL AND HOME AGENT UTILIZED IN SAID METHOD - A technology is disclosed that provides a handover method and the like capable of improving communication efficiency by detecting that a handover destination network is a home link at an early stage and reducing tunnel overhead between a mobile node and a home agent. The technology includes, when the mobile node performs a handover from an access router of a network before the handover to which the mobile node is currently connected, to an access router of another network that is a handover destination: a step of transmitting, by a mobile node | 10-20-2011 |
20110255512 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING TRANSMISSION OF ADAPTIVE MEDIA IN PERFORMING HANDOVER BETWEEN HETEROGENEOUS ACCESS NETWORKS - A system and method of controlling transmission of adaptive media over handover performed between heterogeneous networks are disclosed. When a mobile terminal moves, it detects the necessity of handover between the heterogeneous networks, determines a target network to which it may perform handover, and transmits handover information to an adaptive media server that controls a transmission rate of adaptive media to previously inform about the handover. Then, the adaptive media adjusts a transmission rate of the adaptive media by using the received handover information, and when the mobile terminal performs handover to the target network, it can receive the adaptive media from the adaptive media server. Accordingly, when the mobile terminal using a real time multimedia service in a wireline/wireless environment in which various accessing techniques are integrated performs handover between heterogeneous networks, a change in quality of experience (QoE) sensed by subscribers due to the handover can be reduced. | 10-20-2011 |
20110255513 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR EXTENDED NETWORK ACCESS NOTIFICATION VIA A BROADBAND ACESS GATEWAY - A system and method supporting extended network access notification via a broadband access gateway is disclosed. A representative embodiment of the present invention may comprise a wireless interface and may be capable of exchanging multimedia communication between the wireless interface and a broadband network. The gateway may support multimedia communication via access devices that may seamlessly hand off from a wireless wide area network to a personal area network supported by the wireless interface. The hand off may be coordinated by the gateway and the wireless wide area network via the broadband network. A user of an access device may be notified when such a hand off has been automatically initiated, and a user may configure aspects of such hand offs. | 10-20-2011 |
20110255514 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF COMMUNICATION - The disclosure pertains to cell transmit parameter management of wireless communication systems. It applies to different wireless access technologies. An example embodiment of the disclosure includes reference-signal transmit-power coordination between cells over a base-station-base-station interface. | 10-20-2011 |
20110255515 | MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM, HANDOVER CONTROLLING METHOD, RADIO NETWORK CONTROLLER, AND MOBILE TERMINAL - A radio network controller constructed to divide a plurality of base stations into a group of base stations included in an E-DCH active set and a group of base stations included in an active set for soft handovers according to a status of reception of data in each of the plurality of base stations. | 10-20-2011 |
20110261784 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING CALL HANDOFF - According to embodiments described in the specification, a method, system and apparatus for managing call handoff are provided, comprising: receiving a request from a mobile electronic device to initiate handover of a first media session between the mobile electronic device and a private branch exchange (PBX) from a first transport to a second transport; establishing a second media session with the mobile electronic device over the second transport; shuffling call media from the first media session to the second media session; and responsive to shuffling the call media, terminating the first media session. | 10-27-2011 |
20110261785 | COMMUNICATION METHOD OF A VEHICULAR MOBILE TERMINAL, A MACRO BASE STATION, A NEIGHBOR MICRO BASE STATION, AND A SERVING MICRO BASE STATION IN A MULTI-CELL GROUP - A communication method of a serving micro base station is provided. The method includes a handover of a vehicular mobile terminal based on uplink broadcast information including a unique access code allocated to the vehicular mobile terminal within a multi-cell group. The multi-cell group includes a macro base station and a plurality of micro base stations within a cell coverage of the macro base station. The handover is performed based on a determined preparation level of the handover that is based on the uplink broadcast information. | 10-27-2011 |
20110261786 | RESTRICTING HANDOVER OF A MOBILE STATION - A base station communicates, with a mobile station, data associated with a packet-switched session in which the mobile station is involved. In response to a handover request from the mobile station, the base station accesses information provisioned for the mobile station to determine whether the mobile station is to be subjected to mobility restriction. Based on the accessed information, the base station determines whether to allow handover of the mobile station. A message is sent to the mobile station to indicate that the requested handover is not allowed if the base station determines that the requested handover is not allowed. | 10-27-2011 |
20110261787 | SECURE TUNNEL ESTABLISHMENT UPON ATTACHMENT OR HANDOVER TO AN ACCESS NETWORK - The invention relates to a method, mobile node and computer-readable medium for establishing (or pre-establishing) a secure tunnel to an ePDG to prepare for a mobile node attachment or handover to another access network. To reduce the delay of a handover or upon attachment of a mobile node to an access network implied by mechanisms to discover a ePDG, the mobile node maintains a reachability list that can be consulted to identify an ePDG or ePDGs that are reachable in the target access network, i.e. to which the mobile node may establish a secure tunnel. If the mobile node can identify a reachable ePDG for a given access network from the reachability list, the mobile node (pre-)establishes a secure tunnel to the ePDG upon attaching to the given access network. In alternative solutions DNS, DHCP or other mechanism can be used to provide the mobile node with information on ePDGs in its vicinity. | 10-27-2011 |
20110261788 | METHOD FOR VIRTUAL CONNECTION RELEASING IN INTER-OPERATING NETWORK - The present invention provides a virtual connection releasing method in an inter-operation network. In the inter-operation network between the Enhanced Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN) and the evolved HRPD (eHRPD) Access Network, a PMIP indication is set for indicating whether the HRPD Serving Gateway HSGW needs to initiate the Proxy Mobile IP (PMIP) binding updating operation or not. When the virtual connection releasing is initiated, the evolved Access Network (eAN) sends the A | 10-27-2011 |
20110261789 | METHOD OF IMPLEMENTING PACKET-BASED RESOURCE ALLOCATION AND PERSISTENT RESOURCE ALLOCATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention provides a method of allocating resources in a wireless communication system. The method includes requesting persistent allocation of resources for a data spurt in response to detecting the beginning of the data spurt and performing non-persistent resource allocation for at least one packet in the data spurt. The non-persistent resource allocation is performed in response to determining that persistent resources are not available for allocation. The method also includes transmitting the packet using the allocated non-persistent resources. | 10-27-2011 |
20110268083 | METHOD TRANSFERRING VOICE CALLS - In a method and system for transferring a voice call in the packet switched domain to a system supporting both packet switched and circuit switched voice calls, target system, i.e. the system to which an ongoing voice call is transferred is in control of deciding if an ongoing voice call in the originating system should continue in the circuit switched domain or the packet switched domain. In addition the system is enabled to reserve resources in the system to receive the voice call before handing over the voice call. | 11-03-2011 |
20110268084 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND MOBILE STATION - A mobile station transmits mobile station capability information to a first radio communication system via a first radio connection set between the mobile station and the first radio communication system, before a disconnection of the first radio connection. The first radio communication system transmits the mobile station capability information to a second radio communication system, before the disconnection of the first radio connection. The second radio communication system transmits a parameter to the first radio communication system, before the disconnection of the first radio connection. The parameter is used in a second radio connection to be set between the mobile station and the second radio communication system. The first radio communication system transmits the parameter to the mobile station via the first radio connection, before the disconnection of the first radio connection. | 11-03-2011 |
20110268085 | LTE FORWARD HANDOVER - Techniques for performing forward handover in a wireless communication system are disclosed. In one aspect, a user equipment (UE) transmits a connection request to a target eNodeB. The connection request may be transmitted when the UE detects a connection failure in a communication with a source eNodeB. The UE receives a connection response from the target eNodeB in response to the target eNodeB requesting handover preparation information from the source eNodeB. In another aspect, a target eNodeB may receive a connection request from a user equipment (UE) and transmit a radio link failure (RLF) recovery request message to a source eNodeB to prompt the source eNodeB to initiate handover of the UE from the source eNodeB. | 11-03-2011 |
20110268086 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING GATEWAY NODE RESELECTION IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and a method for supporting gateway node reselection in a communication system during a process in which a UE hands over from a source base station to a destination base station are provided. The apparatus includes the source base station for providing the destination base station with information for access control determination, the destination base station for making an access control determination according to the information provided by the source base station, the UE or a network for initiating a gateway reselection process according to the result of the access control determination. With the method, the reselection of Packet Data Network Gateway (PDN GW) or GGSN is implemented in a simple and reliable way by optimizing the existing signaling processes, in the case of user plane node reselection because UE changes position or handover to another base station. | 11-03-2011 |
20110268087 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING SOUNDING REFERENCE SIGNAL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING MULTIPLE COMPONENT CARRIERS - A method of receiving a sounding reference signal (SRS) in a wireless communication system supporting multiple component carriers by a base station is provided. The method includes determining periodic SRS (P-SRS) transmission or aperiodic SRS (A-SRS) transmission about at least one serving cell (SCell) to be configured for a user equipment (UE), transmitting a triggering message including an activation or deactivation of the at least one SCell and indicating information for the A-SRS transmission according to the determination, and receiving an A-SRS from the UE through an activated SCell from among the at least one SCell configured in the UE. Uplink scheduling for an additional secondary serving cell and data communication through the uplink scheduling can be performed rapidly, as compared with a scheme using only a periodic SRS. | 11-03-2011 |
20110268088 | Apparatus and Method For Improved Handover Performance - There is provided a method in a first base (Node_B_S) station adapted to receive media access control layer packet data units (MAC-d; PDU 101, 102, 104, 105) from a radio network controller (RNC) relating to at least a traffic flow relating to a given user entity (UE_Q) and forwarding (MAC-hs/MAC-ehs) such packet data units to said user entity. The transmission to the given user entity is adapted to be potentially handed over to at least a second radio base station (Node B_T), the method being characterized in the following steps:—the first base station (Node_B_S) continuously updating (12, 33, 335, 41) at least a data structure (UNACK_MACD_CNT) relating to media access control layer packet data units (MAC-d PDU's) of a priority queue of the user entity, which packet data units are recently transmitted from a protocol layer (RLC) in the radio network controller (RNC RLC) whereby at least some of said packet data units may not be received by a corresponding protocol layer (RLC) in the user entity (UE_Q) yet,—the first base station, upon receiving a predetermined signal (UNACK_MACD_REQ (108)) from the radio network controller requesting the data structure, transmitting (41, 110) a current value of said data structure (UNACK_MACD_CNT) to the radio network controller (RNC). Also, a method for a radio network controller is provided and corresponding entities. | 11-03-2011 |
20110274082 | Maintaining Point of Presence at Access Switch for Roaming Clients in Distributed Wireless Controller System - Techniques are provided to enable support of roaming wireless devices in a network such that the wireless devices can keep their Internet Protocol (IP) addresses as they roam across mobility sub-domains. Traffic for a wireless device that roams is tunneled back to the access switch that serves the IP subnet which includes an IP address for the wireless device. Traffic is tunneled back to that access switch for the wireless device when the wireless device roams to another access switch which does not serve the IP subnet for the wireless device in the same mobility sub-domain and when the wireless device roams to a different mobility sub-domain, in which case the traffic is tunneled between tunneling endpoints in the respective mobility sub-domains. | 11-10-2011 |
20110274083 | Method and Apparatus for Admission Control and Forced Handover in a Multi-Layer Network Configuration - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, a method comprises collecting measurements from each of a plurality of mobile stations in a serving layer upon deciding that the serving layer is overloaded; computing a cost function for each of the mobile stations based on the collected measurements; selecting at least one mobile station from the plurality of the mobile station in the serving layer based on the cost function for a forced handover from the serving layer to an under-loaded layer; and initiating the forced handover from the serving layer to the under-loaded layer via a signaling message to the selected at least one mobile station. | 11-10-2011 |
20110274084 | PCP/STA CAPABILITY HANDOVER IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Handover of the role of a personal basic service set coordination point (PCP) in a personal wireless area network occurs with the issuance of a PCP handover request by the existing PCP station. A response from a PCP handover capable station within the BSS includes attributes of the responding station pertinent to its ability to carry out the role of a PCP. Once a new PCP station has been identified, handover steps are undertaken to modify beacon filtering and beam-forming in other non-PCP stations within the BSS to facilitate interruption free transition from the old PCP to the new PCP. | 11-10-2011 |
20110274085 | Signaling radio bearer security handling for single radio voice call continuity operation - The exemplary embodiments of the invention provide at least a method, apparatus, and computer program to detect a single radio voice call continuity activation event indicating a handover of a user equipment between a packet switched domain and a circuit switched domain, consistent with a serving radio network subsystem relocation procedure, suspend control plane signaling radio bearers, reset the suspended signaling radio bearers, and resume the suspended signaling radio bearers in the domain handed over to, where resuming comprises protecting control plane signaling radio bearers of a domain handed over to using a same mapped security key that is used to cipher user plane radio access bearers in the domain handed over to. | 11-10-2011 |
20110274086 | Method and apparatus for performing handover - A method and an apparatus perform a handover using the X2 interface. A source base station transmits a handover requirement message, for a handover to a destination base station of a user equipment (UE), to a source base station gateway. When a handover command message indicating performing of the handover to a destination base station of the UE is received from the source base station gateway, the handover command message is transmitted to the UE. When a UE context release command message is received from the source base station gateway, a context of the UE is released. And a UE context release completion message, representing that the context of the UE is released, is transmitted to the source base station gateway. The handover requirement message includes a Next-hop Chaining Counter (NCC) and an encryption key for a communication between the UE and the destination base station. | 11-10-2011 |
20110274087 | HANDOVER METHOD SUPPORTING TERMINAL MOBILITY - A handover method for supporting terminal mobility is provided. Before a target core network node updates bearer information according to a target base station to which a User Equipment (UE) performs the handover, an access control determination procedure is added. According to the access control determination information provided by the target base station, if it is determined that the bearer supporting a Selected Internet Protocol (IP) Traffic Offload (SIPTO) or Local IP Access (LIPA) service is permitted to perform the handover, the target core network node updates the bearer information. If it is determined that the bearer supporting the SIPTO or LIPA service is not allowed to perform the handover, the handover failure is notified with respect to the bearer not allowed to perform the handover, and the bearer information is not updated, thus the wasted signaling resource and wireless resource are reduced. Alternatively, during the handover to the target network by the UE or after the handover to the target network, the bearer release or deactivation is performed for the bearer not allowed to perform the handover, so that the UE can re-initiate the bearer establishment process with respect to the bearer not allowed to perform the handover, thus an optimized bearer is established and the Quality of Service (QoS) is ensured. | 11-10-2011 |
20110274088 | MEDIA GATEWAY SELECTION AT INTER-MSC HANDOVER - The invention relates to a method for handing over a mobile entity related call from a first call control node to a second call control node, wherein identification information of a switching point seized by the first call control node is contained in a handover request message, the second call control node selecting a switching point for the call to be handed over based on the identification information contained in the handover request message. | 11-10-2011 |
20110274089 | ACTIVE HANDOVER METHOD BASED ON HIGH RATE PACKET DATA (HRPD) SYSTEM AND TERMINAL - An active handover method and terminal based on the HRPD system are disclosed by the present invention. The method comprises that: a terminal receives an active handover command, wherein if a virtual connection has existed, the virtual connection is disconnected; and if a virtual connection is being established, the establishment process of the virtual connection is terminated; and High Rate Packet Data air interface connection is established. With the method, processing of the access terminal and the access network is specified, and the problem of long-time interruption in the service of the terminal is solved, processing efficiency of the access terminal and the access network can be improved, thereby improving the processing efficiency of the whole system. | 11-10-2011 |
20110274090 | MOBILITY SOLUTION INDICATOR FOR VOICE OVER EVOLVED PACKET SYSTEM (EPS) - Embodiments of the present invention described herein include a Mobile Management Entity and a method that receive a handoff request for an active voice session of a terminal which is leaving an E-UTRAN to a GERAN/UTRAN and then determine if the handoff request is applicable to a SRVCC procedure or a CSoLTEvGAN procedure. | 11-10-2011 |
20110274091 | IP Mobility - A method of forwarding IP packets, sent to an old care-of-address of a mobile node, to the mobile node following a handover of the mobile node from a first old access router to a second new access router. The method comprises, prior to completion of said handover, providing said first router or another proxy node with information necessary to determine the new IP care-of address to be used by the mobile node when the mobile node is transferred to the second access router. At said first router or said proxy node, the new care-of-address for the mobile node is determined using said information and ownership of the new care-of-address by the mobile node confirmed, and subsequently packets received at said first access network and destined for said old care-of-address are forwarded to the predicted care-of-address address. | 11-10-2011 |
20110280213 | Guest Access Support for Wired and Wireless Clients in Distributed Wireless Controller System - Techniques are provided to enable a support for guest access of devices in a network. At a controller apparatus in a first mobility sub-domain of a network comprising a plurality of mobility sub-domains, a request message containing a request for guest network access for a device is received from a first access switch in the first mobility sub-domain. The controller apparatus forwards the request message to a guest controller. At a tunneling endpoint apparatus in the first mobility sub-domain, a tunnel is established to the guest controller to carry traffic between the device and the guest controller. Traffic for the device passes in a tunnel between the first access switch and the tunneling endpoint apparatus in the first mobility sub-domain, through the tunneling endpoint apparatus in the first mobility sub-domain and in the tunnel between the routing apparatus in the first mobility sub-domain and the guest controller. | 11-17-2011 |
20110280214 | TERMINAL FOR A CONTENT CENTRIC NETWORK AND METHOD OF COMMUNICATION FOR A TERMINAL AND A HUB IN A CONTENT CENTRIC NETWORK - A method of communication for a terminal in a content-centric network is provided. The method includes suspending a data message associated with a content from being provided to a face before a handover when the handover is expected to occur in the terminal that requests the content, and transmitting, to a hub, a new interest message after the handover associated with the content so that the hub may provide the data message associated with the content to the face after the handover. | 11-17-2011 |
20110280215 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD, AND GATEWAY - To realize a handover in which a gateway connecting to the access networks using different protocols is an anchor. | 11-17-2011 |
20110280216 | System, Apparatus for Content Delivery for Internet Traffic and Methods Thereof - In one embodiment, a method of serving media includes receiving a request to serve a cacheable media content to a user equipment at a second media server deployed in a second layer2 access network. The request is received around when the user equipment is handed-off from a first layer2 node in a first layer2 access network to a second layer2 node in the second layer2 access network and when a streaming session of the cacheable media content to the user equipment from a first media server is terminated. The method further includes determining if the cacheable media content is stored in a cache of the second media server, and serving the cacheable media content from the cache of the second media server to the user equipment if the media content is stored in the cache of the second media server. | 11-17-2011 |
20110280217 | SUPPORT OF CS DOMAIN SERVICES OVER A PACKET ONLY MOBILE SYSTEM - In an embodiment, there is provided an architecture for the support of CS domain services over a Packet only mobile system such as the Evolved Packet System access, in a mobile communication system comprising an Evolved Packet System (EPS) and a CS domain in turn comprising at last one Mobile Switching Center MSC, said architecture comprising at least one Interworking Function IWF, such that IWF is perceived as a Radio Network Controller RNC or a Base Station Controller BTS by a MSC, and as an Application Server by the EPS. | 11-17-2011 |
20110280218 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING NETWORK ACCESS DURING HNB HANDOVER - The present invention discloses a method and a system for controlling network access during HNB handover. The method comprises the following steps: a core network acquires target HNB information to determine whether to allow access of User Equipment (UE) and sends the target HNB information to an HNB GW to which the target HNB belongs if the access of the UE is allowed and the target HNB is connected with the core network via the HNB GW, and the HNB GW determines whether to allow the access of the UE according to the received target HNB information. The present invention can prevent the occurrence of illegal accesses and improve the security of network access. | 11-17-2011 |
20110280219 | Reducing Handoff Latency in a Wireless Local Area Network through an Activation Alert that affects a Power State of a Receiving Mesh Access Point - If a handoff by a mobile station currently associated with a particular access point is probable, then the particular access point sends an activation alert to one or more other access points. An access point receiving the activation alert that is in a low-power state enters a higher-power state. An access point receiving the activation alert that is in a higher-power state, remains in that higher-power state. | 11-17-2011 |
20110286427 | Methods and Apparatus for Calling Party Number Display Solutions for 1xCSFB - Controller and method for Handover (HO) based 1×CSFB communicates Calling Party Number (CPN) to User Equipment (UE) a in a cellular communication system. A first solution provides Interworking Solution (IWS) adding CPN sent to target Base Station Controller (BSC) via Mobile Switching Center (MSC) in Interoperability Specification (IOS) HO messages. A second solution provides that IWS sends CPN with Air Interface HO message and stores the CPN until UE transition to the target Radio Access Network and acquires a traffic channel. A third solution provides that IWS receives CPN from MSC with a paging message and stores the CPN until UE transition to the target Radio Access Network and acquires a traffic channel. A fourth solution provides sending AWI message to the target Radio Access Network from the MSC. A fifth solution provides that IWS sends CPN via Feature Notification Message (FNM) data tunneled to UE before the paging message to let user decide whether to accept a call before leaving 3G/4G cellular communication. | 11-24-2011 |
20110286428 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR AN INTELLIGENT MOBILE MEDIA SERVER - An Intelligent Mobile HotSpot (IMHS) comprises a local area network radio interface; an in home display interface; a user interface comprising one of a switch, button, or input (collectively an input); non-transitory memory configured to store instructions; and a processor coupled with memory, the instructions configured to cause the processor to perform the following in response to an activation of the input: automatically establish a data connection with a vehicle display over the local area network, or automatically establish a data connection with a television over the in home display interface, and automatically cause a landing page to be displayed on the in vehicle display or the television. | 11-24-2011 |
20110286429 | GATEWAY CONFIGURED TO PROVIDE A HANDOVER, CONVERTING AND ROUTING FUNCTION - In one aspect, the invention provides an improved procedure for handing over a connection from a source network node to a target network node. In some embodiments, this procedure includes the following steps: (a) receiving, at a gateway, a handover required message transmitted from the source network node; (b) generating, at the gateway, a handover request message in response to receiving the handover required message; and (c) transmitting, from the gateway, the handover request message to the target network node. In another aspect, the invention provides an improved gateway that is configured to intercept and handle handover signaling. | 11-24-2011 |
20110286430 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION CONTROLLING METHOD - A communication method in LIPA/SIPTO architecture is provided which, when a user equipment (UE) is to connect from a serving area to an external network, allows re-selection of an optimal gateway. The communication method allows selecting a gateway apparatus physically or topologically close to a site, where the user equipment is attached. | 11-24-2011 |
20110286431 | WLAN Roaming and Selection Using Managed WLAN Handover Process - A method for providing information to a first terminal system and/or a second terminal system which connected to each other through a network and are subject to a potential or actual handover, provides convenience information about the execution of the potential or actual handover to at least one of the first and the second terminal systems, prior to or with the start of the handover, and provides in addition to at least one of the first and the second terminal systems a commercial communication relating to a commercial measure, whereby the commercial communication is provided in correlation with the provision of the convenience information. | 11-24-2011 |
20110286432 | Support for Handoffs in High Rate Packet Data Systems - The invention supports two types of handoffs. The first handoff is for an inter-AN cell selection where the source AN allows the AT to add a cell under the control of a different AN to its active set and then allows the AT to switch to the target AN. A bearer path is established between the source and target AN to transfer the packet data traffic using an exchange of messages to register the AT's movement from one BTS to another BTS. The A8/A10 connections remain anchored at the source AN and, hence, a bearer path is needed between the source and target AN to transfer the packet data traffic. The second handoff occurs when the source AN specifies a move of the AT to a new AN proactively. New connections are established at the target AN to support the AT, and the AT is subsequently moved to the target AN via the relevant air-interface messaging. | 11-24-2011 |
20110286433 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR HANDOVER BETWEEN MULTI-CARRIER CELLS - The present invention relates to the radio communication field and discloses a method, an apparatus, and a system for handover between multi-carrier cells, so that a user equipment (UE) can be handed over to carriers of different cells on multiple target evolved NodeBs (eNBs). The handover method includes: after performing handover request acknowledge, receiving serial numbers (SNs) of data to be transferred and identifier information of target eNBs of other carriers to which the UE is handed over sent by a source eNB; and transferring scheduling information to the target eNBs of other carriers to which the UE is handed over. | 11-24-2011 |
20110286434 | ENHANCED WIDE AREA NETWORK SUPPORT VIA A BROADBAND ACCESS GATEWAY - A wireless broadband access gateway having a wireless interface compatible with any of a number of commercial wireless wide area network standards provides enhanced wire area network coverage via a broadband network. The gateway may function as a wireless wide area network base station having a small coverage area, and may be communicatively coupled via a broadband access provider to a broadband wireless controller that cooperatively coordinates call management for access devices comprising cellular or mobile multimedia handsets. The broadband network may comprise cable, digital subscriber line, satellite, T1, or T3 type networks, and may carry traffic unrelated to the signaling, control, voice, and multimedia information of associated with wide area network calls. The wireless broadband access gateway may comprise a set-to-box, and may operate to convert from air interface protocols used to communicate with mobile handsets of the wireless wide area network, to/from the packet-based protocols that may be used in the broadband network. | 11-24-2011 |
20110292907 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR GROUND STATION SIGNAL HANDOVER FOR AIRCRAFT - A method and system for ground station signal handoff for an aircraft. The method comprises receiving signal quality data and position data from each of a plurality of ground stations as a signal from each of the ground stations becomes detectable onboard the aircraft, while the aircraft is in communication with an active ground station. A position of the aircraft is determined each time a signal quality from one of the ground stations reaches a predetermined threshold indicating that the signal quality is suitable for handoff. A set of ground stations potentially suitable for handoff is identified based on their signal quality data when an insufficient signal quality of the active ground station is detected. The set of potentially suitable ground stations is evaluated based on their position and signal quality, and a trajectory or speed vector of the aircraft, to determine an optimal ground station for handoff. A handoff request is then transmitted to the optimal ground station. | 12-01-2011 |
20110292908 | Additional Service Type Setup in Mobile Terminals Having Multiple Radio Access Network Accessiblity - In an area covered by multiple different radio access networks, a user equipment (UE) capable of accessing each of the multiple networks at the same time may provide additional service type setup for different call types. The UE registers each of the available call types with a first radio access network. Calls of one of the registered call types may be established, whether UE-originated or UE-terminated, with the first radio access network. When initiating a call of another type, the UE may initiate a different-typed call with another radio access network in the area, while maintaining the call of the first call type with the first radio access network. | 12-01-2011 |
20110292909 | Alternate Transmission Scheme for High Speed Packet Access (HSPA) - Post-hard handover processing in a Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access (TD-SCDMA) network may be improved to allow operation of High Speed Packet Access (HSPA) in hard handover. For example, uplink synchronization may be completed concurrent with HSPA to quickly resume HSPA operation in hard handovers. User Equipment (UE) may receive downlink data while completing uplink synchronization. In another example, a unique SYNC_UL code may be assigned to a UE for hard handover. The unique SYNC_UL code allows Node Bs of the TD-SCDMA network to know which UE is performing hard handover. When a Node B is receiving the unique SYNC_UL, the Node B may begin to allocate UL data grants. After receiving UL data from the UE, the Node B may resume High Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA). | 12-01-2011 |
20110292910 | METHOD OF GENERATING SIGNAL FOR SUPPORTING VEHICLE COMMUNICATION HANDOVER - When supporting the handover from first road side equipment of a plurality of sets of road side equipment and second road side equipment that is adjacent to the first road side equipment to a vehicle, the first road side equipment generates a first channel seizing signal that is longer than that of the second road side equipment in a control channel of an N-th sync interval. The second road side equipment generates a second channel seizing signal that is longer than that of the first road side equipment in a control channel of an (N+1)-th sync interval. | 12-01-2011 |
20110292911 | MOBILE STATION APPARATUS, BASE STATION APPARATUS, HANDOVER METHOD AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A handover procedure is easily performed in a carrier aggregation state of receiving a plurality of frequency bands. There are provided a plurality of reception branches for performing a reception process for each frequency band, and a reception-signal processing control section | 12-01-2011 |
20110292912 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION CONTROLLING METHOD - A communication method in LIPA/SIPTO architecture is provided which, when a user equipment (UE) is to connect from a serving area to an external network, allows re-selection of an optimal gateway. The communication method allows selecting a gateway apparatus physically or topologically close to a site, where the user equipment is attached. | 12-01-2011 |
20110292913 | METHOD, SYSTEM, AND APPARATUS FOR REGISTRATION PROCESSING - A registration processing method and an apparatus are disclosed herein to enable the network to distinguish between different registration processing types. The method includes: identifying, by a user equipment, UE, a registration type when registering into a network; reporting, by the UE, a registration processing type information corresponding to the identified registration type to a network-side network element during registering into the network. The UE reports the registration processing type information to the network in the process of registering into the network, and therefore, the network distinguishes between different registration processing types accordingly. | 12-01-2011 |
20110299501 | Mobility in IMS based Home Node B - The invention relates to a method for handing over an IP multimedia Subsystem, IMS, anchored session of a mobile device ( | 12-08-2011 |
20110299502 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is a method for enabling a mobile terminal to perform a handover in a mobile communication system. A serving base station which supports both a first communication scheme and a second communication scheme can transmit, to the mobile terminal, a neighbor base station list broadcast message containing time offset information indicating the point of time to transmit information on a second base station which uses the second communication scheme and supports only the second communication scheme via a specific zone using the second communication scheme. The mobile terminal which has received the message can receive, from the serving base station, the information on the second base station via the specific zone on the basis of the received time offset information. | 12-08-2011 |
20110299503 | WIRELESS TERMINAL DEVICE AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING THE SAME - To provide a wireless terminal device that can control so that the size of RWIN of an electronic device on a receiving side changes to an optimum value when hand-down (hand-off) from high speed communication to low speed communication occurs, and a method for controlling the same. A wireless terminal device | 12-08-2011 |
20110299504 | Packet Transferring/Transmitting Method And Mobile Communication System - A packet transferring/transmitting method is provided for use in a mobile communication system | 12-08-2011 |
20110299505 | BASE STATION DEVICE, MOBILE TERMINAL, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING SAID COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - There is provided a base station device that performs communication with a mobile terminal, the base station device including: a handover operation part configured to perform a handover of the mobile terminal, based on an instruction from a base station control device; and a control part configured to issue a request for the handover of the mobile terminal, based on a moving speed and a moving direction of the mobile terminal, the request being issued to the base station control device. | 12-08-2011 |
20110305220 | Methods and Devices for Managing Radio Access in a Communication System - A method for managing radio access comprises sending of a radio access technology (RAT) resource aggregation request from a first radio access network (RAN) to a second RAN concerning communication with a user equipment connected to a source RAN, and returning a response to the first RAN. The source RAN is the first or second RAN. The first and second RANs use different radio access technologies. Radio resources of a base station in a target RAN, the RAN to which the user equipment is not connected, are reserved. A report of the reserved radio resources is sent to the source RAN. A RAT resource aggregation command is transmitted to the user equipment. The RAT resource aggregation command comprises that a RAT resource aggregation shall be used and the reserved radio resources. The base stations have at least partly overlapping coverage areas. | 12-15-2011 |
20110305221 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USER HANDING OVER TO HOME NODEB - A Method and apparatus for a user handing over to a home NodeB are provided. The method comprises the following steps: when the user initiates a handover procedure from a source NodeB to a target home NodeB, a target home NodeB gateway receiving a relocation request message from a mobility management unit of a core network; the target home NodeB gateway generating a user context for the user according to the relocation request message, allocating a user context identifier for the user context, and sending the user context identifier and the relocation request message to the target home NodeB; and when receiving a relocation request acknowledgement message replied by the target home NodeB, the target home NodeB gateway sending the relocation request acknowledgement message to the mobility management unit of the core network. The application of the above technical solution can ensure the handover of a user to a home NodeB which serves as a target NodeB successfully. | 12-15-2011 |
20110305222 | LOW LATENCY HANDOVER BETWEEN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS USING DIFFERENT RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGIES - A communications system for providing a user's mobile station (MS) with an Internet Protocol (IP) connectivity, has an IP network gateway for allocating an IP address to the MS to enable it to access an IP network. First and second base stations are respectively configured to support communications of the MS over first and second radio access networks using different radio access technologies. A first access gateway provides an interface between the IP network gateway and the first radio access network, whereas a second access gateway provides an interface between the IP network gateway and the second radio access network. A handover interface is provided between the first access gateway and the second access gateway for enabling the MS to switch between the first and second radio access networks with minimum latency. | 12-15-2011 |
20110310839 | HANDOVER IN MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS - A shared digital processing resource is connectable to a plurality of remotely located transceivers and comprises a packet processor, a transceiver selector, a packet formation unit, and a packet-switched network interface. The packet processor is adapted to process user data to form antenna-carrier data, or vice versa. The transceiver selector is adapted to select a preferred remotely located transceiver from the plurality of remotely located transceivers, the preferred remotely located transceiver having a packet-switched network address. The packet formation unit is adapted to insert the antenna-carrier data destined for the preferred remotely located transceiver in packets having the packet-switched network address. The packet-switched network interface is adapted to transmit the packet-switched packets over a packet-switched network to which the plurality of remotely located transceivers is connected. Also disclosed is a uplink method and a downlink method for rerouting data communication between the shared digital processing resource and the mobile station. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310840 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO REDUCE NETWORK CONFIGURATION CHANGES - Example methods and apparatus to reduce network configuration changes are disclosed. A disclosed example method involves receiving network connectivity information sets for future locations of a wireless terminal. The example method also involves selecting a network connection configuration for each future location based on a quantity of connection configuration changes during transitions between the future locations. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310841 | EFFECTIVE METHOD OF HANDOVER IN WIDEBAND RADIO ACCESS SYSTEM - The present invention relates t a wideband radio access system, and more particularly, to a method for enabling adjustment of timing to transmit a handover instruction message and to a mobile terminal capable of performing the method. A method for a terminal handover in a wideband radio access system according to one embodiment of the present invention comprises: receiving from a serving base station a handover command message that contains first timing information indicative of a time for transmitting a first uplink resource allocation information to transmit a handover instruction message; receiving the first uplink allocation information from the serving base station at the timing indicated by the first timing information; and transmitting the handover instruction message to the serving base station through an uplink resource indicated by the first uplink allocation information. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310842 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR DATA PROCESSING IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and a device for data processing in a mobile communication network are provided, wherein a control information is conveyed between a mobile terminal and an anchor node within said mobile communication network, and wherein based on said control information, a handover synchronization between a source network and a target access network is conducted utilizing an intermediate state of a mobility management. Furthermore, a communication system is suggested comprising said device. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310843 | Link Layer Switching for Local Breakout - The present invention relates to a method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for providing access via a cellular access network to a packet-switched network, wherein a terminal-specific connection-oriented point-to-point link is set up between a terminal device and a cellular base station device, and the terminal-specific connection-oriented point-to-point link is switched at the cellular base station device on a link layer level to the packet-switched network, so that a point of attachment for said terminal device is located in the packet-switched network. Furthermore, a terminal-specific termination point for the packet-switched network is provided at the cellular base station device. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310844 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR TRANSFER OF CABABILITY SUPPORT INFORMATION IN A MULTI-RAT ENVIRONMENT - An apparatus for enabling transfer of mobile terminal inter-RAT capabilities in a multi-RAT environment from the perspective of the capability provider may include at least one processor and at least one memory including computer program code. The at least one memory and the computer program code may be configured, with the processor, to cause the apparatus to perform at least receiving an indication of a request for mobile terminal inter-RAT capability information relative to a particular RAT, acquiring the inter-RAT capability information in response to receipt of the indication of the request for inter-RAT capability information, and providing the inter-RAT capability information to a target base station. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310845 | METHOD OF HANDLING AN UPLINK SYNCHRONIZATION TIMER DURING A HANDOVER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is the radio (wireless) communication system providing a radio communication service and the terminal, and more particularly, to a method of handling an uplink synchronization timer during a handover procedure in an Evolved Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (E-UMTS) evolved from the Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) or a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310846 | SOFT HANDOFF IN OFDMA SYSTEM - Soft handoff in an OFDMA system is disclosed. If the pilot signal strength for a base station exceeds the defined threshold, the base station is added to an active set list. Subcarriers in a plurality of orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols are divided and allocated into subchannels. The OFDM symbols are divided and multiplexed. A soft handoff zone with a first dimension of the subchannels and a second dimension of the divided and multiplexed OFDM symbols is defined. The soft handoff zone has subcarriers with a subchannel definition, for example, an identical permutation. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310847 | SOFT HANDOFF IN OFDMA SYSTEM - Soft handoff in an OFDMA system is disclosed. If the pilot signal strength for a base station exceeds the defined threshold, the base station is added to an active set list. Subcarriers in a plurality of orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols are divided and allocated into subchannels. The OFDM symbols are divided and multiplexed. A soft handoff zone with a first dimension of the subchannels and a second dimension of the divided and multiplexed OFDM symbols is defined. The soft handoff zone has subcarriers with a subchannel definition, for example, an identical permutation. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310848 | SOFT HANDOFF IN OFDMA SYSTEM - Soft handoff in an OFDMA system is disclosed. If the pilot signal strength for a base station exceeds the defined threshold, the base station is added to an active set list. Subcarriers in a plurality of orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols are divided and allocated into subchannels. The OFDM symbols are divided and multiplexed. A soft handoff zone with a first dimension of the subchannels and a second dimension of the divided and multiplexed OFDM symbols is defined. The soft handoff zone has subcarriers with a subchannel definition, for example, an identical permutation. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310849 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UPDATING A KEY IN AN ACTIVE STATE - A method for updating a key in an active state is disclosed according to the embodiments of the present invention. The method includes steps of: initiating a key update by a user equipment in the active state or a network side when a pre-defined condition is met; updating the key by the network side and the user equipment, and negotiating an activation time of the new keys. An apparatus for updating a key in an active state is also disclosed according to the present invention. With the present invention, the user equipment in an active state and the network side may actively initiate the key update procedure in different cases, thereby solving the problem concerning the key update for a session in an active state. | 12-22-2011 |
20110317657 | Change of rate matching modes in presence of channel state information reference signal transmission - In one aspect thereof the exemplary embodiments of this invention provide a method that includes, prior to confirmation that a network access node has correctly acquired capabilities of a user equipment, operating a user equipment with the network access node in accordance with a first rate matching mode and, only after confirmation to the user equipment that the network access node has correctly acquired capabilities of the user equipment, changing the rate matching mode to a second rate matching mode. In an embodiment the first rate matching mode comprises puncturing a downlink shared channel transmission with a set of resource elements, which may be at least one of reference symbols and muted resource elements, and the second rate matching mode comprises rate matching the downlink shared channel around those resource elements that are members of the set of resource elements. Also described are apparatus and computer readable storage medium storing program code that operate in accordance with the method. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317658 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, NETWORK DEVICE, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - A mobile communication system having a first communication system and a second communication system forwards forwarding data from the first communication system to the second communication system when switching from the first communication system to the second communication system is determined, the forwarding data being a data that the first communication system has already received from a core network device. A network device transmitting direct data to a mobile communication terminal via the second communication system is configured to count the number of switching times that the switching from the first communication system to the second communication system has been determined, for every user. The network device is configured to count the number of successful reception times that information identifying a user has been received via a forwarding path of the forwarding data, for every user. The network device is configured to judge whether the forwarding path of the forwarding data is normal or not on the basis of a ratio between the number of switching times and the number of successful reception times. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317659 | SYSTEM, APPARATUS, AND METHOD FOR CIRCUIT SWITCHED FALLBACK RELIABILITY IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - In accordance with aspects of the disclosure, a method, apparatus, and computer program product are provided for wireless communication. The method, apparatus, and computer program product may be configured to determine that a device is switching from a first cell and a first location to a second cell and a second location to implement a mobile terminated circuit switched fallback process, generate a routing area update message including a flag indicating a pending data packet for communication, and transmit the generated routing area update message. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317660 | METHOD FOR SELECTIVELY PERFORMING HANDOFF ACCORDING TO SERVICE TYPE AND SYSTEM THEREOF - Provided are a method for selectively performing a handoff according to a service type, and a system thereof. A home agent provides a target service to a user equipment through a mobile network channel of a mobile network. The user equipment detects entering a wireless access zone of a wireless data network while receiving the target service through the mobile network channel and determines a service type of the target service. The user equipment performs a handoff from the mobile network to the wireless data network in cooperation with the home agent when the service type is a non real-time service and refrains from performing a handoff when the service type is a real-time service. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317661 | SYSTEM, APPARATUS, AND METHOD FOR UTILIZING NETWORK ACCESS PARAMETERS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - In accordance with aspects of the disclosure, a method, apparatus, and computer program product are provided for wireless communication. The method, apparatus, and computer program product may be configured to provide a message from a first network to a device, wherein the message comprises one or more parameters for access to a second network, direct the device to switch from the first network to the second network based on the one or more parameters provided by the first network, and direct the device to perform random access on the second network based at least in part on the one or more parameters provided by the first network. The one or more parameters may comprise a priority parameter for performing random access on the second network. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317662 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING HANDOFF BETWEEN DIFFERENT TYPES OF NETWORKS BY USING A VOICE SERVICE - A system and method for handing off from a first network to a second network. A determination may be made as to whether an accessible base station of the second network is located in the vicinity of a user equipment based on information on a current location of the user equipment in the first network. An activation call may be generated with a first telephone number as a caller number when an accessible base station of the second network is located in the vicinity of the user equipment based on the determination result. The activation call indicates an initiation of a search for an accessible base station of the second network, and an accessible base station of the second network may be searched for when the activation call with the first telephone number is received. A handoff from the first network to the second network may then be executed when the accessible base station of the second network is located. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317663 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING HANDOFF BETWEEN DIFFERENT TYPES OF NETWORKS BY USING A SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE - A system and method for handing off from a first network to a second network. A determination may be made as to whether an accessible base station of the second network is located in the vicinity of a user equipment based on information on a current location of the user equipment in the first network. An activation message may be generated with a first telephone number as a caller number when an accessible base station of the second network is located in the vicinity of the user equipment based on the determination result. The activation message indicates an initiation of a search for an accessible base station of the second network, and an accessible base station of the second network may be searched for when the activation message with the first telephone number is received. A handoff from the first network to the second network may then be executed when the accessible base station of the second network is located. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317664 | Method of performing an intra-segment handover - The invention concerns a method of performing an intra-segment handover (HO) of a mobile station (MS) from a source access point (AP | 12-29-2011 |
20110317665 | METHOD FOR UPDATING SYSTEM INFORMATION DURING HAND-OVER IN BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a broadband wireless access system, and more particularly, to a method for efficiently acquiring system information on a target base station during a hand-over, and to an apparatus for carrying out the method. One method for enabling a mobile station to update system information on a target base station during a hand-over, according to one embodiment of the present invention, comprises the steps of: receiving, from a serving base station, a broadcast message containing system information on at least one neighbor base station including the target base station, and containing first change count information for indicating whether or not to update the system information; and receiving, from the serving base station, second change count information for indicating whether or not to update the system information currently possessed by the serving base station. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317666 | Method and System for Managing Address Prefix Information Associated with Handover in Networks - Method and system for managing address prefix information associated with handover in network. A fast handover process is achieved for point-to-point communication model. A mobile node send a provisional new care-of-address with an aggregate prefix part to its previous access router, which forwards the address to a new access router. The new access router in response generates a modified new care-of-address with a unique prefix part for the mobile node. Alternatively, the mobile node sends a request to the previous access router for a unique prefix. The request is forwarded from the previous access router to the new access router. The new access router assigns a unique prefix for the mobile node. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317667 | SOFT HANDOFF ACROSS DIFFERENT NETWORKS ASSISTED BY AN END-TO-END APPLICATION PROTOCOL - A method of handoff across different networks is disclosed. A first communication link through a first network is used for communicating between a first user agent and a second user agent. The user agents negotiate to use a second communication link for the same call. The second communication link is established through a second network between the first user agent and the second user agent while maintaining the first communication link. Related data is sent through the first communication link and the second communication link. The first communication link is dropped and communication is continued using the second communication link. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317668 | Method and System for Implementing Inter-Access Networks Handoff in Active State in HRPD Network - A method and system for implementing an inter-Access Network (AN) handoff in an active state in a High Rate Packet Data (HRPD) Network are disclosed. The method includes determining that an inter-AN handoff operation is necessary and initiating a handoff procedure to perform the inter-AN handoff, sending data to be transmitted to an access terminal to the destination AN in advance in the handoff procedure, and then sending the access terminal the data to be transmitted to the access terminal by the source AN or the destination AN according to the result of the handoff procedure. | 12-29-2011 |
20120002637 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING HOME NODE-B MOBILITY - Techniques for supporting home NodeB (HNB) mobility and virtual active set management in support of soft handover are disclosed. A source HNB may decide to initiate a relocation of a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) from the source HNB to a target HNB, and may initiate an access control for the WTRU to determine whether the WTRU is allowed to receive a service provided via the target HNB. The source HNB may send an access control query to either a core network (CN) or an HNB gateway (HNB-GW) for verifying that the WTRU is allowed to receive a service provided via the target HNB. The access control query response may include access control information for all or a subset of subscriber groups that the WTRU is a member of. The WTRU may maintain a virtual active set (VAS) including at least one macro cell and at least one femto cell. | 01-05-2012 |
20120002638 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR HANDOFF BETWEEN DIFFERENT TYPES OF NETWORKS - System and method for handoff between different types of networks. A communication session of a user equipment may be handed off from a first network to a second network based on a network condition of the first network. A network information may be transmitted from the first network and the network condition of the first network may be determined based on received network information. The network information may include information of an adaptive multi-rate (AMR) mode assigned for providing a corresponding service, and the information of the AMR mode may be assigned based on the network condition of the first network and may be associated with a bit-rate for speech coding. A handoff from the first network to the second network may be initiated when the network condition of the first network is determined to be poor. | 01-05-2012 |
20120002639 | OPEN WIRELESS ARCHITECTURE (OWA) UNIFIED AIRBORNE AND TERRESTRIAL COMMUNICATIONS ARCHITECTURE - This invention relates to an Open Wireless Architecture (OWA) unified airborne and terrestrial communications architecture providing optimal high-speed connections with open radio transmission technologies (RTTs) between aircrafts and ground cells, and between different aircrafts in Ad-Hoc or Mesh network group, to construct the multi-dimensional unified information delivery platform across the airborne networks and the terrestrial networks wherein the same OWA mobile device or OWA mobile computer can be used seamlessly and continuously both in the aircrafts and on the ground. | 01-05-2012 |
20120002640 | FLEXIBLE COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS AND METHODS - A method of initiating a telecommunication session for a communication device include submitting to one or more telecommunication carriers a proposal for a telecommunication session, receiving from at least one of the one or more of telecommunication carriers a bid to carry the telecommunications session, and automatically selecting one of the telecommunications carriers from the carriers submitting a bid, and initiating the telecommunication session through the selected telecommunication carrier. | 01-05-2012 |
20120002641 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR USE IN A CONNECTED STATE HANDOFF OF AN ACCESS TERMINAL - A method of sending reset message sequence number is provided. During a connected state handoff of an access terminal (AT) between a source access network (AN) and a target AN, the source AN sends a reset message sequence number of the AT to the target AN. The source AN adds the reset message sequence number of the AT to the message sent to the target AN. Thereby, the problem in the existing systems that, the source AN cannot send the reset message sequence number of the AT to the target AN, and thus the target AN cannot perform a reset process on the AT when the AT is switched from the source AN to the target AN is thus solved. An access network (AN) and a communication system are also provided. | 01-05-2012 |
20120002642 | ENHANCED UPLINK OPERATION IN SOFT HANDOVER - A method and system for an enhanced uplink (EU) operation in a wireless communication system during soft handover. The system comprises a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU), at least two Node-Bs, and a radio network controller (RNC). One Node-B may be designated as a primary Node-B, and the primary Node-B may control EU operation during soft handover including uplink scheduling and hybrid automatic repeat request (H-ARQ). Soft buffer corruption is avoided during soft handover by controlling H-ARQ by the primary Node-B. Alternatively, an RNC may control EU operation during soft handover including H-ARQ. In this case, an RNC generates final acknowledge/non-acknowledge (ACK/NACK) decision based on the error check results of the Node-Bs. | 01-05-2012 |
20120002643 | HANDOVER PERFORMED IN CONSIDERATION OF UPLINK/DOWNLINK COMPONENT CARRIER SETUP - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system which supports carrier aggregation. More particularly, the present invention relates to a method and to an apparatus for enabling a user equipment to perform a handover in a wireless communication system which supports carrier aggregation. The method for performing a handover comprises the steps of: transmitting a measurement report on a target cell to a serving cell; receiving, from the serving cell, a message containing a signature route sequence index, cyclic shift parameters, and information related to the component carrier of the target cell; confirming contention-based signatures generated on the basis of the signature route sequence index and cyclic shift parameters; and transmitting one of said contention-based signatures to the target cell for random access, via one or more component carriers, on the basis of said information related to the component carrier. The present invention also relates to an apparatus for the method. | 01-05-2012 |
20120008592 | HANDOFF OF A MOBILE STATION BETWEEN PACKET-SWITCHED AND CIRCUIT-SWITCHED WIRELESS DOMAINS - A first mobility management entity associated with a packet-switched wireless access network receives information associated with a mobile station being served by the first mobility management entity, where the information identifies a serving generic access network controller for the mobile station. The serving generic access network controller is used to provide a circuit-switched service to the mobile station while the mobile station is attached to the packet-switched wireless access network. The first mobility management entity initiates a handoff of the mobile station from the packet-switched wireless access network to a circuit-switched wireless access network, where the circuit-switched wireless access network is in a region served by a second generic access network controller different from the serving generic access network controller. In performing the handoff, the first mobility management entity uses the information to identify the serving generic access network controller to communicate handoff-related messaging to the serving generic access network controller to cause provision of the circuit-switched service to be handed off from the serving generic access network controller to the second generic access network controller. | 01-12-2012 |
20120008593 | METHOD FOR PRIORITIZING HANDOVER TARGETS FOR SCANNING BY A MOBILE TERMINAL IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method for prioritizing handover targets for scanning by a mobile terminal, MS ( | 01-12-2012 |
20120008594 | System and Method for Allocating An Anchoring Point for a Mobile Terminal - A first network configured to connect a terminal to a home network during a time that the terminal is roaming within the first network. The first network includes a plurality of attachment points, wherein a first attachment point is configured to receive an attach request from the terminal, and wherein the attach request includes a request from the terminal for an IP address from an anchoring point within the home network. The first network further includes an Authentication/Authorization/Accounting server proxy configured to determine whether the terminal is authorized to attach to the first attachment point, wherein in response to the terminal being authorized to attach to the first attachment point, i) a first tunnel is created between the first attachment point and a second attachment point, and ii) a second tunnel is created between the second attachment point and the anchoring point within the home network. | 01-12-2012 |
20120008595 | HANDOVER METHODS BETWEEN AN UNLICENSED MOBILE ACCESS NETWORK AND A CELLULAR COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND APPARATUSES THEREOF - The present invention relates to a handover technology between an unlicensed mobile access network and a cellular communication network. According to a first aspect of the present invention, a method of handing over a communication connection from an unlicensed mobile access network to a cellular communication network in a mobile terminal is provided. The method includes the following steps: acquiring a location information and/or moving direction and/or moving velocity of the mobile terminal ( | 01-12-2012 |
20120008596 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDOVER IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a handover method for a mobile communication system. The handover method according to the present invention comprises the steps of: receiving from a serving base station a handover command message, the handover command message containing target base station information, information on an available interval enabling data transmission/reception to/from the serving base station during handover, information on an unavailable interval not enabling data transmission/reception during handover, and information on the time of disconnection of a link connected to the serving base station; performing a network entry process with the target base station; transmitting status information to the serving base station when an error has occurred in the network entry process; receiving from the serving base station a status information response message containing available interval and unavailable interval reset information and link disconnection time reset information for extending the link disconnection time; enabling the serving base station to provide a data transmitting/receiving service during the available interval; and re-performing the network entry process with the target base station, and disconnecting the link to the serving base station at the reset link disconnection time. | 01-12-2012 |
20120014350 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING SEAMLESS HANDOVER BETWEEN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS BASED ON IPV6 OVER IPV4 TUNNELING MECHANISM - The invention relates to a method and an apparatus for controlling seamless handover between heterogeneous networks based on IPv6 over IPv4 tunneling. When IPv6 service is provided using tunneling in an IPv4 based network environment, handover of a mobile terminal between different networks is achieved through switching of an active tunnel and a standby tunnel, and thus handover between different networks is facilitated and data loss is prevented to secure continuity of service provided to the mobile terminal even when the mobile terminal hands over to a heterogeneous network. | 01-19-2012 |
20120014351 | SYSTEM FOR CONTEXT TRANSFER FOR WIRELESS INTERNET DEVICES - A system and method for feature context transfer store all currently “active” feature contexts locally at an Access Router (AR), and store all “inactive” feature contexts centrally in a main database. The main database can be accessed by all the ARs within the same administrative domain. When a new microflow becomes active, its active feature contexts are brought from the main database and loaded into the local directory, thus replacing any inactive feature contexts that are not needed at the time. | 01-19-2012 |
20120014352 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ENFORCEMENT OF MULTIPLE PACKET DATA NETWORK (PDN) CONNECTIONS TO THE SAME ACCESS POINT NAME (APN) - An apparatus and method for enforcement of multiple packet data network (PDN) connections to a same access point name (APN) in a wireless communication system including receiving a message from a mobile device related to a first packet data network (PDN) connection to a first APN; and associating the first PDN connection related to the mobile device with a radio connection between the mobile device and an access point in response to the message. In one example, the apparatus and method further includes determining if the mobile device utilizes at least one additional radio connection with the access point to communicate over at least one additional PDN connection to the first APN. | 01-19-2012 |
20120014353 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHODS AND COMPONENTS THAT IMPLEMENT HANDOFF IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS - This invention relates to wireless local area networks, and particularly to the IEEE 802.11 family of standards. It consists of a method and apparatus that can be implemented in access points (APs) and subscriber wireless transmit/receive units (WTRUs), in order to allow an AP to initiate re-association of a WTRU to itself or a different AP. The invention improves the robustness of the network by enabling more efficient load balancing, congestion control, and roaming, without compromising the user experience. | 01-19-2012 |
20120014354 | VOICE SERVICE IN EVOLVED PACKET SYSTEM - Methods and apparatus to manage voice service in evolved packet systems are disclosed. An example method in a UE in an Evolved Packet System (EPS) includes receiving a first Non Access Stratum (NAS) protocol response message with network provided Voice over IP Multimedia (IM) Core Network (CN) Subsystem (VoIMS) indicators, wherein the UE has a voice services indicator related to a UE usage setting and responsive to at least one of the voice services indicator related to a UE usage setting or the network provided VoIMS indicators, causing the UE to disable evolved universal mobile telecommunications system terrestrial radio access (E-UTRAN) cell reselection. | 01-19-2012 |
20120014355 | METHOD OF RELIABLE HANDOVER SIGNALING PROCEDURE IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - A method for determining whether a mobile station (MS) is present in coverage of a serving base station (SBS) during a handover process and an apparatus for carrying out the same, resulting in the implementation of more reliable handover, are disclosed. A method for controlling an MS to perform a presence check procedure during handover of a broadband wireless access system includes receiving a first signal for a presence check request from an SBS, and transmitting a second signal as a response to the presence check request to the SBS. Preferably, the first signal is received after the lapse of a first time indicating a deadline at which the MS performs network re-entry to a target base station (TBS). | 01-19-2012 |
20120014356 | Systems, Methods, Apparatuses, and Computer Program Products for Facilitating Voice Call Continuity in Intersystem Handover - Systems, methods, apparatuses, and computer program products are provided for facilitating voice call continuity in intersystem handover. A method may include determining that a user equipment device being handed over from a packet switched network to a circuit switched network is a party to a voice call in an alerting state. The method may further include providing session state information indicating that the user equipment device is a party to a voice call in an alerting state to a network entity on the circuit switched network in response to the determination. Corresponding systems, computer program products and apparatuses are also provided. | 01-19-2012 |
20120020325 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR A HAND OFF OF A COMMUNICATION SESSION ACROSS SERVICE PROVIDER NETWORKS - A communication system ( | 01-26-2012 |
20120020326 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EFFECTING A HANDOFF IN A FREQUENCY-DIVISION MULTIPLEX NETWORK - In a frequency division multiplex network, a method involves employing spread-spectrum communication in addition to frequency-division multiplexing for facilitating handoffs. A portion of the total transmission resources is designated for spread-spectrum frequency division multiplexed signals. A communication between a base station and a mobile station takes place over a transmission resource block in the reserved designated portion at the moment of handoff and uses spread-spectrum frequency-division signals. A base station receiving the handoff can communicate over the transmission resource block even if it is already communicating over the transmission resource block since the communication is spread-spectrum encoded. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020327 | METHOD FOR SUPPORTING HIGH SPEED RANGING DURING HANDOVER - Disclosed is a portable internet system, and more particularly, to a method of supporting fast ranging upon handover. The method comprises calculating an action time based on a time when a handover confirmation message is received from a serving Radio Access Station (RAS), in a target RAS; and transmitting a fast ranging information message to a mobile station on the basis of the action time. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020328 | LABEL SWITCHED PACKET TRANSFER DEVICE - A device for connecting base station(s) to a cellular label switched network in a cellular network. The cellular network includes: base station(s), the connecting device(s); cellular label switched network(s); and service area(s). The base station(s) communicates with mobile terminals using wireless technology. The wireless technology uses a protocol layer architecture that includes at least one of the following: a wireless physical layer; a wireless medium access control protocol layer; a radio link control layer; and a network layer. The connecting device(s) include: a first interface to connect to the base station(s); a second interface to connect to cellular label switched network(s); and a label forwarding layer that: forwards packets between base station(s) and cellular label switched network(s); attaches label(s) to packets and removes label(s) from packets. A service area divided into a multitude of cells through which mobile terminals can move through and communicate with base station(s). | 01-26-2012 |
20120020329 | METHOD FOR ACQUIRING INFORMATION FOR MEDIA INDEPENDENT HANDOVER - This document is related to a method for acquiring information for media independent handover. More specifically the method comprises: submitting a media independent handover (MIH) query to a base station (BS) by sending a first request message, and receiving a response to the MIH query. Because the first request message is used for authorization, preferably the PKM message, the MS can acquire information for handover between heterogeneous networks before the MS finishes the network entry. | 01-26-2012 |
20120026971 | WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEM, A MOBILE DEVICE, AN INFORMATION SERVER AND A METHOD OF PROVIDING INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEM - A wireless network system including a plurality of wireless networks is provided. The wireless network system includes a plurality of mobile devices coupled to the plurality of wireless networks, the plurality of mobile devices including at least a first mobile device and a second mobile device; and an information server coupled to each of the plurality of wireless networks, wherein the information server provides handover messages to the plurality of mobile devices to assist the mobile devices in performing a handover from one of the wireless networks to another one of the wireless networks, wherein the first mobile device negotiates information sharing rules with the information server, and wherein the first mobile device provides, to the second mobile device, shared information according to the information sharing rules. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026972 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING RANGE EXPANSION IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A wireless network for communicating with a mobile station capable of operating in a range expansion mode. The wireless network comprises a macro-base station (BS) operable to communicate with the mobile station and a micro-base station (BS) in a coverage area associated with the macro-BS. The macro-BS transmits to the micro-BS a first control message indicating a range expansion (RE) capability of the mobile station. In response, the micro-BS transmits to the macro-BS PCFICH information associated with the micro-BS. The macro-BS transmits the PCFICH information to the mobile station and the mobile station uses the PCFICH information to perform a handover procedure to the micro-BS. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026973 | HANDOVER DATA INTEGRITY IN A WIRELESS DATA NETWORK - A method and apparatus for handover data integrity of a mobile station in a wireless data network with a plurality of wireless network service areas. The method and apparatus includes initiating handover by a mobile station, identifying a target access service network (ASN) for handover from a serving ASN. When the target ASN is identified, receive a data integrity capability from the target ASN, and determine whether a direct data delivery mode is available as a data integrity mode. When a direct data delivery mode is available, direct data delivery is performed with the data associated with the service flow from the serving ASN to the target ASN. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026974 | LOAD BALANCING FOR AN AIR INTERFACE PROTOCOL ARCHITECTURE WITH A PLURALITY OF HETEROGENEOUS PHYSICAL LAYER MODES - A system and method for dynamic traffic load balancing with a multiple physical layer modes of an air interface protocol architecture, the protocol architecture residing in a base station and/or an access network that includes a base station and access gateway that include distributed and centralized components of the air interface protocol architecture. The traffic load balancing supports various multiplexing scenarios for scheduling communication data under time division multiple access and frequency division multiple access techniques for use in the multi-carrier wireless network. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026975 | ACCESS CONTROL METHOD, ACCESS CONTROL APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An access control method, an access control apparatus and a communication system are disclosed, and a mechanism for processing Emergency Call (EMC) services is disclosed, and such mechanism ensures continuity of the EMC service while implementing the access control under a Closed Subscriber Group (CSG) mechanism. The access control method includes: obtaining CSG area information of a target area; and controlling the access of a User Equipment (UE) to the target area according to the CSG area information of the target area and/or whether an EMC service exists on the UE. The present invention is applicable to the scenario in which the UE accesses a network. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026976 | RANDOM ACCESS METHOD, EVOLVED NODE B, AND TERMINAL EQUIPMENT - A random access method, an evolved Node B (eNB), and a terminal equipment are provided. The method includes: determining target component carriers to which a User Equipment (UE) is to be handed over, and notifying the UE of information about the target component carriers through a source eNB; and after receiving a dedicated random access preamble sent by the UE, sending a random access response message on at least one component carrier in the target component carriers. The terminal equipment includes: a handover command receiving unit, a sending unit, and a random response receiving unit. Therefore, in a random access procedure of cell handover, the eNB is capable of determining downlink component carriers that a UE monitors, thereby increasing utilization rate of downlink resources. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026977 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDOVER IN A MULTI-CARRIER SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for handover in a multi-carrier system are provided. A user equipment receives multi-carrier measurement information from a base station, and measures carriers based on the multi-carrier measurement information. The user equipment performs a handover with a target base station through an access reference carrier which is one of a plurality of component carriers of which the measurement result is reported. The present invention minimizes a delay caused by the handover, and reduces battery consumption of the user equipment. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026978 | METHOD OF ZONE SWITCH IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - A method for allowing a mobile station (MS) to perform zone switching within coverage of a base station (BS) in a broadband wireless access system is disclosed. A method for controlling an advanced mobile station (AMS) to perform zone switching in an MZone of a serving advanced base station (serving ABS) supporting a legacy mobile station (MS) includes receiving a handover command (AAI_HO-CMD) message indicating zone switching to a legacy zone (LZone) from the MZone, and receiving at least one of an uplink MAP (UL-MAP) and a downlink MAP (DL-MAP) from the LZone. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026979 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DEFERRED LEG LINKING IN PCRF IN RELATION TO HANDOVER - The present invention relates to a solution for handling deferred leg linking in policy and charging rules function in a telecommunications network in relation to handover between two different access technologies. The solution is provided as a nodes, system and a method for handling handover of a user equipment, i.e. UE, ( | 02-02-2012 |
20120026980 | Inter-node B handover method - The present invention discloses an inter-Node B handover method, wherein a target eNB sends a Handover Request Acknowledge message including handover reference frequency point information through a source eNB to a user equipment, wherein the handover reference frequency point information includes center frequency point information of an uplink component carrier designated for the user equipment to initiate a random access request. Further, the present invention discloses another inter-Node B handover method, wherein a target eNB orderly arrays center frequency point information of uplink component carriers of a target cell to obtain a first list, the target eNB sends a Handover Request Acknowledge message including the first list through a source eNB to a user equipment, and the user equipment requests a random access according to the center frequency point information of a first uplink component carrier. Through the solution of the present invention, the usage rate of the random access resources for the target eNB can be improved effectively and the conflict of random is accesses can be reduced. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026981 | MOBILE STATION MESSAGE HAVING A STATION CLASS MARK FIELD FOR INDICATING AN MEID CAPABLE MOBILE STATION - A mobile station for wireless communication includes a control processor configured to generate a message for transmission on a reverse signaling channel, the message including a Station Class Mark field having a plurality of bits, a portion of the Station Class Mark field indicating that the mobile station is uniquely identified by a Mobile Station Equipment Identifier. | 02-02-2012 |
20120026982 | METHOD FOR IMPROVING HIGH-SPEED DOWNLINK OPERATION IN CELL_FACH STATE FOR A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND RELATED APPARATUS - A method of improving a high-speed downlink operation in CELL_FACH state for a network terminal of a wireless communications system includes using a first function but not using a second function when a user equipment, hereinafter called UE, initiates a cell update procedure. The network terminal wirelessly communicates with the UE, and the network terminal and the UE both support the high-speed downlink operation in CELL_FACH state. The first function is used for allocating a dedicated HS-DSCH radio network transaction identifier (H-RNTI) to the UE, so as to manage the UE to perform the high-speed downlink operation in CELL_FACH based on the dedicated H-RNTI. The second function is used for not allocating the dedicated H-RNTI to the UE. | 02-02-2012 |
20120033638 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, GATEWAY APPARATUS AND SERVER APPARATUS - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes the steps of: (A) disconnecting a core network bearer when it is determined that a mobile station (UE) visits a radio access network of the W-CDMA scheme and communication is not performed via the core network bearer for a predetermined period; and (B) holding the core network bearer when it is determined that the mobile station (UE) visits a radio access network of the LTE scheme and communication is not performed via the core network bearer for the predetermined period. | 02-09-2012 |
20120033639 | SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR CONVERGING WIMAX AND WIFI NETWORKS - A system for converging Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMAX) and Wireless Fidelity (WiFi) networks is provided. The system includes an interworking adaptor (IWA) or interworking control function (IWCF). The IWA or IWCF is configured to communicate with an access point (AP)/access controller (AC) of the WiFi network, and also configured to communicate with an entity in a connectivity service network (CSN) of the WiMAX network, where the IWA or IWCF is further configured to perform access control on a terminal STA/MS accessing the CSN from the WiFi network. By using the system for converging the WiMAX and WiFi networks disclosed in the foregoing embodiments of the present invention, convergence of one or more functions between the WiFi and WiMAX networks may be implemented conveniently. | 02-09-2012 |
20120033640 | COMMUNICATION METHOD FOR A MOBILE TERMINAL AND MOBILE TERMINAL - A technique for flexibly performing processes depending on the type of a path for providing an additional service when there are a plurality of paths for providing additional services for the same session between terminals communicating with each other over a network is disclosed. According to the technique, when a mobile terminal (MN | 02-09-2012 |
20120033641 | METHOD AND ENODEB FOR FORWARDING DOWNLINK AND UPLINK PACKETS BASED ON S1 HANDOVER - A method for forwarding downlink packets based on S1 handover is disclosed. The method includes: numbering a packet not processed by using PDCP according to a message that comprises PDCP Serial Number (SN) information if downlink packets to be forwarded include the packet not processed by using PDCP; and sending the downlink packets to the UE according to the PDCP SN corresponding to the packet included in the downlink packets. A method for forwarding uplink packets based on S1 handover is disclosed. The method includes: receiving state report information of the packet sent by the target eNodeB; and sending the packet according to the state report information of the packet. Another method for forwarding downlink packets based on S1 handover and an eNodeB are disclosed. Through the embodiments of the present disclosure, the packets are forwarded without loss in the case of S1 handover. | 02-09-2012 |
20120033642 | Non-Carrier Dependent Femtocell and Related Methods - The methods and devices of the present disclosure may be used to enable non-carrier dependent, Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) femtocells for in-service use with one or more mobile handheld devices. The VoIP femtocell generally includes at least one Radio Frequency (RF) transceiver; and program logic that, at least in part, performs a broadcast channel selection protocol and a handheld reselection protocol, so as to enable one or more mobile handheld devices to select the VoIP femtocell for in-service use. In certain embodiments, the broadcast channel selection protocol includes a configuration phase and a broadcast phase. | 02-09-2012 |
20120039299 | Relay enhanced cellular telecommunication network - Systems and techniques for avoiding inefficiencies resulting from failed handover attempts. A base station selects one or more mobility management entity (MME) pools for assignment to a relay node, with the selection being performed so as to minimize or eliminate handover attempts requiring that a target device support a particular MME pool when the MME pool is not supported by the MME. A base station selects, when communicating with a relay node, a subset of the MME pools that it supports and assigns the subset to the base station. UEs served by the relay node are assigned the MME pool or MME pools assigned to the relay node. The relay node is informed of the MME pools supported by one or more neighbor nodes and, when attempting a handover to a neighbor node, attempts an X2 handover only to neighbor nodes supporting an MME pool assigned to the relay node. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039300 | METHOD FOR HANDOVER OF A MOBILE NODE IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A method for handover of a mobile node (MN) in a communications network from a previous point of attachment (p-PoA) associated with a previous mobility access gateway (pMAG) to a new point of attachment (n-PoA) associated with a new mobility access gateway (nMAG), where the pMAG and nMAG are associated with a mobility anchor (LMA), comprises the nMAG receiving a handover indicator concerning the MN from the pMAG. After receiving the handover indicator at the nMAG, the nMAG establishes a transient binding with the LMA. Following establishment of the transient binding, the nMAG receives downloaded data for the MN from the LMA prior to establishment of a connection between the MN and the n-PoA. The method may be used with PMIP Mobile Internet Protocol (PMIP). | 02-16-2012 |
20120039301 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING HARQ AND ARQ IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for controlling a Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ) of a mobile communication system is provided. The method includes establishing a default Best Effort (BE) connection, transmitting, when a Dynamic Service Addition (DSA) is request for a new service, an Advance Air Interface_Registration-Request (AAI_DSA-REQ) message including HARQ channel mapping information from a base station to a mobile station, and transmitting, when the AAI_DSA-REQ message is received from the base station, an Advance Air Interface_Dynamic Service Addition-Response (AAI_DSA-RSP) message from the mobile station to the base station in order to establish a HARQ channel based on the HARQ channel mapping information. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039302 | METHOD OF PERFORMING A HANDOVER PROCEDURE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system and UE providing wireless communication services, and a method of effectively performing a handover procedure in an evolved Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) that has evolved from a Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS), a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, or a LTE-A (LTE-Advanced) system and it may be an object of the present invention to perform the handover procedure without terminating a data transmission between a terminal and a base station by utilizing carrier aggregation scheme, which allows a high-speed data transmission by using a plurality of frequencies. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039303 | PS TO CS HANDOVER INDICATOR - The present invention relates to a solution for handling handover of connections for a user equipment from a packet switch network to a circuit switched network This is provided as a method implemented in a node and system The method is provided in a telecommunications network ( | 02-16-2012 |
20120044907 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT FOR MANAGING USER EQUIPMENT ACCESS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Methods and arrangements in a node in a wireless communication system for managing user equipment access to the target node. The wireless communication system comprises the target node, a source node, a core network node and a user equipment. The user equipment is configured for wireless communication over a bearer with the source node and for performing a handover from the source node to the target node. The method comprises receiving a bearer request associated with the user equipment, obtaining a time information parameter associated with the queuing time of the bearer request in at least the source node, checking if communication resources are available for establishing a bearer with the user equipment. If communication resources are not available, the bearer request is placed in a priority queue, based on the received time information parameter. | 02-23-2012 |
20120044908 | INTERWORKING GATEWAY FOR MOBILE NODES - Systems and methods are provided that allow inter-working between communication networks for the delivery of service to mobile nodes. A gateway is provided that communicates with a femto cell to extend service to an area that otherwise does not receive coverage from a service provider. The femto cell is a small scale base station used to provide coverage over a small area (such as a home or business), and connect to a home or enterprise network. The femto cell provides service for a mobile node and a gateway permits communication over a broadband network. The gateway integrates the mobile nodes connecting via a femto cell into the service provider's network. The gateway also allows provisioning of services and applications, control of service levels, and provides seamless handoffs to marco base stations and other types of access technologies such as Wi-Fi. | 02-23-2012 |
20120044909 | EFFICIENT HANDOVER METHOD IN BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a broadband wireless access system, and more particularly, to a handover method that can reduce a stop time in an entry before a break-type handover for performing more efficient handover, and to apparatus for performing same. A handover method for a terminal in a broadband wireless access system according to one embodiment of the present invention may include: receiving, from a serving base station, a handover command message including the information of a section in which scheduling for the terminal is not performed; transmitting a ranging code to a target base station during the section; and receiving information indicating the transmitted result of the ranging code from the serving base station. | 02-23-2012 |
20120057564 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO SHORTEN THE DURATION OF INITIAL NETWORK SELECTION AND HANDOVER DECISIONS IN MULTICOMM PLATFORMS BY UTILIZING ALTERNATE FRAGMENTED SCANNING - An embodiment of the present invention provides an apparatus, comprising a network adapter capable of combining more than one wireless communication technology (comm) for wireless communication in a wireless network, wherein the apparatus includes a network detection phase implemented by doing a full scan of one comm followed by one or more additional comm scans; and wherein the network adapter breaks a scan into buckets, and alternates between different scanning buckets of different comms to provide faster scanning, connection time and handover from one wireless technology to another wireless technology. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057565 | DLS-ASSISTED WIRED TO WIRELESS HANDOVER - Solutions are proposed to enable a seamless handover/handback of a communication between a docked state and an undocked state. The transfer is effected by performing a transfer between a docked persona of a user and an undocked persona of that same user. By utilizing certain SIP transfer mechanisms or H.323 bridged-appearances, in-progress call sessions and media can be sustained during handover and/or handback. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057566 | ENHANCED BASE STATION AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING THROUGH AN ENHANCED DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA SYSTEM (eDAS) - Embodiments of an enhanced base station and method for communicating through an enhanced distributed antenna system (eDAS) are generally described herein. The eDAS includes geographically-separated antenna nodes and each of the antenna nodes has a plurality of antenna elements. The base station may perform physical-layer baseband processing for each of the antenna nodes at a centralized processing location, and may cause the antenna nodes to transmit reference signals in accordance with a multiplexing scheme to allow user equipment to perform channel estimation for the antenna elements of any one or more of the antenna nodes. The base station may also cause the antenna nodes to transmit signals having synchronization codes to allow the user equipment to synchronize with the antenna elements of any one or more of the antenna nodes. In some embodiments, the base station may communicate with the antenna nodes over a physical-layer interface. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057567 | Dynamic Internetwork Load Balancing - Examples are disclosed for executing vertical handovers of wireless devices configured to couple with heterogeneous wireless networks. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057568 | CELLULAR WIRELESS NETWORK AND METHOD OF OPERATION - A method of operating a cellular wireless network comprises broadcasting information about Internet Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) emergency call capability of the network on a broadcast channel in a cell of the network. This information may in one method concern the IMS emergency call capability of a base station included in the network and in another method it may include IMS emergency call capability of a base station and the core network. | 03-08-2012 |
20120057569 | Method for realizing single radio voice call continuity and single radio voice call continuity system - A method for realizing a single radio voice call continuity and a single radio voice call continuity system are disclosed. After a UE- | 03-08-2012 |
20120063414 | Handover of Multimode User Equipment Between Radio Access Technologies for Reduced Call Setup Time - A communication system that employs Wireless Wide Area Networks (WWAN) of different Radio Access Technologies (RATs) ensures that simultaneous handover to 1×RTT and 1×EVDO is attempted only when warranted. The User Equipment (UE) that has multiple transceivers and is actively involved in a packet data session can be transferred from LTE to 1×EVDO. A criterion (e.g., cost, subscriber preference, operator preference, or network data traffic) can be used to determine when it is warranted to incur the setup delay time to perform simultaneous handover of both a voice connection and a packet data session. Conversely, if there is no active data session, generally the UE can be handed over only to 1×RTT for the voice/Short Message Service (SMS) call. In an aspect, the criterion can still dictate setting up simultaneously even for an active packet data session, such as for maintaining a time critical function of the device. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063415 | IMS FEMTOCELL FOR VOICE, DATA AND VIDEO - An Internet Protocol Multimedia System (IMS) femtocell serves as a base station and base station controller in a wireless/wireline service provider's macro network and a Wi-Fi access point to seamlessly support cellular and packet user devices and deliver both circuit switched and packet switched services inside a building. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063416 | Mobile Communication Terminal, Incoming Data Detecting Method And Incoming Data Detecting Program - Included are a system information receiving unit for receiving, from a first base station or a second base station, system information including a PI within a PICH and a PCH, and a cell reselecting unit for executing a cell reselection process for switching from a wireless communication with the first base station to that with the second base station if a mobile communication terminal fails to obtain local incoming information due to unsuccessful reception of the PCH, which is made by the system information receiving unit, after receiving a notification that incoming data exists by receiving the PI within the system information received by the system information receiving unit within the first service area. Consequently, the mobile communication terminal and incoming data detecting method and program, which can securely receive incoming data even if the mobile communication terminal fails to receive the PCH although receiving incoming information with the PI. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063417 | Method, Apparatus, and Related Computer Program Product for Load Balancing in a Relay Network - It is disclosed a method (and related apparatus) including deciding a handover of a terminal from a relaying source entity to a relaying target entity based on information related to at least one link between the relaying source and target entities and source and target network access entities. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063418 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDLING SRVCC IN AN INTER RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY HANDOVER - The techniques introduced herein provide a system and method for determining whether an inter-RAT handover is an SRVCC handover, and for performing the subsequent SRVCC handover. The techniques include receiving a handover command message that does not include SRVCC related information elements, for example “RAB info to replace,” but continuing with an SRVCC handover using a circuit-switched RAB provided in the information for setup. The techniques also include receiving a handover command message that does include SRVCC related information elements and performing the SRVCC handover by an alternative method. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063419 | Mobility Mechanism for Service Continuity with Core Element Failure - A system comprising an inter-RAT/inter-network redundancy controller (IRC) is provided. The IRC is configured to communicate with a source gateway in communication with a source radio access network (RAN) using a first radio access technology (RAT). The IRC is further configured to communicate with a target gateway in communication with a target RAN using a second RAT. The IRC is further configured to promote a handover of a user equipment from the source RAN connected to the source gateway to the target RAN connected to the target gateway when the source gateway fails. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063420 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING A CALL HANDOVER BETWEEN TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A method for controlling a call handover between telecommunication networks includes determining whether a User Equipment (UE), in communication with a first network, is engaged in a call attempt when the UE is to be transferred from the first network to a second network, if the UE is engaged in a call attempt, maintaining the UE communicating with the first network, and if the UE is not engaged in a call attempt, initiating the handover from the first network to the second network. | 03-15-2012 |
20120069816 | Method and Apparatus for Controlling Cellular Reselection Attempts on a Computing Device - A method and apparatus for controlling cellular reselection attempts on a computing device is disclosed. A computing device performs an automated process to repeatedly check the adequacy of the serving cell that it is currently assigned to. The computing device performs the check to determine whether it should perform a neighbor search and cell reselection. If the computing device determines the presence of particular conditions, it can perform the reselection by a default automated process. On the other hand, if the computing device determines criteria based, at least in part, on past instances, the computing device can modify the default automated process and skip attempts at performing neighbor search and cell reselections. | 03-22-2012 |
20120069817 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO PROVIDE PACKET SWITCHED SERVICE CONTINUITY DURING CIRCUIT SWITCHED FALLBACK OPERATION - Methods and apparatus to provide packet switched service continuity during circuit switched fallback operation are described. One example method includes determining that a target system does not support packet switched handover; determining if non-3GPP access for packet switched service is available; and triggering handover to the non-3GPP access. | 03-22-2012 |
20120069818 | Method and Device for Handing Off Between Base Stations - The present invention discloses a method and apparatus for handoff between base stations. A target base station bears its PILOT_INC information into a handoff request acknowledge message to inform a source base station when sending a handoff request acknowledge message to the source base station after receiving a handoff request from the source base station, thus, even if a UE requesting handoff reports PILOT_PN_PHASE under the target BS in a residual set, the source BS can determine PILOT_PN corresponding to the PILOT_PN_PHASE through the PILOT_INC information of the target base station, thereby completing cell handoff between the base stations successfully. The present invention is a supplement to the existing handoff between the base stations with configurations of the PILOT_INC information being different, and augments the success rate of handoff between the base stations of the UE, thereby improving the traffic service quality of a CDMA system. | 03-22-2012 |
20120069819 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING RRC CONNECTION OR REESTABLISHMENT IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING CARRIER AGGREGATION - The invention relates to a method for performing a radio resource control (RRC) connection or reestablishment in a communication system using carrier aggregation (CA), and to a terminal device for same. The present invention involves acquiring information on an additional component carrier (CC) through system information in addition to the CC which is specified during cell selection or reselection, and enables the CC on which additional information is acquired to be usable during the RRC connection or reestablishment performed by user equipment, to thereby prevent loads from being concentrated on a specific CC. | 03-22-2012 |
20120069820 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS HANDOFF METHOD AND SYSTEM EMPLOYING SUCH - A method for reducing a delay in a wireless communications system resulting from a handoff while mitigating a risk of premature termination of wireless communications, the method includes comparing data indicative of actual use of the wireless communications systems to at least one predetermined criteria. If the comparing determines a sector pairing in the wireless communications system to be statistically significant for purposes of recommending at least one search window setting, at least one value related with a distance associated with the sector pairing may be used to automatically determine a corresponding signal delay. If the corresponding signal delay exceeds a prior determined signal delay, a recommended search window setting may be determined using the corresponding signal delay. | 03-22-2012 |
20120069821 | RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, RADIO MOBILE DEVICE AND RADIO BASE STATION ACCOMODATION APPARATUS - A radio communication method in which, when hand-off of the down direction is performed while a radio mobile device subjects one application packet of the up direction to fragmentation to divide the one application packet into a plurality of radio packets and transmits the plurality of radio packets, sequence numbers of radio packets managed by a first radio base station to the plurality of fragmented radio packets of the one application packet even after the hand-off of the down direction is performed and to apply sequence numbers of radio packets managed by a second radio base station to fragmented radio packets of the application packet transmitted subsequently after completion of transmission of the plurality of fragmented radio packets of the one application packet; and making a radio base station accommodation apparatus identify a radio base station and restore data for each radio base station. | 03-22-2012 |
20120069822 | VOIP SERVICE THRESHOLD DETERMINATION BY WIRELESS ROUTER - A wireless router establishes a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) that supports wireless communications within a WLAN service area. The wireless router establishes broadband communications via a broadband connection with a Voice over IP (VoIP) service accumulator. The wireless router receives a query from the VoIP service accumulator requesting information regarding the prior servicing of, or ability to service, VoIP calls by the wireless router. In response, the VoIP service accumulator receives information regarding the prior servicing of, or ability to service, VoIP calls. The wireless router and the VoIP service accumulator subsequently service VoIP calls within the WLAN based upon the information regarding the prior servicing of, or ability to service, VoIP calls by the wireless router. | 03-22-2012 |
20120076107 | AUTONOMOUS SCANNING AND HANDOVER - In some embodiments a network adapter comprises a first network access technology and a second network access technology and a controller comprising logic to locate an available network which utilizes the first network access technology and automatically connect to the available network using the first network access technology when a network identifier associated with the available network is stored in a memory module coupled to the network adapter. Other embodiments may be described. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076108 | TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A method of operating a mobile wireless network, in which, when there is a relocation, the connection may be continued directly from the latest state before the relocation. User data is transmitted between a mobile station and a first base station, the user data being combined into data units. For transmission of data units, transmission-specific information describing an instantaneous state of the transmission is stored in the mobile station, as well as in a first network unit at a higher level than the first base station. With the relocation of the mobile station from the first base station to a second base station having a second higher-level network unit, the transmission-specific information stored in the first higher-level network unit is transmitted to the second higher-level network unit to continue the transmission after the relocation essentially directly from its latest state. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076109 | Session Transfer in a Communication Network - A method and apparatus for transferring a session from a packet switched access network to a circuit switched access network. A Mobility Management Entity receives a service type indicator from a gateway node. The service type indicator indicates a type of service for the session, and is associated with bearers used for the session. The Mobility Management Entity subsequently receives, from an eNodeB, an indication that the session is to be transferred from the packet switched network to the circuit switched access network. The Mobility Management Entity determines the bearers associated with the session using the service type indicator, and initiates transfer of the session using those bearers. This ensures that the correct bearers are transferred regardless of whether or not identifiers such as QCI values have been ascribed to other types of service. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076110 | CONTEXT TRANSFER SYSTEMS AND METHODS IN SUPPORT OF MOBILITY - A broad aspect of the invention provides a method of providing mobility support for a mobile node's traffic. The method involves maintaining context information for the mobile node on each of a first plurality of network nodes carrying the traffic; and proactively transferring and maintaining at least a portion of the context information in a plurality of network nodes which are not carrying the traffic, but which are candidates for carrying the traffic due to mobility of the mobile node. The method typically further involves defining and maintaining a definition of the second plurality of network nodes. In one embodiment of the invention, this involves adding a particular network node to the second plurality when the particular network node becomes a candidate for carrying the traffic, removing a particular network node from the second plurality when the particular network node is no longer a candidate for carrying the traffic. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076111 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROCESSING HANDOVER IN HETEROGENEOUS MOBILITY PROTOCOL MIXED NETWORKS AND MIP CLIENT DEVICE - A method for processing handover to provide IP mobility for mobile user equipment, a system thereof, and a Mobile IP (MIP) client device using the same method. The method processing handover at a home agent in a heterogeneous protocol mixed network includes: at a home agent, creating a Proxy Mobile IP (PMIP) tunnel when user equipment accesses a PMIP network; at the home agent, creating a Client Mobile IP (CMIP) tunnel when a CMIP network is accessed due to handover of the user equipment; and at the home agent, severing the PMIP tunnel when the user equipment completes performing handover. | 03-29-2012 |
20120076112 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEDIA INDEPENDENT HANDOVER CAPABILITY DISCOVERY - A first media independent handover function (MIHF) receives a media independent handover (MIH) capabilities discovery request from a second MIHF and generates a MIH capabilities discovery response message, including one or more parameters. Then the first MIHF then sends the MIH capabilities discovery response to the second MIHF. Based on the information contained in the MIH capabilities discovery response, the first MIHF may receive a handover request message from the second MIHF. The one or more parameters included within the discovery response message indicates the specific technologies for which the first MIHF supports a MMB handover. The one or more parameters may include a list of the technologies for which a make-before-break (MMB) handover is supported. For example, a parameter may use a specific bit structure wherein each bit is a Boolean representation of whether MMB handover is supported for a specific type of technology. | 03-29-2012 |
20120082131 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF HANDOVER IN WIRELESS NETWORK - A method of handover in a wireless network includes in response to a request for data from a user equipment connected to a first access point in the plurality of access points, determining whether the first access point is storing the requested data and if the first access point is storing the requested data, then serving the user equipment with the first access point, if it is determined that the first access point is not storing the requested data, then determining whether a second access point in the plurality of access points is storing the requested data, and if it is determined that the second access point is storing the requested data, then initiating a handover of the user equipment to the second access point. | 04-05-2012 |
20120082132 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR OFFLOADING DATA IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method is provided in one example embodiment and includes receiving a data packet over a first link at a first network element; establishing an out-of-band channel over a second link between the first network element and a second network element; and receiving instructions at the first network element to offload the data packet from the first link. In more particular embodiments, the first network element is a mobile enabled router, and the second network element is a gateway general packet radio service support node or a packet data network gateway. The method can also include receiving a discovery message from the second network element, the discovery message triggering the establishment of the out-of-band channel. In certain cases, the data packet is offloaded based on a type of data in the data packet. | 04-05-2012 |
20120082133 | Method of Sending Network Configuration and Related Communication Device - A method of sending a network configuration of a network in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises sending the network configuration in a dedicated message to a mobile station (MS), wherein the network configuration is specific for a machine type communication (MTC) device. | 04-05-2012 |
20120082134 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER BETWEEN HETEROGENEOUS RADIO NETWORKS - A method and system for performing a handover of a mobile device from a first wireless network to a second wireless network is provided, the mobile device being operably connected, via a tunnel, to a server of a Mobile Internet Protocol (IP) system, and to an information server coupled to the first wireless network and the second wireless network. The method includes transmitting, by the mobile device, a handover data packet to the information server via the tunnel, and transmitting, by the mobile device, the handover data packet to the information server via another route. | 04-05-2012 |
20120082135 | Mobile Assisted Handover in Mobile Communications Networks - The invention relates to a technique for mobile assisted handover in mobile communications networks, e.g. Long Term Evolution (LTE) networks, in a situation of an ongoing data reception or data transmission of a mobile terminal which hinders reception of system information from a candidate cell for handover. A method embodiment of such technique is performed in a mobile terminal and comprises the steps of accepting information related to an ongoing data reception/transmission from at least one data reception/transmission component of the mobile terminal; establishing if the ongoing data reception/transmission enables a reception of a unique cell identifier indicating a candidate cell for handover; selectively halting the ongoing data reception/transmission, receiving the unique cell identifier of the candidate cell, and resuming afterwards the data reception/transmission. | 04-05-2012 |
20120082136 | P-CSCF FAST HANDOFF FOR IMS/MMS ARCHITECTURE - A mechanism by which handoff delay can be minimized while not compromising the IMS/MMD security and also protecting the media if required by certain applications is presented. One proactive method includes proactive authentication. Another proactive method includes proactive security association, such as transferring SA keys from old proxy to new proxy, or transferring keys through serving signal entities. Reactive methods include transferring SA keys from old proxy to new proxy, using either push or pull technology. Other reactive methods include transferring keys through serving signal entities using either push or pull technology. | 04-05-2012 |
20120082137 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND TERMINAL APPARATUS - A communication apparatus includes a receiver that can receive data that has been divided among multiple communication carriers and transmitted, and that has multiple communication modes, each using a different number of communication carriers for reception; an acquirer that acquires information indicating a change in the communication volume of the receiver; and a switch that switches the communication mode of the receiver, based on the information acquired by the acquirer. | 04-05-2012 |
20120087337 | METHODS FOR AN UPLINK POWER CONTROL MECHANISM - A method for an uplink power control mechanism is presented. In one embodiment, the method includes receiving an allocation information element (IE) in conjunction with a ranging process. The method includes processing the allocation information element to determine power control parameters including a first parameter about offset control and a second parameter about noise and interference level. The method also includes calculating the power value for each channel based at least in part on two or more power control parameters. | 04-12-2012 |
20120087338 | INDICATING ACTION TIMES AND FAST RANGING CAPABILITIES OF TARGET BASE STATIONS - According to one example embodiment, a method may include determining whether each of a plurality of target base stations is capable of providing a fast ranging opportunity to a mobile station served by the serving base station, and, for each of the plurality of target base stations which is capable of providing the fast ranging opportunity to the mobile station, determining an action time after which the target base station can send an uplink map to the mobile station, the uplink map indicating when the mobile station should send a fast ranging request. The method may also include sending a handover message to the mobile station, the handover message indicating whether each of the plurality of target base stations is capable of providing the fast ranging opportunity to the mobile station and, for each of the plurality of target base stations which is capable of providing the fast ranging opportunity to the mobile station, indicating the action time after which the target base station can send the uplink map to the mobile station. | 04-12-2012 |
20120087339 | Method of Handling Call Transferring And Related communication device - A method of handling call transferring for a communication device during a SRVCC handover procedure is disclosed. The method comprise switching a plurality of IP Multimedia System (IMS) calls to a plurality of corresponding circuit-switched (CS) calls according to reception of a handover command when a mobile device has the plurality of IMS calls; and setting a plurality of transaction identifier (TI) values for each of the plurality of corresponding CS calls according to the plurality of IMS calls. The plurality of IMS calls share a packet switched (PS) configuration. | 04-12-2012 |
20120087340 | Circuit Switch FallBack Reselection - There is provided methods for a user equipment (UE) and a user equipment being adapted to be attached and connected to a 2G/3G access network via a mobile switching centre (MSC) for performing at least circuit switched, CS, communication, or via a LTE access network and further on to a mobility management entity (MME) node, for performing packet switched, PS, and/or circuit switched, CS, communication. The user equipment (UE) is being adapted to receiving page signals ( | 04-12-2012 |
20120087341 | IN-DEVICE INTERFERENCE AVOIDANCE METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TERMINAL EQUIPPED WITH MULTIPLE COMMUNICATION MODULES - A method and apparatus for avoiding in-device interference in a terminal equipped with multiple heterogeneous communication modules (e.g. Long Term Evolution (LTE), Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN), Bluetooth, and Global Positioning System (GPS) modules) are provided. The method includes one of detecting and predicting interference caused by the second communication module to communication of the first communication module, transmitting an interference occurrence information message to a base station for controlling to avoid the interference, and controlling to avoid the interference by executing one of a handover and discontinuous reception according to a control command included in an interference occurrence information response message transmitted by the base station. The terminal provides the cell with the interference-related information, the cell configures the Discontinuous Reception (DRX) based on the interference-related information, and the terminal can reduce in-device interference through the controlled DRX operation, resulting in improvement of communication reliability of the communication modules. | 04-12-2012 |
20120087342 | METHOD TO SUPPORT RAPID INTER BASE STATION HANDOFFS IN IP BASED WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method that allows for rapid inter base station handoffs in IP based wireless networks is disclosed. More specifically a technique to address the problem of accurate location management during rapid handoff across multiple base stations is described in this invention disclosure. The idea proposed uses a combination of Timestamp and Sequence number along with a message exchange protocol over the network to maintain the registration with only a single base station at any point of time. | 04-12-2012 |
20120087343 | WLAN-To-WWAN Handover Methods And Apparatus Using A WLAN Support Node Having A WWAN Interface - A network support node which includes a local area network (LAN) interface and a cellular RF interface is provided. The LAN interface is configured to connect the network support node as a LAN node in a LAN. The cellular RF interface is configured to provide wireless communications over a wireless communication link with a base station of a cellular network, such that the network support node operates as a client end station with the base station. The network support node receives, from the LAN via the LAN interface, data of a communication session between a mobile communication device and another communication device. The network support node communicates with the mobile communication device, via the cellular RF interface over the wireless communication link with the base station, the data of the communication session. | 04-12-2012 |
20120087344 | QUALITY OF SERVICE RESOURCE NEGOTIATION - Embodiments of apparatuses, articles, methods, and systems for negotiating quality of service resources in wireless networks are generally described herein. Other embodiments may be described and claimed. | 04-12-2012 |
20120087345 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR HANDOVER BETWEEN DIFFERENT TYPES OF ACCESS SYSTEMS - A method for handover between different types of access systems in an embodiment of the present invention includes: sending, by a User Equipment (UE), a Mobile Internet Protocol (MIP) registration request to an Inter Access Systems Anchor(IASA) used in a 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) access system, when the UE hands over from the 3GPP access system to a non-3GPP access system; receiving, by the UE, a MIP registration response from the IASA used in the 3GPP access system; establishing, by the UE, a service data route with the IASA used in the 3GPP access system through the non-3GPP access system The present invention does not require searching for the IASA, HA or VPN GW through a DNS resolution process in the destination access system, and reduces the UE handover time. | 04-12-2012 |
20120093125 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A radio base station includes a mobile communication system, a first relay node and a first radio base station connected via a radio bearer, a second relay node, and a second radio base station connected via a radio bearer. The first radio base station and the second radio base station are connected via a bearer, in which a mobile station is configured so as to conduct a handover process between a first and second state. In the first state a radio bearer is established with the first relay node in order to communicate. In the second state a radio bearer is established with the second relay node in order to communicate. The mobile station is configured such that in the handover process, control signals are transmitted and received via the radio bearer between the first relay node, first radio base station, second radio base station, and second relay node. | 04-19-2012 |
20120093126 | Method of Transmitting and Handling CountingResponse Message and Related Communication Device - A method of transmitting CountingResponse message for a mobile device in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises steps of receiving a CountingRequest message from a network; activating security between the mobile device and a network in the wireless communication system; and transmitting a CountingResponse message to the network. | 04-19-2012 |
20120093127 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - Provided is a communication control method in a mobile radio system in which a transmission side radio communication device is connected to a reception side radio communication device via radio propagation path. A parameter for data link control is set in the transmission side radio communication device and the reception side radio communication device. The set parameter such as a parameter of a layer is modified by using a state change of the radio propagation path as a trigger. | 04-19-2012 |
20120093128 | HANDOVER METHOD, USER EQUIPMENT, AND NETWORK SIDE DEVICE - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a handover method, User Equipment (UE), and a network side device, which can shorten a handover delay of a control plane and an interrupt delay of user plane data. A handover method includes: obtaining, by a UE, a Time Advance (TA) of a target cell before a handover; and obtaining an Uplink Grant (UL Grant) sent by the target cell; and then sending a Handover Complete message to the target cell with the TA on a resource that is corresponding to the UL Grant. | 04-19-2012 |
20120093129 | Mechanism for 3rd Generation Partnership Project Multiple Inter-Network Quality of Service Continuity - A system to promote connectivity for inter-radio access technology (RAT) handover from a first radio access network (RAN) to a second radio access network (RAN) is provided. The system comprises a component configured such that for each access point name (APN) in communication with the first radio access network (RAN), the maximum bit rate (MBR) for each active non-guaranteed bit rate (non-GBR) bearer in the second radio access network (RAN) is determined based on each respective access point name's (APN's) used aggregate maximum bit rate (AMBR) and the number of active non-guaranteed bit rate(s) (non-GBR) bearers for the respective access point name (APN). | 04-19-2012 |
20120093130 | SYSTEM, METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM FOR IP-FEMTOCELL PROVISIONED RADIO ACCESS NETWORK - A system, method, and computer readable medium for provisioning radio access via a femtocell system that includes integrated BTS and BSC functions are provided. The femtocell system is coupled with a packet switched backhaul and provides an IP-accessible radio access network. The femtocell system includes a session initiation protocol adapter that supports a SIP client pool and provides conversion of call set-up functions to SIP client set-up functions for provisioning of radio access to a user equipment. The user equipment may have a session initiation protocol client associated with the user equipment. The session initiation protocol client is hosted and registered with a registrar service by the femtocell system. Accordingly, telecommunication services may be directed to and from the user equipment over the packet-switched backhaul to the user equipment via the femtocell system. | 04-19-2012 |
20120099560 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETACHMENT FROM A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Techniques are provided for efficient detachment from or attachment to wireless network(s). In one example, there is provided a method, operable by the user equipment (UE), that may involve connecting to a first wireless network (e.g., a 3GPP network) associated with a first access point name (APN), and connecting to a second wireless network (e.g., a WAN) associated with a second APN. The method may involve performing handover for the first APN from the first wireless network to the second wireless network. The method may involve performing detach for the first APN from the second wireless network. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099561 | Handover Control Method and Device - A handover control method is applicable to handover between networks adopting different access technologies. A serving gateway of a source network buffers downlink data of a user terminal on the source network after the source network determines that the user terminal is ready to be handed over to a target network. The serving gateway of the source network sends the downlink data to a serving gateway of the target network after the user terminal is handed over from the source network to the target network. | 04-26-2012 |
20120106505 | Method For Enhancing Handoff Between Media Gateways And Media Gateway Controller - Handoff of a media gateway (MG) from a primary media gateway controller (MGC) to a secondary MGC includes the primary MGC identifying a secondary MGC for performing MG handoff; and the primary MGC identifying a group of MGs, including at least one MG, to be handed off to the secondary MGC. If the group of MGs includes more than one MG, the following sequence is repeated—the primary MGC selecting a MG in the group; the primary MGC sending a handoff request to the MG, including identification of the secondary MGC; and the primary MGC standing by for a predetermined duration depending upon configuration of the MG. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106506 | HANDOVER ARCHITECTURE FOR NON-INTEGRATED RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGIES - An apparatus to support handover for non-integrated radio devices is presented. In one embodiment, the apparatus includes a peer interface and radio resource control logic. The radio resource control logic includes a proxy commutatively coupled to a second proxy via the peer interface. The second proxy is a part of other radio resource control logic. The proxies are operable to support handover between different radio access technologies. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106507 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING FLOWS IN A MOBILE NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - An example method is provided and includes establishing a session for a mobile node, and evaluating a plurality of label switched paths (LSPs) in response to the mobile node experiencing a handoff between a source packet data serving node (SPDSN) and a target PDSN (TPDSN). The method can also include provisioning a sub-tunnel with a first tunnel, which is associated with a selected label switched path. The selected label switched path is associated with a high priority type of data having a low latency characteristic. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106508 | Method and System for Deleting Redundant Information of Home Policy and Charging Rules Function - The present invention discloses a method and a system for deleting redundant information of a home Policy and Charging Rule Function (PCRF). The Bearer Binding and Event Report Function (BBERF) in a visited network indicates gateway control session termination to the home PCRF through a visited PCRF after receiving a termination session triggering for determining to terminate a gateway control session between the BBERF in the visited network and the visited PCRF, and the home PCRF deletes policy control information related to the BBERF in the visited network. With the method of the present invention, the invalid session information in the home PCRF is cleared in time, which eliminates the redundancy of the home network resources and saves the home network resources. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106509 | DATA REPROCESSING IN RADIO PROTOCOL LAYERS - A method for reprocessing data in a radio protocol layer is described. The method includes communicating using a first radio access technology. Data in a processed data buffer of a first radio access technology protocol layer is reprocessed. The reprocessed data is forwarded to an unprocessed data buffer. A trigger for a handover from the first radio access technology to a second radio access technology may be detected. A trigger for a radio connection release may also be detected. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106510 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SECONDARY CELL RELEASE DURING HANDOVER IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Methods and an apparatus for Secondary Cell (SCell) release during User Equipment (UE) handover comprises including information by a source eNB in a HandoverPreparationInformation message for a target eNB to control SCell release in the UE during handover, or including an indicator by a target eNB in a handover command for the UE to distinguish whether or not to release all configured SCells. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106511 | Method of Handling Primary Serving Cell Change - A method of handling primary serving cell change for a network in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises configuring a first cell as a primary serving cell and at least a second cell as a secondary serving cell to a mobile device of the wireless communication system, including the second cell in a list for secondary serving cell configuration release in a message for changing the primary serving cell to the second cell, and transmitting the message to the mobile device to release secondary serving cell configuration of the second cell. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106512 | COEXISTENCE SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR WIRELESS NETWORK DEVICES - A network interface includes a radio frequency system and a media access controller. The media access controller includes first and second client modules and a control module. Each of the client modules wirelessly communicates with a network via the radio frequency system and the antenna. Each of the client modules is controllable to be in an active state or a sleep state. The control module determines priority levels of the first client module and the second client module. The control module also, based on the priority levels, (i) controls the first client module to be in the active state to permit communication between the first client module and the radio frequency system, and (ii) controls the second client module to be in the sleep state to prevent communication between the second client module and the radio frequency system. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106513 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SIGNAL TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION IN A BROADBAND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In a broadband wireless communication system, a spread spectrum signal is intentionally overlapped with an OFDM signal, in a time domain, a frequency domain, or both. The OFDM signal, which inherently has a high spectral efficiency, is used for carrying broadband data or control information. The spread spectrum signal, which is designed to have a high spread gain for overcoming severe interference, is used for facilitating system functions such as initial random access, channel probing, or short messaging. Methods and techniques are devised to ensure that the mutual interference between the overlapped signals is minimized to have insignificant impact on either signal and that both signals are detectable with expected performance by a receiver. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106514 | A ROAMING METHOD FOR A MOBILE TERMINAL IN WLAN, RELATED ACCESS CONTROLLER AND ACCESS POINT DEVICE - A roaming method for a mobile terminal in a wireless local area network is disclosed. In the method, a target access point (AP) device receives an access request for roaming from the mobile terminal, and a target access controller (AC) obtains mobility information of the mobile terminal in an original extended service set based on the access request, wherein the mobility information include information of an AP device, an AC and a mobile agent server associated with the mobile terminal. Then the target AC determines whether the roaming for the mobile terminal is an inter-IP subnet roaming or an intra-IP subnet roaming based on the obtained mobility information. The target AC performs mobile IP based handover when the roaming is determined as the inter-IP subnet roaming and performs Inter Access Point Protocol based handover when the roaming is determined as the intra-IP subnet roaming. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106515 | RANGING OF TERMINAL IN LEGACY SUPPORT MODE - The present invention relates to a broadband wireless access system, and more particularly, a ranging technique of a terminal using a legacy support frame in a mobile communication system including a legacy system and an advanced system. According to one form of an embodiment of the present invention, the ranging method of the terminal for a base station in the mobile communication system having the legacy system and the advanced system comprises the steps of: receiving secondary super frame header (S-SFH) information from the base station; determining whether a frame composition used in the mobile communication system supports the legacy system; acquiring ranging channel information for initial ranging, handover ranging, and periodical ranging from the S-SFH; and performing one or more ranging processes of the initial ranging, the handover ranging, and the periodical ranging in the base station by using the ranging channel information. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106516 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING NEIGHBOR BASE STATION INFORMATION PERFORMED BY MACRO BASE STATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a method for requesting neighbor base station information by user equipment in a wireless communication system. The method includes: searching neighbor base stations targeted for a handover; transmitting a list request message including preamble information about a neighbor base station searched by the user equipment among the neighbor base stations and a neighbor base station list request indicator indicating a request for information about the neighbor base station to a serving base station; and receiving a list response message including an identification information and system information of the neighbor base station from the serving base station. | 05-03-2012 |
20120113956 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL SUPPORTING MULTI-MODAL COMMUNICATIONS AND METHODS FOR PROVIDING SEAMLESS SERVICE UPON HANDOVER TO THE MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A method of providing a handover service to a mobile communication terminal supporting multi-modal communications, and a mobile communication terminal for performing the method are provided. More particularly, a method of eliminating an interruption of a data transmission service occurring during a handover between different communication networks, and a terminal for performing the method are provided. A method of providing a handover service of a mobile communication terminal supporting multi-modal communications can include: transmitting and receiving data to/from a corresponding node via a first access network and a second access network while simultaneously maintaining an association with the first access network and the second access network, determining a point in time of completing a handover registration, and releasing an association with the first access network after the point in time of completing the handover registration. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113957 | APPARATAUS AND METHOD FOR ALLEVIATING BARRED ACCESS IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A user equipment for alleviating barred access while reselecting from a first cell to a second cell in a mobile communication system is provided. A wireless module detects receives system information broadcasted in the first cell. A storage unit stores the system information. A controller reselects the user equipment from the first cell to the second cell. Particularly, the cell reselection is not performed during a connection establishment procedure. Also, the controller determines whether a first barred access timer is running in response to reselecting from the first cell to the second cell, and stops the first barred access timer and informs the upper layer of an RRC protocol that the access of the first service is allowed in response of that the first barred access timer is running. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113958 | METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSFERRING SERVICE CONTROL SIGNALLING PATH - A method, device, and system for transferring a Service Control Signalling Path are provided. The method for transferring a Service Control Signalling Path includes: establishing a connection with an opposite end by a User Equipment (UE), where the UE uses a Circuit Switched (CS) bearer in a CS network and a Service Control Signalling Path in a first Packet Switched (PS) network; sending a transfer request via a second PS network, to instruct a network side to transfer the Service Control Signalling Path according to the transfer request. Thus, the UE can replace a current Gm reference point with a Gm reference point of a new and available PS network when the PS network where the current Gm reference point is located is unavailable, so as to ensure smooth data transmission. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113959 | CONNECTION MANAGEMENT METHOD, CONNECTION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM, MOBILE TERMINAL, PACKET DATA GATEWAY AND MOBILE MANAGEMENT GATEWAY - When a mobile terminal transmitting/receiving a packet using a plurality of IP address types performs a handover to an access network (single address type connection network) permitting transmission/reception of a packet using a single IP address only, an IP address not permitted is unfortunately discarded at an access network as a handover destination. Disclosed is a technique configured so that a mobile terminal (UE | 05-10-2012 |
20120113960 | Method and Apparatus to Support HSUPA During Baton Handover in TD-SCDMA Systems - Certain aspects of the present disclosure propose techniques for continuing high-speed packet access (HSPA) during the baton handover in Target Cell Time Division Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access (TD-SCDMA) systems. In an aspect of the disclosure, a technique for performing a baton handover from a source node B (NB) to a target NB by a user equipment (UE) is provided. The technique generally includes receiving a first signal instructing the UE to perform the baton handover from the source NB to the target NB, transmitting data in uplink transmissions to the target NB during the baton handover, and receiving, from the source NB, information regarding the uplink transmissions. | 05-10-2012 |
20120120913 | METHOD IN A MOBILE DEVICE FOR NETWORK SELECTION TO PROVIDE AN ENHANCED NUMBER OF IP SESSIONS - A method in a mobile device is provided. The method includes storing the number of IP (Internet protocol) sessions available to the mobile device for each of a number of network areas; and when the mobile device is in a location where two of the network areas overlap, performing cell selection based on the stored number of IP sessions for each of the overlapping network areas. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120914 | Packet Switched To Circuit Switched Access Handovers In An IMS Architecture. - A method of enabling the management of handovers of voice calls from a Packet Switched, PS, access to a Circuit Switched, CS, access where the voice calls are established using an IP Multimedia Subsystem, IMS, network. The method comprises performing a first IMS registration of a user via said PS access including setting for the user in a Home Subscriber Server, HSS, of the user's home network, an identifier of a first access transfer control function, which access transfer control function is responsible for anchoring user media sessions in an access transfer gateway of a serving network, and notifying a mobility function within said service network of the set identifier. A second or further IMS registration of the same user is then performed via said PS access, it being determined that said first IMS registration exists. As a consequence, the setting of an identifier of a second or further access transfer control function in the HSS for the user is prevented, whilst either the setting of the identifier of the first access transfer control function is maintained, or is replaced with an identifier of a service centralisation and continuity application server. The mobility function is notified of any change to the set identifier. In the event of a requirement to handover an ongoing voice call associated with said second or further IMS registration from said PS to said CS access, the identifier currently set in the HSS and identified to the mobility function is used to manage the handover. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120915 | Method, Apparatus and System for Implementing X2 Handover - The present disclosure discloses a method, apparatus and system for implementing an X2 handover. In the scheme of the present disclosure, a Base Station (BS) initiates, after having determined the need for a handover and detected that there exists an X2 connection between the BS and a target BS and that the BS and the target BS are within the management scope of a same MME, an X2 handover, if it is determined that there exists a connection between the target BS and the serving gateway connected with the BS according to acquired serving gateways connected with an other BS. Here, the term “an/the other BS” refers to one different from the BS determines the need for a handover, and includes the target BS designated for a handover. By using the scheme provided herein in which a determination on whether an X2 handover condition is currently met, that is, whether there exists a connection between the target BS and the serving gateway connected with the BS, is accurately made before the BS initiates a handover, and an X2 handover is initiated by the BS when the X2 handover condition is met, the present disclosure effectively avoids the possibility of the failure of an X2 handover, increases the success rate of an X2 handover, and provides excellent user experience. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120916 | WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM, WIRELESS LAN ACCESS POINT, HANDOVER EXECUTION METHOD AND PROGRAM - Disclosed is a wireless LAN access point which has a detection means for detecting another wireless LAN access point; a handover timing adjustment means which makes a wireless LAN client under the control of the local wireless LAN access point transmit the handover information required to accommodate the other wireless LAN access point and adjust the handover timing with the other wireless LAN access point when it is judged whether or not a handover to the other wireless access point of the wireless LAN client under control can be executed and the handover is executed based on information relating to the other wireless LAN access point detected; and handover execution means for stopping the communication to the wireless LAN client at the adjusted timing. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120917 | SIMULATOR DEVICE AND SIMULATION METHOD - A radio base station according to the present invention comprising a simulator device, including a downlink signal output unit configured to transmit a downlink signal for a first cell and transmit a downlink signal for a second cell, in the form of a simulation signal, to a mobile station, in which the downlink signal output unit is configured to shift the lead position of a radio frame from which to transmit the downlink signal for a first cell, and the lead position of a radio frame from which to transmit the downlink signal for a second cell. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120918 | Adaptive Beamforming Configuration Methods And Apparatus For Wireless Access Points Serving As Handoff Indication Mechanisms In Wireless Local Area Networks - A mobile communication device includes a processor and a communication subsystem coupled to the processor. The communication subsystem is configured to provide the mobile device with wireless communications via an access point of a wireless network. The mobile device communicates with the access point via the communication subsystem for adjusting boundaries of an RF coverage region of the access point. The mobile device subsequently communicates with the access point via the communication subsystem in the adjusted RF coverage region for handoff to another wireless network, while the access point serves as part of a handoff indication mechanism in the wireless network. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120919 | PROCESSING METHOD SUPPORTING HANDOVER, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention discloses a processing method supporting handover, and communication apparatus, which can reduce an impact on an existing network. The method includes: A handover service function entity receives an identifier of a first AP from an MS, where the first AP is discovered in a WiFi network, and determines, according to the identifier of the first AP, an authenticator entity corresponding to the first AP corresponding to the identifier; establishes a connection with the MS; receives from the MS a probe request message for probing an AP to be associated; and returns to the MS a probe request response message that carries an identifier of an AP to be associated with the MS, so that the MS associates with the AP corresponding to the identifier of the AP to be associated, and accesses the WiFi network through the AP to be associated and the authenticator entity. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120920 | METHOD AND WIRELESS TRANSMIT/RECEIVE UNIT FOR SUPPORTING AN ENHANCED UPLINK DEDICATED CHANNEL INTER-NODE-B SERVING CELL CHANGE - A wireless communication method and system for supporting an enhanced uplink dedicated channel (EU-DCH) inter-Node-B serving cell change. The system includes at least one wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) for transmitting data blocks, a target Node-B, a source Node-B and a serving radio network controller (S-RNC). The S-RNC includes a re-ordering buffer which stores data blocks correctly received from the WTRU. The S-RNC informs the target Node-B of a need for an EU-DCH inter-Node-B serving cell change from the source Node-B to the target Node-B. A medium access control (MAC) entity that handles EU-DCH functionalities is set up in the target Node-B. Hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) processes and transmission sequence numbers (TSNs) are not reset at the WTRU. Using a new data indicator, the WTRU transmits a data block to the target Node-B that was previously transmitted to the source Node-B, but was not correctly received by the source Node-B. | 05-17-2012 |
20120120921 | BASE STATION DEVICE, BASE STATION CONTROLLING DEVICE, MOBILE TERMINAL, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING BASE STATION DEVICE - A base station device that communicates wirelessly with a mobile terminal, including: an accepting portion that determines whether to be capable of accepting handover from another base station device to the base station device; a determination portion that, when the accepting portion determines to be capable of accepting the handover, determines whether to aggregate or separate bearers set between the another base station device and the mobile terminal; and a notifying portion that notifies the mobile terminal of a determination result of aggregation or separation of the bearers. | 05-17-2012 |
20120127955 | METHOD FOR ENERGY-EFFICIENT SCANNING TO ENABLE SEAMLESS LAYER-2 VERTICAL HANDOFFFS BETWEEN WIRELESS BROADBAND NETWORKS - A mechanism that minimizes the frequency and interval of mobile device scans while not impacting the ability of the devices to seamlessly move across disparate wireless networks is disclosed. More specifically the method involves creating a map of tower/network identifiers and channels of operation between different wireless networks. Using this information a mobile device can schedule its scans on multiple wireless interfaces in an energy-efficient and on-demand manner. | 05-24-2012 |
20120127956 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ENHANCED NON OPTIMIZED HANDOVER - This disclosure provides systems, methods and apparatus for non-optimized handoffs for wireless communication. For example, the disclosure may be applied to enhance non-optimized handoff from a long-term evolution (LTE) network to an evolved high rate packet data (eHRPD) network. Systems, methods, and apparatus for reducing the interruption gap during handoffs from an LTE radio access network to an eHRPD network are also discussed. In one aspect, a method is provided for communicating information associated with a handoff of a wireless device from a source network to a target network. The method includes fetching a context for a device communicating via a first radio access system of a first network based in part on a unique identifier from a second radio access system of a second network. | 05-24-2012 |
20120127957 | Systems, Methods, and Apparatuses for Facilitating a Circuit Switched Connection - Systems, methods, and apparatuses are provided for facilitating a circuit switched connection. A method may include receiving redirection information broadcast by a network node on a packet switched network. The redirection information may include information about a circuit switched capable cell to facilitate a circuit switched connection. The method may additionally include determining that a user equipment is an end point for a communication requiring a circuit switched connection. The method may further include establishing a connection with the circuit switched capable cell based at least in part upon the redirection information. Corresponding least in part upon the edirection information provided. | 05-24-2012 |
20120127958 | HANDLING CELL RESELECTIONS AND STATE TRANSITIONS FOR HIGH-SPEED DOWNLINK PACKET ACCESS - A wireless transmit receive unit (WTRU) is configured to operate in an high speed data packet access (HSDPA) mode in a cell and/or state and to clear HSDPA resources when moving out of the cell and/or state. The WTRU is configured to clear HSDPA resources when conditions to perform high speed downlink shared channel reception are not met. | 05-24-2012 |
20120127959 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDLING CELL RESELECTIONS AND TRANSITIONS TO AND FROM AN ENHANCED CELL_FACH STATE - A method and apparatus for handling cell reselections and transitions includes executing a cell reselection. A medium access control (MAC)-ehs reset is performed. | 05-24-2012 |
20120134339 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SETTING ADAPTIVE HANDOFF PARAMETERS - Provided are a system and method for setting an adaptive set of handoff parameters. The system includes a user terminal configured to transmit an authentication request to a network and receive a set of handoff parameters from the network; an access point (AP) belonging to the network and configured to receive the authentication request from the user terminal, transmit the authentication request to a central management server, receive the set of handoff parameters from the central management server, and transmit the set of handoff parameters to the user terminal; and the central management server, which is configured to store and manage a plurality of network-specific sets of handoff parameters for one or more networks, authenticate the user terminal using the authentication request received from the AP, and transmit a set of handoff parameters of a network to which the authenticated user terminal connects to the AP. | 05-31-2012 |
20120134340 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REDUCING BREAK DURATION IN HANDOVER OF VOIP CONVERSATION - The invention proposes a method and an apparatus for reducing break duration in handover of a VoIP conversation from a packet switch domain to a circuit switch domain. The main idea is that a synchronization mechanism is introduced between the session handover procedure at IP multimedia subsystem IMS layer and a cell handover procedure at layer | 05-31-2012 |
20120140731 | DETERMINING A NON-ACCESS STRATUM MESSAGE COUNT IN HANDOVER - Techniques for deriving message counts based at least in part on a locally stored message count and at least a portion of a message count received from a remote network node are disclosed. The message counts can relate to downlink (DL) non-access stratum (NAS) counts. In one aspect, a device can receive a number of least significant bits of the DL NAS count in a handover message. The device can derive a DL NAS count by utilizing a remaining portion of most significant bits of a locally stored DL NAS count, and can determine whether to increment or decrement the most significant bits based at least in part on a parameter to handle cases where the least significant bits of the locally stored DL NAS count have wrapped due to overflow and/or underflow. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140732 | User Network and Method for Using Multiple access System to Connect to Remote Communication Network(s) - A user network (e.g., mobile phone) is described herein that uses one or more access systems to establish a communications session with a remote communications network. In one embodiment, the user network has a processor and a memory with instructions stored therein which are accessible and processable by the processor to facilitate the following steps: (a) maintaining a detected set which contains access resource (s) that are associated with possible access connection (s) which could be used to access the remote communications network; (b) maintaining a candidate set which contains access resource (s) and logical connection (s) that are associated with the possible access connection (s) which could be used as communication bearer (s) to the remote communications network; and (c) maintaining an active set which contains a particular logical connection which is associated with one of the access connections that is currently being used as a communication bearer in an established communication session with the remote communications network. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140733 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDOVER BY CHANGING ZONES IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for a terminal to perform a handover including transmitting a ranging request message, containing a field requesting a zone change from a first type of terminal support zone to a second type of terminal support zone of the second type of target base station, to the second type of target base station via the first type of terminal support zone; receiving a ranging response message, containing a field indicating the omission of a capability negotiation message in the event of network reentry, from the second type of target base station via the first type of terminal support zone; and transmitting a second type of capability request message to the second type of target base station via the second type of terminal support zone. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140734 | HYBRID COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - There is provided a hybrid communication terminal which can overcome a drawback that, in performing switching a system between a 3G network and a WiMAX/LTE is performed under control of a mobile unit, when an IP address allocated to a mobile unit from the network differs before and after system switching, an active session of communication application is disconnected so that it is impossible to continue the communication. In automatically switching connection between different systems during communication, in order to conceal from the communication application that an IP address assigned by the network is changed, an exchange of user data with the communication network is performed via a virtual network device where the IP address is always the same. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140735 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION CONTROLLING METHOD - A communication method in LIPA/SIPTO architecture is provided which, when a user equipment (UE) is to connect from a serving area to an external network, allows re-selection of an optimal gateway. The communication method allows selecting a gateway apparatus physically or topologically close to a site, where the user equipment is attached. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140736 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION CONTROLLING METHOD - A communication method in LIPA/SIPTO architecture is provided which, when a user equipment (UE) is to connect from a serving area to an external network, allows re-selection of an optimal gateway. The communication method allows selecting a gateway apparatus physically or topologically close to a site, where the user equipment is attached. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140737 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION CONTROLLING METHOD - A communication method in LIPA/SIPTO architecture is provided which, when a user equipment (UE) is to connect from a serving area to an external network, allows re-selection of an optimal gateway. The communication method allows selecting a gateway apparatus physically or topologically close to a site, where the user equipment is attached. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140738 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION CONTROLLING METHOD - A communication method in LIPA/SIPTO architecture is provided which, when a user equipment (UE) is to connect from a serving area to an external network, allows re-selection of an optimal gateway. The communication method allows selecting a gateway apparatus physically or topologically close to a site, where the user equipment is attached. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140739 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION CONTROLLING METHOD - A communication method in LIPA/SIPTO architecture is provided which, when a user equipment (UE) is to connect from a serving area to an external network, allows re-selection of an optimal gateway. The communication method allows selecting a gateway apparatus physically or topologically close to a site, where the user equipment is attached. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140740 | HANDOVER METHOD, RADIO BASE STATION, AND MOBILE STATION - A radio base station according to the present invention comprising the radio base station eNB# | 06-07-2012 |
20120140741 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION METHOD THEREOF - The present invention provides a radio communication system that enables handovers between radio base stations to be conducted at a short time using a mobile communication terminal having one radio communication part. A pseudo radio communication control part in a mobile communication terminal links with a packet transfer part and a remote radio control part in a radio bridge device to enable operation as though a radio communication part disposed in the radio bridge device were directly connected to the mobile communication terminal. Thus, even when radio communication parts are disposed in a plurality of terminals, by using the pseudo radio communication control part instead of a radio communication control part, an application can carry out control as though all the radio communication parts were connected in the same terminal. | 06-07-2012 |
20120140742 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION CONTROLLING METHOD - A communication method in LIPA/SIPTO architecture is provided which, when a user equipment (UE) is to connect from a serving area to an external network, allows re-selection of an optimal gateway. The communication method allows selecting a gateway apparatus physically or topologically close to a site, where the user equipment is attached. | 06-07-2012 |
20120147849 | METHOD FOR SUPPORTING FLOW MOBILITY - A method of supporting flow mobility of an MN is provided in an LMA. The LMA updates a BCE when a flow of the MN moves from a first MAG to a second MAG. The LMA sends a message for requesting binding registration of the flow to the second MAG, and sends a message for requesting binding de-registration of the flow to the first MAG. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147850 | CELL SEARCH METHOD OF TERMINAL AND RELATED DEVICE AND SYSTEM - A cell search method of a terminal is provided. The terminal includes first and second network units. The first network unit camps a CS domain on a first network preferentially, and executes a CS domain service; the second network unit camps a PS domain on a second network preferentially, and executes a PS domain service; the first network unit receives a system message from a cell of the first network where the first network unit is located, and determines whether the system message carries neighboring cell information of the second network of the cell; and the second network unit searches for a cell of the second network after the first network unit determines that the system message carries the neighboring cell information of the second network of the cell. With the solutions, subscriber experience can be improved and cell search time of the terminal can be reduced. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147851 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION CONTROLLING METHOD - A communication method in LIPA/SIPTO architecture is provided which, when a user equipment (UE) is to connect from a serving area to an external network, allows re-selection of an optimal gateway. The communication method allows selecting a gateway apparatus physically or topologically close to a site, where the user equipment is attached. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147852 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication system is described in which mobile telephones are able to roam between neighbouring home node base stations and in which the home base stations or the home base station gateway devices are arranged to aggregate “Unsuccessfully Transmitted DL Data Volume” determined by previous home base stations served by the gateway device. In this way, when a call is transferred away from the gateway device or is released, a total aggregated value of “Unsuccessfully Transmitted DL Data Volume” can be provided to the core network for billing purposes. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147853 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION CONTROLLING METHOD - A communication method in LIPA/SIPTO architecture is provided which, when a user equipment (UE) is to connect from a serving area to an external network, allows re-selection of an optimal gateway. The communication method allows selecting a gateway apparatus physically or topologically close to a site, where the user equipment is attached. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147854 | Method and System For Transmitting Content In A Wireless Communication Network - The present invention provides methods and systems for transmitting content in a wireless communication network. The method includes caching a content in each base station of a set of base stations in the wireless communication network. The content includes a plurality of packets. In response to caching the content, a first base station belonging to the set of base stations transmits a first group of packets of the content to a mobile station. The method further includes handing over the mobile station to a second base station. The second base station belongs to the set of the base stations. The second base station resumes transmission of a second group of packets of the content to the mobile station. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147855 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING A SERVING HS-DSCH CELL CHANGE - A method and apparatus for performing a serving high speed downlink shared channel (HS-DSCH) cell change from a source cell to a target cell are disclosed. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) may be pre-configured with HS-DSCH configuration for the target cell. The WTRU may start monitoring a high speed shared control channel (HS-SCCH) on the target cell using the pre-loaded HS-DSCH configuration for the target cell on a condition that a measurement report is triggered by the event 1D. The WTRU may initiate a timer when the WTRU starts monitoring the HS-SCCH on the target cell. | 06-14-2012 |
20120155426 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDLING SESSION MIGRATION BY PREDICTING MOVEMENTS OF A MOBILE DEVICE - A method is disclosed for seamlessly handing over a mobile device from one access point to another access point in a wireless network. The method includes predicting future movement of a mobile device from an associated coverage area to another coverage area within a predefined time period. The method also includes identifying candidate access points to whom the mobile device can connect after the mobile device leaves the associated coverage area and sending a predefined number of communications sessions for the mobile device to the candidate access points. The method further includes transmitting a neighbor report to the mobile device in response to indication of movement by the mobile device to the other coverage area and, when the mobile device roams, transmitting any remaining communications sessions for the mobile device to a second access. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155427 | Non-Optimized Handover By Locking The PDN Connection Configuration - A call is established at a first network utilizing a first radio technology. The context for the call is locked at the first network. The call is handed over to a second network utilizing a second radio technology. The context is maintained at the first network. The call is handed over back to the first network and utilizes the context from the earlier portion of the call. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155428 | LTE Network Call Correlation During User Equipment Mobility - A network monitoring system captures data packet from LTE/SAE network interfaces using passive probes. The monitoring system identifies context data associated with a first user on an S1-MME interface. Next hop parameters, such as a Next Hop Key and/or a Next Hop Chaining Counter, are derived for the first user equipment. The monitoring system creates a first context entry for the first user comprising of the next hop parameters. The monitoring system also identifies second context data associated with a second user on a second S1-MME interface. Next hop parameters are also identified for the second context data. The second context next hop parameters are compared to the first context next hop parameters. If they match, it is possible to track the user even in case of mobility, binding its activity on the two legs and retrieving the security parameters to be used for deciphering. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155429 | Minimizing Call Drops During a Serving Cell Change - A method for minimizing call drops during a serving cell change is disclosed. A first measurement report message is received from a user equipment (UE) requesting to change an active set of the UE. A second measurement report message is received from the UE indicating a change of a best cell and requesting a change of a serving cell to a target cell. The second measurement report message is processed before the first measurement report message is completely processed. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155430 | PREVENTING LOSS OF IP CONTINUITY WHEN TRANSITIONING BETWEEN DIFFERENT NETWORKS - Aspects of the present disclosure provide techniques for preventing loss of IP continuity when transitioning between networks. Certain aspects provide methods that generally include initiating a first timer upon attempting to transition from a first RAT network to a second RAT network during an IP session and initiating a second timer if a channel in the second RAT network is successfully acquired. According to aspects, a device may transfer context of the IP session to the second RAT network if a session is successfully negotiated in the second network prior to expiration of the second timer and the first and second networks share a common core network for IP services. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155431 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR FORWARDING HANDOVER DATA IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A technique forwards handover data in a wireless communication system. A base station apparatus includes a first buffer for storing downlink data of a terminal, a handover agent for, when the terminal performs a handover, performing scheduling on data which is stored in the first buffer for at least one terminal including the terminal that performs the handover so that an interruption time of the at least one terminal is reduced in order to forward the data to a target base station, and a communication unit for transmitting the data according to a scheduling result of the handover agent. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155432 | FACILITATING METHOD FOR HANDOVER OF A MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A communication method performed in a mobile communication device of a telecommunication system includes receiving Service Data Units, SDUs, for transmission to a source node of the telecommunication system, storing a copy of the SDUs in an SDU management buffer, passing the SDUs to a concatenation and segmentation unit to generate Protocol Data Units, PDUs, storing the PDUs in a transmit buffer for transmission to the source node, sending a feedback message to the SDU management buffer identifying an SDU that can be removed from the SDU management buffer, receiving a handover command from the source node after receiving the status report, and after completing handover to a target node, using the received status report to control which SDUs are passed to the concatenation and segmentation unit to form PDUs for transmission to the target node. | 06-21-2012 |
20120155433 | APPARATUS, AND AN ASSOCIATED METHOD, FOR PRESERVING COMMUNICATION SERVICE QUALITY LEVELS DURING HAND-OFF OF COMMUNICATIONS IN A RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile station is configured to transmit a sequence of data packets over a wireless network. The station includes a data sequence expander. The expander receives an indication of a pending hand-off for the mobile station from a first network access point to a second network access point and estimates an amount of time prior to occurrence of the hand-off. The expander inserts a number of delay packets into the sequence of data packets in response to receiving the indication of the pending hand-off. The number of delay packets is determined based on the estimated amount of time prior to the occurrence of the hand-off such that the insertion of the delay packets into the sequence of data packets will cause a delay that corresponds to the amount of time prior to occurrence of the hand-off. | 06-21-2012 |
20120163336 | DISTRIBUTED ARCHITECTURE FOR SECURITY KEYS DERIVATION IN SUPPORT OF NON-INVOLVED CORE NETWORK HANDOVER - Methods and systems are disclosed for an evolved node-B (eNB), or home evolved node-B (HeNB), which may be a part of a communication network. The eNB or HeNB may receive a first information regarding a handover from another node of the communication network and calculate a second information based on the first information. The eNB or HeNB may provide handover information based on the second information to a node designated to receive the handover. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163337 | METHOD OF ALLOCATING HOME NETWORK PREFIX, INTER-HANDOFF METHOD, AND MULTI-HOMING SYSTEM THEREOF - Disclosed is a method of allocating a home network prefix to a mobile terminal having multi interfaces by a local mobility anchor. The local mobility anchor allocates a first home network prefix independently to each of the multiple interfaces for simultaneous access of the multi interfaces. The local mobility anchor allocates a single second home network prefix in common to each of the multi interfaces for inter hand-off between the multiple interfaces. In this manner, a home network prefix for simultaneous access of multi interfaces is separated from a home network prefix for inter hand-off. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163338 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MOBILITY IN A MULTI-POINT HSDPA COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and apparatus for wireless communication may provide for mobility in a Multi-Point HSDPA network capable of downlink aggregation. Some aspects of the disclosure provide modified mobility events utilized for altering the Active Set for a UE. Here, the addition of a cell to the Active Set can coincide with making that cell a secondary serving cell. Further, the deletion of a secondary serving cell from the Active Set can coincide with switching off the Multi-Point HSDPA mode. Still further, a modified mobility event for an HSDPA serving cell change can be utilized to swap a primary serving cell and a secondary serving cell. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163339 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR GROUP COMMUNICATION - An apparatus for group communication in a base station through a plurality of terminals connected to a terminal coupler receives periodic reports of Carrier to Interference Noise Ratio (CINR) from the plurality of terminals, calculates the moving average CINR and makes a BS-initiated handover decision for the plurality of terminals, and controls the plurality of terminals to simultaneously perform handover to a target base station. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163340 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MAINTAINING COMMUNICATION DURING A BATON HANDOVER - A method and apparatus enable high-speed downlink data transmissions to continue while a baton handover is in progress. In an aspect of the disclosure, a method of wireless communication includes switching an uplink from a source cell to a target cell while maintaining a downlink with the source cell, and transmitting over the uplink to the target cell at least one metric of quality of the downlink In one example, the metric of quality may be a CQI. In another example, the metric of quality may be a HARQ ACK/NACK. The metric of quality of the downlink may be transmitted from the target cell to the source cell, directly or by way of a radio network controller. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163341 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR INTERWORKING OF CELLULAR NETWORKS AND WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS - A method and system for interworking between cellular networks and wireless local area networks (WLANs) are disclosed. At least one cellular network, at least one WLAN, and an IP network may be deployed. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) may establish a connection to a WLAN and a tunnel between an access point (AP) and a packet data gateway (PDG) may be established. The PDG may establish a tunnel to an IP network. The WTRU may invoke a service which is delivered through the WLAN. As signal quality from the AP degrades below a predetermined threshold, a handover from the WLAN to the cellular network may be performed. A new connection to the cellular network may be established either before or after breaking the current connection to the WLAN or the two connections may be maintained simultaneously. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163342 | FACILITATING METHOD FOR HANDOVER OF A MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method, performed in a long term evolution (LTE) communications network, of facilitating handover of a mobile communication device from a source node to a target node includes receiving, in the target node, downlink user data packets forwarded from the source node via a first interface, receiving, in the target node, downlink user packets from an external source via a second interface, buffering the received user data packets during handover prior to sending to the mobile communication device, ordering the downlink data packets in the target node based on the interface from which the data packets are received, and sending the ordered downlink data packets from the target node to the mobile communication device after completion of handover from the source node to the target node. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163343 | FACILITATING METHOD FOR HANDOVER OF A MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method performed by a source long term evolution (LTE) base station includes buffering downlink user data packets for transmission to a mobile communication device in a buffer, sending the downlink user data packets to the mobile communication device, receiving uplink user data packets from the mobile communication device, receiving a handover response indicating a handover of the mobile communication device to a target base station, and selectively forwarding the downlink user data packets from said buffer to the target base station depending upon an RLC status report or hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) feedback information. In response to the receiving the handover response, the source LTE base station stops the sending the downlink user data packets to the mobile communication device and transmits a handover command to the mobile communication device. | 06-28-2012 |
20120170546 | EXPEDITED REPORTING OF NEIGHBOR CELL SIGNAL STRENGTH - A wireless mobile device/station (MS) sends measurement reports of neighbor cells to a serving base transmitter station (BTS). The MS receives information messages transmitted by the BTS at a signaling period, while the MS is in a first cell. The MS is configured to receive a first information message and a subsequent second information message following a handoff. When both information messages are received, the MS transmits a measurement report to the base station, based on contents of the current, received information messages. Responsive to the MS failing to receive/detect the second information message, the MS transmits a measurement report to the BTS based on (a) a current/first information message(s) and (b) a previous information message of the same type as the undetected second information message. The BTS initiates another handoff based on the information in the second type of measurement report. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170547 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SELECTING A TARGET CELL FOR HANDOVER OF USER EQUIPMENT IN A LONG TERM EVOLUTION SYSTEM - A method and system for selecting a target cell for handover of user equipment in a Long Term Evolution (LTE) communication system are described. In accordance with the method, a serving cell: determines virtual channels supported by each of a plurality of neighboring cells; determines a set of virtual channels of interest to a UE; selects a subset of the neighboring cells, which supports at least one virtual channel in the set of virtual channels of interest to the UE; modifies handover behavior, and uses results of the modified handover behavior to select one of the neighboring cells, from the subset, as a target cell for handover of the UE. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170548 | DISTRIBUTED LOAD MANAGEMENT ON NETWORK DEVICES - This disclosure relates to a system and method for dynamically managing load on network devices in a distributed manner. As the proliferation of data rich content and increasingly more capable mobile devices has continued, the amount of data communicated over mobile operator's networks has exponentially increased. Upgrading the existing network to accommodate increased data traffic is neither desirable nor practical. One way to accommodate increased data traffic is by utilizing network resources more efficiently. This disclosure provides systems and methods for efficiently utilizing network resources by dynamically configuring the network in a distributed manner based on real-time load information. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170549 | Method and Apparatus for System Frame Number Synchronization in Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access (TD-SCDMA) Networks - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided in which a first signal from a first Node B (NB) using a first system frame number (SFN) is received; and a second signal from a second NB using a second SFN is received, wherein the first SFN and the second SFN are identical. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170550 | HS-DSCH INTER-NODE B CELL CHANGE - A radio resource control (RRC) message is received by a radio resource control (RRC) device of a user equipment (UE). The RRC message notifies the FDD UE of a high speed dedicated shared channel (HS-DSCH) inter-Node B cell change. A reordering buffers of a medium access controller-high speed (MAC-hs) is flushed in response to the receiving the RRC message. A status report is generated for each acknowledge mode (AM) RLC instance mapped to the HS-DSCH by a radio link control (RLC) device after the MAC-hs flushes the reordering buffer. Each status report indicates missing AM RLC packet data units (PDUs). The RRC device sends a “TRANSPORT CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION COMPLETE” message on a DCCH after the RLC device generates each status report. | 07-05-2012 |
20120170551 | Data Processing Method and Device - A data processing method is provided for forwarding data in the case of handover between heterogeneous networks. The data processing method includes: when a user equipment (UE) is handed over from an originating network to a target network, receiving, by the originating network, a data forwarding address obtained by the target network; creating a data forwarding tunnel between an originating network gateway and a target network gateway according to the data forwarding address; and forwarding data to the target network through the data forwarding tunnel A data processing device is also provided. The lossless data processing solution can overcome the problem of data loss in the case of handover between heterogeneous networks in the existing technology, reduces the time of user service interruption and enhances the user experience. | 07-05-2012 |
20120177002 | METHOD OF DATA PATH SWITCHING DURING INTER-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY HANDOVER - The present invention provides a method of data path switching. Embodiments of the method include transmitting a packet from a node in a communication system during hand off of a mobile node from a source access network to a target access network. The packet includes an end marker that indicates that the packet is the last packet to be transmitted during the hand off over a source link between the mobile node and an anchor node via the source access network during the hand off. Embodiments of the method also include switching, at the node, a transmission data path from the source link to a target link between the mobile node and the anchor node via the target access network following transmission of the packet including the end marker. | 07-12-2012 |
20120177003 | System and Method for Single Radio Handovers - A system and method for single radio handovers are provided. A method for controller operations includes receiving a first message from a mobile node. The first message is transported in a first network. The method also includes transforming the first message into a second message. The second message is to be transported in a second network. The method further includes sending the second message to a point of access in the second network. The point of access is a target point of access for the mobile node in a single radio handover. | 07-12-2012 |
20120177004 | Network System and Network Apparatus - After a first base station connects to a first mobile terminal, a first GW (gateway) receives a request for connection between the first mobile terminal and a second GW and identifiers of the second GW and the first mobile terminal and transmits identifiers of the first mobile terminal and the first GW to the second GW. The second GW transmits an MPLS allocation flag to the first GW. The first GW transmits an MPLS allocation signal including an identifier of the first mobile terminal to the second GW via a second NW (network) apparatus. The first base station receives an identifier of the first GW and the MPLS allocation flag from the first GW via a management server and transmits the MPLS allocation signal including the identifier of the first mobile terminal to the first GW via a first NW apparatus. | 07-12-2012 |
20120177005 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING USER EQUIPMENT MOBILITY IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Methods are provided for supporting mobility of a UE in a system without an HeNB GW. An S1 setup request message is sent to an MME by an HeNB. The S1 setup request message includes version information of the HeNB. An RRC connection is established between the UE and the HeNB. An initial UE message is sent from the HeNB to the MME. An NAS message is sent from the UE to the MME. An establish bearer request message is sent from the MME to a corresponding SGW based on an IP address of an LGW. The IP address of the LGW is obtained by the MME through the S1 setup request message. An establish bearer response message is sent from the LGW to the SGW in response to the establish bearer request message. The establish bearer response message is sent from the SGW to the MME. | 07-12-2012 |
20120177006 | Obtaining System Frame Number of Target Cell During Handover - A method of obtaining system frame number for handover is provided. A UE receives a handover command from a serving base station in a serving cell. The UE performs downlink synchronization with a target base station. Upon synchronization, the UE determines a radio frame boundary of a target cell. The UE then obtains a system frame number of the target cell based on the radio frame boundary. The UE performs a handover procedure with the target cell by transmitting a RACH preamble to the target base station. The RACH preamble is transmitted over a PRACH resource determined from the system frame number without reading SFN information from a PBCH/BCH broadcasted from the target base station. Finally, the UE establishes data connection with the target base station. Handover interruption time is reduced by obtaining SFN before PBCH reading and decoding. | 07-12-2012 |
20120177007 | BASE STATION APPARTUS, COMMUNICATION CONTROL SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND INTER-STATION CONTROL METHOD - A base station apparatus includes a determining unit that determines whether a direct link has been established between the base station apparatus and another base station apparatus, when a mobile device makes a request to switch a communication recipient from the base station apparatus to the other base station apparatus; a link information acquiring unit that acquires, indirectly from the other base station apparatus, link information necessary for establishing the direct link to the other base station apparatus, when the determining unit determines that no direct link to the other base station apparatus has been established; and a link requesting unit that requests the other base station apparatus to establish the direct link to the base station apparatus, based on the link information of the other base station apparatus acquired by the link information acquiring unit. | 07-12-2012 |
20120177008 | Global Virtual Local Area Network For Voice Communication Sessions In A Wireless Local Area Network - A communication network has a first wireless access point (AP) in a first subnet segment and a second wireless AP in a second subnet segment, and provides a virtual local area network (VLAN) which spans the first and the second subnet segments. A mobile device associates with the first wireless AP using a first extended set service identifier (ESSID). In response to identifying a request to establish a communication session, the mobile device reassociates with the first wireless AP using a second ESSID, for accessing the VLAN to establish and maintain the communication session. | 07-12-2012 |
20120177009 | RANDOM ACCESS METHOD, EVOLVED NODE B, AND TERMINAL EQUIPMENT - A random access method, an evolved Node B (eNB), and a terminal equipment are provided. The method includes: determining target component carriers to which a User Equipment (UE) is to be handed over, and notifying the UE of information about the target component carriers through a source eNB; and after receiving a dedicated random access preamble sent by the UE, sending a random access response message on at least one component carrier in the target component carriers. The terminal equipment includes: a handover command receiving unit, a sending unit, and a random response receiving unit. Therefore, in a random access procedure of cell handover, the eNB is capable of determining downlink component carriers that a UE monitors, thereby increasing utilization rate of downlink resources. | 07-12-2012 |
20120182965 | FEMTOCELL BEACON INTERFERENCE MITIGATION WITH OUT-OF-BAND LINKS - Systems, methods, devices, and computer program products are described for mitigating macrocell interference during femtocell discovery in a wireless communications system. In one example, a mobile device may be camped on a macrocell. A femtocell transmits out-of-band (OOB) discovery signals to, or receives OOB band discovery signals from, the mobile device to facilitate presence detection. The femtocell may also be configured to use various techniques to transmit in-band beacon bursts (e.g., low or high power beacon bursts) to the mobile device in the macrocell frequency range to trigger the mobile device to perform an inter-frequency scan for cell reselection. The femtocell may transmit communications signals to the mobile device in a femtocell frequency range (different from the macrocell frequency range) after the mobile device has discovered and selected the femtocell. | 07-19-2012 |
20120182966 | OUT-OF-BAND PAGING FOR PROXIMITY DETECTION IN A FEMTO DEPLOYMENT - Systems, methods, devices, and computer program products are described for using an out-of-band (OOB) radio integrated with the femtocell to implement various novel proximity detection techniques. Proximity detection of access terminals (ATs) in the femtocell's access control list (ACL) may be desirable to support femto connectivity and service provision, for example, in context of idle macro-to-femto handoffs, active macro-to-femto hand-ins, etc. When multiple ATs are in the ACL, and particularly when the ATs have different OOB implementations, optimizing proximity detection may involve balancing reliability against latency. Embodiments implement OOB proximity detection according to techniques that address reliability, efficiency, and/or fairness of proximity detection, even across unmanaged OOB networks and for ATs having different OOB implementations. | 07-19-2012 |
20120182967 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING WIRELESS COMMUNCIATION BETWEEN WIRELESS ACCESS STATIONS VIA A MOBILE TERMINAL - A packet is transferred between first and second wireless access stations via a memory of at least one mobile terminal. The first wireless access station is provided with source information to be provided for one or more users, and the second wireless access station acquire the source information from the first wireless access station by performing a predetermined procedure of packet transfer between the first and second wireless access stations via the memory of the at least one mobile terminal when the at least one mobile terminal moves between coverage areas of the first and second wireless access stations. The second wireless access station performs a predetermined data processing on the acquired source information, and provides the one or more users with the source information on which the predetermined data processing has been performed. | 07-19-2012 |
20120182968 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR POWER CONTROL DURING TD-SCDMA BATON HANDOVER - A method for wireless communication comprises switching an uplink (UL) from a source cell to a target cell; and receiving an uplink transmit power control (TPC-UL) command from the source cell, wherein the TPC-UL command is generated by the target cell. | 07-19-2012 |
20120182969 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND RADIO BASE STATION - A mobile communication method according to the present invention is summarized in that it includes: a step in which a mobile station UE sends “Measurement Report” including location registration area information “TAI” and identification information “ECGI” on a cell subordinate to a radio base station HeNB, to a radio base station eNB; a step in which the radio base station eNB sends “(X2) HO Request” including the identification information “ECGI” on the cell subordinate to the radio base station HeNB to an IP address of a gateway apparatus HeNB-GW corresponding to the location registration area information “TAI”; and a step in which the gateway apparatus HeNB-GW transfers the “(X2) HO Request” to the IP address corresponding to the identification information “ECGI” on the cell subordinate to the radio base station HeNB. | 07-19-2012 |
20120182970 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR NETWORK HANDOVER - A method, a system and a device for network handover are provided, which are applied to the field of communications technologies. The method includes the following steps that: a terminal first obtains information of a handover manner of handover from a virtual base station to a target base station, and then sends a corresponding message to the virtual base station according to the information of the handover manner, so as to perform network handover, so that in a procedure that the terminal is handed over from a non-WiMAX network to a WiMAX network, the terminal may be directly handed over according to the handover manner supported by the virtual base station. Compared with the conventional art in which handover manners require handover attempts, the adoption of the method for network handover reduces handover time and increases network handover efficiency. | 07-19-2012 |
20120182971 | BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, TRANSMISSION METHOD AND REORDERING METHOD - A mobile station, that includes a receiving means for receiving first PDCP PDU from a source base station and a receiving means for receiving second PDCP-PDU from a target base station, in which the second PDCP-PDU being created using sequence number and PDCP SDU that are transferred from the source base station to the target base station and a storage means for storing PDCP SDU conforming to the first PDCP PDU and the PDCP SDU conforming to the second PDCP PDU; and a reordering means for performing in order delivery of the stored PDCP SDUs based on the sequence numbers. | 07-19-2012 |
20120182972 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ESTABLISHING OR MODIFYING LOCAL IP ACCESS BEARER - A method and device for establishing or modifying a local IP access bearer are provided by the embodiments of the present invention, said method includes: a handover request message transmitted by an evolved Node Base station is received, said handover request message carries an evolved Node Base station identifier, said evolved Node Base station identifier is the same as the local packet data network gateway identifier; the local breakout ability of said evolved Node Base station is obtained; according to said evolved Node Base station identifier, the local breakout ability of said evolved Node Base station and the local IP access point name, the local IP access bearer is established or modified between a serving gateway and the local packet data network gateway, said serving gateway is located in the core network or the evolved Node Base station. | 07-19-2012 |
20120188979 | DATA FLOW TRANSFER BETWEEN WIRELESS CONNECTIONS - A method and apparatus taught herein provide for transfer of a data flow between two mobile nodes from a cellular connection supported by a cellular communication network to a non-cellular, ad-hoc connection between the mobile nodes. In one embodiment, a network node configured for operation in the cellular communication network detects that the two mobile nodes have moved within an ad-hoc communication range and transfers the data flow from the cellular connection to the ad-hoc connection responsive to the detection. The network node may include a control circuit to perform the detection, and a communication interface to send control signaling to effectuate the transfer. As a non-limiting example, the network node is a base station in the cellular communication network. | 07-26-2012 |
20120188980 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR NON-OPTIMIZED HANDOFF - Systems, methods and apparatus for non-optimized handoffs for wireless communication are provided. For example, the disclosure may be applied to enhance non-optimized handoff from a long-term evolution (LTE) network to an evolved high rate packet data (eHRPD) network. Systems, methods, and apparatus for reducing the interruption gap during handoffs from an LTE radio access network to an eHRPD network are also discussed. In one aspect, a method is provided for communicating information associated with a handoff of a wireless device from a source network to a target network. The method includes, during a period of data inactivity, attaching to a first network and creating a context therewith, the first network being a non-preferred network as compared to a second network. The method also include connecting to the second network based on the context created with the first network and while maintaining at least a partial context with the first network. | 07-26-2012 |
20120188981 | SIGNALLING METHOD FOR DIRECT COMMUNICATION BETWEEN TERMINALS - A signaling method of a first terminal for direct communication between terminals includes transmitting a link establishment request message for establishing a direct communication link including flow information to a second terminal, receiving a link establishment response message for establishing a direct communication link including flow information from the second terminal, and establishing a direct communication link between the first terminal and the second terminal. | 07-26-2012 |
20120188982 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING HANDOFF BETWEEN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS IN PORTABLE TERMINAL - A portable terminal is configured to support a handoff between heterogeneous networks. The portable terminal includes a first communication unit, a second communication, a coverage identifying unit, and a switching unit. The first communication unit communicates with a mobile communication network. The second communication unit communicates with a heterogeneous network. The coverage identifying unit identifies entry of the portable terminal into a heterogeneous network area while performing a call connection through the mobile communication network. The switching unit attempts call connection through the heterogeneous network while maintaining the call connection through the mobile communication network when the entry of the portable terminal into the heterogeneous network area is identified. When a response to the call connection through the heterogeneous network is received, the switching unit terminates the call connection through the mobile communication network and maintains the call connection through the heterogeneous network. | 07-26-2012 |
20120188983 | Mobility Anchor Relocation - Disclosed herein is a method, a serving node and a mobility node for relocating the mobility anchor for a mobile terminal | 07-26-2012 |
20120188984 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND RADIO BASE STATION - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes: a step in which a mobile station UE transmits “Measurement Report” including identification information “ECGI” on a cell subordinate to a radio base station eNB, to a radio base station HeNB; a step in which a radio base station HeNB transmits “(X2) HO Request” including the identification information “ECGI” of the cell subordinate to the radio base station eNB, to an IP address of a gateway device HeNB-GW; and a step in which the gateway device HeNB-GW transfers the “(X2) HO Request” to the IP address corresponding to the identification information “ECGI” on the cell subordinate to the radio base station eNB. | 07-26-2012 |
20120188985 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS APPARATUS, AND WIRELESS APPARATUS CONTROL APPARATUS - A mobile communication system includes a cell that is constituted by connecting a wireless apparatus control apparatus and a wireless apparatus that are included in a wireless base station by using a predetermined interface. A first wireless apparatus that constitutes a first cell and a second wireless apparatus that constitutes a second cell different from the first cell and that is adjacent to the first wireless apparatus are connected by using the predetermined interface in order to perform data communication. | 07-26-2012 |
20120188986 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A mobile station that establishes an uplink wireless connection by transmitting a random access signal through a random access channel after receiving a synchronization channel transmitted from a radio base station in a handover destination, and includes a setting unit for setting a timing of transmitting the random access signal to be later than the timing of receiving the synchronization channel by a prescribed period. | 07-26-2012 |
20120195287 | COMMUNICATION METHOD USING DUPLICATED ACKNOWLEDGEMENT - Communication methods using duplicated acknowledgement (ACK) are provided. A communication method of a serving base station includes determining if a handover of a device attached to the serving base station is required, and, if the handover is required, transmitting two or more duplicated ACKs to a fixed host. The two or more duplicated ACKs have the same identifier as a final ACK transmitted from the device to the fixed host. This method can alleviate an unnecessary reduction in transmission rate caused by timeout that may occur during handover of the device. | 08-02-2012 |
20120195288 | METHOD, MEDIUM, AND APPARATUS CONTROLLING HANDOVER BETWEEN DIFFERENT NETWORKS - A method, medium, and apparatus controlling a handover between different network types, including the operations of transmitting a message requesting a transmission bandwidth change, so as to have a transmission bandwidth supported by a new network after movement of the mobile terminal, from the mobile terminal to the server after performing the handover, changing the transmission bandwidth of the server to be supported by the new network based on the transmitted message of requesting the bandwidth change, transmitting a message acknowledging the changed transmission bandwidth from the server to the router, and transceiving data through a new data transmission tunnel between the router and a new access point within the new based on the message acknowledging the changed transmission bandwidth. Accordingly, loss of data packets occurring when a handover is performed may be effectively prevented. | 08-02-2012 |
20120195289 | BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND REORDERING METHOD THEREOF - A reordering method in a communication system where a base station sends to a mobile station, packets to which numbers indicating a sequence are attached, the mobile station rearranges the packets in order of the sequence numbers, and a hard handover is performed. The method includes deciding whether a handover source base station forwards packets which have not yet been sent to the mobile station, out of packets received from a host station, to a handover target base station; controlling forwarding of the packets at the handover based on the decision, and sending forwarding execution information from the handover source base station to the mobile station to notify whether the forwarding of the packets has been executed; and at the mobile station, receiving the forwarding execution information, and executing reordering of the packets received from the handover target base station based on the forwarding execution information at the handover. | 08-02-2012 |
20120201222 | SYSTEM AND PROTOCOLS FOR INTER-MOBILITY ACCESS GATEWAY TUNNELING FOR FAST HANDOFF TRANSITION - A system and method for transitioning connectivity of a mobile node between mobility access gateways on a communication system using an inter-MAG tunneling protocols for a fast handoff. The protocols can use pre-configured or dynamic protocols on the IP-Layer or another layer on the protocol stack. In a hi-directional tunneling mechanism, the protocol and system supports the transfer of the mobility session context information for the mobile node to the next MAG in advance of the fast handoff to avoid delays and an inter-serving gateway bidirectional tunneling mechanism to allow forwarding of the mobility session traffic between new serving gateway and the prior serving gateway without ambiguity. | 08-09-2012 |
20120201223 | Method and Apparatus for Avoiding Physical Random Access Channel Collisions - A method and apparatus for avoiding Physical Random Access Channel collisions is provided. The method may comprise transmitting, by a first user equipment (UE), a first access request using a synchronization code in a subframe to a Node B, and receiving an acknowledgement from the Node B, wherein the acknowledgement indicates that a second UE has transmitted a second access request in the subframe using the synchronization code. Further, the method may comprise receiving, in a sub-frame, a first synchronization code from a first UE and a second synchronization code from a second UE, and preventing transmission of an acknowledgment to both the first and second UEs based on a determination that the received first and second synchronization codes are the same. | 08-09-2012 |
20120201224 | INFORMATION OBTAINING AND NOTIFICATION, DATA MESSAGE FORWARDING AND HANDOVER METHOD AND ACCESS NODE - An information obtaining, information notification, data message forwarding and switch method and an access node during a terminal switch process are provided. The access node comprises an opposite end information storage unit, which is set to store identification and locator mapping information of correspondent nodes of all accessed terminals; an message transceiver unit, which is set to: after establishing a connection with the terminal that switches to the local access node, receive a data message sent by the terminal to the correspondent node, according to the identification of the correspondent node in the data message, initiate an inquiry to a home ILR or an original access node of the terminal before switch-in to acquire and locally store the mapping information of the correspondent node, if the identification and locator mapping information of the correspondent node cannot be locally searched out. | 08-09-2012 |
20120201225 | METHOD OF PERFORMING HANDOVER IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - A method for performing effective handover (HO) in a broadband wireless access system is disclosed. The method for controlling a mobile station (MS) to perform handover in a broadband wireless access system includes receiving a first message including at least one of first index information and second index information from a serving base station (SBS), wherein the first index information indicates a subframe to which an additional ranging opportunity for the mobile station (MS) is allocated from a target base station (TBS) and the second index information indicates a frame to which the additional ranging opportunity is allocated, and transmitting a ranging code to the target base station (TBS) through the additional ranging opportunity indicated by the first index information and the second index information. | 08-09-2012 |
20120207127 | Method and system for realizing single radio voice call continuity - The disclosure discloses a method for realizing single radio voice call continuity, which is applied in an IP Multimedia Core Network Subsystem (IMS) network. The method includes: receiving, by a service continuity application server (SC AS), a handover request, and then updating, by the SC AS, a remote leg, and transmitting, by the SC AS, a handover notification message to a user terminal; receiving, by the user terminal, a handover command in a Packet Switch (PS) domain and the handover notification message, then adjusting, by the user terminal, an access mode to be accessing a Circuit Switch (CS) domain. The invention further discloses a system for realizing single radio voice call continuity. The method and system for realizing enhancement of single radio voice call continuity provided by the disclosure can effectively reduce the overlong interruption time in the prior art, and greatly improve the user experience. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207128 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING THE HANDOVER TO A CLOSE SUBSCRIBER GROUP CELL - The present invention discloses a method and apparatus for processing the handover to a close subscriber group cell, which method comprises: a target network element receiving a handover message; the target network element performing verification on the close subscriber group identity CSG ID carried in the handover message, if the verification is not passed, then returning a response message with the CSG ID of the target network element to a superior network element of the target network element. The present invention improves handover efficiency and system performance. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207129 | METHOD FOR PROCESSING DATA ASSOCIATED WITH HANDOVER IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - The technical features of this description provides a method and apparatus of processing data associated with handover in a wireless network transmitting a radio signal based on a number of orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols or single carrier frequency division multiple access (SC-FDMA) symbols. In an aspect of the features, when MME learns that HeNB is preparing handover of UE, it sends the UE a PDN CONNECTIVITY REJECT with a proper cause, so that LIPA PDN connection cannot be used in the target cell. Accordingly, the LIPA PDN connection is only restricted to a CSG cell. Moreover, the network can explicitly reject the request from the UE, either before or after handover, thereby avoiding the UE's unnecessary retry | 08-16-2012 |
20120207130 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF HANDLING USER EQUIPMENT CATEGORY IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A User Equipment (UE) category handling method and an apparatus for handling late version UE category attached to an early release version network in a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system are provided. A communication method includes transmitting a terminal capability report message including multiple terminal categories, receiving a Radio Resource Control (RRC) connection reconfiguration message including a terminal category to be used by the terminal according to serving base station of the terminal, and communicating with the network using the terminal category received from the network. The UE category handling method and apparatus of the present invention allows the UE to report a network-adaptive UE category, thereby avoiding soft buffer problem caused by version information mismatch and facilitating communication with the network without malfunctioning. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207131 | Method and Apparatus for Continuing HSPA During Baton Handover in TD-SCDMA Systems - Certain aspects of the present disclosure propose techniques for continuing high-speed packet access (HSPA) during the baton handover in Time Division Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access (TD-SCD-MA) systems. In aspects of the disclosure, one techniques for performing a baton handover from a source node B (NB) to a target NB by a user equipment (UE) is provided. The technique generally includes receiving a first signal instructing the UE to perform the baton handover from the source NB to the target NB, the first signal including non-scheduled transmission grant information and transmitting data to the target NB during the baton handover in accordance with the non-scheduled transmission grant information, wherein the data is re-transmitted to the target NB a predetermined number of times. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207132 | System and Method for Obtaining Subscriber Access Information by Core Network in Handover Process - The present invention discloses a method for a core network to obtain user access information during a handover procedure, which includes: when the user handovers between HNBs or HeNBs and the core network does not carry out access control of the user, if the destination HeNB is connected to the core network directly or the user which does not support a closed subscriber group handovers to a hybrid destination HNB, the network element which controls the access of the user transmitting membership information of the user to the core network. The invention also discloses a corresponding system. The invention realizes that under the condition that the RAN side controlling the access of the UE during the handover process and the CN cannot know the membership of the UE, the RAN side notifying the core network of the membership information of the UE and the information of the H(e)NB. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207133 | ANCHOR CARRIER HANDOVER - A method of transferring anchor carrier status from a first carrier to another carrier in a multi-carrier wireless telecommunications network. The multi-carrier wireless telecommunications network comprises a base station and user equipment operable to simultaneously transmit and receive signals on more than one radio frequency carrier within a sector of the telecommunications network. The method comprises the steps of: receiving details of a triggering event to be notified to a network node; said triggering event comprising a measurable characteristic of said first carrier changing past a predetermined first threshold value; providing triggering information indicative of said triggering event to a network node; determining which of the other carriers of the multi-carrier telecommunications network have a measurable characteristic past a predetermined second threshold value; providing information relating to carriers determined to have a measurable characteristic past said predetermined second threshold value to the network node; and transferring anchor carrier status, in response to a received signal generated in response to receipt of said information relating to carriers and said triggering information, to one of the carriers determined to have a measurable characteristic past said predetermined second threshold value. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207134 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR EXTENDED NETWORK ACCESS NOTIFICATION VIA A BROADBAND ACCESS GATEWAY - A system and method supporting extended network access notification via a broadband access gateway is disclosed. A representative embodiment of the present invention may comprise a wireless interface and may be capable of exchanging multimedia communication between the wireless interface and a broadband network. The gateway may support multimedia communication via access devices that may seamlessly hand off from a wireless wide area network to a personal area network supported by the wireless interface. The hand off may be coordinated by the gateway and the wireless wide area network via the broadband network. A user of an access device may be notified when such a handoff has been automatically initiated, and a user may configure aspects of such hand offs. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207135 | METHOD OF COMMUNICATING IN WIRELESS NETWORK - A wireless network includes a current coordinator, at least one device which is currently associated with the wireless network, and a device selected as a new coordinator among the at least one device by the current coordinator. The current coordinator transmits a handover request message to the new coordinator; receives a handover response message in response to the handover request message from the new coordinator, the handover response message including a reason code field that is set to “success”; and broadcasts one or more beacons, each beacon including identification information which identifies the new coordinator and number information which indicates a number of remaining beacons that the current coordinator will broadcast before a handover occurs. The number information included in a last beacon among the one or more beacons is set to “0,” and the new coordinator broadcasts a beacon after receiving the last beacon from the current coordinator. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207136 | SYSTEM AND ASSOCIATED TERMINAL, METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR CONFIGURING AND UPDATING SERVICE ACCESS POINTS AND PROVIDING SERVICE CONTENT IN THE MOBILE DOMAIN - Various techniques for service access point configuration for mobile terminals of wireless systems are provided. Pre-configured service access point settings may be provided on a multimedia memory card with a client application capable of configuring the service access point settings in the mobile terminal from the pre-configured service access point settings on the multimedia memory card. Over-the-air updating of service access point settings may be performed by communication between a service access point and a mobile terminal or a client application on the mobile terminal for automatically configuring service access point settings on the mobile terminal based upon information provided by the service access point. Service content specific pricing in the mobile domain is also provided. Service content specific pricing content delivery may be provided through a particular service access point configured for the service content specific pricing. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207137 | Method for Managing Local IP Access Connection - Disclosed is a method for managing local IP access connection, wherein the method comprises: determining whether a local IP access connection supports mobility; if yes, then processing the local IP access connection, wherein the processing includes at least one of the following: activate, establish and update. According to the present invention, the source/target mobility management entity or source/target RAN node determines whether a local IP access connection supports mobility according to a CSG identifier or local gateway information, which thus achieves the management operation on the local IP access connection, avoids the waste of system resources and the increasing of system burden and improves the processing efficiency of the mobile communication system. | 08-16-2012 |
20120213197 | Methods and Apparatuses for Managing Multiple Call Sessions During a Transfer - Various methods for managing multiple call sessions during a transfer are provided. One example method may include detecting an initiation of a handover of a wireless device from a connection to a packet switched domain to a connection to a circuit switched domain. The wireless device may be a party to more than one call session. The example method may further include receiving a multiple call session indicator that provides an indication that the wireless device is party to multiple call sessions, and in response to receiving the multiple call session indicator, creating or updating call control state machines for each of the call sessions. Similar and related example methods, example apparatuses, and example computer program products are also provided. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213198 | METHODS FOR HANDOFF OF AN ACTIVE COMMUNICATION CONNECTION FROM A MACROCELL TO A FEMTOCELL - A method for performing a handoff of an active communication connection for a mobile user station from a macrocell to one or more femtocells. In one aspect, the present invention provides an improved handoff for situations in which the mobile user station is moved into an indoor residential or enterprise environment within which the signal strength of the mobile user station with respect to the macrocell base transceiver station becomes relatively low. In one embodiment, the method efficiently performs a handoff of an active communication connection from a macrocell to one or more femtocells while minimizing the likelihood of dropping the active communication connection during the handoff. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213199 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION CONTROLLING METHOD - A communication method in LIPA/SIPTO architecture is provided which, when a user equipment (UE) is to connect from a serving area to an external network, allows re-selection of an optimal gateway. The communication method allows selecting a gateway apparatus physically or topologically close to a site, where the user equipment is attached. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213200 | HEADER COMPRESSION OPTIMIZATION METHOD DURING AND AFTER HANDOVERS IN CELLULAR COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The present invention concerns a method for optimizing ROHC RTP (Robust Header Compression Real Time Protocol) compression applied to IP header of data packets stream so as to use more compact formats enable to remain in a steady state, to never discard received packet, and to serve radio resources without requiring to modify ROHC specification. In the method, when handover or mobility procedure is started, new reference values are normally added to a sliding compression window, but no reference value is removed from the window as long as the handover or mobility procedure is on going. After the handover or mobility procedure is complete, when the number of values transmitted on the new radio link are appropriate to cope against the error properties on the new link, all older values can be removed at once from the compression window, thereby reverting to normal window operation. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213201 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR STATION LOCATION BASED NEIGHBOR DETERMINATION AND HANDOVER PROBABILITY ESTIMATION - The present invention is a method and system for station location based neighbor determination and handover probability estimation. A serving access point determines the location and movement measurements of a station (STA). Neighboring access points report coordinates of cell fringes of the neighboring access points. The STA sends a request for system information to the current access point along with current location of the STA. The current access point provides the system information, and the STA utilizes the system information to determine best handover candidate from among neighboring access points and an estimate of the time for handover. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213202 | Switching System and Method of Ringing Session with CRBT - A method for handing over an alerting phase session with customized alerting tone is disclosed. The method includes: when the handover occurs in an alerting phase session with a customized alerting tone in the way of early session, a mobile switching center initiating a handover of a normal media negotiation dialog and the MSC or customized alerting tones application server initiating a handover of customized alerting tone session. A system for handing over an alerting phase session with customized alerting tone is also disclosed, and the system includes a mobile switching center and a customized alerting tones application server. In the present method and system, even the handover from PS network to CS network occurs, the service experience of the calling user on the customized alerting tone session will not change, thus the normal call request is not affected and there is no need to modify the exiting IMS architecture. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213203 | METHOD FOR SENDING AND RECEIVING SYSTEM INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND A SYSTEM INFORMATION SENDING DEVICE AND RECEIVING DEVICE EMPLOYING THE SAME - The present invention relates to a method for sending and receiving system information about multiple component carriers in a wireless communication system, and to a system information sending and receiving device employing the same. The present invention comprises a configuration wherein one component carrier is used to transmit system information about another component carrier to a terminal. One embodiment of the present invention solves the problems which occur when using a plurality of component carriers such as additional battery consumption and time delays before receiving information, and hence it has the advantages that battery consumption and information receipt delays are reduced. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213204 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COMMUNICATION IN A WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM - A communication method in a wireless local area network (WLAN) system is provided. The communication method includes: configuring, by a first access point (AP), a first basic service set (BSS) which uses a first primary channel (P-CH) and a first secondary channel (S-CH); and configuring, by a second AP, a second BSS which uses a second P-CH, a second S-CH, a second tertiary channel (T-CH), and a second quaternary channel (Q-CH), wherein a band of the first P-CH overlaps with a band of the second P-CH, and the second P-CH is a common channel which is used in an operation of a member station of the second BSS. | 08-23-2012 |
20120218970 | Caching in Mobile Networks - There is described a system and method of handing over a connection to a terminal from a source network element (e.g. base station) to a target network element (e.g. base station) in a packet data network when the source base station is acting as a caching server and sending content data towards the terminal in a session. A handover request is sent from the source base station to the target base station. A context data message (e.g. CXTP message) is sent from the source base station to the target base station, the context data message including session state parameters identifying the state of the session. At the target base station, the session state parameters are retrieved from the context data message and used to identify the state of the session. Content data packets are then sent from the target base station towards the terminal so as to continue the session. | 08-30-2012 |
20120218971 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO REDUCE A TIME TO TRANSFER MULTIPLE PDN CONTEXTS DURING INTER-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY HANDOFF - Aspects of the present disclosure provide apparatus and methods to reduce the time taken to perform multiple packet data network (PDN) context transfers during inter-radio access technology (IRAT) scenarios. Certain aspects provide methods and apparatus for wireless communication by a device capable of communicating in at least a first and second RAT networks. The device may have multiple PDN contexts established in the first RAT network. As part of a transition to the second RAT network, the mobile device may transmit a single signaling message that indicates at least two of the PDN contexts to be transferred. In some aspects, the single signaling message may also indicate a new PDN context to be established as part of the transition. | 08-30-2012 |
20120218972 | BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND REORDERING METHOD THEREOF - A communication system wherein a base station sends packets having sequence numbers attached, to a mobile station, the mobile station rearranges the packets by sequence number, and hard handover is performed. A handover source base station having a controller decides whether the handover source base station forwards packets which were not sent to the mobile station, out of packets received from a host station, to a handover target base station, controls forwarding of the packets to the handover target base station and sends forwarding execution information from the handover source base station to the mobile station to notify whether the forwarding of the packets has been executed, the mobile station including a receiver that receives the forwarding execution information from the handover source base station; and a controller that executes reordering of the received packets based on the forwarding execution information at the handover. | 08-30-2012 |
20120218973 | Terminal and handover method - The present invention discloses a handover method and a terminal. The method comprises the following steps: a terminal receiving a handover command, wherein the handover command is used to indicate that the terminal should be handed over to a target cell; the terminal performing a handover process so that it is handed over to the target cell and keeping a data communication with a source cell until a success of the handover process is determined. The present invention can reduce and even eliminate the interruption time of the handover in the mobility management so as to achieve a seamless handover and improve the service experience for the users. | 08-30-2012 |
20120218974 | Method and Device for Managing Internet Protocol Offload Connection - The disclosure discloses a method and a device for managing Internet Protocol (IP) offload connection. The method comprises the steps of: determining that a target Mobility Management Entity (MME) supports IP offload or identifies information of two Serving Gateways (S-GWs); the target MME receiving IP offload connection information from an source MME; the target MME processing the IP offload connection according to the IP offload connection information, wherein the process comprises one of the following: establishing, updating and activating the IP offload connection. With the disclosure, the experience of the user is enhanced in the wireless communication system. | 08-30-2012 |
20120218975 | CONTROL STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE STATION APPARATUS, GATEWAY APPARATUS, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A control station apparatus is set with a path for performing communication of a plurality of flows with a mobile station apparatus through a transfer path of a first access network. When receiving a position register request for performing communication via a transfer path of a second access network, from the mobile station apparatus, the control station apparatus continues communication with the mobile station apparatus through the first access network when it has been determined that the communication requested by the position register request includes a flow for which handover of the transfer path is prohibited. Accordingly, a control station apparatus is provided that can perform handover control such as to enable communication of a connection including a specific flow via one of the access networks while performing communication of a connection that does not include any specific flow without limitation via the other access network. | 08-30-2012 |
20120224561 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR RADIO CONFIGURATION INDICATION - Techniques for facilitating wireless communication include receiving a message from a mobile station, the message comprising a service option field indicative of an advanced radio configuration capability of the mobile station and establishing a radio link between the mobile station and the serving base station, by using the indicated advanced radio configuration capability. In some implementations, in a CDMA2000 network, a Revision E compliant mobile station is able to operate in Revision E mode with a Revision E base station and a legacy mode with a legacy base station, without being affected by a handoff and without a need to modify bit length of the revision field in the paging response message from the mobile station. | 09-06-2012 |
20120224562 | WIMAX R6 CONTROL ARCHITECTURE - Within an access services network (ASN) providing wireless access services to an access terminal and a base station communicatively coupled to an ASN gateway, a new functional process identified as an “R6 controller” is provided within the framework. The R6 controller includes both a controlling entity process residing and executing within the ASN gateway and an agent entity process residing and executing within the base station. The R6 controller entities monitor the R6 reference point therebetween and may execute a keep-alive procedure for determining the status of the R6 interface. If a problem is detected, interested client applications are notified and further actions (e.g., initiate handover process, notify ATs, etc.) may be taken. Optionally, the R6 controller entities function as gateways enabling centralized processing for messages transmitted between peer instances of other client application processes spanning the base station-ASN gateway pair. | 09-06-2012 |
20120224563 | SELECTIVE ENABLING OF USER EQUIPMENT CAPABILITY - User equipment for use in a wireless network, the wireless network including a first radio access network supporting communication using a first radio access technology in first service areas and a second radio access network supporting communication using a second radio access technology in second service areas, the user equipment having a capability to communicate using the first radio access technology, and a capability to communicate using the second radio access technology that may be disabled or enabled, wherein the user equipment is arranged to disable the capability to communicate using the second radio access technology in response to a determination that a preferred mode of voice communication cannot be provided using the second radio access technology in a said second service area, and wherein the user equipment is arranged to enable the capability to communicate using the second radio access technology, on the basis of communications, using the first radio access technology, in a selected one of said first service areas. | 09-06-2012 |
20120224564 | METHOD AND SYSTEM TO SUPPORT SINGLE RADIO VIDEO CALL CONTINUITY DURING HANDOVER - A method and system for managing a plurality of network bearers in a wireless communication network is provided. The method includes identifying at least one of an initiation or an update of an instance of an application session. The method then generates an identifier associated with said instance of the application session. Further, the method assigns said identifier to each of the plurality of network bearers established as a result of said identified initiation or identified update of said instance of the application session. In an embodiment, the method uses the said identifier for managing communication during handover from a first communications network to a second communications. The method manages both video bearers and the voice bearers during the handover based on the said identifier. | 09-06-2012 |
20120230293 | METHOD OF PERFORMING AN INTER-TECHNOLOGY HANDOFF IN A LOOSELY COUPLED ARCHITECTURE - The present invention provides embodiments of methods for performing inter-technology handoffs in a loosely coupled network architecture. One embodiment of the method includes configuring a downlink data path from a target access network to a mobile device concurrently with transmitting a data path registration request from the target access network to an anchor point during handoff of the mobile device from a source access network to the target access network. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230294 | BASE STATION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CALL SETTING UP, HANDING OVER AND RELEASING IN HYBRID NETWORK - A base station system and method for call se ng up, handing over and releasing in hybrid network are disclosed. The base station system consists of BSC, TC, several BTSs and a band-width guaranteed IP network among them, IP mode transport and traditional TDM mode transport between BSC and TC are simultaneity supported in the system, and BTS supports TDM mode or IP mode. The invention is provided with such advantages: compatibility with TDM, which maximumly protects the providers' investment; smooth transition from TDM to IP, which decreases investing risk; flexible choice for different physical layer or data link layer transmission apparatuses to bear IP message, which facilitates the providers to constitute their networks. In IP mode, data service can share bandwidth with the mute frames of voice service, the system can coexist with different IP networks such as 3G or WiMax, and the control plane and the user plane is independent each other so as to simplify the developing procedure and reduce the maintaining cost. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230295 | Method and Apparatus to Support HSDPA ACK/CQI Operation During Baton Handover in TD-SCDMA Systems - Certain aspects of the present disclosure propose techniques for continuing high-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) during the baton handover in Time Division Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access (TD-SCDMA) systems. Aspects of the disclosure provide a method for performing a baton handover from source node B (NB) to a target NB by a user equipment (UE) and an apparatus capable of performing operations of the method. The method generally includes receiving a first signal instructing the UE to perform the baton handover from the source NB to the target NB, the first signal indicating resources for use by the UE and transmitting, on the indicated resources, feedback information regarding reception of data transmissions during the baton handover. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230296 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes: a step of a mobile switching center MME managing access information that defines accessible CSG-ID of a mobile station UE; a step of the mobile switching center MME accommodating a combination of eNB-IDs and CSG-IDs of a radio base station HeNB | 09-13-2012 |
20120230297 | MANAGEMENT UNIT FOR FACILITATING INTER-NETWORK HAND-OFF FOR A MULTISERVICE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A management unit allocates network resources multiservice communication devices capable of communicating via a plurality of networks. The management unit includes a communication device interface for facilitating a bidirectional data communication with the multiservice communication devices via a wireless control channel, the bidirectional data communication including outbound control data sent to multiservice communication devices and inbound control data received from at multiservice communication devices. The wireless control channel is separate from the communication between multiservice communication devices and the networks. A network interface receives network resource data from the networks. A management processing unit generates the outbound control data in response. The management processing unit facilities the handoff of a real-time service accessed by the multiservice communication devices via a first network to a second network. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230298 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR HFN HANDLING AT INTER-BASE STATION HANDOVER IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - Systems and methods for addressing the de-synchronization of the cryptsync between the network and the mobile stations (eNB) that can occur at mobility are addressed. De-synchronization is resolved by forwarding HFN and PDCP Sequence Number(s) from the source eNB to the target eNB. In order to avoid re-use of a crytosync for a given key, a backward offset from the initial COUNT value is used by the target eNB. These approaches do not require an over-the-air signaling and the COUNT value handling in the network is transparent to the mobile station. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230299 | Method for Reconfiguring Micro Base Station and Corresponding Micro Base Station - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method for reconfiguring a micro base station and a corresponding micro base station to solve a radio frequency conflict of the micro base station, so that a radio frequency conflict can be solved, and meanwhile, service continuity on a currently served wireless terminal can be ensured. The provided method for reconfiguring a micro base station includes: obtaining a reconfiguration parameter of a radio frequency; sending an indication message to a wireless terminal that is served, where the indication message carries an identifier of the micro base station and a radio frequency parameter that is to be used after reconfiguration, or, the indication message carries an identifier of a neighboring base station of the micro base station and a radio frequency parameter that is used by the neighboring base station; and performing radio frequency reconfiguration according to the reconfiguration parameter of the radio frequency. | 09-13-2012 |
20120236820 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING DEVICES BASED ON NFC AND DEVICE CONTROL SYSTEM USING THE SAME - A method for controlling a service device through a smart terminal based on near field communication (NFC) includes the steps of: activating NFC between the smart terminal and the service device; handing over the communication between the smart terminal and the service device to a secondary network through the NFC; executing, by the start terminal, a web contents execution program; providing, by the service device, control codes to the smart terminal; preparing, by the smart terminal, to utilize the control codes; displaying, by the smart terminal, a control/service screen of the service device on the web contents execution program by utilizing the control codes; detecting, by the web contents execution program, a user manipulation on the control/service screen; and transmitting, by the web contents execution program, a request defined in the control codes to the service device in response to the user manipulation. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236821 | RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS, AND DATA FORWARDING METHOD IN RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS - A radio base station apparatus for performing radio communication with a mobile terminal apparatus, the radio base station apparatus including: a forwarding data determination unit which determines forwarding data which is to be forwarded to a handover destination radio base station apparatus, based on the presence or absence of retransmission of data to the mobile terminal apparatus; and a data forwarding processing unit which forwards the determined forwarding data to the handover destination radio base station apparatus. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236822 | INTER-OPERATION BETWEEN BASE STATIONS HAVING DIFFERENT PROTOCOL REVISIONS - Techniques for the inter-operation of base station having different protocol revision numbers include broadcasting a first message that includes a protocol revision field indicating a same revision as a legacy network, transmitting a second message over a forward link common control channel, the second message indicating advanced radio configuration (RC) capabilities beyond radio control capabilities implied by the protocol revision field broadcast in the first message, receiving, in response to the second message, a third message from a mobile station, indicating that the mobile station supports the advanced RC capabilities and establishing, with the mobile station, a radio link having the advanced RC capabilities. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236823 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR FAILOVER HANDLING AT GEO-REDUNDANT GATEWAYS - A method, system and apparatus for reversion of UE sessions from a backup SGW or protect node to an operationally restored primary SGW or working node. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236824 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR DIAMETER-BASED STEERING OF MOBILE DEVICE NETWORK ACCESS - According to one aspect, the subject matter described herein includes a method for Diameter-based steering of mobile device network access. The method includes receiving a Diameter message associated with a mobile device. The method also includes determining, based on the Diameter message, whether the mobile device should be steered to access a radio access network or a radio access network type that is different from a radio access network or radio access network type currently supporting network access of the mobile device. The method further includes, in response to determining that the mobile device should access the different radio access network or radio access network type, steering the mobile device to access the different radio access network or radio access network type. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236825 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL DEVICE, HANDOVER CONTROL METHOD, AND RECORDING MEDIUM FOR HANDOVER CONTROL PROGRAM - A communication terminal device to be connected to an access point to conduct communications using voice/sound packet data, the communication terminal device includes a jitter monitor monitoring a jitter of the voice/sound packet data received from a connecting access point; and a handover cause generator generating a handover cause to change a connection from the connecting access point to another access point based on a number of jitters exceeding an allowable value in a predetermined time period. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236826 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR RESELECTING AN ACCESS POINT - A method for use in an access point includes receiving a request for a reselection message from a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU). The reselection message is generated in response to the request and includes: at least one first identifier of one or more candidate basic service sets (BSSs) that may be considered for reselection; a preference indicator associated with each candidate BSS, to indicate the BSS selection preference; an expiration time indicator associated with each candidate BSS, to indicate a time period that the BSS may be considered for reselection; an indication of a measurement to be taken on a BSS and used in a target BSS reselection determination; and a margin by which the measurement must exceed a corresponding value for a currently selected BSS. The reselection message is transmitted to the WTRU. A reselection response message is received from the WTRU, indicating the target BSS reselection determination. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236827 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, AND HANDOVER EXECUTION METHOD - A mobile communication system includes a plurality of base stations, an upper node, and a mobile station. In this mobile communication system, while a first base station that is currently connected via radio to the mobile station is receiving a first downlink signal from a second base station that was previously connected via radio to the mobile station and that received the first downlink signal from the upper node for transmission to the mobile station, when the mobile station is connected via radio to a third base station as a result of a handover, the first base station sends a redirection request signal requesting the second base station to redirect the first downlink signal to the third base station. Then, in response to the redirection request signal, the second base station redirects the first downlink signal to the third base station. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236828 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, MOBILE STATION, AND RADIO BASE STATION - A mobile station UE according to the present invention includes a determination unit | 09-20-2012 |
20120236829 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER, USER EQUIPMENT, BASE STATION, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - According to embodiments, a base station includes a radio communication unit configured to establish communication with a mobile communication terminal using a plurality of component carriers. The base station further includes a control unit configured to transmit a command to the mobile communication terminal to reduce the plurality of component carriers to one prior to handover of communication between the mobile communication terminal and the base station to another base station. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236830 | USER EQUIPMENT, METHOD FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER, BASE STATION, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile station in a wireless communication network. The mobile station including a radio communication unit that communicates with a first base station via a plurality of component carriers, and a control unit that controls the radio communication unit to initiate a handover procedure to a second base station after receiving at least one handover command. | 09-20-2012 |
20120243504 | Method of Handling Cell Change in Wireless Communication Systems and Communication Device Thereof - A method of handling cell change for a mobile device employing a high speed downlink package access (HSDPA) technology in wireless communication systems. The method includes initiating a handover procedure to change a serving cell of the mobile device when the mobile device moves from a HSDPA cell into another HSDPA cell, performing a physical channel reconfiguration procedure from a high speed physical downlink shared channel (HS-PDSCH) to a dedicated physical data channel (DPDCH), wherein the physical channel reconfiguration procedure is initiated via a Radio Network Controller (RNC), and performing the handover procedure. | 09-27-2012 |
20120243505 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO IMPROVE APERIODIC SRS (SOUNDING REFERENCE SYMBOL) IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus are disclosed for aperiodic SRS improvement. In one embodiment, the method comprises configuring a UE (User Equipment) with aperiodic SRS. The method also comprises transmitting a PUSCH (Physical Uplink Shared Channel) on a last SC-FDMA (Single Carrier-Frequency Division Multiple Access) symbol in a UE-specific aperiodic SRS subframe if a Msg3 in the subframe is transmitted on the PUSCH. Furthermore, the method comprises not transmitting a PUSCH on a last SC-FDMA symbol in a UE-specific aperiodic SRS subframe if a Msg3 in the subframe is not transmitted on the PUSCH. | 09-27-2012 |
20120243506 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ATTEMPTING TO ACCESS NETWORK - A method and an apparatus for attempting to access a network from among a plurality of networks by a mobile terminal is provided. The method includes attempting to access the network through at least one target channel determined by the mobile terminal, such that the at least one target channel has a measured signal quality value at least equal to a predetermined reference value among signal quality values measured for channels corresponding to network access provider identification information indicating a network having a highest priority among the plurality of networks. | 09-27-2012 |
20120243507 | HANDOFF ACCESS METHOD AND DEVICE BASED ON RANDOM ACCESS CHANNEL - A handoff access method and device based on a random access channel is provided, the method comprising: a source BS sends a handoff request message to a target BS; the target BS sends a handoff response message to the source BS, and then the source BS forwards a handoff command with the content of the handoff response message to the mobile terminal, wherein a sequence number of a reserved character code allocated by the target BS to the mobile terminal and a random access sub-channel that the reserved character code is located in are contained in the handoff command message; after receiving the handoff command message, the mobile terminal selects the reserved character code and the random access sub-channel that the reserved character code is located in; and a handoff access procedure is initialized on the random access sub-channel by the target BS and the mobile terminal | 09-27-2012 |
20120243508 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMPROVING RRC CONNECTION PROCEDURE - The present invention provides a method for improving a Radio Resource Control (RRC) Connection procedure in user equipment (UE) of a wireless communication system. The method includes steps of performing an RRC Connection procedure, and resetting or re-establishing a lower layer protocol entity for Signaling Radio Bearers (SRBs) when a cell reselection occurs. | 09-27-2012 |
20120243509 | METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING INFORMATION - The invention relates to a method for communicating intended information between a sender and at least one receiver in a communication system. The method comprises providing a plurality of elements to be sent from the sender to the receiver, the plurality of elements being in a first order; sending to the receiver the elements in a second order, the second order representing the intended information; receiving the plurality of elements; determining whether an order in which the elements have been received is different from the first order; if the order in which the elements have been received is different from the first order, determining an information based on the order in which the elements have been received; and if the order in which the elements have been received is the second order, the information determined is the intended information. | 09-27-2012 |
20120243510 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER, USER EQUIPMENT, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile station in a wireless communication network. The mobile station includes a radio communication that transmits an access request message to a base station via a first communication resource, and receives a timing adjustment in response to the access request message from the base station. The mobile station also includes an adjustment value storage unit that stores the timing adjustment, and a control unit that adjusts access timing corresponding to a second communication resource based on the timing adjustment value stored in the adjustment value storage unit. The radio communication unit then communicates with the base station via the first communication resource and the second communication resource. | 09-27-2012 |
20120250657 | Handoff Method and System for Mobile Terminal - Disclosed in the present invention are a handover method and system for a mobile terminal (MT) based on a wireless local area network. The method includes: sending a data frame to a second AP when an MT needs to band over from a cell covered by a first AP service to a cell covered by a second AP service, with the data frame including an associated number between the MT and the first AP and an MAC access of the first AP; and the second AP looking up locally stored mobile terminal certification and association information about the cell covered by the first AP service and rapidly determining whether to allow the access of the MT according to the stored information. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250658 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND RELATED COMPUTER PROGRAM FOR DETECTING CHANGES TO A NETWORK CONNECTION - A method, a device, and a computer program product detect changes to the connection of a device, such as a mobile device to a network, and initiate at least one measure when changes are detected. Changes might be caused by malicious users or malicious mobile phone SW in order to perform Denial of Service (DoS) attacks to the network. Those changes could be, for example, frequent handover actions, frequent attach/detach actions or frequent Packet Data Protocol context activation, deactivation or modification actions initiated by a mobile device or a group of mobile devices. The changes to the connection are detected by checking if parameters related to the mobile device, or related to network elements, violate defined policy rules. The detection itself is done in a network element, such as a core network element. | 10-04-2012 |
20120257597 | Method Of Providing Hand-Off Hysteresis For Subnet Borders - In one embodiment, at least one grouping message is broadcast from a network element. The grouping message causes an access terminal (AT) in the communications network to regard the at least first and second subnets as both being members of a same subnet group. Location information and a maximum distance parameter associated with at least one area and configured to create a buffer zone along a border between the first and second subnets are broadcasted from the network element to the AT. The AT is prevented from sending a subnet identifier request message when the AT has, as an origin area, an area of the first subnet in the buffer zone and the AT travels to an area of the second subnet in the buffer zone. Session transfers are performed outside the buffer zone triggered by distance based location update messages, thus preventing session transfer ping-ponging. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257598 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING A SELECTIVE IP TRAFFIC OFFLOAD PROCEDURE - A method and apparatus are described for performing a selected Internet protocol (IP) traffic offload (SIPTO) procedure. A network node, (e.g., a mobility management entity (MME) or a serving general packet radio service (GPRS) support node (SGSN)), may receive a packet data network (PDN) connectivity request from a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU). A determination may be made to perform SIPTO at a local network, and the WTRU may perform a PDN release and reconnection procedure. The determination may be based on at least one of a closed subscriber group (CSG) identity (ID), a home evolved Node-B (HeNB) ID or a local network ID. An access network discovery and selection function (ANDSF) may be queried for IP interface selection (OPIIS) rules, a local access point name (APN) that supports per flow SIPTO at a local network, and IP flows that may be routed to the local APN. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257599 | TRANSFER OF COMMUNICATION SESSIONS BETWEEN BASE STATIONS IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method for carrying out a handover procedure, following which a mobile terminal (MS) currently in communication with a first base station (BS), will communicate via a second BS. The method includes upon initiating a handover procedure, determining that the MS will receive all future IP packets via the second base station, following this determination and prior to establishing a connection between the MS and the second BS, forwarding all IP packets being addressed to the MS to the second BS, and buffering the received IP packets thereat, and upon establishing a connection between the MS and the second BS, forwarding the IP packets that were buffered at the second BS to the MS, wherein the buffered IP packets are delivered to the MS before delivering any packets addressed thereto along a new path extending to the second BS which does not include the first BS. | 10-11-2012 |
20120263144 | EFFICIENT HANDOVER OF MEDIA COMMUNICATIONS IN HETEROGENEOUS IP NETWORKS - Methods and systems are provided for efficient handover of a media session between heterogeneous IP networks. A mobile device with Internet access can operate a software program to communicate with a corresponding node. The corresponding node may access the Internet through either (i) a NAT router or (ii) a public IP address. The mobile device establishes a media session with a corresponding node via the transmission of a first media stream and receipt of a second media stream, and a media control channel can optionally be implemented. The mobile device can acquire Internet access through a second IP address, and packets routed between the second IP address and the Internet may traverse a NAT router. A software routine can determine that handover of the media session from the first IP address to the second IP address is preferred. | 10-18-2012 |
20120263145 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SMALL CELL DISCOVERY IN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS - A method for acquiring and applying offload area information for offloading a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) to a small cell in a different frequency layer is disclosed. The WTRU may enter a region or a macro cell and receive offload area information of the region in which a small cell in the vicinity of the macro cell is located. The offload information may be received in a system information block (SIB), dedicated signaling, or any other radio signal. The WTRU may perform measurements to determine the location of the WTRU and to determine whether it has entered any offload areas. Upon a determination that the offload area information is no longer valid, the WTRU may delete the offload area information. | 10-18-2012 |
20120263146 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO CONTROL APPARATUS, CORE NETWORK APPARATUS, MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - The first communication system is configured to determine whether or not to provide information that instructs the UE | 10-18-2012 |
20120263147 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND MOBILE SWITCHING CENTER - A mobile communication method for performing a handover procedure of a mobile station from a CSG cell # | 10-18-2012 |
20120263148 | NETWORK INITIATED CONTEXT ESTABLISHMENT - The invention relates to a method for configuring a context for a connection delivering a packet data service to a mobile terminal via a target wireless access network. The mobile terminal is initially connected to an originating wireless access network and the packet data service may be provided to the mobile terminal via the originating wireless network. Moreover, the invention provides an authentication server, a packet data gateway and a packet data service support node which participate in the context configuration method. To provide a method that allows establishing connection for packet service delivery to a mobile terminal from a wireless access network, as for example a UMTS, as fast as possible the invention suggests to preconfigure service provision of the packet data service via the target wireless access network by establishing a context prior to the mobile terminal connecting to the target wireless access network. | 10-18-2012 |
20120269162 | METHOD, RADIO SYSTEM, MOBILE TERMINAL AND BASE STATION FOR PROVIDING LOCAL BREAKOUT SERVICE - There is provided a radio system wherein a mobile terminal is configured to detect availability of a local breakout service to an Internet protocol gateway; to start a network entry to the local breakout service; and to configure an Internet protocol stack of the mobile terminal on the basis of received configuration data. A serving base station of the mobile terminal is configured to establish a radio bearer for the local breakout service; to provide a dynamic host control protocol relay function for mapping data of the mobile terminal using a local Internet protocol address to the established radio bearer; and to provide the local breakout service to the Internet protocol gateway while retaining user access control and a remote Internet protocol gateway of a packet core network of the public mobile network for the mobile terminal. | 10-25-2012 |
20120269163 | SERVER ASSISTED HIGHER PRIORITY PLMN SCAN - Methods and systems facilitating a server-assisted scan for a preferred network are disclosed. A user device may identify a cell at a present location of the user device, and request one or more records associated with the identified cell from a server. If the server provides a record associated with the identified cell, the user device may determine whether the provided record includes preferred network data identifying a preferred network previously found on the identified cell. If the provided record does not include the preferred network data, the user device may start a scan timer that is set to a predefined time interval. If the provided record includes the preferred network data, the user device may initiate a preferred network scan without starting the scan timer. | 10-25-2012 |
20120269164 | Method for Realizing Single Radio Voice Call Continuity and Single Radio Voice Call Continuity System - A method for implementing single radio voice call continuity, comprises: User Equipment (UE) establishing an IP Multimedia Core Network Subsystem (IMS) session with a remote user through a Packet Switch (PS) network, wherein the IMS session is anchored to an enhanced Mobile Switch Center (eMSC); the PS network sending a handover request to the eMSC for handing over the IMS session to gain access through a Circuit Switch (CS) network; the eMSC receiving the handover request, establishing a media link, and relating a newly established media link with a remote media link of the IMS session, so that the UE can communicate with the remote user through the newly established media link and the remote media link. The present invention also provides a system and an eMSC for supporting single radio voice call continuity. | 10-25-2012 |
20120269165 | Apparatus and Method for Implementing One or More Handover Prioritizing Schemes - Avoiding collisions when executing Handover or initial access (Random access requests) due to the use of the same synchronisation code, SYNC-UL code, at the same Uplink pilot channel, UpPCH, in the same Uplink pilot Time Slot, Up-PTS, in a TD-SCDMA system. The method may comprise receiving a signal that identifies N subframes of a subframe cycle including M subframes, wherein an uplink pilot channel in each of said N identified subframes is available for initial access and a hard handover, wherein N and M are positive integers, and wherein N is less than M. Further, the method may comprise receiving a signal that identifies G synchronization codes among H available synchronization codes, wherein each of said G identified synchronization codes is available for initial access only, wherein G and H are positive integers, and wherein G is less than H. | 10-25-2012 |
20120269166 | Method and Apparatus for Power Correction in Uplink Syncronization During a TD-SCDMA Handover - A method and apparatus for adjusting and offsetting a power level of uplink transmissions from user equipment in a wireless communication system. In an aspect of the disclosure, a handoff from a source base station to a target base station includes the target base station determining a suitable power offset value and communicating this offset to the source base station. The source base station transmits a handover instruction including the offset to the user equipment (UE), and the UE transmits a synchronization code. The target base station then calculates a further power correction and transmits the correction with an acknowledgment of the synchronization code. The UE then sets the power for future transmissions based in part on the offset and correction values. | 10-25-2012 |
20120269167 | ENHANCED ATTACHMENT PROCEDURE FOR ATTACHING A UE TO A 3GPP ACCESS NETWORK - The invention relates to methods for (re)attaching a UE to a 3GPP access network and for storing bearer context information of a UE upon handover from a 3GPP access network to a non-3GPP access network. Furthermore, the invention relates to 3GPP network nodes, such as mobility management entity, serving gateway and packed data gateway, and a UE that are specially adapted to perform these methods. In order to decrease of the delay time during (re)attachment of a UE to a 3GPP access network, the invention proposes to maintain context information on data bearer(s) of a UE within the 3GPP access network and the UE, while the UE is not attached to the 3GPP access network, so that data bearer context information for this UE is available and can be used for the (re)activation of data bearer(s) once the UE is attaching to the 3GPP access network again. | 10-25-2012 |
20120269168 | Synchronization Method, Communication Handover Method, Radio Network and Node - A synchronization method, a communication handover method, a radio network, and a RAN node are disclosed. The interface information synchronization method includes determining whether a condition for initiating interface information update is fulfilled. Information about the S1 interface between the RAN node and the core network node, is sent. In addition, or alternatively, information about the X2 interface between the RAN node and the neighboring RAN node is sent to the neighboring RAN node if the condition for initiating interface information update fulfilled. | 10-25-2012 |
20120269169 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING ZONE SWITCHING IN BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - A method and mobile stations for performing a zone switch, are discussed. According to an embodiment, the method includes: receiving, at the mobile station and from a target base station configured to operate in accordance with a first and a second protocol, a ranging response message of the first protocol including zone switch parameters used to perform zone switch from a first zone of the target base station corresponding to the first protocol to a second zone of the target base station corresponding to the second protocol; and performing, at the mobile station, the zone switch from the first zone to the second zone using the zone switch parameters | 10-25-2012 |
20120269170 | Synchronization-Free Station Locator In Wireless Network - A method of providing synchronization-free station locating in a wireless network is provided. In this method, an AP having a known location sends a unicast packet to the station and notes its time of departure TOD(D). The station receives the unicast packet, notes its time of arrival TOA(D), sends an acknowledgement packet to the AP, and notes its time of departure TOD(D_ACK). The AP receives the acknowledgment packet and notes its time of arrival TOA(D_ACK). Notably, a distance between the AP and the station can be accurately determined using a first difference between the TOA(D_ACK) and the TOD(D) and a second difference between the TOD(D_ACK) and the TOA(D). A plurality of such computed distances between a plurality of APs and the station can be used to determine an accurate location of the station. | 10-25-2012 |
20120275429 | Method and Apparatus for Facilitating User Equipment Backoff During Random Access Procedures - A method and apparatus for facilitating user equipment backoff during a random access procedure is provided. The method may comprise transmitting, by a user equipment (UE), at least one synchronization code to a Node B, determining that the at least one transmitted synchronization code was not acknowledged by the Node B, and modifying a maximum value of a random delay window in response to said determining. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275430 | Mobile Terminated Call Improvements - In one aspect, a method for a packet gateway node (PGW) is disclosed. The PGW being adapted for (a) communicating with at least a serving gateway node, SGW, (b) receiving and forwarding downlink data packets to a user entity, UE, and (c) communicating with a mobility management entity, MME. In one embodiment, the method comprises: the PGW, when receiving a downlink user plane data packet destined for the UE on a Packet Data Network, PDN, connection associated with a restarted SGW, determining if the PDN connection has not yet been relocated to a new SGW, and, if so, selecting at least one SGW from a set of SGWs including the restarted SGW or another SGW and transmitting a control plane signal to at least one of the selected SGWs, the control plane signal identifying at least the UE. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275431 | HANDLING CALL TRANSFER IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and apparatus for handling a call transfer from a circuit switched access network to a packet switched access network. A Mobile Switching Centre Server receives a notification that a call for a terminal requires handover from a circuit switched access network to a packet switched access network. The MSC Server determines whether the terminal is currently registered in an IMS network and/or whether the MSC Server is registered such that it can perform handover from the circuit switched access network to the packet switched access network. If so, then return Single Radio Voice Call Continuity is invoked to perform a handover of the call from the circuit switched access network to the packet switched access network. If not then the MSC Server invokes error handling procedures. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275432 | METHOD FOR SHORTENING SIGNALING DELAY OF ISC SESSION TRANSFER, NETWORK ELEMENT AND SYSTEM - The present invention provides a method for shortening signaling delay of ISC session transfer procedure, a network element for controlling ISC session transfer, a network element for anchoring a media path in ISC session transfer and a communication system including at least two terminals and the above two network elements. In the present invention, the SCC AS decides if a media path needs to be anchored in a media anchor point MRF, and if yes, then instructs a MRF to assign respective media endpoints for a local UE and a remote UE and connect the two media endpoints together, so as to divide the session between the local UE and the remote UE into two independent sub-sessions: a session between the local UE and the MRF, and a session between the remote UE and the MRF. For these two sub-sessions, the SIP signaling is terminated and sent out in the SCC AS. Thus, when a local UE or a remote UE triggers handover, only one sub-session needs to be updated/influenced. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275433 | Method and Apparatus for Explicit Signaling of Baton Handover in TD-SCDMA Systems - Physical layer bits in a Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access (TD-SCDMA) system control a baton handover. A method for enabling a baton handover from a source cell to a target cell includes tuning an uplink from a source channel of the source cell to a target channel of the target cell. The method also includes receiving a physical layer downlink switch command to switch a downlink from the source cell to the target cell. The method further includes tuning the downlink from the source channel of the source cell to the target channel of the target cell, in response to the physical layer downlink switch command, thus implementing the handover from the source cell to the target cell. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275434 | Base Station Apparatus and Mobile Communication System - Disclosed is a handover method in radio communication. A base station apparatus monitors the receiving state of a terminal, detects, based upon the receiving state, whether the terminal is one in which there is a possibility that loss of a call or a decline in quality will occur or one in which loss of a call or a decline in quality has occurred, and hands over the terminal to another base station apparatus having a carrier frequency different from that of the present base station apparatus. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275435 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR PERFORMING RANDOM ACCESS IN A TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A method of enabling a user equipment to perform a contention based random access, includes maintaining a set of non-dedicated random access preambles for contention-free random access and a set dedicated random access preambles for contention-based random access. The method also includes determining a random access preamble identifier and transmitting a message to the user equipment containing the determined random access preamble identifier. Additionally, the method includes receiving from the user equipment a non-dedicated random access preamble that is selected by the user equipment based on the random access preamble identifier comprised in the transmitted message. | 11-01-2012 |
20120281672 | SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE FOR PROVIDING COMMUNICATIONS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Method for performing communications in a wireless communication network ( | 11-08-2012 |
20120281673 | EFFICIENT HANDOVER OF MEDIA COMMUNICATIONS IN HETEROGENEOUS IP NETWORKS USING LAN PROFILES AND NETWORK HANDOVER RULES - Methods and systems are provided for efficient handover of a media session between heterogeneous IP networks. A mobile device with Internet access can operate a software program to communicate with a corresponding node. The corresponding node may access the Internet through either a NAT router or a firewall. The mobile device establishes a media session with a corresponding node via the transmission of a first media stream and receipt of a second media stream, and a media control channel can optionally be implemented. The mobile device acquires Internet access through a second IP address, and packets routed between the second IP address and the Internet may traverse a NAT router. The mobile device evaluates the type of NAT at the second IP address from a stored LAN profile. A software routine determines that handover of the media session from the first IP address to the second IP address is preferred. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281674 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR STEERING A SUBSCRIBER BETWEEN ACCESS NETWORKS - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for steering a subscriber between access networks are disclosed. According to one aspect, a method for steering a subscriber between access networks includes, at a first policy and charging rules function (PCRF) that serves a first access network, identifying a subscriber of the first access network as a candidate for steering to a second access network that is served by a second PCRF, querying the second PCRF to determine whether the candidate subscriber is allowed access to the second access network, and, upon a determination that the candidate subscriber is allowed access to the second access network, steering the candidate subscriber to the second access network. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281675 | Increasing Capacity in Wireless Communications - Techniques to increase the capacity of a W-CDMA wireless communications system. In an exemplary embodiment, early termination ( | 11-08-2012 |
20120281676 | SOFT HANDOFF IN OFDMA SYSTEM - Soft handoff in an OFDMA system is disclosed. If the pilot signal strength for a base station exceeds the defined threshold, the base station is added to an active set list. Subcarriers in a plurality of orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols are divided and allocated into subchannels. The OFDM symbols are divided and multiplexed. A soft handoff zone with a first dimension of the subchannels and a second dimension of the divided and multiplexed OFDM symbols is defined. The soft handoff zone has subcarriers with a subchannel definition, for example, an identical permutation. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281677 | DATA INTEGRATION FOR WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEMS - Techniques relating to an apparatus in communications with a wireless terminal through a wireless network system are provided. The apparatus may include a wireless terminal communication unit in communication with the wireless terminal through the wireless network system and configured to receive a list of one or more data sources from the wireless terminal, a data source communication unit configured to receive source data from the one or more data sources in the list, and a source data integration unit configured to use the source data to generate integrated data for transmission to the wireless terminal. | 11-08-2012 |
20120287902 | Methods, Apparatuses, Related Computer Program Product and Data Structure for Deciding on a Signaling Scheme for Handover - A first method (and related first ap aratus) includes transmitting, in a handover request message, an indication of a first protocol version; a second method (and related second apparatus) includes receiving, in the handover request message, the indication, deciding, based on the received indication and a second protocol version, on a value of an information element included in a handover request acknowledgement message to be transmitted, the information element indicating usage of a first or second signaling schemes, and transmitting the handover request acknowledgement message including the information element; and in the first method receiving the handover request acknowledgement message including the information element; and a third method (and related third apparatus) including receiving the handover command message including the information element, and configuring according to one of the first and second signaling schemes indicated by the information element. | 11-15-2012 |
20120287903 | Terrestrial Based High Speed Data Communications Mesh Network - A network for providing high speed data communications may include multiple terrestrial transmission stations that are located within overlapping communications range and a mobile receiver station. The terrestrial transmission stations provide a continuous and uninterrupted high speed data communications link with the mobile receiver station employing a wireless radio access network protocol. | 11-15-2012 |
20120287904 | SECURE AND SEAMLESS WAN-LAN ROAMING - Systems and methods are described for secure and seamless roaming between internal and external networks. Double and triple tunnels may be used to connect a mobile node to a correspondent host. A mobile node may include the ability to connect to two networks simultaneously to enable seamless roaming between networks. | 11-15-2012 |
20120287905 | Wireless Handover Optimization - Aspects of the present invention relate to improved systems and methods for handing over a UE from a source node to a target node. In some embodiments, the target node receives UL and DL count information directly from the UE being handed over, rather than from the source node or from a core network node. | 11-15-2012 |
20120287906 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IDENTIFYING MOBILE NETWORK PROTOCOL CAPABILITIES - A method and apparatus for improving handover in an IEEE 802.21 compliant communication network. A query is transmitted from a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) to a media independent handover (MIH) server (MIHS). The WTRU includes a target point of attachment (PoA) and/or a preferred mobile inter protocol (MIP) method. The WTRU receives a response from the MIHS indicating the MIP method supported by the target PoA. Based on the received response, the WTRU may make an informed decision regarding handover. | 11-15-2012 |
20120287907 | Processing Circuit Switched Services in an Evolved Packet Network - The present invention discloses for the ability for processing circuit switched (CS) services in an evolved packet network. For example, embodiments provide a method that includes: by a mobility management entity (MME), receiving a mobile terminated (MT) service indication from a mobile switching center (MSC); sending the MT service indication to user equipment (UE); and receiving an MT service response returned by the UE and performing subsequent operations according to the MT service response. In the method of the present invention, when an MT service arrives, the MME does not trigger the evolved NodeB (eNodeB) to hand over the packet switched (PS) services of the UE but notifies the UE of the MT service and performs subsequent operations according to the MT service response returned by the UE, thus avoiding the waste of network resources caused by a meaningless handover of PS services. | 11-15-2012 |
20120287908 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CORE NETWORK NODE SELECTION METHOD, AND BASE STATION AND MOBILE STATION USED THEREFOR - A mobile communication system in which a plurality of base stations and a plurality of core network nodes are distributed in a plurality of areas, wherein a source base station or a mobile station in a handover procedure of the mobile station transmits information for selecting a core network node to a target base station. | 11-15-2012 |
20120287909 | METHOD FOR DROPPING PACKET DATA, RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile communication system, that includes a buffer storing packet data to be sent; and a controller configured for discarding the packet data according to a value of a timer corresponding to the packet data, maintaining the value of the timer corresponding to the packet data when a handover is performed without restarting or resetting the value of the timer, wherein the discarding further includes discarding the corresponding packet data when the value of the timer reaches a given value. | 11-15-2012 |
20120294275 | INFRASTRUCTURE-UNASSISTED INTER-DEVICE WIRELESS WIDE AREA NETWORK HANDOFF - Aspects describe infrastructure unassisted inter-device handoff. A method performed by a wireless communications apparatus for inter-device handoff is disclosed. A wireless communications apparatus that performs a network unassisted inter-device handoff is disclosed. A computer program product comprising a computer-readable medium that includes codes for carrying out inter-device handoff is disclosed. At least one processor configured to perform a network unassisted communication handoff is disclosed. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294276 | INTER-RAT HANDOVER CONTROL USING SEQUENCE NUMBERS - An empty GRE packet along with a sequence number provides in-order delivery of data packets for a session to a UE during inter-RAT handover. In particular, an empty GRE packet sent from a source gateway in a source RAN (Radio Access Network) to a target gateway in a target RAN includes a sequence number to indicate to the target gateway the end of forwarded data packets from the source gateway. The target gateway sends data packets received from the source gateway to the UE until the empty GRE packet with the expected sequence number is received. Upon receipt of the empty GRE packet containing the expected sequence number, the target gateway begins sending data packets received directly from a home network gateway to the UE. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294277 | INTER-RAT HANDOVER CONTROL USING EMPTY GRE PACKETS - Empty GRE packets are used to provide in-order delivery of data packets for a session to a UE during inter-RAT handover. In particular, an empty GRE packet sent from a source gateway in a source RAN to a target gateway in a target RAN indicates to the target gateway the end of forwarded data packets from the source gateway. The target gateway sends data packets received from the source gateway to the UE until the empty GRE packet is received. Upon receipt of the empty GRE packet, the target gateway begins sending data packets received directly from a home network gateway to the UE. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294278 | THROUGHPUT FOR INTER-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY HANDOVER - Aspects describe renegotiation of quality of service parameters to resolve maximum bit rate mismatches and/or other quality of service parameter mismatching issues that might arise during an inter-radio access technology handover. At about the same time as a mobile device moves from a source network to a target network, the target network dynamically initiates a quality of service modification procedure. The quality of service modification procedure can help resolve the maximum bit rate mismatches and/or the other quality of service parameter mismatching issues. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294279 | METHOD FOR COMPLETING SMOOTH CUT-OVER, DEVICE AND EQUIPMENT FOR PERFORMING CUT-OVER OPERATIONS - The present invention provides a method for completing smooth cut-over and a device and equipment for performing cut-over operations. The method comprises: when the device for performing cut-over operations maintains a first connection with the first cut-over device via a first interface, establishing a second connection with a second cut-over device via a second interface, and transferring the services carried on the connection resources between the device for performing cut-over operations and the first cut-over device, that is, the first connection resources, to the connection resources between the device for performing cut-over operations and the second cut-over device, that is, the second connection resources. The present invention does not interrupt services during the cut-over procedure, without affecting the normal service usage by the user, thus improving the security and reliability of cut-over. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294280 | ADVANCED LMSD INTERSYSTEM HANDOFF - An Anchor Mobile Switching Center emulation (MSCe) and a Target MSCe are described herein that take part in an intersystem handoff of a Mobile Station (MS) which is in communication with a B-party. Upon the MS establishing a connection with the Target MSCe, the Anchor MSCe may perform SDP offer/answer exchange between the Target network and the B-Party for the purpose of codec renegotiation to correct a transcoding incompatibility or to enhance the voice bearer path characteristics or to minimize the number of transcodings in the bearer path, between the two parties. The Anchor MSCe and the Target MSCe both support Advanced Legacy Mobile Station Domain (ALMSD) implying that only the SIP transport is used for intersystem handoff communications. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294281 | DATA DELIVERY METHOD PERFORMED IN RECEIVING APPARATUS OF MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a data delivery method performed in a receiving apparatus of a mobile communication system. Protocol data units (PDUs) are received, and service data units (SDUs) are extracted from the received PDUs and delivered to an upper layer in real time. Alternatively, it is determined whether a PDU gap, in which PDUs are not received in sequence, has occurred on the basis of sequence numbers (SNs) of received PDUs, a reordering timer (t_Reordering) is started when a PDU gap has occurred, and at least one SDU is extracted from at least one PDU, which have been received already, and delivered to an upper layer of radio link control (RLC) when the reordering timer expires and no PDU corresponding to the PDU gap is received. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294282 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR HAND-OFF MAINTENANCE - A system and method for hand-off maintenance is disclosed. The present invention relates to communication networks and particularly, to network interfaces in communication networks. In existing hand-off mechanisms, when a restart occurs in a Media Gateway, the Media Gateway always tries to register back to the primary Media Gateway Controller, which is under maintenance. As the primary Media Gateway Controller cannot address the request, calls running on the Media Gateway will be affected leading to abrupt release of calls. The method provides a solution to the problem by rejecting service requests from the Media Gateway that are already handed off at the Media Gateway. Further, at Media Gateway level not to register requests to the primary Media Gateway Controller, when a primary Media Gateway Controller is under maintenance. When the primary Media Gateway Controller is under maintenance, requests are directed to the secondary Media Gateway Controller. The secondary Media Gateway Controller then serves the requests to the Media Gateway until the primary Media Gateway Controller is back to operation. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294283 | METHOD FOR DATA FORWARDING - The present invention provides a method for data forwarding. The method includes: transmitting, by a source system, Selected IP Traffic Offload (SIPTO)/Local Internet Protocol Access (LIPA) indication information to a destination system, the SIPTO/LIPA indication information indicating that the source system adopts an optimized user plane network structure; performing, by the destination system, an optimized data forwarding mechanism after receiving the SIPTO/LIPA indication information. According to the present invention, it can be ensured that a system sets up an optimized data forwarding mechanism during a handover process of a terminal. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294284 | METHOD FOR DROPPING PACKET DATA, RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A control method in a mobile communication system, that includes configuring a discard timer corresponding to a service data unit (SDU) for discarding the SDU according to a value of the timer; maintaining the value of the discard timer corresponding to the SDU when a handover is performed without restarting or resetting the value of the discard timer; and discarding the corresponding SDU when the maintained value of the discard timer reaches a given value. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294285 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING UNCONTROLLED HANDOVER - A device, system and method for performing an uncontrolled handover in a mobile station, a ranging request message including an identifier of a serving base station and a first identifier used in the serving base station is transmitted to a first target base station to perform network (re)entry to the first target base station, and a ranging response message including security information and a second identifier for identifying the mobile station is received from the first target base station. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294286 | APPARATUS, AND ASSOCIATED METHOD, FOR PERMITTING COMMUNICATION SYSTEM TRANSITION BASED UPON SIGNAL THRESHOLD DETERMINATION - A method and apparatus of optimizing transitioning between EVDO and CDMA 1X systems in a hybrid access terminal, the method having the steps of: preventing a reconnect data call from being sent from the hybrid access terminal. The preventing step including checking whether a transition between an EVDO and a CDMA 1X system is successful; and if not blocking the data call, and/or checking whether an EVDO received signal strength indication is greater than or equal to a receiver sensitivity on the hybrid access terminal; and if yes, allowing the hybrid access terminal to connect to the EVDO system, and/or delaying a connection timer for connecting to the EVDO system and/or applying fast dormancy to the hybrid access terminal in an EVDO state. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294287 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING HANDOVER OF USER EQUIPMENT IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Defined is a handover procedure of a User Equipment (UE) for which multiple UpLink (UL) carriers requiring different UL Timing Advances (TAs) are aggregated in a mobile communication system. The handover procedure includes admitting execution of handover to a target cell of the UE at the request of a source cell, setting radio resource information to be used by the UE in the target cell and transmitting the set radio resource information to the source cell, determining whether a random access procedure, which is executed, among the multiple UL carriers, with a reference UL carrier or with an UL carrier to which the same UL TA as that of the reference UL carrier is applied, has been completed, and determining that a handover procedure of the UE has been successfully completed if the random access procedure has been completed, and determining that the handover procedure of the UE has failed if the random access procedure fails. | 11-22-2012 |
20120300746 | PICO CELL WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK (WLAN) - A pico cell wireless LAN and pre-emptive roaming algorithm is provided to allow mobile devices in the WLAN to hand-off to another different access point quickly and efficiently. Once associated with an access point (AP), the mobile device receives information about neighboring APs that may be available for hand-off during roaming (or insufficient signal strength). Signal strength of the associated AP is continuously monitored and if signal strength from the associated AP falls below a threshold, the mobile device measures signal strength of the neighboring APs in the list, ranks them, and selects an AP for hand-off. AP load and other information may be used to rank the neighboring APs. The mobile device hands-off to (or associates with) one of the neighboring APs, if appropriate. Hand-offs are attempted in order or rank. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300747 | CACHING IN MOBILE NETWORKS - A method and apparatus for handing over a terminal connection. A handover request is sent from a source base station to a target base station. A first control message is also sent from the source base station to a control server, the first control message including a session identifier for identifying the session, and current parameters for the session. If the target base station is associated with a cache storage unit containing the content data, a second control message is sent from the control server to the target base station, the second control message including a content identifier, the session identifier and the current parameters. At the target base station, the content data packets are retrieved from the cache storage unit, and a header of each retrieved content data packet is populated with parameters calculated using the received current parameters and session identifier. The content data packets are then sent from the base station towards the terminal. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300748 | Method and Apparatus for Seamless Handover in a Wireless Communication Network - In a wireless communication network where base stations receive protocol data units (PDUs) from mobile stations for decompression and deciphering for ordered, sequential transfer as service data units (SDUs) to an associated core network, the teachings presented herein provide a method of supporting seamless handover of a mobile station from a source base station to a target base station. By way of example, the teachings herein apply to a network based on the E-UTRA specifications, as promulgated by the 3GPP. However, that example is non-limiting, as the teachings herein apply to any network that employs in-sequence data delivery and duplicate data detection at handover. Broadly, the source base station forwards out-of-sequence SDUs and corresponding sequence number information to the target base station in support of seamless handover, and the target base station uses that information to request retransmissions as needed for packet reordering. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300749 | MOBILE STATION APPARATUS, BASE STATION APPARATUS, RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CONTROL METHOD FOR MOBILE STATION, AND CONTROL METHOD FOR BASE STATION - A mobile station apparatus ( | 11-29-2012 |
20120300750 | RESIDENTIAL/ENTERPRISE NETWORK CONNECTION MANAGEMENT AND CSFB SCENARIOS - A method, system and device are provided for managing LIPA and/or SIPTO connection releases when UE moves out of residential/enterprise network coverage in case service continuity is not supported for the LIPA/SIPTO PDN connection(s). To address problems caused by not providing service continuity for LIPA/SIPTO PDN connections, the PDN connection/PDP context created in the HeNB/HNB by the MME/SGSN includes context information related to the UE indicating whether such connection is a LIPA PDN connection PDN connection or not. In addition, each UE may be configured to reconnect or not reconnect to the PDN corresponding to a certain APN or service, depending on how the PDN connection was disconnected by the network. | 11-29-2012 |
20120307791 | Methods and Devices for Controlling Handover - Methods and devices in a cellular radio system for handling repeated handovers of a user equipment between a pair of cells is provided. It is determined if the user equipment is in one of two states, moving state or stationary state. Based on the determination different actions can be taken. For example threshold optimizations for reducing repeated handover may only be applied to a user equipment determined to be in a stationary state or a user equipment determined to be in a stationary state to can be nailed to the best cell of said pair of cells by not allowing the user equipment to handover to the other cell of said pair of cells. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307792 | WI-FI VIRTUAL PORT UPLINK MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL - Uplink medium access control on per-wireless device level. An access point sends a beacon frame to a wireless device. The beacon frame includes a BSSID that is unique to the wireless device. The beacon frame also includes embedded uplink configurations specifying uplink medium access for the wireless device. In one embodiment, a controller recognizes a device or user associated with the device, and sends corresponding uplink configurations for embedding in a subsequent beacon frame. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307793 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER BETWEEN A LONG TERM EVOLUTION (LTE) NETWORK AND ANOTHER TYPE OF RADIO ACCESS NETWORK - A method for performing handover by wireless User Equipment (UE) is provided. The UE includes a Long Term Evolution-Mobile Extreme Convergence (LTE-MXC) application processor, a LTE processor and a Digital Signal Processor (DSP). The UE buffers a set of IP packets when a Radio Access Technology (RAT) indicator is less than a pre-defined threshold and sends the set of IP packets to the LTE processor and the DSP. The LTE processor transmits the set of IP packets to the LTE network and sends acknowledgement signals to the LTE-MXC application processor and the DSP. When the handover is complete, the LTE processor sends the transmission status of the set of IP packets to the DSP. The UE also includes multimode Radio Resource Control (RRC) and Non-Access Stratum (NAS) modules. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307794 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTER-DEVICE TRANSFER (HANDOFF) BETWEEN IMS AND GENERIC IP CLIENTS - A method of Inter-User Equipment (UE) Transfer (IUT) for use in a Home enhanced-Node B (H(e)NB), the method comprising receiving a transfer command from a first IMS capable WTRU via IMS signaling, translating the transfer command to a non-IMS based message, and transmitting the translated non-IMS based message to a Service Centralization and Continuity Application Server (SCC AS). | 12-06-2012 |
20120307795 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND GATEWAY DEVICE - A handover method according to the present invention includes a step of transmitting, by a radio base station HeNB# | 12-06-2012 |
20120307796 | Method, System and Device for Controlling Handover of User Terminal Device - Embodiments of the invention provide a method and system for controlling handover of a user terminal device. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307797 | GATEWAY SELECTION METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM DURING HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK HANDOVER - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a gateway selection method for heterogeneous networks, where the method includes: accessing, by a terminal, an access network | 12-06-2012 |
20120307798 | Session Management Method and System Based on M2M Application, and Apparatus - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a session management method and system based on an M2M application and an apparatus. The method includes: first acquiring gateway equipment information and group number information of a group user device; when acquiring that group information of the group user device changes, according to the gateway equipment information and the group number information of the group user device, instructing a gateway equipment to execute bearer change processing on the group device, and executing the bearer change processing on the group user device, so as to reduce signaling congestion on a network side and correspondingly reduce a network load. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307799 | METHOD AND MOBILE TERMINAL DEVICE FOR SUPPORTING MULTIPLE SIMULTANEOUS PDN CONNECTIONS TO THE SAME APN - A method for supporting selection of PDN connections for a mobile terminal, wherein the mobile terminal is connected to an access point, and wherein the mobile terminal is in active mode having at least one ongoing session to an APN via a PDN gateway—first PDN gateway—, includes the steps of monitoring whether a more suitable PDN gateway—second PDN gateway—than the first PDN gateway becomes available for the mobile terminal, and, if available, establishing any new sessions of the mobile terminal to the APN by establishing a new PDN connection to the second PDN gateway, while keeping already ongoing sessions associated with the existing PDN connection to the first PDN gateway. Furthermore, a mobile terminal with PDN connection selection support is disclosed. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307800 | Enhanced Single Voice Radio Call Continuity Using Packet Data Network Bi-Casting - A method can comprise providing single voice radio call continuity using packet data network bi-casting, wherein the call continuity is provided during a handover of a user equipment from a real-time transport protocol voice to a circuit switched voice call In such a method, the real-time transport protocol voice can be carried m a long term evolution system and the circuit switched voice call can be carried in a second or third generation system The method can be performed by a serving network of the user equipment. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307801 | CONTEXT HANDLING METHOD - The present invention relates to a method for context handling when a user equipment ( | 12-06-2012 |
20120307802 | INTERNETWORKING TECHNIQUES FOR TRANSFERRING PACKETS BETWEEN SOURCE AND TARGET SERVING GATEWAYS - Techniques for wireless communications include operating first and second access networks to provide wireless service to wireless devices. The first and second access networks are associated with respective first and second gateways. The first gateway is operated to (1) receive a request for transferring wireless service of a wireless device from the second access network to the first access network and (2) send a message that includes key information to the second gateway based on the request. The second gateway is operated to (1) send session context information to the first gateway in response to the message and (2) forward a data packet associated with the wireless device to the first gateway. The forwarded data packet includes a packet data network identifier (PDN-ID) to identify a packet data network (PDN) associated with a downlink data packet. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307803 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UPDATING A KEY IN AN ACTIVE STATE - A method for updating a key in an active state is disclosed according to the embodiments of the present invention. The method includes steps of: initiating a key update by a user equipment in the active state or a network side when a pre-defined condition is met; updating the key by the network side and the user equipment, and negotiating an activation time of the new keys. An apparatus for updating a key in an active state is also disclosed according to the present invention. With the present invention, the user equipment in an active state and the network side may actively initiate the key update procedure in different cases, thereby solving the problem concerning the key update for a session in an active state. | 12-06-2012 |
20120314688 | METHOD FOR ROUTING TRAFFIC WITHIN A NETWORK AND A NETWORK - A method for routing traffic within a network for allowing an efficient offloading of LIPA/SIPTO traffic from the core network even upon handoff of a UE to a new cell, wherein the network includes a core network and a LIPA/SIPTO (Local IP Access/Selected IP Traffic Offload) enabled network, wherein traffic between a UE (User Equipment) and the LIPA/SIPTO enabled network—a so called LIPA/SIPTO traffic—is broken out at a local breakout point and wherein a mobility support for ongoing broken out LIPA/SIPTO traffic will be provided by an MMF (Mobility Management Function) for realizing a continuation of the LIPA/SIPTO traffic upon a handoff of the UE from one cell to another cell. The continuation of the LIPA/SIPTO traffic will be performed by a forwarding mechanism providing direct LIPA/SIPTO traffic between local breakout points of different cells. A network for carrying out the method is also described. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314689 | Method, System and Evolved NodeB Apparatus for Implementing Inter-Evolved NodeB Handover - A method, a system and an evolved NodeB (eNB) apparatus for implementing inter-eNB switch are disclosed in the present invention. The method includes: when a user equipment switches from a source-side eNB to a target-side eNB, if the target-side eNB acquires via the Mobility Management Entity (MME) that the Serving Gateway (S-GW) has changed, the target-side eNB adds the new route relation of the S-GW and then updates the General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) Tunnelling Protocol User Plane (GTP-U) entity. The present invention can effectively solve the problem of the uplink data packet loss due to the time difference existing between the update to the Tunnel Endpoint Identifier (TEID) and the routing table by the eNB when inter-eNB switch is performed via X2 and the S-GW has changed, thus enhancing the user experience during the switch. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314690 | Method and Apparatus for Performing Handover Procedure in Wireless Communication System - A method and apparatus of performing a handover procedure in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes receiving a handover request message from a relay node (RN), transmitting an end marker to the RN, buffering downlink (DL) data packets, transmitting a handover request acknowledgement message to the RN if the handover request message is acknowledged, and forwarding the buffered DL data packets to a target BS. | 12-13-2012 |
20120320873 | Method and Device for Identifying Neighboring Pseudorandom Number Confusion - A method and apparatus for identifying a confusion of neighboring pseudo numbers (PN) are provided. The method includes: obtaining a first location information when a mobile station establishes a call with a reference base station where a reference sector is located, and a second location information after establishing a handover in a process of said call, with a neighboring base station where a valid non-reference sector is located; and when a deviation between said first location information and said second location information is larger than a threshold and said mobile station drops the call after establishing the handover, determining that the confusion of the neighboring PNs exists in said neighboring base station. The present invention is able to fast identify the confusion of the neighboring PNs in the existing CDMA network, and achieve the object of optimizing the network quality and improving the product competitiveness. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320874 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING NETWORK ENTRY IN A MILLIMETER-WAVE MOBILE BROADBAND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for a base station to support network entry of a mobile station in a communication system is provided. The method includes transmitting to the mobile station each of a plurality of transmitted network entry signals over a preferred downlink beam corresponding to the transmitted network entry signal. Each of a plurality of received network entry signals is received from the mobile station over a preferred uplink beam corresponding to the received network entry signal. Each of the transmitted network entry signals comprises the preferred uplink beam corresponding to a subsequently received network entry signal, and each of the received network entry signals comprises the preferred downlink beam corresponding to a subsequently transmitted network entry signal. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320875 | TRAIN CONTROL SYSTEM AND HANDOVER METHOD IN TRAIN CONTROL SYSTEM - A ground control apparatus is provided with: a train speed calculation unit that calculates train speed by using train present track position information notified from a train; a predicted passage time calculation unit that calculates a predicted passage time at a previously-stored H/O point based on the H/O point, the calculated train speed, and brake performance; a wireless CH reservation unit that performs processing of reserving a wireless CH of a H/O target wireless base station based on usage of a wireless channel allocated to the H/O target wireless base station and the calculated predicted passage time; and a wireless CH reservation result notification unit that notifies a reservation result of the wireless CH reservation unit to a H/O source wireless base station. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320876 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TERMINAL HANDOVER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and system for terminal switching in a wireless communication system are disclosed. A terminal accesses a packet data network through a packet data network gateway, when the terminal switches between gateways, the target gateway to which the terminal switches allocates a new Routing Identifier (RID) to the terminal, and stores a mapping relationship between the Access Identifier (AID) and the new RID of the terminal. The target gateway or the target mobility management entity (MME) of the terminal initiates a registration update request including the new RID of the terminal to the home Identity Location Register (ILR) of the terminal. After receiving the request, the home ILR of the terminal updates the stored AID-RID mapping information of the terminal according to the new RID of the terminal, and initiates a notification for updating the RID of the terminal to the opposite gateway and/or the opposite MME. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320877 | Method, System and Base Station Subsystem for Realizing Handover in Local Switch - The present invention provides a method for implementing a handover in a local switch, and the method comprises: when one party Mobile Station of a call implementing a local switch mode performs a Base Station Subsystem handover, the Base Station Subsystem handover transmits uplink speech data of the Mobile Station which does not need to perform the handover on a local switch link of the Base Station Subsystem and a link between the Base Station Subsystem and a Media Gateway simultaneously. A Base Station Subsystem implementing a handover in a local switch is also provided by the present invention. The present invention can efficiently avoid the speech loss of the Mobile Station performing the handover during the handover, and guarantees that the Mobile Station which needs to perform the handover can receive the speech data of the other party user no matter the Mobile Station is in the original BSS or the target BSS, thus maintaining the call between the two Mobile Stations efficiently. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320878 | USER DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD, AND RADIO NETWORK CONTROLLER - A user data transmission method for transmitting uplink user data via an E-DPDCH, including: determining, at a radio network controller, that the mobile station transmitting the E-DPDCH to only a first cell transmits the E-DPDCH to the first cell and a second cell; notifying, at the radio network controller, E-HICH decoding information for decoding a E-HICH for the uplink user data to be transmitted by the second cell, to the mobile station based on the determination; transmitting, at the mobile station, the E-DPDCH to the first cell and the second cell, after the E-HICH decoding information is received; and decoding, at the mobile station, the E-HICH for the uplink user data to be transmitted from the second cell based on the E-HICH decoding information, and performing a retransmission control of the uplink user data toward the second cell based on the decoded E-HICH for the uplink user data. | 12-20-2012 |
20120327898 | METHOD OF CONTROLLING THE CONNECTION OF STATION AND ACCESS POINTS - A method of controlling a connection of a station to different access points (AP) in roaming, in which the station is connected to a first AP through identification of basic service set context (BSS context), includes the following steps: a) Obtain received signal strength indications (RSSI) between the station and each access point. b) Copy the BSS context of the first AP to a second AP when the RSSI between the station and the first AP is less than RSSI between the station and the second AP; and c) disconnect the station from the first AP, and automatically connect the station to the second AP which has the same BSS context. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327899 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PROVIDING INTER-DOMAIN HANDOFF CONFIGURATION INFORMATION TO A DUAL MODE ACCESS TERMINAL - A dual mode Access Terminal (AT) is operable to communicate both in a Circuit Switched (CS) network domain and an Internet Protocol (IP) Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) network domain. Up-to-date handoff configuration information is transmitted from an IMS server to the AT during a registration of the dual mode AT with an IMS network or during establishment of a call session of AT. The handoff configuration information is used in a call handoff of an ongoing call of the AT between the CS network and the IMS network. In the examples, the handoff configuration information includes a handoff number for use in a handoff to the Circuit Switched (CS) network and a handoff Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) for use in a handoff to the IMS network. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327900 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING PREAMBLE INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for providing preamble information in a wireless communication system are provided. The method of a Base Station (BS) of a first system for providing neighbor BS information of a second system in a communication environment covering the first system and the second system together includes generating a message comprising information indicating a superframe boundary of a neighbor BS of the second system, and transmitting the message comprising the information indicating the superframe boundary to a Mobile Station (MS). | 12-27-2012 |
20120327901 | HANDOVER HANDLING - A method performed in a telecommunication system. At a source node, receiving, a sequence of PDCP SDUs for transmission to a device, appending a sequence number to each PDCP SDU, storing and ciphering the PDCP SDUs, passing the ciphered PDCP SDUs to an Outer ARQ entity for segmentation, generating Outer ARQ segments, generating and appending a respective Outer ARQ header to each Outer ARQ segment to generate a corresponding Outer ARQ PDU, sending the generated Outer ARQ PDUs to the device, and sending a request to a target node. At the target node, receiving the request and sending a response to the source node. At the source node, receiving the response, sending a command to the device, and forwarding stored PDCP SDUs with their appended sequence number to the target node. At a target node, receiving PDCP SDUs, from the source node and sending to a device, Outer ARQ PDUs. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327902 | METHOD FOR SELECTING AN A-INTERFACE RESOURCE IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A preferred A-interface resource on a first connection leg is determined by a mobile switching center server based on information on capabilities of a base station subsystem and on characteristics of second connection leg of a connection. A request message is transmitted to the base station subsystem, which requests a connection according to the preferred A-interface resource. The request message is processed by the base station subsystem and an A-interface resource is selected for the user plane connection. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327903 | BASE STATION AND HANDOVER PROCESSING METHOD FOR DIGITAL TRUNKING COMMUNICATION - The present invention discloses a base station and a handover processing method for digital trunking communication. The handover processing method comprises: a base station transmitting a System Parameter and Neighbor Channel Assignment Message (SNCAM) to a terminal at a normal period; the base station receiving a handover request from the terminal; the base station transmitting the SNCAM to the terminal at a preset period; the preset period is set to be shorter than the normal period and ensures that the power consumption of the base station is lower than a threshold which leads to power overload. The present invention has increased the possibility that the terminal receives the SNCAM, and can also avoid the power overload of the system, thus not only the user experience is improved, but also the life of the base station is prolonged. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327904 | CONTROL SIGNALING METHOD AND APPARATUS IN A COORDINATED MULTI-POINT SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a control signaling method and apparatus in a coordinated multi-point (CoMP) system. A base station generates a cell information block (CIB) containing associated cell information of each CoMP base station of the CoMP system, scrambles first control information for the transmission of the CIB using a CoMP-radio network temporary identifier (RNTI) given to the CoMP system, transmits the scrambled control information to terminals in a cell via a control channel, and transmits the CIB to terminals in the cell via a data channel. In addition, when handover to a target cell for a specific terminal from among said terminals is determined, the base station generates second control information for indicating the target cell, scrambles the second control information using a cell RNTI (C-RNTI) of the specific terminal, and transmits the scrambled control information to the specific terminal via the control channel, to thereby indicate cell reselection and/or handover to the target cell. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327905 | SOFT HANDOFF IN OFDMA SYSTEM - Soft handoff in an OFDMA system is disclosed. If the pilot signal strength for a base station exceeds the defined threshold, the base station is added to an active set list. Subcarriers in a plurality of orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols are divided and allocated into subchannels. The OFDM symbols are divided and multiplexed. A soft handoff zone with a first dimension of the subchannels and a second dimension of the divided and multiplexed OFDM symbols is defined. The soft handoff zone has subcarriers with a subchannel definition, for example, an identical permutation. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327906 | Terrestrial Based High Speed Data Communications Mesh Network - A network for providing high speed data communications may include multiple terrestrial transmission stations that are located within overlapping communications range and a mobile receiver station. The terrestrial transmission stations provide a continuous and uninterrupted high speed data communications link with the mobile receiver station employing a wireless radio access network protocol. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327907 | NETWORK HANDOVER METHOD, COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM, AND RELEVANT DEVICES - A network handover method, a communications system, and relevant devices are provided, so as to implement handover between a Wireless Fidelity (WiFi) network and a Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMAX) network. The method specifically includes the following steps. A user terminal determines a target network access point (AP) and acquires a tunnel destination address. A signaling transmission tunnel between the user terminal and the target network AP is established through a current network according to the tunnel destination address. The user terminal executes a network access operation with the target network AP through the signaling transmission tunnel. The communications system and the relevant devices are further provided. Thus, the handover between the WiFi network and the WiMAX network can be implemented. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327908 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR FACILITATING ROBUST FORWARD HANDOVER IN LONG TERM EVOLUTION (LTE) COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Method and apparatus for facilitating inter-cell connections, such as during a forward handover or radio link failure (RLF), are disclosed. A user terminal such as a UE may store identity information associated with a source cell, and use this information in accessing target or other cells subsequent to radio link failure so as to facilitate access to context information of the user terminal. A base station may be configured to improve handover performance by associating context information with a newly assigned terminal identity. Handover performance may be enhanced by facilitating connection processing in the event of inability to retrieve user terminal context from a source cell. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327909 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, CELL COVERAGE CONTROL METHOD - There is provided a mobile communication system, a base station, and a method of controlling cell coverage that is capable of operating a mobile communication system such that the cell coverage is maintained approximately and timely at a target level without requiring much labor. In this mobile communication system, a mobile station reports to the base station the position information of the mobile station and the value of reception power of reference signal from the base station. The base station obtains the measured cell coverage as a result of measurement of cell coverage based on the position information and the value of reception power from the mobile stations, and controls at least one of plural parameters including transmission power to the mobile stations, tilt angle of antenna, etc., so as to minimize deviation of the measured cell coverage from the target cell coverage. | 12-27-2012 |
20130003695 | Handover in Relation to Cell Identity Ambiguity - The invention relates to handover of a mobile station ( | 01-03-2013 |
20130003696 | DEVICE HANDING OVER COMMUNICATION SESSION FROM WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TO POWERLINE COMMUNICATION - A mobile communication device includes a wired interface operable to support Power Line Communications (PLC), a wireless interface, a processing module, and memory. The device establishes a wireless communication link to service a communication session, detects availability of PLC communication path, and at least partially hands over the communication session from the wireless interface to the wired interface. A PLC interface (and power converter) may couple to the wired interface to support the PLC communication path. In at least partially handing over the communication session from the wireless interface to the wired interface, the device terminates the wireless communication and services the communication session via the wired communication interface and the PLC communication path. Alternately the device services a first portion of the communication session via the wireless communication interface and services a second portion of the communication session via the wired communication interface and the PLC communication path. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003697 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING LOCAL IP ACCESS AND SELECTED IP TRAFFIC OFFLOAD - A method and apparatus for home Node-B (HNB) mobility with a local IP access (LIPA) packet data network (PDN) connection are described. A target home node-B (HNB) may receive a handover request message from a source HNB to handover a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU). A path switch request may be transmitted to a local gateway (LGW) to change a downlink data path towards the target HNB in response to the handover request message. The LGW may act as a mobility management and local mobility anchor for the handover; and informing an HNB gateway (GW) about the handover so that the downlink data path for core network (CN) traffic is modified towards the target HNB. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003698 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING SERVICE CONTINUITY - Methods and apparatus are disclosed that determine whether service continuity is allowed in a target cell for a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) connected to a source local gateway (LGW) via a local internet protocol access (LIPA) Packet Data Network (PDN) connection. The existence of a connection between the source LGW and a target LGW is also determined. Whether the WTRU user settings allow service continuity is determined. On a condition that service continuity is not allowed for the target LGW or for the WTRU, the LIPA PDN connection is deactivated. On a condition that service continuity is allowed for the target network and for the WTRU, the LIPA PDN connection is maintained. Methods for handling handover, paging and emergency calls are also described herein. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003699 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTED INTERNET PROTOCOL (IP) TRAFFIC OFFLOAD (SIPTO) AND LOCAL IP ACCESS (LIPA) MOBILITY - Methods and apparatus are described for supporting wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) mobility between Home (evolved) Node Bs (H(e)NBs) that are configured to communicate with a Local Gateway (L-GW). The H(e)NBs and/or L-GW may belong to one or more Local H(e)NB Networks (LHNs). A WTRU may receive services including Selected Internet Protocol (IP) Traffic Offload (SIPTO) or Local IP Access (LIPA) services from the L-GW via one or more H(e)NBs. The WTRU may continue to receive SIPTO or LIPA services after a handover to another H(e)NB that may be in communication with the same L-GW and may belong to the same LHN. The WTRU may receive information related to the LHN or the L-GW to allow continuation of SIPTO or LIPA services as the WTRU moves among H(e)NBs and/or out of the LHN. The WTRU may receive and/or maintain one or more LHN Lists. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003700 | Method and Device for Triggering Radio Resource Control Connection Re-Establishment - The disclosure discloses a method for triggering Radio Resource Control (RRC) connection re-establishment, comprising: setting a random access policy for a UE, and further comprising: when the random access procedure initiated by the UE according to the set random access policy is failed, the RRC connection re-establishment procedure is triggered. The disclosure further discloses a device for triggering RRC connection re-establishment, comprising: a setting unit, an initiating unit, a determining unit and a triggering unit, wherein the setting unit is configured to setting a random access policy for a UE; the initiating unit is configured to initiating random access procedure according to the set random access policy; the determining unit is configured to determining whether the random access procedure initiated by the initiating unit is successful, and triggering the triggering unit if not; and the triggering unit is configured to triggering RRC connection re-establishment procedure. The technical solution of the disclosure is easy, and has the advantages of high inheritance of the related art, small delay, fast recovery of radio link and the like. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003701 | METHOD FOR HANDOVER BETWEEN DIFFERENT RADIO ACCESS SCHEMES AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In a wireless communication system including a plurality of base stations each supporting at least one of two or more radio access schemes and at least one mobile station capable of performing communication by using the two or more radio access schemes, before the mobile station moves from a source base station to a target base station, the target base station notifies the mobile station, via the source base station, of a transparent container containing uplink radio access information that specifies a radio access scheme enabling at least an initial connection to be made. Thus, the mobile station identifies the radio access scheme supported by the target base station from the transparent container before moving from the source base station to the target base station. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003702 | Data Burst Communication Techniques For Mobile Communication Devices Operating In Packet Data Sessions - A mobile device experiences a condition where a time overlap exists between a packet data burst being communicated over a packet data channel of a serving cell and broadcast data burst being communicated over a broadcast control channel of a neighbor cell. The mobile device sets its RF receiver to receive the packet data burst instead of the broadcast data burst based on identifying that the neighbor cell is not a candidate for an upcoming handoff. On the other hand, the mobile device sets its RF receiver to receive the broadcast data burst instead of the packet data burst based on identifying that the neighbor cell is a candidate for an upcoming handoff. The mobile device may set the RF receiver to receive the packet data burst instead of the broadcast data burst based on further identifying that a call drop is imminent. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003703 | WLAN-To-WWAN Handover Methods And Apparatus Using A WLAN Support Node Having A WWAN Interface - A mobile device establishes and maintains a voice call via a wireless local area network (WLAN). During voice call handover, the mobile device receives, from the cellular network, voice data of the voice call which is routed via a network support node. The network support node is connected to the WLAN and has a wireless link with a base station of the cellular network, for sending the voice data to the mobile device. The mobile device also sends, to the cellular network, voice data of the voice call which is communicated to the network support node over the wireless link with the base station. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003704 | APPARATUS, AND AN ASSOCIATED METHOD, FOR PRESERVING COMMUNICATION SERVICE QUALITY LEVELS DURING HAND-OFF OF COMMUNICATIONS IN A RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile station is configured to transmit a sequence of data packets over a wireless network. The station includes a data sequence expander. The expander receives an indication of a pending hand-off for the mobile station from a first network access point to a second network access point and estimates an amount of time prior to occurrence of the hand-off. The expander inserts a number of delay packets into the sequence of data packets in response to receiving the indication of the pending hand-off. The number of delay packets is determined based on the estimated amount of time prior to the occurrence of the hand-off such that the insertion of the delay packets into the sequence of data packets will cause a delay that corresponds to the amount of time prior to occurrence of the hand-off. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003705 | Method, Device, System and Software product for providing System Information to Enable Packet Switched Handover - A method, mobile device, network device, system, and software product are presented for providing an indication whether a source radio network controller requests to receive system information from a handover target, and for receiving the system information in a target to source transparent container, if the indication requests to receive the system information. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003706 | VOICE SYNCHRONIZATION DURING CALL HANDOFF - A method, mobile electronic device and system for synchronizing hand-off of a voice media session between a WAN/cellular network and a WLAN network. When a hand-off occurs, the connection with both networks is temporarily maintained and the voice data on both connections compared to determine differences in the delays experienced over both connections. The timing of one or both voice streams is adjusted to synchronize the voice streams, and then the handoff is completed. | 01-03-2013 |
20130010751 | Method and Device For Handling Handover of a Communications Service - The embodiments herein relate to a method in a network node for enabling handover of a communications service from a circuit switched, referred to as CS, network to a packet switched, referred to as PS, network, wherein a user equipment is located in the CS network and having the communications service in the CS network. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010752 | Method and Device For Handling Handover of a Communications Service - The embodiments herein relate to method in a mobile management entity, referred to as MME, for enabling handover of a communication service between a circuit switched (CS) network and a packet switched (PS) network. The user equipment is located in the CS network and having a communications service in the CS network. Handling is improved by providing communication between the MME and a mobile switching centre server. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010753 | System and Method for Indicating Local IP Access Support Via NAS Signaling - A method of providing Local IP Access (LIPA) indication is proposed. In one novel aspect, an enhanced cell selection method is proposed using LIPA capability information. Based on LIPA capability related information, a UE is able to prioritize LIPA-capable cells and establish a corresponding packet data network (PDN) connection accordingly. In one embodiment, LIPA information is informed to the UE via Non Access Stratum (NAS) signaling. The UE stores LIPA capability information when receiving a NAS message from a mobility management entity (MME). Later on, when the UE performs cell selection or reselection in idle mode, the UE can use the stored LIPA capability information to prioritize LIPA-capable cells. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010754 | METHOD FOR AVOIDING HANDOVER FAILURE - Methods for avoiding handover failure are provided. The method includes determining, by a source Base Station (BS), to perform a handover of a User Equipment (UE); determining, by the source BS, whether a target BS connects with a user plane node serving the UE at the source BS; and releasing resources, when the target BS does not connect with the user plane node serving the UE at the source BS. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010755 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING ASSIGNMENT DURING HANDOFF IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method and apparatus for managing assignment during a handoff in a wireless communication system is described. The method includes determining a desired forward link serving sector and receiving a valid assignment from the desired forward link serving sector. The method includes initiating a message indicating a change from a current forward link serving sector to the desired forward link serving sector and clearing forward link access terminal assignments associated with the current forward link serving sector. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010756 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING MOBILITY OF USER EQUIPMENT - A method and an apparatus for supporting mobility of a User Equipment (UE) are provided. When a UE moves into a Local Internet Protocol Access (LIPA)-enabled network or exits an LIPA-enabled network, the method is able to select an optimal user-plane node for the UE, provide optimal network routings and optimize network resource usage. For service continuity of the UE, when the UE performs remote access to an LIPA-enabled network from another network or when the UE moves into an LIPA-enabled network, the network re-selects an optimal user-plane node for the UE while keeping the remote service of the UE uninterrupted. When a UE moves from an LIPA-enabled network to another network, the network selects an optimal user-plane node for the UE while keeping the LIPA service uninterrupted. The method optimizes network resource usage and at the same time maintains the service quality perceived by the user. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010757 | Method and System for Reduced System-Time Overhead Parameter Length Representation for Inter-Radio Access Technology Communication - A wireless access terminal, system and method for the wireless access terminal to synchronize to system times in a wireless communication system. A first timing hierarchy in a first wireless communication network is used to operate the wireless access terminal The lint wireless communication network has a first radio access technology. Operating with the first timing hierarchy includes determining a frame cycle for the first wireless communication network. The frame cycle has a frame cycle boundary. Broadcast parameters for a second wireless communication network having a second radio access technology different from the first radio access technology are received. The broadcast parameters include the system time of the second wireless communication network. The system time of second wireless communication network is aligned, from the perspective of the wireless access terminal, with the frame cycle boundary. The wireless access terminal engages in a communication session using the second wireless communication network. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010758 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING THAT A MAXIMUM NUMBER OF IP SESSIONS HAVE BEEN ESTABLISHED - Systems and methods for determining that a maximum number of IP sessions have been established are provided. There are instances when the mobile device transmits a request to the wireless network. According to an aspect, in the event that the maximum number of IP sessions is already established for the mobile device, the wireless network transmits a response indicating that the request cannot be fulfilled. The mobile device determines based on the response that the maximum number of IP sessions is already established, which allows the mobile device to determine the maximum number of IP sessions that can be supported so that IP sessions can be managed accordingly. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010759 | Method for Performing Packet Switched Handover in a Mobile Communication System - The invention relates to a method and system for performing packet switched handover in a mobile communication network. The system comprises a mobile node, a first and a second packet switching node. The method enables the parallel sending of logical link layer frames from the first and the second packet switching node. This is achieved so that the mobile node does not reject incoming frames received from two logical link layer entities having different states. The benefits of the invention are related to improved quality of service and the avoiding of gaps in received data during handover. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010760 | HANDOVER SCHEMES FOR WIRELESS SYSTEMS - One method of wireless communication involves acknowledging that an anchor base station received a handover indication signal. Another method involves: receiving, from base stations of an active set, offset signals identifying a respective differences in time between a reference time and respective times when the base station received a ranging signal from a mobile station; and transmitting, to the mobile station, a ranging control signal in response to the respective offset signals. Another method involves transmitting, to a mobile station in response to an active set signal, a system configuration information signal including system configuration information of a base station in an active set. Another method involves determining an uplink control channel power parameter in response to channel condition signals received from base stations in an active set. Another method involves transmitting a control signal to base stations in an active set on respective control channels. Apparatuses are also disclosed. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010761 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - One method of wireless communication involves acknowledging that an anchor base station received a handover indication signal. Another method involves: receiving, from base stations of an active set, offset signals identifying a respective differences in time between a reference time and respective times when the base station received a ranging signal from a mobile station; and transmitting, to the mobile station, a ranging control signal in response to the respective offset signals. Another method involves transmitting, to a mobile station in response to an active set signal, a system configuration information signal including system configuration information of a base station in an active set. Another method involves determining an uplink control channel power parameter in response to channel condition signals received from base stations in an active set. Another method involves transmitting a control signal to base stations in an active set on respective control channels. Apparatuses are also disclosed. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010762 | ZONE SWITCHING METHOD IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM HAVING REGARD TO SECURITY ASSOCIATION AND DEVICE FOR SAME - The present invention relates to a wireless access system, and more particularly, to a method for supporting security during a handover performance through a zone switch and to a device performing same. According to one embodiment of the present invention, switching a zone by a terminal in a broadband wireless access system comprises the following steps: creating at least one service flow in a first zone that supports the legacy mode of a base station; receiving at the base station a first message, which indicates a zone switch to a second zone that supports an advanced mode; and performing the zone switch, wherein performing the zone switch may further comprise a step for receiving from the second zone a second message, which includes security association information that indicates the security association applied to at least one service flow in the second zone. | 01-10-2013 |
20130010763 | Method And System For Processing Measurement Task In Carrier Aggregation System - The present disclosure discloses a method for processing a measurement task in a carrier aggregation system, which includes: deleting all measurement tasks related to a source Secondary Cell (Scell); or deleting a measurement task related to an Scell in a deleted source Scell; or doing not delete a measurement task related to the source Scell when a source Scell is reassigned to another frequency having a measurement object, and modifying a measurement object corresponding to the measurement task related to the source Scell to a measurement object of the reassigned frequency. When a source Pcell and a target Pcell are on different frequencies and the measurement object corresponding to the measurement task is a frequency on which there is the source Pcell when the frequency on which there is the target Pcell is the measurement object, the measurement object is modified to a measurement object of the frequency on which there is the target Pcell; and when the measurement object corresponding to the measurement task is the frequency on which there is the target Pcell, the measurement object is modified to a measurement object of the frequency on which there is the source Primary Cell (Pcell). The present disclosure further discloses a system for processing a measurement task in a carrier aggregation system. The present disclosure effectively decreases a configuration signaling of a measurement task and increases a utilization rate of the air interface resource. | 01-10-2013 |
20130016695 | Method and Apparatus for Seamless Mobility Techniques in Content-Centric Network - A networking system for a content-centric-network (CCN)/named-data networking (NDN) comprising a first point of attachment (PoA) configured to communicate with a mobile node (MN) and maintain a forwarding state for the MN to support seamless mobility for the MN, and a second PoA configured to communicate with the MN and obtain the forwarding state for the MN from the first PoA after a handoff of the MN from the first PoA to the second PoA, wherein the forwarding state is used to exchange a plurality of interests and a plurality of data responses between the MN and the CCN/NDN. | 01-17-2013 |
20130016696 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MULTI-RAT ACCESS MODE OPERATION - A method and apparatus for multiple radio access technology (multi-RAT) access mode operation for a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) are disclosed. A WTRU and a network may enable a multi-RAT access mode of operation based on at least one of WTRU subscription, a service agreement of the WTRU, a roaming status of the WTRU, a selected access point name (APN), an Internet protocol (IP) flow class, a subscriber profile identity for the WTRU, requested quality of service, or a proximity indication indicating proximity to a cell supporting multi-RAT access mode. The WTRU may send a capability indication of support of multi-RAT access to a network, wherein the multi-RAT access mode is enabled based on the capability indication. A partial handover of bearers may be performed. In performing the handover, the target cell is determined based on a priority rule. | 01-17-2013 |
20130016697 | Method and Apparatus for Improving a Mobile Station Cell Change Operation in the General Packet Radio System (GPRS) - A mobile station executed method, wherein upon changing from a current cell to a new cell in a wireless packet data network the mobile station enters the new cell; generates a cell change packet data unit (PDU) message for informing the network of the location of the mobile station in the new cell; buffers the cell change PDU message into a PDU transmit queue before any buffered PDUs that were present before the mobile station entered the new cell; and transmits the buffered cell change PDU before any of the buffered PDUs that were present before the mobile station entered the new cell. | 01-17-2013 |
20130016698 | Handover from Circuit Switched to Packet SwitchedAANM Keller; RalfAACI WurselenAACO DEAAGP Keller; Ralf Wurselen DEAANM Hallenstal; MagnusAACI TabyAACO SEAAGP Hallenstal; Magnus Taby SEAANM Olsson; MagnusAACI StockholmAACO SEAAGP Olsson; Magnus Stockholm SEAANM Lindholm; FredrikAACI StockholmAACO SEAAGP Lindholm; Fredrik Stockholm SE - The invention relates to a method for handing over a call of a mobile entity that is circuit switched attached via a NMobile Switching Center MSC ( | 01-17-2013 |
20130016699 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, NETWORK DEVICE, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHODAANM Nakamura; YuichiroAACI Yokosuka-shiAACO JPAAGP Nakamura; Yuichiro Yokosuka-shi JPAANM Aoyagi; KenichiroAACI Yokosuka-shiAACO JPAAGP Aoyagi; Kenichiro Yokosuka-shi JPAANM Matsutani; HideyukiAACI Yokohama-shiAACO JPAAGP Matsutani; Hideyuki Yokohama-shi JP - In a handover procedure though which a bearer for the first communication call established between the first communication system and a mobile communication terminal is switched to a bearer for the first communication call established between the second communication system and the mobile communication terminal, the second communication system determines whether to establish the bearer for the first communication call between the second communication system and the mobile communication terminal based on whether the first communication call is established between the first communication system and the mobile communication terminal or the data amount of the first communication call established between the first communication system and the mobile communication terminal. | 01-17-2013 |
20130016700 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR DETACHING USER EQUIPMENT - A method and device for detaching a user equipment (UE) are disclosed in the present invention. The UE is registered with a mobility management entity (MME) in a packet switched (PS) network and a mobile switching center (MSC) in a circuit switched (CS) network. When the UE needs to detach from the PS network, the MSC receives a Detach Request with a Detach Type indicating the detaching from the PS network only; after receiving the Detach Request, the MSC deletes the context of the PS core network entity and clears the connection between the MSC and the MME. An MME for performing UE detachment is also disclosed in the present invention. The present invention helps reduce the time delay during the subsequent handover and quickly provide users with communications services, so as to improve user's experience and meet the carriers' requirements. | 01-17-2013 |
20130016701 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RANDOM ACCESS IN AN ORTHOGONAL MULTIPLE-ACCESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Techniques for accessing a wireless communication system are described. A user equipment (UE) sends a random access preamble for system access. The random access preamble may include a random identifier (ID), a channel quality indicator (CQI), etc. The UE may randomly select the random ID or may be assigned this random ID. The UE receives a random access response from a base station. The random access response may include control channel resources (e.g., CQI and PC resources), uplink resources, and/or control information (e.g., timing advance and PC correction) for the UE. The random access response may be sent in two parts using two messages. A first message may be sent on a control channel and may include identification information and possibly other information. A second message may be sent on a shared data channel and may include remaining information for the random access response. | 01-17-2013 |
20130016702 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR REPORTING MDT LOG RESULTAANM Yan; NanAACI BeijingAACO CNAAGP Yan; Nan Beijing CNAANM Li; HaitaoAACI BeijingAACO CNAAGP Li; Haitao Beijing CN - A method, a device and a system for reporting a Minimization Drive Test (MDT) log result are disclosed by the present invention for ensuring that the MDT log result can be reported in time. The method includes: after a User Equipment (UE) is re-accessed to a target cell from a original cell, if the UE still stores locally an unreported MDT log result, a log available indication can be sent to the target cell by the UE itself or by an Evolved Node Base station (eNB) managing the original cell, and a managing device of the target cell is notified to request the unreported MDT log result from UE. Therefore, the MDT log result is continued reporting in the target cell, and the target cell obtains the log available indication of the UE in time, initiates an acquiring request for the MDT log result to the UE timely and obtains the reported MDT log result in time, thus the collection for the environment information of a network is completed and the environment information is obtained exactly. | 01-17-2013 |
20130022022 | METHOD FOR FAST LINK LAYER HANDOFF IN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS - When handing off a multi-mode patient monitoring device (PMD) ( | 01-24-2013 |
20130022023 | OPTIMIZED CARRIER AGGREGATION FOR HANDOVER - The invention relates to a method of performing a handover of a user equipment ( | 01-24-2013 |
20130028234 | Method And Apparatus For Cell Update While In An Enhanced Cell_Fach State - A method and apparatus for cell update while in a Cell_FACH state are disclosed. After selecting a target cell, system information is read from the target cell including high speed downlink shared channel (HS-DSCH) common system information. A radio network temporary identity (RNTI) received in a source cell is cleared and a variable HS_DSCH_RECEPTION is set to TRUE. An HS-DSCH medium access control (MAC-hs) entity is configured based on the HS-DSCH common system information. High speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) transmission is then received in the target cell. A CELL UPDATE message is sent to notify of a cell change. The HSDPA transmission may be received using a common H-RNTI broadcast in the system information, a reserved H-RNTI as requested in a CELL UPDATE message, or a temporary identity which is a subset of a U-RNTI. The MAC-hs entity may be reset. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028235 | MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK, INFRASTRUCTURE EQUIPMENT AND METHOD - A mobile communications network, which may include base stations, is configured to communicate data packets with communications terminals. A core network, which may include a mobility manager, communicates data packets with base stations. A first base station may be configured to receive a short message data packet from a communications terminal, identify the communications terminal, to determine, from the short message data packet an indication of the first base station to which the communications terminal is attached, and to store an indication of the first base station through which the short message data packet was sent in association with an identifier of the communications terminal. The mobile communications network may be configured to identify that the communications terminal has changed attachment to a second base station, and to send the down link data packet to the second base station for communication to the communications terminal. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028236 | HANDOVER DEVICE OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING MULTI-COMPONENT CARRIER AND METHOD THEREOF - A source base station (SeNB) composes a handover request message including information of which at least one or more CC formed for a user terminal (UE) and information about the performance of the UE associated with at least one or more CC and transmits the handover message to a target base station (TeNB) and the TeNB transmits to the SeNB a handover request response message including at least one CC allocation information as information for the CC which the UE uses thereby or CC allocation information and a CC activation indicator associated with the CC allocation information, and an activation composition indicator having a bit length with respect to the allocated CCs. Packet loss due to the handover is minimized by enabling the UE to rapidly use the CC(s) to be used in the TeNB as the moved cell and transmission efficiency of a system can be enhanced thereby. | 01-31-2013 |
20130028237 | HANDOVER METHOD, HANDOVER SYSTEM, AND APPARATUS FOR A UE ATTACHING TO A LOCAL IP NETWORK - With the deployment of home NodeB or home eNodeB, a user can access both operator's core network and Local IP Access (LIPA), e.g. to home based network or general Internet, on the same device at the same time. However, existing mechanisms does not allow an efficient way of LIPA mobility support, especially when there are multiple home NodeBs or home eNodeBs serving the same LIPA domain. The present invention provides a solution that can achieve seamless mobility among different home NodeBs or home eNodeBs without interruption to LIPA service. The LIPA traffic for the terminal can be contained within the local domain during the handover process. It also provides support of the relocation of the gateway that provides the LIPA access to the mobile terminal. | 01-31-2013 |
20130034080 | METHOD FOR FAST RETURN TO SOURCE RAT (RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY) AFTER REDIRECTION TO TARGET RAT - A method of wireless communication includes receiving redirection information, from a source radio access technology (RAT), to set up a connection in a target RAT. The redirection information includes a fast return indication. A UE returns to the source RAT in accordance with the fast return indication after call release in the target RAT. | 02-07-2013 |
20130034081 | HANDOVER IN LONG TERM EVOLUTION NETWORK - Described embodiments provide for handover in a long term evolution (LTE) communication network. A LTE macrocell base station may receive a measurement report from user equipment while providing a communication service to the user equipment located within a service area of the LTE macrocell base station, and determine whether or not the neighbor cell is a LTE macrocell or a LTE femtocell based on the measurement report. The LTE macrocell base station may initiate hand-over of the user equipment to a neighbor WCDMA macrocell base station when the neighbor cell is determined as the LTE femtocell. | 02-07-2013 |
20130034082 | OPPORTUNISTIC DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATION - Embodiments of computer-implemented methods, systems, computing devices, and computer-readable media are described herein for opportunistically transitioning service flows of mobile devices between being direct and indirect. In various embodiments, a proximity between first and second mobile devices that are in wireless communication with each other may be monitored. In various embodiments, a selective transition of a service flow between the first and second mobile devices from being indirect through the radio network access node using a first radio access technology (“RAT”) to being direct using a second RAT may be facilitated, e.g., responsive to a determination that a first criterion has been met. In various embodiments, a selective transition of the service flow from being direct using the second RAT to being indirect using the first RAT may be facilitated, e.g., responsive to a determination that a second criterion has been met. | 02-07-2013 |
20130034083 | Mobile Handoff Through Multi-Network Simulcasting - A method and apparatus supporting handoff using simulcasting of multimedia information via a gateway are disclosed. A gateway supporting both a personal area network and a broadband network may receive multimedia information transmitted to an access device by a wide area network. The gateway may send the received multimedia information to the associated access device, and may communicate with the wide area network. | 02-07-2013 |
20130034084 | Method and System for Sector Switching During Packet Transmission - A method and apparatus for handing off packet-transmission between sectors of a wireless communication system is disclosed herein. During transmission of a packet from an access network to an access terminal, the access terminal determines that the packet should theoretically be transmitted to the access terminal in fewer timeslots in another sector than the number of allowed timeslots remaining for the packet transmission in a current sector. In response, the access terminal abandons packet transmission in the current sector and hands off to the other sector, in an effort to increase throughput and save air interface resources. | 02-07-2013 |
20130039336 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO CONTROL HSDPA ACTIVATION/DE-ACTIVATION - A method and a user equipment (“UE”), for High Speed Downlink Packet Access (“HSDPA”) de-activation, the method determining whether a number of serving HSDPA cell changes of the UE exceeds a threshold within a predetermined time period; and; sending a transition indication from the UE to a network node to deactivate HSDPA if the threshold is exceeded for within the predetermined time period. Also, a method and a network node, for High Speed Downlink Packet Access de-activation, the method determining whether a number of serving HSDPA cell changes of a user equipment communicating with the network node exceeds a threshold within a predetermined time period; and; deactivating HSDPA for the UE if the threshold is exceeded within the predetermined time period. | 02-14-2013 |
20130039337 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SEAMLESS HANDOFF OF A SERVICE BETWEEN DIFFERENT TYPES OF NETWORKS - Apparatus and method for seamless handoff of a service between different types of networks. The system may include a first user equipment, a second user equipment, a first network, a second network, and an application server. The first user equipment and the second user equipment may be configured to communicate with each other initially through a first data path of the service. The first network may be configured to determine whether the first user equipment should change its access network from the first network. The second network may be configured to allocate a new bearer and a second network IP address to the first user equipment when the first network requests the first user equipment to change its access network from the first network to the second network. The application server may be configured to modify the first data path based on the second network IP address and the new bearer, to form a second data path of the service through which the first user equipment and the second user equipment communicate after handoff of the service from the first network to the second network. The first data path of the service may pass through the first network and the second data path of the service may be formed to pass through the second network. | 02-14-2013 |
20130039338 | Releasing Time Domain Measurement Restrictions - In some implementations, a method includes identifying handover from a source eNodeB (eNB) to a target eNB or reestablishment with a subsequent eNB after losing connection with an initial eNB. Time-domain measurement resource restrictions for the UE are identified. The time-domain measurement resource restriction for the UE is released in connection with identifying the handover or the reestablishment. | 02-14-2013 |
20130039339 | Other Network Component Receiving RRC Configuration Information from eNB - In order to re-establish a suspended RRC connection, the mobile device ( | 02-14-2013 |
20130039340 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR REDIRECTING DATA TRAFFIC - A method, apparatus and system for resource allocation in redirection of data traffic are provided. The method includes receiving a message including a subscription identification, position information associated with the subscription and an action proposal associated with the subscription ( | 02-14-2013 |
20130039341 | DEVICE FOR CONTROLLING UPLINK TRANSMISSION POWER AND A METHOD FOR THE SAME - Disclosed are a device for controlling uplink transmission power and a method for the same. In a terminal device for controlling uplink transmission power according to the present invention, a receiving antenna receives a first message containing a power correction value from a base station. A processor determines the transmission power value which will be used in transmitting a second message, based on the power correction value. A sending antenna transmits the second message to the base station, using the determined transmission power value, and, at this time, the power correction value is a value for correcting the transmission-power value is a value for correcting the transmission-power value which was used during initial ranging by the terminal or handover ranging of the terminal. | 02-14-2013 |
20130039342 | User Equipment, Network Node, Second Network Node and Methods Therein - Embodiments herein relate to a method in a user equipment ( | 02-14-2013 |
20130039343 | MOBILE WIRELESS SYSTEM, ACCESS POINT DEVICE, AND HANDOVER PROCESSING METHOD - A mobile wireless system includes a first gateway (L-PGW), a second gateway (PGW), a first access point (HeNB) capable of establishing a communication path simultaneously with the first and second gateways, and a second access point (eNB) capable of establishing a communication path only with the PGW. When a mobile terminal connected to the HeNB and communicating with a communication destination node using a first path through the L-PGW switches a connection destination to the eNB, the HeNB establishes a second path through the HeNB and the PGW, while maintaining the first path. The HeNB transmits data, which has been transmitted to the HeNB along the first path, to the eNB along the second path, until the UE is connected to the eNB, and a third path to the communication destination node through the PGW is established. Accordingly, an interruption time of data reception involved in handover is shortened. | 02-14-2013 |
20130039344 | METHOD FOR EFFICIENTLY UPDATING SECONDARY CARRIER INFORMATION IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method for updating secondary carrier information for preemptively allocating secondary carriers during handover and an apparatus for carrying out the method. A method in which a terminal performs handover in a broadband access system that supports multiple carriers according to one embodiment of the present invention comprises: a step in which a target base station receives, from a serving base station, a first message including carrier allocation information on at least one secondary carrier preemptively allocated to the terminal; a step of performing network reentry with the target base station; and judging whether the multi-carrier configuration of the serving base station and the multi-carrier configuration of the target base station are the same, and, if the configurations are different from each other, transmitting, to the target base station, a second message for requesting multi-carrier capability negotiation. | 02-14-2013 |
20130044730 | Optimized Home Evolved NodeB (eNB) Handover in an LTE Network - A method to provide an optimized intra-HeNB GW handover operation that reduces signaling to and from an LTE MME (Mobility Management Entity) function of the 3GPP E-UTRAN Evolved Packet core (EPC). In operation, an HeNB Gateway (GW) intercepts handover requests from a source HeNB to a target HeNB and processes these requests locally, with minimal interaction from the MME. Where possible, messaging to and from the MME is minimized and/or reduced, irrespective of the 3GPP requirement that the GW relay all handover-related messages to the MME. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044731 | Proactive Feedback Transmissions During Handover Procedures - Methods, systems, and devices are described for utilizing proactive feedback information during a handover of a mobile device from a source base station to a target base station. The mobile device may transmit handover messages to the target base station that includes feedback status information, which may include automatic repeat request (ARQ) information elements in some embodiments. The target base station may request that the source base station transmit packets to the target base station based on the received feedback status information. The source base station may transmit handover messages to the mobile device that include feedback status information in some embodiments. Some embodiments may provide for fast resumption of data transmission by utilizing the proactively sent feedback status information from a mobile device to a base station during handover. Some embodiments may reduce the bandwidth for transferring unnecessary data between base stations. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044732 | METHOD, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR CONTROLLING RESOURCE RELEASE - Method, apparatus and communication system for resource release controlling are provided in the disclosure. When a user equipment (UE) with an idle mode signaling reduction (ISR) being activated moves from a first source network to a second target network, if a first SGSN in the first source network knows that a second SGSN in the second target network does not support interaction with a serving gateway (S-GW) and does not support ISR, the first SGSN controls the deletion of bearer resources on a MME in the first network by sending a resource deletion message. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044733 | AUTHENTICATION SYSTEM AND AUTHENTICATION METHOD IN WIRELESS LAN ENVIRONMENT - The authentication system in the wireless LAN environment includes a first wireless LAN access point for providing a wireless LAN service to a terminal device accessing the first wireless LAN access point; the terminal device for transmitting an authentication request to a second wireless LAN access point when the terminal device moves to access the second wireless LAN access point while receiving the wireless LAN service through an access to the first wireless LAN access point; and the second wireless LAN access point for identifying the first wireless LAN access point based on identification information contained in the authentication request transmitted from the terminal device which has moved to access the second wireless LAN access point, acquiring authentication information on the terminal device from the identified first wireless LAN access point, and performing an authentication for the terminal device based on the acquired authentication information. | 02-21-2013 |
20130051361 | WIRELESS BASE STATION, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless base station includes a first receiving section which receives data from a plurality of terminals positioned within a wireless area in which data communication with a processing section on a network is performed by the wireless base station via a core network, a multiplexing controller which shares, with the processing section, first identification information allocated to a group and second identification information allocated to each of a plurality of member terminals constituting the group, and controls to determine whether a terminal serving as a source of the received data is a member terminal belonging to the group, based on the second identification information, and to multiplex, of the received data from the plurality of terminals, data from the terminal determined to be the member terminal belonging to the group, based on the first identification information, and a first sending section sends the multiplexed data to the core network. | 02-28-2013 |
20130051362 | SELECTING A TARGET CELL FOR CS FALLBACK - Described embodiments provide a method of effectively selecting a target cell to hand over user equipment from a LTE network to a non-LTE network when the user equipment requests a CS service. A LTE cell may determine a CS fallback hysteresis parameter in advance. The LTE cell may receive signal quality measurements of at least two candidate non-LTE cells from the user equipment. The LTE cell may select one target cell among the at least two candidate non-LTE cells based on the CS fallback hysteresis parameter and the received signal quality measurements of the at least two candidate non-LTE cells. | 02-28-2013 |
20130051367 | Support for Continuity of Tunnel Communications for Mobile Nodes Having Multiple Care of Addressing - The present invention solves communication disruption problems during the hand-off transition period by using a pre-handoff registration of a new foreign agent on behalf of the mobile node The pre-handoff registration message should: (1) identify itself as a pre-hand off registration message, (2) indicate direction of traffic for the pre-handoff registration time period, and (3) specify a lifetime or time period when the pre-handoff registration request will continue to be considered valid The local mobility anchor will accept traffic using the pre-handoff registration care-of address depending on the directionality indicator, but the communication traffic to or from the mobile node will not be disrupted during the transition period. Because the care-of address for the mobile node on the new foreign network can be used to direct communication traffic to or from the mobile node during this transition time period, no disruption of service will be encountered. | 02-28-2013 |
20130051368 | Method for Handover from Circuit Switched Domain to Packet Switched Domain, Device, and Communications System - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method for a handover from a circuit switched domain to a packet switched domain, a device, and a communications system. One of CS to PS handover methods includes receiving, by a target mobility management entity, a CS to PS handover request message that corresponds to a first UE and is from an MSC; triggering setup of a dedicated VoIP bearer that corresponds to the first UE and is between an SGW and an MGW; sending a handover request message to a target access network to instruct the target access network to prepare a handover resource for the first UE; and sending a CS to PS handover response message corresponding to the first UE to the MSC. | 02-28-2013 |
20130058308 | 3G LTE Intra-Eutran Handover Control Using Empty GRE Packets - Empty GRE packets are used to ensure in-order delivery of data packets for a session to a UE during intra-EUTRAN handover involving SGW relocation. In particular, a PGW sends an empty GRE packet per PDN session of the UE to a source SGW upon handover execution to indicate the end of pre-handover data packets delivered to the source SGW. Upon receipt of the empty GRE packet, the source SGW generates an end marker packet, and sends it to the source eNodeB. The source eNodeB forwards buffered, pre-handover data packets not delivered to the UE, followed by the end marker packet, to the target eNodeB, either directly (X2 interface) or indirectly (GTP-U tunnel between source and target SGWs). The target eNodeB then sends the pre-handover data packets, and post-handover data packets delivered to it by the PGW, to the UE in order, in reliance on the end marker packet. | 03-07-2013 |
20130058309 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING TIMING ADVANCE (TA) GROUP CHANGE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus are disclosed to perform timing advance (TA) group change in a wireless communication system. The method includes configuring a Scell (Secondary Serving Cell) to a User Equipment (UE), wherein the Scell belongs to a first TA group. The method further includes sending a TA group change command from an eNB (evolved Node B) to the UE to change the Scell front the first TA group to a second TA group, wherein the eNB provides information together with the TA group change command so that the UE could derive an initial TA for the second TA group based on the information. | 03-07-2013 |
20130058310 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SETTING CHANNEL IN WIRELESS NETWORK - A method and apparatus are configured for setting up a channel in a wireless network. The method includes receiving a signal comprising channel information that at least one neighbor AP is using, from the at least one neighbor AP and, setting up the channel of the AP based on the channel information that the at least one neighbor AP is using. | 03-07-2013 |
20130058311 | M2M DEVICE WHICH PERFORMS COMMUNICATION DURING NETWORK ENTRY AND HANDOVER, AND CORRESPONDING METHOD FOR PERFORMING COMMUNICATION - Disclosed is a machine to machine (M2M) device which performs communication during both network entry and handover, and a corresponding method for performing communication. The M2M device which performs communication during handover according to one embodiment of the present invention comprises a receiver and a transmitter, wherein the receiver receives, from a serving base station, a first message containing information on M2M features or M2M requirements supported by at least one neighbor base station or neighbor cell, and the transmitter transmits, to the serving base station, a second message containing information for requesting the support of M2M features or M2M requirements necessary for the M2M device based on the first message. | 03-07-2013 |
20130058312 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR PROCESSING LOCAL ADDRESS IN SHUNT CONNECTION - The disclosure discloses a method, an apparatus and a system for processing local address in an offload connection. The method includes the following steps: a local gateway or a mobility management entity sends a local gateway identifier to a wireless side network element (S702); the wireless side network element obtains the local address of the local gateway by using the local gateway identifier (S704). The disclosure avoids potential safety hazard. | 03-07-2013 |
20130058313 | Inter-Base-Station Interface Enhancement for Multi-Operator Core Networks - In one aspect, the teachings herein provide an enhanced inter-base-station interface and associated processing in which a base station receives a message from a neighboring base station that zero served PLMNs are available in a neighboring cell. In response to receiving that message, the base station removes the neighboring cell from its neighbor list, or otherwise marks the neighboring cell as unavailable, but advantageously does not discard any network performance data accumulated or otherwise generated for that neighboring cell. Correspondingly, should the base station receive a subsequent message indicating that one or more served PLMNs have become available in the neighboring cell, it restores the neighboring cell to its neighbor list and reinstates links or associations, as needed, to the retained network performance data. | 03-07-2013 |
20130064219 | Methods and Network Nodes for Signalling of Complementary Assistance Data - A positioning node ( | 03-14-2013 |
20130064220 | HANDOFF OF A MOBILE DEVICE MOVING AT A HIGH RELATIVE VELOCITY TO BASE STATIONS FOR A WIRELESS NETWORK - Examples are disclosed for handoff of a mobile device moving at a high relative velocity to a plurality of base stations for a wireless network. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064221 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING AN ACCESS NETWORK RE-SELECTION - The present disclosure relates to a system for managing an access network re-selection. The system comprises providing means, establishing means and executing means. Said providing means may be configured to provide a first indication indicating a target access network to be re-selected in case of a handover event and a second indication for establishing a certain context on the target access network. Further, said establishing means may be configured to establish the certain context on the target access network dependent on the provided second indication, said established context including a first part of the access network re-selection. Said executing means may be configured to execute a second part of the access network re-selection due to the provided first indication and the received handover trigger triggering said handover event. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064222 | NETWORK SELECTION - A wireless user device, in radio communication with a first access point of one or more networks with which it could communicate via at least one of a plurality of access points, sends a network selection request to the first access point. If the network wishes to initiate a response from another access point in the same or another network, the first access point forwards the network selection request to one or more neighboring access points, in the same or another network. If any of the neighboring access points is able to communicate with the user device, that neighboring access point sends a response directly to the wireless user device and the wireless user device chooses the most suitable network from the responses sent. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064223 | SUPPORT FOR MULTI-HOMING PROTOCOLS - The present invention solves the problems with a new proxy binding update request and proxy binding acknowledgement messages having new indicators and identification information. Namely, the home agent/local mobility anchor will exchange proxy binding update messages and proxy binding acknowledge messages that include information such as mobile node identification (MN-ID), home network prefix (HNP), but can also include selective information fields such as, access type, handover indicator (HO), and interface identification (interface ID). By including new access type, indicator, and identification information, the local mobility anchor can respond to a binding update request message with a better understanding of the new connectivity request from the mobile node. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064224 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING A HANDOVER IN AN EVOLVED UNIVERSAL TERRESTRIAL RADIO ACCESS NETWORK - A method and an apparatus for performing a handover in an evolved universal terrestrial radio access network (E-UTRAN) are disclosed. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) sends a measurement report to a source evolved Node B (eNB), and receives a handover command from the source eNB. The WTRU initiates reception and processing of a primary broadcast channel (P-BCH) at the target cell after receiving the handover command. The WTRU then sends a random access preamble to the target eNB, receives a random access response from the target eNB, and sends a handover complete message to the target eNB. The reception and processing of the P-BCH may be initiated immediately after receiving the handover command or after sending the handover complete message. The WTRU may apply default configuration or source cell configuration in the target cell until a target cell SFN and/or P-BCH information are acquired. | 03-14-2013 |
20130064225 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SECURITY ACTIVATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - Systems and methodologies are provided that facilitate security activation for wireless communications. In an aspect, a method for wireless communication is provided which includes determining a first security key for communicating with a source access point and receiving, from the source access point, a handover command that includes an indication of whether to apply a second security key upon handover. The method also includes handing over communication from the source access point to a target access point, where the second security key is applied for communicating with the target access point upon the handover when the handover command indicates to apply the second security key. | 03-14-2013 |
20130070726 | Method And Arrangement In A Wireless Communication System - The present invention relates to a method and a device for time synchronization of an RBS which has lost its GPS signal. The method in the time synchronization device comprises retrieving from the first radio base station a first timing advance value ( | 03-21-2013 |
20130070727 | MECHANISM TO IMPROVE HANDOVER SPEED IN SMALL CELLS - In a method for performing handover of a user equipment, a small cell base station formats a handover request message for the user equipment. The handover request message includes permission information of the user equipment, including LIPA permission information. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070728 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR IMPROVING A CALL FALLBACK USER EXPERIENCE - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to techniques for improving a circuit-switched fallback (CSFB) user experience. In aspects, methods and systems for autonomously returning a user equipment (UE) from a 2G (2 | 03-21-2013 |
20130070729 | HANDOFF OF A MOBILE STATION BETWEEN PACKET-SWITCHED AND CIRCUIT-SWITCHED WIRELESS DOMAINS - A first mobility management entity (MME) is configured to cooperate with a first access network controller to provide a circuit switched service to a mobile station while the mobile station is attached to a packet switched wireless access network in a first coverage area. A second MME is configured to cooperate with the first access network controller to provide a circuit switched service to the mobile station when the mobile station has moved from the first coverage area to the second coverage area. A home subscriber system is operated to provide, to the second MME, information identifying the first access network controller as serving the mobile station to enable the second MME to initiate handoff of the mobile station from the packet switched wireless access network to the circuit switched wireless access network. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070730 | HANDOFF OF A MOBILE STATION BETWEEN PACKET-SWITCHED AND CIRCUIT-SWITCHED WIRELESS DOMAINS - A first mobility management entity (MME) is configured to cooperate with a first access network controller to provide a circuit switched service to a mobile station while the mobile station is attached to a packet switched wireless access network in a first coverage area. A second MME is configured to cooperate with the first access network controller to provide a circuit switched service to the mobile station when the mobile station has moved from the first coverage area to the second coverage area. A home subscriber system is configured to provide, to the second MME, information identifying the first access network controller as serving the mobile station to enable the second MME to initiate handoff of the mobile station from the packet switched wireless access network to the circuit switched wireless access network. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070731 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER IN SUCH A SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method and apparatus for performing handover in a wireless communication system, and the handover method of the present invention includes checking, when a Path Switch Request message associated with a terminal is received from a base station, whether a list of terminal security information values which has been saved exists; generating, when the list exists, a Path Switch Request acknowledge message including an unused terminal security information value selected form the list; and transmitting the Path Switch Request acknowledge message to the base station. Through this procedure, it is possible to reduce the terminal handover signal load generated by the base station. | 03-21-2013 |
20130077599 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR CONTROLLING CELL SELECTION IN A HETEROGENEOUS CELLULAR NETWORK BASED ON PRIMARY DIRECTION OF TRAFFIC FLOW - Systems and methods are disclosed for controlling cell selection between a high power base station and a neighboring low power base station in a cellular network. In one embodiment, a primary direction of traffic flow for a user equipment located within a transition zone between a high power base station cell of the high power base station and a low power base station cell of the low power base station is determined to be either an uplink direction or a downlink direction. Cell selection for the user equipment is then controlled based on the primary direction of traffic flow for the user equipment such that selection of the high power base station cell is favored if the primary direction of traffic flow is the downlink direction and selection of the low power base station cell is favored if the primary direction of traffic flow is the uplink direction. | 03-28-2013 |
20130077600 | Managed Handover Process - A method for providing information to a first terminal system and/or a second terminal system which connected to each other through a network and are subject to a potential or actual handover, provides convenience information about the execution of the potential or actual handover to at least one of the first and the second terminal systems, prior to or with the start of the handover, and provides in addition to at least one of the first and the second terminal systems a commercial communication relating to a commercial measure, whereby the commercial communication is provided in correlation with the provision of the convenience information. | 03-28-2013 |
20130083771 | REDUCING NETWORK-INITIATED QOS INTERRUPTION TIME WHEN RADIO AND CORE NETWORKS ARE OUT OF SYNCHRONIZATION DUE TO DIFFERENT UNDERLYING TECHNOLOGIES - A method enables a user equipment (UE) intervention to reduce a network-initiated Quality of Service (QoS) interruption time or a disruption of the network-initiated QoS, while avoiding application intervention. The method includes communicating with a source radio access network (RAN) in accordance with a network-initiated quality of service (QoS) profile. The method also includes transferring to a target RAN. The method further includes triggering, by a user equipment (UE), a QoS setup to reestablish the QoS profile. | 04-04-2013 |
20130083772 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication terminal includes a wireless communication circuit that wireless connects to a first or a second network; a processor that controls switching of a network to which the wireless communication circuit connects; and a timer that starts counting based on a wireless communication state and finishes counting a first time period when a given time period has elapsed, and counts a second time period that is longer than the first time period. The processor maintains the first network to which the wireless communication circuit connects and attempts re-connection to the first network until the timer finishes counting the first time period, switches a destination of the wireless communication circuit to the second network if there is a connectable second network when the timer finishes counting the first time period, and if not, attempts re-connection to the first network until the timer finishes counting the second time period. | 04-04-2013 |
20130083773 | METHODS, APPARATUS AND SYSTEMS FOR ENABLING MANAGED REMOTE ACCESS - Methods, apparatus, and systems are disclosed for handover of a Wireless Transmitter/Receiver Unit (WTRU) moving between a local network and another network. The WTRU established a local IP access (LIPA) session in the local network via a first Access Point (AP). The method includes receiving, by a second AP in the other network, a request to connect to the other network; and transitioning the LIPA session in the local IP network to a managed remote access (MRA) session in the other network. The transitioning includes establishing a path between the first AP and the second AP via a gateway, and informing the gateway of the transition to the MRA session. | 04-04-2013 |
20130083774 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SHORT HANDOVER LATENCY IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING BEAM FORMING - Beam selection is provided. A method for handover in a mobile station includes sending a scan request message for scanning a downlink (DL) beam with respect to a serving base station (BS) and a neighboring BS, to the serving BS, and receiving a scan response message; determining the DL beam for the MS by performing scanning with the serving BS and the neighboring BS based on the scan response message; sending a scan report message comprising a result of the scanning to the serving BS; when receiving an air-HO request message from the serving BS, generating an air-HO response message comprising information of a neighboring BS to which the MS hands over based on the air-HO request message; performing beam selection with the neighboring BS of the handover based on the air-HO request message; and performing the handover. | 04-04-2013 |
20130083775 | METHOD FOR PROCESSING DATA ASSOCIATED WITH LOCATION AREA UPDATE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The technical features of this document provide a method and wireless apparatus for performing UE's location area update in a communication system comprising two different radio access network (e.g., E-UTRAN and GERAN/UTRAN). In the communication system, various entities such as MME, VLR, RNC and VLR are included. This document provides a condition when a location area update (LAU) procedure is initiated. In particular, the LAU is performed when the UE which has first performed a combined TAU to the MATE and VLR moves from an E-UTRAN cell to a GERAN/UTRAN cell both belonging to a same location area (LA). | 04-04-2013 |
20130083776 | Methods and Devices for Configuring Uplink Transmission Diversity - Methods and devices are described whereby the UE and the Node-B are configured to align the UL CLTD status of the UE and the NodeB during serving cell change involving a new Node-B. | 04-04-2013 |
20130083777 | Methods and Apparatuses for Supporting Handover of a PS Voice Call to a CS Voice Call by Using SRVCC Function - A method for a Mobile Control Node, MCN, supporting handover of a packet switched, PS, voice call of a given user entity anchored in a IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) to a circuit switched, CS, voice call, by using a Single Radio Voice Call Continuity, SRVCC, function, whereby, —after handover from PS to CS ( | 04-04-2013 |
20130089069 | SMALL CELLS IMPLEMENTING MULTIPLE AIR INTERFACES - A communication networks including a plurality of small cell providing air interface infrastructure functionality is provided. Aspects of the present disclosure relate to the management of inter-small cell communication in accordance multiple air interfaces supported within individual small cells. Additionally, aspects of the present disclosure relate to the management of intra-small cell communication in accordance with communication networks implementing multiple small cells. In other aspects, small cells coordinate handovers through the use of a controller, or by leveraging wireless connections created between the small cells. In further aspects, the small cells enable the utilization of multiple air interface standards within a small cell. | 04-11-2013 |
20130089070 | SMALL CELLS IMPLEMENTING MULTIPLE AIR INTERFACES - A communication networks including a plurality of small cell providing air interface infrastructure functionality is provided. Aspects of the present disclosure relate to the management of inter-small cell communication in accordance multiple air interfaces supported within individual small cells. Additionally, aspects of the present disclosure relate to the management of intra-small cell communication in accordance with communication networks implementing multiple small cells. In other aspects, small cells coordinate handovers through the use of a controller, or by leveraging wireless connections created between the small cells. In further aspects, the small cells enable the utilization of multiple air interface standards within a small cell. | 04-11-2013 |
20130089071 | SMALL CELLS IMPLEMENTING MULTIPLE AIR INTERFACES - A communication networks including a plurality of small cell providing air interface infrastructure functionality is provided. Aspects of the present disclosure relate to the management of inter-small cell communication in accordance multiple air interfaces supported within individual small cells. Additionally, aspects of the present disclosure relate to the management of intra-small cell communication in accordance with communication networks implementing multiple small cells. In other aspects, small cells coordinate handovers through the use of a controller, or by leveraging wireless connections created between the small cells. In further aspects, the small cells enable the utilization of multiple air interface standards within a small cell. | 04-11-2013 |
20130089072 | SMALL CELLS IMPLEMENTING MULTIPLE AIR INTERFACES - A communication networks including a plurality of small cell providing air interface infrastructure functionality is provided. Aspects of the present disclosure relate to the management of inter-small cell communication in accordance multiple air interfaces supported within individual small cells. Additionally, aspects of the present disclosure relate to the management of intra-small cell communication in accordance with communication networks implementing multiple small cells. In other aspects, small cells coordinate handovers through the use of a controller, or by leveraging wireless connections created between the small cells. In further aspects, the small cells enable the utilization of multiple air interface standards within a small cell. | 04-11-2013 |
20130089073 | MOBILE TERMINAL AND HANDOFF METHOD THEREFOR - A mobile terminal and handoff method are provided herein. The handoff method for a mobile terminal includes: obtaining a Basic Service Set (BSS) IDentifier (ID) of an Access Point (AP) during a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) mode in which communication is performed through a Wi-Fi network; determining whether the obtained BSS ID is assigned to an edge AP near to a mobile communication network; and performing a handoff to the mobile communication network, when the obtained BSS ID is assigned to the edge AP. | 04-11-2013 |
20130089074 | MOBILE NODE, HANDOVER ADDRESS ACQUISITION METHOD AND SYSTEM THEREOF, AND DHCP SERVER - The disclosure discloses a mobile node, a handover address acquisition method and system thereof, and a DHCP server. the present invention relates to the field of mobile communication technology and addresses a problem that a correspondent node (which can communicate with a mobile node normally before the mobile node roams) cannot communicated with the mobile node during link handover of the mobile node. | 04-11-2013 |
20130089075 | METHOD FOR TRANSCEIVING A SIGNAL TO/FROM A MOBILE FEMTOCELL IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND APPARATUS FOR SAME - The present application relates to a method in which a terminal processes a signal in a wireless communication system in which communication between the terminal and a mobile femtocell is being performed via a first communication link. More particularly, the method comprises the following steps: disconnecting the first communication link and establishing a second communication link to a neighbor cell in the event the terminal and the mobile femtocell enter the coverage area of the neighbor cell; delivering information, relating to the first communication link, to the mobile femtocell during communication with the neighbor cell, performed via the second communication link; and reestablishing the first communication link to the mobile femtocell on the basis of the information relating to the first communication link in the event the mobile femtocell and the terminal leave the coverage area of the neighbor cell. | 04-11-2013 |
20130094470 | VDL2 Power Control - Power control of a digital datalink system within an aeronautical telecommunication network is described herein. According to embodiments, the system is configured to calculate the transmission power of an air-based communication station, based on the transmission power used by a ground-based communication station, wherein the transmission power of the air-based communication station is sot to a decibel level higher than or equal to the transmission power of the ground-based communication station. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094471 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MINIMIZING LOSS OF IP CONTEXT DURING IRAT HANDOVER - A method for maintaining IP context during an inter RAT handover of a UE between an eHRPD network and an LTE network may include delaying a transfer of an Internet Protocol context for at least one active packet data network until an IP address for an attach (PDN) Packet Data Network has been assigned and in the case where the Internet Protocol address for the Attach Packet Data Network is not assigned, initiating a detach operation from the LTE network without the user equipment losing the Internet Protocol context of the at least one active Packet Data Network. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094472 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR REDUCING VOICE/DATA INTERRUPTION DURING A MOBILITY PROCEDURE - Method and apparatus are provided that may help improve user experience during a media session when a mobility procedure of a user equipment (UE) involved in the session causes disruption in reception of packets. According to certain aspects, upon detecting an event indicating a mobility procedure is likely to occur, the UE may increase size of a buffer used to store packets during the session and/or reduce the rate at which packets are played out from the buffer to reduce service (e.g., voice/data) interruption. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094473 | SIP - ENABLED FRAMEWORK FOR MULTI-DOMAIN ROAMING CONTROL PLANE IN A WIMAX ACCESS NETWORK - Middleware is provided as a control plane for WiMAX control messaging. Each ASN in a WiMAX system is associated with a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) server. A plurality of Functional Entities (FEs) are distributed across the ASNs, wherein each FE (or a group of FEs) associated with a SIP agent. Each FE is operable to control a function associated with a subscriber station (SS). The function controlled by a first FE is transferred to a second FE by employing the SIP agents to establish a SIP session between the first and second FEs. WiMAX control messages are then exchanged over the established session to transfer the SS function from the first FE to the second FE. The first and second FEs may be in the same ASN, or the first and second FEs may be in different ASNs. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094474 | METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING A LINK BETWEEN TWO COMMUNICATION FACILITIES - The invention relates to a method for establishing a link through which at least one data stream is to be transmitted. A first communication facility and a second communication facility form a first and second end of the link, respectively. A first base station is connected to the first communication facility, and a second base station is connected to the second communication facility, the first base station having preselected the second base station from among a plurality of base stations. The method includes the following steps, implemented by the first communication facility: extracting an identifier of the first base station and an identifier of the second base station, said identifiers being included in a message transmitted by the first base station; and establishing the link between the first communication facility and the second communication facility from the extracted identifier of the first base station and the extracted identifier of the second base station. | 04-18-2013 |
20130100928 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PRIORITY-BASED HANDOFF - A system and method are provided for wireless communication to operate with multiple network connections sequentially based on priorities. The system includes a first antenna configured to transmit and receive signals in WLAN and to be a modal antenna having multiple first modes corresponding to multiple first radiation patterns, respectively, a second antenna configured to transmit and receive signals in WWAN, the second antenna having at least one second mode; and a processor coupled to the first antenna and the second antenna. The second antenna may also be a modal antenna having multiple second modes. | 04-25-2013 |
20130100929 | Handover Method, Communication Device and Communication System - The present invention provides a handover method. An access node obtains mobility management entity pool MME pool information which is sent by a donor station of the access node and is used for identifying a mobility management entity MME to which a user equipment UE is attached. The access node initiates handover for the UE according to the MME pool information used for identifying the MME to which the UE is attached. The present invention further provides a communication device and a communication system. | 04-25-2013 |
20130100930 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING NETWORK-BASED FLOW MOBILITY - The present invention relates to a method and apparatus for supporting location registration and mobility for each service flow in relation to a Mobile Node (MN) having a plurality of wired/wireless network interfaces in a wired/wireless integrated network environment. A method includes receiving a location registration message from a specific Handover Control Agent (HCA) connected to an MN, determining a movement of a flow, configured in another HCA to which the MN is connected, based on predetermined static flow binding information or a network status, sending a location registration Ack. message, comprising information on a HCA in which the flow is configured and to which a Corresponding Node (CN) is connected, to the specific HCA, and sending a location notification message, comprising information on the specific HCA to which the flow will be moved and to which the CN is connected, to the HCA. | 04-25-2013 |
20130100931 | CARRIER-AGGREGATION-BASED HANDOVER METHOD - Provided are a method for performing handover in a cellular mobile communication system that supports a carrier aggregation, and a user equipment and a node base (NodeB) using the method. A connection between the user equipment and the NodeB may be maintained and information may be exchanged using a plurality of serving carriers. Before performing the handover, the user equipment may perform measurement with respect to a neighboring NodeB supporting the carrier aggregation, and may provide parameter information to the NodeB in order to support a carrier aggregation function required for the handover. In a handover seamless environment, the continuity of a service may be provided and the performance of the service may be enhanced. | 04-25-2013 |
20130100932 | Method, Apparatus, and System for Selecting Public Land Mobile Network - The embodiments of the present invention relate to a method, an apparatus, and a system for selecting a public land mobile network. In an embodiment method an eNodeB acquires PLMN information about a CSFB. The eNodeB then determines a target cell of a packet switching handover according to the PLMN information about the CSFB. | 04-25-2013 |
20130107858 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND RADIO ACCESS NETWORK APPARATUS | 05-02-2013 |
20130107859 | AVOIDING VOICE OVER INTERNET PROTOCOL (VoIP) PACKET LOSS DUE TO INTER-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY (RAT) HANDOVER | 05-02-2013 |
20130107860 | REDUCING SERVICE INTERRUPTION OF VOICE OVER INTERNET PROTOCOL (VoIP) CALLS DUE TO INTER-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY (RAT) HANDOVER | 05-02-2013 |
20130107861 | Systems and Methods for Control Channel Transmission and Reception | 05-02-2013 |
20130107862 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDOVER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK WITH CARRIER AGGREGATION | 05-02-2013 |
20130107863 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO HANDLE BEARERS DURING CIRCUIT SWITCHED FALLBACK OPERATION | 05-02-2013 |
20130107864 | METHOD OF PROVIDING SERVICE TO USER EQUIPMENT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS THEREOF | 05-02-2013 |
20130107865 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF SUPPORTING PACKET-SWITCHED HANDOVER | 05-02-2013 |
20130114566 | ASSISTANCE INFORMATION FOR FLEXIBLE BANDWIDTH CARRIER MOBILITY METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND DEVICES - Methods, systems, and devices for mobility management for wireless communications systems that utilize a flexible bandwidth carrier are provided. Some embodiments include determining and transmitting assistance information to one or more user equipment (UEs) to facilitate mobility management with respect to the flexible bandwidth carrier. Some embodiments include signaling flexible bandwidth carrier information to UEs including, but not limited to: UE-centric approaches, network-centric approaches, network-centric approaches with PLMN, SIB creation approaches, and/or application layer approaches. A flexible bandwidth carrier may involve a wireless communications system that may utilize portions of spectrum that may not fit a normal bandwidth. A flexible bandwidth carrier may be generated with respect to a normal bandwidth carrier through dilating, or scaling down, the time or the chip rate of the flexible bandwidth carrier with respect to the normal bandwidth carrier. Some embodiments may expand a bandwidth for a flexible bandwidth carrier. | 05-09-2013 |
20130121308 | COMMUNICATION CONFIGURATION - A base station method of communications configuration, a user equipment method of communications configuration, a base station, user equipment and computer program products are disclosed. The base station method of configuring communication between a target serving cell associated with a target base station and user equipment having preconfigured radio link configuration information specifying a preconfigured communications arrangement in which a predetermined set of radio carriers are to be utilised for communication with the target base station in accordance with a predetermined communication scheme on a serving cell change, comprises the steps of: determining whether the target base station associated with the target serving cell is able to support the preconfigured communications arrangement; and if not, providing a control message from the target base station to the user equipment on the serving cell change, the control message encoding an indication to cause the user equipment to establish an alternative communications arrangement. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121309 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMPROVING LOW-COST MTC (MACHINE-TYPE COMMUNICATION) DEVICES IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus are disclosed for improving low-cost MTC (Machine-Type Communication) devices in a wireless communication system. The method includes broadcasting, in a system information, a first information used for cell re-selection. The method further includes providing a second information, for a neighboring cell or a frequency, that is used for cell re-selection. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121310 | Method, Apparatus and System for Establishing S1 Signaling Connection in an Evolved Network - A method, apparatus and system for establishing S | 05-16-2013 |
20130121311 | Method and Apparatus for Automatic Switching Between Networks, Wireless Access Device, and Intermediate Device - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method and an apparatus for automatic switching between networks, a wireless access device, and an intermediate device. The method includes: receiving, by the wireless access device, after a connection between the wireless access device and the intermediate device is established, an instruction message sent by the intermediate device, where the instruction message instructs the wireless access device to switch from a currently connected wireless network to a wired network; connecting, by the wireless access device, according to the instruction message, the wired network through the intermediate device, and breaking the connection with the wireless network; and switching, by the wireless access device, from the wired network to the wireless network when a connection between the wireless access device and the wired network is broken. The present invention is applicable to the automatic switching between the wireless network and the wired network. | 05-16-2013 |
20130128862 | MOBILITY MANAGEMENT ENTITY (MME) SELECTION WITHIN A BORDER REGION - A system that includes an eNodeB device located in a border region between a first traffic area and a second traffic area, where the first traffic area includes a first pool of mobile management entities (MMEs), where the second traffic area includes a second, different pool of MMEs, and where the eNodeB is associated with the first pool of MMEs and the second pool of MMEs. | 05-23-2013 |
20130128863 | Deferred Measurement Control Reading of System Information Block (SIB) Messages - A method of wireless communication defers measurement control reading of a SIB. The method includes determining whether a user equipment (UE) has been redirected to a first radio access technology (RAT) from a second RAT. The method also includes selectively reading a system information block (SIB) based on whether the UE was redirected to the first RAT from a second RAT. | 05-23-2013 |
20130128864 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDOVER BETWEEN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS - Provided are a handover method between heterogeneous networks and an apparatus thereof. The handover method between heterogeneous networks includes receiving a handover request message indicating a handover request from an evolved Node B (eNB) to the heterogeneous network, transmitting a first indirect data forwarding tunnel request requesting generation of an indirect data forwarding tunnel between the heterogeneous networks to an enhanced Packet Data Gateway (ePDG) when the handover request message is received, receiving ePDG address information of a tunneling target ePDG from the ePDG, transmitting a second indirect data forwarding tunnel request including the ePDG address information to a serving gateway, receiving S-GW address information from the serving gateway, and transmitting a handover command including the S-GW address information to the eNB. The method can prevent data from being lost during handover procedure between heterogeneous networks. | 05-23-2013 |
20130128865 | Method, Device and System for Processing Reverse Single Radio Voice Call Continuity - The present invention provides a method, device, and system for processing reverse single radio voice call continuity. The method includes, before handing over a voice service from a CS domain network to a PS domain network, preconfiguring, in the PS domain network by a UE, information about resources needed for the voice service handover; and in the process of handing over, by the UE, the voice service from the CS domain network to the PS domain network, establishing a forwarding channel between a first network element of the PS domain and a second network element of the CS domain by using the preconfigured information about resources, where the forwarding channel is configured to forward voice service data between the UE and a peer UE after the UE accesses the PS domain network. | 05-23-2013 |
20130128866 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR SECURITY PROCESSING IN HANDOVER PROCESS - A method, an apparatus, and a system for security processing in a handover process in the field of communication technologies are provided, including: in a handover preparation and handover execution processes performed by a user equipment UE and a source node and a target node on a network side, obtaining, by the target node, security capability information of the UE provided by the source node or a security verification entity, where the security verification entity includes a gateway in case of UE handover under a NodeB or a donor NodeB in case of UE handover under a relay node; and if the source node provides the security capability information of the UE. | 05-23-2013 |
20130136102 | INTERNET PROTOCOL SESSION PERSISTENCE FOR MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS - Providing for mobile communications incorporating Internet Protocol (IP) persistence is described herein. By way of example, IP persistence can be implemented for a mobile device receiving IP data content over a mobile network. Particularly, if the mobile device encounters a region of poor wireless coverage, the IP data content can be transmitted to the mobile device over a plurality of base stations concurrently. Thus, the IP persistence can comprise duplicating the IP data content and transmitting separate independent wireless transmissions of the content to the mobile device from separate cells or separate transmitters. The duplicate transmitting can be continued while the mobile device is within the region of poor wireless coverage, until a suitable quality of service or quality of experience parameter is met for a serving network, or the like. | 05-30-2013 |
20130136103 | HANDOVERS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS WITH HIERARCHICAL CELLS USING DIFFERENT TRANSMISSION TIME PERIODS FOR UPLINK COMMUNICATION - An originating transceiver node provides wireless service to a wireless communication device that is transmitting uplink signals within originating uplink time periods assigned to the originating transceiver node. A target transceiver node is assigned target uplink time periods for uplink communication from wireless communication devices receiving wireless service from the target transceiver node where the target uplink time periods are different from the originating uplink time periods. The target transceiver node monitors the originating uplink time periods and transmits a message if an uplink signal is received within an originating uplink time slot. In some circumstances, the target transceiver node sends the message only if a determination is made that the wireless communication device transmitting the uplink signal has a proximity to the target transceiver node that is less than a threshold. | 05-30-2013 |
20130136104 | ACTIVE HANDOFFS IN A NETWORK - Techniques for transferring a communication connection for a client device from a source network device to a target network device include receiving first and second sequence numbers and applying a first processing technique to data segments associated with sequence numbers that succeed the first and the second sequence numbers. | 05-30-2013 |
20130136105 | Sending an Identifier of a Wireless Local Area Network to Enable Handoff of a Mobile Station to the Wireless Local Area Network - In a wireless communications network, the presence of a wireless local area network in a cell segment is determined. An identifier of the wireless local area network in the cell segment is sent to at least one mobile station in the cell segment to enable the at least one mobile station to hand off to the wireless local area network. Optionally, information identifying geographic boundaries of cell segments and the wireless local area network can be sent to the at least one mobile station. | 05-30-2013 |
20130136106 | Method and System for Vertical Handoff with Target Traffic Channel Setup Conveyed via Source Channel - A method and system for vertical handoff of a mobile station from a first-protocol RAN to a second-protocol RAN. The method and system provide a make-before-break vertical handoff, by having the first-protocol RAN (i) acquire, on behalf of the mobile station, a traffic channel assignment defining one or more traffic channel parameters for air interface communication in the second-protocol RAN, and (ii) pass to the mobile station, via the first air interface protocol, the one or more traffic channel parameters so that the mobile station can then readily switch over to communication under the second-protocol RAN. Optimally, the acquisition and passing of the one or more second-protocol traffic channel parameters may occur without the mobile station having requested the handoff, without the mobile station having asked for the traffic channel assignment, and without the mobile station having yet begun communication with the second-protocol RAN. | 05-30-2013 |
20130142166 | COLLAPSED MOBILE ARCHITECTURE - A collapsed or compact mobile architecture system includes connection nodes each comprising an access interface and at least one network interface; a backhaul network coupled to each of the connection nodes; and a mobility control unit coupled to the backhaul network. The mobility control unit comprises an Internet Protocol (IP) address server. Each of the connection nodes is configured to receive attachment requests from at least one user device. The mobility control unit is configured to receive first control plane signals from the connection nodes based on the attachment requests and transmit second control plane signals to the connection nodes based on the attachment requests. The mobility control unit is further configured to assign an IP address to each of the at least one user devices, based on the receive first control plane signals. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142167 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION WITH LOW-OVERHEAD MOBILITY MANAGEMENT - A method and apparatus for supporting handover of mobile communications is provided. A router performs routing services in a service area. The router maintains a location table configured to store current router addresses of mobile nodes that have the router as a home router. The router receives data intended for mobile nodes that are listed in the location table and are in the routers service area. The router receives a user datagram protocol (UDP) message from a mobile node when it leaves the service area. The UDP message includes an IP address of a new router in the mobile node's new service area. The router updates the location table with the new IP address and transmits data intended for the mobile node to the new router until the data is redirected at the source. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142168 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING AN RSRVCC PROCEDURE - Method for performing an rSRVCC procedure from UTRAN/GERAN to E-UTRAN/HSPA, comprising steps of:—receiving, a first network entity, a first message from a UE before an rSRVCC handover procedure from UTRAN/GERAN to E-E-UTRAN/HSPA involving the UE, the first message containing a pre-allocated transport address to he used for voice alter the rSRVCC handover,—sending a second message, during the rSRVCC handover procedure of a voice call, to a second network entity, the second message comprising information related to the transport address of the UE to give an instruction to send the voice media of the call to that transport address. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142169 | Registration of Radio Network Change Based on A CS Fallback Mechanism - A method for the switchover of a mobile terminal device from a first radio network of a mobile radio system to a second radio network is described. The switchover is carried out on the basis of a CS fallback mechanism, and whereby, on the basis of the switchover, the mobile terminal device logs on to a base station of the second radio network in order to establish a connection. In conjunction with the log-on, the mobile terminal device transmits a notification pertaining to the CS fallback mechanism to the base station, and the base station registers the log-on of the terminal device as a function of the notification. Moreover, a base station and to a mobile terminal device for carrying out the method are also described herein. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142170 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, METHOD FOR CONTROLLING COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND PROGRAM - A communication apparatus includes a determination device configured to, in a case where the communication apparatus connects to a first network of a first base station via a first frequency channel and the communication apparatus participates in a second network via the first frequency channel without connection to a base station, determine whether a second frequency channel used by a second base station is usable in the communication performed, and a control device configured to control the communication without connection to the base station according to the determination by the determination device. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142171 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO NETWORK CONTROLLER, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - A radio network controller | 06-06-2013 |
20130142172 | Method and System for Maintaining Multiple PDN Network Connection During Inter-Technology Handover in Idle Mode - Supporting an optimized idle mode handoff of user equipment from a 3GPP to a non-3GPP system. Namely, during an idle mode registration of the user equipment with the non-3GPP system, the user equipment may provide an indication to the access node on the non-3GPP system so that the access point in that non-3GPP system contacts the appropriate entity (HSS or AAA) on the home network for the user equipment to download the addresses of the multiple PDN gateway addresses that are currently in use by the user equipment. This indication to the non-3GPP access node, the contact message from the access node to the home network, and the response from the home network to the access node on the non-3GPP system provide the access node with sufficient information to maintain multiple PDN connectivity to the user equipment during an idle mode handover. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142173 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SETTING UP UPLINK COMMON BEARER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and apparatus for setting up an UpLink common bearer shared by a plurality of User Equipments (UEs) in a wireless communication network is provided. The apparatus includes a Serving GateWay (S-GW) for receiving a group identifier of a UE from a Mobility Management Entity (MME), sending a create bearer request message including the group identifier to a Packet Data Network (PDN) GateWay (P-GW), receiving a create bearer response message including UL common S | 06-06-2013 |
20130148627 | PROVIDING FOR MOBILITY FOR FLEXIBLE BANDWIDTH CARRIER SYSTEMS - Methods, systems, and devices for facilitating mobility between flexible bandwidth systems and other bandwidth systems are provided. These tools and techniques that provide mobility between different bandwidth systems may facilitate supporting circuit-switched (CS) services, such as CS voice services. Some embodiments provide for determining flexible bandwidth capable devices, such as user equipment. Some embodiments involve core network redirection where a core network may direct the handling of circuit-switched services when a flexible bandwidth system does not support the CS services. Some examples provide for radio access network determined handling of CS services when a flexible bandwidth system may not support the CS services. Some embodiments provide for transitioning to a flexible bandwidth system. Some embodiments provide for transitioning from flexible bandwidth systems to non-flexible bandwidth systems that have no support for some or all CS services, other flexible bandwidth systems, and/or systems that natively support CS voice services. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148628 | PROVIDING FOR MOBILITY FOR FLEXIBLE BANDWIDTH CARRIER SYSTEMS - Methods, systems, and devices for facilitating mobility between flexible bandwidth systems and other bandwidth systems are provided. These tools and techniques that provide mobility between different bandwidth systems may facilitate supporting circuit-switched (CS) services, such as CS voice services. Some embodiments provide for determining flexible bandwidth capable devices, such as user equipment. Some embodiments involve core network redirection where a core network may direct the handling of circuit-switched services when a flexible bandwidth system does not support the CS services. Some examples provide for radio access network determined handling of CS services when a flexible bandwidth system may not support the CS services. Some embodiments provide for transitioning to a flexible bandwidth system. Some embodiments provide for transitioning from flexible bandwidth systems to non-flexible bandwidth systems that have no support for some or all CS services, other flexible bandwidth systems, and/or systems that natively support CS voice services. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148629 | PROVIDING FOR MOBILITY FOR FLEXIBLE BANDWIDTH CARRIER SYSTEMS - Methods, systems, and devices for facilitating mobility between flexible bandwidth systems and other bandwidth systems are provided. These tools and techniques that provide mobility between different bandwidth systems may facilitate supporting circuit-switched (CS) services, such as CS voice services. Some embodiments provide for determining flexible bandwidth capable devices, such as user equipment. Some embodiments involve core network redirection where a core network may direct the handling of circuit-switched services when a flexible bandwidth system does not support the CS services. Some examples provide for radio access network determined handling of CS services when a flexible bandwidth system may not support the CS services. Some embodiments provide for transitioning to a flexible bandwidth system. Some embodiments provide for transitioning from flexible bandwidth systems to non-flexible bandwidth systems that have no support for some or all CS services, other flexible bandwidth systems, and/or systems that natively support CS voice services. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148630 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, NODE APPARATUS, AND INTER-NETWORK HANDOVER CONTROL METHOD - A mobile communication system includes at least one mobile terminal that can access a circuit switched network and a wireless broadband network, and a node apparatus. The node apparatus integrates, into one physical node, a first gateway node interconnecting the circuit switched network and an IP network and a second gateway node interconnecting a core network accommodating the wireless broadband network and an external packet data network. When the mobile terminal performs handover from one of the circuit switched network and the wireless broadband network to the other network, one of the first gateway node and the second gateway node, being a handover-destination node, allocates call connection path node identification information managed by the other gateway note being a handover-source node, as new call connection path node identification information of the handover-destination node. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148631 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DATA IN SOFT HANDOFF OF A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method of transmitting and receiving data in soft handoff of a wireless communication system. According to an aspect of the present invention, in the method of receiving data in soft handoff of a wireless communication system, a mobile station receives a first sequence being generated by interleaving transmission data using a first inter leaver pattern, and also receives a second sequence being generated by interleaving the transmission data using a second interleaver pattern. Then, the mobile station combines and decodes the first sequence and the second sequence before receiving an entire frame having the first sequence allocated thereto. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148632 | USING IDENTIFIER MAPPING TO RESOLVE ACCESS POINT IDENTIFIER AMBIGUITY - Ambiguity (e.g., confusion) associated with access point identifiers may be resolved by querying candidate target access points and/or by using historical records indicative of one or more access points that the access point has previously accessed. For example, messages may be sent to access points that are assigned the same identifier to cause the access points to monitor for a signal from an access terminal that received the identifier from a target access point. The target access point may then be identified based on any responses that indicate that a signal was received from the access terminal In some aspects the access points subject to being queried may be selected using a tiered priority. In addition, it may be determined based on prior handoffs of a given access terminal that when that access terminal reports a given identifier, the access terminal usually ends up being handed-off to a particular access point. Accordingly, a mapping may be maintained for that access terminal that maps the identifier to that access point so that the mapping may be used to resolve any future confusion associated with the use of that identifier by that access terminal | 06-13-2013 |
20130148633 | Node and Method For AoIP Address Change - A first node ( | 06-13-2013 |
20130156004 | TECHNIQUES TO PERFORM EVOLVED HIGH RATE PACKET DATA (eHRPD) NETWORK SPECIFIC SCANNING - Evolved High Rate Packet Data (eHRPD) network specific scanning process includes storing first network information indicating whether a channel frequency corresponds to an evolved High Rate Packet Data (eHRPD) network within a first persistent memory. The process also includes storing second network information indicating whether the channel frequency corresponds to a High Rate Packet Data (HRPD) network within a second persistent memory. The process further includes maintaining Internet Protocol (IP) continuity according to the first and second network information stored within the first and second persistent memories. | 06-20-2013 |
20130156005 | CARRIER ALLOCATION IN WIRELESS NETWORK - This document presents a communication scheme for use in a wireless network utilizing a fragmented frequency spectrum and supporting dynamic radio carrier allocation. At least two radio carriers on non-contiguous frequency channels are allocated for use in communication with a network element of the wireless network, and one of the allocated radio carriers is commonly used by all client stations communicating with the network element. | 06-20-2013 |
20130156006 | METHOD FOR PROVIDING SEAMLESS TRANSITION BETWEEN NETWORKS FOLLOWING DIFFERENT PROTOCOLS - Example embodiments provide methods for handling the transition of a mobile device from a first network to a second network, the second network operating according to a different communications protocol from the first network. One example embodiment includes terminating forwarding of the data packets from the first network to the mobile device; rebuilding headers of unforwarded data packets at the first network; and sending the rebuilt data packets from the first network to the second network. Another example embodiment includes resetting a header compression state at the second network; receiving unforwarded data packets from the first network at the second network, the unforwarded data packets being data packets the first network had not yet forwarded to the mobile device; and sending the unforwarded data packets from the second network to the mobile device. | 06-20-2013 |
20130156007 | Handover in White Space Band - A station forms a connection with a first access point (AP): a particular station for storing first active station identification information of an active station that manages the activation of the station serviced by said first AP accesses a region serviced by a second AP, and receives from said second AP a message for containing second active station identification information of the active station that manages the activation of the station serviced by said second AP; said first active station identification information is compared with said second active station identification information; and if said first active station identification information is different from said second active station identification information, a procedure for changing the active station and a handover to said second AP are performed to a second active STA corresponding to said second active station identification information. | 06-20-2013 |
20130163558 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR DATA TRANSFER IN A PACKET-SWITCHED DATA NETWORK - Apparatus for and methods of enabling a gateway node of a first packet-switched data network to select a first channel for transferring a data packet to a destination packet data protocol address of a correspondent node provided service in the first network are disclosed. The gateway node is configured to select the first channel from a plurality of channels configured to transfer data packets to the destination packet data protocol address of the correspondent node, wherein the data packet is sent from a mobile node of a second packet-switched data network external to the first network, and wherein the mobile node has been in a communication session with the correspondent node while provided service in a third packet-switched data network different to the second network. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163559 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR REINITIATING SESSION MANAGEMENT PROCESS OF EPS SYSTEM - The present invention discloses a method and device for re-initiating EPS session management procedure. The application of technical solution proposed through embodiment of this invention can enable PGW to determine whether handover operation on MME side is completed through timing by timer and/or instruction message on MME side; if it is completed, re-initiate session management process of corresponding EPS system, thus enabling PGW to timely re-initiate EPS session management procedure, reducing the time for unnecessary waiting, and avoiding resource waste caused by repeated rejection of EPS session management procedure re-initiated when handover procedure is not completed, so as to improve reconnection efficiency of session management process of EPS system and reduce waste of communication resource. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163560 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING CIRCUIT SWITCHED FALL BACK OF A MOBILE STATION FROM E-UTRAN TO UTRAN/GERAN IN A FULL-MULTI-OPERATOR CORE NETWORK - Packet Switched (PS) handover based Circuit Switched Fall Back (CSFB) of a mobile station is controlled from an Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN) cell to a target Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (UTRAN) cell or a target GSM EDGE Radio Access Network (GERAN) cell in a PS domain. A network node receives a handover request from a SGSN. A PLMN ID associated with the SGSN is identified. A set of PLMN IDs transmitted as system information by the target UTRAN cell or the target GERAN cell is identified. A PLMN ID index is generated to indicate an association between the PLMN ID associated with the SGSN and one of the PLMN IDs of the set. The PLMN ID index is communicated toward the mobile station for use during PS handover based CSFB. The mobile station embeds the PLMN ID index in a Location Area Update (LAU) message, and transmits the LAU message to a target BSS/RNS of the GERAN/UTRAN cell for use during the PS handover based CSFB. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163561 | FAST HANDOVER METHOD USING L2/L3 COMBINATION - Provided is a fast handover method using a layer 2 (L2) and layer 3 (L3) combination. When a mobile node moves from a present region to another region, fast handover of the mobile node is provided using a location update function between handover control agents (HCAs), and data bicasting from an old HCA wherein the mobile node performs handover to a new HCA. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163562 | PSEUDO WIRES FOR MOBILITY MANAGEMENT - Embodiments describe mobility management utilizing neighbor discovery and at least two pseudo wires. When a wireless device desires to handoff to a detected access router, such handoff may not be configured until such time as a current access router receives routing information of the target access router. In order to minimize handoff time, communication between the target access router and the wireless device can be through the current access router utilizing least two pseudo wires. Bidirectional neighbor discovery and create is conducted by the access routers allow subsequent wireless devices to automatically handoff between the access routers. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163563 | Method and Device for Inter-System Handover for Packet Switch Service in Dual-Mode Radio Network Controller - A method and device for an inter-RAT handover for a PS service in a dual-mode RNC are disclosed in the present invention, which are used to support an inter-RAT handover optimization flow of the PS service in the dual-mode RNC, thereby solving the problem that the current inter-RAT handover optimization flow does not support the PS handover. With the present invention, in the inter-RAT handover optimization flow, an inter-RAT relocation flow and a radio resource allocation flow of a destination system are executed in parallel, and an encryption indication is sent to a central network through inter-RAT relocation required message; a BSC forwards user data to the central network according to the encryption indication. | 06-27-2013 |
20130170471 | EFFICIENT HANDOVER OF MEDIA COMMUNICATIONS IN HETEROGENEOUS IP NETWORKS USING HANDOVER PROCEDURE RULES AND MEDIA HANDOVER RELAYS - Methods and systems are provided for efficient handover of a media session between heterogeneous IP networks. A mobile device with Internet access can operate a software program to communicate with a corresponding node. The corresponding node may access the Internet through a firewall which may include NAT-routing functionality. The mobile device establishes a media session with a corresponding node via the transmission of a first media stream and receipt of a second media stream, and a media-control channel can optionally be implemented. The mobile device can acquire Internet access through a second IP address, and packets routed between the second IP address and the Internet may traverse a firewall. The mobile device can evaluate a set of network parameters at the second IP address from a stored LAN profile. A software routine can (i) evaluate preferred IP addresses and (ii) select an efficient handover procedure according to handover procedure rules. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170472 | MOBILITY MANAGEMENT OF OSI CONNECTIONS BETWEEN CELL TOWERS - A processor-implemented method, apparatus, and/or computer program product move Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) layer 4 connections between wirelessly-connected user equipment to a series of cell-towers, wherein an OSI layer 4 connection is extracted out of the underlying cellular protocols at the series of cell-towers. A detection is made that user equipment, which has a broken-out layer 4 connection, has moved from a first cell-tower to a second cell-tower. Traffic for an existing layer 4 connection from the user equipment is tunnelled between the first cell-tower and the second cell-tower. A predetermined trigger event is identified. In response to the predetermined trigger event occurring, an ongoing bidirectional flow of data packets is migrated from the user equipment over to layer 4 connections maintained at the second cell-tower. | 07-04-2013 |
20130170473 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PROCESSING QOS PARAMETER IN SUBSCRIPTION SERVICE COMBINATION SCENARIO - The present invention provides a method and device for processing a QoS parameter in a subscription service combination scenario. The method includes: determining a subscribed APN corresponding to an alias APN, where the alias APN is obtained by a mobility management network element according to an APN in an access request of a UE and according to acquired correspondence between a subscribed APN and an alias APN of the UE; and determining a QoS parameter of the alias APN according to a QoS parameter of the subscribed APN. Embodiments of the present invention can provide a solution for processing a QoS parameter in subscription service combination. | 07-04-2013 |
20130176988 | DATA SPLIT BETWEEN MULTIPLE SITES - Splitting data in a wireless communications network. Data may be split to use multiple base stations for transmission to user equipment in order to improve the bandwith if a UE is on a cell edge, or may be split by user equipment for transmission to multiple base stations in order to improve handover. Data splitting may be performed at the Packet Data Convergence Protocol layer, at the Radio Link Control layer, or at the Media Access Control layer on user equipment or on a base station. Data may instead be split in a network node, such as in a serving gateway, in Yes order to reduce X2 interface load or delay carrier aggregation. | 07-11-2013 |
20130176989 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR QUICKLY EXPLOITING A NEW LINK DURING HAND-OFF IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A way to deliver traffic to a mobile node that is undergoing a hand off between two Access Routers (AR) is described. The method of the present invention operates to perform some or all of the following. Decrease, e.g., minimize, delays between the time the old link breaks and the first packet is sent from the new link. Reduce and/or eliminate packet bursts from old to new AR when an old (existing) link breaks. Ensure that packets are neither lost nor duplicated during hand off. Maintain QoS control of delivery order to the MN. Make good or best use of multiple links during Make before break hand-off. Support both uplink and downlink traffic. | 07-11-2013 |
20130176990 | METHOD FOR DETERMINING RELOCATION PROCESS AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING HANDOVER PROCESS - A method for determining relocation process and a method for determining handover process are proposed in the present invention. Wherein the method for determining relocation process includes: informing, by a home base station (HNB) gateway (GW) or an operation, administration and maintenance (OAM) device, the HNB of information of whether the HNB GW supports an optimized relocation process; determining, by the HNB, the relocation process to be implemented for the user equipment (UE) according to the information of whether the HNB GW supports the optimized relocation process. The methods according to the present invention may reduce the failure probability of the relocation/handover and improve the relocation/handover efficiency. | 07-11-2013 |
20130182680 | METHOD FOR MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATION USER EQUIPMENT TO CONNECT TO EVOLVED NODE-B AND APPARATUS EMPLOYING THE SAME - Provided are a method for machine type communication (MTC) user equipment (UE) to connect to an evolved Node-B (eNB) in a random access procedure, and an apparatus employing the method. The method for MTC UE to connect to an eNB includes receiving, at the MTC UE, system information or a handover command from the eNB, transmitting, at the MTC UE, a random access preamble to the eNB, receiving, at the MTC UE, a random access response message from the eNB, and transmitting, at the MTC UE, a connection request message or a handover confirm message including information about a dedicated bandwidth of the MTC UE to the eNB such that the MTC UE can be allocated the dedicated bandwidth. Using this method, an eNB is notified of a dedicated bandwidth of MTC UE, and thus can effectively utilize radio resources. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182681 | METHODS TO CONTROL MULTIPLE RADIO ACCESS BEARERS IN A WIRELESS DEVICE - A method to control multiple radio access bearers is performed at a mobile wireless communication device when the mobile wireless communication device is connected to a radio network subsystem in a wireless communication network by first and second bidirectional radio access bearers. The mobile wireless communication device transmits a data packet on an uplink of the first bidirectional radio access bearer to the radio network subsystem. When the data packet is not correctly received by the radio network subsystem, the mobile wireless communication device retransmits the data packet repeatedly. After N retransmissions of the data packet, the mobile wireless communication device releases the first bidirectional radio access bearer while maintaining the second bidirectional radio access bearer. The first bidirectional radio access bearer provides a channel to transport packet switched data, and the second bidirectional radio access bearer provides a channel to transport circuit switched data. | 07-18-2013 |
20130188597 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE STATION, BASE STATION, AND HANDOVER METHOD - In a handover of a mobile station ( | 07-25-2013 |
20130188598 | Local storage of content in a wireless network - Storing data locally or at an edge of a wireless network is disclosed. The wireless network receives from a communication terminal a request to get content data. The request may indicate the content data and an application server where the content data is accessible. The wireless network determines, based on predetermined conditions, that the content data will be cached or stored in a local data store associated with the wireless network. The content data may then be communicated on demand to a second communication terminal that is attached to the wireless network. | 07-25-2013 |
20130188599 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL TO RECEIVE CONTENT DATA FROM AN EDGE NODE - A wireless communication terminal receiving content data from a local data store is disclosed. A request, to a wireless network device, to get content data is sent by the wireless communication terminal. The request may indicate the content data and an application server where the content data is accessible. The content data is subsequently received from a local data store associated with an edge node of the wireless network. The wireless network device may have previously stored the content data in the local data store after predetermined conditions were satisfied to cache and store the content data in the local data store. | 07-25-2013 |
20130188600 | Method of Reference Cell Change - A method of reference cell change for a network in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises utilizing a command for the reference cell change, wherein the command is sent on a cell for indicating the cell as a reference cell. | 07-25-2013 |
20130188601 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING A SIGNAL RELATED TO MOBILITY MANAGEMENT IN A NETWORK SUPPORTING A NUMBER OF NETWORK MODES OF OPERATION - The present description provides a method applicable to a network supporting a number of network modes of operation (NMOs). In the method, a user equipment (UE) in the NMO | 07-25-2013 |
20130188602 | METHOD OF PROVIDING A MOBILITY SERVICE - A method comprising running an application on user equipment; providing a mobility service; using a packet switched connection when said mobility service is unavailable; and using said mobility service when said mobility service becomes available. | 07-25-2013 |
20130188603 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - A mobile communication method according to the invention comprises the steps of: causing MSC server/CS-MGW to transmit a path switching signal and activate a timer; causing UE# | 07-25-2013 |
20130188604 | RESIDENTIAL/ENTERPRISE NETWORK CONNECTION MANAGEMENT AND HANDOVER SCENARIOS - Residential/Enterprise network connection management and handover scenarios. A method, system and device are provided for managing LIPA and/or SIPTO connection releases when UE moves out of residential/enterprise network coverage in case service continuity is not supported for the LIPA/SIPTO PDN connection(s). To address problems caused by not providing service continuity for LIPA/SIPTO PDN connections, the PDN connection/PDP context created in the HeNB/HNB by the MME/SGSN includes context information related to the UE indicating whether such connection is a LIPA PDN connection PDN connection or not. In particular, when the MME ( | 07-25-2013 |
20130188605 | DE-ACTIVATION OF DATA BEARER CONNECTIONS UPON OUTGOING HANDOVER FROM A HOME CELL - The present invention relates to a home arrangement ( | 07-25-2013 |
20130188606 | Method and system for switching circuit switch domain service to packet switch domain - The disclosure discloses a method for switching a circuit switch domain service to a packet switch domain, configuring an HO-Proxy for handover to a PS domain of a target network, the method includes that: a service network base station system sends a CS domain service handover request for a UE to the HO-Proxy when the service network base station system determines to switch a CS domain service of the UE to the PS domain of the target network; and the HO-Proxy requests a target network control entity to switch the CS domain service of the UE to the PS domain of the target network, or switches the CS domain service of the UE to the PS domain of the target network. The disclosure further discloses a system for implementing the method. In the disclosure, when used for switching a CS domain service to a PS network, the HO-Proxy can preserve accurately the PS bearer resource for a corresponding (CS or PS domain) service of the UE, thereby implementing accurate and timely handover. | 07-25-2013 |
20130188607 | Single Radio Voice Call Continuity For Emergency Callback Or Click-To-Dial Sessions - An example apparatus is caused to receive a message inviting a user equipment (UE) to participate in an emergency communication session with an originating node, where the user equipment is registered with an Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (IMS). The apparatus is caused to identify a type of registration of the UE with the IMS, and select a transfer function of the IMS to anchor the emergency communication session based on the identified type of registration of the user equipment with the IMS. The transfer function may be a domain transfer function or emergency access transfer function of the IMS. The apparatus is also caused to prepare the message for transmission to the selected transfer function to thereby enable the selected transfer function to anchor the emergency communication session and further communicate with one or more other components of the IMS to establish the emergency communication session with the user equipment. | 07-25-2013 |
20130195073 | Low-Cost LTE System with Distributed Carrier Aggregation on the Unlicensed Band - A method for distributed carrier aggregation on unlicensed bands is described. The method includes tuning an antenna of a user equipment to a first carrier. The method includes transmitting, from an access point on a first carrier, information regarding a second carrier. The method also includes receiving, on the first carrier via the antenna, the information regarding the second carrier. The first carrier and the second carrier are in an unlicensed band. The method includes retuning the antenna to the second carrier and communicating data on the second carrier via the antenna. A maximum transmission power for the second carrier is based at least in part on a bandwidth of the second carrier. Apparatus and computer readable media are also described. | 08-01-2013 |
20130195074 | SINGLE RADIO VOICE CALL CONTINUITY HANDOVER OF CALLS WITH VIDEO MEDIA FROM A CIRCUIT SWITCHED ACCESS NETWORK - A method is provided of performing a handover with Single Radio Voice Call Continuity, SRVCC, of a telecommunications session from a User Equipment, UE accessing an IP Multimedia Subsystem, IMS, network via a Circuit Switched, CS, access network to a target Packet Switched, PS, access network. The method includes receiving a handover request from the CS access network to transfer the session and determining that the telecommunications session comprises data media in addition to, or without, any audio media. The ability to perform the handover with SRVCC for the data media is determined. Bearer resources for the session when handed over to the PS access network are allocated, including a data media bearer and, if there is any audio media in the session an audio media bearer. The session is transferred from the CS to the target PS access network. | 08-01-2013 |
20130195075 | HANDOVER OF PRIORITY CALLS FROM A CIRCUIT SWITCHED ACCESS NETWORK WITH SINGLE RADIO VOICE CALL CONTINUITY - A method is provided of handing over a priority call with Single Radio Voice Call Continuity, SRVCC. The priority call is handed over from a User Equipment, UE, accessing an IP Multimedia Subsystem, IMS, network via a Circuit Switched, CS, access network to a target Packet Switched, PS, access network thereby establishing a priority IMS session. The priority call has a specified CS priority level. The method includes sending a handover request from the CS access network towards the PS access network and the IMS network to transfer the priority call. A PS priority level for the session in the PS network is determined based on the specified CS priority level. | 08-01-2013 |
20130195076 | HANDOVER OF ERMERGENCY CALLS FROM A CIRCUIT SWITCHED TO A PACKET SWITCHED ACCESS NETWORK - A method is provided of performing a handover with SRVCC to a target PS access network of an emergency call to a PSAP from a UE accessing a CS access network. The method includes sending a handover request from the CS access network towards an IMS network to transfer the emergency call. A CS to PS emergency handover command is sent to the UE, including an emergency STN identifying an access transfer control function. The UE sends a SIP INVITE to establish an emergency IMS session over the PS access network. The SIP INVITE includes the emergency STN so that the INVITE is routed to the access transfer control function. The emergency call sent over the CS access network with the emergency IMS session are correlated and the emergency call is switched to the emergency IMS session over the PS access network to complete the handover. | 08-01-2013 |
20130195077 | BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND REORDEREING METHOD THEREOF - A mobile station in a communication system for sending packets, to which numbers indicating sequence are attached, from a base station to a mobile station and performing delivery of the packets in order of the sequence number in the mobile station, includes a buffer which stores packets received from both a source base station and a target base station; and a control unit which performs the delivery of the stored packets in order of the sequence number at the handover procedure based on information indicating whether packets which are not sent from the source base station to the mobile station, are forwarded from a source base station to a target base station is set, the information being received from the source base station. | 08-01-2013 |
20130195078 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE TERMINAL, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication system including a mobile terminal and a plurality of base stations is provided. Each of base stations includes communication unit selectively uses at least one of a plurality of frequency bands to communicate with the mobile terminal, and a handover unit performs handover with at least one another base station. The mobile terminal includes a storage unit stores, by each base station basis, information of a frequency band used for communication from the plurality of frequency bands, and a notification unit notifies, when handover from a first base station currently connected in communication to a second base station is required, the first base station about a proximity indication associated with some of the plurality of frequency bands based on the stored information of the frequency band used for communication. | 08-01-2013 |
20130201959 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MAKE-BEFORE-BREAK HANDOVER IN A TD-SCDMA SYSTEM - A system and method enable make-before-break handover from a source cell to a target cell in a TD-SCDMA system. According to various aspects of the present disclosure, a wireless link is established with the target cell while maintaining the call with the source cell. The communication between the mobile station and the respective source and target cells may be multiplexed utilizing time division multiplexing or frequency division multiplexing. When utilizing time division multiplexing, the allocation between the respective source and target cells may be made slot-by-slot in a subframe, or subframe-by-subframe in a radio frame. | 08-08-2013 |
20130201960 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING DATA ON MULTIPLE CARRIERS IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A data transmission method and an apparatus to communicate data on multiple carriers in the mobile communication system are provided. A random access method of a terminal in a mobile communication system including primary and secondary cells operating on multiple carriers according to the present invention includes communicating data after random access in the primary cell, receiving, when the random access is triggered in the secondary cell, information for use in the secondary cell random access from the primary cell, transmitting a preamble in the secondary cell based on the received information, monitoring the primary cell to receive a Random Access Response for the secondary cell, and applying, when the Random Access Response for the secondary cell is received, the information carried in the Random Access Response to the secondary cell in which the preamble has been transmitted. | 08-08-2013 |
20130201961 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING FLOW MOBILITY IN RADIO ACCESS SYSTEM SUPPORTING MULTI-RAT - A method for a terminal transreceiving data in a radio access system that supports RAT with a first base station that supports a first RAT and a second base station that supports a second RAT, includes the following steps: adding a first service flow through a dynamic service process with the first base station; receiving from the first base station a second system command message for directing connection with the second base station, wherein the second system command message includes either disconnection time information which expresses disconnection time from the first service flow or action time information which expresses the beginning of connection to the first service flow; disconnecting from the first base station and the first service flow, according to the disconnection time information; and transreceiving data pertaining to the first service flow with the second base station. | 08-08-2013 |
20130208696 | PRE-EMPTIVE ACCESS NETWORK SWITCHING - An access network connection controller is disclosed for ordering a mobile terminal to switch from a connection to a first access network to a connection to a second access network in order to ensure that a good connection to the mobile terminal is maintained when the mobile terminal enters an area in which connection to the first access network may be restricted and the second access network may be beneficial. The access network connection controller is operable to receive movement information representative of the movement of the mobile terminal connected to a first access network; to determine from the movement information whether the mobile terminal is approaching a restricted area wherein connection to a second access network may be beneficial and to generate a command ordering the switching of the connection mobile terminal from the first access network to the second access network before the mobile terminal enters the restricted area. By ordering a mobile terminal to switch its connection to another access network in advance of the mobile terminal entering an area in which connection to the mobile terminal from its current access network may be restricted, good connection to the mobile terminal is ensured at all times and the user of the mobile terminal does not experience any degradation in performance. | 08-15-2013 |
20130208697 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATIONS - A method for supporting Device-to-Device (D2D) communications by a Mobile Station (MS) in a communication system is provided. The method includes performing a network entry procedure with a Base Station (BS) and receiving, from the BS, a BS prefix, a temporary Identifier (ID), and a valid period timer value for the temporary ID, generating a device ID using the BS prefix and the temporary ID, and performing, upon detecting data to be transmitted, communication with a peer MS using the device ID for a time indicated by the valid period timer value. The BS prefix is information unique within the communication system, and the temporary ID is information unique within a coverage area of the BS. | 08-15-2013 |
20130208698 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING SERVICE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM IN WHICH MULTIPLE BASE STATIONS COOPERATE WITH EACH OTHER, AND SYSTEM THEREFOR - Provided is a method for providing a service by a Base Station (BS) in a wireless communication system. The method includes setting up a radio link to a Mobile Station (MS) to provide the service; receiving BS information from at least one BS that cooperates to provide the service; and selecting an alternative BS for replacing the BS from among the at least one BS based on the BS information. | 08-15-2013 |
20130208699 | Reduced Radio Resource Control Connectivity - Embodiments of the present invention relate to reduction of radio connectivity of a bearer service. Upon detection of low data transfer activity within a bearer service, radio connectivity of the bearer service is reduced so as to reduce signaling overhead in an air interface. However, a core network connection of the bearer service is maintained. | 08-15-2013 |
20130208700 | Method for Quickly Searching for an Access Point - According to one embodiment of the present invention, a method for searching for an access point in a terminal supporting a multiple wireless access scheme is provided. The method may comprise the steps of; receiving, from a base station using a first wireless access scheme, information relating to an access point using a second wireless access scheme; determining whether one or more access points exist using the second wireless access scheme in the cell coverage of the base station on the basis of the information: searching for an access point accessible for a period that is shorter than a normal period when determining that the access point using the second wireless access scheme exists; and accessing the found access point using the second wireless access scheme. | 08-15-2013 |
20130208701 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DATA IN A MULTI RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY SYSTEM USING AN ACCESS POINT AND APPARATUS THEREFOR - The present invention relates to a wireless communication, and more particularly, to a method for a base station and a user equipment to transmit and receive data in a multi radio access technology system based on an access point (AP) and apparatus therefor. According to one embodiment of the present invention, a method of performing a communication, which is performed by a user equipment based on an access point (AP) supporting a Multi-RAT (Radio Access Technology), may include the steps of receiving an information on a 1st AP associated with the user equipment among a plurality of APs from the 1st AP, transmitting the information on the 1st AP to a base station, receiving an information on at least one cooperative user equipment candidate associated with the 1st AP from the base station, and transmitting a 1st data to the base station using the at least one cooperative user equipment, wherein the 1st data is exchanged between the user equipment and the at least one cooperative user equipment via a 1st radio access scheme and wherein the 1st data is exchanged between the at least one cooperative user equipment and the base station via 2nd radio access scheme. | 08-15-2013 |
20130208702 | METHOD AND A NETWORK NODE FOR SHARING INFORMATION OVER AN INTERFACE IN A TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - The exemplary embodiments of the presently claimed invention relate to a method and a radio base station (600) for identifying candidate or neighbor base stations. The radio base station ( | 08-15-2013 |
20130208703 | GATEWAY APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD THEREFOR AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - A gateway apparatus comprises a registration unit for registering a network address, a temporary address and a flag, a receiving unit for receiving data destined to a destination communication device with the network address of the destination communication device from a source communication device, a determination unit for determining whether the destination communication device is provided with the MCIM or not, based on a registered value of the flag, and transmitting unit for transmitting a bootstrap message for requesting initiation of provisioning of a predetermined identifier to the destination communication device, to a provision server, when it is determined that the destination communication device is not provided with the MCIM, wherein the transmitting unit transmits the data to the destination communication device using the assigned temporary address, when the destination communication device is provided with the MCIM. | 08-15-2013 |
20130215869 | RESUME HANDLING AFTER TUNE-AWAY - Methods and apparatus for resuming operations with an LTE network are described. One example method generally includes suspending operations with a base station of a first radio access technology (RAT) network (e.g., LTE network), tuning to a second RAT network (e.g., 1x network) to monitor for paging messages targeting the UE, and determining whether or not to resume operations with the base station of the first RAT network without performing system acquisition based, at least in part, on how much time has elapsed since suspending operations. | 08-22-2013 |
20130215870 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, IDENTIFIER ASSIGNMENT DEVICE, BASE STATION, IDENTIFIER ASSIGNMENT METHOD, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM EMBODYING INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTROLLING A DEVICE - The communication system includes a first base station that forms a first cell, a second base station that forms a second cell, and an identifier assignment device that assigns an identifier for identifying the second cell, wherein the first base station transmits first neighbor cell information containing identifier information of neighbor cells of the first cell to the second base station, and the second base station transmits the first neighbor cell information received from the first base station to the identifier assignment device. | 08-22-2013 |
20130215871 | Handover Signaling in Wireless Networks - A base station receives a first radio resource control (RRC) message comprising parameter(s) indicating whether a wireless device supports an enhanced physical downlink control channel (ePDCCH). The base station selectively transmits second RRC message(s) configuring first radio resources of a first ePDCCH. The base station makes a handover decision for the wireless device. The base station transmits a third message to a target base station. The third message comprises at least one of: parameter(s) indicating whether the wireless device supports an ePDCCH, and configuration information of the first ePDCCH. | 08-22-2013 |
20130223403 | METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM FOR OPTIMIZING RADIO NETWORK - The present invention provides a method, a device, and a system for optimizing a radio network. The method provided in the present invention includes: recognizing a terminal that needs optimization processing; according to a degree of influencing a network handover performance indicator or network load performance indicator by each terminal that needs optimization processing, performing handover priority sorting on the terminal that needs optimization processing to obtain a sorted handover priority result; according to the sorted handover priority result, and based on a configuration rule that a smaller handover parameter value is configured for a terminal with a higher handover priority, configuring a handover parameter for the terminal that needs optimization processing; and sending the handover parameter to a corresponding terminal. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223404 | CARE-OF-ADDRESS HANDOVER - Representative implementations of devices and techniques provide care-of-address handover. In one implementation, a message is sent to a server in a point-to-point communication session. The message includes a care-of-address of a first network interface (e.g., wireless network interface) and a care-of-address of a second network interface (e.g., wireline network interface). The care-of-address of the first network interface is a current care-of-address being used in the communication session and the care-of-address of the second network interface is a new care-of-address that a device (e.g., a mobile node) is going to transition to (e.g., handover). The message may also include the server's IP address and TCP (Transfer Control Protocol) port. Furthermore, the message may include the mobile node's TCP port. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223405 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF PROVIDING MEDICAL DATA BASED ON A HANDOVER OF A MEDICAL SENSOR - An apparatus and method are provided for providing medical data based on a handover of a medical sensor. The apparatus includes a medical data client that requests and receives the medical data from the medical sensor; a security module that manages access to the medical data; a data management unit that stores the received medical data; and an event handler that receives an abnormal condition notification from the medical sensor and sends a command to release access to the medical data, based on the abnormal condition notification. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223406 | POWER HEADROOM REPORTING - The disclosure relates to a method for a method for a user equipment configured in carrier aggregation mode to assist an e Node B in estimating the total available output power for each component carrier. The method comprises reporting from the user equipment to the e Node B at least one of RF architecture information of the user equipment, and at least one power parameter value. The disclosure also relates to the corresponding e Node B, user equipment, computer program and storage medium. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223407 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MOBILITY WITH A SPLIT HOME AGENT ARCHITECTURE USING MPTCP - A method is implemented in a network element functioning as a control node for a mobile node (MN) communicating with a corresponding node (CN). The method includes selecting a virtual agent in the network to provide mobility services to the MN. The virtual agent represents a set of mobile resources proximate to the MN. The virtual agent is selected such that the MN receives a better quality of service when communicating with the CN through the virtual agent. A provisioning message is sent to the selected virtual agent including parameters for a session between the MN and CN. The provisioning message initiates a flow redirection at the virtual agent. A provisioning acknowledgement message is received from the virtual agent indicating that the virtual agent is receiving data packets from the CN and forwarding the data packets to the MN at the care-of address. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223408 | ACTION TIMES FOR HANDOVER OF MOBILE STATIONS - A method may include determining whether each of a plurality of target base stations is capable of providing a fast ranging opportunity to a mobile station served by the serving base station, and, for each of the plurality of target base stations which is capable of providing the fast ranging opportunity to the mobile station, determining an action time after which the target base station can send an uplink map to the mobile station, the uplink map indicating when the mobile station should send a fast ranging request. The method may also include sending a handover message to the mobile station, the handover message indicating whether each of the plurality of target base stations is capable of providing the fast ranging opportunity to the mobile station and indicating the action time after which the target base station can send the uplink map to the mobile station. | 08-29-2013 |
20130223409 | Method for Performing Handover in Wireless Communication System - Provided is a method for a user equipment performing a handover in a wireless communication system. The method comprises a step of receiving from a source cell a handover command message, which indicates the handover to a target cell, and a step of performing the handover to the target cell, wherein the handover command message includes information on a low-interference wireless resource to be used by the user equipment inside the target cell. The low-interference wireless resource can be a wireless resource which is operated by the source cell in order to mitigate inter-cell interference, when the source cell is an interfering cell and the target cell is an interfered cell. | 08-29-2013 |
20130230020 | WIRELESS ACCESS POINT PROTOCOL METHOD - The performance and ease of management of wireless communications environments is improved by a mechanism that enables access points (APs) to perform automatic channel selection. A wireless network can therefore include multiple APs, each of which will automatically choose a channel such that channel usage is optimized. Furthermore, APs can perform automatic power adjustment so that multiple APs can operate on the same channel while minimizing interference with each other. Wireless stations are load balanced across APs so that user bandwidth is optimized. A movement detection scheme provides seamless roaming of stations between APs. | 09-05-2013 |
20130230021 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING DYNAMIC AND DISTRIBUTED MOBILITY MANAGEMENT - A method and apparatus are described for supporting dynamic and distributed mobility management (DMM). A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) may attach to a first distributed gateway (D-GW), and configure a first Internet protocol (IP) address based on a prefix locally provided by the first D-GW. The WTRU may move and attach to a second D-GW while carrying out an on-going communication session with a correspondent node (CN). The WTRU may configure a second IP address based on a prefix provided by the second D-GW. The WTRU may use the first IP address for carrying out the on-going session and use the second IP address for a new communication session. | 09-05-2013 |
20130230022 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR SWITCHING OF MULTI-CARRIER - A method for switching of multi-carrier and device are provided. The method comprises: receiving a message sent from a source RAN node corresponding to a first link and comprising information of a second link; according to the information of the second link, establishing a connection between a target RAN node corresponding to the first link and an RAN node corresponding to the second link, so as to perform data transmission. The first link is a link in a first Radio Access Technology (RAT) network, and the second link is a link in a second RAT network. Embodiments of the present invention can ensure the continuity of the throughput of data transmission during switching under aggregation of multiple RAT carriers. | 09-05-2013 |
20130230023 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR AUTOMATIC SEAMLESS MOBILITY - A telecommunication system and method for automatically and seamlessly switching voice calls on a wireless mobile device between different wireless network services during the same conversation without user interaction and without being noticeable to the parties on the call. For example, a voice call at a mobile device using the services of a wireless wide area network (e.g., GSM/GPRS cellular network) may be switched over to a wireless local area network (e.g., 802.11 wireless network), and vice versa, while the call is in progress and without any input from the parties on the call. The system and method also provide a mechanism for maintaining a voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) call while the mobile device moves between wireless access points (AP) and has automatic reconnection in case there is a dropped call. | 09-05-2013 |
20130230024 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND NETWORK NODE - Disclosed is a technique allowing a communication terminal, even after a handover between different types of networks, to determine whether a communication that was in progress in an access network connected before the handover can be resumed or not. In order to receive an incoming CS call during a connection to a PS domain (E-UTRAN | 09-05-2013 |
20130235843 | ALLEVIATION OF TCP PERFORMANCE DEGRADATION DUE TO CARRIER SUSPENSION OR UE TUNE-AWAY - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided in which a probability of occurrence of an event expected to occur within a period of time is determined, where the event comprises one or more of a tune-away event and a suspension event. One or more transmission control protocol parameters are manipulated before the occurrence of the event when the probability of occurrence exceeds a threshold to increase a retransmission time out parameter value, or to maintain a desirable congestion window size. The transmission control protocol parameters may be manipulated by delaying, duplicating or dropping acknowledgements and/or by selectively dropping received packets before, during, or after the event. | 09-12-2013 |
20130235844 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR REDUCING DATA LOSS DURING A SERVING CELL CHANGE IN A MULTI-FLOW HSDPA COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and apparatus for wireless communication may provide for reduced data loss during mobility events in a wireless communication network capable of downlink carrier aggregation. Some aspects of the disclosure provide for maintaining data corresponding to a flow in at least one buffer at a Node B when the Node B acts as a serving cell for the same UE both before and after a serving cell change. Another aspect of the disclosure provides for transferring buffered data from a Node B that acts as a serving cell for a UE before a serving cell change, to a Node B that acts as a serving cell for the UE after the serving cell change. | 09-12-2013 |
20130235845 | SESSION HANDOVER IN MOBILE-NETWORK CONTENT-DELIVERY DEVICES - An application mobility-management entity (“AME”) in a radio-access network detects movement of a mobile device and routes application data for already-active application streams associated with the mobile device to the device's new location by establishing a connection to a second AME in the radio-access network. The second AME merges forwarded application data from/to the first AME for previously active application streams with the new application streams (e.g., new TCP connections) locally and forwards to/from the mobile device through the radio access network elements. | 09-12-2013 |
20130235846 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In a mobile communication system capable of switching between a first communication state and a second communication state, in a case of a first communication state, a VoIP media signal is exchanged between a mobile station UE # | 09-12-2013 |
20130235847 | Network Selection Method and Terminal Device - A network selection method and a terminal device are applied to the field of communication technologies. The network selection method is applied to a terminal device based on a subscriber identity module SIM card, and includes preferentially camping a circuit switched CS domain on a first network and preferentially bearing a CS domain service by the first network; preferentially camping a packet switched PS domain on a second network and preferentially bearing a PS domain service by the second network; when communication quality of the second network fails to meet requirements of the PS domain service, camping the PS domain on the first network and bearing the PS domain service by the first network. | 09-12-2013 |
20130235848 | SYSTEMS, METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR FACILITATING HANDOVER CONTROL USING RESOURCE RESERVATION WITH FREQUENCY REUSE - Systems, methods and apparatus for facilitating handover control using resource reservation with frequency reuse are provided. In one embodiment, the method can include: transmitting scheduling information for the transmission of information on frequencies corresponding to an unreserved portion of a frequency band. The method can also include transmitting scheduling information for the transmission of information on frequencies corresponding to a reserved portion of the frequency band. A frequency reuse scheme can be employed over the frequencies corresponding to the reserved portion of the frequency band, and the information transmitted on the frequencies corresponding to the reserved portion of the frequency band can be handover signaling information. | 09-12-2013 |
20130242939 | INTERNAL INTERFERENCE SIGNALING - In accordance with an illustrative embodiment, a method and device are provided. The method, system, and device comprise an information module and a communication module. The information module may be configured to identify information related to a plurality of signals associated with the device and identify a signal interference affecting a first signal by a second signal of the plurality of signals based on the information. The communication module may be configured to send interference information to a network interface related to the signal interference if the signal interference is identified. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242940 | REPURPOSING PROTOCOL MESSAGES TO FACILITATE HANDOFF - A control element identifies the possibility that a station will transfer to a destination AP, and prepares that destination for a handoff. The control element repurposes messages from the station which indicate a possible near-term handoff, to prepare access points to receive that handoff. The control element treats a neighbor list request as a trigger to select which AP's to identify, to restrict the neighbor list to selected AP's, and to prepare each selected AP for a handoff. In selecting a destination AP, the control element also selects a particular set of related features for the combination of that AP and BSS. When an AP receives a repurposed message, it informs the control element, which selects destination AP's for transfer. The control element treats the repurposed message like a probe request. The control element prepares more than one AP for transfer if handoff is possible to more than one AP. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242941 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR REDUCING HANDOVER OCCURRENCES IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A first base station wirelessly communicates with a terminal. A second base station predicts a handover interval based on handover history information upon receiving from the first base station a handover request for performing a handover of the terminal to the second base station, where the handover interval indicates a time period from a first handover time at which a first handover of the terminal is performed from the first base station to the second base station, to a second handover time at which a second handover of the terminal is performed from the second base station to another base station, and the handover history information indicates a history of handovers that have been performed by the second base station. Then, the second base station determines whether a handover of the terminal to the second base station is permitted or not, based on the predicted handover interval. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242942 | CAPABILITY UPDATE IN A TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - An apparatus configured to operate as a Service Centralization and Continuity Application Server (SCC-AS) within an IP Multimedia Subsystem network. The apparatus comprises a receiver for receiving a SIP INVITE originating from or sent via an access domain and for determining that the INVITE relates to a handover of a User Equipment (UE) currently served by the SCC-AS, to that access domain and for which a session with a peer UE is ongoing. The apparatus further comprises a message handler for determining if capabilities for the ongoing session, identified within said INVITE, have changed with respect to capabilities previously associated with the ongoing session and, if it is determined that capabilities have changed, for causing a SIP message to be sent to said peer UE, the message containing the changed capabilities. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242943 | TRANSMITTING INDICATION OF ACCESS POINT LOADING - An access point is identified for providing service for an access terminal. In some aspects, the identification of an access point is based on loading at one or more access points. In some implementations, an access terminal selects a cell (e.g., the cell that provides maximum throughput) based on the cell load at one or more cells. In some implementations, load estimation is based on information acquired by an access terminal from nearby access points. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242944 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF FEEDBACK SIGNALING - A method and apparatus of feedback signaling using a high speed dedicated physical control channel (HS-DPCCH) includes transmitting to a first cell a first uplink feedback signal that includes channel quality information (CQI) associated with the first cell A second uplink feedback signal that includes CQI information associated with a second cell is transmitted to the second cell. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242945 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IDENTIFYING MOBILE NETWORK PROTOCOL CAPABILITIES - A method and apparatus for improving handover in an IEEE 802.21 compliant communication network. A query is transmitted from a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) to a media independent handover (MIH) server (MIHS). The WTRU includes a target point of attachment (PoA) and/or a preferred mobile inter protocol (MIP) method. The WTRU receives a response from the MIHS indicating the MIP method supported by the target PoA. Based on the received response, the WTRU may make an informed decision regarding handover. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242946 | Efficient Data Delivery in Cellular Networks - Apparatus for use within a radio access network of a cellular communications network, where the cellular communications network belongs to an operator domain. The apparatus comprises a radio control unit for controlling radio channels within one or more cells of the radio access network, and a data source for maintaining or accessing data content, the data source being allocated in use an IP address that is unique at least within said operator domain. The apparatus further comprises an IP packet classifier configurable to inspect packets received from a client and to identify packets addressed to said IP address, and to redirect such identified packets to said data source. The apparatus also comprises an IP packet route selector configured to react to the establishment of a connection between a client and said data source by routing data content packets from said data source to the client via a radio channel or channels controlled by said radio control unit. The IP packet route selector is further able to react to a handover of the client to a peer apparatus responsible for a different set of radio channels by routing data content packets from said data source to the client via an IP backbone network. | 09-19-2013 |
20130250908 | BASE STATION POWER SAVINGS AND CONTROL THEREOF - A method includes sending a message from a first cell to a second cell comprising an instruction the second cell should enter a non-energy savings mode. The sending is responsive to a detection of one or more RF coverage problems for user equipment in a coverage area of the first cell. The second cell can provide RF coverage for part of a coverage area of the first cell. Another method includes receiving a message at a cell that is in an energy savings mode. The message includes instruction(s) the cell should activate itself and the cell is to deactivate its ability to automatically enter the energy savings mode. The second cell transitions to an active mode and deactivates its ability to automatically enter the energy savings mode. In another method, a cell makes a determination a discontinuous carrier activation mode is to be entered and enters the mode. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250909 | Method and System for Implementing Reverse Single Radio Voice Call Continuity - A method and system for implementing reverse Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (rSRVCC) are provided in the present invention. The method includes: after receiving a handover request from a Circuit Switch (CS) domain, a current Mobile Switch Center (MSC) sending a transfer request regarding a terminal subscriber or a session in which the terminal subscriber participates to an IP Multimedia Core Network Subsystem (IMS) Control Function Entity (ICFE); and after receiving the transfer request, the ICFE initiating a media connection establishment flow between the terminal and a far end. The technical solution of the present invention ensures rSRVCC when a terminal hands over from a CS domain to a PS domain. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250910 | Methods for Multi-Point Carrier Aggregation Configuration and Data Forwarding - Methods of multi-point carrier aggregation configuration and data forwarding are disclosed. In one embodiment of the invention, a primary connection is established between a UE and a primary base station in a primary cell with a first UE-ID. A second connection is configured between the UE and a second base station in a secondary cell with a second UE-ID. Component carriers from the primary and the second connections are configured and aggregated. Mobility management functions are performed on the primary connection. In another embodiment of the current invention, a first UE data is received from a primary connection with a UE connecting to a first base station, a second UE data is received from a second base station. The first UE data and the second UE data are combined. A third UE data from a network entity is distributed to the first and the second base station. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250911 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR UPLINK SYNCHRONIZING IN MULTIPLE COMPONENT CARRIER SYSTEM - A user equipment (UE) of re-organizing a timing advance group (TAG) is provided. The UE comprises: a receiving unit for receiving, from a serving base station, secondary serving cell (SCell) configuration information which includes a first field and a second field, the first field including an ScellIndex of an SCell to indicate a removal of the SCell, the second field including at least one of the ScellIndex to indicate an addition of the SCell and a TAG ID indicating a TAG of the SCell, and a radio resource control (RRC) processing unit for performing the addition of the SCell after performing the removal of the SCell from one or more SCells configured in the UE, and for reorganizing the TAG by including the SCell in the TAG. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250912 | BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, TRANSMISSION METHOD AND REORDERING METHOD - A radio communication system, that includes a source base station; a target base station; and a mobile station for receiving either first sequence number or second sequence number, or both of the first and second sequence numbers from the target base station, whereby the first sequence number is transferred from the source base station to the target base station and the second sequence number is added to PDCP (Packet Data Convergence Protocol) SDU (Service Data Unit) which is transferred from the source base station to the target base station. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250913 | COOPERATION AND OPERATION OF MACRO NODE AND REMOTE RADIO HEAD DEPLOYMENTS IN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided for separating control transmissions and data transmissions within the coverage area of a plurality of transmission/reception points or points that are geographically displaced, the plurality of points comprising a macro node and a plurality of remote radio heads (RRHs) coupled to the macro node. Separating control transmissions and data transmissions in the macro node/RRH configuration may allow UEs to be associated with one set of transmission points for data transmissions and the same set or a different set of transmission points for common control signaling. Separating control transmissions and data transmissions may also allow for faster reconfiguration of antenna ports used for UE data transmission compared with reconfiguration via a handover process. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250914 | BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, TRANSMISSION METHOD AND REORDERING METHOD - A reordering method of sending packets, to which numbers indicating the packet order are added, to a mobile station from a base station, and rearranging the order of the packets at the mobile station, this includes forwarding from a source base station to a target base station, packets, not sent to the mobile station before a handover sequence, or packets, a confirmation response of proper reception has not been received from the mobile station, transmitting preferentially those packets from the target base station to the mobile base station and then transmitting packets received from a host station to the mobile station, giving packets information indicating that the packets are jump packets when transmitting the packets to the mobile station, received from the host station with the order jumped, deciding jump packets are not objects of reordering, and performing the reordering process for packets that are objects of reordering. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250915 | BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, TRANSMISSION METHOD AND REORDERING METHOD - A reordering method of sending packets, to which numbers indicating the packet order are added, to a mobile station from a base station, and rearranging the order of the packets at the mobile station, this includes forwarding from a source base station to a target base station, packets, not sent to the mobile station before a handover sequence, or packets, a confirmation response of proper reception has not been received from the mobile station, transmitting preferentially those packets from the target base station to the mobile base station and then transmitting packets received from a host station to the mobile station, giving packets information indicating that the packets are jump packets when transmitting the packets to the mobile station, received from the host station with the order jumped, deciding jump packets are not objects of reordering, and performing the reordering process for packets that are objects of reordering. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250916 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - To provide a communication control system and a communication control method, in which call connection delay can be reduced even in a case where a resource capable of continuing an established communication bearer in a radio communication system in a transition destination cannot be captured when a mobile station transitions to another radio communication system. An eNB | 09-26-2013 |
20130250917 | Method and Apparatus for Performing Access Control in Wireless Communication System - A method and apparatus of performing access control in a wireless communication system is provided. A first home eNodeB (eNB) determines whether an X2 interface between the first HeNB and a second HeNB is available or not for an X2 handover based on a cell access mode of the second HeNB. Or, a first macro eNB determines whether an X2 interface between the first macro eNB and a second HeNB is available or not for an X2 handover based on a cell access mode of the second HeNB. Or, access control is performed by a home eNB gateway (GW). | 09-26-2013 |
20130258997 | Handover of On-Hold Session between Fixed Packet Network and Cellular Network - Methods, systems, and apparatus can be used to provide handover of on-hold sessions in converged networks. In various example implementations, an on-hold session between a mobile communication device and a fixed packet network-connected peer CPE can be handed over from a fixed packet domain to a cellular domain, and vice versa. In various example implementations, an on-hold session between a mobile communication device and a PSTN-connected peer CPE can be handed over from a fixed packet domain to a cellular domain, and vice versa. | 10-03-2013 |
20130258998 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR IMPROVING DATA SERVICE AVAILABILITY - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to methods and apparatus for improving data service availability. Certain aspects provide methods and apparatus for wireless communications by a UE including determining, while the UE is in a coverage area of a first network, that a connection to a second network, comprising a packet data network (PDN), is disconnected locally, and taking at least one action to avoid a rejection of a request to connect to the second network. | 10-03-2013 |
20130258999 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ENABLING HIGH-SPEED COMMUNICATION SERVICES IN MULTI-TECHNOLOGY WIRELESS NETWORK - A method and mobile device (UE) for enabling services in multi-RAT networks which support at least HSPA and LTE, comprising: identifying an initial radio technology on which a UE requesting service is camped, within a current cell; determining an indication of coverage of another radio technology available on the current cell which provides higher speed access than the initial one; deciding carrying the service, either through the initial radio technology or the other one of higher speed access, according to the previous indication. The indication of coverage can be based on any of the following criteria or a combination of them is met: 1) Terminal is camped on a HSDPA capable or LTE capable cell, 2) HSDPA signal strength is higher than a threshold, 3) LTE signal strength is higher than a threshold, 4) Measurements on the Peak Rate of the UE in a past time and in a location. | 10-03-2013 |
20130259000 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, RADIO ACCESS NETWORK APPARATUS AND MOBILE STATION - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes the steps of: transmitting an “Extended Service Request” from a mobile station UE in Idle mode to a mobility management node MME via a radio base station eNodeB; transmitting an “Initial UE Context Setup Request” from the mobile station UE to the radio base station eNodeB, the “Initial UE Context Setup Request containing priority call information; and preferentially allocating resources to the E-RAB for the mobile station UE by the radio base station eNodeB based on the priority call information contained in the received “Initial UE Context Setup Request.” | 10-03-2013 |
20130259001 | Technique for Connection Attempt Handling in a Circuit Switched Fallback Situation - A technique for handling mobile terminating connection attempts for a mobile terminal for which a change of an association from a first routing node to a second routing node is accompanied by a Circuit Switched (CS) fallback is described. A method implementation of this technique comprises the following steps carried out by the first routing node: receiving a first mobile terminating connection attempt to the mobile terminal, in response to receipt of the first mobile terminating connection attempt, determining that the mobile terminal cannot be reached by the first routing node, determining an identity of the second routing node, and transmitting, to the second routing node, a second mobile terminating connection attempt for a CS connection to the mobile terminal. | 10-03-2013 |
20130259002 | SUPPORTING ENHANCED UPLINK DURING SOFT HANDOVER - An enhanced uplink user equipment is in soft handover. A radio network controller selects a primary Node-B out of a plurality of Node-Bs supporting the soft handover. The radio network controller receiving successfully received enhanced uplink data packets from the plurality of Node-Bs. The radio network controller reordered the successfully received enhanced uplink data packets for in-sequence deliver. The primary Node-B sends specified scheduling information to the user equipment that the other Node-Bs does not transmit. At least the primary Node-B transmits acknowledgements and negative acknowledgements to the user equipment. | 10-03-2013 |
20130259003 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING WIRELESS CONNECTION RE-ESTABLISHMENT IN A MULTIPLE COMPONENT CARRIER SYSTEM - Provided are an apparatus and a method for performing radio connection re-establishment in a multiple component carrier system. The present description discloses a terminal including: a cell selection unit which selects a cell for said radio connection re-establishment upon occurrence of failure of wireless connection; a sub-serving cell setting information constructing unit which constructs sub-serving cell setting information for specifying at least one sub-serving cell set for the terminal; a message transmitting unit which transmits a radio connection re-establishment request message for requesting procedures for the radio connection re-establishment and a radio connection re-establishment completion message indicating the completion of the procedures for the radio connection re-establishment, to a base station through the selected cell; and a message receiving unit which receives a radio connection re-establishment message as a response to said radio connection re-establishment request message. | 10-03-2013 |
20130259004 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND MOBILITY MANAGEMENT NODE - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes the steps of: transmitting, by a UE, “Attach Request” for E-UTRAN; transmitting, by an MME, “Attach Reject” in which “#15” is set as “Cause value” to the UE when the MME determines that the UE cannot be connected to a desired external network and determines that the UE can utilize CS communications, upon receipt of the “Attach Request;” and transmitting, by the UE, “Attach Request” for UTRAN/GERAN when the UE receives the “Attach Reject” in which “#15” is set as “Cause value.” | 10-03-2013 |
20130265985 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING DATA CONNECTIVITY BETWEEN A WIRELESS COMMUNICAITON DEVICE AND A FIRST ACCESS NETWORK - A device, method and system for establishing data connectivity between the device ( | 10-10-2013 |
20130265986 | METHOD FOR RE-SELECTING A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The present disclosure relates to a method for re-selecting a communication network. The method comprises receiving a network access request indicating a request to access to a communication network by a communication device, determining upon the basis of the network access request as to whether communication resources of the communication network are available for the communication device, and re-selecting another communication network for the communication device if the communication resources are not available for the communication device. | 10-10-2013 |
20130265987 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR IMPROVING DEVICE HANDOVER DURING A CALL - Disclosed are methods and apparatus for improving the performance of a user equipment handover during a data call. In one aspect, a source base station determines to handover user equipment (UE) to a target base station. The source base station first determines whether the UE is in a data call prior to the handover. The source base station then modifies one or more of connected mode discontinuous reception (CDRX) and semi-persistent scheduling (SPS) parameters with the UE based on determining to handover the UE and determining that the UE is in the data call. | 10-10-2013 |
20130265988 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, MOBILITY MANAGEMENT NODE, SERVING GATEWAY APPARATUS, PACKET DATA NETWORK GATEWAY APPARATUS, POLICY CONTROLLER, AND PACKET SWITCH - A mobile communication system according to the present invention includes the steps of: causing an UE to switch a radio access network in a connection destination from E-UTRAN to UTRAN/GERAN; causing an MME to receive “Delete Bearer Request” to a voice communication packet bearer from an S-GW; and causing the MME to transmit to the S-GW a “Delete Bearer Response” to the “Delete Bearer Request”, without giving an instruction to the UE#1 or the E-UTRAN to release the voice communication packet bearer, if a core bearer disconnection flag is set in the received “Delete Bearer Request”. | 10-10-2013 |
20130265989 | System and Method for Providing Intelligent Cell Reselection for Delay Sensitive Data Applications - A mobile station for receiving delay-sensitive data from a wireless communications network is provided with a data buffer and cell reselection controller. The data buffer receives data from the network and stores the data for communication to a delay-sensitive data application. The cell reselection controller selectively inhibits cell reselection in order to meet requirements of the delay-sensitive data application. By intelligently controlling cell reselection, delay sensitive data may be received in a more reliable fashion, thereby increasing performance of the data application. | 10-10-2013 |
20130272264 | WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK HANDOVER METHOD BASED ON FUZZY RULES - The present invention provides a wireless local area network handover method based on fuzzy rules, the method comprises: the mobile station | 10-17-2013 |
20130272265 | METHOD OF CHANGING A ZONE IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a broadband wireless access system, and more particularly, to a method of performing a zone change more promptly in a base station where an advanced terminal operates in a mix mode. A method for an advanced terminal (AMS) to perform a zone change in an advanced base station (mix mode ABS), which operates in a mix mode of a broadband wireless access system according to an embodiment of the present invention includes: receiving a ranging response message (RNG-RSP) including system information on an advanced terminal supporting zone (MZone) from a legacy zone (LZone) of the advanced base station; and performing ranging in the advanced terminal supporting zone by using the system information. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272266 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, RADIO ACCESS NETWORK DEVICE, AND MOBILITY MANAGEMENT NODE - A handover method according to the present invention includes a step A of transmitting, by MME, “Reloc/HO Req” including “PS/CS HO Indication” to RNC/BSS via MSC, a step B of transmitting, by the MME, “Reloc/HO Req” including the “PS/CS HO Indication” to the RNC/BSS via SGSN, and a step C of transmitting, by the RNC/BSS, “PS to CS Resp” and “Forward Reloc Resp” to the MME after both the “Reloc/HO Req (for a CS bearer)” and the “Reloc/HO Req (for a PS bearer)” are received. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272267 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, SUBSCRIBER MANAGEMENT SERVER, AND SERVER - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes a step A of causing an SCC-AS to transmit an inquiry signal to an HSS when the SCC-AS receives “Invite” addressed to a UE; a step B of causing the HSS to transmit a paging request signal; a step C of causing the HSS to determine a RAT which the UE is served in response to a paging result notification signal including a paging result in at least one of an UTRAN/GERAN and an E-UTRAN; a step D of causing the HSS to transmit serving area information of the UE including information on the RAT which the UE is served to the SCC-AS/S-CSCF; and a step E of causing the SCC-AS/S-CSCF to transfer the “Invite” addressed to the UE, to the UTRAN/GERAN or the E-UTRAN using a terminating call scheme selected based on the serving area information of the UE. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272268 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR VERIFYING RELEASE OF LIPA PDN CONNECTION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for verifying a release of a local IP access (LIPA) packet data network (PDN) connection in a wireless communication system is provided. A mobility management entity (MME) receives a handover preparation message from a source home eNodeB (HeNB), verifying whether the LIPA PDN connection has been released or not on receiving the handover preparation message. If the LIPA PDN connection has been released already, the MME performs a normal handover procedure. If the LIPA PDN connection has not been released, the MME transmits a handover preparation failure message to the source HeNB. | 10-17-2013 |
20130279470 | MOBILE DEVICE-INITIATED INTER-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY HANDOVERS BETWEEN NETWORKS - A method for implementing mobile device-initiated inter-radio access technology (I-RAT) handovers between networks includes a wireless device communicating with a first network using an internet protocol (IP) address that was received from the first network during an initial attachment procedure. The wireless device may initiate an I-RAT handover procedure to connect to a second wireless network using a configuration message that includes a handover attach type. Once the connection with the second network is established, the wireless device may receive the information from the second wireless network using the same IP address. The wireless device may force the wireless device into dormancy and prevent data transfer, and initiate another I-RAT handover procedure to upgrade and connect to the first network, by sending an attach request message that includes a handover attach type. | 10-24-2013 |
20130279471 | WIRELESS CONNECTION SYSTEM, WIRELESS CONNECTION CONTROL METHOD, AND WIRELESS CONNECTION CONTROL PROGRAM - According to one embodiment, a wireless connection system includes: a first electronic device and a second electronic device configured to be wirelessly connected to the first electronic device, the first electronic device including: a connection item presenting module configured to present a connection item enabling a connection to the second electronic device; and a command sending module configured to send out a command to be used for a connection to the second electronic device when the connection item is designated; an access point which relays the command received from the first electronic device to the second electronic device, wherein the second electronic device receives the relayed command, activates a second access point using a key that is indicated by the command, and is wirelessly connected to the first electronic device after the activation of the second access point. | 10-24-2013 |
20130279472 | SYSTEM FOR WIRELESS CONNECTIVITY CONTINUITY AND QUALITY - Configurations are described for maintaining a continuity and quality of wireless signal connection between a mobile device and systems accessible through the internet. In particular, configurations are disclosed to address the challenge of a mobile device that moves through a physical environment wherein the best wireless connectivity performance is achieved by switching between available connection sources and constantly evaluating a primary connection with other available connections that may be switched in to become a new primary connection. The mobile device may be self-propelled or carried by some other mobilizing means. | 10-24-2013 |
20130279473 | METHOD FOR WIRELESS CONNECTIVITY CONTINUITY AND QUALITY - Configurations are described for maintaining a continuity and quality of wireless signal connection between a mobile device and systems accessible through the internet. In particular, configurations are disclosed to address the challenge of a mobile device that moves through a physical environment wherein the best wireless connectivity performance is achieved by switching between available connection sources and constantly evaluating a primary connection with other available connections that may be switched in to become a new primary connection. The mobile device may be self-propelled or carried by some other mobilizing means. | 10-24-2013 |
20130279474 | HANDOVER FOR VIDEO OR OTHER STREAMING SERVICES - Systems and methods are disclosed for providing optimized handover decisions for mobile devices participating in streaming services. In one embodiment, a serving base station in a cellular communications network obtains a play out buffer size for a streaming service of a mobile device. The serving base station then makes a handover decision based on the play out buffer size for the streaming service of the mobile device. In one embodiment, the streaming service is a downlink streaming service to the mobile device, and the play out buffer size is a size of a downlink play out buffer at the serving base station for the downlink streaming service to the mobile device. In another embodiment, the streaming service is an uplink streaming service from the mobile device, and the play out buffer size is a size of an uplink play out buffer at the mobile device for the uplink streaming service. | 10-24-2013 |
20130279475 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND MOBILITY MANAGEMENT NODE - A method of performing a handover according to the invention includes a step A of causing an MME to transmit “Forward Reloc Req” to an SGSN, and a step B of causing the MME to release a PS bearer which has been used for the voice communications and the packet communications of the UE# | 10-24-2013 |
20130279476 | Processing Circuit Switched Services in an Evolved Packet Network - The present invention discloses for the ability for processing circuit switched (CS) services in an evolved packet network. For example, embodiments provide a method that includes: by a mobility management entity (MME), receiving a mobile terminated (MT) service indication from a mobile switching center (MSC); sending the MT service indication to user equipment (UE); and receiving an MT service response returned by the UE and performing subsequent operations according to the MT service response. In the method of the present invention, when an MT service arrives, the MME does not trigger the evolved NodeB (eNodeB) to hand over the packet switched (PS) services of the UE but notifies the UE of the MT service and performs subsequent operations according to the MT service response returned by the UE, thus avoiding the waste of network resources caused by a meaningless handover of PS services. | 10-24-2013 |
20130279477 | SENDING AND ACQUIRING METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR REESTABLISHMENT PREPARATION MESSAGE - Disclosed are a sending and acquiring method, system and apparatus for a radio resource control (RRC) reestablishment preparation message, relating to the technical field of communication and used for improving cell reestablishment success rate for terminals. In the present invention, when a relay node (RN) prepares a RRC reestablishment preparation message, besides preparing the RRC reestablishment preparation message for a target cell, the RN also prepares a RRC reestablishment preparation message for a donor evolved Node B (DeNB) belonging to the RN and/or cells of other RNs managed by the DeNB, and sends the prepared RRC reestablishment preparation message to the DeNB over a handover request message. After receiving the handover request message, the DeNB needs to parse the handover preparation information in the handover request message, and store the obtained RRC reestablishment preparation message of the cell managed by the DeNB. Employing the technical scheme can greatly improve the reestablishment success rate between the terminal and the cell managed by the DeNB. | 10-24-2013 |
20130279478 | Methods and Arrangements in a Cellular Communication System - Methods and arrangements in network nodes in a cellular communication system The methods and arrangements relate to the delegation of serving functions, associated with a mobile terminal, from one node to another The method and arrangement in a delegating entity relate to obtaining ( | 10-24-2013 |
20130287002 | TERMINAL AND METHOD FOR SWITCHING BETWEEN RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGIES - A method includes determining whether a packet switched (PS) signaling connection is released, the PS signaling connection being associated with a first network corresponding to a first radio access technology (RAT), controlling a switching timing to a second network corresponding to a second RAT according to a type of the PS signaling connection, and transmitting a request for switching to the second network. A terminal includes a controller to determine whether a packet switched (PS) signaling connection is released, the PS signaling connection being associated with a first network corresponding to a first radio access technology (RAT), and to control a switching timing to a second network corresponding to a second RAT according to a type of the PS signaling connection, and a transmitter to transmit a request for switching to the second network. | 10-31-2013 |
20130287003 | CELL SEARCH METHOD, FORWARD LINK FRAME TRANSMISSION METHOD, APPARATUS USING THE SAME AND FORWARD LINK FRAME STRUCTURE - A method of and an apparatus therefor searching a cell in a mobile station of a communication system in which a plurality of cells are grouped into a plurality of cell groups, and each cell group includes at least two cells. The method includes detecting a primary synchronization signal and a secondary synchronization signal from a received signal, and identifying a cell based on a combination of the primary synchronization signal and the secondary synchronization signal. The secondary synchronization signal is related to the cell group to which the mobile station belongs and the primary synchronization signal is related to the cell to which the mobile station belongs within the cell group. | 10-31-2013 |
20130287004 | Communication System, Network Handover Processing Method and Apparatus - A communication system, a network handover processing method and a network handover processing apparatus are disclosed. The method includes receiving, by a target evolution NodeB (T-eNB), identity information sent from a user equipment (UE), the identity information being allocated to the UE by a source evolution NodeB (S-eNB); and sending, by the T-eNB, parameters to the UE if identity information, matching the received identity information sent from the UE, is available in the T-eNB, wherein the parameters are allocated to the UE. The apparatus includes a receiving module and a sending module. | 10-31-2013 |
20130287005 | System and Apparatus for Local Mobility Anchor Discovery by Service Name Using Domain Name Service - An apparatus comprising a mobile access gateway (MAG) configured to register an Internet Protocol (IP) address for a mobile node (MN) with a local mobility anchor (LMA) to allow proxy mobile IP version 6 (PMIPv6) mobility management for the MN, wherein the MAG communicates a query message that comprises a PMIPv6 service name to a Domain Name Service (DNS) and obtains the IP address of the LMA from the DNS. Also disclosed is a network component comprising at least one processor coupled to a memory and configured to send a DNS query for a plurality of Service Resource Records (SRV RRs), and receive a DNS reply that comprises a plurality of Fully Qualified Domain Names (FQDNs) for a plurality of LMAs, wherein the DNS query comprises a Proxy Mobile Internet Protocol version 6 (PMIPv6) service name, a protocol name, and a domain name. | 10-31-2013 |
20130287006 | EFFICIENT HANDOVER OF MEDIA COMMUNICATIONS IN HETEROGENEOUS IP NETWORKS - Methods and systems for online incremental adaptation of neural networks using Gaussian mixture models in speech recognition are described. In an example, a computing device may be configured to receive an audio signal and a subsequent audio signal, both signals having speech content. The computing device may be configured to apply a speaker-specific feature transform to the audio signal to obtain a transformed audio signal. The speaker-specific feature transform may be configured to include speaker-specific speech characteristics of a speaker-profile relating to the speech content. Further, the computing device may be configured to process the transformed audio signal using a neural network trained to estimate a respective speech content of the audio signal. Based on outputs of the neural network, the computing device may be configured to modify the speaker-specific feature transform, and apply the modified speaker-specific feature transform to a subsequent audio signal. | 10-31-2013 |
20130287007 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR VOICE CALL FALLBACK TO CIRCUIT SWITCHED DOMAIN - A method for voice call fallback to a circuit switched (CS) domain disclosed in the present invention includes: receiving a Service Request message from a calling user equipment (UE), where the Service Request message includes called number information of a voice call in a CS domain, instructing an evolved NodeB (eNB) to initiate circuit switched fallback (CSFB) handover; receiving a Handover Request message from the eNB, where the Handover Request message includes information required for CS handover, selecting a mobile switching center (MSC) and sending a packet switched (PS) to CS Handover Request message to the MSC, where the PS to CS Handover Request message carries information required for the CS handover and a called number so that the MSC calls a called UE. The corresponding apparatuses and systems are also disclosed. The technical solution of the present invention can reduce the connection delay. | 10-31-2013 |
20130294403 | LONG TERM EVOLUTION ARCHITECTURE AND MOBILITY - A services node (SN) is provided that functions as a local, premise-based gateway that anchors and aggregates a group of radio nodes (RNs). Accordingly, the SN absorbs the functionalities of conventional mobility management entities (MMEs), as well as serving and packet data network gateways, where the SN appears as a single virtual eNB to a macrocellular core network. As a result, complexity associated with aggregating and controlling a large number of RNs (performed by the SN) is hidden from the core network. Additionally, micro-mobility between individual RNs controlled by an SN is completely handled at a local enterprise gateway level, thus significantly reducing mobility-related signaling from impacting an MME pool in the code network. Moreover local data offloading is made possible via the SN. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294404 | MOBILITY SUPPORTING METHOD OF A MOBILE ROUTER - A mobility supporting method of a mobile router is provided, and the method enables controlling mobility of a Mobile Node (MN) based on a network using the mobile router, which acts as a wireless base station and an access router without modifying a network infrastructure of an existing operator. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294405 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR A CONNECTED MODE WITH REDUCED SIGNALING - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. The apparatus preserves a state of a UE in an anchor eNB, wherein the anchor eNB is one of a set of connected cells, the UE being in a connected mode. Each cell of the connected set has a corresponding coverage area. The apparatus then maintains the state of the UE in the anchor eNB when the UE moves from a coverage area of the anchor eNB to a coverage area of another one of the cells from the set of connected cells. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294406 | Cell Access Control Method and User Equipment - A cell access control method and a user terminal are provided, the method includes: obtaining, by a user equipment (UE), cell access information through a pilot channel and/or a synchronization channel; determining a current cell is a macro base station cell or an HNB cell according to the cell access information; determining, when the current cell is an HNB cell, whether the UE is allowed to access the HNB cell according to HNB information of the cell access information, if the UE is allowed to access the HNB cell, performing the access processing, if the UE is not allowed to access the HNB, abandoning the access. A UE is provided accordingly. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294407 | METHOD FOR SRVCC SOLUTION - A method is provided for single radio voice call continuity from E-UTRAN to UTRAN, comprising receiving a single radio voice call continuity request for handover from packet switched access of a source radio access network to circuit switched access of a target radio access network, sending a query to determine whether last active session is a voice only or a video session, and receiving a response to said query indicating whether said last active session is a voice only or a video session. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294408 | RANDOM ACCESS METHOD, EVOLVED NODE B, AND TERMINAL EQUIPMENT - A random access method, an evolved Node B (eNB), and a terminal equipment are provided. The method includes: determining target component carriers to which a User Equipment (UE) is to be handed over, and notifying the UE of information about the target component carriers through a source eNB; and after receiving a dedicated random access preamble sent by the UE, sending a random access response message on at least one component carrier in the target component carriers. The terminal equipment includes: a handover command receiving unit, a sending unit, and a random response receiving unit. Therefore, in a random access procedure of cell handover, the eNB is capable of determining downlink component carriers that a UE monitors, thereby increasing utilization rate of downlink resources. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294409 | Method, Device and System for Implementing Optimized Inter-RAT Handover - A method, device and system for implementing optimized inter-RAT handover are disclosed. In the method, a user equipment or a source network decides to prepare for a handover to a target network. A corresponding target network ID is obtained from a configured mapping between cell IDs and target IDs according to a received cell ID. Target network bearers are set up after determining an access node of the target network. The user equipment is connected to the target network after handover preparation is complete. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294410 | Method, Device and System for Implementing Optimized Inter-RAT Handover - A method, device and system for implementing optimized inter-RAT handover are disclosed. In the method, a user equipment or a source network decides to prepare for a handover to a target network. A corresponding target network ID is obtained from a configured mapping between cell IDs and target IDs according to a received cell ID. Target network bearers are set up after determining an access node of the target network. The user equipment is connected to the target network after handover preparation is complete. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294411 | INTERLACING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION FRAMES - Mechanisms to interlace multiple legacy frames to enhance radio resource utilization are described. Also described are mechanisms to modify a low-latency frame structure to appear as legacy frames. In one aspect, partially blanked-out legacy frames are interlaced with time offsets so that they complement each other to leave no idle system time. To a legacy user equipment, the interlaced frame appears as normal legacy frames used by multiple legacy cells. In another aspect, the low-latency frame is modified to appear as an interlaced frame. Again to the legacy user equipment, the low-latency frame appears as legacy frames from multiple legacy cells. To the low-latency user equipment, the modified low-latency frame still appear as normal low-latency frame. In this manner, radio resources of the legacy base stations are optimally utilized. Also, low-latency base stations are enabled to provide serves to the legacy user equipments without wasting radio resources. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294412 | METHOD FOR AVOIDING IN-DEVICE COEXISTENCE INTERFERENCE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, TERMINAL AND ENODEB - The present invention provides a method, terminal and base station for avoiding device coexistence interference of a wireless communication terminal. The wireless communication terminal includes a Long Term Evolution (LTE)/Long Term Evolution Advanced (LTE-A) communication module and a coexistence communication module. The method includes the following steps: a first sending step, sending a coexistence communication module startup notification message to the base station, and a first interference avoidance step, before sending auxiliary information to the base station, the wireless communication terminal using a Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) mode between the LTE/LTE-A communication module and the coexistence communication module. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294413 | SERVER FOR CONTROL PLANE AT MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING SIPTO BASED SESSION - Disclosed is a method of controlling a session in a serving server taking charge of the control plane within a mobile communication network. The control method may include receiving, by the serving server, a tracking area update (TAU) request message of a terminal from a target base station; retrieving, by the serving server, a previous server that has taken charge of the control plane for the terminal; receiving, by the serving server and from the retrieved previous server, a context response message comprising information indicating that a session for the terminal had been established to be passed through a path over the nodes within a fixed network different from a mobile communication network; deciding, by the serving server, whether gateway relocation is needed; releasing, by the serving server, the established session; transmitting, by the serving server, an accept message comprising information for the processing result to the terminal through the target base station; and establishing, by the serving server a session passing through a path over the nodes within a fixed network different from a mobile communication network based on the information. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294414 | BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION, COMMUNICATION CONTROL SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - In order to improve the use efficiency of radio resources upon executing a CA function, a base station ( | 11-07-2013 |
20130294415 | Dynamic Spectrum Refarming with Multiple Carriers - The present invention relates to dynamic spectrum refarming with multiple carriers. At a first communication system of a first radio access technology, a request is received in a first signaling message from a second communication system of a second radio access technology, the request including information on availability of spectrum blocks shared between the first and second communication systems. The availability of the spectrum blocks may have been determined based on a load of the second communication system. The first communication system performs carrier aggregation mechanisms based on the information with respect to the spectrum blocks, and may transmit a response to the request in a second signaling message to the second communication system, the response including an acknowledgment of an activation/deactivation of at least one additional carrier and/or a corresponding carrier aggregation. | 11-07-2013 |
20130301607 | EXTENDED SERVICE SET TRANSITIONS IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - A mobile device may transition between Extended Service Set (“ESS”) networks seamlessly, such that a consumer never loses the network connection despite the transition. The communication for enabling a transition may be prior to association with that network. The seamless transition may be enabled through the creation and utilization of a central key holder authority that advertises its identity to mobile devices in a pre-associated state. The mobile device can use the key discovery communication along with a key generation method to authenticate and/or associate with a network and transition from one ESS to another. There may be a common root key across ESSs. At each new access point (“AP”) that the mobile device encounters, ESS and key holder identities may be discovered through discovery communications. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301608 | Network Node, User Equipment and Methods Therein for Random Access Handling - A method in a User Equipment ( | 11-14-2013 |
20130301609 | Methods and Systems for Dynamic Spectrum Arbitrage - Methods and system are provided for managing and monitoring allocation of RF spectrum resources based on time, space and frequency. A network may be enabled to allocate excess spectrum resources for use by other network providers on a real-time basis. Allocated resources may be transferred from one provider with excess resources to another in need of additional resources based on contractual terms or on a real-time purchase negotiations and settlements. A network may be enabled to monitor the use of allocated resources on real-time basis and off-load or allow additional users depending on the spectrum resources availability. Public safety networks may be enabled to make spectrum resources available to general public by allocating spectrum resources and monitoring the use of those resources. During an emergency, when traffic increases on a public safety network, the public safety networks may off-load bandwidth traffic to make available necessary resources for public safety users. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301610 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, METHOD OF ROUTING DATA IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND METHOD OF HANING OVER A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, HAVING AN ESTABLISHED DATA CONNECTION TO A LOCAL NETWORK - A wireless communication system ( | 11-14-2013 |
20130301611 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONNECTIONLESS TRANSMISSION DURING UPLINK AND DOWNLINK OF DATA PACKETS - A method and system for uplink-downlink transmission of data packets in a wireless cellular network, during idle state of User Equipment (UE) using connectionless transmission is disclosed. The method establishes S1 common bearer between a Radio Access Network (RAN) node and Serving Gateway (SGW) and S5 common bearer between the SGW and Packet Data Network Gateway (PGW). The method defines a modified Uu interface between the UE and the RAN node. The method appends data packets with UE Identifier (ID) and routing information as packet header information to independently route data packets through wireless cellular network in a self-sustainable manner using the established common bearers and the modified Uu interface. The method secures data packets by providing integrity and ciphering protection. The method eliminates cost of dedicated bearer set up and reduces signaling overhead on the Uu interface thereby improving network efficiency and battery life of the UE. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301612 | SYSTEM FOR MANAGING SERVICES OF WIMAX BASE STATIONS - A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, a base station having a wireless transceiver operable in compliance with a Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access protocol, and a controller to manage the wireless transceiver. The controller can be operable to receive a request from a communication device to access the base station, and to direct the communication device to a second base station upon determining that granting wireless access to the communication device reduces an operating performance of the base station below an operating threshold of the base station. Additional embodiments are disclosed. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301613 | Multi-Streaming Communication Session - A communication session between a first communication device and a second communication device is hosted in an Internet Protocol (IP) based packet data network. A contact server functions as a bridge service between the first communication device and the second communication device. A communication link between the first communication device and the contact server or the second communication device and the contact server is initially a voice-over IP (VoIP) communication link over a wireless data network comprised of a first packet data media stream. The contact server receives the first packet data media stream and at least one other packet data media stream from the first communication device and combines them into a single packet data media stream before transmitting the combined single packet data media stream to the second communication device. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301614 | HANDOVER METHOD AND MOBILITY MANAGEMENT NETWORK ELEMENT - A target mobility management network element receives a forward relocation request message sent by a source mobility management network element, where the forward relocation request message includes single radio voice call continuity SRVCC capability information; and the target mobility management network element sends, to an target access network element, a first request message that carries information of SRVCC operation possible. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301615 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR FACILITATING INTER-SYSTEM HANDOVER FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - A method includes a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) receiving a network information message via a cellular network while the WTRU is in either a first mode or a second mode. The message includes a neighbor cell list that identifies a plurality of wireless access networks available for handoff, including a first network based on a first wireless access technology and a second network based on a second wireless access technology different than the first wireless access technology. When in the first mode, the WTRU performs physical measurements only on signals transmitted from the wireless access networks identified in the neighbor cell list, selects one of the networks for handover; and initiates a handover procedure with the selected network. When in the second mode, the WTRU selects one of the wireless access networks identified in the neighbor cell list using the received information related to the wireless access network. | 11-14-2013 |
20130301616 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM, BASE STATION, AND MOBILE STATION - A wireless communications system including a mobile station MS and base stations BS | 11-14-2013 |
20130301617 | METHOD DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING HANDOFF - A handoff control method includes the following: Handoff status information of a first mobile host (MH) is collected. The handoff status information includes at least one parameter that is used for representing a status that happened during the first handoff from a source access point (AP) to a target AP. A handoff policy is generated based on the handoff status information, and used for optimizing a handoff process of an MH associated with the source AP. The handoff process occurs after the first MH is handed off from the source AP. The handoff policy is sent to the MH associated with the source AP, so the MH associated with the source AP can perform the handoff according to the handoff policy. A handoff control device and a system represent technical solutions that optimize the handoff process, reduce a total time delay of handoff, and increase a likelihood of successful handoff. | 11-14-2013 |
20130308597 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR VIRTUAL SOFT HANDOFF - In some embodiments, a non-transitory processor-readable medium includes code to cause a processor to receive at a tunnel server, a data unit addressed to a communication device, and define, a first instance of the data unit and a second instance of the data unit. The first instance of the data unit is sent to the communication device via a first tunnel defined between at least the tunnel server and a first base station associated with a first network. The second instance of the data unit is sent to the communication device via a second tunnel defined between at least the tunnel server and a second base station associated with a second network. The second instance of the data unit is dropped by the communication device when the first instance of the data unit is received before the second instance of the data unit. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308598 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING WAN AND D2D COMMUNICATION RLC LAYER HANDOVER - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for supporting RLC layer handover between WAN supported D2D communications and direct D2D communications. In one example, a first UE may be operable to transmit a WAN handover request including a peer identifier and a cell identifier associated with a second UE to an eNB, where the first UE and the second UE are engaged in direct D2D communications. The eNB may be equipped to communicate the WAN handover request to a second eNB associated with the second UE and receive a RLC parameter indicating a last successful reception by the second UE. The eNB may transmit the RLC parameter to the first UE. The first UE may be equipped to determine a subsequent content item based on the received RLC parameter and may transmit the subsequent content item to the second UE via the eNB. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308599 | APPARATUS, AND ASSOCIATED METHOD, FOR FACILITATING RADIO CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION WITH AN ICS-CAPABLE WIRELESS DEVICE - An apparatus, and an associated method, for facilitating communication operations with a wireless device that is ICS or DTM capable. A message generator is provided, configured to generate a network-terminated message, the network-terminated message including a media feature tag that identifies support of ICS. When transmitted to a network node, the message is detected. And, a wireless-device-terminated message that provides for mapping of a SIP URI into a calling name presentation. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308600 | SEAMLESS MOBILITY IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - AP's associated with a communication network and any wireless devices desiring contact, operated according to a protocol in which each wireless device selects AP's with which to communicate. A system coordinator causes the AP's to operate so as to guide each wireless device to an AP selected by the system coordinator. This has the effect that, notwithstanding that the protocol involves having the wireless device make the selection of AP, functionally, the AP's make the selection for it. In a 1st technique, multiple AP's share an identifier, with the system coordinator directing one particular AP to respond to the wireless device, thus appearing to wireless devices as a “personal cell”. In a 2nd technique, AP's each maintain identifiers substantially unique to each wireless device, with the system coordinator directing only one particular AP to maintain any particular wireless device's identifier, thus appearing to wireless devices as a “personal AP”. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308601 | Inter-Network Communication Session Handoff - A communication session between a first communication device and a second communication device is hosted in an Internet Protocol (IP) based packet data network. A contact server functions as a bridge service between the first communication device and the second communication device. A communication link between the first communication device and the contact server or the second communication device and the contact server is initially a voice-over IP (VoIP) communication link over a wireless data network. The contact server analyzes a call quality characteristic of the VoIP communication link and causes the communication device having the VoIP communication link to handoff the VoIP communication link from the wireless data network to a cellular communication link on a cellular network when the analyzed call quality characteristic of the VoIP communication link crosses a threshold level. Other embodiments describe handing off from a cellular communication link to VoIP communication link. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308602 | Backhaul Fabric For Wireless Network - A managed surface-space network fabric is presented. The surface-space network fabric can include a spaced-based network fabric and a surface-based network fabric integrated together to form a single fabric managed by a global fabric manager. The global fabric manager cooperates with other fabric managers local to each fabric to establish a communication topology among all the nodes of the fabric. Preferred topologies include paths from any port on a node to any other port on another node in the fabric. The surface-space fabric, and each individual fabric, can function as a distributed core fabric operating as a single, coherent device. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308603 | MULTISERVICE COMMUNICATION DEVICE WITH DEDICATED CONTROL CHANNEL - A multiservice communication device includes a plurality of transceivers that wirelessly transceive data with a corresponding plurality of networks in accordance with a corresponding plurality of network protocols. A control channel transceiver transceives control channel data with a remote management unit including local control data sent to the management unit and remote control data received from the management unit. A processing module processes the remote control data and generates a least one control signal in response thereto, the at least one control signal for adapting at least one of the plurality of transceivers based on the remote control data. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308604 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTING SERVING GATEWAY - The present disclosure relates to the field of communications and discloses a method and an apparatus for selecting a serving gateway. The method for selecting a serving gateway provided in an embodiment of the present disclosure includes: obtaining access points corresponding to at least two packet data network PDN connections that need to be established by a terminal; searching, according to the access points corresponding to the at least two packet data network PDN connections, for serving gateway sets corresponding to the at least two packet data network PDN connections; and when the serving gateway sets have an intersection set, selecting a serving gateway from the intersection set of the serving gateway sets, where bearers corresponding to the at least two packet data network PDN connections are established through a selected serving gateway. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308605 | CENTRALIZED RADIO NETWORK CONTROLLER - In a radio access network, novel systems and methods reduce processing delay, and improve integration with IP networks, by separating user data from connection management and control data at a Node B or at a base station. The user data are routed to an IP (Internet Protocol) switch, whereas the connection management and control data are routed to a centralized radio network controller (RNC). Pursuant to a second embodiment of the invention, a centralized RNC provides improved radio resource management (RRM) functionality by handing all connection management and control data for a plurality of Node B's, thereby simplifying the switching of user data throughout the radio access network. Pursuant to a third embodiment of the invention, a smart IP switch is equipped to switch user data without core network (CN) involvement. Downlink user data are switched independently of uplink user data. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308606 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING MEMBERSHIP VERIFICATION OR ACCESS CONTROL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for performing a membership verification or an access control in a wireless communication system is provided. A mobility management entity (MME) performs the membership verification or the access control of a user equipment (UE), and transmits verified UE membership information to a target HeNB. | 11-21-2013 |
20130315201 | PROCESSING DATA UNITS - An embodiment of a method for processing data units is provided that includes receiving a plurality of data units, of a data stream, having respective sequence numbers and, employing a reordering window, determining whether a newly received data unit of the data stream is a new data unit or a repeated data unit at the receiver and defining a first and a second range of sequence numbers relative to the sequence number of a previously received data unit. A newly received data unit is determined to be either a new or a repeated data unit based on whether the sequence number of the newly received data unit falls within the first or second range, and processed at the receiver based on this determination. A handover condition is detected, and in response thereto the first and second ranges of the reordering window are adjusted for use during the handover condition. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315202 | PROCESSING DATA UNITS - A method, a transmitter and a computer program product for processing data units at the transmitter are disclosed. In one embodiment, data units are transmitted to a receiver according to a protocol and with respective sequence numbers. The protocol indicates that the receiver is to use a reordering window to determine whether a data unit which is newly received from the transmitter is a new or repeated data unit the data stream by comparing the sequence numbers of the newly received data unit and a previously received data unit. A status report is received and based thereon, the sequence number of a next data unit to be transmitted in a new cell following a handover is selectively adjusted such that the next data unit will be determined to be a new data unit. The next data unit is transmitted with the adjusted sequence number to the receiver. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315203 | NETWORK SHARING AND REVERSE SINGLE RADIO VOICE CALL CONTINUITY - Certain networks can operate using circuit switched infrastructure, while other networks may operate using infrastructure for the long term evolution (LTE) of the third generation partnership project (3GPP). Devices can operate across the boundaries of these networks. Thus, such devices as well as the networks may benefit from network sharing in reverse single radio voice call continuity. For example, a method may include requesting handover of a user equipment from a source network to a target network. The method may also include providing a network identification corresponding to the source network while requesting the handover. Alternatively, or in addition, a method may include requesting handover of a user equipment from a source network to a target network. The method may also include determining the target network based on a network identification received previously. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315204 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR MAKING HANDOFF DECISIONS IN ACCESS TERMINALS CAPABLE OF OPERATING AT DIFFERENT TIMES IN BEST EFFORT AND QOS MODES OF TRAFFIC OPERATION - Methods and apparatus for making handoff decisions in an access terminal which can support both best effort and QoS traffic, e.g., when operating in a best effort and QoS mode of operation, respectively, are described. The access terminal receives an indicator indicating the fraction of communications resources not utilized for QoS service and information indicating a number of best effort users being supported by the attachment point. During Qos mode operation, connections to attachment points which can support the access terminal's minimal QoS requirements are identified and then from among the identified set, the attachment point which can provide a connect supporting the most best effort traffic from the access terminal is selected. In best effort mode operation the access terminal selects the attachment point connection which will provide the greatest amount of throughput to the access terminal for best effort traffic. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315205 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION STATION AND TRANSMISSION INTERFACE SWITCHING METHOD THEREOF - A wireless communication station and a transmission interface switching method thereof are provided. A network system includes the wireless communication station and a base station. The wireless communication station and the base station have a first connection therebetween. The wireless communication station disconnects the first connection, establishes a second connection, and establishes a target transmission interface with the base station via the second connection. Alternatively, the wireless communication station does not disconnect the first connection, and establishes the target transmission interface via the first connection. The target transmission interface is formed between the wireless communication station and a base station module, a serving gateway, a packet data network gateway, and a relay gateway of the base station. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315206 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A radio base station includes a mobile communication system, a first relay node and a first radio base station connected via a radio bearer, a second relay node, and a second radio base station connected via a radio bearer. The first radio base station and the second radio base station are connected via a bearer, in which a mobile station is configured so as to conduct a handover process between a first and second state. In the first state a radio bearer is established with the first relay node in order to communicate. In the second state a radio bearer is established with the second relay node in order to communicate. The mobile station is configured such that in the handover process, control signals are transmitted and received via the radio bearer between the first relay node, first radio base station, second radio base station, and second relay node. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315207 | Method and Arrangement for Redirection of Terminal - Methods and arrangements for handling shortcomings when a wireless user terminal ( | 11-28-2013 |
20130315208 | MULTI-ANTENNA TRANSMISSION PROCESS AND SYSTEM AND RELATIVE MOBILE TERMINAL - A multi-antenna transmission process for providing down-link radio coverage from radio base station to mobile terminal in a network for radio mobile communications through a transmission system includes: at least one multi-radiator transmitting antenna, directed towards at least one mobile terminal; at least one database associated with at least one coverage cell of the mobile communications network and containing information about a position of the mobile terminal; processing means cooperating with the at least one multi-radiator transmitting antenna and the at least one database, the processing means being adapted to associate a transmission direction with the position of the mobile terminal, wherein the transmission direction is suitable for reaching the mobile terminal, including the steps of: a) detecting a position of the mobile terminal; b) storing the position into the at least one database; c) determining at least one transmission direction of at least one transmission beam from the at least one multi-radiator transmitting antenna to the mobile terminal depending on the position stored in the at least one database, wherein at least one of the transmission parameters that must be set in the at least one multi-radiator transmission antenna in order to transmit in the transmission direction is associated with the stored position of the mobile terminal. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315209 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND BASE STATION - A source base station eNB# | 11-28-2013 |
20130322399 | SOFT HANDOFF IN OFDMA SYSTEM - Soft handoff in an OFDMA system is disclosed. If the pilot signal strength for a base station exceeds the defined threshold, the base station is added to an active set list. Subcarriers in a plurality of orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols are divided and allocated into subchannels. The OFDM symbols are divided and multiplexed. A soft handoff zone with a first dimension of the subchannels and a second dimension of the divided and multiplexed OFDM symbols is defined. The soft handoff zone has subcarriers with a subchannel definition, for example, an identical permutation. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322400 | MOBILE WIRELESS DEVICE WITH INTELLIGENT NETWORK ACCESS SELECTION - Alternative network access for a mobile device having a first radio and a second radio, or in some cases, only one radio can include using a first radio in a first connection with a first access point. Whether to establish a second connection with a second access point using a second radio is determined. The determination is based on a first set of access conditions associated with the first access point and a second set of access conditions associated with the second access point. The second connection is established with the second access point using the second radio based on the determining, which indicates establishing the second connection. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322401 | MOBILE DEVICE RADIO MANAGEMENT - Alternative network access for a mobile device having a first radio and a second radio, or in some cases, only one radio can include using a first radio in a first connection with a first access point. Whether to establish a second connection with a second access point using a second radio is determined. The determination is based on a first set of access conditions associated with the first access point and a second set of access conditions associated with the second access point. The second connection is established with the second access point using the second radio based on the determining, which indicates establishing the second connection. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322402 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING CHANNEL CODING CONTROL - A method and apparatus for performing channel coding control are provided. The method may include: adding CRC bits to information bits, for performing channel encoding corresponding to the electronic device to generate an encoding result; performing data arrangement corresponding to the electronic device on at least one of the encoding result and a derivative thereof to generate a data arrangement result, for use of generating a processing result corresponding to the electronic device; and transmitting the processing result corresponding to the electronic device to UE. More particularly, for a same set of information bits to be transmitted from a plurality of electronic devices including the electronic device to the UE, the encoding result could be different from that in any other electronic device within the electronic devices, and a coding chain represented by the data arrangement result is different from that in any other electronic device within the electronic devices. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322403 | CELL UPDATE FOR OPTIMIZED SYSTEM ACCESS PROCEDURES BETWEEN BASE STATION SUBSYSTEMS AND MOBILE STATIONS - One embodiment is directed to a method implemented by a mobile station for establishing a downlink temporary block flow (TBF) from a base station subsystem (BSS). Cell re-selection is performed while a READY timer of the mobile station has not expired. A cell update message that includes a radio link control (RLC) data block containing a remaining ready timer value indicating a remaining time of the READY timer, which has not expired, is sent to the BSS for use in determining when a mobile station supports the assignment of a TOI, sending an assigned TOI to that mobile station and establishing subsequent downlink TBFs using the assigned TOI instead of a legacy mobile station identity. Another related embodiment is directed to a method implemented by a BSS for establishing downlink TBFs to a plurality of mobile stations. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322404 | METHOD FOR HANDOVER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK COMPRISING A NUMBER OF SUB-NETWORKS - The present invention discloses a method for carrying out a handover process in a wireless network, wherein the wireless network comprises at least a first and a second base stations belonging each to a different subnet associated of that wireless network and communicating through a first and a second gateways or foreign agents, respectively, and wherein the first base station is used as a serving base station currently in communication with at least one mobile subscriber station (MS). The method provided comprises a step of determining a traffic conveying entity as an intermediate anchoring point, and when the MS moves to a second subnet which comprises the second base station, a path is established for conveying traffic to/from that MS from/to a remote destination. The path comprises the intermediate anchoring point and the first gateway (or the first foreign agent). | 12-05-2013 |
20130322405 | METHOD FOR SUPPORTING NODE MOBILITY IN WIRELESS MESH NETWORK - Provided is a method of data transmission from an access router in a wireless mesh network. The method of data transmission includes: receiving, from a gateway, a broadcast message indicating that a connection to the external internet can be made; establishing a bi-directional path to the gateway; when a new node is connected to the access router, sending information about the new node to the gateway; if there is a data transmission in which a node located within the coverage area of the access router is a destination node, forwarding the data to the destination node. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322406 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENABLING CELL RESELECTION FOR WTRU OPERATING IN DISCONTINUOUS RECEPTION - A method for discontinuous reception (DRX) implemented in a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) during cell reselection including initiating cell reselection; disabling DRX operation, wherein disabling DRX operation enables continuous reception; transmitting a CELL UPDATE message; receiving a CELL UPDATE CONFIRM message; and enabling DRX operation based on the received CELL UPDATE CONFIRM message. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322407 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, PACKET DATA NETWORK GATEWAY, AND SERVING GATEWAY - To avoid a phenomenon that a UE cannot transmit uplink packets even when a TAU/RAU process, handover process, or radio switching process of the UE frequently occurs and an S-GW to which the UE is to be connected is frequently changed in an EPC network to which PMIPv6 is applied. A mobile communication system including an EPC network to which PMIPv6 is applied is configured such that a S-GW#2 determines whether or not to transmit the RA to the UE based on RA transmission information transmitted by a P-GW, when the S-GW to which the UE is to be connected is changed from an S-GW#1 to the S-GW#2 by the TAU/RAU process, handover process, or radio switching process. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322408 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING INITIAL RANGING FOR MACHINE TO MACHINE COMMUNICATION SERVICE IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is an INitial ranging (IN) method for a Machine to Machine communication service in a mobile communication system. The IN method includes if the presence of a terminal attempting IN is recognized, determining whether a service the terminal wants to receive is a mobile communication service or a Machine to Machine communication service; and setting an indicator indicating to use Ranging Preamble (RP) code partition information for available in the determined service, and transmitting ‘IN-related control information for mobile communication’ including the indicator to the terminal. | 12-05-2013 |
20130322409 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND RADIO BASE STATION - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes a process of transmitting information regarding a PCell#1 and a Scell#1 connected by a mobile station UE in control of a radio base station eNB# | 12-05-2013 |
20130329694 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MULTI-RAT TRANSMISSION - A method and apparatus for mobility management, load management, sharing management and configuration update and setup in a mobile network having a first radio access technology node and a second radio access technology node, the first radio access technology node and the second radio access technology node communicating over a backhaul interface. In one aspect the method detects, at the first radio access technology node, that a handover for a user equipment to a new node is required; provides, from the first radio access technology node, handover information to the second radio access technology node over the backhaul interface; and performs the handover of the user equipment from the first radio access technology node to the new node. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329695 | Method and System for Soft Handoff in Mobile Broadband Systems - The present invention provides a method and system for facilitating efficient handoff and data throughput in mobile broadband communication systems. Methods implemented by a system constructed in accordance with the principles of the present invention include selectively enabled soft handoff, performing Layer | 12-12-2013 |
20130329696 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDOVER IN MOBILE CONTENT CENTRIC NETWORK - A handover method in a mobile CCN. In the method, when detecting a UE performing a handover, a source local CCNx node caches data directed to the UE. The source local CCNx node transmits a request to stop transmission of the data directed to the UE to a target local CCNx node based on a condition. The target local CCNx node requests the source local CCNx node to stop transmission of contents that are being cached. The source local CCNx node transmits cached contents to the target local CCNx node. The target local CCNx node requests a CCNx entry node to stop transmission of specific contents based on a condition. The CCNx entry node transmits contents to the target local CCNx node. When detecting, the UE completing the handover, the target local CCNx node transmits the contents received from the CCNx entry node to the UE. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329697 | METHOD OF SEAMLESS ROAMING BETWEEN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS AND CELLULAR CARRIER NETWORKS - A scheme that enables seamless roaming between the WLAN and the cellular carrier network by enabling a user that originates a call in the WLAN and happens to go outside the range of the WLAN to automatically switch over to the cellular carrier network without losing connection with the other party. This solution assumes that the mobile device has the capability to operate in at least two modes that include the WLAN mode and one of the cellular carrier modes, such as the GSM, IS-95 CDMA, IS-136 TDMA, and iDEN. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329698 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COORDINATING A RADIO NETWORK CONTROLLER AND NODE B RESOURCE MANAGEMENT FOR HIGH SPEED DOWNLINK PACKET DATA SERVICE - The architecture of the high-speed shared service provides a Node B yielding various sets of information that answer a set of basic questions that a data service needs. Many potential measurements the Node B can make are provided to the RNC to enable a resource manager to perform certain functions and which can be used to answer the set of basic questions. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329699 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR LOCATION UPDATE IN NETWORKS - A method, system and devices are provided for location update in an e.g. WiMAX based network. An authenticator function is informed on the location of a data path function after a handover has taken place. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329700 | MOBILE TERMINAL WITH A REDUCED HANDOFF DELAY TIME AND A WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEM COMPRISING SAME - Disclosed are a mobile terminal with a reduced handoff delay time and a wireless network system comprising same. A mobile terminal according to one embodiment of the present invention comprises: a sensor unit for generating azimuth angle data; a memory unit which stores a base station table containing data about a next base station corresponding to the orientation of the mobile terminal in the current base station; and a handoff management unit which searches for one or more next base station(s) by using the azimuth angle data from the sensor unit and the base station table, and performs a scanning action with respect to the found next base station(s) in accordance with the search results. | 12-12-2013 |
20130336283 | OVERLOAD CONTROL IN MOBILITY MANAGEMENT ENTITY - Communication systems, such as wireless telecommunication systems, can benefit from enhancements related to overload situations. For example, communication systems that include a mobile management entity may benefit from methods and devices for overload control in a mobility management entity. For example, a method can include detecting a first overload condition in a mobility management entity. The method can also include determining offloading of at least one user equipment from the mobility management entity to an alternative radio access technology based, at least in part, on the first overload condition. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336284 | CONTROLLING COMMUNICATION OF DATA FOR DIFFERENT USER PERSONAS - Data for a first persona of a user of an electronic device is communicated in a first access network, according to a first agreement between the user and a first service provider of the first access network. Data for a second, different persona of the user is communicated in the first access network, according to a second, different agreement. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336285 | SYSTEM FOR FAST DORMANCY ON WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method and apparatus for enabling fast dormancy on LTE wireless connections. In an example embodiment, a user device generates a signal strength measurement report upon receiving an indication that a data transfer via an active wireless connection with a first infrastructure node according to a first wireless communication standard, such as LTE, is complete. The user device submits the signal strength measurement report to the first infrastructure node to trigger a handover. The user device implements the handover to a second infrastructure node to yield a second wireless connection according to a second wireless communication standard, such as WCDMA. Upon completion of the handover to the second infrastructure node, the user device transmits to the second infrastructure node a request to release the second wireless connection. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336286 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING A CLOUD-BASED MOBILITY IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method and apparatus for providing a cloud-based mobility in a wireless network are disclosed. For example, the method receives a path switching request from a user endpoint device. The method then determines if the path switching request is for a regional hand-off. If the path switching request is for a regional hand-off, the method initiates a virtual machine move request for moving a virtual machine providing a mobility support function for a user of the user endpoint device. The method then determines if a response to the virtual machine move request is received. If the response to the virtual machine request is received, the method performs a user plane update and provides a response to the path switching request. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336287 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ENHANCED NETWORK HANDOFF TO WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS - Embodiments relate to systems and methods for an enhanced network handoff to wireless local area networks. A network element, referred to as a network handoff gateway (WHG), can be introduced between a wireless wide area network (WWAN) and a local wireless area network (WLAN). The WHG can maintain c links with both a set of WiFi™ or similar access points local to a wireless device, as well as a cellular network (or other WWAN) to which the device is registered. The wireless device can be tracked by the WHG using GPS or other data. The WHG can proactively acquire and pre-stage data needed to hand a data link of the wireless device off from the WWAN connection to the WiFi™ access points. The acquired data can include authentication information, IP address, or other information to facilitate a faster, more robust transition between the WWAN and WiFi™ or other WLAN connections. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336288 | METHOD, APPARATUS FOR DETECTING UPLINK POWER AND BASE STATION DEVICE - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method, an apparatus, and a base station device for detecting uplink power. The method includes: detecting a modulation and coding scheme and an initial block error rate of an uplink data packet sent by a user equipment; determining, according to a relationship between an index of the detected modulation and coding scheme of the uplink data packet sent by the user equipment and a first threshold, and a relationship between the detected initial block error rate of the uplink data packet sent by the user equipment and a second threshold, whether uplink power of the user equipment is restricted. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336289 | HANDOVER INITIATION METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR IMPROVEMENT OF CELLULAR NETWORK PERFORMANCE - A mobile communication system including at least one individual mobile communicator in a population of mobile communicators served by a plurality of nodes, including at least one base station; wherein at least one individual mobile communicator is operative to at least once associating itself with a serving node from among the plurality of nodes using a serving node selection functionality operative for selecting the serving node so as to increase use of available bandwidth to and from at least one node which provides the individual communicator with an acceptable signal to noise ratio. | 12-19-2013 |
20130343342 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MOBILITY MANAGEMENT - A method for mobility management, an apparatus and a User Equipment (UE) are disclosed. The method includes: obtaining cell set information sent by a cell set in an access network; selecting a target cell set to which a UE may hand over according to the cell set information, and sending information about selection of the target cell set to the target cell set; and receiving information about at least one target cell decided by the target cell set, and providing the information about the target cell to the UE for handover. The method for mobility management between cell sets simplifies mobility management in multi-cell communication and improves performance of the communication system. | 12-26-2013 |
20130343343 | Motion-Based Management of a Wireless Processor-Based Device - A mobile device may be managed based on information about a geographic movement of the mobile device. The geographic movement may take into account a location, a speed, and an acceleration for the mobile device. A movement profile is determined based on the geographic movement. A settings profile is determined based on the movement profile and a profile mapping. Based on the settings profile, resource consumption for the mobile device may be managed by adjusting settings for the device accordingly. | 12-26-2013 |
20140003388 | Controlling Uplink Transmit Power Responsive To Combination Of Received Power Control Commands During Soft Handover In A Communication System | 01-02-2014 |
20140003389 | PROVIDING CIRCUIT SWITCHED SERVICE | 01-02-2014 |
20140003390 | NETWORK DRIVEN CELL RESELECTION METHOD FOR UES PLAYING EMBMS CONTENT IN UNICAST IDLE MODE | 01-02-2014 |
20140003391 | Method and Apparatus for in Sequence Delivery of Downlink Local IP Access (LIPA) Packets | 01-02-2014 |
20140003392 | TRANSMISSION METHOD AND RECEPTION METHOD FOR UPLINK SIGNAL, USER EQUIPMENT, AND BASE STATION | 01-02-2014 |
20140003393 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING HANDOFF FROM GPRS/GERAN TO LTE EUTRAN | 01-02-2014 |
20140003394 | OPTIMIZED BROADBAND WIRELESS NETWORK PERFORMANCE THROUGH BASE STATION APPLICATION SERVER | 01-02-2014 |
20140010202 | MANAGING LINK LAYER RESOURCES FOR MEDIA INDEPENDENT HANDOVER - A method for managing radio resources in the radio access technologies during a handover procedure by proposing new commands primitives for the IEEE 802.21 framework. The primitives allow an application level entity, such as a Quality of Service (QoS) Manager, to enforce radio resources allocation and deletion in the access technologies, either locally or remotely, as well as to receive event notifications from the link layer technologies with the resources reservation and/or deletion result. | 01-09-2014 |
20140010203 | Access Control Method and Apparatus for User Equipment - An access control method and apparatus for a user equipment relate to the field of communications technologies. The method includes sending a first message to a CSG server; receiving a second message that is sent by the CSG server and includes access control information of a user equipment; and performing access control on the user equipment according to the access control information of the user equipment. | 01-09-2014 |
20140010204 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RELEASING USER EQUIPMENT CONTEXT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for releasing a user equipment (DUE) context in a wireless communication system is provided. A home evolved NodeB (HeNB) gateway (GW)/X2-proxy receives a UE context release message, forwards the UE context release message to a source eNB; and releasing the UE context of the corresponding UE. The source eNB and the target eNB may be connected through an indirect X2 interface. Or, a home evolved NodeB (HeNB) gateway (GW)/X2-proxy receives a UE context release request message from a source eNB, and releases the UE context of the corresponding UE based on the UE context release request message. The source eNB and the target eNB may be connected through a direct X2 interface. | 01-09-2014 |
20140010205 | Reporting in a Communication System - Methods and apparatuses for signalling and use of information regarding coexisting radios is disclosed. In the method is it determined whether there is a change in information regarding the coexisting radios because of a handover of the device, and selectively signaling information regarding the coexisting radios from the device based on the determination. A target station can selectively provide control on the device such that if the target station receives information regarding the coexisting radios from the device the control is provided based on said received information, and if the target station does not receive information regarding the coexisting radios from the device the control is provided based on information provided earlier by the device to a source station. | 01-09-2014 |
20140016612 | ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT FOR INITIAL AUTHENTICATION - A mobile device may transition between Extended Service Set (“ESS”) networks while maintaining the same internet protocol (“IP”) address while transitioning. The transition may occur seamlessly, such that a consumer never loses the network connection despite transitioning between networks. The mobile device may receive an IP address from a pool of addresses, such that the mobile device can keep that IP address as it is transitions between networks that each have access to the pool. The assignment of the IP address to the mobile device is from the pool of IP addresses rather than from the AP. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016613 | System and Method for Single Radio Handover - Single radio handovers (SRHOs) between heterogonous networks can be facilitated using several techniques. One such technique includes activating a receiver of a target radio interface in a mobile node without activating a transmitter of the target radio interface, thereby allowing the mobile node to perform target network discovery while the transmitter of the target radio interface remains deactivated. Another such technique includes encapsulating link-layer discovery frames into media independent handover frames (MIH), and then tunneling the MIH frames over a tunnel extending through the source network. This may allow the MN to achieve various handover related tasks without activating the target radio link. Another technique includes establishing a schedule (or delay period) for synchronizing deactivation of the source radio interface with activation of the transmitter in the target radio interface. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016614 | SHORT MESSAGE TRANSMISSION AND HANDOVER PROCEDURES - The present invention relates to an improved method for handover of a mobile node from E-UTRAN to UTRAN in a scenario where SMS is the only service of the mobile node. The improved handover method allows saving radio resources by establishing the signalling connection for SMS exchange in the target network, and avoiding the data connection in the target network, since it is not used. The MME takes the decision to establish or not the data connection in the target UTRAN, and accordingly instructs the SGSN and UE to set the corresponding PDP contexts for the data connection to a “preserved” state, so as to avoid the establishment of same. Embodiments further relate to improved SMS delivery for IDLE mode UEs that activate ISR so as to avoid the involvement of the MSC server. Instead, packet-switched domain nodes are to be involved only. | 01-16-2014 |
20140016615 | WIRELESS BASE STATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - Provided are a wireless base station apparatus and communication control method whereby a peripheral terminal device immediately hands over to a base station apparatus when said base station apparatus is activated. In response to timer values and the number of terminal units within a coverage area, a controller ( | 01-16-2014 |
20140016616 | LOW PRIORITY INDICATION IN EXTENDED SERVICE REQUEST FOR ENHANCED OVERLOAD HANDLING - There is provided user entity and a method for a user entity adapted for interacting with a mobility management entity node MMEI, such as being paged | 01-16-2014 |
20140016617 | Method for Managing Handover of a User Equipment - Methods and arrangements ( | 01-16-2014 |
20140016618 | HANDOVER APPARATUS AND METHOD IN A HETEROGENEOUS WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus are provided for handing over from a Long Term Evolution (LTE) network to a Circuit Switching (CS) network by a call manager in a wireless communication system. The method includes receiving, from an Enhanced Node B (ENB) of the LTE network, a handover required message for a Packet Switching (PS) to CS handover from the LTE network to the CS network, when the PS to CS handover is decided based on measurement reports of a User Equipment (UE); sending, to a Mobile Switching Center (MSC) of the CS network, a PS to CS handover request message including an International mobile subscriber identity (IMSI) for identifying the UE and a target IDentifier (ID) for a target cell of the CS network; receiving a PS to CS handover response message from the MSC; and sending, to the UE via the ENB, a handover command message. | 01-16-2014 |
20140023035 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM FOR TIMING ALIGNMENT IN OVERLAID HETEROGENEOUS WIRELESS NETWORKS - The apparatus includes a base band unit including a processor. The processor is configured to receive a first message, the first message including information identifying a remote radio head and a first time delay, the first time delay indicating a propagation time delay between a user equipment and a base station, receive a second message, the second message indicating the user equipment is associated with the remote radio head, receive a reference signal, the reference signal including a time stamp, determine a second time delay based on the time reference, the second time delay indicating a propagation time delay between the user equipment and the base band unit, determine a time value based on the first time delay and the second time delay, and transmit a data packet to the user equipment via the remote radio head, the transmitting being advanced in time by the time value. | 01-23-2014 |
20140023036 | METHOD FOR TRANSFERRING A SESSION FOR USER EQUIPMENT TO A DIFFERENT BASESTATION RUNNING A NEEDED EDGE APPLICATION - Mobile network services are performed in a mobile data network in a way that is transparent to most of the existing equipment in the mobile data network. The mobile data network includes a radio access network and a core network. A breakout component in the radio access network breaks out data coming from a basestation connected to user equipment, and hosts edge applications that perform one or more mobile network services at the edge of the mobile data network based on the broken out data. When a breakout component is not running a needed edge application, the session for the user equipment may be transferred to a neighboring basestation that is running the needed edge application. | 01-23-2014 |
20140023037 | TRANSFERRING A SESSION FOR USER EQUIPMENT TO A DIFFERENT BASESTATION RUNNING A NEEDED EDGE APPLICATION - Mobile network services are performed in a mobile data network in a way that is transparent to most of the existing equipment in the mobile data network. The mobile data network includes a radio access network and a core network. A breakout component in the radio access network breaks out data coming from a basestation connected to user equipment, and hosts edge applications that perform one or more mobile network services at the edge of the mobile data network based on the broken out data. When a breakout component is not running a needed edge application, the session for the user equipment may be transferred to a neighboring basestation that is running the needed edge application. | 01-23-2014 |
20140023038 | DISTRIBUTED MOBILITY ANCHORING FOR WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method and an information handling system configured to select a mobility anchor point for a mobile device in a distributed mobility anchor point network may comprise collecting information about movement behavior or data transfer behavior of the mobile device, or tunneling overhead of two or more base stations. A mobility anchor point associated with a first base station may be assigned to the mobile device if the mobile device is connected to the first base station for at least a predetermined amount of time, if the mobile device transfers at least a predetermined amount of data via the first base station, or device if a tunneling overhead of the first base station is less than a predetermined level. In some embodiments, a centralized mobility anchor may be assigned to the mobile device if the mobile device is highly mobile and there is no identified base station to which the mobile device is frequently connected. | 01-23-2014 |
20140023039 | STATISTICS FOR OPTIMIZING DISTRIBUTED MOBILITY ANCHORING FOR WIRELESS NETWORKS - Briefly, in accordance with one or more embodiments a mobility anchor point may operate in a distributed mobility anchor network. The mobility anchor point comprises a processor and a memory coupled to the processor, wherein the processor is configured by instructions in the memory to receive a request from a mobile node to connect with a base station, store one or more connection statistics regarding the connect request in a cache, send the one or more connection statistics to a mobility manager, and receive a message from the mobility manager indicating an identity of an assigned mobility anchor assigned to the mobile node. | 01-23-2014 |
20140023040 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SCHEDULING DATA IN CLOUD CELL COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for scheduling data by a new master Base Station (BS) in a cloud cell communication system is provided. The method includes detecting that a master BS for a specific Mobile Station (MS) is changed from an old master BS to a new master BS, before a tunnel which is established between the new master BS and an access gateway is activated, receiving MS data which the old master BS receives through the tunnel which is established between the old master BS and the access gateway and buffers from the old master BS, and scheduling the received MS data. | 01-23-2014 |
20140023041 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS SUPPORTING WLAN-WWAN MOBILITY IN DEVICES - Systems and methods are disclosed for supporting, in a device, Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN)-Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) mobility, data offload, and simultaneous usage of different access networks on a per Access Point Name (APN) basis. The device determines an access network among WWAN and WLAN for a data stream having an APN. The device additionally hands off the data stream according to the determined access network, while maintaining Internet Protocol (IP) continuity. The device further routes packets of the data stream to at least one of a protocol stack or interface for the determined access network in accordance with an inter-system routing policy (ISRP). | 01-23-2014 |
20140023042 | Cellular Network Mobility - A method of providing for the transfer of an IP flow when a client is handed over from a first to a second radio layer node of a cellular communications network. The method comprises establishing said IP flow between a client and an application of a local service network within or connected to said first radio layer node, and sending said IP flow over a radio access bearer extending between the client and the first radio layer node, and maintaining within a mobility database a mapping between an identifier of the client, an IP address of said application, and an IP address of said local service network. Prior to or upon handover of the client from said first radio layer node to the second radio layer node, a request including the client identifier is sent from said second to said first radio layer node or to another node if the central mobility database is maintained in that other node. The client identifier contained in said request is used at said first radio layer node or said other node to identify said mapping in the mobility database, and the application and local service network IP addresses are sent from said first radio layer node or said other node, to said second radio layer node. The application and local service network IP addresses are received at said second radio layer node, and the received local service network IP address are used at said second radio layer node to establish a tunnel between the second radio layer node and said local service network. Said IP flow is switched from said radio access bearer to said tunnel for delivery to the client via said second radio layer node. | 01-23-2014 |
20140023043 | METHOD OF HANDOVER IN CARRIER AGGREGATION SCENARIOS - A method of handover in earner aggregation scenario is proposed in the present invention. In an embodiment of the present invention, the following steps are comprised: a base station sends a handover command to a user equipment, wherein the handover command includes information for indicating a Pcell and a Scell requiring a timing advance different from said Pcell; the user equipment receives the handover command, and performs a random access on said Pcell and the Scell requiring a timing advance different from said Pcell; the base station sends information for indicating corresponding timing advance to said user equipment, according to a successful random access of said user equipment on said Pcell and the Scell requiring a timing advance different from said Pcell By means of the technical solution provided in the present invention, the Pcell and the Scell requiring different timing advance in carrier aggregation scenarios can fee supported. In addition, in some embodiments, by supporting changing Pcell, the success rate of handover in carrier aggregation, scenarios is effectively improved, so an to avoid unnecessary connection reestablishment procedures. | 01-23-2014 |
20140023044 | Delivery of Internet Based Service to User Equipment - A base station ( | 01-23-2014 |
20140023045 | ENHANCEMENT TO MULTIPLE HANDOVER PREPARATION - A communication system includes a plurality of base stations and a user equipment, wherein the communication link is established between the user equipment and a source base station of the plurality of base stations. A method includes: selecting a target cell and a re-establishment cell of at least one candidate handover base station of the plurality on the basis of a measurement report, the measurement report comprising measurements of attributes of cells of the plurality of base stations for a handover; initiating a handover preparation by transmitting a request from the source base station to the at least one candidate handover base station, wherein the request indicates the target cell and the re-establishment cell; carrying out admission control on the target cell and on the re-establishment cell; initiating the handover by transmitting a handover request acknowledgement from the at least one candidate handover base station to the source base station. | 01-23-2014 |
20140023046 | SOFT HANDOFF FOR OFDM - Various embodiments relate to soft handoffs in an OFDM system. Each mobile terminal measures pilot signal strengths of transmissions from adjacent base stations. If the pilot signal strength for a base station exceeds the defined threshold, that base station is added to an active set list. Each mobile terminal notifies the base stations of their active set lists. By providing the set list to the base station controller and the servicing base station, the mobile terminal identifies the sole servicing base station or triggers a soft handoff mode when multiple base stations appear on the active set list. The soft handoff mode uses a combination of scheduling and space-time coding to affect efficient and reliable handoffs. | 01-23-2014 |
20140029570 | METHOD OF SUPPORTING SIGNAL TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION USING AT LEAST TWO RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGIES AND APPARATUS THEREFOR - A method of supporting signal transmission/reception using at least two RATs and apparatus therefor are disclosed. The present invention includes, when a user equipment is simultaneously accessing a 1 | 01-30-2014 |
20140029571 | OPEN WIRELESS ARCHITECTURE (OWA) UNIFIED AIRBORNE AND TERRESTRIAL COMMUNICATIONS ARCHITECTURE - This invention relates to an Open Wireless Architecture (OWA) unified airborne and terrestrial communications architecture providing optimal high-speed connections with open radio transmission technologies (RTTs) between aircrafts and ground cells, and between different aircrafts in Ad-Hoc or Mesh network group, to construct the multi-dimensional unified information delivery platform across the airborne networks and the terrestrial networks wherein the same OWA mobile device or OWA mobile computer can be used seamlessly and continuously both in the aircrafts and on the ground. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029572 | Compressed Mode on Per Frequency Band Basis - Network nodes, stations, and methods for a radio communications system. The disclosure relates to transmitting data in a radio communications system. In particular, methods and devices are presented for transmitting data in a radio communications system where capability information is communicated, said capability information including information on a capability for compressed mode transmissions on a per frequency band basis and where parameters to configure for compressed mode on said frequency band are signaled in case said information in said capability information indicated capability to apply compressed mode transmissions on per frequency band basis. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029573 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING CONTROL INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND DEVICE THEREFOR - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system, more specifically to a method for transmitting control information and a device therefor. The wireless communication system can support carrier aggregation. The present invention relates to a method for transmitting information from a terminal to a base station in a wireless communication system, which includes a step for receiving first information for cross carrier scheduling through at least one primary cell among serving cells formed in a terminal from the base station, and a step for transmitting second information about a secondary cell related to at least one first information among serving cells to the base station through an uplink resource of the primary cell. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029574 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, GATEWAY APPARATUS, TERMINAL ALLOCATION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A wireless communication system of the present invention includes: terminals; a base station that performs wireless communication with the terminals; a gateway apparatus that manages the terminals and the base station; and a server apparatus that authenticates the terminals. The gateway apparatus includes: at least one C-plane processor that processes C-plane; and N U-plane processors that process U plane. Each of the N U-plane processors notifies the C-plane processor of its own load status. The server apparatus notifies the C-plane processor of service levels of target terminals that try to perform entry to a network in which the base station and the gateway apparatus are located. The C-plane processor allocates, based on the load status of each of the N U-plane processors and the service levels of the target terminals, one of the N U-plane processors as an entry destination to the target terminals. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029575 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR OBTAINING SECONDARY TIMING ADVANCE - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method and a device for obtaining a secondary timing advance. The method includes: after a secondary cell activation command is received or after a secondary cell is activated, if a secondary time alignment timer TAT of the secondary cell does not run, initiating, by a terminal, a random access procedure; and obtaining, by the terminal, the secondary TA according to a TA received in the random access procedure. With the method and the device for obtaining a timing advance according to embodiments of the present invention, a terminal initiates a random access procedure to obtain a secondary timing advance after the terminal receives a secondary cell activation command sent by a base station or after a secondary cell is activated, thereby saving signaling overhead and system resources. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029576 | MULTIPLE NETWORK ACCESS SYSTEM AND METHOD - Methods and devices for operating a wireless communication device that can communicate with at least two different wireless networks using a single radio frequency modem are described. The communication device attaches to a first wireless network through the radio frequency (RF) modem, and then detaches from the first wireless network at a predetermined time before a start time of a selected event on a second wireless network. The device attaches to the second wireless network using the same RF modem before the start time of the selected event and collects at least a portion of event data associated with the selected event. After collecting at least a portion of event data, the device detaches from the second wireless network and re-attaches to the first wireless network. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029577 | Handover Signaling in a Wireless Network - A serving base station transmits to a target base station a first message comprising a parameter indicating whether a wireless device supports an enhanced physical downlink control channel (ePDCCH). The serving base station receives from the target base station a second message comprising parameters indicating: a configuration of a subset of subframes in which first radio resources of a first ePDCCH are configured; and a starting OFDM symbol of the first ePDCCH in the subset of subframes. The serving base station transmits a third message to the wireless device comprising the configuration information of the first ePDCCH. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029578 | Call Handoff Between Different Networks - Disclosed are techniques for hosting a communication session in a call server between communication devices. The call server functions as a bridge service between the communication devices joining an original communication link between the first communication device and the call server with a second communication link between the second communication device and the call server. The first communication device includes at least two RF transceivers each capable of communicating with the call server over a separate network. The call server receives a signal from the first communication device indicative of the need to handoff the original communication link to an alternate communication link on an alternate network. The call server establishes the alternate communication link with the first communication device on the alternate network and joins it with the second communication link to maintain the communication session between the communication devices. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029579 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR DETERMINING CONTINUOUS SESSION SUPPORT DURING SUPPORT OF LIMONET IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - According to an embodiment of the present invention, the invention discovers an address of a LGW, which can be sued in HeNB, determines whether session continuity is supported or not when a terminal using the LGW is moved to another HeNB in a network wherein a structure supporting Session Continuity and a structure not supporting Session Continuity are mixed, and processes active mode mobility and idle mode mobility based on the same. To this end, an embodiment of the present invention provides a method for transmitting the LGW and HeNB ID association information through DNS and S1AP, and a method for processing idle mode mobility and active mode mobility by using LGW information and HeNB ID association information in MME. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029580 | HANDOVER DEVICE AND METHOD FOR SERVICE CONTINUITY IN MBMS - Disclosed are a handover device and method for service continuity in an MBMS. Disclosed is a terminal comprising: a transmission unit for transmitting to the terminal and a linked source base station, an MBMS service indicator including information indicating whether an MBMS service is being received, and information on the type of the MBMS service; and a reception unit for receiving from the source base station, an MBMS service response indicator for indicating that the MBMS service is transmitted from a target base station forming a new link with the terminal through a handover, and receiving the MBMS service from the target base station. The present invention enables continuous reception of the MBMS service when cell is changed due to movement while the terminal is receiving the MBMS service. | 01-30-2014 |
20140036866 | PROVIDING SERVICE CONTINUITY BETWEEN HETEROGENEOUS WIRELESS NETWORKS - The disclosure is related to providing service continuity between heterogeneous networks in user equipment. A first cell change procedure may be performed from a packet switched network to a circuit switched network in a first idle mode. Availability of a packet switched domain of the circuit switched network may be determined. A location area update (LAU) may be initiated when a packet switched domain of the circuit switched network is barred. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036867 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING A FORMAT OF A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION CHANNEL BASED ON A HANDOVER STATE - When performing a handover of a user equipment, a base station selects one of first and second algorithms based on a handover state of the user equipment. Then, the base station determines a format of a communication channel with the user equipment based on the selected algorithm and quality of communication with the user equipment. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036868 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PRIORITIZING SMALL CELLS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus are disclosed for prioritizing small cells in a wireless communication network. In one embodiment, the method is implemented in a UE. The method includes the UE prioritizing small cells or a frequency of the small cells in a cell selection or cell reselection evaluation process. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036869 | CELL CHANGE NOTIFICATION CONTROL FOR CSG CELLS - Systems and methods are provided for controlling whether a mobile station is permitted to perform a reselection to a CSG cell, and if reselection is allowed, whether a notification of cell change is required in advance. This control is based on CCN notifications for different radio access technologies. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036870 | Method and Apparatus - A method includes receiving information at a first access node with which a user equipment is associated, said information including timing information of a second access node. The method also includes providing access node information for said user equipment in dependence on said timing information, said access node information defining at least one time period when said user equipment is to at least one of transmit to and receive signals from said at least one of said first and second access node. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036871 | SUPPORT OF DISPARATE ADDRESSING PLANS AND DYNAMIC HA ADDRESS ALLOCATION IN MOBILE IP - Methods and apparatus for enhancing Mobile IP signaling and to support use of disparate addressing plans and dynamic Home Agent allocation in Mobile IP Regional Tunneling are described. The enhanced methods of signaling use an intermediate node, e.g., a Gateway Foreign Agent, straddling different addressing domains, when the signaling controls a process between the intermediate node and an upstream node. The specific intermediate node, its interfaces and upstream addresses can be dynamically selected. The Enhanced MIP signaling includes dynamic allocation of: a regional node at a Foreign Agent, the upstream address of a regional node by the regional node, a Home Agent for a regional node prior to dynamic allocation of the regional node. A method is supported to indicate to a Mobile Node that a dynamically allocated regional node has become invalid triggering enhanced MIP signaling dynamically allocating a new regional node and upstream interface address. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036872 | RESOURCE MANAGEMENT FOR MOBILITY BETWEEN DIFFERENT WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS ARCHITECTURES - A method of and apparatus for handover between a 3GPP based network and a non-3GPP network is disclosed where a policy update to a new gateway is requested. A confirmation of the policy update is sent from the policy and charging rules function (PCRF) to the 3GPP packet data network gateway (PDN GW). The new gateway also confirms the policy update to the currently serving gateway. The tunnel endpoints and radio resources are released between the PDN GW and the evolved Packet Data Gateway (ePDG), thereby freeing the resources previously used by the wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU). A release acknowledgement is sent from the serving gateway to the PCRF confirming the policy update process is complete. The method may be used for handover between 3GPP and non-3GPP networks and vice versa. The method and apparatus may be practiced over the S2b or S2c interfaces. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036873 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE TERMINAL, ROUTER, AND MOBILITY MANAGEMENT ENTITY - With the deployment of the Mobile Routers, some of the mobile devices would access the IP services, e.g. Remote Local IP Access (LIPA), via the local connections provided by the Mobile Router. In such cases, the mobile devices may be detached from the 3GPP access, and thus lose the capability of receiving certain services, e.g. CS domain related services. This invention presented a solution to allow the mobile device to continue enjoying the services provided via 3GPP access by placing the mobile device into a special state and binding Mobile Router's context with the mobile device's context. In this way, the mobile operator's core network would be able to trigger the mobile device to receive the CS service even its 3GPP access connections are removed. | 02-06-2014 |
20140044095 | INTER-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY INTERFERENCE COORDINATION FOR MULTI-STANDARD RADIO ACCESS NETWORKS - A method and system for coordinated interference suppression in a communication system. The communication system implements at least a first radio access technology via a first base station and a second radio access technology via a second base station. The first and second radio access technologies differ from one another. Information relating to an interference signal received at the first base station via the first radio access technology is received at the second base station from a first device associated with the first base station. At a second device associated with the second base station, an interfering user equipment accessing the second base station via the second radio access technology is identified. The identification is based on the information received from the first device associated with the first base station. Interference caused by the identified interfering user equipment is suppressed by the second base station. | 02-13-2014 |
20140044096 | REFERENCE CLOCK CALIBRATION - An apparatus comprising: a first transceiver arranged to communicate over a wireless network, the first transceiver comprising a first clock; and a second transceiver arranged to communicate other than by said wireless network, the second transceiver comprising a second clock. The second sends a request signal to the first transceiver. In response, the first transceiver transitions from a first mode to a second mode and provides to the second transceiver a response signal for calibrating the second clock relative to the first clock. In the first mode the first transceiver performs zero or more calibrations of the first clock relative to the wireless network, and in the second mode the first transceiver performs at least one additional calibration of the first clock relative to the wireless network, the response signal being based on the at least one additional calibration. | 02-13-2014 |
20140044097 | MOBILITY OPERATION IN LTE - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. In an aspect, the apparatus establishes a first and/or second communication link with at least a first cell. The first communication link may be for receiving transmissions and the second communication link may be for sending transmissions. The apparatus performs a handover of one of the first and second communication links to at least a second cell. The apparatus determines a value of a parameter after the handover is performed based on a value of the parameter prior to the handover. In another aspect, the apparatus establishes a first and/or second communication link with at least a first cell. The first communication link may be for receiving transmissions and the second communication link may be for sending transmissions. In such aspect, a virtual cell ID is reconfigured for one of the first and second communication links. | 02-13-2014 |
20140044098 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ESTABLISHING A PDN CONNECTION - A method for use in establishing a packet data network, PDN, connection from a user equipment or UE, to a 3GPP core network via a non-3GPP access network. The method comprises receiving at the non-3GPP access network a request to establish the PDN connection; communicating with the 3GPP core network to establish a tunnel for the PDN connection between the non-3GPP access network and the 3GPP core network and to assign an IP address for the tunnel, which tunnel IP address is used subsequently by the non-3GPP access network to distinguish between the new PDN connection tunnel and at least one other such PDN connection tunnel already established for the UE, wherein the 3GPP core network is responsible for assigning the IP address, and sending address information from the non-3GPP access network to the 3GPP core network. | 02-13-2014 |
20140044099 | HANDLING OF DOWNLINK IP PACKET TRANSMISSION SWITCHING ON DUAL SIM UE - An apparatus and process is provided for handling downlink transmissions to a user equipment (UE) from a service provider wherein the UE is adapted to be associated with two subscriber identity modules (SIMs). The two SIMs are associated with a first communication network and a second communication network such that the UE can request a switch of downlink data via the first communication network to the second communication network. | 02-13-2014 |
20140044100 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER, USER EQUIPMENT, BASE STATION, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - According to embodiments, a base station includes a radio communication unit configured to establish communication with a mobile communication terminal using a plurality of component carriers. The base station further includes a control unit configured to transmit a command to the mobile communication terminal to reduce the plurality of component carriers to one prior to handover of communication between the mobile communication terminal and the base station to another base station. | 02-13-2014 |
20140044101 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER, USER EQUIPMENT, BASE STATION, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - According to embodiments, a base station includes a radio communication unit configured to establish communication with a mobile communication terminal using a plurality of component carriers. The base station further includes a control unit configured to transmit a command to the mobile communication terminal to reduce the plurality of component carriers to one prior to handover of communication between the mobile communication terminal and the base station to another base station. | 02-13-2014 |
20140044102 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING A SERVING CELL CHANGE - A method and apparatus for performing a serving high speed downlink shared channel (HS-DSCH) cell change from a source cell to a target cell are disclosed. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) may be pre-configured with HS-DSCH configuration for the target cell. The WTRU may start monitoring a high speed shared control channel (HS-SCCH) on the target cell using the pre-loaded HS-DSCH configuration for the target cell on a condition that a measurement report is triggered by the event 1D. The WTRU may initiate a timer when the WTRU starts monitoring the HS-SCCH on the target cell. | 02-13-2014 |
20140050196 | Call Setup for Circuit Switched Fall Back Calls - Establishing a circuit-switched fallback (CSFB) call. A request to establish a CSFB call may be received. A first wireless link with a first cell may be released. The first cell may provide packet-switched services but not circuit-switched services. A second wireless link may be established with a second cell. The second cell may provide packet-switched services and circuit-switched services. The CSFB call may be established via the connection to the second cell. Packet-switched registration with the second cell may be performed after the CSFB call is established. | 02-20-2014 |
20140050197 | Method for Providing Information in a Cellular Wireless Communication System - The present invention relates to a method for providing information in a cellular wireless communication system, wherein each cell in said cellular wireless communication system is served by a base station, and said cellular wireless communication system employs a procedure in which a mobile station suffering from a radio link failure (RLF), when being connected to a cell, may attempt to re-establish a connection in another cell, comprising the steps of: detecting a radio link failure (RLF) for said mobile station while connected to a first cell; requesting a radio resource control (RRC) re-establishment for said mobile station in a second cell after said radio link failure (RLF); and providing information, whether said radio resource control (RRC) re-establishment for said mobile station was successful or not, to said first cell and/or to a third cell, wherein said third cell is the cell to which said mobile station was connected before said first cell. Furthermore, the invention also relates to a method in a base station, a computer program, a computer program product, and a base station device. | 02-20-2014 |
20140050198 | Method and Apparatus for Roaming Between Communication Networks - A method and apparatus for managing roaming of a Mobile Node in a Visited network. The Mobile Node is associated with a Home network. In the Visited network, a server selects a Gateway node for use by the Mobile Node based on selection criteria. The server then sends a message to an access node in the Visited network to which the Mobile Node is attached, the message identifying the selected Gateway node. This instructs the Mobile Node to communicate with its Home network via the selected Gateway Node. | 02-20-2014 |
20140050199 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR HANDLING FAILURE OF MOBILITY MANAGEMENT DEVICE IN ISR ACTIVATED SCENARIO - Embodiments of the present invention relate to a method and device for handling a failure of a mobility management device in an ISR activated scenario. The method includes: detecting, by a serving gateway, a failure of a first mobility management device; and when the serving gateway receives downlink user plane or control plane data of a user equipment, paging, by the serving gateway, the user equipment using a downlink data notification message including identity information of the user equipment, in a first radio access network connected to the first mobility management device. | 02-20-2014 |
20140050200 | Method for Efficiently Performing InterRAT Handover in a Radio Access System - A method for performing handover in a first type of cell by a terminal supporting an inter-radio access technology (interRAT) handover includes the steps of searching for cells of a second type that are operating in accordance with a communication type different from that of the first type of cell; receiving a minimal reception signal quality value and signal quality offset information from a second type of base station which is found in the step of searching for cells of the second type; determining whether or not the found second type of base station is available for service based on a signal quality measurement value, a power compensation value, and the minimal reception signal quality value and signal quality offset information of the found second type of base station; and performing handover to the second type of base station when the latter is determined to be available for service. | 02-20-2014 |
20140056284 | LONG TERM EVOLUTION (LTE) MOBILE ANCHORING - A device receives roaming information associated with a user equipment (UE), a current eNodeB conducting a current Internet protocol (IP) session with the UE, and a plurality of eNodeBs that are neighboring the current eNodeB. The device also selects, based on the roaming information and from the plurality of eNodeBs, an optimal eNodeB to which to handover the UE, and establishes a preemptive IP session with the optimal eNodeB. The device further initiates a handover of the current IP session and the UE from the current eNodeB to the optimal eNodeB, where the current eNodeB acts as an anchoring point for a bearer path associated with the UE during the handover. | 02-27-2014 |
20140064245 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DYNAMIC ASSOCIATION ORDERING BASED ON SERVICE DIFFERENTIATION IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS - Embodiments relate to systems and methods for dynamic association ordering based on service differentiation in wireless local area networks. A WiFi™ or other access point can broadcast beacon information to surrounding stations, and receive probe requests from those stations seeking to associate with the access point. The access point can determine a classification for each station, depending on station attributes such as subscription status, handoff status, or others. Stations receiving a higher classification can enter the association process sooner than those with lower classifications. The association order can be managed by inserting a delay in the probe response, by broadcasting the classifications which will be processed in the next beacon interval, or by adjusting the order in which association steps will be performed. Stations having higher classifications can be associated more quickly than lower-classification stations, in contrast to conventional association techniques which handle probe requests in the order received. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064246 | MINIMIZING MAPPING AND SIGNALING FOR DATA PATH AGGREGATION - A method and system for transporting packets between an access node and a core node via a proxy node. The access node has an access node address, the core node has a core node address, and the proxy node has a proxy node address. A first packet for transmission to the core node is received from the access node. The first packet includes a first source address field including the access node address and a first destination address field including the core node address. An uplink static mapping entry with a longest address prefix matching the access node address in the first source address field is selected. The uplink static mapping entry is associated with the proxy node address. The access node address in the first source address field is replaced with the proxy node address associated with the uplink static mapping entry. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064247 | Cell Size and Shape Estimation in Heterogeneous Networks - A telecommunications node ( | 03-06-2014 |
20140064248 | Base Station, User Equipment, Radio Network Controller and Methods Therein - Some embodiments herein relate to a method in a base station ( | 03-06-2014 |
20140064249 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING HANDOVER OVER INTERNET - A method and apparatus for supporting a handover through the Internet. A source proxy performs receiving, through an eNB from a UE, a connection request to a server, establishing a first TCP session with an anchor proxy designated for the server, and transferring data received from the server through the first TCP session, receiving a handover preparation notification including an IP address of the UE from the eNB, as the UE is handed over to a target eNB; transferring session information associated with the first TCP session and information associated with a target proxy related with the target base station; transferring, to the target proxy, the session information associated with the first TCP session, and when a handover start notification is received from the eNB, freezing the first TCP session, and transferring, to the target proxy, state information associated with data being transmitted through the first TCP session. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064250 | Methods And Apparatuses For Resource management In A Multi-Carrier Telecommunications System - The embodiments of the present invention relate to apparatuses and methods for resource management in a multi-carrier system wherein a plurality of component carriers (CCs) is defined per cell. According to a method in an apparatus corresponding to a radio base station, a message is assembled comprising information on the structure of the cell served by the radio base station; the information including one or more CCs used in the cell that is/are available for a user equipment for performing initial access in the cell. The method also comprises, transmitting the assembled message to the user equipment and indicating to the user equipment to what resources to use for random access in the cell. The exemplary embodiments of the present invention also relates to a method in the user equipment, to a radio base station and to a user equipment. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064251 | Method and Apparatus - A method includes receiving information at a user equipment from a first apparatus, the information indicating to the user equipment is to communicate with a second apparatus. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064252 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR SELECTING A CHANNEL ACCORDING TO A DEVICE'S MOBILITY - The present invention relates to a method of selecting a channel, and more particularly, to a method of selecting a channel according to a Medical Wireless Body Area Network (MBAN) device's mobility, and of using same. The method includes: receiving, by a Medical Body Area Network (MBAN) master, a connection request signal including information on mobility from an MBAN device; transmitting, by the MBAN master, a connection response signal to the MBAN device in response to the received connection request signal; and allocating a channel for the MBAN device according to the information on mobility in the received connection request signal. | 03-06-2014 |
20140071938 | CONFIRMATION OF BASE STATION IDENTIFICATION TO IMPROVE HANDOVER - A method of wireless communication is presented. The method includes receiving an operating frequency and base station identification code (BSIC) for a neighboring base station, determining an expected received signal based from the operating frequency and BSIC, comparing a received signal with the expected received signal, and reporting a result of the comparing. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071939 | INTRA FREQUENCY CELL RESELECTION IN TD-SCDMA - A user equipment (UE) may reduce reselection delays when the UE is in the idle mode. In such instances, the UE adaptively adjusts a cell reselection timer based at least in part on the availability of a downlink time slot resource. The adjustment of the cell reselection timer may be based at least in part on the availability of the downlink time slot resources. The cell reselection timer is adjusted (e.g., shortened or scaled down) when the downlink time slot resources are unavailable to the UE. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071940 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTIVE BETTER SYSTEM RESELECTION FOR WIRELESS DEVICES CAPABLE OF CELL RESELECTION - Aspects of the present disclosure are directed to methods and apparatus for selective better system reselection for wireless devices capable of cell reselection. An apparatus for wireless communication is configured to receive a message from a current system, the message including a neighbor list having one or more neighbor systems. The apparatus compares the neighbor list to a local preferred systems list, and determine an existence of a preferred neighbor system in the local preferred systems list. The preferred neighbor system has higher priority than that of the neighbor systems in the neighbor list. The apparatus determines whether to perform Better System Reselect (BSR) for the preferred neighbor system instead of cell reselection based on the determination. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071941 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR PCI SELECTION TO REDUCE INTERFERENCE FROM UNLOADED CELLS - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided in connection with improving PCI selection and/or allocation so as to reduce interference from unloaded cells. In one example, a network entity is equipped to determine whether a cell is loaded or unloaded, and allocate a PCI from a common pool of PCIs to the cell when the cell is unloaded. In another example, a network entity is equipped to determine that a cell is to transition between an unloaded state and a loaded state, and use a first PCI from a common PCI pool associated with the cell in the unloaded state and a second PCI associated with the cell in the loaded state. In another example, a communications device is equipped to attempt to access a first cell associated with a first PCI which indicated that the first cell is unloaded. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071942 | APPARATUSES, SYSTEMS, AND METHODS FOR OFFLOADING DATA TRAFFIC - A mobile communication device is provided with a first wireless module, a second wireless module, and a controller module. The first wireless module is configured to perform wireless transmissions and receptions to and from a telecommunication network using a cellular technology. The second wireless module is configured to perform wireless transmissions and receptions using a WiFi technology. The controller module is configured to perform operations for communication controls, and the operations include searching for APs via the second wireless module, reporting a result of the search to the telecommunication network via the first wireless module, and connecting to one of the searched APs via the second wireless module according to a first instruction received from the telecommunication network via the first wireless module for switching data traffic from the telecommunication network to the one of the searched APs. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071943 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING COOPERATIVE COMMUNICATION SERVICE BETWEEN MACRO BASE STATION AND SMALL CELL BASE STATION IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for providing a cooperative communication service by a macro Base Station (BS) in a mobile communication system is provided. The method includes generating at least one small cell BS group by grouping small cell BSs if there are small cell BSs of which a number is equal to or larger than a threshold small cell BS number within a service coverage of the macro BS, establishing a cooperative interface with a representative small cell BS among small cell BSs included in the at least one small cell BS group, and providing a cooperative communication service with the at least one small cell BS group using the cooperative interface. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071944 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DISTINGUISHING CELLS WITH THE SAME PHYSICAL CELL IDENTIFIER | 03-13-2014 |
20140071945 | Device Triggering Method and Network Element Device - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a device triggering method and device. A device triggering method includes: receiving, by a mobility management network element, a device application trigger request; and sending a request carrying the device application trigger request to an access network element to make the access network element trigger a device; or, sending a request carrying the device application trigger request to a gateway network element to make the gateway network element trigger a device. A solution according to the embodiments of the present invention improves initiative and real-timeness in triggering an M2M device or an H2H device. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071946 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CARRIER ASSIGNMENT, CONFIGURATION AND SWITCHING FOR MULTICARRIER WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - As part of carrier assignment and configuration for multicarrier wireless communications, a single uplink (UL) primary carrier may provide control information for multiple concurrent downlink (DL) carriers. Optionally, control information for each DL carrier may be transmitted over paired UL carriers. Carrier switching of UL and/or DL carriers, including primary and anchor carriers, may occur during normal operation or during handover, and may occur in only the UL or only the DL direction. A unidirectional handover is performed when only an UL carrier or only a DL carrier is switched as part of a handover. Switching of UL and/or DL carriers may be from one component carrier or a subset of carriers to another component carrier, another subset of carriers, or all carriers in the same direction. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071947 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER USING PACKET DATA CONVERGENCE PROTOCOL (PDCP) REORDERING IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Improving communication efficiency in handover re-establishing an ARQ entity in a mobile communication system is disclosed. The method includes transmitting first Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) Packet Data Units (PDUs) correctly received from the source cell, together with a special indication requiring reordering of the first PDCP PDUs, from a Radio Link Control (RLC) receiving buffer to a PDCP receiving entity when a handover command message from a source cell to a target cell is received; buffering the first PDCP PDUs in a PDCP PDU reordering buffer by the PDCP receiving entity in response to the special indication; and when a second PDCP PDU is received from the target cell through a new RLC receiving entity for the target cell, outputting third PDCP PDUs up to a PDCP PDU before a first missing PDCP PDU having a sequence number higher than that of the second PDCP PDU from the PDCP reordering buffer. In the method, a PDCP entity performs reordering, thereby improving efficiency of communication. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071948 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER USING PACKET DATA CONVERGENCE PROTOCOL (PDCP) REORDERING IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Improving communication efficiency in handover re-establishing an ARQ entity in a mobile communication system is disclosed. The method includes transmitting first Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) Packet Data Units (PDUs) correctly received from the source cell, together with a special indication requiring reordering of the first PDCP PDUs, from a Radio Link Control (RLC) receiving buffer to a PDCP receiving entity when a handover command message from a source cell to a target cell is received; buffering the first PDCP PDUs in a PDCP PDU reordering buffer by the PDCP receiving entity in response to the special indication; and when a second PDCP PDU is received from the target cell through a new RLC receiving entity for the target cell, outputting third PDCP PDUs up to a PDCP PDU before a first missing PDCP PDU having a sequence number higher than that of the second PDCP PDU from the PDCP reordering buffer. In the method, a PDCP entity performs reordering, thereby improving efficiency of communication. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071949 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING SYNCHRONIZATION IN BASE STATION AND USER EQUIPMENT - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method and device for synchronization in base stations and user equipments. Specially, a method for synchronization in base stations is disclosed, which includes: dividing cells into one or more group(s) based on a predetermined rule, such that a Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH) procedure is performed with respect to a group from the one or more group(s) of cells, so as to acquire for a user equipment a Timing Advance (TA) for use in transmissions. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071950 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER IN WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM FOR SUPPORTING COMMUNICATION BETWEEN DEVICES AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING SAME - The present invention provides a ceaseless communication method between devices in a wireless access system for supporting communication between the devices, a method for switching the communication to a cellular network, and an apparatus for supporting the same. A method for performing a handover to the cellular network in the wireless access system for supporting the direct communication between the devices according to one embodiment of the present invention, includes the steps of: detecting the generation of a handover condition to the cellular network in a first device for performing the direction communication between the devices; transmitting a message for requesting a bandwidth for the cellular network to a base station; receiving a bandwidth response message including the bandwidth allocation information for the bandwidth allocated to the first device as a response to a bandwidth request from the base station; and enabling the first device to transmit data through the base station and the cellular network on the basis of the bandwidth allocation information for the bandwidth. | 03-13-2014 |
20140079019 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR HARD HANDOFF IN HRPD - Various embodiments are described to assist in reducing handoff delays and the blackout period(s) associated with inter AN (access network) hard handoffs. The hard handoff procedure of method disclosed herein establishes or initiates a connection (A10-type connection) between a target AN and a packet data serving node (PDSN), unlike known hard handoff approaches that wait until traffic channel assignment to establish or initiate such connection. The PDSN may optionally bicast data packets to both the source and target ANs since each is communicatively coupled to the PDSN during a given time period. In the event bicasting is unavailable or unused, a communication tunnel between the source and target ANs may be created and used to transmit data packets between them. | 03-20-2014 |
20140079020 | Radio Network Controller, a User Equipment, a Radio Network Node and Methods Therein - A radio network controller | 03-20-2014 |
20140079021 | APPARATUSES AND METHODS FOR CAMPING BACK TO LTE-BASED NETWORK AFTER FINISHING CSFB CALL WITH NON-LTE NETWORK - A mobile communication device is provided with a wireless module and a controller module. The wireless module performs wireless transmissions and receptions to and from a Long Term Evolution (LTE)-based network and a non-LTE network. The controller module blocks any outgoing Circuit-Switched (CS) service in response to finishing a CS Fallback (CSFB) call and having an ongoing Packet-Switched (PS) session with the non-LTE network, and performs an idle mode cell reselection procedure via the wireless module to camp back to the LTE-based network in response to the outgoing CS service having been blocked. Also, the controller module unblocks the outgoing CS service in response to camping back to the LTE-based network. | 03-20-2014 |
20140079022 | METHODS FOR MOBILITY CONTROL FOR WI-FI OFFLOADING IN WIRELESS SYSTEMS - Systems, methods, and instrumentalities are provided to implement wireless off-loading. A WTRU may send a first Wi-Fi measurement report to a mobile communication network. The first Wi-Fi measurement report comprises one or more of an identity of a Wi-Fi node, a signal strength value, or a load status. The WTRU may receive a Wi-Fi connection command from the mobile communication network. The Wi-Fi connection command may include one or more of an identity of a candidate AP, security information of the candidate AP, a priority value, a channel value, or a delay timer. The WTRU may select one of the received Wi-Fi network identities for association and may attempt to associate with the selected Wi-Fi network identity. The WTRU may further receive a request to initiate pre-authentication. The WTRU may initiate pre-authentication with a Wi-Fi node. The WTRU may send a second Wi-Fi measurement report to the mobile communication network. | 03-20-2014 |
20140079023 | Method of Internet Protocol (IP) to IP handover - Methods of IP to IP handover for VoIP calls are disclosed. Handover can occur using UDP in connectionless mode to switch networks, a hybrid approach including establishing both a TCP session and a UDP session and handing off using the UDP session, utilizing a network SIP proxy to maintain connection with the IMS server while the mobile device switches networks connecting the mobile device to the SIP proxy, using a modified Connection Manager that permits multiple IP connections simultaneously, and connecting via an on-device virtual network to an on-device router which reroutes calls to the appropriate network are detailed. | 03-20-2014 |
20140079024 | Method of Facilitating Handoff - A method of configuring routers facilitates handoff of user equipment from a router to another router. The method includes configuring a virtual interface in a current router used by user equipment. The method also includes assigning a global address to the virtual interface. The global address is assigned to the virtual interface that is used to facilitate handoff of the user equipment from a current router to a new router. A system, router and user equipment are configured to implement the method. | 03-20-2014 |
20140079025 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING EXTENDING FEMTOCELL COVERAGE - Femtocell coverage can be extended across a coverage area by providing a cluster of femtocell access points (FAPs). Each FAP is independently registered with a core network and provisioned with a location area code common to each FAP. At hand-in from the macrocell network, an association is made between the mobile station and the hand-in FAP, which becomes an anchor FAP for the duration of the mobile station's presence within the cluster. Calls between the mobile station and the core network are routed via a servicing FAP of the cluster and the anchor FAP. | 03-20-2014 |
20140086207 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR ACQUIRING LOAD INFORMATION - The present invention discloses a method, an apparatus and a system for acquiring load information. In one method, a source access controller and a target access controller can interact through RAT handover related messages so that a source RAT system can acquire load information of a target RAT system when an inter-RAT PS handover is performed. This enables load balancing between different RAT systems so as to guarantee communications quality of the systems. In another method of the present invention, the source access controller and the target access controller interact through a RAN RIM based load information request message and an RIM based load information response message, so that the source RAT system can acquire load information of the target RAT system before an inter-RAT PS domain handover is performed. This enables load balancing between different RAT systems so as to guarantee the communications quality of the systems. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086208 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COORDINATING CHANGE OF OPERATING FREQUENCY - Methods and apparatus are described. According to a method, a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) communicates with a base station using a first base station operating frequency and a set of cell configuration parameters. The WTRU receives information indicating a second base station operating frequency to use for communications with the base station at a given time. The WTRU communicates with the base station using the second base station operating frequency and the same set of cell configuration parameters on or after the given time. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086209 | METHOD FOR SIMULTANEOUSLY RECEIVING LTE AND 1X IN SRLTE DEVICE - Methods, apparatuses and computer readable media are described that configure wireless circuitry of a wireless communication device. The wireless communication device establishes a connection to a first wireless network using first and second receiving signaling chains. In response to detecting a radio frequency tune-away event, the wireless communication device reconfigures only one of the radio frequency signaling chains to receive signals from a second wireless network when a set of receive signal conditions for the second wireless network is satisfied. The wireless communication device reconfigures both of the radio frequency signaling chains to the second wireless network when the set of receive signal conditions is not satisfied. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086210 | DATA PROCESSING METHOD AND DEVICE - A data processing method is provided for forwarding data in the case of handover between heterogeneous networks. The data processing method includes: when a user equipment (UE) is handed over from an originating network to a target network, receiving, by the originating network, a data forwarding address obtained by the target network; creating a data forwarding tunnel between an originating network gateway and a target network gateway according to the data forwarding address; and forwarding data to the target network through the data forwarding tunnel. A data processing device is also provided. The lossless data processing solution can overcome the problem of data loss in the case of handover between heterogeneous networks in the existing technology, reduces the time of user service interruption and enhances the user experience. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086211 | DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD, OFFLOADING POINT DEVICE, USER EQUIPMENT, AND SYSTEM - An embodiment of the present invention provides a data transmission method, which includes: receiving offloading control signaling sent by a user equipment, where the offloading control signaling carries a cellular network identifier and a wireless local area network WLAN identifier of the user equipment; establishing correspondence between the WLAN identifier of the user equipment and all bearer channels of the user equipment; determining a bearer channel corresponding to all or a part of the user data streams. Embodiments of the present invention further provide a corresponding device and system. Through the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present invention, a transmission rate of a system can be increased. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086212 | INTERFERENCE MANAGEMENT IN WIRELESS NETWORK - Interference management in a wireless network is disclosed in this document. Two networks with overlapping frequency bands and coverage areas are configured to cooperate in order to mitigate mutual interference. Some embodiments relate to medium reservation in a first network to protect a transmission in a second network, while other embodiments relate to aligning communication parameters between the networks. | 03-27-2014 |
20140086213 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING UPLINK SYNCHRONIZATION IN MULTIPLE COMPONENT CARRIER SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for performing uplink synchronization in a multiple component carrier system are provided. The method includes: receiving a handover command message from a first base station, the handover command message including a timing alignment value for adjusting uplink timing of a secondary serving cell of a second base station; performing handover from the first base station to the second base station based on the handover command message; adjusting the uplink timing of the secondary serving cell of the second base station based on the timing alignment value; and performing a random access through the secondary serving cell of the second base station based on the adjusted uplink timing. According to the present invention, deactivated secondary serving cells of a target base station are rapidly activated, and increase efficiency of uplink data transmission after the handover. | 03-27-2014 |
20140092864 | Mobile Wireless Device with Internal Network to Interface Between an External Network and a Device User Interface - A mobile wireless communication device to host an internal packet-protocol network to interface between an external network and a user-interface of the device. A first transceiver provides a static channel to the user-interface. A second transceiver receives content, such as streaming media, from the external network over a wireless channel. Received content is buffered and provided to the user-interface by the first transceiver at a second data rate. The device may request a change to the first data rate to avoid buffer overflow and exhaustion. The second transceiver receives notice from the external network of one or more destination POPs to which the system is predicted to roam, and receives identical synchronized content from the first POP and at least one predicted destination POP during a transition period without additional negotiation. Redundant content received from multiple POPs. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092865 | TRANSMISSION OF UPLINK CONTROL INFORMATION IN INTER-ENB CARRIER AGGREGATION - A user equipment (UE) for communication in a wireless network supporting inter-EUTRAN Node B (eNB) carrier aggregation has a receiver to communicate with a first eNB corresponding to a primary cell (PCell) in the wireless network and a second eNB corresponding to a secondary cell (SCell) in the wireless network. The receiver is configured to receive downlink data through a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) in the SCell. The UE has a processor configured to, in response to receiving the downlink data, generate a hybrid automatic repeat request acknowledgement (HARQ-ACK) for the SCell. A transmitter of the UE is configured to transmit, through a first physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) in the PCell, uplink control information (UCI) including the HARQ-ACK for the SCell. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092866 | Node and Method for Enabling a Wireless Terminal to be Served by Multiple Cells in a Communications Network - Example embodiments presented herein are directed towards a wireless terminal and base station, and corresponding methods therein, for providing a handover for a subset of bearers associated with the wireless terminal. The subset of bearers is less than a total number of bearers associated with the wireless terminal. Thus, upon the completion of the handover procedure, at least one bearer will stay connected with a source base station. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092867 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR REDIRECTION BETWEEN DISPARATE SYSTEMS - Disclosed are a method and a system for inter-system redirection. The method comprises: a base station sending a first message to a terminal, instructing the terminal to perform redirection; and the terminal accessing the redirected network; wherein the first message carries at least one of the following: a type of wireless access technology, an identifier of whether to redirect, threshold information of redirection, recognition information of the redirected cell, carrier frequency information, return indication of redirection failure, and grouping information of redirection. The present invention solves the problem in the related art of mobile terminal in a HRPD network performing completely autonomous reselection between different systems, thus reducing the network load, lowering network operating costs, and ensuring to the greatest extent the quality of service for users. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092868 | Direct Communication Among Devices - Method, operation of a method, and a result of execution of computer program instructions embodied on a non-transitory computer readable memory in a mobility management entity which determines whether a source and destination address of certain Internet protocol data flow are within a specific network in an evolved packet system for evaluating and controlling potential opportunities for device to device communication among two or more proximately located user equipment. In response to determining that the target serving gateway is the source gateway, identification information of the source user equipment is sent to a target serving gateway. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092869 | Local Gateway Reselection - A method of local gateway reselection, for a local gateway in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises informing a core network of the wireless communication to trigger a local gateway reselection, when at least one of parameters associated with the local gateway changes, wherein the parameters include an access point name request by a user equipment of the wireless communication system, a local gateway address, a local gateway load balancing, and local gateway failure case. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092870 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDOFF BETWEEN SOURCE AND TARGET ACCESS SYSTEMS - Systems and methods for switching among heterogeneous networks and inter-working between a source access system and a target access system. An inter-system handoff control component can facilitate setting an IP tunneling by the mobile unit, wherein IP addresses for inter-working security gateway and Radio Access Network of the target access system can be identified. The inter-system handoff control component can then implement tunneling between the source system and the target system, wherein signaling/packeting associated with the target system can be transferred over the source system. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092871 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMPLEMENTING TRACKING AREA UPDATE AND CELL RESELECTION IN A LONG TERM EVOLUTION SYSTEM - The invention performs long term evolution (LTE) tracking area updates (TAUs), and tracking area code (TAC) and public land mobile network identification (PLMN-ID) assisted optimized wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) cell reselection. An evolved Node-B broadcasts system information including at least one system information block (SIB) based at least in part on an enhanced universal terrestrial radio access network (E-UTRAN) parameter response message sent by an evolved packet core (EPC) network. A WTRU generates a new TAC, which represents a tracking area identification (TA-ID) of a new cell, based on the system information, and compares the new TAC to an existing TAC, which represents a TA-ID of a previous cell. The WTRU transmits to the EPC network a TAU request message including the TA-ID of the new cell. The EPC network sends either a TAU accept message or a TAU reject message to the WTRU. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092872 | COMPLETELY REDUNDANT CONNECTION AND HANDOVER IN CELLULAR INDUSTRIAL RADIO NETWORKS - Apparatus for securely transmitting data between a mobile subscriber ( | 04-03-2014 |
20140098786 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING SESSION MOBILITY, AND APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR REGISTERING IP MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM - An individual IMS terminal acquires address and place information of a service discovery server present in the local IP network from an AP. Next, the individual IMS terminal may query the service discovery server to find out an SIP URL address of a sharing IMS terminal. When the individual IMS terminal finds out the sharing IMS terminal, its own IMS subscription information is transmitted to the sharing IMS terminal. The sharing IMS terminal is dynamically registered in the IMS depending on the received IMS subscription information. When the process ends, the sharing IMS terminal has the same IMS subscription information as the individual IMS terminal, such that the session mobility control provided by the IMS may be applied as it is. | 04-10-2014 |
20140098787 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SWITCHING CALL IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for switching a call by a User Equipment (UE) supporting a Voice Call Continuity (VCC) scheme in a mobile communication system is provided. The method includes detecting that there is a need for switching a voice call from a first access network to a second access network that is different from the first access network while the UE supporting the VCC scheme transmits/receives data in the first access network through an old bearer which is set up with the other party UE, performing a new bearer set up operation with the second access network, and transmitting/receiving voice data with the other party UE through the old bearer in the first access network and transmitting/receiving voice data with the other party UE through the new bearer in the second access network until a point in time. | 04-10-2014 |
20140098788 | Mobile Communication System, Base Station Device, Mobile Station Device, and Mobile Communication Method - A mobile communication system includes a mobile station device and a base station device. The base station device includes a cell identification information transmission unit which transmits cell identification information of base station devices transmitting radio signals of the same synchronization channel, to the mobile station device when there are at least two base station devices transmitting radio signals of the same synchronization channel within a predetermined communication area. The mobile station device includes a measurement result transmission unit which performs a measurement process based on the cell identification information of the base station devices and transmits the measurement result acquired by the measurement process to the base station device. | 04-10-2014 |
20140098789 | METHOD, USER EQUIPMENT AND BASE STATION FOR INTEROPERATION BETWEEN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK AND WIRELESS WIDE AREA NETWORK - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method for interoperation between a wireless local area network WLAN and a wireless wide area network WWAN, comprising: sending a wireless local area network media access control WLAN MAC address to a base station through a radio resource control RRC message; and accessing the WLAN network of the base station using the WLAN MAC address. In the method of the present invention, the WWAN and the WLAN can provide the user equipment and the base station with data service together or complementally, and the control method for the WWAN and the WLAN is simple. | 04-10-2014 |
20140098790 | DATA SESSION CONTINUITY BETWEEN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Embodiments disclosed herein provide systems and methods to provide data session continuity between wireless networks. In a particular embodiment, a method provides receiving a request to create a data session for a wireless communication device exchanging communications with a wireless local area network via a wireless access point. The method further provides determining an access point identifier for the wireless access point and selecting a control system for a cellular communication network of a plurality of cellular communication networks based on the access point identifier. The method further provides anchoring the data session to the control system. | 04-10-2014 |
20140098791 | METHOD AND NETWORK DEVICE FOR CREATING AND DELETING RESOURCES - A method, device and system for creating resources during a user equipment (UE) hands over from a non-3 | 04-10-2014 |
20140098792 | ROAMING ENCODED INFORMATION READING TERMINAL - A portable encoded information reading (EIR) terminal for incorporation in a data collection system having a host computer, a plurality of peer EIR terminals, and a plurality of interconnected networks including one or more wireless networks, can comprise a central processing unit (CPU), a memory, an encoded information reading (EIR) device configured to output raw message data containing an encoded message or decoded message data corresponding to an encoded message, and at least one wireless communication interface. The EIR terminal can provide IEEE 802.11-conformant wireless distribution system services, including association, disassociation, distribution, integration, and re-association, to the peer EIR terminals. The EIR terminal can be associated with a home network and have a home address belonging to the address range associated with the home network. | 04-10-2014 |
20140105174 | STATE MIGRATION OF EDGE-OF-NETWORK APPLICATIONS - A system and method that externalizes mobile device state migration (i.e., checkpointing) without being dependent upon any particular Edge Application (EdgeApp) proxy server or cellular network base station. In this manner, the Edge Application (EdgeApp) proxy server does not have to be aware of a migration process, yet will enable state information to be provided to other EdgeApp proxy/server nodes at the edge of the network (cell tower). | 04-17-2014 |
20140105175 | Random Access Failure in Wireless Device Multiple Timing Advance Groups - A wireless device receives a control command to transmit a random access preamble on a first secondary cell. The wireless device repeatedly transmits the random access preamble until a random access response corresponding to the random access preamble is received or a predetermined number of transmissions is reached. If the predetermined number of transmissions is reached without receiving the random access response, the wireless device stops transmission of the random access preamble and keeps a connection with the base station active. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105176 | Circuit Bearer Control - The invention makes use of the Short Message Service (SMS) or Unstructured Supplementary Services Data (USSD) capabilities present in today's cellular networks as a means of providing call control and presence signalling and, in particular, for providing the means of effecting hand-off at least from/to the cellular domain to/from the WiFi domain. SMS and USSD were originally designed as engineering channels, but SMS has become highly popular as a service in its own right. SMS and USSD are built into all existing cellular (GSM, CDMA etc.) network and predate the current GPRS overlay. In particular, SMS and USSD can be used while a call may be active in the cellular domain, and a handset may send and receive such messages, with an additional facility which may be used by the invention of receiving acknowledgements of successful receipt of an outgoing SMS by the messaged party—effectively a confirmation from the network. The present invention proposes to use SMS or USSD as a means of an adjunct call control and presence signalling in the cellular domain between a handset and the SIP domain. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105177 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO BASE STATION CONTROLLER, AND RELOCATION METHOD - Radio base stations connect by radio lines with radio terminals in cells that make up each radio base station and relay data communication realized by the radio terminals on bearers on radio lines. Base station controllers record correspondence information of the data flow of data communication with the radio terminals and the bearers on the radio lines and, by referring to the correspondence information, effects termination of data communication with the radio terminals. When, in a state in which a drift base station controller relays and transfers data communication between radio base stations to which the radio terminals are connected and a serving base station controller, the serving base station controller is transferred to the drift base station controller, the plurality of base station controllers then report to the drift base station controller the correspondence information from the serving base station controller. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105178 | METHOD FOR SIMULTANEOUS HANDOVER IN A WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM THAT SUPPORTS DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATION AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING THE METHOD - Disclosed are a method for simultaneously handing over devices which perform device-to-device communication to another cell in a wireless access system that supports device-to-device communication, and an apparatus for supporting the method. The method for simultaneously handing over devices in a wireless access system that supports direct device-to-device communication according to one embodiment of the present invention may comprise the following steps: detecting an occurrence of a handover condition in a first device that performs direct device-to-device communication; transmitting, to a second device that performs direct device-to-device communication, a cell state check request message for requesting information on a channel state with respect to a base station; searching for a target cell for handover by the first device; receiving, from the second device, a cell state check response message containing information on the channel state; searching for a common cell in which the target cell searched for by the first device and the target cell contained in the information on the channel state coincide with each other; and transmitting, to the second device, a common cell indication message for indicating the simultaneous handover of devices. Here, the common cell indication message may contain information on the common cell. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105179 | Call Handoff Between Different Networks For Hybrid Mobile Device - Disclosed are techniques for hosting a communication session in a call server between communication devices. The call server functions as a bridge service between the communication devices joining an original communication link between the first communication device and the call server with a second communication link between the second communication device and the call server. The first communication device includes at least two RF transceivers each capable of communicating with the call server over a separate network using separate telephone numbers. The call server establishes an alternate communication link with the first communication device on an alternate network and joins it with the second communication link before disabling the original communication link to maintain the communication session between the communication devices. | 04-17-2014 |
20140112305 | DISTRIBUTED SEAMLESS ROAMING IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - One embodiment of the present invention provides a system for configuring an access point in a wireless network. During operation, the access point discovers one or more existing access points associated with the wireless network. The access point then obtains a set of configuration information from one existing access point, and synchronizes a local timestamp counter to a selected existing access point, thereby allowing the access point to be configured without using a centralized management station. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112306 | PRIORITIZATION OF USERS FOR SWITCHING BETWEEN CO-EXISTENCE WIRELESS SYSTEMS - Techniques for prioritizing user equipments (UEs) for switching between wireless systems are disclosed. The wireless systems may be part of a small cell and may include a WLAN system and a cellular system. In one design, a network entity (e.g., the small cell) may identify a plurality of UEs communicating with a first wireless system. The first wireless system may be one of a plurality of wireless systems providing communication coverage for the UEs. The network entity may determine priorities of the UEs for switching from the first wireless system to a second wireless system. The network entity may then select at least one UE among the plurality of UEs to switch from the first wireless system to the second wireless system based on the priorities of the UEs. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112307 | USER TERMINAL AND COMMUNICATION APPARATUS FOR PREVENTING INTERUPTION OF COMMUNICATION IN INFORMATION CENTRIC NETWORK AND METHOD THEREOF - A user terminal for preventing communication interruption during handoff in an information-centric network is provided. The user terminal includes a connection registration unit configured to register the user terminal in an access node for connection to the access node, and a communication interruption prevention unit configured to receive, from the access node in which the user terminal is registered, zone information including identification information on other access nodes that are candidate handoff targets of the user terminal, and transfer the zone information to a counterpart communication device that currently performs communication, wherein the user terminal receives a message from the counterpart communication device through one of the other access nodes that are candidate handoff targets during the handoff. Accordingly, communication interruption is prevented. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112308 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING UPLINK SYNCHRONIZATION IN MULTI-COMPONENT CARRIER SYSTEM - The present invention relates to an apparatus and method for performing uplink synchronization in a multi-component carrier system. A method for performing uplink synchronization according to the present invention comprises the steps of: receiving, from a base station, a message that indicates a time alignment value for adjusting an uplink time of a sub-serving cell; adjusting the uplink time on the basis of the time alignment value; and driving a validity timer, which indicates the period of validity of the time alignment value when the sub-serving cell is deactivated. According to the present invention, with respect to a sub-serving cell, which performs a random access procedure to ensure and maintain a time alignment value, the validity of the time alignment value and whether or not uplink synchronization in the sub-serving cell is made can be quickly ascertained, and efficiency of uplink data transmission can increase. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112309 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING HAND-OVER - A method of performing hand-over in a personal basic service set (PBSS) including a plurality of stations and one coordinator is provided. An association request frame comprising PCP capability information, and requesting to associate to the PBSS, is received from each of the stations. The PCP capability information comprises information regarding at least one of whether each of the stations supports a power source capability of continuous power supply, whether each of the stations supports a channel time allocation function, and whether each of the stations supports a network clustering function. An association response frame, indicating whether the association request received from each of the stations is approved, is transmitted to each of the stations, and a priority to be a coordinator of the stations is determined based on the PCP capability information. Hand-over is performed with one of the stations according to the determined priority. | 04-24-2014 |
20140119337 | METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM FOR ACQUIRING APPLICATION INFORMATION IN WLAN - A method, a device, and a system for acquiring application information in a WLAN are provided by embodiments of the present invention. A controller sends a switch request message to an unassociated neighboring AP. The switch request message includes an identifier of a mobile terminal and a designated channel. The unassociated neighboring AP switches from an original working channel of the unassociated neighboring AP to the designated channel and monitors the mobile terminal according to the identifier of the mobile terminal so as to acquire application information. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119338 | Method for Switching Communication Links to a Mobile Terminal Device Which is Associated with a Local Radio Area of a Network - A mobile terminal device determines whether it is located in the local radio area of the network or in another radio area and the determined radio area is indicated to an application of the network. The application is used to control a communication request addressed to the mobile terminal device. Communication requests coming in on the network can be directly switched to the local radio area using the application or can be directly forwarded to the mobile radio address in the mobile radio network of which the mobile terminal device is located, thereby avoiding or substantially reducing roaming or forwarding of communication requests from the local radio area to another radio area and thereby achieving an economical operation of mobile telephone terminal devices with local radio area. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119339 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING ERROR FOR CARRIER AGGREGATION AND APPARATUS FOR SAME - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system. More particularly, the present invention relates to a method for carrying out a hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) process when a plurality of cells are configured, comprising the following steps: receiving scheduling information for transmitting data from a first cell; operating a first HARQ process from the first cell based on the scheduling information; and relaying an operation of the first HARQ process to a second HARQ process of a second cell which is different from the first cell, when a predetermined condition is satisfied. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119340 | TRAFFIC OFFLOAD VIA LOCAL NETWORK BASED ON APN-SPECIFIC OR NON-APN-SPECIFIC INFORMATION - In order to perform SIPTO@LN for PDN connections, MME performs: receiving, from a HeNB, information about one or more GWs, said information comprising an IP address of each local GW and at least one among APN-specific information for said one or more local GWs and/or a non-APN-specific indication for said one or more local GWs; initiating, based on subscription data and the received information about a particular local GW among said one or more local GWs, deactivation of one or more PDN connections by sending to UE a NAS Deactivate Bearer Request message indicating that reactivation is required for said one or more PDN connections; and selecting, in response to a reactivation attempt by the UE and based on said subscription data and the received information about said particular local GW, said particular local GW to allow SIPTO@LN to be performed via said particular local GW. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119341 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR HANDOFFS BETWEEN TECHNOLOGIES - Systems and methods for providing a handoff between technologies are disclosed. An intra-technology handoff occurs where the same integrated chassis handles the session for the different access technologies. In an intra-technology handoff, the same IP address and the session can be maintained through the handoff. The mobile node can undergo a handoff without issuing a registration request in some embodiments. An inter-technology handoff occurs from one integrated chassis to another integrated chassis. The integrated chassis can preserve session and context information in a session manager and in a handoff from one access technology to another the same session manager can be chosen with the session and context information remaining intact even though the access technology has changed. The integrated chassis can provide an access technology handoff where the core network does not notice any change and applications running on or delivered to the mobile node are not effected. | 05-01-2014 |
20140119342 | BASE TRANSCEIVER STATION APPARATUS AND MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - When carrying out a downlink handover, a source base transceiver station from which a mobile node is moving receives packets to be transmitted, via a wireless section, to the mobile node from an IP network, and copies and transfers them to a destination base transceiver station to which the mobile node is moving. On the other hand, when carrying out an uplink handover, the source base transceiver station compares the reliability of transport blocks which are received via a wireless section, from the mobile node and which are demodulated and decoded by the local station with that of transport blocks which are received via an IP network, from another base transceiver station and which are demodulated and decoded thereby, packetizes selected transport blocks with a better quality, and transmits them to a communications-partner node according to a route table, thereby implementing distribution of traffic via the IP network. | 05-01-2014 |
20140126532 | SEAMLESS MOBILITY FROM 3G NETWORK TO WIFI NETWORK - According to one aspect, a multi-function gateway device (MFG) receives a request for terminating a first data session identified by a first IP address, the request originating either directly from a user equipment (UE), or indirectly from the UE via a radio access controller (RNC), wherein the UE is communicatively coupled to a 3G radio access network (RAN), such that data traffic of the first data session is routed to a first serving GPRS support node (SGSN). According to one aspect of the invention, the MFG further determines whether the UE is connected to the MFG via a WiFi RAN, any 3G call teardown related messages are blocked in order to keep the 3G GTP-U tunnel up. Continue routing user's data originating via the WiFi RAN over the GTP-U tunnel with the SGSN. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126533 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO REDUCE SIGNALING SPIKES WHEN MOVING BETWEEN WLAN AND WWAN COVERAGE AREAS - Methods and apparatus for wireless communication in a mobile device that includes relinquishing a client side high level operation system (HLOS) internet protocol (IP) context of a user equipment (UE), when the UE, connected to a network via a Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) connection, is transported to a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) connection area. Aspects of the methods and apparatus include maintaining a Packet Data Protocol (PDP) context of the UE, when the UE, connected to the network via the WWAN connection, is transported to a WLAN connection area. Aspects of the methods and apparatus include setting a linger timer for a certain period of time to defer deactivation of the PDP context and deactivating the PDP context when the linger timer expires. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126534 | NETWORK NODE, USER NODE AND METHODS FOR POWER BOOSTING DPCCH - A method in a network node for enhancing a channel estimate based on a Dedicated Physical Control Channel, DPCCH, between a user node and the network node is provided. The DPCCH has a first power. The network node receives ( | 05-08-2014 |
20140126535 | BSS DERIVED INFORMATION FOR CS TO PS SRVCC - A method is implemented in a network executing a mobile switching center (MSC) in a global system for mobile communication (GSM) Edge Radio Access Network (GERAN). The method is for managing a circuit switched (CS) to packet switched (PS) single radio voice call continuity (SRVCC) handover to an Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN) without impact on a voice call caused by sending a User Equipment (UE) E-UTRAN Radio Access Capability Information Element (IE) from a Mobile Station (MS) to a Base Station Subsystem (BSS) including at least one base transceiver station (BTS). | 05-08-2014 |
20140126536 | TRIGGERING LOCATION AREA UPDATE - When at user equipment UE transitions between radio access technology cells, at the transition a timer for controlling when the UE is to send a periodic location registration is reset. This avoids the UE being implicitly detached when it is unable/blocked in the packet-switched PS domain from performing a RAU but would be able to perform a LU, particularly when the UE is in PS/CS modes 1 or 2. Five different embodiments are detailed: the LU timer T3212 is reset with a value of time remaining in a tracking area update TAU timer T3412; T3212 is reset with an initial value for T3212; the RAU timer T3312 is reset with a value of time remaining in the TAU timer T3412; and the T3212 or T3312 reset is conditional on a value of time remaining in a PS backoff timer T3346 exceeding the value of time remaining in the TAU T3412. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126537 | Method and Apparatus for Obtaining Reliable E-DCH Reception for Transmission of Scheduling Information - A system to obtain an enhanced-transport format combination (E-TFC) for transmitting a scheduling information (SI) in a soft handoff (SHO) to a serving enhanced Data Channel (E-DCH) cell in a heterogeneous Network (HetNet). The system comprises receiving an E-TFC selection power backoff (ESPB) value from an active macro-cell, the active macro-cell being the service E-DCH cell; determining the E-TFC based on an indicated power of a serving grant minus the received ESPB value and a set of E-TFC power offset value received from the active macro cell, if an MAC-e/i data PDU to be transmitted is multiplexed with the SI; otherwise, determining the E-TFC based on the indicated power of the serving grant and the set of E-TFC power offset value; and transmitting the MAC-e/i PDU to the active macro cell using the indicated power of the serving grant and an enhanced dedicated channel selected based on the determined E-TFC. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126538 | CACHING OVER AN INTERFACE BETWEEN A RADIO ACCESS NETWORK AND A CORE NETWORK - A method is provided which introduces user plane caching over an interface between a first node in a radio access network and a second node in a core network. At the first node: receiving first uplink tunnel parameters relating to the second node, selecting first downlink tunnel parameters relating to the first node, sending the first uplink and downlink tunnel parameters to a cache node designated to the first node, receiving second uplink and downlink tunnel parameters relating to the cache node, and sending the second downlink tunnel parameters to the second node. A first tunnel is established between the first node and the cache node based on the second uplink tunnel parameters and the first downlink tunnel parameters, uplink user plane data is sent to the second node through the first and second tunnels via the cache node, and downlink user plane data is received from the second node. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126539 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD AND HOME BASE STATION | 05-08-2014 |
20140126540 | HANDLING CALL TRANSFER IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and apparatus for handling a call transfer from a circuit switched access network to a packet switched access network. A Mobile Switching Centre Server receives a notification that a call for a terminal requires handover from a circuit switched access network to a packet switched access network. The MSC Server determines whether the terminal is currently registered in an IMS network and/or whether the MSC Server is registered such that it can perform handover from the circuit switched access network to the packet switched access network. If so, then return Single Radio Voice Call Continuity is invoked to perform a handover of the call from the circuit switched access network to the packet switched access network. If not then the MSC Server invokes error handling procedures. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126541 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION CONTROLLING METHOD - A communication method in LIPA/SIPTO architecture is provided which, when a user equipment (UE) is to connect from a serving area to an external network, allows re-selection of an optimal gateway. The communication method allows selecting a gateway apparatus physically or topologically close to a site, where the user equipment is attached. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126542 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSFERRING A MOBILE DEVICE FROM A SOURCE eNB TO A TARGET eNB - A method used in a wireless communication system including a plurality of cells, the method includes transmitting to a mobile device from a source enhanced node B, and sending a Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) status report to a target enhanced node B. Another method includes transmitting to a mobile device from a source enhanced node B, and sending a Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) status report to the source enhanced node B prior to a re-pointing to a target enhanced node B. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126543 | Method and device for personal-network based seamless handover - An embodiment of the disclosure discloses a method for personal-network based seamless handover, wherein when a personal network gateway receives a service handover request or needs to hand over a service, a target personal network device is selected; and when the target personal network device agrees to perform a service handover, the service handover from an original personal network device to the target personal network device is performed. An embodiment of the disclosure further discloses a device for personal-network based seamless handover, wherein a target selecting unit is configured to select a target personal network device; and a service handover unit is configured to perform a service handover from an original personal network device to the target personal network device when the target personal network device agrees to perform the service handover. With the method and device according to embodiments of the disclosure, it is possible to provide an effective solution for implementing seamless handover of a service within a personal network when service handover needs to be performed. | 05-08-2014 |
20140133454 | SELECTIVE ROBUST HEADER COMPRESSION (RoHC) FOR A VoIP CALL IN A CELLULAR COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - Systems and methods for selectively enabling Robust Header Compression (RoHC) for Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) calls in a cellular communications network are disclosed. In one embodiment, a data radio bearer for a VoIP call is established between a base station and a mobile terminal. During the VoIP call, a radio frequency parameter for the data radio bearer is monitored. When the radio frequency parameter for the data radio bearer satisfies a predefined coverage-based condition, the base station enables RoHC for the VoIP call. In one preferred embodiment, the radio frequency parameter is a Signal-to-Interference-plus-Noise Ratio (SINR) for the data radio bearer for the VoIP call, and the predefined coverage-based condition is a predefined SINR threshold below which the base station enables RoHC. By enabling RoHC in this manner, RoHC resources are selectively made available for those VoIP calls that will benefit most from increased cell coverage provided by RoHC. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133455 | ACCESS TRANSFER FOR A DRVCC MOBILE TERMINAL - A method of Dual Radio Access Transfer of an IP Multimedia session, IMS, in an alerting phase for the Packet Switched to Circuit Switched direction. The method comprises initiating an IMS media session towards a terminating mobile station, UE and, during a session alerting phase, making a determination at the UE that a DRVCC transfer is required from a Packet Switched, PS, to a Circuit Switched, CS, access. The method comprises sending a SIP message from the UE to a Service Centralization and Continuity Application Server, SCC-AS, over the PS access, informing the SCC-AS of the DRVCC transfer, and responding to receipt of the SIP message at the SCC-AS by sending a SIP INVITE from the SCC-AS towards a Mobile Switching Centre, MSC, serving the UE in the CS access, the INVITE including an identity of the UE as a called party identity and the STN as the calling party identity. The method further comprises responding to receipt of said INVITE at the MSC, or to receipt of associated CS signalling, by sending from the MSC to the UE a CS Setup message, whereupon the MSC is placed in a state in which it expects a CS Answer from the UE. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133456 | Dynamic Multi-Access Wireless Network Virtualization - We disclose systems and methods of dynamically virtualizing a wireless communication network. The communication network is comprised of heterogeneous multi-RAT mesh nodes coupled to a computing cloud component. The computing cloud component virtualizes the true extent of the resources it manages and presents an interface to the core network that appears to be a single base station. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133457 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING COMMUNICATION NETWORK IN PORTABLE TERMINAL - An apparatus and a method for supporting a communication network in a portable terminal are provided. The method includes receiving a registration confirmation message from a first base station, determining whether the first base station satisfies a switching condition to a packet switching mode, switching a mode of the portable terminal from a circuit switching mode to the packet switching mode when the first base station satisfies the switching, and registering the portable terminal in a first communication network through the first base station in the packet switching mode. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133458 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD AND HOME BASE STATION - A home base station (HeNB) that supports LIPA (Local Internet Protocol Access) defined in the 3GPP (3rd Generation Partnership Project) standards: confirms (step S | 05-15-2014 |
20140133459 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR NON-ACCESS STRATUM MESSAGE PROCESSING DURING HANDOVER IN EVOLVED NETWORK - A method and an apparatus for non-access stratum (NAS) message processing during handover in an evolved network are provided. The method includes the following steps. An evolved packet core (EPC) receives a message which indicates that a UE is being handed over sent by a source evolved NodeB (S-eNB), and stops sending an NAS message to the UE temporarily. The EPC receives a message which indicates that the UE returns to an S-eNB service area sent by the S-eNB. The EPC sends the NAS message to the UE through the S-eNB, if needed. With the method and the apparatus, the EPC can acquire a location of the UE in time in the case of a handover failure of the UE, a time limit of a retransmission timer is set precisely, and a specific implementation for forwarding an NAS message through an X2 interface is provided. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133460 | Handover Method and Device - Embodiments of the present invention provide a handover method and device. When an SGSN cannot identify a Target eNB ID, the Target eNB ID is converted into a Corresponding RNC ID. A relocation request message carrying the Corresponding RNC ID is sent to the SGSN. One of a first PLMN ID and a second PLMN ID included in the Target eNB ID is selected. A selected PLMN ID, an eNB ID included in the Target eNB ID, and a TAC in a Selected TAI are filled in the Corresponding RNC ID. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133461 | Method and System for Sector Switching During Packet Transmission - A method and apparatus for handing off packet-transmission between sectors of a wireless communication system is disclosed herein. During transmission of a packet from an access network to an access terminal, the access terminal determines that the packet should theoretically be transmitted to the access terminal in fewer timeslots in another sector than the number of allowed timeslots remaining for the packet transmission in a current sector. In response, the access terminal abandons packet transmission in the current sector and hands off to the other sector, in an effort to increase throughput and save air interface resources. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133462 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DISTINGUISHING CELLS WITH THE SAME PHYSICAL CELL IDENTIFIER | 05-15-2014 |
20140133463 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING CSG SERVICE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for supporting a closed subscriber group (CSG) service is provided. The apparatus includes a memory to store CSG subscription information and a processor operatively coupled to the RF unit and memory to implement a radio interface protocol. The processor accesses a base station (BS), transmits the CSG subscription information to the BS, receives an access mode from the BS where the access mode is determined based on the CSG subscription information, and negotiates with the BS with regard to a CSG service if the access mode supports a CSG to which the apparatus belongs. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133464 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSFERRING USER EQUIPMENT IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and system for transferring user equipment (UE) in a mobile communication system are disclosed. According to the method, a source core (CN) network determines to transfer a UE that it serves and sends a transfer instruction carrying UE transfer restriction information to the UE; an access network receives a transfer request that is sent by the UE according to the restriction information carried in the transfer instruction; the access network selects a target CN entity that is different from the source CN entity for the UE; and the UE is transferred to the target CN entity. The method and system provided by the present invention are applicable to user transferring between CN entities in any communication network. The transferring is initiated by a network side entity, and a more preferable CN entity is selected for the UE to provide a better service. | 05-15-2014 |
20140140321 | Monitoring 3G/4G Handovers in Telecommunication Networks - Systems and methods for monitoring 3G/4G handovers in telecommunication networks are described. In some embodiments, a method may include receiving a plurality of packets at a telecommunications monitoring system, the plurality of packets including a first packet following a first version of a protocol and a second packet following a second version of the protocol. The method may also include determining, via the a telecommunications monitoring system, that the first packet belongs to a first communication session that is correlated with a second communication session to which the second packet belongs. The method may further include using the telecommunications monitoring system to associate the first packet with the second packet in response to the determination. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140322 | TECHNIQUE FOR COMMUNICATION BETWEEN USER EQUIPMENT AND A DATA NETWORK IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and apparatus are provided for communication, within a packet-mode communication network, between user equipment and a data network. A session is established between the user equipment and a data-network access gateway via an access network. The method includes: a step of detecting a request for access to a service on the basis of at least one packet transmitted by the user device via the established session; a first step of determining, on the basis of at least one criterion, that a new session is to be established; a second step of determining another access gateway, the other gateway being suitable for the service required by the user equipment; and a step of triggering the establishment of the new session between the user equipment and the other access gateway, the establishment being initiated by equipment of the packet-mode communication network. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140323 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for performing a handover in a wireless communication system are disclosed. The method for performing a handover of a user equipment (UE) in a wireless communication system includes measuring a first reception power from a first transmission point and a second reception power from a second transmission point; and determining transmission of a measurement report for the handover to the second transmission point. The transmission of the measurement report is determined using the first reception power, the second reception power, an offset value, and a value related to uplink transmission power of the user equipment (UE). | 05-22-2014 |
20140140324 | PS TO CS HANDOVER INDICATOR - The present invention relates to a solution for handling handover of connections for a user equipment from a packet switch network to a circuit switched network. This is provided as a method implemented in a node and system. The method is provided in a telecommunications network connecting user equipment, i.e. UE, communicating wirelessly with the network. The method comprising steps of detecting that handover is required from a packet switched, i.e. PS, based network to a circuit switched, i.e. CS, based network, initiating in a source mobility management node a single radio voice call continuity, i.e. SVRCC, initiating a PC to CS handover for non-voice components with information about voice related parameters and a PS to CS handover indicator, executing hand over, sending an update request to a serving gateway, i.e. SGW, from a target mobility management node with non-voice related parameters and the PS to CS handover indicator, forwarding the update request from the SGW to a packet data network gateway, i.e. PGW, receiving the update request in the PGW, detecting the PS to CS handover indicator, and handling in the PGW the PS to CS handover indicator. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140325 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR IMPLEMENTING USER EQUIPMENT HANDOVER - A method, an apparatus, and a system for implementing User Equipment (UE) handover are disclosed. A Mobility Management Entity (MME) obtains address information of a serving Interworking Function (IWF) by interacting with a function entity in a network and notifies the IWF to process handover according to the obtained IWF address information, so that the MME is capable of obtaining the address information of the serving IWF. Therefore, the normal proceeding of a UE handover procedure in a Circuit Switched over Packet Switched (CSoEPS) scenario is ensured. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140326 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR INFORMATION TRANSMISSION - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method for information transmission, including: a network entity of a source network determines whether a handover of a UE from the source network to a target network satisfies an information transmission rule; if the handover satisfies the information transmission rule, the network entity of the source network transmits information of the UE to a network entity of the target network; the information of the UE includes: MDT allowed status information of the UE and/or MDT configuration information of the UE. Embodiments of the present invention also provide an apparatus and a system for information transmission. When the UE performs a network handover, the present invention can avoid repeated MDT operations of the UE and save network resources. | 05-22-2014 |
20140146784 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DECREASING LTE RE-ACQUISITION DELAY IN S102-LESS CSFB - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. The apparatus may be a UE. In one aspect, the UE may establish a context for a first RAT, perform an activity involving at least one transmission via a second RAT without initiating a procedure to suspend the context for the first RAT when a duration of the activity is less than a threshold, and communicate via the first RAT using the context after the activity is performed. In another aspect, the UE may receive one or more signals via at least a first RAT, transmit via a second RAT, and perform at least one cell reselection procedure using the one or more signals during the transmission via the second RAT. | 05-29-2014 |
20140146785 | GATEWAY DEVICE, SYSTEM AND METHOD - A local network system includes one or more terminals operable to act as a client on the local network and a gateway device operable to manage communications between the one or more terminals and an external network. The gateway device includes a memory configured to store a set of instructions and a processor configured to execute the set of instructions. The gateway device further includes a plurality of communications modules in communications with the external network and/or one or more terminals. | 05-29-2014 |
20140146786 | KEY DERIVATION DURING INTER-NETWORK HANDOVER - A method for deriving a key during an inter-network handover is provided. The method comprises: obtaining first key information from a first relocation request message, in response to receipt of said first relocation request message which reaches a target network entity first; deriving a key for handover based at least in part on said first key information; and generating an indicator for indicating that the key is derived based at least in part on said first key information. | 05-29-2014 |
20140146787 | FAST ASSOCIATION AND ADDRESS CONTINUITY FOR HANDOFF BETWEEN UNMANAGED ACCESS POINTS - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. The apparatus may comprise an interface configured to communicate data via a first device while an association is maintained with the first device and a processing system configured to perform pre-association operations, via the interface, to initiate association with a second device, while maintaining the association with the first device, and to decide to complete association with the second device and communicate data with the second device, based on a first one or more conditions. | 05-29-2014 |
20140146788 | Method in a Base Station of a Communication System for Making a Handover Decision, Base Station, Computer Programs, and Computer Program Products - The invention relates to a method ( | 05-29-2014 |
20140146789 | Scanning and Handover Operation in Multi-Carrier Wireless Communications Systems - A comprehensive solution is provided for multi-carrier scanning and handover operations in OFDM wireless systems. A multi-carrier scanning is any scanning operation that involves multi-carrier radio frequency carriers. In one embodiment, a mobile station communicates with a serving base station over a primary carrier, and performs scanning over one or more determined carriers. A multi-carrier handover is any handover operation that involves multiple radio frequency carriers. In a first embodiment, a break-before-entry (BBE) handover procedure with fast synchronization is provided. In a second embodiment, an entry-before-break (EBB) handover procedure through unavailable intervals is provided. In a third embodiment, EBB handover procedures for both inter-FA and intra-FA using multiple carriers are provided. Finally, in a fourth embodiment, intra-BS handover procedures are provided. The multi-carrier handover procedures may be applied to | 05-29-2014 |
20140146790 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACCESSING A RANDOM ACCESS CHANNEL BY SELECTIVELY USING DEDICATED OR CONTENTION-BASED PREAMBLES DURING HANDOVER - A method and apparatus for accessing a random access channel (RACH) during handover are disclosed. A handover procedure is initiated and a maximum handover interruption timer is activated. A dedicated preamble is transmitted in an attempt to access the RACH on a condition that the dedicated preamble is reserved in a current random access opportunity and the maximum handover interruption timer has not expired. A contention-based preamble is transmitted in an attempt to access the RACH on a condition that a dedicated preamble is not reserved in a current random access opportunity. If the maximum handover interruption timer has expired, a contention-based preamble is transmitted in an attempt to access the RACH. | 05-29-2014 |
20140146791 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE STATION, SWITCHING STATION, AND LOCATION REGISTRATION METHOD FOR MOBILE STATION - A decrease is realized in network load caused by a change in selection of location registration device or an increase or decrease in the number of installations, on a circuit switching network side. A mobile communication system includes a mobile station, a packet switching station, and a plurality of location registration devices that perform location management of the mobile station. With respect to the mobile station, after one location registration device is already selected from among the plurality of location registration devices, when the mobile station performs location registration, an NRI (Network Resource Identifier) included in a TMSI (Temporary Mobile Station Identifier) is transmitted to the packet switching station. The packet switching station makes a request for location registration with respect to the one location registration device, based on the NRI. | 05-29-2014 |
20140146792 | TRANSFERRING A USER EQUIPMENT TO A RADIO ACCESS NETWORK WITH A DIFFERENT RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY - A network node ( | 05-29-2014 |
20140153540 | METHOD FOR THE INTEGRATION OF A FIXED STATION OR OF A FIXED RADIO SUB-SYSTEM, AND DEVICES IMPLEMENTING SUCH A METHOD - A method for connecting a first device belonging to a first mobile communications network of the narrow band type to a second mobile communications network of the wide band type, the device implementing a protocol layer for communicating with a first plurality of mobile terminals according to a first mobile communications standard, including a modification of the first device by integration of a transposition layer in the protocol layer and being linked to the second communications network of the wide band type via a link of the Internet Protocol (IP) type. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153541 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR BASE STATION CHANGE OF PACKET SWITCHED COMMUNICATIONS IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A mobile station (MS) and method for base station handover from a source cell of a source base station to a target cell of a target base station in a packet-switched cellular radio network. While the MS is still in the source cell, the MS receives from the network, a handover command message and information regarding a next expected uplink packet for a packet flow subject to lossless packet-switched handover. Upon arrival of the MS in the target cell, the MS transmits an uplink sequence number status message to the target base station providing a downlink sequence number status for the packet flow, and starts uplink data transmission to the target base station beginning with the next expected uplink packet. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153542 | DETERMINING THE NEED FOR A ROUTING AREA UPDATE FOR PACKET SWITCHED HANDOVER IN MULTI-OPERATOR CORE NETWORK - A method implemented by a MS for controlling handover of the MS from a source cell of a source RAN operating in PS domain to a target cell of a target RAN operating in PS domain where the target RAN supports MOCN. The method includes receiving SI transmitted by a node of the source RAN. The SI includes a selected PLMN, LAC of the target cell, and RAC of the target cell. The MS executes handover to the target RAN. A target RAI is determined using the selected PLMN, LAC of the target cell, and RAC of the target cell from the SI transmitted by the node of the source RAN. The target RAI is compared to a registered RAI of the MS. The MS determines whether a RAU is needed in the target RAN based on the comparison of the target RAI to the registered RAI. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153543 | WIRELESS WIDE AREA NETWORK CHARACTERISTICS INDICATED OVER A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK - What is disclosed is a method of operating a communications system. The method includes transferring a wireless local area network (WLAN) beacon signal from a wireless transceiver, where the WLAN beacon signal comprises packets identifying the WLAN. The method further provides receiving wireless wide area network (WWAN) signals into the wireless transceiver and determining WWAN characteristics. The WWAN characteristics comprise at least one of signal strength, data rate, and transceiver battery status. The method further includes, in the wireless transceiver, inserting a characteristic indicator into the packet headers of the WLAN beacon signal indicating the WWAN characteristics. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153544 | Method and system for notifying attribute of IP address and SGW - A method and a system for notifying an attribute of an Internet Protocol (IP) address and a Serving Gateway (SGW) are disclosed. When an SGW is taken as a User Equipment's (UE's) SGW, the new SGW can be notified of an attribute of the UE's IP address. The technology of notifying an attribute of an IP address in the disclosure can ensure that the new SGW can learn the attribute of the UE's IP address in time when the new SGW is taken as the UE's SGW. Therefore, a charging gateway function entity connected with the new SGW can accurately charge the UE according to the attribute of the IP address. | 06-05-2014 |
20140161100 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD - A communication system that includes mobile user equipment and a communication network is provided. The communication network includes a first base station communicating with the user equipment according to a first defined radio frame format with a first sequence of radio frames each having the same length and each being allocated a respective first System Frame Number (SFN) to sequentially number the radio frames of the first sequence. A second base station is provided to communicate with the user equipment according to a second defined radio frame format including a second sequence of radio frames each having the same length and each being allocated a respective second SFN such that the radio frames of the second sequence are sequentially numbered. A radio signal includes first information indicative of a difference between the first and second SFNs at a particular time and second information usable with the first information. | 06-12-2014 |
20140161101 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF CHANGING ACCESS POINT IN WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEM - An apparatus and method of changing an access point in a wireless network system is provided. The wireless network system includes a first access point existing on a wireless network, and a user terminal accessing the first access point. The first access point transmits information on a second access point, which is one of a plurality of access points accessible by the user terminal, to the user terminal, and the user terminal determines whether to access the second access point and accesses the second access terminal in accordance with the determination result. | 06-12-2014 |
20140161102 | Methods, Apparatuses, Related Computer Program Product And Data Structure For Deciding On A Signaling Scheme For Handover - A first method (and related first apparatus) includes transmitting, in a handover request message, an indication of a first protocol version; a second method (and related second apparatus) includes receiving, in the handover request message, the indication, deciding, based on the received indication and a second protocol version, on a value of an information element included in a handover request acknowledgement message to be transmitted, the information element indicating usage of a first or second signaling scheme, and transmitting the handover request acknowledgement message including the information element; and in the first method receiving the handover request acknowledgement message including the information element; and a third method (and related third apparatus) including receiving the handover command message including the information element, and configuring according to one of the first and second signaling schemes indicated by the information element. | 06-12-2014 |
20140169329 | NETWORK-CONTROLLED TERMINAL-TO-TERMINAL DIRECT COMMUNICATION IN WIRELESS TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK - A terminal configured to operate in a mobile telecommunication network includes a receiver configured to receive from a network entity other than another terminal a direct communication initiation signal including resource allocation information for establishing terminal-to-terminal direct communication between the terminal and a second terminal using a radio access technology (RAT) in which the terminal is configured to communicate when communicating with the second terminal through one or more base stations or (e)NB and a terminal-end terminal-to-terminal direct communication logic configured to establish terminal-to-terminal direct communication with the second terminal based on the resource allocation information provided by the network entity other than a terminal. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169330 | Network Gateway Selection at Multipath Communication - This disclosure relates to a method in a source network gateway node ( | 06-19-2014 |
20140169331 | Method and Device for Power Control of High Speed Dedicated Physical Control Channel - The present invention provides a method and a device for power control of a High Speed Dedicated Physical Control Channel (HS-DPCCH). If a User Equipment (UE) is in a soft handover state and configured to a multi-flow transmission mode, the UE obtains a first HS-DPCCH power offset and an HS-DPCCH adjustment step size that are corresponding to each cell group in all cell groups of the UE. The UE determines a second HS-DPCCH power offset of the cell group according to the HS-DPCCH adjustment step size and the first HS-DPCCH power offset. The UE adjusts current transmit power of the HS-DPCCH according to the second HS-DPCCH power offset of the cell group. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169332 | METHOD FOR SUPPORTING SELECTION OF PDN CONNECTIONS FOR A MOBILE TERMINAL AND MOBILE TERMINAL - A method for supporting selection of PDN connections for a mobile terminal, in particular in decentralized mobile operator networks, wherein the mobile terminal is connected to an access point, wherein the mobile terminal is in active mode having at least one ongoing IP session to a Packet Data Network (PDN) via a PDN gateway-first PDN gateway-, wherein monitoring whether a more suitable PDN gateway-second PDN gateway-than the first PDN gateway becomes available for the mobile terminal is performed, and wherein in case of detecting the second PDN gateway, any new IP session of the mobile terminal to the PDN is established by initiating a new PDN connection to the second PDN gateway, while an already ongoing session associated with the existing PDN connection to the first PDN gateway is kept. Furthermore, a mobile terminal with PDN connection selection support is disclosed. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169333 | Systems and Methods Facilitating Relocatability of Devices Between Networks - Provided is a software entity adapted to operate in a first network on behalf of a relocatable device to negotiate services for the relocatable device from the network, and to be transportable or replicable to operate in a second network to negotiate services for the relocatable device from the second network. | 06-19-2014 |
20140169334 | Communication Improvement After Handover - The invention relates to handover of a mobile station ( | 06-19-2014 |
20140177589 | Network Awareness Of Device Location - Systems and methods for managing a network are disclosed. One method can comprise detecting a triggering event at a node. Location information of the node can be transmitted to a routing device in response to the triggering event. Location information of the node can be transmitted to a management device. The management device can be configured to control an operation of one or more of the node and the routing device in response to the location information. | 06-26-2014 |
20140177590 | WIRELESS MODULE AND METHOD FOR LOCAL IP ACCESS PACKET DATA NETWORK RELEASE - Various embodiments include systems, wireless modules, and methods for local IP access packet data network release. Handover data can be received at a target wireless module as part of a user equipment handover operation. The user equipment can include an active packet data network session associated with a source local home network. A determination that the target wireless module is not in the source local home network can be made based on the handover data. The target wireless module can trigger deactivation of the packet data network session in response to the determination that the target wireless module is not in the source local home network. | 06-26-2014 |
20140177591 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR REDUCED LATENCY CIRCUIT SWITCHED FALLBACK - Systems, methods, and devices for wireless communication by a wireless communication device are described. A circuit switched fallback from an LTE cell to a GERAN cell is initiated. A system information type 3 message is received. The GERAN cell is accessed based on the system information type 3 message without receiving a system information type 13 message. A circuit switched connection is established on the GERAN cell. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also claimed and described. | 06-26-2014 |
20140177592 | Scheme of Retaining LTE connection during Circuit Switch Fall Back - The present solution enables a packet switched connection to be temporarily released at the wireless terminal for supporting voice calls over a Circuit-Switched (CS) Fallback. The packet switched connection of the LTE core network retained for a pre-defined period of time during the CSFB session allowing the user to quickly switch back to the packet switched connection when the CSFB session is shorter than the predefined period or when the voice call CSFB attempt fails. This is accomplished by the introduction of a timed buffer to control the length of time the LTE core network connection and wireless context information will be retained. | 06-26-2014 |
20140177593 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING A HANDOVER BETWEEN UTRA R6 CELLS AND R7 CELLS - A method and apparatus for controlling an optimization of handover procedures between universal terrestrial radio access (UTRA) release 6 (R6) cells and UTRA release 7 (R7) cells are disclosed. When a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) is moving between an R6 cell and an R7 cell, or between R7 cells, a handover is initiated from a source Node-B to a target Node-B. In the R7 cell, the enhanced medium access control (MAC) functionality including flexible radio link control (RLC) protocol data unit (PDU) size and high speed MAC (MAC-hs) segmentation and multiplexing of different priority queues are supported. After the handover, a MAC layer and/or an RLC layer are reconfigured or reset based on functionality supported by the target Node-B. | 06-26-2014 |
20140177594 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ALLOWING SOFT HANDOFF OF A CDMA REVERSE LINK UTILIZING AN ORTHOGONAL CHANNEL STRUCTURE - Method and apparatus for base stations and subscriber units allows soft handoff of a CDMA reverse link utilizing an orthogonal channel structure. Subscriber units transmit an orthogonally coded signal over a reverse link to the base stations. A given base station provides timing control of the timing offset of the reverse link signal. Based on at least one criterion, an alignment controller determines that the given base station should hand off timing control to another base station, and a soft handoff process ensues. In response to a command or message for soft handoff of the subscriber unit from the given base station to another base station, the subscriber unit makes a coarse timing adjustment to the timing of the coded signal. The subscriber unit may make fine timing adjustments based on feedback from the base station controlling timing. Multiple base stations may provide power control feedback to the subscriber unit. | 06-26-2014 |
20140177595 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDLING CELL RESELECTIONS AND TRANSITIONS TO AND FROM AN ENHANCED CELL_FACH STATE - A method and apparatus for handling cell reselections and transitions includes executing a cell reselection. A medium access control (MAC)-ehs reset is performed. | 06-26-2014 |
20140177596 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EFFICIENT SIGNALING AND USAGE OF RESOURCES FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SUPPORTING CIRCUIT SWITCHED AND PACKET SWITCHED SESSIONS - Method and apparatus efficiently signal and use resources for wireless communications supporting circuit switched (CS) and packet switched sessions (PS). Signaling and interaction between the wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU), and various network entities, such as the Mobility Management Entity (MME), the Visitor Location Register (VLR), and Base Stations (BS), are used to implement circuit switched fall back (CSFB) in a PS system. | 06-26-2014 |
20140177597 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTER-USER DEVICE TRANSFER (IUT) IN A NETWORK BASED MOBILITY DOMAIN - A method and apparatus for performing Inter-User Equipment Transfer (IUT) across any internet protocol (IP) based network. This framework allows for preparation, execution and completion of data transfer at a target device through registration with a Local Mobility Anchor (LMA) and receipt of an IUT request. The target device receives and stores an IP address or a source device. The IP address is used to transmit session information. | 06-26-2014 |
20140177598 | Handover Signaling in Wireless Networks - A first base station transmits at least one message to configure at least one backward compatible carrier and at least one non-backward compatible carrier in a wireless device. The first base station transmits, in response to the first base station making a handover decision, a second message to a second base station. The second message comprises parameters indicating whether the wireless device supports configuration of non-backward compatible carriers, configuration information of at least one backward compatible carrier and/or configuration information of at least one non-backward compatible carrier. | 06-26-2014 |
20140177599 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ENABLING CIRCUIT SWITCHED FALLBACK SERVICE IN EVOLVED PACKET SYSTEM - The present document discloses a method and system for enabling a Circuit Switched Fallback (CSFB) service in an Evolved Packet System (EPS). The method may include, after accessing an EPS network, the User Equipment (UE) triggering the CSFB service when it executes the Circuit Switching (CS) network service, and the UE transmitting a CS network service request carrying a CSFB indication to a Mobility Management Entity (MME). The method may also include, after receiving the CS network service request carrying the CSFB indication transmitted by the UE, the MME indicating an Evolved Universal Mobile Telecommunication System Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN) to switch the UE to the CS network, and the E-UTRAN initiating the switching to switch the UE to the CS network through an MME and the Mobile Switching Center (MSC) with which the UE jointly registers when accessing the EPS network. | 06-26-2014 |
20140185581 | Methods and Systems for Admission Control and Resource Availability Prediction Considering User Equipment (UE) Mobility - Predicting mobile station migration between geographical locations of a wireless network can be achieved using a migration probability database. The database can be generated based on statistical information relating to the wireless network, such as historical migration patterns and associated mobility information (e.g., velocities, bin location, etc.). The migration probability database consolidates the statistical information into mobility prediction functions for estimating migration probabilities/trajectories based on dynamically reported mobility parameters. By example, mobility prediction functions can compute a likelihood that a mobile station will migrate between geographic regions based on a velocity of the mobile station. Accurate mobility prediction may improve resource provisioning efficiency during admission control and path selection, and can also be used to dynamically adjust handover margins. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185582 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PERFORMING RE-ASSOCIATION DUE TO HANDOVER IN A WLAN MESH NETWORK - A method and system for performing re-association in a WLAN mesh network are provided. A mobile node transmits authentication request information to an old node via a new node along with a mesh re-association request message for re-association of the mesh network. Upon receiving the mesh re-association request message, the old node performs re-association and authentication according to the mesh re-association request message, and transmits a mesh re-association reply message to the mobile node via the new node. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185583 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING RECONFIGURATION OF RADIO LINK CONTROL PARAMETERS - A variety of wireless communication methods and apparatus for supporting reconfiguration of radio link control (RLC) parameters are disclosed. A radio resource control (RRC) reconfiguration message is generated that indicates that an RLC unit in a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) or a universal terrestrial radio access network (UTRAN) should be reconfigured from supporting flexible size RLC protocol data units (PDUs) to supporting fixed size RLC PDUs. If an information element (IE) “one sided RLC re-establishment” is present in the RRC reconfiguration message, only a receiving side subassembly in the RLC unit is re-established. Otherwise, both the receiving side subassembly and a transmitting side subassembly in the RLC unit are re-established. Flexible size RLC PDUs may be discarded and a message indicating the discarded flexible size RLC PDUs may be transmitted. The flexible size RLC PDUs may be modified such that they correspond to a set of pre-defined sizes. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185584 | METHOD FOR MEASURING ADJACENT AREAS - The present invention discloses a method for measuring adjacent cells, and the method is used for measuring adjacent cells by using dormant idle sub-frames to receive specified data from a network side in an idle state, and adjacent cells are measured by using an idle window to receive the specified data from the network side in a connection state. The present invention realizes measurement of the TD-SCDMA adjacent cells in a WCDMA mode and measurement of the WCDMA adjacent cells in a TD-SCDMA mode; and further more achieves reselection and switching from WCDMA to TD-SCDMA adjacent cell and from the TD-SCDMA to WCDMA adjacent cell on this basis, meets a real-time requirement effectively, and has high practical value. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185585 | METHOD FOR TRANSFERRING CONTEXT AND MOBILITY MANAGEMENT ENTITY - The present invention discloses a method for transferring a context and a mobility management entity. When S | 07-03-2014 |
20140185586 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR HANDOVER TO SERVING NETWORK - The present invention discloses a method and a device for handover to a serving network. The method includes: receiving a first Handover Request sent by a BSC/RNC; sending a second Handover Request to a target MME according to the first Handover Request, where the second Handover Request includes an IMSI and first information for determining a source SGSN so that the MME sends a Context Request message including the IMSI to the source SGSN and receives context information of a UE that corresponds to the IMSI and is sent by the source SGSN. Thereby avoiding a handover failure which is caused because the MSC server and the SGSN select different MMEs, and further synchronizing PS and CS handover processes, improving handover accuracy and efficiency, and enhancing user experience. | 07-03-2014 |
20140185587 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING A CHANGE OF MODE IN DEVICES DIRECTLY COMMUNICATING WITH EACH OTHER IN A WIRELESS CONNECTION SYSTEM, AND APPARATUS FOR SAME - The present invention relates to a method for determining whether a mode change condition for performing a hand-over to a cellular network through which devices communicate with each other is satisfied, transmitting a mode change instruction message to a base station when the mode change condition is satisfied, receiving a mode change command message for starting a mode change from the base station, transmitting a first data packet index with respect to a data packet transmitted to a second device at a final stage through the communication between the devices to the base station, ending the communication with the second device when the inter-device communication end request message is received from the base station, and transmitting data to the second device through the cellular network. | 07-03-2014 |
20140192771 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER IN MULTIPLE COMPONENT CARRIER SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for performing handover in a multiple component carrier system. In an aspect, a method of a target Base Station (BS) performing handover in a multiple component carrier system includes receiving service state information, including information about at least one candidate cell, from a source BS through a handover request message, calculating a final determination value for determining a final cell for a User Equipment (UE) which is a subject of the handover based on the service state information, selecting the final cell by comparing the final determination value and the information about the candidate cell, and sending a handover request Acknowledgement (ACK) message, including information about the selected final cell, to the source BS. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192772 | APPARATUS TO ENABLE FALLBACK TO CIRCUIT SWITCHED DOMAIN FROM PACKET SWITCHED DOMAIN - An apparatus is used to perform a Circuit Switched (CS) fallback in wireless communications. The Non-Access Stratum (NAS) of the apparatus determines whether to perform a CS fallback based on an Internet Protocol (IP) Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) registration status, and sends a service request indicating a request to perform the CS fallback when the WTRU is attached to a CS domain. The apparatus also includes an Access Stratum (AS) that receives the CS service request from the NAS, sends an indication of the CS service request in a Radio Resource Control (RRC) message to an Evolved Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN), wherein the RRC message includes CS service information, and receives a handover command in response to the CS service request. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192773 | Traffic Control Within an IP Multimedia Subsystem - A method of handling traffic within an IP Multimedia Subsystem, IMS, network. The method comprises registering an IMS user with a first Serving Call Session Control Function, S-CSCF, of the IMS network. Subsequently, at the first S-CSCF, a decision is made or instruction received to transfer said user to an alternative, second S-CSCF within the IMS network. A notification is sent from said first S-CSCF to a further IMS node, the notification including an explicit instruction to select a second S-CSCF and, upon receipt of said notification at the further IMS node, an S-CSCF reselection initiated for the user in order to select a second S-CSCF. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192774 | PREDICTIVE ROAMING BETWEEN SUBNETS - A network device of a subnet determines predictive roaming information for a wireless client. Predictive roaming information can identify the wireless client and a home network subnet of the wireless client. The network device provides predictive roaming information associated with a wireless client to neighboring subnets. Neighboring subnets store received predictive roaming information, and use the predictive roaming information if the wireless client roams to them. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192775 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR INTER-ENB CARRIER AGGREGATION - A method and apparatus for connecting to a secondary enhanced NodeB. A transceiver configured to receive a Radio Resource Control (RRC) message from a Master enhanced NodeB (MeNB). The RRC message comprises a dedicated random access resources configuration for the UE to perform random access to a cell associated with a Secondary enhanced NodeB (SeNB) for a purpose of an addition of the SeNB, and an identification of the cell to which the random access is to be performed. Responsive to receiving the RRC message, command the Media Access Control (MAC) to trigger the random access for the addition of the SeNB to the cell with the identification indicated in the RRC message with the random access resources indicated in the RRC message. The MeNB is an eNB which the UE connects to initially and which acts as mobility anchor. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192776 | MOBILE INTERNET PROTOCOL SQUARE - The present invention provides a method and apparatus for network access for consumers in both wired and wireless environments. Multiple-interface/multiple-connections are used to support high-speed handoff and seamless roaming between different networks (wired and wireless). The present invention is implemented by using multiple interfaces and connections to interface a mobile PC unit, providing additional functions, and enhancing current PC device drivers and software. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192777 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR BAND SWITCHING IN WIRELESS LOCAL ACCESS NETWORK - A method and apparatus for switching a band in a wireless local access network (WLAN) is provided. The method includes transmitting a multi-band switch request message to request switching from a first frequency band to a second frequency band, and receiving a multi-band switch response message in response to the multi-band switch request message. The multi-band switch request message includes a multi-band switch schedule to operate in the second frequency band. Wider coverage can be supported by using multi-band. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192778 | NODE B AND RNC ACTIONS DURING A SERVING HSDPA CELL CHANGE - An apparatus and method in accordance with the present invention reduce the amount of data that is stalled in a source Node B after a serving HS-DSCH cell change in a communication system that includes a serving RNC and at least one Node B. In a first embodiment, the RNC temporarily suspends data transmissions from the RNC to the Node B. In a second embodiment, the activation time is used in data scheduling. In a third embodiment, a more robust MCS level is selected. In a fourth embodiment flow control is employed for the data transmitted between the RNC and the Node B. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192779 | SYSTEM FOR EFFICIENT RECOVERY OF NODE-B BUFFERED DATA FOLLOWING MAC LAYER RESET - A method and system for the UE and RNC to reduce transmission latency and potentially prevent loss of PDUs upon a MAC-hs layer reset. The RNC generates a radio resource control (RRC) message with a MAC-hs reset indication. The MAC reset indication requires the UE to flush buffers for configured HARQ processes, disassemble MAC protocol data units (PDUs) in the reordering buffers, deliver MAC-d PDUs to a MAC-d layer, and configure the MAC-hs to receive new data. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192780 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACCESSING VIA LOCAL NETWORK IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system, and more particularly, a method and apparatus for accessing via a local network are disclosed, A method for transmitting local network selected Internet protocol traffic offload (SIPTO) indication information, according to one embodiment of the present invention, comprises the steps of: generating from a first network node local network SIPTO packet data network (PDN) connection indication information with respect to a PDN connection of a user equipment (UE); and transmitting the local network SIPTO PDN connection indication information to the UE, wherein the local network SIPTO PDN connection indication information can express whether the PDN connection of the UE is a local network SIPTO PDN connection. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192781 | Mobility State Aware Mobile Relay Operation - A mobility state of a mobile relay node is determined as one of three or more different mobility states. The mobile relay node may determine the mobility state itself or based on received information from another network node. Control information is determined based on the determined mobility state of the mobile relay node and an action is then performed or initiated based on the determined control information. The tree different mobility states may include moving, standing, and at least one additional mobility state. Example additional mobility states of the mobile radio node include: departing, arriving, or temporarily stopped. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192782 | GATEWAY DEVICE FOR HANDLING UE CONTEXT AND A METHOD THEREOF - The technology described herein relates to a method in a gateway device and a gateway device for handling a context of a UE moving from a source HeNB ( | 07-10-2014 |
20140198767 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MOBILITY OPTIMIZATION IN A HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK - Methods, systems, and devices for mobility optimization in a heterogeneous network are disclosed herein. A base station includes an anchor module, a context information module, and a transmission point module. The anchor module configures the base station as a virtual anchor cell for a plurality of small cells. The context information module is configured to maintain context information for user equipment (UE). The context information for the UE is maintained by the context information module while any small cell of the plurality of small cells is configured as a TP for the UE. The transmission point (TP) change module is configured to send at least a portion of the context information to a small cell configured as the TP for the UE. | 07-17-2014 |
20140198768 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SWITCHING CONNECTION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for switching a connection in a wireless communication system is provided. A source cell decides radio resource control (RRC) connection switching to a target cell, transmits an aggregated user equipment (UE) context transfer message to the target cell, and transmits an RRC connection switching message to a UE in coverage of the source cell. The RRC connection switching message includes information on an identity of the target cell and a period during which the UE should finish the RRC connection switching to the target cell. | 07-17-2014 |
20140198769 | E-UTRAN AND HANDOVER - The present invention relates to a method, a base station and an interface for handover in a wireless communication network. Handover is initiated when the signal quality falls below a predetermined value. Random access serves as an uplink procedure to enable the UE to make handover from a first base station (eNodeB) to a suitable second base station (eNodeB). In the present invention, random access parameters are exchanged between second and first base station before said first base station signals said random access parameters to said user equipment. | 07-17-2014 |
20140198770 | NODE DEVICE, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - Anode device includes a receiver, a processor, memory, and a transmitter. The receiver receives a path information packet for notification of path information about a network. The processor generates a participation request packet for requesting a first node device selected between an adjacent node device and a node device communicable through the adjacent node device to participate in a first local cluster. The memory stores a path to each affiliated node device affiliated with the first cluster. The transmitter transmits the participation request packet to the first node device. When a number of affiliated node devices which are affiliated with the first cluster exceeds a threshold, the processor generates a generation request packet for requesting a second node device which is not affiliated with the first cluster to generate a second cluster different from the first cluster. The transmitter transmits the generation request packet to the second node device. | 07-17-2014 |
20140198771 | BASE STATION, HANDOVER CONTROL METHOD, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER-READABLE RECORDING MEDIUM - Provided is an HeNB which can cause a mobile station within a coverage of the HeNB to be handed over to another communicable base station. An HeNB communicates with an MME through a relay process by a gateway. The HeNB detects a state of the gateway. The HeNB stops communication with a mobile phone in accordance with the state of the gateway. | 07-17-2014 |
20140204901 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR INDICATING VoLTE CAPABILITY | 07-24-2014 |
20140204902 | APPARATUS, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF HANDOVER OF A BEAMFORMED LINK - Some demonstrative embodiments include devices, systems and/or methods of handover of a wireless beamformed link. For example, an apparatus may include a wireless communication unit to communicate between a wireless communication node and a mobile device via a beamformed link between the wireless communication node and the mobile device, the wireless communication unit is to determine a handover candidate for handing over the mobile device, based on at least one beamforming parameter of the beamformed link. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204903 | Method and Terminal for Selecting AP - There is provided a method for selecting an access point (AP), the method performed by a user equipment. The method may comprise: receiving a prioritized list with respect to APs, the prioritized list includes at least one of roaming consortium information, a network address identifier (NAI), a public land mobile network (PLMN) identifier; scanning at least one or more APs in the vicinity thereby generating an available list which includes at least one or more service set identifiers (SSIDs) and roaming consortium information; acquiring at least one or more NAIs from the roaming consortium information in the available list using pre-stored mapping information; comparing the acquired NAI with the NAI in the prioritized list to select a proper AP. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204904 | Optimized Offloading to WLAN in 3GPP-RAT Mobility - System and method embodiments are provided for optimizing offloading wireless services to a WLAN in 3GPP-RAT mobility. The embodiments enable changing network priority based on changing network conditions. In an embodiment, a method in a user equipment (UE) for offloading wireless services to a wireless local area network (WLAN) in a Third Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) inter-radio access technology (RAT) handover includes receiving an access network discovery and selection function (ANDSF) policy from an ANDSF server, wherein the ANDSF policy comprises policy rules including a validity condition, wherein the receiving is performed during a procedure in which the UE conducts an inter-RAT handoff from a first 3GPP RAT to a second 3GPP RAT; comparing evaluation condition information for the second 3GPP RAT against the validity condition; and offloading a first wireless service to the WLAN in accordance with the ANDSF policy when the validity condition is satisfied. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204905 | HANDLING A TERMINATING CIRCUIT SWITCHED SIGNALING SERVICE TO A TERMINAL IN A MOBILE NETWORK - Methods, nodes, computer programs and a mobile network for handling a terminating circuit switched signaling service to a terminal in a mobile network are described. A method of handling a terminating circuit switched signaling service to a terminal in a mobile network is described. The signaling service is distinct from a call. The mobile network comprises a first control node and a second control node. The method is performed by the first control node. The method comprises receiving signaling information for terminating the circuit switched signaling service to the terminal, subsequent to the step of receiving, detecting that the terminal has requested a location update from a second control node of the mobile network, and, based on the step of detecting, forwarding the received signaling information to the second control node. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204906 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING COMMUNICATION SERVICES TO A MOVING PLATFORM - A method and apparatus are described for providing communication services to a mobile platform while moving, wherein the mobile platform communicates along two current communication links extending between the mobile platform and two network gateways. The method comprises: setting an H-VPLS service to enable provisioning of L2 services to the moving platform via at least one of the two current communication links; enabling the moving platform to exchange communications along one or both communication links; replacing one of the two current communication links while the mobile platform is moving, with another communication link extending towards a third network gateway, by using Pseudo Wire Redundancy (PWR) to re-route traffic from the communication link being replaced to the other communication link, thereby allowing the moving platform to continue provisioning the L2 services while communicating with two network gateways, being the third network gateway and one of the former two network gateways. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204907 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ESTABLISHING CELL RESELECTION LIST - The embodiments of the present invention disclose a method for establishing a cell reselection list is provided. A network and a terminal establish frequency indexes for the cell reselection list, so that when a network side delivers an RAT and frequency priority information, the priority information may be delivered according to frequency indexes in a frequency list, thus implementing cell reselection that is based on the priority for the terminal. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204908 | METHODS OF AND NODES FOR SELECTING A TARGET CORE NETWORK FOR HANDING OVER A VOICE SESSION OF A TERMINAL - A method of selecting a target core network of a communication network for handing over a voice session of a terminal from a packet switched source radio access network (RAN) to a target RAN. The voice session is anchored in an Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem, and the selected target core network includes a circuit switched domain which is associated with the target RAN and supports voice session continuity to hand over the voice session from the source RAN to the target RAN. The target RAN is associated with a network identification of the target core network. The method is executed by a node and includes receiving a network identification of at least one target core network associated with at least one target RAN. The target core network is selected based on an indicated support of voice session continuity by the network identification. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204909 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MOBILE TERMINAL CONNECTION CONTROL AND MANAGEMENT OF LOCAL ACCESSES - An offloading method comprising the steps of: when the mobile terminal starts offloading in a first network, transmitting, by the mobile terminal, a first message to a mobility management device performing mobility management of the mobile terminal in a second network, the first message including information indicating that the offloading is started; transmitting, by the mobility management device, a second message to the mobile terminal, the second message including selection information in the second network, the selection information being for selecting, on basis of the first message, as to in which network offloading is to be performed; and deciding, by the mobile terminal, whether the offloading is to be maintained in the first network or whether new offloading is to be performed in the second network on a basis of the selection information included in the second message and judgment information in the first network that the mobile terminal has. | 07-24-2014 |
20140204910 | Individual User Equipment Settings in Radio Access Network - A radio base station in a wireless communication network and a method in a radio base station for providing service to a user equipment is provided. The method comprises establishing a connection between the user equipment and the radio base station, and receiving, from a network node, usage statistics of the user equipment. The method further comprises determining at least one parameter relating to the provision of the service to the user equipment based on the received usage statistics of the user equipment. | 07-24-2014 |
20140211755 | Radio Bearer Dependent Forwarding for Handover - This invention employs an inherent tradeoff in a radio bearer dependent data handling method for intra-E-UTRA handoffs. For user equipment using real time data, the source node forwards to the target node not yet acknowledged real time service data units and disconnects. This makes the handoff latency short at the expense of data traffic between nodes. For user equipment not needing real time data, the source node continues to receive user equipment acknowledgements during a time out period and only forwards service data units acknowledged during the time out period. This reduces X2 interface traffic between the source and target nodes but extends the handoff latency. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211756 | HANDOVER MECHANISM IN CELLULAR NETWORKS - Systems, apparatuses, and methods for a handover procedure in heterogeneous networks are provided. In particular, an intermediate handover (IHO) is introduced. Certain aspects of the disclosure involve, a method, performed at a first base station of a wireless communications network. An indication that a user equipment (UE) is receiving coverage signal from a second base station can be received. A data packet destined for the UE can be transmitted to the second base station. A communications link with the UE can be maintained after transmitting the data packet to the second base station. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211757 | Wireless Communication System Utilizing Staggered Device Handovers - Carrier aggregation and dual connectivity allow a user device to communicate with one or more base stations on multiple component carrier frequencies. When it is determined that the user device should handover to a new base station, the user device performs a substantial portion of the needed handover operations with the new base station using only one of the component carrier frequencies. Meanwhile, the user device maintains data communications with the original base station on the remaining component carrier frequencies. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211758 | Method of Handling Network Entry in a Cell Cluster and Related Communication Device - A method of handling handovers in a cell cluster comprises transmitting, by an anchor cell in the cell cluster, first control information with a first power level to a communication device of the wireless communication system, for the communication device to perform a network entry according to the first control information; and transmitting, by the anchor cell, second control information with a second power level lower than the first power level to the communication device, for the communication device to obtain channel information according to the second control information. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211759 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDLING INTER-NODE CONNECTIVITY IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for handling inter-node connectivity in a wireless communication system are disclosed. The method includes transmitting a request from a first network node to a second network node to stop aggregating a SCell (Secondary Cell) for a UE (User Equipment); wherein the first network node controls the SCell and the second network node controls PCell (Primary Cell) of the UE. Also, another method and apparatus for handling inter-node connectivity in a wireless communication system are disclosed. The method includes transmitting a request from a first network node, which controls a first serving cell of a UE (User Equipment), to a second network node, which controls a second serving cell of the UE, to change a data path corresponding to a first type of transmission and/or reception of the UE from a first path to a different path; wherein the first path is via the first network node and used as the data path corresponding to the first type of transmission and/or reception of the UE, and a second path is via the second network node and used as a data path corresponding to a second type of transmission and/or reception of the UE. In addition, an alternative method and apparatus for handling inter-node connectivity in a wireless communication system are disclosed. The method includes transmitting a request from a first network node to a core network node to change a data path corresponding to a first type of transmission and/or reception of a UE (User Equipment) from a first path to a different path; wherein the first path is via the first network node and used as the data path corresponding to the first type and a third type of transmission and/or reception of the UE, a second path is via a second network node and used as a data path corresponding to a second type of transmission and/or reception of the UE, and the request does not indicate to change the data path corresponding to the third type of transmission and/or reception of the UE. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211760 | DATA PROCESSING IN INTRA-SITE HANDOVER - The technology involves data processing during intra-site handover procedures. At least two directional antennas of a base station receive data carrying signals originating from a mobile units positioned in an intra-site handover area defined by the overlapping radio coverage of the antennas. The directional antennas performs an initial data signal detection of the received data signals resulting in detected data, which typically results in a loss of radio performance of the antenna. The detected data from the directional antennas is then processed to generate processed data. The performance loss is compensated by providing differential antenna gain of the directional antennas within the handover area. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211761 | SYSTEM, METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM FOR PROVISIONING DUAL-HOMED VOICE CALL CONTINUITY - A system, method and computer-readable medium for concurrent support of Voice Call Continuity (VCC) capabilities in both the enterprise space and the carrier space are provided. The enterprise VCC functionality is used when the user is located in the enterprise domain which does not impact the carrier's network while the carrier VCC capability is used when the user is located in the carrier domain to support seamless handover between the wireless networks that the carrier may offer. The carrier VCC anchoring point and the enterprise VCC anchoring point may communicate with each other to confirm and inform the other anchoring point that a call handover is occurring or will occur. | 07-31-2014 |
20140219241 | COMMUNICATION DEVICES AND METHODS FOR CONTROLLING A COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A communication device may be provided. The communication device may include: a protocol stack of a communication protocol layer, the protocol stack including: a receiver configured to receive from a layer higher than the communication protocol layer an input signal; a transmitter configured to transmit to another communication device data based on the received input signal and configured to transmit to the higher layer information indicating a transmission state of the data. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219242 | STABLE LOCAL BREAKOUT CONCEPT AND USAGE - Systems and methods are provided for routing internet protocol (IP) traffic flows when connected to a mobile network and a local network. A wireless transmit and receive unit (WTRU) determines whether to offload an IP traffic flow from the mobile network to the local network based on the destination address of the IP traffic flow. When the destination address is local, the WTRU routes the IP traffic flow through local network. The WTRU determines whether to offload IP traffic to the local network based on the stability state of the local network When the local network connection is sufficiently stable for the application associated with the IP traffic, the IP traffic is offloaded to the local network by selecting the local IP address as the source IP address. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219243 | APPARATUS AND METHODS OF JOINT TRANSMIT POWER AND RESOURCE MANAGEMENT - The present disclosure presents a method and apparatus for joint power and resource management in a wireless network. For example, the disclosure presents a method for receiving reference signal received power (RSRP) measurements of one or more neighboring base stations of a base station. In addition, such an example method, may include calibrating a transmit power of the base station based at least on the received measurements, and adjusting transmit resources of the base station in response to the calibration. As such, joint power and resource management in a wireless network may be achieved. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219244 | RESOURCE RESERVATION FOR HANDOVER SIGNALING - Resources are reserved for handover signaling. Handover reliability is thereby improved since the primary interference for handover signaling will be from the handover signaling of nearby cells (e.g., as opposed to data traffic). Given the relatively sparse nature of handover signaling, a significant reduction in interference may be achieved in a network employing this technique in comparison to conventional networks. In some implementations, a set of neighboring access points cooperate to determine which resources are reserved for handover signaling. In some implementations, resources for handover signaling are reserved on a network-wide basis or an access point cluster-wide basis. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219245 | TERMINAL LOCATION USING FORCED HANDOVER OF M2M DEVICE IN WHITE SPACE - A method for determining the location of a communication terminal in a network comprising a plurality of communication devices, each configured to communicate with at least one terminal, the method comprising instructing the terminal whose location is to be determined to handover from a communication device to which it is currently attached to another communication device in the network. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219246 | SRVCC HANDOVER INDICATION FOR REMOTE PARTY TO VOICE CALL - A method for providing indication of an SRVCC handover is disclosed. The method can include a first wireless communication device participating in a voice call with a second wireless communication device via a connection between the first wireless communication device and a first network. The method can further include the first wireless communication device determining a condition indicative of an impending SRVCC handover of the first wireless communication device from the first network to a legacy network. In response to the condition, the method can additionally include the first wireless communication device formatting a message including an indication that the first wireless communication device is going to perform the SRVCC handover and sending the message to the second wireless communication device prior to performance of the SRVCC handover. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219247 | LTE+CDMA 1X HYBRID - An apparatus for communicating over a circuit switched network and a packetized data network. The apparatus includes a packetized data modem, a circuit switched modem, and a hybrid processor. The packetized data modem is configured to communicate with the packetized data network over a packetized data radio link via a radio. The circuit switched modem is configured to communicate with the circuit switched network over a circuit switched radio link via the radio. The hybrid processor is configured to monitor a circuit switched sleep cycle and a packetized data sleep cycle, and is configured to direct the packetized data modem and the circuit switched modem to switch between the networks according to the sleep cycles by prioritizing communications with the circuit switched network above communications with the packetized data network. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219248 | Systems and Methods for Establishing and Maintaining Multiple Cellular Connections and/or Interfaces - Systems and methods for providing multiple connections or interfaces at the same time may be disclosed herein. For example, in an embodiment, a first RRC connection may be established between a wireless transmit and receive unit (WTRU) or user equipment (UE) and network node such as an eNB and a second RRC connection may be established between the WTRU or UE and the network node such as the eNB or another network node such as another eNB. The first RRC connection and the second RRC connections may then be maintained in parallel (e.g. at the same time). | 08-07-2014 |
20140219249 | METHODS OF AND NODES FOR INFORMING A CONTROL NODE IN A SERVING COMMUNICATION NETWORK OF ADDRESS INFORMATION ABOUT A SESSION ANCHOR NODE IN THE SERVING COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method of informing a control node in a serving communication network of address information about a session anchor node in the serving communication network is described. The control node is accessible by a terminal via a circuit switched access of the serving communication network. The serving communication network of the terminal is different from an internet protocol based home communication network of the terminal. The method is executed by a session anchor node in the home communication network. The method includes receiving an update request for the control node being updated of address information about the session anchor node in the serving communication network, receiving address information about the session anchor node in the serving communication network, and sending the received address information based on the received update request. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219250 | High Rate Packet Data (HRPD) Idle State Handout From Femto Access Point to Macro Access Network - Systems and methods for identifying an address of a femto node during handoff of an access terminal from a femto node to a macro node. In one embodiment, the femto node assigns a unique identifier to the access terminal. The access terminal passes the unique identifier to the macro node. The macro node partitions the unique identifier to determine the address of the femto node. In another embodiment, the femto node registers its address with a domain name system. The macro node queries the domain name system to obtain the address of the femto node. In another embodiment, the macro node sends the unique identifier to a proxy. The proxy partitions the unique identifier to determine the address of the femto node. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219251 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND ENCODING RATE REDUCTION METHOD - A communication terminal includes a communication unit to be connected to a first base station and a second base station in different communication protocols, and an encoder which encodes data at an encoding rate determined according to the first base station or the second base station for each predetermined time T and outputs the encoded data to the communication unit. When a connection destination is changed from the first base station to the second base station in a period when the communication unit is being connected to the first base station, the communication unit transmits change information to the encoder before the change of the connection to the second base station is completed. The encoder changes the encoding rate determined according to the first base station to the encoding rate determined according to the second base station when received the change information. | 08-07-2014 |
20140219252 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - When a representative service control device receives a PDP context succession request signal according to a handover communication procedure prescribed in an applicable standard, the representative service control device transmits a P-TMSI contained in the PDP context succession request signal as an address request to a database device. When the representative service control device receives address information of a service control device from the database device, the representative service control device forwards the PDP context succession request signal received from the request transmission means to the received address. | 08-07-2014 |
20140233529 | SELECTING A TYPE OF CIRCUIT SWITCHED FALLBACK - A type of circuit switched fallback (CSFB) is selected based on the target access point for the CSFB. For example, redirection-based CSFB may be selected for some types of target access points, while handover-based CSFB is selected for other types of target access points. In some aspects, an entity may use one or more access point identifiers associated with the target access point to select which type of CSFB to use. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233530 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR ACCESSING DORMANT CELLS - A method, a computer program product, and an apparatus are provided. The apparatus may be a UE. The UE receives an information block from a first base station while camped on a second base station. In an aspect, the information block includes an indication of a random access configuration for performing at least a part of a random access procedure. The UE determines to reselect to the first base station from the second base station. The UE performs at least a part of a random access procedure with the first base station based on the indicated random access configuration to reselect from a second base station to the first base station. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233531 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER, USER EQUIPMENT, BASE STATION, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - According to embodiments, a base station includes a radio communication unit configured to establish communication with a mobile communication terminal using a plurality of component carriers. The base station further includes a control unit configured to transmit a command to the mobile communication terminal to reduce the plurality of component carriers to one prior to handover of communication between the mobile communication terminal and the base station to another base station. | 08-21-2014 |
20140233532 | BEARER SWITCHING METHOD, HOME NODEB GATEWAY, AND HOME NODEB - Embodiments of the present invention include a bearer switching method, a home NodeB gateway, and a home NodeB. The method includes: receiving a first relocation request message sent by a source home NodeB HNB, where the first relocation request message is used to request switching of a local IP access LIPA bearer; and determining, according to the first relocation request message, whether a target HNB supports LIPA mobility, so as to perform a corresponding switching operation. According to the bearer switching method, switching of an LIPA bearer is effectively managed, thereby saving a resource and signaling, and avoiding resource waste and an invalid signaling overhead caused when an HNB that does not support the LIPA mobility prepares the resource for the LIPA bearer. | 08-21-2014 |
20140241315 | RADIO ACCESS NETWORK (RAN) FOR PEER-TO-PEER (P2P) COMMUNICATION - A serving gateway (S-GW) in a radio access network (RAN) server system for peer-to-peer (P2P) communication can include a P2P content manager. The P2P content manager can be configured for receiving P2P data content from other nodes in a P2P network, forwarding the P2P data content to other nodes in the P2P network, and transmitting the P2P data content to a mobile device associated with the S-GW in a downlink (DL) transmission. The serving gateway can be a node in the P2P network and coupled to a transmission station in the RAN. The P2P data content includes at least one P2P data packet. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241316 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR HAND-IN DISAMBIGUATION USING USER EQUIPMENT WIFI LOCATION IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - An example method is provided in one example embodiment and includes receiving a handover request from a first radio network to handover a user equipment (UE) to a second radio network, wherein the handover request includes an international mobile subscriber identity (IMSI) for a user associated with the UE and a pseudo cell identifier (ID); determining a target channel configuration for the UE using the pseudo cell ID; querying a third radio network using the user IMSI to determine a location of the UE, wherein at least one access point in the third radio network is in communication with the UE; and selecting a particular target access point in the second radio network for handover of the UE based, at least in part, on the location of the UE, the target channel configuration for the UE and a location of the particular target access point. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241317 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING SIMULTANEOUS CONNECTIVITY BETWEEN MULTIPLE E-NODEBS AND USER EQUIPMENT - A method and a system for providing simultaneous transmission and reception across multiple evolved NodeBs (eNBs) from a User Equipment (UE) in a Long Term Evolution (LTE) network are provided. The method includes establishing a first connection between the UE and a core network through a Serving-eNB (S-eNB), considering at least one Target-eNB (T-eNB) for at least one connection between the UE and a Packet Data Network (PDN), determining availability of the T-eNB, wherein the determining of the availability of the at least one T-eNB is triggered based on available resource in the S-eNB and the T-eNB, and establishing at least one connection between the UE and the PDN through one or more T-eNBs, at least one Serving-GateWay (S-GW), and at least one PDN gateway. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241318 | Method, Apparatus, and System for Facilitating Random Access - A PRACH preamble sequence being sent by the UE is received. An RAR in response to the PRACH preamble sequence is generated. The RAR includes a TA command. The TA command includes an integer value that is greater than 1282. The integer value alone is capable of determining a TA supporting the UE to perform an uplink time alignment. The RAR is then sent to the UE. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241319 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided are a method and an apparatus for transmitting periodic channel state information (CSI) in a wireless communication system. User equipment activates an uplink (UP) semi-persistent scheduling (SPS) session allocated to a secondary cell (SCell), periodically transmits the periodic CSI through a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) to a base station on the basis of the UL SPS session allocated to the SCell, and releases the UL SPS session allocated to the SCell. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241320 | Method and Apparatus - A method is provided. The method includes performing a media access control reset. The media access control reset is provided without performing at least one of a radio link control reset and a packet data convergence protocol reset. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241321 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SELECTING VOICE BEARER IN REVERSE SINGLE RADIO VOICE CALL CONTINUITY - An apparatus and method capable of creating and controlling voice bearer in reverse single radio voice call continuity comprise performing a handover request action S | 08-28-2014 |
20140241322 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING CONNECTION SWITCHING ACCORDING TO THE AMOUNT OF DATA NOT TRANSFERED - A mobile communication terminal according to the present invention comprises a processing unit for carrying out an operation intended for a data object such as content or a program, a channel builder for establishing a data channel for providing a data object to, for example, a player or a browser; and a data transceiver, while being connected to one of communication networks among a plurality of heterogeneous networks, for receiving a data object from an external server through the communication network, providing the received data to the processing unit through the data channel, checking the amount of remaining data to receive from the data object. | 08-28-2014 |
20140247806 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A wireless communication terminal according to an embodiment includes a wireless LAN communication unit, a prediction unit which predicts a moving area of a user, an estimation unit, and a communication control unit. The estimation unit estimates a switching state of a wireless LAN connection in the wireless LAN communication unit, on the basis of a wireless LAN communication environment in the moving area predicted by the prediction unit. The communication unit restricts the wireless LAN connection in the wireless LAN communication unit, on the basis of the switching state estimated by the estimation unit. | 09-04-2014 |
20140247807 | Moving Access Point Indication - A user equipment, UE, ( | 09-04-2014 |
20140247808 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENHANCING SYNCHRONIZATION IN A HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK - A method and apparatus for enhancing synchronization in a heterogeneous network, including transmitting an auxiliary synchronization signal by a base station in a pico cell, a transmission interval of the auxiliary synchronization signal being 10 ms or 5 ms, and the auxiliary synchronization signal being located in a 0 | 09-04-2014 |
20140247809 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS, USER TERMINAL AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - The present invention is designed to reduce interference against uplink signals of a user terminal connected to low transmission power base station, in a heterogeneous network. The radio communication method of the present invention includes, at the radio base station apparatus of the first cell having a predetermined cell radius, reporting, to a user terminal, information about radio resources in which an uplink signal of a user terminal connected to a macro base station and an uplink signal of a user terminal connected to a low transmission power base station of an LPN cell having a smaller radius than the cell radius of the macro cell, are made orthogonal to each other, and, at the user terminal, allocating the uplink signals to radio resources based on the radio resource information reported from the macro base station or the LPN, and transmitting the allocated uplink signals to the macro base station or the LPN. | 09-04-2014 |
20140254546 | GATEWAY ROUTER SUPPORTING SESSION HAND-OFF AND CONTENT SHARING AMONG CLIENTS OF A LOCAL AREA NETWORK - A gateway router is positioned at a boundary of a local area network and a wide area network. The gateway router supports hand-off among client device and/or user accounts for network communications sessions with a network device of the wide area network. The gateway router further supports content sharing among client devices and/or user accounts via the gateway router over the local area network. Data resources in the form of account information, files, applications, session state information, etc. may be stored at the gateway router to facilitate hand-off and/or content sharing among the clients of the local area network. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254547 | UPLINK BUFFER STATUS REPORTING FOR MULTIPLE PRESERVED PDP CONTEXTS - A method of buffer status reporting for multiple preserved data protocol (PDP) contexts includes communicating with a base station. A service request is sent to the base station, the service request requesting a set of radio access bearers (RABs) for a set of PDP contexts. The set of preserved PDP contexts includes one or more PDP contexts that have no uplink data ready to transmit on a high speed shared data channel. The set of preserved PDP contexts also includes one or more PDP contexts that have uplink data ready to transmit on the high speed shared data channel. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254548 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR FORMING A COMMON NETWORK USING SHARED PRIVATE WIRELESS NETWORKS - An approach for forming a common network using shared private wireless networks is described. A shared access platform receives a request, from a user device, for connectivity to a wireless service provider network formed by a plurality of customer premise nodes. The shared access platform also authenticates, in response to the request, the user device for access to the wireless service provider network based on permission settings established for the plurality of nodes in association with the wireless service provider network. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254549 | CHANNEL MANAGEMENT IN A WI-FI DEVICE IN A MULTI-CHANNEL CONCURRENT ENVIRONMENT - A multi-channel wireless device for participating on a plurality of networks. The wireless device switches from a first channel associated with a first network to a second channel associated with a second network if the wireless device has a channel dwell time on the first channel equal to or greater than a maximum channel allowance time interval for the first channel, wherein the maximum channel allowance time interval for the first channel is given by a channel switching time subtracted from a Beacon interval associated with the first network divided by the total number of networks that the wireless device is participating with. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254550 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR LTE HANDOVER REDUCTION - A method of setting hand over (HO) parameters for a user equipment (UE) connected to a first cell of a base station (BS) may include receiving, at the BS, history data corresponding to the UE, the history data including, for each of a plurality of cells the UE was previously connected to, an entry including HO information of the UE at the cell; determining at the BS, an activity type of the UE based on the received history data; and setting, at the BS, the HO parameters for the UE based on the determined activity type, the HO parameters controlling the manner in which the UE detects conditions for initiating an HO event. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254551 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEDIA ACCESS CONTROL -BASED FAST CELL SWITCHING FOR HIGH-SPEED PACKET ACCESS - Methods and apparatuses for facilitating switching HSPA (high speed packet access) serving cells from each of an RNC (radio network controller), base station, and access terminal are provided. The RNC pre-configures an access terminal and each base station in an active set for HS-DSCH operation by providing identification codes identifying each of the base stations. The RNC transmits data packets tagged with sequence numbers to each base station where they are synchronously buffered. The access terminal initiates a handover by transmitting a PDU (protocol data unit) to each of the base stations. The PDU is encoded with the identification code of a target base station and a sequence number of a subsequent packet. The target receives the PDU and directly completes the handover with the access terminal. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254552 | LOW LATENCY 802.11 MEDIA ACCESS - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. The apparatus may comprise a transceiver configured to transmit uplink frames and receive downlink frames in a first transaction slot of a super-frame. The one or more of the uplink frames and the downlink frames are associated with over-allocated network allocation vectors that reserve a transmission time which exceeds a time required to transmit acknowledgements of the one or more downlink frames or receive acknowledgement of the one or more uplink frames, respectively. The apparatus may comprise a processing system configured to cause the transceiver to transmit a first uplink frame to the access point with a first over-allocated NAV, to establish a start-time for the super-frame and to extract data from two or more downlink frames in a burst received from the access point. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254553 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR RECEIVING PAGING IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method operating a user equipment for avoiding paging missing in a mobile communication system is provided. The method of operating a user equipment includes performing an area update process caused by a registration area change, performing a reselection of a previous registration area after performing the area update process, and attempting to receive a paging in the previous registration area. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254554 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR FORWARDING UPLINK DATA - Embodiments of the present invention disclose methods and related devices for forwarding uplink data, which are used for avoiding the resource waste caused by the repeated transmission of the uplink data on a Un interface in a handover scenario where the target node is a relay node (RN). An method provided in the embodiments of the present invention includes: receiving, by a donor base station with a relay node RN attached thereto, uplink data sent by a user equipment (UE), wherein the RN is a target node in handover; performing, by the donor base station, a handover preparation; sending, by the donor base station, a serial number status transfer message to the RN; and sending the received uplink data sent by the UE to a serving-gateway S-GW. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254555 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMPLEMENTING A BLANKET WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK CONTROL PLANE - A method and apparatus for maintaining a connection between a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) and a blanket wireless local area network (BWLAN) are described. An inter-working function (IWF) entity in a given network access point (NAP) of the BWLAN maintains lists of WTRUs in respective states. Furthermore, the given NAP maintains a list of neighbor NAPs, and operates in accordance with a selected WTRU mobility protocol. The states may include a “not aware” (NA) state in which the given NAP is actually not aware of a particular WTRU, an “active transmit” (AT) state in which the given NAP is actively transmitting to a particular WTRU, and a “neighbor range” (NR) state for WTRUs indicated in an update report from neighbor (URN) message that the given NAP was not aware of. The WTRU mobility protocol may be a push mobility protocol or a poll mobility protocol. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254556 | OPTIMIZING IN-ORDER DELIVERY OF DATA PACKETS DURING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION HANDOVER - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate processing service data units (SDU) in-order during communication handover in wireless networks. In particular, for mobile devices using re-transmission schemes, SDUs can be processed in-order by indicating to a target base station an index of a last SDU received in-order before handing off communication to the target base station. Additionally, SDUs received subsequent to one or more non-acknowledged SDUs can be forwarded to the target base station. Utilizing this information, the target base station can determine one or more SDUs the mobile device is preparing to re-transmit and can wait for this SDU before processing subsequently received SDUs. Also, a timer can be utilized to end a waiting period for the SDU. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254557 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND CONTENT PROVISION METHOD IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A handover method at a source eNB (enhanced Node B) of a mobile communication system is provided. The method includes, in case a request message for providing content is received from UE (User Equipment), checking whether the content is stored in a cache thereof, and therefore transmitting the content to the UE, in case a handover request message is received from the UE, transmitting a content confirmation request message, which requests confirmation of whether the content is stored in a cache, to a target eNB to which the UE is to be handed over, and in case a content confirmation response message is received from the target eNB, transmitting context information, which is information about contents offered to the UE, to the target eNB. | 09-11-2014 |
20140254558 | SERVICE TYPE SELECTION IN WIRELESS NETWORK - This document discloses methods, apparatuses, and computer programs for selecting and providing a terminal apparatus of a wireless network with services. The terminal apparatus selects a wireless apparatus to provide the terminal apparatus with at least a first service. Then, it causes transmission of an association request to the wireless apparatus, wherein the association request comprises at least one information element indicating whether the request relates to provision of the first service without a second service or to provision of both the first service and a second service, wherein the second service is different from the first service and is subjected to the presence of the first service. Upon approval acquired from the wireless apparatus, the at least said first service is received from the wireless apparatus. | 09-11-2014 |
20140269610 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING WI-FI OFFLOAD WITHOUT INTERRUPTING SERVICE - A network node receives a first connection request from user equipment to join a broadband network at a first interface. A mobility manager in the network node accepts the first connection request. The mobility manager sends data from a core network addressed to the user equipment and receives data from the user equipment through the first interface. The mobility manager receives, from a local area network, a second connection request sent from the user equipment. The second connection request is for the user equipment to communicate with the broadband network via the local area network. The mobility manager accepts the second connection request and offloads data transmitted to and received from the user equipment to a second interface on the network node. The second interface is configured to send data to and receive data from the user equipment via the local area network. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269611 | Communication Handovers from Networks Using Unlicensed Spectrum to Circuit-Switched Networks - Devices configured to initiate a handover of a communication session of a user device from an access network associated with unlicensed spectrum to a circuit-switched access network are described herein. The devices may provide a handover request to a server associated with the circuit-switched network, receive a response from the server indicating that the circuit-switched access network has been prepared for the handover, and instruct the user device connect to the circuit-switched access network to continue the communication session. The devices may initiate the handover responsive to measurement reports received from the user device. In some embodiments, the devices may also enable registration of the communication session, determine a session transfer number identifying a component of the telecommunication network which maintains continuity for the communication session, and provide that session transfer number to the server associated with the circuit-switched access network as part of the handover request. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269612 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR RAPID SETUP OF TELEPHONY COMMUNICATIONS - When an incoming communication is directed to a telephony device that is capable of conducting an IP based communication via an IP telephony system and a cellular-based communication via a mobile telephony service provider, the communication is initially setup as a cellular-based communication via the mobile telephony service provider. At the same time, an IP-based communication channel is setup between the telephony device and an IP telephony system. Once the IB-based communication channel is available, the communication is transitioned from the cellular-based communication channel to the IP based communication channel. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269613 | Integrity protection towards one CN after handovers involving multiple services to be handled by different CNs - A method includes receiving at a UE information indicating different CN domains will be used for first and second data services after handover from a first RAT to a second RAT. Integrity protection is activated for the first and second CN domains but an element in the UE does not have an indication integrity protection is activated for the second CN domain. The UE provides a notification for the element that integrity protection has been activated for the second CN domain. Another method includes receiving at a network node a message indicating a UE has performed a handover involving first and second data services from a first to a second RAT, where the first and second data services will be handled by different core network domains. A security mode control procedure is performed to activate integrity protection towards the second core network domain. Apparatus and program products are disclosed. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269614 | Portable Platform for Networked Computing - In one embodiment, a portable, networked, computing device comprises a processor, a plurality of radios, and a memory. The device may be operable to pair, by at least one of the radios, with a device associated with a user. The device may then monitor, by one of the radios, a signal for a connection established with a first network. When the device determines that the signal for the first network has dropped below a threshold level of quality, it may enable access point mode for at least one of the paired devices by turning on a radio to establish a connection with a second network and thereby providing connectivity to the second network for the at least one of the paired devices. If multiple networks are available, the device may select an optimal network based on an assessment of one or more factors. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269615 | REDUCING STREAM INTERRUPTIONS DURING NETWORK HANDOVER - Methods, systems, and apparatus, including computer programs encoded on a computer storage medium, for receiving streaming media while switching between different networks is described. In one aspect, a method includes receiving a portion of a streaming media through a data connection on a first communication channel between a mobile device and a first network, and while the portion of the streaming media is being received through the data connection on the first communication channel, detecting that a second communication channel between the mobile device and a second network is available, establishing a data connection on the second communication channel, and receiving data through the second data connection on the second communication channel. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269616 | PILOT GROUPING AND ROUTE PROTOCOLS IN MULTI-CARRIER COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Embodiments disclosed herein relate to methods and systems for pilot grouping, route protocols, and scheduling in multi-carrier communication systems. In an embodiment, an access terminal may group a plurality of pilot signals characterized by different frequencies into one or more pilot groups, each pilot grouping being identified by a plurality of parameters (e.g., a PN offset and a group ID). Each pilot group may include pilot signals having substantially the same coverage area. The access terminal may further select a representative pilot signal from each pilot group for pilot strength reporting. The access terminal may also use the pilot grouping for effective set management. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269617 | METHOD FOR MODIFYING MULTIPLE INPUT MULTIPLE OUTPUT MODE ACROSS RADIO NETWORK CONTROLLERS - A method for modifying Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) mode across Radio Network Controllers (RNCs) is provided by the present disclosure. In the method of the present disclosure, a Serving RNC (SRNC) transmits a request message to a Drift RNC (DRNC), wherein the request message requests the DRNC to set a radio link for a mobile equipment in a cell controlled by the DRNC, and the DRNC feeds back a response message to the SRNC based on the capability of the DRNC and the cell controlled by the DRNC, wherein the response message contains the element used for configuring the radio link in the non-MIMO mode. As a result, when the DRNC and the cell controlled by the DRNC support the MIMO mode, the SRNC configures the radio link to be in the MIMO mode for the mobile equipment, and when the DRNC and the cell controlled by the DRNC do not support the MIMO mode, the SRNC configures the radio link to be in the non-MIMO mode for the mobile equipment. Therefore, a mobile equipment handover or a radio link reconfiguration is completed, and the success rate of the handover or the configuration is improved. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269618 | Techniques for Establishing a Communication Handoff Threshold Using User Feedback - Examples are disclosed for user feedback to enable a handoff profile for a dual-mode hybrid mobile device. In some examples communication link handoff logic may be executed by the processor component to receive user feedback during a voice call mediated by a call server, the voice call between a hybrid mobile device and another communication device, the user feedback pertaining to one or more Voice-over Internet Protocol (VoIP) communication link parameters for the communication link between the hybrid mobile device and the call server. The communication link parameters are correlated with a call quality threshold based on the user feedback and a handoff profile is established for the hybrid mobile device based on the call quality thresholds, the handoff profile operative to establish criteria for switching the VoIP communication link to a communication link over a different network. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269619 | Techniques for Establishing a Communication Handoff Threshold Using User Feedback - Examples are disclosed for user feedback to enable a handoff profile for a dual-mode hybrid mobile device. In some examples communication link handoff logic may be executed by the processor component to receive user feedback during a test voice call mediated with a call server, the user feedback pertaining to one or more Voice-over Internet Protocol (VoIP) communication link parameters for the communication link between the hybrid mobile device and the call server. The communication link parameters are correlated with a call quality threshold based on the user feedback and a handoff profile is established for the hybrid mobile device based on the call quality thresholds, the handoff profile operative to establish criteria for switching the VoIP communication link to a communication link over a different network. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269620 | Techniques for Establishing a Handoff Profile Using User Feedback - Examples are disclosed for user feedback to enable a handoff profile for a dual-mode hybrid mobile device. In some examples communication link handoff logic may be executed by the processor component to receive user feedback from multiple users, the user feedback pertaining to one or more Voice-over Internet Protocol (VoIP) communication link parameters for the communication link between the hybrid mobile device and the call server. The communication link parameters are averaged and correlated with a call quality threshold based on the user feedback and a community handoff profile is established for the hybrid mobile device based on the average call quality thresholds, the community handoff profile operative to establish criteria for switching the VoIP communication link to a communication link over a different network. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269621 | MOBILE GATEWAY FOR FIXED MOBILE CONVERGENCE OF DATA SERVICE OVER AN ENTERPRISE WLAN - A system and a method for providing a mobile data service to a mobile device over a fixed wireless data network wherein the system comprises an enterprise Mobile Signaling Gateway coupled to a Public Land Mobile Network, an enterprise Mobile Access Controller resident within the fixed wireless data network. The system further comprises an enterprise Mobile User-plane Aggregator coupled to 1) the Public Land Mobile Network, 2) the fixed wireless data network and the enterprise Mobile Signaling Gateway. The enterprise Mobile Signaling Gateway at least establishes an IP tunnel to the enterprise Mobile Access Controller, determines whether a mobile device coupled to the Public Land Mobile Network is registered, directs the establishment of multiple IP tunnels between the mobile device and the network elements of the system, and directs pathways for communicating user-plane and control-plane data between trusted or untrusted transport networks. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269622 | METHOD OF HANDLING CALL IN HANDOVER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE USING THE SAME - A method of handling at least a call in handover in a wireless communication system and a communication device using the same are proposed. The wireless communication system includes at least a wireless communication network and a wireless communication device. The method includes the following steps. First, a wireless communication device receives a message for switching at least a packet-switched (PS) call to at least a circuit-switched (CS) call from the wireless communication network. Further, the wireless communication device sets a stream identifier of each of the CS calls to an identifier value. The method enables smooth single radio voice call continuity (SRVCC) handover from the PS call in one wireless communication network to the CS call in another wireless communication network. In addition, the method also enables SRVCC multicall handover from the PS call in one network operation mode to the CS call in another wireless communication network. | 09-18-2014 |
20140286305 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ESTABLISHING MULTIPLE RADIO CONNECTIONS - A method for establishing multiple radio connections by a user equipment (UE) is described. The method includes establishing a primary radio connection between the UE and a first point on an Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN). The method also includes receiving a connection control message for a second radio connection with a second point on the E-UTRAN. The method also includes performing a random access procedure for the secondary radio connection in response to receiving the connection control message. | 09-25-2014 |
20140286306 | Method and System for Controlling Mobility in a Communication Network, Related Network and Computer Program Product Therefor - A communication network includes at least one mobile terminal and a plurality of home agents to supply communication services to the mobile terminal. In the network, an authentication, authorization and accounting (AAA) platform is configured for reallocating the supply of the communication services to the mobile terminal from a first home agent to a second home agent of the plurality. | 09-25-2014 |
20140286307 | METHODS FOR RAPIDLY SWITCHING BETWEEN DIFFERENT RATS AND COMMUNICATIONS APPARATUSES UTILIZING THE SAME - A communications apparatus includes an RF signal processing device, a baseband signal processing device and a processor. The processor controls operations of the RF signal processing device and the baseband signal processing device, camps on a first cell of a first RAT, receives a mobile terminated (MT) or mobile originated (MO) service request and determines whether performing a RAT change procedure to switch from the first RAT to a second RAT is required. When determining that performing the RAT change procedure is required, the processor directly camps on a target cell of the second RAT and transmits a MT or MO service response for responding the MT or MO service request to the target cell. | 09-25-2014 |
20140286308 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING MULTIMEDIA SERVICE IN ELECTRONIC DEVICE - A method in an electronic device, comprises, in response to an Internet Protocol (IP) voice packetized data call being performed in a first call session of a first communication processor and occurrence of a handover event from the first communication processor to a second communication processor, receiving at least one of, (a) a control message and (b) IP packetized voice data, via the second communication processor. The control message received from the second communication processor is forwarded to the first communication processor. | 09-25-2014 |
20140286309 | HANDING OVER A USER DEVICE FROM ONE TECHNOLOGY TO ANOTHER - A system may be configured to identify that a user device is connected to a first radio access network (“RAN”), via a first technology; and to identify that the user device is capable of accessing a second RAN, via a second technology. The system may further be configured to instruct the user device to concurrently connect to the second RAN and the first RAN, send or receive a first type of traffic via the first RAN, and send or receive a second type of traffic via the second RAN. | 09-25-2014 |
20140286310 | Technique for AT command Handling in relation to an EPS Packet Domain - A method and system of facilitating the use of AT commands specified for a General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) packet domain in relation to an Evolved Packet System (EPS) packet domain is provided. An embodiment of the present invention comprises defining, in response to an AT command directed to the definition of a secondary Packet Data Protocol (PDP) context, an EPS Service Data Flow (SDF) on the basis of the secondary PDP context. | 09-25-2014 |
20140286311 | METHOD FOR CONSERVING RESOURCES DURING WIRELESS HANDOVER OF A DUAL MODE MOBILE STATION - A method is described that is for handing over a multi-mode mobile device from a first network technology to a second network technology. The method includes initiating by the multi-mode mobile device a first packet session in a first wireless network and detecting by a multi-mode mobile device a second wireless network supporting a different access network technology. The method also includes determining a Quality of Service requirement and completing pre-registration session establishment procedures for a second session in the second wireless network when the first session includes at least one of a QoS sensitive service and real time service by the first wireless network and mobile device and after completion of the pre-registration session establishment procedures the multi-mode mobile device receives service from the first wireless network and remains dormant on the second wireless network. | 09-25-2014 |
20140286312 | METHOD AND DEVICE OF SUPPORTING GROUP MOBILITY - A communication method is provided. The communication method includes receiving, by a Mobile Management Entity (MME), information accessed by a User Equipment (UE) through a Relay Node (RN), and sending, by the MME, a Tracing Region Identification (TAI) list of an RN cell where the UE is located to the UE. A network device and an access network device are further provided. By sending a TAI list of an RN cell to the UE, when TAI(s) of the cell are contained in the TAI list of the relatively stationary UE, the UE does not need to initiate an uplink TAU process, and thereby unnecessary signaling and network jamming can be reduced, and at the same time, paging efficiency and network performance can be improved. | 09-25-2014 |
20140286313 | METHODS AND ARRANGEMENTS FOR IMPROVING TRANSMISSION CONTROL PROTOCOL PERFORMANCE IN A CELLULAR NETWORK - A method in a network node for improving transmission control protocol, TCP, performance in a cellular network is provided. The network node handles TCP packet transferral between a user equipment and a server in the cellular network. The user equipment and the server are configured to adapt a retransmission timeout setting based on round trip times for performed TCP packet transferrals. When the network node obtains an indication of a handover outage being upcoming for the user equipment, the network node deliberately delays, in a time period preceding the indicated handover outage, a transferal of a TCP packet between the server and the user equipment to increase the round trip time for the TCP packet. | 09-25-2014 |
20140286314 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR SUPPORTING GROUP HANDOVER - The method and the device for supporting group handover are disclosed. The method supporting group handover is provided, which is applied to UE in communication with network via a RN, including: a base station S-DeNB switching RN to a base station T-DeNB; and said S-DeNB switching UE served by said RN to said T-DeNB; wherein the MME serving said RN and the MME serving UE served by said RN are the same. Another embodiment of the present invention further provides a base station supporting group handover, The technical scheme set forth in the present invention can reduce unnecessary signaling procedure, the possibility of network congestion, and can reduce the signaling procedure of handover when group handover occurs, so as to reduce the failure of the handover process and ensure the continuity of service. | 09-25-2014 |
20140293958 | Node and Method for Selective Handover - Example embodiments presented herein are directed towards a target base station ( | 10-02-2014 |
20140293959 | SEAMLESS SESSION MOBILITY ON A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE HAVING MULTIPLE RADIO INTERFACES - A method for seamless session mobility on wireless communication device including a first physical interface and a second physical interface is provided. The method can include a wireless communication device anchoring a data session for an application to a logical interface associated with the first physical interface. The method can further include the wireless communication device routing data for the data session sent to the logical interface by the application to the second physical interface for transmission via the second physical interface in an instance in which the wireless communication device has an active connection to a radio access network via the second physical interface. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293960 | Circuit-Switched Fallback (CSFB) Call Setup Utilizing Multiple RF Receive Chains - In a wireless communication system, a user equipment (UE) needing to undertake a CSFB process can use one or more secondary RF receive chains to search for candidate 2G/3G cells in parallel with using a primary RF receive chain to wait for an ESR response. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293961 | FACILITATING RETURN TO A FIRST WIRELESS NETWORK FROM A SECOND WIRELESS NETWORK AFTER PERFORMANCE OF A CIRCUIT SWITCHED FALLBACK PROCEDURE - Method and apparatus for facilitating return to a first wireless network from a second wireless network by a wireless communication device is provided. A method includes the wireless communication device engaging in data transfer for an application session on the first wireless network; participating in a CSFB procedure to transition from the first wireless network to the second wireless network for servicing a voice connection; buffering data received for the application session before and/or during the CSFB procedure; releasing the voice connection; discontinuing requests for downlink data for the application session in response to termination of the voice connection to provide a gap in data transfer; reselecting to the first wireless network during the gap in data transfer; using the buffered data to continue the application session during reselection; and resuming data transfer for the application session on the first wireless network after completing reselection. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293962 | CELL HANDOVER METHOD, BASE STATION, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Embodiments of the present invention provide a cell handover method, a base station, and a communication system. The method includes: determining, by a source base station, to hand over a terminal from a cell of the source base station to a cell of a target base station; acquiring, by the source base station, a wireless resource, where the wireless resource is used to carry a handover request sent to the terminal; sending, by the source base station, a first message to a first base station, where the first message includes the wireless resource and the first message is used to instruct the first base station to avoid occupying the wireless resource; and sending, by the source base station, the handover request to the terminal, so as to hand over the terminal to the cell of the target base station. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293963 | Method and Apparatus for Controlling Issuance of Packet Data Protocol Context - A method and an apparatus for controlling issuance of a PDP context. The method includes: receiving a GPRS location updating request of a user sent by an SGSN; acquiring, according to the GPRS location updating request, an issuance control condition of a PDP context to which the user has subscribed; and determining, according to the issuance control condition, whether to send the PDP context to the SGSN. According to the method and the apparatus for controlling issuance of a PDP context in the embodiments of the present invention, issuance of a PDP context is controlled based on an issuance control condition of the PDP context, which can avoid generation of unnecessary traffic, improve service experience of a user, and reduce the customer service workload of an operator, thereby lowering the operating cost of the operator. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293964 | Method and Apparatus for Releasing Delay Tolerant Access User Equipment in Wireless Communication System - A method and apparatus for releasing delay tolerant access user equipments (UEs) in a wireless communication system is provided. An eNodeB (eNB) receives an overload message or a user equipment (UE) context release command message including a request for releasing the delay tolerant access UEs from a mobility management entity (MME), releases the delay tolerant access UEs based on the overload message or the UE context release command message. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293965 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - A mobile communication method is applied to a mobile communication system including a general base station that manages a general cell and a specific base station that manages a specific cell having a coverage area smaller than a coverage area of the general cell. The mobile communication method comprises: a step A of transmitting, from a general mobile terminal to the specific base station, an RACH signal for interference detection, the general mobile terminal being a mobile terminal in a connected state in the general cell; and a step B of notifying, by the specific base station, the general base station of a detection result of the RACH signal for interference detection. | 10-02-2014 |
20140301360 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION IN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS - Systems, methods, and apparatuses for data and/or control offloading and handover in heterogeneous wireless communication networks are provided. Data and/or control packets can be offloaded to a coordinating base station while a user equipment (UE) remains associated with its serving cell. The packets are still transferred between the serving base station and the core network, and the offloaded data and/or control packets are forwarded from the serving base station to the coordinating base station for transmission to the UE. Furthermore, during a handover process, the serving base station and coordinating base station may independently schedule and send a handover command to the UE to reduce the radio link failure rate. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301361 | COMMUNICATING AN INDICATION RELATING TO IN-DEVICE COEXISTENCE INTERFERENCE - A user equipment (UE) sends, to a wireless access network node, an indication for indicating whether a transmission component causing in-device coexistence (IDC) interference in the UE is active or inactive. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301362 | DELIVERY OF PROTOCOL DATA UNITS - Delivery of protocol data units or other suitable data or information units in various communication systems can be enhanced by appropriate methods and devices. For example, in-sequence delivery of protocol data units received in parallel from several lower-layer acknowledged-mode protocol entities may benefit from timers and/or forwarding status reports. A method can include observing a gap in a sequence of protocol data units received from a plurality of lower-layer protocol entities providing data transfer. The method can also include starting a timer upon the gap observation. The method can further include preventing the gap from blocking delivery of service data units to a higher layer, when the timer expires. The method can additionally include detecting a forwarding-status report. The method can also include immediately proceeding with data delivery to higher layer, containing the gaps because of the lack of forwarding at handover. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301363 | ACCESS POINT FOR SURVEILLANCE OF ANOMALOUS DEVICES - An access point switches between an access point mode and a surveillance mode. In the access point mode, the access point provides network access for end stations using a BSSID (Basic Service Set Identifier) while in the access point mode. In surveillance mode, the access point scans one or more channels of the wireless network to identify one or more anomalous devices. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301364 | METHOD FOR SUPPORTING SIPTO - The present application discloses a method for supporting SIPTO. The method includes, when a target base station is in a local home network, the target base station sends an identity of the local home network to which the target base station belongs to an MME. The method also includes that the MME determines whether a UE has moved out of the local home network to which the source base station belongs according to the local home network id of the source base station and the local home network id of the target base station. By applying this application, the MME is capable of determining whether the UE has moved out of the local belongs network to which the source base station belongs accurately, therefore a bearer disconnection process can be correctly triggered, resources can be timely released or an SGW can be accurately selected. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301365 | INTER-DOMAIN CONTEXT TRANSFER USING CONTEXT TRANSFER MANAGERS - A method and apparatus for improved context transfer in heterogeneous networks is presented. Context information is collected from source entities in a first access network by a context transfer manager and transmitted to a context transfer manager of a second access network which forwards the context information to target entities therein. In one of the context transfer managers at least a part of the context information is translated from a format supported in the first access network to another format supported in the second access network. The method may be carried out proactively preceding a handover or reactively following a handover. In one embodiment, context transfer within one access domain is performed directly between access routers, whereas context transfer between different access domains is performed via the context managers. In another embodiment, beacons from access points are counted in order to determine candidates for a pending handover. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301366 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ACCESSING AND OBTAINING USER EQUIPMENT CONTEXT AND USER EQUIPMENT IDENTITY - A method and device for accessing and obtaining user equipment (UE) context and UE identity are provided. The method for access includes: when a UE accesses a System Architecture Evolution (SAE) network, judging, by a network node, whether a Globally Unique Mobility Management Entity Identifier (GUMMED carried by the UE or a Mobility Management Entity Group Identity (MMEGI) in the GUMMEI is allocated or mapped by the SAE network; if the GUMMEI or MMEGI is allocated by the SAE network, selecting, by the network node, a Mobility Management Entity (MME) according to the GUMMEIA network device includes an identity attribute obtaining module and a network resource node allocation module. Therefore, the access of the UE is achieved. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301367 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PROCESSING DATA DURING CELL HANDOVER IN LTE SYSTEM - A method and UE for processing data during cell handover in a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system are provided. The method includes: receiving, by User Equipment (UE), a Sequence Number (SN) of a Packet Data Convergence Protocol-Service Data Unit | 10-09-2014 |
20140301368 | Method, Node, and System for Selecting Target Cell - Embodiments of the present invention relate to the field of communications technologies, provide a method, node, and system for selecting a target cell, which are capable of selecting a candidate cell with signal quality meeting a predetermined standard as a target cell for a UE. The method of the present invention includes: transmitting a detection instruction to a candidate cell, where the detection instruction is used to instruct the candidate cell to detect uplink signal quality of a user equipment (UE); receiving a detection result transmitted by the candidate cell, and determining a target cell according to the detection result. The embodiments of the present invention are mainly implemented in a process of UE handover. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301369 | MANAGEMENT METHOD, MANAGEMENT NODE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND RECORDING MEDIUM FOR PROGRAM - In order to solve the problem that a handover failure rate of a mobile terminal becomes high in a case in which the number of the cells described in the adjacent cell list does not meet a specific condition, for example, a case in which many cells which have a small coverage area are included in the list, a case in which many highly loaded cells are included in the list, or the like, a management method includes a collection step in which information about a cell of a wireless base station is collected from the wireless base station which manages the cell and a list change step in which a list is changed based on the collected information about the cell so that the number of the cells described in the list of the cells adjacent to the wireless base station may meet a specific condition. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301370 | WIRELESS TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK - A wireless communication network comprising a first base station, a second base station and a relay node. The relay node is one of a plurality of types (eg type 1, type 1a or type 1b) present within the network, and the relay node is connected to the first base station. When handover is required, the first base station sends a handover request to the second base station of information pertaining to the handover, including information regarding the relay node's type and/or radio capabilities. | 10-09-2014 |
20140301371 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile communication system capable of continuing communication between a relay device and a base station device if the relay device moves. In a handover process, when it is judged that an establishment cause for RRC connection is attached from an RN, a target eNB judges whether the own device has the DeNB function. In a case of judging that the own device does not have the DeNB function, the target eNB notifies the RN of an RRC connection rejection. When being notified of the RRC connection reject, the RN stops the handover process and then returns to a source eNB. | 10-09-2014 |
20140307706 | HOMOGENEOUS CIRCUIT SWITCHED VOICE SUPPORT INDICATION IN A MOBILE NETWORK - A subscriber database maintains a data record related to a user equipment. The subscriber database receives an indication from a control node which is responsible for controlling a plurality of packet switched network accesses, The indication indicates whether voice communication with the user equipment over circuit switched access is supported or unsupported homogeneously for all the network accesses controlled by the control node. The subscriber database stores the indication in the data record. If the subscriber database receives a request from a termination control node which is responsible for controlling termination of a voice session with the user equipment, it processes the request depending on the stored indication. In some cases, if the indication indicates that voice communication with the user equipment over circuit switched access is unsupported homogeneously, the subscriber database may reject the request without further interaction with other nodes. | 10-16-2014 |
20140307707 | NETWORK-INSTRUCTED HANDOVER FROM WLAN TO ANOTHER RADIO ACCESS NETWORK - Systems and methods are disclosed for providing a network-instructed handover of a wireless device from a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) to a Radio Access Network (RAN) of another Radio Access Technology (RAT), e.g., a 3 | 10-16-2014 |
20140307708 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for performing handover between heterogeneous networks by a User Equipment (UE) in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes periodically sending a first node a measurement report message while being provided a communication service from the first node using a first frequency band, the measurement report message including measurements for the first node and at least one other node using a different frequency band than the first frequency band, and exchanging information, required to perform handover to a second node having a greatest measurement among the at least one other node, with the second node if a handover preparation request message is received from the first node. | 10-16-2014 |
20140307709 | SYNCHRONIZATION SYSTEM AND SYNCHRONIZING METHOD FOR PLURALITY OF BASE STATIONS AND MOBILE STATION IN A REVERSE LINK WIRELESS TRANSMISSION - There is provided a wireless communication system which can synchronize a mobile station with a destination base station in response to the mobile station determining to switch base stations. Each base station generates synchronization information to synchronize the mobile station with the base station from a reverse pilot signal received from the mobile station, generates reverse propagation quality information from the reverse pilot signal, and generates and transmits a control signal including the synchronization information and the reverse propagation quality information. A mobile station generates and transmits a reverse pilot signal, receives a signal including the control signal from each of the base stations. | 10-16-2014 |
20140307710 | Managed Handover Process - A method for providing information to a first terminal system and/or a second terminal system which connected to each other through a network and are subject to a potential or actual handover, provides convenience information about the execution of the potential or actual handover to at least one of the first and the second terminal systems, prior to or with the start of the handover, and provides in addition to at least one of the first and the second terminal systems a commercial communication relating to a commercial measure, whereby the commercial communication is provided in correlation with the provision of the convenience information. | 10-16-2014 |
20140307711 | INTER-ENODE B HANDOVER PROCEDURE - Methodologies are described that facilitate inter-eNode B handover. In various embodiments, logical protocol termination can be implemented between the user equipment and the target eNode B for inter-eNode B handover signaling. The provided handover forwarding and encapsulation mechanisms enable improved inter-operability between eNode Bs implementing different protocol versions or from different vendors, which in turn enables frequent protocol upgrades. Additionally, the invention enables the target eNode B to implement new radio configurations even if the configuration is unsupported by the source eNode B. | 10-16-2014 |
20140307712 | Changes of Forward-Link and Reverse-Link Serving Access Points - In a communication system in which a mobile station accessing the main network via a plurality of base stations, the mobile station can freely select any of the base stations as a forward link (FL) serving station. In addition, the mobile station can also freely select another or the same base station as a reverse link (RL) serving station. The mobile station has stored in its memory a plurality of routes corresponding to the plurality of base stations, with each route dedicatedly assigned to a particular base station. During handoff of one base station to another as either the FL or the RL serving station, exchanged data packets are processed in the respective routes of the base stations involved. | 10-16-2014 |
20140314045 | RADIO COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A scheduling process handles a plurality of communication services in a collective manner, thus making a radio communications system more operable. A pilot signal sender sends pilot signals with carrier frequencies each corresponding to an N (N≧1) different communication services. A scheduler collects N×n instances of propagation environment data from n (n≧1) terminal devices and selects terminal devices and communication services therefor by assigning terminal devices having a better propagation environment to the plurality of different communication services in a collective manner. The pilot signals are used by a propagation environment data sender to measure and report a propagation environment of each carrier frequency. A communication function configurer automatically sets up a communication function to adapt to the communication service that the base station has assigned. | 10-23-2014 |
20140314046 | METHOD OF COMMUNICATION FOR CIRCUIT SWITCHED SERVICE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR THE SAME - In an aspect, a method of communication performed by a user equipment (UE) camping on a long term evolution (LTE) cell in a wireless communication system is provided. The method include: receiving a Circuit Switched fallback (CSFB) control message from a network, the CSFB control message comprising prioritization information for CS service; determining whether the CS service is triggered; if it is determined that the CS service is triggered, applying a priority to frequencies of at least one cell in accordance with the priority information; performing a mobility procedure based on the applied priority; performing a Radio Resource Control (RRC) connection establishment procedure with a selected inter-RAT cell; and initiating the CS service. | 10-23-2014 |
20140314047 | HANDOVER SIGNALING USING AN MBSFN CHANNEL IN A CELLULAR COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of handover signaling in a cellular communication system is disclosed. Prior to a user equipment (UE) undergoing a cell-to-cell transition, a target node transmits handover-related signaling in one or more Multicast Broadcast Single Frequency Network (MBSFN) subframes in order to reduce handover delay. The cellular communication system includes a source node configured to transfer a handover (HO) request to the target node. The (HO) request corresponds to a (UE) presently being served by the source node. The target node is configured to transmit (HO) information to the (UE) over at least one MBSFN subframe in response to the (HO) request. | 10-23-2014 |
20140321425 | SHARED SPECTRUM REASSIGNMENT IN A SPECTRUM SHARING CONTEXT - The techniques introduced here provide for efficient mass handover from a shared-spectrum wireless communication system (e.g., Licensed Shared Access, Authorized Shared Access, Cloud Spectrum Services, or the like) to a target system (e.g., 3GPP LTE, or the like). The techniques further provide for efficient handling of transitions from one shared-spectrum allocation period to the next shared-spectrum allocation period. Additionally, the techniques provide for efficient handling of multi-operator transitions to re-licensed or re-negotiated shared-spectrum allocations. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321426 | MOBILE RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile radio communication system having a mobile radio communication network and a mobile radio subscriber appliance, wherein a unit in the network layer of the core network of the mobile radio communication network is configured to transmit to the mobile radio subscriber appliance a first message, based on an occurrence of a predetermined event, with a request for a statement which describes at least one radio characteristic of the mobile radio subscriber appliance. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321427 | AUTO-DISCOVERY OF HOME AND OUT-OF-FRANCHISE NETWORKS - A mobile device includes a mobile network module to present media content using a public network and a home network module to present media content from a home network. The mobile device uses the mobile network module to receive a media streaming session via a broadband cellular connection and detects a local wireless connection to a device in a home network. The mobile device uses the home network module to initiate, via the local wireless connection, a home media session with the device in the home network and matches content of the home media session with content of the media streaming session. The mobile device presents, to a user and using the home network module, the matched content of the home media session and disables the media streaming session. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321428 | ENHANCED INDICATION OF NETWORK SUPPORT OF SRVCC AND/OR VOICE-OVER-IMS FOR AN USER EQUIPMENT IN AN EPS NETWORK - Embodiments of the present invention include a method for enhanced indication of network support of SRVCC and/or Voice-over-IMS for an User Equipment UE in an Evolved Packet System EPS network, said method comprising at least one step based on taking into account support of SRVCC and/or Voice-over-IMS by Radio Access Network RAN nodes and/or by Radio Access Technologies RATs available for SRVCC for said UE in said EPS network. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321429 | HOME BASE STATION DEVICE, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE TERMINAL DEVICE, AND POSITION MANAGEMENT DEVICE - A mobile communication system and so on are provided in which an LIPA handover procedure utilizing a management table can be started by transmitting a handover request from a home base station device to which a mobile terminal device is connected, and by transmitting a response to the handover request from another home base station device. In the mobile communication system in which, in the case of handover being performed for the mobile terminal device to some other home base station device, one home base station device adaptable for the LIPA handover is determined, as a handover target, from the management table, the management table is updated such that when an address of a gateway device is contained in the handover request, the LIPA handover is enable, and when the address of the gateway device is not contained in the handover request, the LIPA handover is disable. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321430 | CALL DROP AVOIDANCE DURING RADIO LINK FAILURE - The present invention relates to a radio resource controller ( | 10-30-2014 |
20140321431 | METHOD FOR CHANGING THE WIRELESS ACCESS POINT ASSOCIATED WITH A TERMINAL IN A WIFI-DECT WIRELESS TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - This method for changing the radio access point associated with a terminal, within a Wi-Fi-DECT wireless telecommunication network comprising dual-mode Wi-Fi-DECT radio terminals (PP) and Wi-Fi-DECT radio access points (AP | 10-30-2014 |
20140321432 | PROVIDING SERVICE CONTINUITY FOR LOCAL AREA NETWORKS - Provided are methods, corresponding apparatuses, and computer program products for providing service continuity for local area networks. A method comprises receiving, during a handover procedure between local area networks, service information that relates to one or more services supported by one or more neighbor base stations; determining, based upon the service information, which one of the one or more neighbor base stations supports an ongoing service provided by a source base station to a user equipment; and handing over the user equipment from the source base station to the determined neighbor base station. With the claimed inventions, an inter-LAN handover procedure would not impact service continuity, resulting in a more robust user experience. | 10-30-2014 |
20140328317 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR MANAGING MOBILITY IN IP BASED NETWORK - A method and a device for managing mobility of a mobile station in an Internet Protocol (IP) based network are provided. The method includes receiving a request for allocation of an IP address from an application, determining a type of IP address to be allocated to the application based on the request for the allocation of the IP address, and allocating the determined type of IP address to the application. | 11-06-2014 |
20140328318 | ROUTING MODIFICATION BASED ON HANDOVER DETECTION - Methods, systems, and devices are described for routing modification based on handover detection in UEs and network equipment. According to the principles of the present specification, communication between a User Equipment (UE) and a network equipment may be established over a first radio access technology (RAT) and a second RAT, and a coupling between the first RAT and the second RAT may be identified in the communication between the UE and the network equipment. A handover event associated with at least one of the RATs may be identified, and network traffic routing may be adapted based at least in part on the identified handover event and the coupling between the first RAT and the second RAT. | 11-06-2014 |
20140328319 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ASSIGNING IP ADDRESS IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORK - When a Mobile Node (MN) is assigned IP addresses, the number of which is greater than or equal to the preset number of IP addresses that the MN is capable of being assigned with, the MN identifies information on the pre-emption vulnerability of each session associated with an IP address, and releases an IP address which enables a disconnection of a session. When there are multiple IP addresses associated with the pre-emptable sessions, a consideration is given to multiple conditions related to which IP address is to be selected, one IP address is selected, and the relevant IP address is released. When any IP address cannot be released, a new session is associated with an IP address which can give the smallest overhead to the MN and the network among the existing IP addresses, so that an IP address can be efficiently assigned. | 11-06-2014 |
20140328320 | DATA TRANSFER MANAGEMENT IN A RADIO COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A mobile communications system including a network with a source network node and a target network node that supports a handover procedure, and a mobile terminal that is allowed to access the source network node and access the target network node according to the handover procedure, in which information related to a reception status of user data is delivered between at least two among a group including the mobile terminal, the source network node, and the target network node such that the target network node may receive status information from the source network node and the target network node may receive a status report from the mobile terminal. | 11-06-2014 |
20140328321 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION CONTROLLING METHOD - A communication method in LIPA/SIPTO architecture is provided which, when a user equipment (UE) is to connect from a serving area to an external network, allows re-selection of an optimal gateway. The communication method allows selecting a gateway apparatus physically or topologically close to a site, where the user equipment is attached. | 11-06-2014 |
20140328322 | HEADER COMPRESSION OPTISATION METHOD DURING AND AFTER HANDOVERS IN CELLULAR COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The present invention concerns a method for optimizing ROHC RTP (Robust Header Compression Real Time Protocol) compression applied to IP header of data packets stream so as to use more compact formats enable to remain in a steady state, to never discard received packet, and to serve radio resources without requiring to modify ROHC specification. In the method, when handover or mobility procedure is started, new reference values are normally added to a sliding compression window, but no reference value is removed from the window as long as the handover or mobility procedure is on going. After the handover or mobility procedure is complete, when the number of values transmitted on the new radio link are appropriate to cope against the error properties on the new link, all older values can be removed at once from the compression window, thereby reverting to normal window operation. | 11-06-2014 |
20140328323 | Method And System For Single Radio Voice Continuity Handover - A method and a system for single radio voice continuity handover. The method includes: performing communication based on a media codec type negotiated by calling and called parties in a process of handing over a voice service from a first network to a second network, wherein the negotiated media codec type is a media codec type supported by a media gateway. With the above technical solution, the problem of frequently transcoding in the prior art is avoided. | 11-06-2014 |
20140328324 | RADIO BASE STATION AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING TRANSITION BETWEEN RADIO SYSTEMS - A radio base station capable of communication in a first radio system and a second radio system includes a measurement unit arranged to measure a radio wave transmitted from a neighbor radio base station in the first radio system; a configuration unit arranged to configure a measurement criterion whether measurement of a radio wave is needed upon transition from the second radio system to the first radio system based on a measurement result by the measurement unit; and a determination unit arranged to determine whether to make transition accompanied by measurement of the radio wave based on the measurement criterion configured by the configuration unit, when transition from the second radio system to the first radio system is requested. | 11-06-2014 |
20140328325 | RANDOM ACCESS METHOD AND DEVICE IN COGNITIVE RADIO SYSTEM - Various examples of the present disclosure describe a random access method and device in a CR system. The method includes: generating, by a base station device, a spectrum handover command, wherein the spectrum handover command comprises random access backoff time parameter information; and sending, by the base station device, the spectrum handover command to a user equipment in a cell to instruct the UE to initiate, during a spectrum handover procedure, a random access procedure using the random access backoff time parameter information. According to the various examples of the present disclosure, the random access backoff time parameter information is carried in the spectrum handover command, so that a random access conflict is suppressed during the spectrum handover procedure of the CR system. A large number of UEs that intensively perform random access on a target working frequency are pre-dispersed in time. As such, the delay and the failure probability of the random access on the target working frequency during the spectrum handover procedure are reduced, and thus the failure probability of the spectrum handover and the service interruption time are reduced, so that the user experience of the CR system is improved. | 11-06-2014 |
20140328326 | NETWORK NODE AND METHOD IN A NETWORK NODE - Network node ( | 11-06-2014 |
20140334438 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR WLAN ROAMING - Systems and methods are provided to improve roaming performance and to minimize disruptions in connectivity. When roaming between a source AP and a target AP, the device determines whether the APs employ different gateways, such as through an ARP exchange. If the source and target APs have different gateways, a DHCP exchange is used to renew the IP address of the device to restore network connectivity. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334439 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CELL COORDINATION IN HETEROGENEOUS CELLULAR NETWORKS - There is provided a method and apparatus for coordinating cells in a heterogeneous network. A serving cell determines scheduling parameters for scheduling a UE intermittently between a serving cell and at least one coordinating cell. The scheduling parameters define a cycle for the UE in which the UE alternates between listening to the serving cell and each of the coordinating cells. Timing offsets between the serving cell and the coordinating cells is determined by a UE and reported back to the eNB of the serving cell. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334440 | NETWORK ASSISTED INTERFERENCE CANCELLATION - The present application describes embodiments of methods for network assisted interference cancellation. Some embodiments of the method include broadcasting control information from a first cell over a common control channel. The control information is associated with a data channel transmitted by the first cell and the control information is usable by user equipment served by a second cell to mitigate interference caused by the data channel at the user equipment. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334441 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR PERFORMING SINGLE RADIO VOICE CALL CONTINUITY (SRVCC) HANDOVERS - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for performing single radio voice call continuity (SRVCC) handover are disclosed. According to one method, the method occurs at a testing platform. The method includes receiving, via a communications channel for exchanging messages between a first session initiation protocol (SIP) peer and a second SIP peer, a first message for triggering a bearer deletion procedure associated with a call between the first SIP peer and the second SIP peer. The method also includes in response to receiving the first message or a related message, triggering the bearer deletion procedure prior to changing an access technology. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334442 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDOVER VOLTE CALL TO UMTS PS-BASED VOICE CALL - Aspects of the methods and apparatus relate to transferring a received Voice-over-Long Term Evolution (VoLTE) call to a High Speed Packet Access (HSPA) packet-switched (PS) based voice call. One aspect of the methods and apparatus include receiving a VoLTE call from a network and identifying uplink VoLTE handover characteristics of the VoLTE call for an uplink transmission to the network and a downlink VoLTE handover characteristics for a downlink transmission from the network. The aspect includes configuring uplink HSPA PS based handover characteristics that emulate the uplink VoLTE handover characteristics for the uplink transmission and configuring downlink HSPA PS based handover characteristics that emulate the downlink VoLTE handover characteristics for the downlink transmission. The aspect includes utilizing the uplink HSPA PS based handover characteristics during the uplink transmission to the network and utilizing the downlink HSPA PS based handover characteristics during the downlink transmission from the network. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334443 | Method and Apparatus for Wireless Communication Using Location Based Information - A method and apparatus is disclosed whereby location based information (LBI) is used to make access and routing decisions within a network. Such LBI is sent from mobile devices to the core network when the mobile device registers with the network and is updated periodically. Over time, this collected LBI data represents the position of mobile devices over time and periodic patterns of usage in different geographic areas. When a network receives an indication that a mobile device requires registration with the network, the network determines as a function of said LBI, a desired network access technology to use to connect said mobile device with the network. Instructions are then transmitted to the mobile device to establish a connection using said desired network access technology and the device is registered with the network. Dynamically updated LBI information from mobile devices is also used for IP network routing optimization. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334444 | Access Network Selection in a Multi-Access Network Environment - Novel techniques of access network selection in multi-access network environment are provided, which allow for avoiding access selection loops for independent access selection processes. The multi-access network environment provides a first access selection function, e.g. a 3GPP access selection function, and a second access selection function, e.g. an ANDSF based access selection function. At least a portion of the first access selection function may be implemented by a network component. At least a portion of the second access selection function may be implemented by a user equipment, e.g. a mobile terminal. According to the proposed concepts, a selection priority information of the first access selection function is made available to the second access selection function. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334445 | METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR CELL HANDOVER IN TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING CARRIER AGGREGATION - A method, device and system for a cell handover in a telecommunication system supporting carrier aggregation. The method may include: a Base Station (BS) determines that whether carrier components corresponding to one or more cells to be accessed are in the same frequency band, wherein the one or more cells to be accessed belong to a target BS, and are selected by a terminal which needs to perform the cell handover and is served by the BS; if yes, the BS encapsulates configuration information of all the cells in the one or more cells to be accessed in a handover command for initiating cell handover; otherwise, the BS encapsulates configuration information of one or more cells in the one or more cells to be accessed in the handover command, and sends the handover command to the target BS. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334446 | METHOD FOR DATA OFFLOADING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND DEVICE FOR SAME - Disclosed are a method for data offloading in a wireless communication supporting multiple radio access networks, and a device for the same. Specifically, the method comprises: a step in which a neighboring cell report including an identifier for a wireless local area network (WLAN) access point (AP) is received from a first terminal and a second terminal; a step in which, if the first and second terminals are communicating with one another and the WLAN AP identifiers transmitted by the first and second terminals are the same, an offloading indication message, indicating the offloading of first and second terminal data, is transmitted to the WLAN AP having the WLAN AP identifier; and a step in which an offloading command message, ordering the transmission and reception of data via the WLAN AP, is transmitted to the first and second terminals. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334447 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER IN RADIO LOCAL ACCESS NETWORK COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a method for performing handover by a STAtion (STA) in a radio Local Access Network (LAN) communication system. The method includes sending a Network Controlled HandOver Setup Request Information Element (Ncho Setup Req IE) message indicating that the STA is to perform a scan operation using a controlled scan scheme, to a serving Access Point (AP); receiving a Network Controlled HandOver Setup Response Information Element (Ncho Setup Rsp IE) message including a scan parameter related to a controlled scan operation of the STA, from the serving AP; and broadcasting a probe request message to the serving AP and neighbor APs over channels according to the scan parameter included in the Ncho Setup Rsp IE message. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334448 | Support of Switching TTI Bundling On/Off - Network Node, NN, ( | 11-13-2014 |
20140334449 | EFFICIENT DELIVERY OF REAL-TIME ASYNCHRONOUS SERVICES OVER A WIRELESS NETWORK - In embodiments of the present disclosure, improved capabilities are described for conserving back haul utilization in a wireless network, where optimization servers utilizing publish-subscribe broker services are provided within the wireless network to provide streaming data services required for applications streaming data to a plurality of mobile cellular devices, where the streaming data is not necessarily delivered to each of the plurality of mobile cellular devices at the same time. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334450 | SYSTEM-ASSISTED WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK DETECTION - A method includes receiving, at a mobile device via a first network, an indication that the mobile device is within communications range of a second network. The method also includes increasing an amount of power supplied to a network interface of the mobile device in response to the indication. The network interface is associated with communication via the second network. | 11-13-2014 |
20140341181 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONFIGURING A RADIO ACCESS NETWORK - In accordance with one embodiment of the present disclosure, a method for managing communication in a wireless network includes determining a first value indicating a level of use for a scheduled data channel for one or more of a plurality of sectors served by a first base station and determining a second value indicating a level of use for a random access channel for one or more of the plurality of sectors served by the first base station. The method also includes selecting a respective subframe for random access transmissions for each of the sectors served by the first base station based on the first value and the second value. Additionally, the method includes transmitting configuration information to the first base station. The configuration information indicates a subframe selected for each of the sectors. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341182 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR USE OF CELLULAR INFRASTRUCTURE TO MANAGE SMALL CELL ACCESS - A method and apparatus at a small cell access point for offloading a wireless device in a macro cell, the method establishing a radio link signaling connection between a base station of the macro cell and the access point; and offloading the wireless device using control signaling over the signaling connection. Further, a method at the wireless device, the method receiving a message identifying a set of candidate small cell access points; selecting at least one access point from amongst the set of candidate small cell access points; reporting the selected at least one access point; receiving a preparatory message preparing the wireless device for a target small cell access point, wherein the target small cell access point is included in the selected at least one access point; and associating the wireless device with the target small cell access point. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341183 | MEDIA ESCALATION WITH USE OF ENDPOINT ADAPTER - An endpoint adaptor and methods of operating the same are provided. The endpoint adaptor provides a single persistent view of a mobile communication device to a network and network-based applications. Moreover, the ability to leverage the endpoint adapter to transition a communication session to include additional media types while the communication session is in-progress is also disclosed. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341184 | SYSTEM AND METHODS FOR INCREASING NETWORK EFFICIENCY USING VAMOS CHANNELS ON A MULTI-SIM DEVICE - Methods are provided that optimize Voice over Adaptive Multi-user channels on One Slot (VAMOS) communications by recognizing that up to four independent communications are located on the same device, and assigning them to sub-channels of the same VAMOS channel. A VAMOS-capable multi-SIM wireless device such as a dual-SIM dual active (DSDA) device may have up to four simultaneous active calls on the same access network. When assigned to the same VAMOS channel, the up to four active calls may be merged to all use the same radio on the device. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341185 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ACCOUNTING IN WIFI ROAMING BASED ON AC AND AP INTERWORKING - A WiFi roaming method and device which perform an authentication and accounting process once for multiple APs, thereby reducing the load of an authentication server (RADIUS) in a WiFi roaming method, which separates a terminal session management function and a traffic control function by a access controller and a access point interworked with a tunneling method according to a CAPWAP (Control and Provisioning of Wireless Access Points) protocol. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341186 | Method and System for Route Optimization during Handover and Access Network Element - A method and system for route optimization during switching and an access network element. In a process that a terminal is switched from a source access network element to a target access network element, the target access network element obtains identity information of a correspondent node of the terminal from the terminal, and triggers an access network element of the correspondent node to update a correspondent node mapping relationship. In the present solution, information of a correspondent node is obtained by adding a signaling interaction procedure between the network and the terminal host, so that the information of the correspondent node which is performing data communication is obtained in real time, and a subsequent data stream route optimization process is performed in time, thereby solving the problem of low processing performance and poor real-time performance resulted from an access gateway monitoring, detecting and maintaining correspondent node information. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341187 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRAFFIC OFFLOADING - A method, apparatus and computer program product are provided to support traffic offloading in a manner that relies upon,a wireless access point having a co-located local gateway (L-GW), but that does not require each access point to have a co-located L-GW. In the context of a method, the traffic offloading capabilities of at least one other access point is initially determined. The method may also cause a tunnel to be established with another access point with a co-located L-GW having traffic offloading capabilities. Further, the method cause communications with a network to be conducted via the tunnel established with the another access point so as to utilize the traffic offloading capabilities of the another access point. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341188 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, USER TERMINAL, BASE STATION, AND PROCESSOR - A mobile communication system including an MBMS cell supporting PTM transmission of MBMS data and a non-MBMS cell not supporting PTM transmission of the MBMS data, includes a user terminal that establishes a connection with the non-MBMS cell. The user terminal transmits an MBMS interest notification indicating that the user terminal desires to receive the MBMS data, to the non-MBMS cell. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341189 | RETRANSMISSION CONTROL METHOD, COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM, AND DEVICE - A retransmission control method, a communications system, and a device are disclosed to save air interface resources. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341190 | STATION DEVICE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD THEREOF AND MOBILE DEVICE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD THEREOF - A station device includes: a communication unit wirelessly communicating with a mobile device that forms a subnet with the station device; a user input unit that receives a user command input for terminating a connection with a first access point and connecting to a second access point; and a controller that controls the communication unit so as to transmit, to the mobile device, connection change information for changing a connection of the mobile device in response to the user command. | 11-20-2014 |
20140341191 | Generic Access Network (GAN) Controller Selection in PLMN Environment - A method for network selection on a user equipment (UE) device and the UE device are shown. The user equipment device registers on a first network in a wide area cellular network (WACN) band and receives, from a wireless local area network (WLAN), a list of WACNs that support generic access network (GAN) capabilities. The user equipment device selects the WLAN if the first network is on the list. | 11-20-2014 |
20140348127 | MICRO TO MACRO IP CONNECTION HANDOVER - Disclosed are a system and method for moving a connection from a localized network, e.g., a personal area network (“PAN”), to a different or larger network, e.g., a wide area network (“WAN”). In one aspect, wherein two devices are in communication on a PAN, each device uses the PAN to query the IPv6 WAN prefix assigned to each other device to which it is communicating on the PAN. The querying device then creates a globally routable IPv6 address for the desired communication and uses it to continue the connection after the device detects that the PAN is out of range. In an embodiment, one of the endpoint devices may determine that it has changed its IPv6 prefix and may transmit the new prefix to the other device through an out-of-band method such as the Short Message Service. | 11-27-2014 |
20140348128 | BASE STATION DEVICE, HANDOVER CONTROLLING METHOD, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A base station device establishes a first communication path for each mobile terminal with a control device that processes a signal related to network control or a signal related to user data. When an occurrence of handover of the mobile terminal is detected, the base station device establishes a second communication path with the base station device to be a handover destination. The base station device associates the first communication path with the second communication path. The base station device performs relay control of communication between the handed over mobile terminal and the control device based on a relationship between the first communication path and the second communication path that are associated. | 11-27-2014 |
20140348129 | METHOD, APPARATUS, SYSTEM, COMPUTER PROGRAM AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR PROVIDING A PLMN IDENTIFIER TO A NODE OF A RAN - A method in a communication system includes a first core network node (CN), a second CN, a base station apparatus serving a user equipment (UE), and a packet data network gateway (PGW) associated with the UE, the method being performed by the first CN. The method includes the first CN receiving a tunneling endpoint identifier (TEID) information element from a second CN, the TEID information element comprises a plurality of fields. The one of the plurality of fields includes a Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN). | 11-27-2014 |
20140348130 | System and Method for Distributed Evolved Packet Core Architecture - An embodiment method for session handling for a connection between an UE and a network includes establishing, at a first distributed EPC, user and IP sessions over the connection through the first distributed EPC. The first distributed EPC includes a first PGW at which the IP session is anchored. The method also includes holding original IP resources and releasing original connection resources for the sessions at the first distributed EPC when the UE moves beyond the first distributed EPC to a second distributed EPC. The method then establishes a tunnel between the first PGW and a second PGW for the second distributed EPC. The tunnel utilizes the original IP resources and new connection resources at the second distributed EPC. The method then routes data from the tunnel, through the first PGW, and to the network. | 11-27-2014 |
20140348131 | HANDOVER METHOD, SYSTEM, AND DEVICE - Embodiments of the present invention provide a handover method performed by a source access network device, which includes: sending, a handover request or a WLAN offload request to a UE, so that the UE determines information about a target AP according to AP information corresponding to a target RAN and information about a currently accessed AP, and sends a WLAN offload binding request carrying the information about the target AP to a target access network device in the target RAN, so as to complete a RAN handover, where the handover request or the WLAN offload request includes the AP information corresponding to the target RAN, and the AP information corresponding to the target RAN is information about an AP in a WLAN that covers, together with the target RAN, a location of the UE; and receiving a handover response or a WLAN offload response returned by the UE. | 11-27-2014 |
20140348132 | System and Method for Indicating Local IP Access Support Via NAS Signaling - A method of providing Local IP Access (LIPA) indication is proposed. In one novel aspect, an enhanced cell selection method is proposed using LIPA capability information. Based on LIPA capability related information, a UE is able to prioritize LIPA-capable cells and establish a corresponding packet data network (PDN) connection accordingly. In one embodiment, LIPA information is informed to the UE via Non Access Stratum (NAS) signaling. The UE stores LIPA capability information when receiving a NAS message from a mobility management entity (MME). Later on, when the UE performs cell selection or reselection in idle mode, the UE can use the stored LIPA capability information to prioritize LIPA-capable cells. | 11-27-2014 |
20140348133 | FORWARDING LEARNT STATE INFORMATION TO TARGET NODE AT MOBILITY - A method for handover in a telecommunication system is disclosed. The method determines a traffic time pattern in a handover situation where a user equipment is handed over from a source cell to a target cell in the telecommunication system. History information relating to a traffic time pattern used in the source cell by the user equipment being handed over is forwarded from a controller node of said source cell to a controller node of said target cell. In the target cell, a traffic time pattern to be used by said user equipment in said target cell after the handover is estimated by taking into consideration at least said history information. | 11-27-2014 |
20140348134 | SYSTEM AND PROTOCOLS FOR INTER-MOBILITY ACCESS GATEWAY TUNNELING FOR FAST HANDOFF TRANSITION - A system and method for transitioning connectivity of a mobile node between mobility access gateways on a communication system using inter-MAG tunneling protocols for a fast handoff. The protocols can use pre-configured or dynamic protocols on the IP-Layer or another layer on the protocol stack. For bi-directional tunneling, the mobility session context information for the mobile node is transferred to the next MAG in advance of the fast handoff. For uni-directional tunnel, a uni-directional tunneling mechanism simplifies the logic of tunnel negotiation and setup during the fast handoff with the creation of a temporary forwarding state where all up-link traffic can be sent from the mobile node to the home network through the nMAG, but the down-link traffic from the home network is sent to the pMAG for forwarding to the nMAG and then the mobile node. | 11-27-2014 |
20140355562 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DATA OFFLOAD IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Systems, methods, and apparatuses for radio resource control (RRC) signaling in wireless communication networks with data offload are provided. The radio configuration messages from a small cell to a dual connection UE may be sent by an overlay macro E-UTRAN node-B (eNB). The small cell may send the RRC messages to the macro-eNB first via a backhaul link, and the macro-eNB then transmits the messages to the UE. In some implementations, the radio configuration messages from a small cell to a dual connection UE may be sent directly from the small cell. In some other implementations, some of the RRC messages may be sent selectively to/from either the macro-cell or the small cell, or to/from both the macro-cell and the small cell. The type of RRC messages sent over the small cell and/or the macro-cell may be preconfigured or predetermined. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355563 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR EFFICIENT L3 MOBILITY IN A WIRED/WIRELESS NETWORK - A system and method for efficiently handling mobility events includes detecting a mobility event associated with a movement of a mobile unit from a first subnet to a second subnet, forming one or more first flow control messages for updating routing information associated with the mobility event, transmitting the one or more first flow control messages to a core router, forming one or more second flow control messages for disabling layer 2 learning, transmitting the one or more second flow control messages to one or more network switching devices in the first subnet, forming one or more third flow control messages including layer 2 switching instructions for directing network traffic to the mobile unit in the second subnet, and transmitting the one or more third flow control messages. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355564 | REDUCING SIGNALING DURING AP TO AP HANDOFF IN DENSE NETWORKS - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. The apparatus may be a STA. The STA communicating with a first AP based on a key. The STA receives an identifier broadcasted from a second AP. The STA determines whether the key can be used with the second AP based on the received identifier. The STA selects the second AP upon determining the key can be used with the second AP. The STA requests a transfer of association context information from the first AP to the second AP. The key may be a PTK. The PTK may be a function of the identifier. The identifier may be a zone identifier identifying a set of APs that belong to a security domain in which the association context information of the STA can be transferred from one AP to another AP. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355565 | System and Method for Adaptive Access and Handover Configuration Based on Prior History in a Multi-RAT Environment - Systems and methods for adaptive access and handover configuration based on historical data are provided. Access and handover decisions are optimized in a multiple radio access technology environment using historical data associated with network performance. Future needs for access and handovers are predicted using historical data associated with the user and historical data associated with network performance. Performance metrics are received periodically or continuously from nodes in one or more networks at a centralized controller. The centralized multi RAT controller correlates these performance metrics and determines predicted handovers for a user device. Preparations for the predicted handovers can then be made prior to the handover event. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355566 | Cross Radio Access Technology Access with Handoff and Interference Management Using Communication Performance Data - Systems and methods for adaptive access and handover configuration based on historical data are provided. Access and handover decisions are optimized in a multiple radio access technology environment using historical data associated with network performance. Future needs for access and handovers are predicted using historical data associated with the user and historical data associated with network performance. Performance metrics are received periodically or continuously from nodes in one or more networks at a centralized controller. The centralized multi RAT controller correlates these performance metrics and determines predicted handovers for a user device. Preparations for the predicted handovers can then be made prior to the handover event. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355567 | Radio Access Network Sharing - The present invention relates to wireless systems, and in particular provides a method of sharing radio resources between a first cell of a first cellular network and a second cell of a second cellular network. Each cell transmits using a respective carrier of a different frequency and each cell uses a respective scheduler to allocate transmissions to a respective plurality of radio resources. The method comprises identifying a transmission for a user attached to the first cell that is available for radio resource allocation by the scheduler of the first cell, where the transmission could be made over the second carrier; and interfacing between the scheduler of the first cell and the scheduler of the second cell, so as to allocate radio resources for use by the second cell to the transmission for the user attached to the first cell. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355568 | Method and Arrangement for Relaying in Case of Extension Areas Having Uplink/Downlink Imbalance - Underlay network node and macro base station and methods therein for enabling avoidance of interference in a cell extension area associated with an uplink/downlink imbalance. The underlay network node is assumed to be associated with a cell area A, and a cell extension area B, where the cell extension area B has an uplink/downlink imbalance in relation to a neighboring base station and the network node. The method in the underlay network node involves serving a UE in both uplink and downlink when the UE is located in cell area A. The method further involves serving a UE only in the uplink when the UE is located in cell extension area B, thus enabling avoidance of interference related to communication of a UE located in said cell extension area B. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355569 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROCESSING HANDOVER PROCEDURE THEREOF - A method for processing a handover procedure by a user equipment (UE) in a mobile communication system. The method includes receiving, by the UE, a radio resource reconfiguration message from a base station; recognizing, by the UE, a handover type based on a handover type indicator included in the received radio resource reconfiguration message; and performing, by the UE, a first or second handover procedure according to the recognized handover type. The first or second handover procedure is performed if the radio resource reconfiguration message includes mobility related information. The mobility related information includes a target physical cell identity and a new cell-radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI). | 12-04-2014 |
20140362822 | SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE AND METHOD FOR SERVICE CONTINUITY IN HETEROGENEOUS WIRELESS NETWORK - The present invention provides a system architecture and a method for service continuity in heterogeneous wireless networks, which comprises a handover decision module and a session continuity module. The handover decision module is responsible for maintaining link layer association and network layer reachability in according to the underlying network conditions to fulfill the service requirement of applications. When acting as a sender, the session continuity module will select transmission path(s), reestablish the transport connection(s) and tag packets with session IDs and sequence numbers. When acting as a receiver, the session continuity module will identify and reorder packets using session IDs and sequence numbers, regardless of the IP addresses and ports of the packets. To sum up, the present invention can provide service continuity and multipath transmission for network devices. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362823 | CONTROL METHOD, CONTROL DEVICE, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A control method includes: acquiring information that indicates a predicted position of a mobile terminal that requests data that is able to be received from a first communication device; identifying, based on the acquired information, a second communication device that is able to communicate with the mobile terminal located at the predicted position; and causing, by a processor, the second communication device to start receiving the data from the first communication device before the identified second communication device becomes able to communicate with the mobile terminal, and to transmit the received data to the mobile terminal after the second communication device becomes able to communicate with the mobile terminal. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362824 | Transceiver Reconfiguration Mechanism - Embodiments of the invention include a method and apparatus for causing transmission of a signal providing at least one information related to a requirement for a reconfiguration period in which a reconfiguration procedure for reconfiguring a setting of a transceiver system is conducted, receiving and processing a signal which includes information related to a decision whether or not a reconfiguration period is scheduled, and executing a reconfiguration procedure for the transceiver system on the basis of a result of the processing of the received information. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362825 | METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR CELL CAPABILITY INFORMATION INTERACTION - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method, a device and a system for cell capability information interaction. The method comprises: obtaining multiflow transmission capability information of at least one local cell or local cell group controlled by a base station; and sending the multiflow transmission capability information to a radio network controller. In the embodiments of the present invention, the base station sends the multiflow transmission capability information of the local cell or the local cell group to the radio network controller, so that, after the connection of a UE, the radio network controller can properly configure an HSDPA multiflow transmission operation of the UE according to the multiflow transmission capability information, thereby effectively applying a feature of HSDPA multiflow transmission. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362826 | HS-DSCH INTER-NODE B CELL CHANGE - A radio resource control (RRC) message is received by a radio resource control (RRC) device of a user equipment (UE). The RRC message notifies the FDD UE of a high speed dedicated shared channel (HS-DSCH) inter-Node B cell change. A reordering buffers of a medium access controller-high speed (MAC-hs) is flushed in response to the receiving the RRC message. A status report is generated for each acknowledge mode (AM) RLC instance mapped to the HS-DSCH by a radio link control (RLC) device after the MAC-hs flushes the reordering buffer. Each status report indicates missing AM RLC packet data units (PDUs). The RRC device sends a “TRANSPORT CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION COMPLETE” message on a DCCH after the RLC device generates each status report. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362827 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING SOURCE SGSN - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method and an apparatus for determining a source SGSN. The method for determining a source SGSN includes: obtaining addressing information of a source SGSN through a NAS message sent by a UE; and sending the addressing information of the source SGSN to a target MME or a target SGSN, so that the target MME or the target SGSN determines the source SGSN according to the addressing information of the source SGSN. The embodiments of the present invention may ensure that an MSC obtains latest addressing information of a source SGSN of a UE, so that a target MME or a target SGSN obtains prepare bearer information of the UE from a correct source SGSN. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362828 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR RELIABLE INTER RADIO ACCESS NETWORK HANDOVER - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, a method comprises receiving at a first network node an inter-radio access technology (RAT) signaling message from a source node, a handover signaling message including inter-RAT handover information including a START packet switched (START PS) value; determining whether the START PS value is reliable prior to handing over to a second network node at least based in part on the source node from which the START PS value is received and inter-RAT handover information reliability indicator; building an inter-RAT handover information reliability indicator to indicate whether the START PS value is reliable and including the inter-RAT handover info reliability indicator in a second signaling message; and forwarding the second signaling message to the second network node. | 12-11-2014 |
20140369312 | ADAPTIVE TRANSMIT POWER CONTROL (TPC) STEP SIZE IN A HIGH SPEED DATA NETWORK - A method of wireless communication includes returning to a base station after a handover failure. The method also includes receiving consecutive transmit power control (TPC) UP commands within a first predetermined time period. The method further includes receiving enhanced uplink dedicated channel uplink control channel (E-UCCH) instances within a second predetermined period. The method further includes increasing a TPC step size after receiving a first predetermined number of consecutive TPC UP commands during the first predetermined time period and after receiving a second predetermined number of E-UCCH instances during the second predetermined time period. | 12-18-2014 |
20140369313 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENABLING RE-ESTABLISHMENT PROCEDURE IN A HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK - The present invention relates to method and apparatus for enabling re-establishment procedure in a heterogeneous network. According to an embodiment of the present invention, a method for a master node working with inter-site carrier aggregation in a heterogeneous network is provided. The method comprises: performing detection for whether there is a trigger for transferring UE context which is indispensable for a successful re-establishment procedure for a user equipment to at least one slave node; transferring, once said trigger is detected, said UE context to said at least one slave node. According to an embodiment of the present invention, there is also provided an apparatus of a master node, and corresponding computer program product. | 12-18-2014 |
20140369314 | Method and Apparatus for Seamless Handover in a Wireless Communication Network - In a wireless communication network where base stations receive protocol data units (PDUs) from mobile stations for decompression and deciphering for ordered, sequential transfer as service data units (SDUs) to an associated core network, the teachings presented herein provide a method of supporting seamless handover of a mobile station from a source base station to a target base station. By way of example, the teachings herein apply to a network based on the E-UTRA specifications, as promulgated by the 3GPP. However, that example is non-limiting, as the teachings herein apply to any network that employs in-sequence data delivery and duplicate data detection at handover. Broadly, the source base station forwards out-of-sequence SDUs and corresponding sequence number information to the target base station in support of seamless handover, and the target base station uses that information to request retransmissions as needed for packet reordering. | 12-18-2014 |
20140369315 | OPERATION OF A SERVING NODE IN A NETWORK - The invention provides a system and method for repairing corrupt security information. At a serving node in a telecommunications network, security capabilities of a terminal are received when the terminal registers with the serving node. The received security capabilities are stored. A path switch request message is received from a target base station following an X2 handover request sent from a source base station to the target base station for handover of the terminal, the path switch request including the security capabilities of the terminal. The serving node determines whether the security capabilities of the terminal stored in the storage medium should be sent to the target base station. If so, the serving node sends the stored security capabilities of the terminal to the target base station for use in reselecting security algorithms to be used in communications between the target base station and terminal following the handover. | 12-18-2014 |
20140369316 | DYNAMIC INTERNETWORK LOAD BALANCING - Examples are disclosed for executing vertical handovers of wireless devices configured to couple with heterogeneous wireless networks. In some examples, wireless devices on separate heterogeneous networks may be swapped between the heterogeneous networks. | 12-18-2014 |
20140369317 | Method of Timing Reference Management - A method of timing reference management for a mobile device in a wireless communication system comprising a network is disclosed. The method comprises being configured a first cell of a timing advance group, as a timing reference cell of the timing advance group; and when the timing reference cell is changed from the first cell to a second cell of the timing advance group and a timing alignment timer applied for the timing advance group for uplink transmission synchronization is running, deriving a new uplink transmission timing according to a second timing adjust value; wherein the second timing adjust value is calculated according to a first downlink timing of the first cell, a second downlink timing of the second cell, and a first timing adjust value for deriving the uplink transmission timing when the timing reference cell is the first cell. | 12-18-2014 |
20140369318 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER WITH A RELAY NODE - A method and apparatus for performing handover with a relay node (RN) are described. A donor eNodeB (eNB) includes circuitry configured to establish a wireless backhaul link with an RN and an X2 interface with at least one other eNB, circuitry configured to receive over the wireless backhaul link an X2 application protocol (X2AP) handover request message indicating that a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) of the RN is being requested to be handed over to another eNB, and circuitry configured to send the handover request message to the another eNB over the X2 interface. | 12-18-2014 |
20140369319 | Method and System for Maintaining Multiple PDN Network Connection During Inter-Technology Handover in the Idle Mode - Supporting an optimized idle mode handoff of user equipment from a 3GPP to a non-3GPP system. Namely, during an idle mode registration of the user equipment with the non-3GPP system, the user equipment may provide an indication to the access node on the non-3GPP system so that the access point in that non-3GPP system contacts the appropriate entity (HSS or AAA) on the home network for the user equipment to download the addresses of the multiple PDN gateway addresses that are currently in use by the user equipment. This indication to the non-3GPP access node, the contact message from the access node to the home network, and the response from the home network to the access node on the non-3GPP system provide the access node with sufficient information to maintain multiple PDN connectivity to the user equipment during an idle mode handover. | 12-18-2014 |
20140376510 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD - A transmission node in a wireless communication network includes a buffer, a transmitting section, a data processing section, a re-transmit queue, and a control section. To avoid duplication of SDUs for re-transmission, PDUs transformed from SDUs by the data processing section are maintained in the buffer by the control section after being transmitted to a mobile node in the network by the transmitting section. Addresses of the SDUs and associated sequence numbers are stored in the re-transmit queue. When handover of the mobile node from the transmission node to another transmission node occurs, PDUs of which the addresses are stored in the re-transmit queue are reverse transformed to SDUs with the associated sequence numbers so that the SDUs can be handed over to another transmission node. | 12-25-2014 |
20140376511 | Low Latency IMS-Based Media Handoff Between a Cellular Network and a WLAN - Methods for transporting a media call between an IMS server and a User Equipment (UE) and of handing over the media call between a cellular network and a WLAN are provided. In an embodiment, the media call data and signaling are split such that the data is transported over the WLAN and the signaling is transported over the cellular network. In another embodiment, handover latency is reduced by using a dual registration process that registers the UE with an IMS server using both a WLAN-based contact and a cellular network-based contact. The media call can then be carried over the WLAN and/or the cellular network and can be handed over seamlessly from one to the other within minimal signaling. | 12-25-2014 |
20140376512 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING MOBILITY OF UE IN LOCAL NETWORK - The present invention relates to a method and apparatus for managing a Local IP Access (LIP A) connection in a local network system. The method of managing a LIP A connection of UE in a connected state according to an embodiment of the present invention includes the steps of: a source home base station for UE determining a handover of the UE; when the handover of the UE is determined, determining whether a target home base station is a Long Term Evolution (LTE) release 10 or a Pre Rel-11 HeNB; and when the target home base station is a Pre Rel-11 HeNB, disconnecting the LIP A connection of the UE. According to an embodiment of the present invention, the mobility of UE having a LIPA PDN connection can be efficiently controlled in a local network where a Rel-11 H(e)NB and a Pre Rel-11 H(e)NB exist together. | 12-25-2014 |
20140376513 | USER EQUIPMENT CAPABILITIES INDICATION TO ENABLE INTELLIGENT HANDOVER DECISION - User Equipment Capabilities Indication to Enable Intelligent Handover Decision Telecommunication systems may be enhanced by methods, systems, interfaces, software, and protocols that provide an indication of particular user equipment capabilities to a base station, such as an eNodeB. The indication can be, for example, an indication of a user equipment's ability to support voice over high speed packet access. In certain embodiments, a method includes notifying an eNodeB indication from a user equipment about the user equipment's capability with respect to voice over a specified kind of internet protocol connection. | 12-25-2014 |
20140376514 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FACILITATING COMMUNICATION SESSION CONTINUITY - A method and apparatus are provided for facilitating communication session continuity. A method may include receiving, at a terminal, an identifier associated with an EATF (emergency access transfer function). The method may further include determining that the terminal has undergone a reverse SRVCC (Single Radio Voice Call Continuity) handover from a circuit switched access to a packet switched access while engaged in an active emergency session. The method may additionally include, responsive to the determination, using the identifier to set up an emergency session transfer request to the EATF to cause creation of a bearer for the emergency session on the packet switched access. A corresponding apparatus is also provided. | 12-25-2014 |
20140376515 | METHODS, APPARATUSES AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR WLAN DISCOVERY AND HANDOVER IN COEXISTED LTE AND WLAN NETWORKS - Provided are methods, corresponding apparatuses, and computer program products for triggering WLAN discovery and handover procedures in coexisted LTE and WLAN networks. A method comprises receiving, from a first base station, information that has been exchanged 5 between the first evolve Node B and a second base station and that relates to at least one wireless local area network access point connected or co-located with the first base station or the second base station; and performing a wireless local area network discovery procedure with the at least one wireless local area network access point based upon the received information. With the claimed inventions, signaling cost and power consumption by those unnecessary WLAN 10 discovery procedures could be avoided, acquiring a longer battery life for a user equipment. | 12-25-2014 |
20140376516 | RESPONDING TO A PAGE MESSAGE - A method for responding to a page message is provided. The method can include a wireless communication device receiving a page message on a first channel of a first network; suspending a connection to a second network in response to receiving the page message; transitioning to a second channel of the first network prior to responding to the page message; and sending a response message responsive to the page message on the second channel. | 12-25-2014 |
20150009956 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING STREAMING SERVICE DATA IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method for receiving streaming service data in a user equipment (UE) in a mobile communication network is provided. The method includes receiving streaming service data from a first access router (AR) through a first transmission control protocol (TCP) session in a state that a UE establishes the first TCP session with a corresponding node (CN); being allocated a second IP address which is different from the first IP address from a second AR which is different from the first AR if the UE hands over to the second AR while receiving the streaming service data; establishing a second TCP session which is different from the first TCP session with the CN using the second IP address; switching from the first TCP session to the second TCP session; and receiving the streaming service data from the CN through the second TCP session. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009957 | IMS FEMTOCELL FOR VOICE, DATA AND VIDEO - An Internet Protocol Multimedia System (IMS) femtocell serves as a base station and base station controller in a wireless/wireline service provider's macro network and a Wi-Fi access point to seamlessly support cellular and packet user devices and deliver both circuit switched and packet switched services inside a building. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009958 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, BASE STATION, AND USER TERMINAL - A communication control method is employed in a mobile communication system including a general cell supporting PTM transmission of MBMS data and a specific cell not supporting PTM transmission of the MBMS data. The method comprises: a step A of broadcasting general cell load information from the general cell; a step B of receiving the general cell load information broadcasted in the step A, by a user terminal which receives the MBMS data from the general cell in an idle mode with the general cell selected as a cell on which to camp; and a step C of controlling cell reselection from the general cell to the specific cell by the user terminal, based on the general cell load information received in the step B. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009959 | RADIO BASE STATION AND MOBILE STATION - Provided is a radio base station and a mobile station capable of reducing a handover delay while avoiding an increase of a load on the C-Plane even in a case where the kind of the PDCP-SN used within a cell after the handover is changed. A radio base station eNB according to the present invention includes a transmission unit configured to notify a mobile station UE that the length of the PDCP-SN used in communication within the first cell (or the second cell) is changed in a case where the mobile station UE performs a handover from the second cell to the first cell (or in a case where the mobile station UE performs a handover from the first cell to the second cell). | 01-08-2015 |
20150009960 | TECHNIQUES FOR ESTABLISHING A HANDOFF PROFILE USING USER FEEDBACK - Examples are disclosed for user feedback to enable a handoff profile for a dual-mode hybrid mobile device. In some examples communication link handoff logic may be executed by the processor component to receive user feedback during a voice call mediated by a call server, the voice call between a hybrid mobile device and another communication device, the user feedback pertaining to one or more Voice-over Internet Protocol (VoIP) communication link parameters for the communication link between the hybrid mobile device and the call server. The communication link parameters are correlated with a call quality threshold based on the user feedback and a handoff profile is established for the hybrid mobile device based on the call quality thresholds, the handoff profile operative to establish criteria for switching the VoIP communication link to a communication link over a different network. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009961 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COMMUNICATING DELIVERY OF DATA PACKETS TO A USER EQUIPMENT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In a communication system ( | 01-08-2015 |
20150009962 | Dual Band LTE Small Cell - A dual band LTE small cell base station communicates on both licensed bands and unlicensed bands. The small cell base station modifies the communication protocol utilized by the licensed band to enable communication over an unlicensed band. This modification involves replacing the physical (PHY) layer of the licensed band communication protocol with the PHY layer of a to-be-used protocol in an unlicensed band. | 01-08-2015 |
20150016412 | USING UE ENVIRONMENTAL STATUS INFORMATION TO IMPROVE MOBILITY HANDLING AND OFFLOAD DECISIONS - User equipment (UE) connection handling is disclosed in which UE environmental status information is used at a network entity to make informed decisions regarding mobility handling and data offloading. A UE determines its environmental status information based on input from at least one non-RF sensor located in the UE. The UE generates and then transmits a control message comprising the UE environmental status information to a network entity in communication with the UE. The network entity receives the control message and uses the UE environmental status information to manage a connection of the associated UE based at least in part on the UE environmental status information. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016413 | APPARATUS, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF LAWFUL INTERCEPTION (LI) IN A CELLULAR NETWORK - Some demonstrative embodiments include devices, systems and/or methods of Lawful Interception (LI). For example, a device may communicate a message addressed to an Evolved Node B (eNB) over a cellular communication core network, the message including a Lawful Interception (LI) Information Element (IE) indicating that content corresponding to one or more User Equipment (UEs) connected to the eNB is to be subject to LI. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016414 | WLAN SYSTEM AND HANDOVER METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USE THEREIN - A Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) system, a handover method, and an apparatus for use therein are provided. A handover method of a station in a wireless local area network (WLAN) system includes storing handover availability information received from a connected Access Point (AP) connected to the station; and suspending, when the handover availability information is set to “unavailable”, an operation for handover to another AP. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016415 | SYSTEM AND METHOD TO ASSIGN AN INTERNET PROTOCOL ADDRESS TO A MOBILE DEVICE DURING A HANDOFF - A method includes receiving, at a mobile device during a first association with a first access point (AP), a first internet protocol (IP) address assigned by a dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) server. The method also includes, based on handoff of the mobile device from the first AP to a second AP, sending an association request from the mobile device to the second AP. The association request includes the first IP address. The method further includes receiving the first IP address at the mobile device during a second association with the second AP, the first IP address reassigned to the mobile device by the second AP. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016416 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR REDUCED LATENCY DURING INITIAL LINK SETUP - A method of operation of a mobile device to reduce link setup time includes initiating a link setup procedure with a first access point. The link setup procedure includes receiving dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) information via the first access point. The method further includes communicating with the first access point using the DHCP information and initiating communication with a second access point after communicating with the first access point. The method further includes receiving an indication from the second access point identifying whether the mobile device is able to communicate with the second access point using the DHCP information. A value of the indication identifies whether the mobile device is able to reduce link setup time with the second access point by avoiding DHCP reconfiguration with the second access point. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016417 | WIRELESS LAN CONNECTION HANDOVER BY DOCKING SYSTEM AND GENERIC NETWORK DEVICE DRIVER - A wireless docking system comprising a dockee device ( | 01-15-2015 |
20150016418 | ALLOWING ACCESS TO SERVICES DELIVERED BY A SERVICE DELIVERY PLATFORM IN A 3GPP HPLMN, TO AN USER EQUIPMENT CONNECTED OVER A TRUSTED NON-3GPP ACCESS NETWORK - Embodiments of the present invention include a method for allowing access to services delivered by a service delivery platform in a 3GPP HPLMN, to an User Equipment UE connected over a trusted non-3GPP Access Network AN, said method comprising:
| 01-15-2015 |
20150016419 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACQUIRING SYSTEM INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for acquiring system information in a wireless communication system are disclosed. The method for acquiring system information by a user equipment (UE) in a wireless communication system includes: performing a handover from a first cell to a second cell; and acquiring system information of the second cell, wherein a method for acquiring the system information of the second cell is determined according to CRE (Cell Range Extension)-related capability of the UE. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016420 | HANDOVER OF USER-EQUIPMENT (UE) UNDETECTED EMERGENCY CALLS - A solution is presented that includes a method of performing a Single Radio Voice Call Continuity, SRVCC, handover of a telecommunications call established by a User Equipment, UE accessing a serving network using a Packet Switched, PS, access. The serving network includes a serving IMS network and the call is a UE-undetected emergency call anchored in the serving IMS network. The method includes receiving an indication from the serving network that the established call is a UE-undetected emergency call anchored in the serving IMS network. A SRVCC handover request to hand over the call from the PS access to a Circuit Switched, CS, access is received. Handover of the call is initiated so that an Emergency Session Transfer Number-Single Radio, E-STN-SR, is used and the call continues to be routed through the IMS network in which it is anchored. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016421 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TRANSITIONING A COMMUNICATION SESSION BETWEEN NETWORKS THAT ARE NOT COMMONLY CONTROLLED - Provided are a system and method for network transitions. In one example, the method includes receiving messages from a mobile device indicating that the mobile device is in a session initiation protocol (SIP) wireless hotspot and that the mobile device is engaged in a communication session via a cellular network while in the SIP wireless hotspot. The cellular network is instructed to add the mobile device to the communication session via the SIP wireless hotspot. An affirmative response is received from the cellular network and a third message is sent to the mobile device to notify the mobile device of the affirmative response. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016422 | COMMON MOBILITY MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL FOR MULTIMEDIA APPLICATIONS, SYSTEMS AND SERVICES - A framework of a common mobility management protocol for Q.5/16 includes a high level protocol for performing the functions of address resolution, routing, location update and authentication. The common mobility management protocol can be used by existing and future multimedia applications (MA's) to support mobility management for messaging among mobility management authentication function (AuF), home location function (HLF) and visitor location function (VLF) databases/servers, and the corresponding multimedia application functional entities (MAFEs) of the multimedia applications (MA's). The common mobility management protocol may replace, act in concert with or in sequence with existent interworking protocols for the various multimedia applications. Reference point architectures, functional characteristics, features, and capabilities of the protocol are described including call flows and message syntax. The disclosure presents the scope of Q.5/16 and how H.MMS.1 (H.323 Mobility), H.MMS.2 (Global Mobility), and H.MMS.3 (Presence/Instant Messaging Mobility) can be a part of the same common mobility management protocol. | 01-15-2015 |
20150016423 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR DETACHING USER EQUIPMENT - A method and device for detaching a user equipment (UE) are disclosed in the present invention. The UE is registered with a mobility management entity (MME) in a packet switched (PS) network and a mobile switching center (MSC) in a circuit switched (CS) network. When the UE needs to detach from the PS network, the MSC receives a Detach Request with a Detach Type indicating the detaching from the PS network only; after receiving the Detach Request, the MSC deletes the context of the PS core network entity and clears the connection between the MSC and the MME. An MME for performing UE detachment is also disclosed in the present invention. The present invention helps reduce the time delay during the subsequent handover and quickly provide users with communications services, so as to improve user's experience and meet the carriers' requirements. | 01-15-2015 |
20150023318 | Method To Control The Effects Of Out-Of-Cell Interference In A Wireless Cellular System Using Over-The-Air Feedback Control - A mobile terminal is controlled via over-the-air feedback so as to enable its data transmissions to be independently and successfully decoded at each of the base stations in its active set absent a transmit power limitation or data retransmission limit. Using the decoded data, the channel is re-estimated and the waveform received from the mobile terminal is reconstructed and subtracted from the total interference at each base station in the active set where decoding has been successful. As a result, transmissions from other mobile terminals, which have yet to be successfully decoded at such a base station, will experience a higher signal-to-noise ratio and thus an increased likelihood of being successfully decoded. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023319 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING USER EQUIPMENT GROUP INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for transmitting user equipment (UE) group information in a wireless communication system is provided. A source eNodeB (eNB) of a handover procedure transmits a handover request message including UE group information to a target eNB of the handover procedure when the source eNB hands over a UE to the target eNB. The UE group information is included in a UE history information IE (information element) of the handover request message. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023320 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, BASE STATION, HOME BASE STATION, AND GATEWAY DEVICE - A communication control method includes: an establishment step of establishing, between a home base station selected from a plurality of home base stations in control of a gateway device and other base station not in control of the gateway device, a communication path which passes through the gateway device and which does not pass through a core network; and a step of performing inter-base station communications using the communication path established in the establishment step, by the selected home base station and the other base station. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023321 | Network Handover Method, Terminal, Controller, Gateway, and System - A network handover method, a terminal, a controller, a gateway, and a system. The method includes: when a terminal accesses a first network, converting data including an initial TCP four-tuple into data including a first TCP four-tuple, and sending the data to a gateway; and after handing over from the first network to a second network, converting data including the initial TCP four-tuple into data including a second TCP four-tuple, and sending the data including the second TCP four-tuple to the gateway. This achieves objectives of preventing a connection from being interrupted before and after the network handover, improving use experience, and reducing complexity of a network handover process. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023322 | CONTROL STATION, MOBILE STATION, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - A mobile station that establishes a first transfer path by way of a first access network between the mobile station and a control station. The mobile station establishes a default EPS (Evolved Packet System) bearer by way of a second access network between the mobile station and the control station by transmitting an attach request for requesting a handover of a partial flow among the plurality of flows when performing transmission/reception of a plurality of flows with the control station by using the first transfer path. | 01-22-2015 |
20150029998 | Inter-Node B Handover in HSDPA or Multi-Flow HSPA Including Packet Retransmission - The application relates to the removal of one of the links in multi-flow HSPA but the proposed method is also applicable to normal HSDPA operation during handover. In particular the application aims at minimizing the negative impact of a removed radio link, i.e. drop of packets and/or delays. According to the proposed method, in which the radio link to be removed is via a first Node B NB | 01-29-2015 |
20150029999 | TECHNIQUES FOR SELECTED INTERNET PROTOCOL TRAFFIC OFFLOAD SUPPORT AT AN ASSISTING ENODEB - Techniques are described for selected internet protocol traffic offload (SIPTO) support at an assisting eNodeB. A connection may be established between a first eNodeB and a UE, and it may be determined whether a connection exists or is pending between the UE and a second eNodeB. A message may be transmitted to a mobility management entity (MME), the message associating a network address of the second eNodeB with SIPTO connectivity for the UE. | 01-29-2015 |
20150030000 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION METHOD, BASE STATION, AND MOBILE TERMINAL - A wireless communication system allows a handover operation to a base station communicating through a plurality of frequency bands. The mobile terminal includes a communication unit adapted to perform communication with any of the base stations through a plurality of frequency bands. The communication unit of the base station notifies, when communication through a plurality of frequency bands is possible, a mobile terminal about information directed to identifying a main frequency band from relevant frequency bands in a manner allowing discrimination from one or more frequency bands other than the main frequency band. The communication unit of the mobile terminal determines that, upon receiving information directed to identifying a main frequency band from the second base station during having communication connection with the first base station, that the frequency band identified by the relevant information is a subject of handover towards the second base station. | 01-29-2015 |
20150030001 | UE REPORTING OF MOBILITY INFORMATION USEFUL FOR OPTIMIZING UE PARAMETER SETTINGS - A method includes determining that reporting of user equipment mobility information is to be performed. The method further includes reporting, responsive to the determining, the user equipment mobility information, the user equipment mobility information concerning at least a time period in one or both of an idle state or a connected state since a transition by the user equipment to a cell, or since a transition by the user equipment to or from a connected state with a cell, Apparatus, systems, computer programs, and computer program products are also disclosed. | 01-29-2015 |
20150030002 | PACKET DATA PROTOCOL CONTEXT MANAGEMENT FOR HANDOVER FROM CELLULAR NETWORK TO A FEMTO CELL - Packet data protocol (PDP) contexts are managed upon cellular-to-femto handover, wherein femto network has disparate capabilities to support applications with distinct access point names (APNs) and quality of service (QoS) profiles. Based at least on activity factors of applications associated with PDP contexts, a QoS-based ranking of PDP contexts, and subscriber input, cellular network platform selects active PDP contexts to retain and suspend upon handover. A group of active PDP contexts is handed off in accordance with femto coverage capability, with remaining active PDP contexts suspended during handover. When a suspended PDP context, and application associated therewith, is resumed through femto coverage, a PDP context modification is conducted with a new APN and the application is routed to a corresponding femto gateway node and application server. Additionally, femto network platform performs a radio access bearer reconfiguration to meet QoS requirements of the resumed PDP context. | 01-29-2015 |
20150030003 | Enhanced Techniques For Using Core Based Nodes For State Transfer - Methods and apparatus for storing, manipulating, retrieving, and forwarding state, e.g., context and other information, used to support communications sessions with one or more end nodes, e.g., mobile devices, are described. Various features are directed to a mobile node controlling the transfer of state from a first access node to a second access node during a handoff operation thereby eliminating any need for state transfer messages to be transmitted between the second access node and the first access node during handoff. Other features of the invention are directed to the use of a core network node to store state information. State information stored in the core node can be accessed and used by access nodes in cases where a mobile node does not send a state transfer message during a handoff, e.g., because communication with the first access node is lost or because such messages are not supported. | 01-29-2015 |
20150036656 | WLAN AND CELLULAR SHARED ANTENNAS - A system and method for sharing antennas of a wireless communication device is provided. The wireless communication device leverages cellular antennas to improve data throughput by creating a multiple-in, multiple out (MIMO) operation for a wireless local area network (WLAN) connection. Antenna resources are dynamically allocated between the cellular antennas and the wireless antenna to provide improved throughput. | 02-05-2015 |
20150036657 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING HANDOFF OF IEEE 802.22 NETWORK-BASED MOBILE TERMINAL - The present invention relates to a method for controlling handoff of a mobile terminal, and more specifically, to a method for controlling handoff of a mobile terminal in an IEEE 802.22 wireless regional area network (WRAN) communication standard for defining communication of a fixed terminal which uses a frequency band that is not regionally used among television broadcasting frequency bands. | 02-05-2015 |
20150036658 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In a mobile communication system, an RRM measurement set is set as a collection of cells to become targets on which a UE performs a process of detecting whether or not radio communication is allowed. Among the cells in the RRM measurement set, a CoMP measurement set is set as a collection of cells to become candidates on which the UE performs a process of detecting whether or not coordinated communication (CoMP communication) is allowed. Among the cells of the CoMP measurement set, a CoMP active set is set as a collection of cells to become targets on which the UE performs the process of detecting whether or not CoMP communication is allowed. | 02-05-2015 |
20150036659 | Local Networks - The invention relates to an apparatus including at least one processor and at least one memory including a computer program code, the at least one memory and the computer program code configured to, with the at least one processor, cause the apparatus at least to: provide access to a network and needed bearers locally, and obtain offload bearer traffic from an umbrella node under control of the umbrella node in such a manner that a core network sees the offload bearer traffic as internal umbrella node traffic. | 02-05-2015 |
20150036660 | Method, Device, and System for Identifying Traffic Type Across Devices - A method, a device, and a system for identifying a traffic type across devices are provided, where the method includes: obtaining, by a source service control device, flow identification information of a service flow transmitted between a user equipment and a network; and synchronizing the obtained flow identification information to a target service control device when detecting that the user equipment is handed over from the source service control device to the target service control device to transmit the service flow with the network, so that the target service control device identifies, according to the flow identification information, the traffic type of the service flow transmitted between the user equipment and the network. Thus an operator is facilitated to implement network service control such as bandwidth control and virus prevention efficiently without changing an existing architecture. | 02-05-2015 |
20150036661 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHODS AND COMPONENTS THAT IMPLEMENT HANDOFF IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS - This invention relates to wireless local area networks, and particularly to the IEEE 802.11 family of standards. It consists of a method and apparatus that can be implemented in access points (APs) and subscriber wireless transmit/receive units (WTRUs), in order to allow an AP to initiate re-association of a WTRU to itself or a different AP. The invention improves the robustness of the network by enabling more efficient load balancing, congestion control, and roaming, without compromising the user experience. | 02-05-2015 |
20150043528 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ACCEPTING OR REJECTING A REQUEST ASSOCIATED WITH A MOBILE DEVICE WIRELESSLY CONNECTING TO A NETWORK - A method is performed in a network device for accepting or rejecting a request associated with a mobile device wirelessly connecting to a network. The method includes: receiving a request from a mobile device, wherein the request is associated with the mobile device wirelessly connecting to a network; and determining an expected connection duration for the mobile device, which is calculated using collected historical connection data that identifies a plurality of previous wireless connections to the network and identifies a corresponding duration of each previous wireless connection. The method further includes determining whether to accept or reject the request based on the expected connection duration for the mobile device. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043529 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR USING MEMORY DEVICE - An apparatus and a method for providing a packet service (PS) or a Circtui service (CS) in an electronic device. The apparatus determines a number of “ping-pongs” in which an access change between a first modem and a second modem is repeatedly made for a predetermined first time, compares the number of ping-pongs with a predetermined reference number of ping-pongs, and provides the PS through the second modem for a predetermined second time when the determined number of ping-pongs is equal to or greater than the predetermined reference number of ping-pongs. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043530 | SEAMLESS MOBILITY IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - For seamless mobility, at least one communication parameter to associate with a BSSID is selected. A beacon is sent from a first access point to advertise its presence, wherein the beacon comprises the BSSID associated with the at least one communication parameter. Responsive to the mobile station choosing the BSSID being advertised in the beacon sent from the first access point, a uniquely assign the BSSID is selected for a mobile station. The first access point from the plurality of access points is associated with the mobile station persistently. Associating is made as selected by the system coordinator, the uniquely assigned BSSID being independent of an identify of mobile station and being eligible for subsequent assignment to a different mobile station as determined by the system coordinator. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043531 | S-GW Relocation and QoS Change without Mobility - A method in a network node for handling a relocation of a data flow of a User Equipment, UE, from a first GateWay, GW, to a second GW is provided. The network node receives ( | 02-12-2015 |
20150043532 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, BASE STATION, HOME BASE STATION, AND GATEWAY DEVICE - A communication control method applied to a mobile communication system, the mobile communication system including a home base station that forms a specific cell, a base station that determines whether to perform handover of a user terminal to the specific cell and a mobility management device that performs verification of the user terminal for access permission to the specific cell, the communication control method comprises a request step of requesting the mobility management device to perform the verification of the user terminal before the base station determines to perform the handover to the specific cell. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043533 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTING CELL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for selecting a cell in a wireless communication system is provided. A user equipment (UE) receives a radio resource control (RRC) connection release message including redirection information from a serving cell. The UE determines whether to ignore the redirection information in the RRC connection release message according to a release cause of an RRC connection release and a user preference between a unicast service and a multimedia broadcast/multicast service (MBMS) service. If it is determined to ignore the redirection information, the UE ignores the redirection information in the RRC connection release message. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043534 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR LTE RADIO ACCESS NETWORK SHARING - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided in which user equipment performs a circuit-switched fallback procedure to connect to a CDMA2000 network. The CDMA2000 network may be selected by the UE or by the network. A plurality of PLMN IDs may be maintained, where the IDs relate to a network that includes an LTE RAN. Each PLMN ID may be associated with a CDMA2000 network sharing the LTE RAN. A CDMA2000 network may be selected for circuit-switched fallback of a user equipment operating in the LTE RAN. The user equipment may be configured to perform a circuit-switched fallback procedure on the selected CDMA2000 network. The CDMA2000 network may be selected by a mobility management entity responsive to a PLMN selection procedure. The PLMN selection procedure may be performed when the UE reports multiple-operator capability. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043535 | RADIO ACCESS NETWORK CONTROL METHOD AND RADIO ACCESS NETWORK - In radio access network (RAN) | 02-12-2015 |
20150043536 | INTERNETWORKING TECHNIQUES FOR TRANSFERRING PACKETS BETWEEN SOURCE AND TARGET SERVING GATEWAYS - A target gateway operating in a target wireless network receives a request for transferring wireless service of a wireless device from a source access network to the target access network. The target gateway sends a handover initiate message comprising key information including an uplink key to a source gateway operating in the source access network. In response to the handover initiate message, the target gateway receives a handover acknowledgement message that includes user session information including session reference identifiers (SR-IDs) associated with multiple Internet Protocol (IP) addresses of the wireless device. Subsequently, the target gateway forwards a packet of uplink communication by encrypting using the uplink key to a gateway server. | 02-12-2015 |
20150043537 | SECURITY PROCESSING METHOD AND SYSTEM IN NETWORK HANDOVER PROCESS - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a security processing method and system in a network handover process. The method includes: generating, by a network switching node, a target key after receiving a handover request; sending, by the network switching node, security information including the target key to a target network node, and receiving a handover response message sent by the target network node; and sending, by the network switching node, a handover command to a mobile terminal, so that the mobile terminal accesses a target network. By adopting the present invention, security processing in handover of a mobile terminal from a 3G network to an HSPA network or an LTE network may be completed in a case that the network switching node currently used in the network is not changed. | 02-12-2015 |
20150049734 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING INDICATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for transmitting an indication in a wireless communication system is provided. A source donor eNodeB (DeNB) transmits a first handover request message for a mobile relay node, to a target DeNB, and transmits a second handover request message for user equipments (UEs) attached to the mobile relay node, to a target eNB. The source DeNB transmits an indication including information on lists of UEs which can be handed over to the target eNB, to the mobile relay node, and the mobile relay node transmits a radio resource control (RRC) connection reconfiguration message indicating a UE to handover to the target eNB. | 02-19-2015 |
20150049735 | SELECTION OF PACKET DATA PROTOCOL CONTEXT FOR HANDOVER FROM CELLULAR NETWORK TO FEMTO CELL - System(s) and method(s) are provided to manage packet data protocol (PDP) contexts upon cellular-to-femto handover, wherein femto network has disparate capabilities to support applications with distinct access point names (APNs) and quality of service (QoS) profiles. Based at least on activity factors of applications associated with PDP contexts, a QoS-based ranking of PDP contexts, and subscriber input, cellular network platform selects active PDP contexts to retain and suspend upon handover. A group of active PDP contexts is handed off in accordance with femto coverage capability, with remaining active PDP contexts suspended during handover. When a suspended PDP context, and application associated therewith, is resumed through femto coverage, a PDP context modification is conducted with a new APN and the application is routed to a corresponding femto gateway node and application server. Additionally, femto network platform performs a radio access bearer reconfiguration to meet QoS requirements of the resumed PDP context. | 02-19-2015 |
20150049736 | MIMO WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MIMO TRANSMISSION METHOD, AND APPARATUS - Embodiments of the present invention provide a MIMO wireless communication system, a MIMO transmission method, and an apparatus, which relate to the field of communications technologies and are invented to effectively improve transmission efficiency and decrease a transmission delay. The MIMO wireless communication system includes: a base station, a first user equipment, and at least one second user equipment, where the first user equipment performs cellular uplink communication with the base station, and performs device-to-device communication with the at least one second user equipment, and the same time-frequency resource is used in the cellular uplink communication between the first user equipment and the base station and the device-to-device communication between the first user equipment and the second user equipment. The present invention is applicable to wireless communication technologies. | 02-19-2015 |
20150055620 | Devices, Methods and Computer Program Products for an Improved Handover in Inter-Site Carrier Aggregation Scenarios - A device, communicates with a terminal in association with at least a first other device, using at least two carriers, wherein at least a first carrier towards the terminal is established from the device and at least a second carrier is established towards the terminal from the first other device. The device receives a report indicative of a connection quality of the first carrier, responsive thereto issues a request for handover of the first carrier towards a second device, sends relocation information in relation to the first carrier towards the first other device, and only after sending that relocation information, commands the terminal to perform a handover of the first carrier to the second device. Such device, in cooperation with other devices, accomplishes an optimized handover in terms of a primary component carrier relocation from a serving eNB towards a target eNB, while a secondary component carrier is maintained. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055621 | Devices, Methods and Computer Program Products for an Improved Handover in Inter-Site Carrier Aggregation Scenarios - A handover process is proposed in a carrier aggregation scenario, in which there is encompassed a device communicating with a terminal in association with at least another device, using at least two carriers. At least a first carrier towards the terminal is established from the at least one another device and at least a second carrier is established towards the terminal from the device. A control module of the device is configured to suspend ongoing traffic between the device and the terminal on the second carrier, perform re-establishment of one or more protocol entities communicating over bearers between the device and the terminal on the second carrier, and resume traffic between the device and the terminal on the second carrier. The suspending is triggered by a first instruction received from a first one of the at least one another device, and the resuming is triggered by a second instruction received. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055622 | COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ELECTRONIC DEVICE IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication method and apparatus of an electronic device in a mobile communication system is provided. The method includes performing data communication through a cellular communication network, determining whether a service type of the data communication matches one of predetermined service types, and switching, when the service type of the data communication matches one of the predetermined service types, from the cellular communication network to a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) of an Access Point (AP) for which its beacon signal is received with a signal strength greater than or equal to a first threshold value. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055623 | MOBILE SOFTWARE DEFINED NETWORKING (MobiSDN) - A method and apparatus for managing data in a software defined network. The apparatus is configured to receive control information related to a source node and a target node from a plurality of network devices in the software defined network. The apparatus is also configured to identify a route for data forwarding between the source node and the target node based on the control information. The apparatus is also configured to request data forwarding to the plurality of network devices according to the route. The source node or the target node can be at least one of a user equipment (UE), and a cellsite node including at least a base station. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055624 | MAPPING SCHEMES FOR SECONDARY SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNAL SCRAMBLING - Embodiments of the present disclosure provide a transmitter, a receiver and methods of operating a transmitter and a receiver. In one embodiment, the transmitter includes a synchronization unit configured to provide a primary synchronisation signal and a secondary synchronisation signal having first and second segments. The transmitter also includes a secondary scrambling unit configured to provide a scrambled secondary synchronization signal, wherein scrambling agents for the first and second segments are derived from a primary synchronization sequence of the primary synchronization signal. The secondary scrambling unit is further configured to provide an additional scrambling of one of the first and second segments, wherein a second scrambling agent is derived from the remaining segment of a secondary synchronization sequence of the secondary synchronization signal. The transmitter further includes a transmit unit configured to transmit the primary synchronization signal and the scrambled secondary synchronization signal. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055625 | METHOD FOR ACCESSING A SERVICE UNAVAILABLE THROUGH A NETWORK CELL - In an access device associated with a first network cell, a method for enabling user equipment (UE) to obtain a service unavailable through the first network cell includes receiving a request for the UE to access the service, and identifying, in a message to the UE, a plurality of second network cells providing the service. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055626 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR INTER-RAT HANDOVER IN MULTI-MODE MOBIL STATION - Described herein are aspects related to communicating with a first radio access technology (RAT) and a second RAT, wherein a set of multi-input, multi-output (MIMO) resources is allocated for communication between a mobile station (MS) and a base station (BS) of the first RAT. A request message is sent to the BS of the first RAT requesting reallocation of at least a portion of the set of MIMO resources in a scan duration. During the scan duration, signals are received from a BS of the second RAT over a reallocated subset of the set of MIMO resources and communications occur with the BS of the first RAT over a non-reallocated subset of the set of MIMO resources. During a normal duration subsequent to the scan duration, communications occur with the BS of the first RAT using the set of MIMO resources including at least some of the reallocated subset of the set of MIMO resources. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055627 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING HANDOFF BASED ON THE MOBILITY OF A SUBSCRIBER STATION - In a wireless communication system, a mobility factor is used to influence handoff. If a subscriber station has been in a low mobility state for some period of time, the system may handoff operation from a first service type to a second service type. If the mobility factor indicates that the subscriber station is moving, the system may handoff operation from the second service type back to the first service type. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055628 | FACILITATING METHOD FOR HANDOVER OF A MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A target node includes an S1 interface which includes an interface between the target node and a gateway, an X2 interface which includes an interface between a source node and the target node, and a transceiver which receives data from the S1 interface and data from the X2 interface. The transceiver sends the data from the X2 interface before sending the data from the S1 interface to a mobile device after the mobile device completes a handover from the source node to the target node. | 02-26-2015 |
20150063295 | USER EQUIPMENT REALLOCATION BETWEEN NODES - A technology for a user equipment (UE) is disclosed that is operable in an anchor-booster architecture of a multiple radio access technology (multi-RAT) heterogeneous network (HetNet). Control information to an anchor cell can be transmitted from a wireless wide area network (WWAN) node in the multi-RAT UE. Data packets of the multi-RAT UE can be selected for transmission via one of the WWAN node and a wireless local area network (WLAN) node in the multi-RAT UE using a multi-RAT coordination function (MRCF) module. Each data packet from one of the WWAN node and the WLAN cell can be transmitted to a multi-RAT small cell evolved node B (SC-eNode B) based on the selection by the MRCF module. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063296 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication system is described in which an LTE base station and network are shared by two or more CDMA operators. Mobility parameters for the different CDMA operators are available and selection between the parameters is performed by the LTE base station, a mobile telephone connected to the LTE base station or a network node, such as an O&M node. The selection is performed based on information relating to subscription information for the mobile telephone. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063297 | MULTIMODE TERMINAL INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD, MULTIMODE TERMINAL AND ACCESS NETWORK DEVICE - Disclosed are an information processing method of a multimode terminal, a multimode terminal and an access network device, wherein, a multimode terminal negotiates with an HRPD access network to determine to close a session keep-alive message initiated by the HRPD access network, the HRPD access network does not transmit a session keep-alive request message to said terminal after said terminal is switched to an LTE network from an HRPD network; and/or after negotiating to determine to close a session keep-alive message initiated by said terminal, said terminal does not transmit a session keep-alive request message to the HRPD network after being switched to the LTE network from the HRPD network. Said terminal acquires a dedicated priority of the HRPD and/or the LTE network from the HRPD access network, and performs network reselection in an idle state according to the dedicated priority when meeting an enabled condition of the dedicated priority. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063298 | Best Effort Call Routing Preference Setting - The invention refers to providing call control within a mobile network with respect to a subscriber associated to one or a plurality of user equipments ( | 03-05-2015 |
20150063299 | SRVCC Handover of Calls Between Access Networks with Efficient Media Gateway Selection - A mechanism is presented for performing a session transfer with Single Radio Voice Call Continuity, SRVCC, from a Packet Switched, PS, access to a Circuit Switched, CS, access of a telecommunications session that has been established over the PS access via an IP Multimedia Subsystem, IMS, network. The method includes receiving a request for the transfer of the session to the CS access. An indication of an already-seized media gateway, MGW, that has been established for use in one or more other sessions over the CS access is obtained from the IMS network. A MGW is selected as a Mobile-Media Gateway, M-MGW, for the session based on the obtained indication. Allocation of resources for the session in the CS access network is initiated, including specifying the MGW to be used as the Mobile-Media Gateway, M-MGW. Transfer of the session to the CS access is then initiated. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063300 | COMMUNICATIONS WITH A MOBILE VIRTUAL BASE STATION - Methods and systems are provided for using virtual base stations in communication systems. A communication system may comprise a plurality of fixed base stations. A virtual base station may be generated and/or assigned to a fixed base station in the communication system, with the fixed base station emitting signals of the virtual base station. The communication system may also comprise at least one network node, and communication system may be configured to transmit data of the virtual base station between the at least one network node and the assigned fixed base station, and emit signals of the virtual base station from the assigned fixed base station with the transmitted data of the virtual base station. The data of the virtual base station may be transmitted from the network node over multicast and/or broadcast connections, to the assigned fixed base station and to one or more fixed base stations. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063301 | OPERATOR CONTROLLED APN ROUTING MAPPING - Systems and methods for operator controlled APN routing mapping are described herein. In one embodiment, a method for routing policy evaluation in a wireless communication system comprises receiving, from a home network, a message comprising a home network policy associated with network node routing, and receiving, from a visited network, another message comprising a visited network policy associated with network node routing. The method also comprises evaluating the home network policy to determine whether to route data traffic via one of a wireless node offload or a designated access point name (APN), evaluating the home network policy to determine whether the home network policy has priority over the visited network policy, and ignoring a rule of the visited network policy associated with routing the data traffic in response to a determination that the home network policy has priority. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063302 | Systems and Methods Facilitating Relocatability of Devices Between Networks - Provided is a software entity adapted to operate in a first network on behalf of a relocatable device to negotiate services for the relocatable device from the network, and to be transportable or replicable to operate in a second network to negotiate services for the relocatable device from the second network. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063303 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, LOW-POWER BASE STATION, HIGH-POWER BASE STATION, RADIO TERMINAL, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - A radio communication system is provided with a high-power base station, a radio terminal which is located within a macro cell formed by the high-power base station, and a low-power base station which has a lower transmission output power than the high-power base station. The low-power base station sends, to the high-power base station, control information needed for the radio communication between the radio terminal and the low-power base station; the high-power base station sends, to the radio terminal, the control information received from the low-power base station; and the radio terminal performs radio communication with the low-power base station by using the control information received from the high-power base station. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063304 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A base station for supporting a plurality of radio access schemes is provided. The base station includes a radio transceiver, a storage section and a response sending section. The storage section stores at least one radio access scheme supported by the base station. The at least one radio access scheme includes a predetermined radio access scheme which is common with another base station. The response sending section sends a response to an initial connection received from a mobile station back to the mobile station. The initial connection is received in the predetermined radio access scheme. The response includes information indicating one of said at least one radio access scheme which is used to communicate with the mobile station. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063305 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING DATA ON MULTIPLE CARRIERS IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A data transmission method and an apparatus to communicate data on multiple carriers in the mobile communication system are provided. A random access method of a terminal in a mobile communication system including primary and secondary cells operating on multiple carriers according to the present invention includes communicating data after random access in the primary cell, receiving, when the random access is triggered in the secondary cell, information for use in the secondary cell random access from the primary cell, transmitting a preamble in the secondary cell based on the received information, monitoring the primary cell to receive a Random Access Response for the secondary cell, and applying, when the Random Access Response for the secondary cell is received, the information carried in the Random Access Response to the secondary cell in which the preamble has been transmitted. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063306 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile communication system and method that includes a radio access system employing a first communication scheme supporting packet-switched communication and a radio access system employing a second communication scheme supporting both circuit-switched communication and the packet-switched communication. The mobile communication system is configured to switch between a first communication state and a second communication state realizing single radio voice call continuity (SRVCC). The first communication state is when a first mobile station visits the radio access system employing the first communication scheme, and performs voice communication with a second mobile station and packet communication by using packet-switched system. The second communication state is when the first mobile station visits the radio access system employing the second communication scheme, and performs voice communication with the second mobile station by using circuit-switched system, and performs packet communication with the second station by using the packet-switched system. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063307 | CARRIER SELECTION METHOD AND APPARATUS - A carrier selection method and a base station are provided and are applied to the field of communications technologies. The carrier selection method includes: obtaining load status information corresponding to a control channel of a first base station on each carrier, where the load status information is used for indicating a load amount of the control channel; selecting, according to the load status information, from multiple carriers corresponding to the first base station, a carrier corresponding to a control channel with a relatively small load amount as an operational carrier for a second base station or a primary cell carrier for a user equipment served by the second base station. Carrier selection is implemented. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063308 | Beamforming Handover Messaging in a Wireless Network - A first base station transmits a message to a second base station after a handover decision for a wireless device supporting beamforming and multiple carrier configurations. The message includes a plurality of measurement configuration parameters for the wireless device. The first base station receives a response from the second base stations. The first base station transmits a handover command to the wireless device subsequent to receiving the response message. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063309 | Handover Proactive Association Clearing Support Method and System - A handover proactive association clearing support method and system supports minimizing handover times for at least one netsurfing end system, and optimizing a given market satisfaction function (MSF0) potentially depending on Internet-applications for whichever underlying HO technique, by potentially establishing pre-HO for free x/yz-, netsurfing x/yz-, and/or Sxyzj-association, called “clearing” them. An HO of an Ayz is optimal if its HO-time is “basically zero” and it complies with MSF0. The technical innovation of the method and system comprises for an Ayz determining any time its optimal HOs. This permanent predetermination of optimal HOs implies assessing permanently all parameters. Thus, when an Ayz must perform an HO, these pre-HO operations of the method/system would have already identified at least one optimal HO for it to a sharedIADx and/or an Sxyzj available to it and established the resp. x/yz-, netsurfing x/yz-, and Sxyzj-associations. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063310 | Method and Apparatus for Removing Policy and Charging Control Rule from Default Bearer - The present invention provides a method and an apparatus for removing a policy and charging control rule from a default bearer. The method includes: determining whether a received service flow is a service flow of SRVCC switching upon receipt of flow description information of the service flow; and, if the received service flow is the service flow of the SRVCC switching, removing a policy and charging control rule that has been activated on a default bearer for the SRVCC switching, and at the same time issuing a policy and charging control rule made for a newly created bearer. | 03-05-2015 |
20150071247 | MODEM AND METHOD FOR HANDING OVER IP MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM SESSIONS FROM A PACKET-SWITCHED NETWORK TO A CIRCUIT-SWITCHED NETWORK - A modem and a method for handing over Internet protocol (IP) multimedia subsystem (IMS) sessions from a packet-switched network to a circuit-switched network. One embodiment of the modem includes: (1) a physical layer through which IMS packets for a plurality of IMS sessions are transmittable and receivable, and (2) a control layer configured to gain access to respective IMS session data for the plurality of IMS sessions, the respective IMS session data originating from a host IMS application. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071248 | TECHNIQUES FOR RELOCATING A BACKHAUL CHANNEL BETWEEN A SMALL CELL BASE STATION AND A MACRO CELL BASE STATION - Examples are disclosed for handover/relocation of a backhaul channel between a small cell base station and a macro cell base station. The handover/relocation may be responsive to possibly changing conditions associated with a wireless link over which the backhaul channel may be established. Other examples are described and claimed. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071249 | LONG-TERM EVOLUTION CIRCUIT SWITCHED FALL BACK ENHANCEMENTS - An architecture is described that can provide enhancement with respect to circuit switched fall back. In particular, the architecture can reduce the signaling and delay of conventional systems that are necessitated by establishing a radio resource control connection prior to establishing the circuit switched fall back connection. For example, when user equipment is not in a radio resource control connected state at the time of a circuit switched fall back call, the radio resource control connection can be at least partially avoided by responding to a radio resource control connection request message with a radio resource control connection reject message that includes target cell reselection information. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071250 | DATA FORWARDING METHOD, DEVICE, AND COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - Embodiments of the present invention provide a data forwarding method, device, and communications system, which relate to the field of communications and can achieve accuracy and continuity of data transmission during carrier aggregation for cells between base stations. The method includes: sending, by a primary base station, a first message to a secondary base station, where the first message is used to instruct the secondary base station to perform handover, and the first message includes an identifier of a target base station; confirming, by the primary base station, that the secondary base station forwards data to the target base station; and sending, by the primary base station, a second message to a user equipment, where the second message is used to instruct the user equipment to acquire the data from the target base station. The embodiments of the present invention are used for data forwarding. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071251 | L2 TUNNELING BASED LOW LATENCY SINGLE RADIO HANDOFFS - An example of this invention provides low latency handovers between Mobile WiMAX and 2G/3G/LTE networks with only a single radio transmitting at any given point in time, by establishing L2 tunnel between 3GPP MME and WiMAX ASN for control plane signaling to perform pre-registration, pre-authentication and context transfer to the target network, while UE maintains its connection to the source network, and by setting up bearer path for packet forwarding between Servicing Gateway and WiMAX ASN. An example of this invention uses a virtual eNB to facilitate low latency L2 handoffs to legacy 2G/3G networks with minimum impact to SGSN and MME. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071252 | Determination of Appropriate Radio Resource to be Requested in Case of a Circuit-Switched (CS) Fallback Procedure - A system and method for implementing fallback on a wireless device for circuit switched fallback from a first network that does not provide a circuit switched domain service is presented. A paging message is received from the first network. The paging message instructs the wireless device to implement circuit switched fallback to a circuit switched network. The paging message is inspected for information indicative of a service associated with the paging message, and a channel type suitable for the service is determined from the information indicative of the service. A request message for initiating the establishment of a radio connection is transmitted. The request message identifies the suitable channel type, and the service is used on the circuit switched network. | 03-12-2015 |
20150078332 | VOICE CALL CONTINUITY IN HYBRID NETWORKS - Voice call continuity is provided for calls that are carried over a hybrid network infrastructure in which access connections are distributed over loosely coupled network portions including a backend network such as a core VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol) service network, one or more cellular mobile networks, and a public switched telephone network (“PSTN”). The calls are routed through the core VoIP network regardless of their points of origination or termination in other network portions so that signaling and call context are anchored in the core VoIP network. The conditions under which user equipment operate are continuously monitored so that when a connection is determined to have been unacceptably degraded or is likely to be interrupted, and/or a more optimal connection is available, a handover of the call to another connection is initiated so that call continuity is maintained using the lowest cost connection that provides acceptable call quality. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078333 | HIGH-SPEED MOBILE BROADBAND NETWORK ACCESS VIA PROGRAMMED TRACKING OF A SEQUENCE OF WIRELESS BROADBAND DATA LINKS - In one embodiment, a method comprises: establishing a first broadband data link between a first mobile narrowbeam transceiver positioned on a vehicle and a first fixed narrowbeam transceiver mounted along a prescribed path of the vehicle; and switching from the first broadband data link, by the first mobile narrowbeam transceiver, to a second broadband data link with a second fixed narrowbeam transceiver mounted along the prescribed path after the first fixed narrowbeam transceiver, enabling the vehicle to maintain continuous broadband access to a wide area network via a prescribed sequence of the fixed narrowbeam transceivers along the prescribed path. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078334 | APPARATUS AND METHODS OF EFFICIENT SIB READING DURING WCDMA ACQUISITION IN MULTI-SIM MODEMS - Methods and apparatus are described for a method of cell acquisition, comprising obtaining, during an idle mode, a primary scrambling code (PSC) of a first cell of a first radio access technology (RAT) by a user equipment having a first subscription to the first RAT and a second subscription to a second RAT. Further, the methods and apparatus include performing a system information block (SIB) reading procedure for the first cell for one or more SIBs. Additionally, the methods and apparatus include determining whether any of the one or more SIBs are successfully decoded within a first time threshold during the SIB reading procedure for the first cell. Moreover, the methods and apparatus include aborting the SIB reading procedure for the first cell when the one or more SIBs are not successfully decoded within the first time threshold. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078335 | USER EQUIPMENT AND METHODS FOR FAST HANDOVER FAILURE RECOVERY IN 3GPP LTE NETWORK - Embodiments of User Equipment (UE) and methods for fast handover failure recovery in a 3GPP LTE network are generally described herein. In some embodiments, the UE may initiate handover (HO) failure recovery by transmission of a random-access channel (RACH) 2 message when both a radio-link failure (RLF) timer and a time-to trigger (TTT) timer are concurrently running. The RACH 2 message may be a message transmitted on a random-access channel for radio-resource control (RRC) connection re-establishment. The RLF timer may be activated as part of a radio-link monitoring (RLM) process based on radio-link conditions with a serving cell, and the TTT timer may have been activated as part of a HO process based on a measurement reporting event. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078336 | PACKET SWITCHING DOMAIN HANDOVER METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR GSM TERMINAL - A domain handover method and system for a GSM terminal are described, a terminal protocol stack receiving a handover command from a network side, and notifying a physical layer to release a physical channel with a current cell, sending a synchronization request to the physical layer, after receiving a fed-back synchronization acknowledgement message, sending the physical layer a residence request carrying a system message of a handover target cell from the network side, after receiving a residence acknowledgement message from the physical layer, sending the physical layer a handover request carrying a handover type and a range of TA values. The physical layer judges whether to continue the PS handover or not according to a parameter carried in the handover request and the stored TA value. When continuing the PS handover, the terminal protocol stack instructs the physical layer to establish a physical channel with the target cell. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078337 | METHOD FOR PROVIDING VOICE COMMUNICATION SERVICE AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE THEREOF - An apparatus and a method for providing a voice communication service using a Long Term Evolution (LTE) network in an electronic device are provided. A method includes providing a first Voice over LTE (VoLTE) service in a first LTE area, handing over to a second LTE area during the first VoLTE service, when the first VoLTE service ends, determining whether the second LTE area provides a VoLTE service, and when the second VoLTE area does not provide the VoLTE service, limiting the VoLTE service of the electronic device. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078338 | RANDOM ACCESS METHOD, EVOLVED NODE B, AND TERMINAL EQUIPMENT - A random access method, an evolved Node B (eNB), and a terminal equipment are provided. The method includes: determining target component carriers to which a User Equipment (UE) is to be handed over, and notifying the UE of information about the target component carriers through a source eNB; and after receiving a dedicated random access preamble sent by the UE, sending a random access response message on at least one component carrier in the target component carriers. The terminal equipment includes: a handover command receiving unit, a sending unit, and a random response receiving unit. Therefore, in a random access procedure of cell handover, the eNB is capable of determining downlink component carriers that a UE monitors, thereby increasing utilization rate of downlink resources. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078339 | METHOD FOR DROPPING PACKET DATA, RADIO COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A control method in a mobile communication system, that includes configuring a discard timer corresponding to a service data unit (SDU) for discarding the SDU according to a value of the discard timer that indicates a time elapsed since the discard timer started at reception of the SDU; when a handover is performed, maintaining the value of the discard timer corresponding to the SDU and taking over the elapsed time of the SDU; and discarding the corresponding SDU when the value of the discard timer reaches a given value. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078340 | Method and System of Changing Service Points - Various examples provide a method of changing service points. According to the method, a serving service point obtains a changing request, and obtains a user identity from the changing request; locates a target service point by using the changing request; obtains serving user data corresponding to the user identity, sends the serving user data to the target service point; receives a changing response returned by the target service point, and redirect a client corresponding to the user identity to connect to the target service point. Various examples also provide a system of changing service points. The above method and system can change service points in real time. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078341 | Handover Method, Communication Device and Communication System - The present invention provides a handover method. An access node obtains mobility management entity pool MME pool information which is sent by a donor station of the access node and is used for identifying a mobility management entity MME to which a user equipment UE is attached. The access node initiates handover for the UE according to the MME pool information used for identifying the MME to which the UE is attached. The present invention further provides a communication device and a communication system. | 03-19-2015 |
20150078342 | METHOD FOR CONFIGURING MULTIFLOW, BASE STATION, RADIO NETWORK CONTROLLER, AND USER EQUIPMENT - The present application provides a method for configuring multiflow. The method includes: receiving, by a second base station, a first check instruction sent by a first RNC, where the first check instruction includes identification information of a UE that has established a connection with a first base station and the first base station is controlled by the first RNC; checking, by the second base station, whether the UE is in a coverage area of the second base station; informing, by the second base station, the first RNC of a check result, so that the first RNC performs multiflow configuration according to the check result; and performing, by the second base station, multiflow configuration according to an instruction of the first RNC, so that a cell of the first base station and a cell of the second base station jointly provide multiflow service to the UE as multiflow serving cells. | 03-19-2015 |
20150085823 | SEAMLESS APPLICATION CONNECTIVITY - In some implementations, a request to switch to using a second network connection is received at a first computing device that is currently communicating with a second computing device over a first network connection. While still using the first network connection, the second network connection may be initiated. During a period of transition, the first computing device may communicate with the second computing device using both the first network connection and the second network connection. To use both the first and second network connections, data from the second computing device may be received over the first network connection, and data may be sent to the second computing device over the second network connection. The first computing device may identify an end of the period of transition. In response, the first computing device may communicate with the second computing device using only the second network connection. | 03-26-2015 |
20150085824 | WIRELESS TERMINAL AND METHOD OF OPERATING - A wireless terminal can communicate with a first network of first type and a second network of second different type. The wireless terminal performs a packet-domain attachment to the first network and initiates a ready timer indicating that the wireless terminal is in an attached state and has recently sent data to the first network. The wireless terminal initiates an inter-system change from the first network to the second network whereby the wireless terminal becomes registered to the second network. Advantageously the wireless terminal has means for rendering the ready timer ineffective when the inter-system change is performed. The network apparatus has means for initiating its own ready timer dependent on the attachment occurring, this ready timer also indicating that the wireless terminal is in an attached state and has recently sent data to the first network. | 03-26-2015 |
20150085825 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND CONTROL METHOD - According to an embodiment, a communication apparatus includes a first wireless communicator, a storage, and a controller. The first wireless communicator establishes a wireless connection to a network. The storage stores therein data. The controller causes the first wireless communicator to establish a connection to the network when a determination value satisfies a connection condition. The determination value is characterized by at least one of operating conditions, positional information, communication conditions, and communication quality of the communication apparatus. The controller causes the first wireless communicator to obtain information through the network and store the information in the storage or further transmit the information stored in the storage through the network when the determination value satisfies an obtaining condition. The controller disconnects the connection between the first wireless communicator and the network when the determination value satisfies a disconnection condition. | 03-26-2015 |
20150085826 | COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A method performed by a base station includes generating a request for resource status information, sending the generated request to a neighboring base station, receiving one or more resource status update messages from the neighboring base station in response to the requested resource status information, and performing load balancing operations in dependence upon the received one or more resource status update messages. | 03-26-2015 |
20150085827 | ENHANCEMENTS FOR OPERATION OF A TIMER - A method and an apparatus for operating a timer in an integrated circuit (IC) are disclosed herein. The IC includes a timer, a receiver configured to receive a circuit switched (CS) service notification, a transmitter configured to transmit an evolved packet system mobility management extended service request (ESR) message, and a processor configured to start the timer in response to transmitting the ESR and stop the timer in response to reception of a handover command and completion of a CS fallback procedure by the receiver, wherein the handover command directs the IC to handover to another radio access technology (RAT) so that a CS call may be established. The processor may be configured to stop the timer in response to reception of a cell change command and completion of a CS fallback procedure by the receiver, wherein the cell change command directs the IC to perform a cell change procedure. | 03-26-2015 |
20150085828 | METHOD FOR OBTAINING SERVING GATEWAY, MOBILITY MANAGEMENT NODE, DATA GATEWAY, AND SYSTEM - The present invention provides a method for obtaining a serving gateway, a mobility management node, a data gateway, and a system. A method for obtaining a serving gateway according to an embodiment of the present invention includes: when a UE is switched from an old-side mobility management node to a new-side mobility management node, sending, by the new-side mobility management node, a domain name resolution request to a domain name system DNS server according to access information of the UE; receiving a hostname of a device returned, according to the domain name resolution request, by the DNS server; obtaining a hostname of a new-side available S-GW; and selecting the new-side available S-GW closest to the device on geographic topology as a new-side S-GW. User service data transmission time delay can be reduced through the method. | 03-26-2015 |
20150092743 | NON-CELLULAR LINK INTEGRATION WITH CELLULAR NETWORKS - Improved non-cellular (e.g., Wi-Fi) link integration with a cellular (e.g., LTE) network is described. The improved link integration can relate to utilizing an eNodeB device (e.g., residing in a radio access network portion of a cellular network) as an anchor point rather than a packet data network gateway device (e.g., residing in a core network portion of the cellular network) utilized by other approaches. The improved link integration can maintain full compliance with or support for other approaches, and can reduce signaling overhead, simplify quality-of-service management, and/or provide a more rapid reaction to changes of access, particularly in cases where the eNodeB device and a non-cellular access point device are co-located. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092744 | HYBRID MANAGEMENT OF HANDOVERS IN A SELF ORGANIZING NETWORK (SON) - The present disclosure presents a method and an apparatus for hybrid management of handovers in a self organizing network. For example, the disclosure presents a method for transmitting, via a transmitting component at the base station, handover signaling data from the base station to a network entity, wherein the base station is one of a plurality of base stations transmitting handover signaling data to the network entity, receiving, at the base station, feedback associated with one or more handover parameters of the base station, wherein the feedback is received from the network entity and includes an indication of an amount of handover signaling data generated by the base station or the plurality of base stations, and updating the one or more handover parameters based on the feedback received and local information available at the base station. As such, hybrid management of handover in a self organizing network may be achieved. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092745 | METHODS AND DEVICES FOR AVOIDANCE OF PARTIAL OFFLOADING OF TRAFFIC BEARERS - A method, implemented in a first node, that is in communication with a second node and a mobile device, includes determining a traffic type of a first traffic bearer within a packet data network connection between the second node and the mobile device. The method further includes marking the first traffic bearer as movable or non-movable based on the determined traffic type. The method also includes in response to determining that the first traffic bearer has been marked as non-movable, marking all other traffic bearers in the packet data network connection between the second node and the mobile device as non-movable. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092746 | ENHANCEMENT ON RADIO LINK FAILURE REPORT TO RECORD NECESSARY TIMING DETAILS FOR A DUAL-THRESHOLD HANDOVER TRIGGER EVENT - A system and method in which a Radio Link Failure, RLF, report from a User Equipment, UE, provides system time-based timestamps to enable a source node to correctly analyze the real cause of an RLF associated with a handover. The timestamps are provided for the latest fulfillment of each event-specific entering condition associated with a handover-triggering event and for the occurrence of the RLF. The recorded timestamps are sent as part of RLF-reporting information to be forwarded to the source node to assist the source node in adjusting event-specific threshold(s) as well as other non-threshold related handover parameters such as the Time To Trigger, TTT, period, the time delay between a UE's transmission of its Measurement Report and the source node's transmission of the handover command, and the like, to reduce similar RLFs in the future. The generation of timestamps does not waste the UE's processing resources or battery power. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092747 | MOBILE TELEPHONE VOIP/CELLULAR SEAMLESS ROAMING SWITCHING CONTROLLER - A nomadic server and a related system provides seamless roaming for a mobile communication device between different types of wireless networks, such as WiFi and cellular networks for voice, data and video communication. Use of the nomadic server enables a combination of WiFi and cellular networks for providing access to the cellular phones and make use of the VOIP networks for switching the calls wherever possible. The nomadic server is a telephone communication processing and switching server that will “hold” the present, in-progress telephone communications without dropping, while roaming without losing the present, in-progress communication. For example, a telephone communication can be seamlessly switching between VOIP and cellular telephone networks using the nomadic server. Nomadic server resources interface with the VOIP and cellular network switches to provide the hand-off between networks. This approach enables switching of telephone communications over a VOIP network wherever possible either through WiFi or through cellular networks. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092748 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING TRANSMISSION, NETWORK DEVICE, AND TERMINAL - Embodiments of this application relate to a method for controlling transmission, a network device, and a terminal. The method includes: determining, by a first radio access network device according to a service transmission condition of a terminal in a first single-mode wireless communications system, that a multimode wireless communications system comprises at least two wireless communications systems transmits a service for the terminal; and sending, by the first radio access network device, first control information to the terminal, where the first control information includes link information of the at least two wireless communications systems, so that the terminal switches a service, which is transmitted in the first single-mode wireless communications system, to the multimode wireless communications system according to the link information of the at least two wireless communications systems. In this way, resource utilization of a wireless communications network is improved. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092749 | HANDOFF OF A MOBILE STATION BETWEEN PACKET-SWITCHED AND CIRCUIT-SWITCHED WIRELESS DOMAINS - A first mobility management entity (MME) is configured to cooperate with a first access network controller to provide a circuit switched service to a mobile station while the mobile station is attached to a packet switched wireless access network in a first coverage area. A second MME is configured to cooperate with the first access network controller to provide a circuit switched service to the mobile station when the mobile station has moved from the first coverage area to the second coverage area. A home subscriber system is operated to provide, to the second MME, information identifying the first access network controller as serving the mobile station to enable the second MME to initiate handoff of the mobile station from the packet switched wireless access network to the circuit switched wireless access network. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092750 | PRIMARY SECONDARY CELL CHANGE METHOD AND BASE STATION - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a primary secondary cell change method and a base station. The primary secondary cell change method in the embodiments of the present invention includes: determining, by a primary base station, to change a first primary secondary cell served by a secondary base station, and selecting a second primary secondary cell from cells served by the secondary base station; sending, by the primary base station, a first message to the secondary base station, which is used to request the secondary base station to change the primary secondary cell, where the first message includes an identity of the second primary secondary cell; and sending, by the primary base station, a second message to a user equipment UE, which is used to request the UE to use the second primary secondary cell. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092751 | CELL RANGE EXPANSION ELASTICITY CONTROL - In some aspects, a method for carrying out load balancing between cells in a heterogeneous network includes measuring loads within macro clusters in the network. The method additionally includes identifying one or more macro clusters experiencing unbalanced load conditions, and sending balancing indicators to one or more cells in the identified macro cluster(s). In other aspects, a method for carrying out load balancing in a heterogeneous network includes reporting cell loads within a macro cluster, and monitoring for balancing indicators. The method further includes responding to a balancing indicator by iteratively adjusting a value of an individual cell offset for a cell until one or more conditions is satisfied. Example conditions include accomplishment of handover, to or from the cell, of one or more low mobility User Equipment (UE), and making a determination that the value of the individual cell offset has reached a threshold prohibiting further adjustment. | 04-02-2015 |
20150098442 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO CORRECT INDOOR POSITIONING BY UTILIZING Wi-Fi HANDOVERS - A system and method may dynamically correct the dead reckoning (DR) position of a mobile device. An indoor or outdoor venue may have Access Points (APs) dispersed around its interior. Each time that a mobile device experiences a handover from one AP to a new AP, the mobile device and/or the local network associated with the venue may determine whether or not the mobile device's DR position corresponds to the location of the new AP. If the mobile device's DR position does not correspond to the location of the new AP within a predetermined threshold, then the mobile device's DR position may be updated to a position associated with the new AP. As a result, the DR position of the mobile device may be continuously checked, and if need be, corrected at each AP handover associated with the venue. The APs may be Wi-Fi/WLAN APs, eNodeB's, or other APs. | 04-09-2015 |
20150098443 | MOBILITY INTEGRATION WITH FABRIC ENABLED NETWORK - Systems, methods and computer readable media for mobility integration with fabric-enabled networks are described. Some implementations can include a method comprising terminating, using one or more processors, an access tunnel at an edge switch of a fabric-enabled network, and establishing, using the one or more processors, a mobility tunnel with the edge switch. The method can also include mapping, using the one or more processors, a mobility network to a service identifier associated with the mobility network. The method can further include forwarding, using the one or more processors, traffic for the mobility network from the edge switch to another edge switch across the fabric enabled network, wherein the traffic includes the service identifier. | 04-09-2015 |
20150098444 | LARGE SCALE ANTENNA SYSTEM WITH OVERLAYING SMALL CELLS - A large-scale antenna system (LSAS) base station transmits one or more first signals on one or more first channels corresponding to one or more first access terminals associated with the LSAS base station concurrently with nulling one or more second channels corresponding to one or more second access terminals associated with one or more small cells. The first signal(s) is/are transmitted synchronously with the second signal(s) transmitted by the small cell(s). | 04-09-2015 |
20150098445 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ENHANCED MULTI-SIM TUNE-AWAY OPERATION - Apparatus and methods are disclosed for a multi-SIM/multi-standby wireless user equipment (UE) configured for tune-away operations enabling simultaneous communication on multiple subscriptions using a shared RF chain while maintaining an ongoing signaling procedure on a primary subscription. The UE performs a signaling procedure with a first network associated with a first subscription, and decodes a downlink channel of the first network during an initial period of a transmission time interval (TTI). If the decoded downlink channel indicates that no data of the first subscription is destined to the UE during the current TTI, the UE tunes away to a second subscription to receive data from a second network associated with the second subscription. | 04-09-2015 |
20150098446 | APPARATUSES AND METHODS FOR STEERING DATA TRAFFIC BETWEEN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS - A mobile communication device is provided with a first wireless module, a second wireless module, and a controller module. The first and second wireless modules perform wireless transmissions and receptions to and from a telecommunication network and an AP using a cellular technology and an SRW technology, respectively. The controller module receives, from the telecommunication network via the first wireless module, at least one RAN rule and information concerning an amount of the data traffic to be offloaded and a level of granularity of the data traffic to be reported for offloading. Also, the controller module receives a first traffic offloading request from the telecommunication network via the first wireless module in response to determining that one of the RAN rule is satisfied, and offloads data traffic indicated by the first traffic offloading request from the telecommunication network to the AP via the second wireless module. | 04-09-2015 |
20150098447 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR SELECTIVE DECODING OF BEACON FRAME IN WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system, and more particularly, to a method and device for performing or supporting selective decoding of a beacon frame in a wireless LAN system. A method of decoding a frame by a station STA in a wireless communication system according to an embodiment of the present invention may include: determining whether to decode each of a first data portion and a second data portion of the frame; and decoding one or more of the first data portion and the second data portion if it is determined that the decoding is performed. Hence, the frame may further include information that is used for the determination by the station STA on whether to decode each of the first data portion and the second data portion, and whether to decode may be determined on the basis of whether to change one or more of the first data portion and the second data portion. | 04-09-2015 |
20150098448 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING RLF REASON DETECTION OR HANDOVER FAILURE REASON DETECTION - A method and apparatus for supporting Radio Link Failure (RLF) reason detection or handover failure reason detection are provided. The method includes detecting the Mobility Robustness Optimization (MRO) problems without RLF reporting in a 3 | 04-09-2015 |
20150098449 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING HANDOVER IN RADIO ACCESS NETWORKS - A method and apparatus are provided for a handover (HO) by a Mobility Management Entity (MME). The method includes receiving, from an evolved Node B (eNB), a handover required message including information indicating whether the HO is for a circuit switched (CS) network or both a CS network and a packet switched (PS) network; splitting a voice bearer from another bearer based on the information; and transmitting a handover command message to the eNB. | 04-09-2015 |
20150098450 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING A MPLS HEADER, METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING A MPLS PATH AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING A HANDOVER OF AN MPLS PATH - A method for transmitting a Multi-Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) header from a first nodal point to a second nodal point via a radio communication network; the radio network being a Long Term Evolution (LTE) network, includes: modifying the MPLS header by reducing the size of the MPLS header; and transmitting the modified MPLS header from the first nodal point to the second nodal point via an air interface using a dedicated radio bearer. | 04-09-2015 |
20150103803 | METHOD FOR PROCESSING RADIO PROTOCOL IN MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND TRANSMITTER OF MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS - An apparatus and method for performing procedures (protocols) of a PDCP (Packet Data Convergence Protocol) layer and an RLC (radio layer in an E-UMTS (Evolved Universal Mobile Telecommunications System) which has evolved from UMTS, among radio protocols of a mobile communication system. The PDCP layer performs ciphering on data (i.e., PDCP SDU) received from an upper layer, generates an indicator discriminating ciphered data and non-ciphered data (i.e., an ROHC feedback packet directly generated by the PDCP layer), and transmits the same to a lower layer (i.e., MAC layer). A PDCP SN (Sequence Number) is defined as an algorithm for ciphering the data in the PDCP layer to perform ciphering in the PDCP layer. | 04-16-2015 |
20150103804 | Method and Apparatus for Network Handover - A method for network handover includes sending a first message that includes first information to a second network, where the first information is used to indicate that a user equipment needs to be handed over from a first network to the second network, so that a target gateway device allocates, to the user equipment according to at least the first information sent by the second network, a second Internet Protocol (IP) address that is the same as a first IP address and used when a second packet data network (PDN) connection is established by using the second network and the target gateway device, where the first IP address is an IP address used when the user equipment establishes a first PDN connection by using the first network and the target gateway device. Therefore, service continuity is ensured after a network handover. | 04-16-2015 |
20150103805 | METHOD AND APPRATUS FOR AVOIDING INTEFERENCE IN TERMINAL WITH PLURAL HETEROGENEOUS COMMUNICATION MODULES IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for avoiding mutual interference when heterogeneous communication modules such as LTE, wireless LAN, Bluetooth, and GPS coexist in a terminal in a wireless communication system is provided. The terminal may reduce mutual interference when a plurality of communication modules simultaneously operate to efficiently communicate therewith. | 04-16-2015 |
20150110068 | SERVING CELL AND NEIGHBOR CELL PATH LOSS RATIO REPORTING - A method of wireless communication includes receiving a list of neighbor cells and determining whether each of the neighbor cells in the list of neighbor cells has a path loss below a threshold value. The method also includes calculating a serving neighbor path loss (SNPL) based on a serving cell and only the neighbor cells having path loss below the threshold value. | 04-23-2015 |
20150110069 | Session Transfer From A Circuit Switched Network To A Packet Switched Network - The invention relates to methods and nodes for supporting a session transfer, for a user equipment, from a circuit switched network to a packets witched network. According to one aspect a method for operating a control node of a core network is provided. The method comprises the steps: requesting from a radio access network of the circuit switched network information on whether a capability of the user equipment related to the session transfer are compatible with a network configuration related to the session transfer; receiving from the radio access network an indication whether the capability of the user equipment and the network configuration are compatible; determining whether to indicate that the session transfer is supported by using the received compatibility indication; and setting an indication whether the session transfer is supported according to the determination. | 04-23-2015 |
20150110070 | Mobile Node Registration Method, Intercommunication Method, Switching Method and Network Element - A registration method, intercommunication method, handover method for a mobile node and a network element are provided. The intercommunication method for a mobile node includes: after an enhanced mobile access gateway receives a data packet transmitted by the mobile node to a peer node for the first time, if the enhanced mobile access gateway provides an ePMIP service to the mobile node, the enhanced mobile access gateway judging whether a peer mobile access gateway to which the peer mobile node is currently attached provides an ePMIP service to the peer mobile node, and if so, forwarding the data packet in an ePMIP manner, and creating a local forwarding entry to instruct a subsequent packet to be forwarded in the ePMIP manner, and if not, forwarding the data packet in a PMIP manner, and creating a local forwarding entry to instruct a subsequent packet to be forwarded in the PMIP manner. | 04-23-2015 |
20150110071 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR HANDOVER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of operating a terminal is provided. The method includes receiving resource allocation information for reporting a resource allocated by a target Access Point (AP) before accessing the target AP for a handover, and transmitting a signal for a registration to the target AP through a resource indicated by the resource allocation information. | 04-23-2015 |
20150110072 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS AND MOBILE STATION APPARATUS - The time spent in handover is shortened when a mobile station apparatus performs random access for handover. In a mobile communication system where a mobile station apparatus uses any signature of a beforehand determined signature group between the mobile station apparatus and a base station apparatus in random access, the base station apparatus selects a signature used by the mobile station apparatus in random access performed at the time of handover, and the mobile station apparatus performs handover using the signature selected in the base station apparatus and judges the presence or absence of transmission and reception of a handover complete message and contention resolution corresponding to the type of signature selected in the base station apparatus. | 04-23-2015 |
20150110073 | FACILITATING RESELECTION BY A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE TO A FIRST NETWORK FROM A SECOND NETWORK AFTER TERMINATION OF A CIRCUIT SWITCHED FALLBACK VOICE CALL - A method for facilitating reselection by a wireless communication device to a first network from a second network after termination of a voice call for which a CSFB procedure was performed is provided. The method can include performing measurement of the first network while connected to the first network and performing measurement of the second network during the voice call. The method can further include determining based at least in part on one or more of the measurements that the wireless communication device is in a mobility state. The method can additionally include deriving a predicted signal quality of the first network after termination of the voice call based at least in part on the measurement of the first network and using the predicted signal quality to determine whether to release a connection to the second network and attempt reselection to the first network. | 04-23-2015 |
20150110074 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS PROVIDED WITH CONTROL OF SWITCHING OVER BETWEEN TWO COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A wireless communication apparatus uses a Wi-Fi system to transmit to another wireless communication apparatus a WiGig switching request frame (F1) requesting that the communication method for communicating with another wireless communication apparatus be switched from the Wi-Fi system to a WiGig system. The wireless communication apparatus uses RSSI when the WiGig switching request frame (F1) was received to determine whether to allow the switch from the Wi-Fi system to the WiGig system, and uses the Wi-Fi system to transmit to the wireless communication apparatus a WiGig switching response frame (F2) indicating the result of the determination. | 04-23-2015 |
20150110075 | NETWORKING SWITCHING METHOD, SYSTEM, AND NETWORK SIDE DEVICE - Embodiments of the present invention apply to the technical field of communications, and disclosed are a network switching method, system, and network side device. In the embodiment of the invention, within coverage of network side devices on one signaling plane, when a current network side device bearing data plane information of a terminal device determines that handover from the current network side device to a target network side device is required, the current network side device performs handover confirmation with the target network side device, so that the target network side device enables a data plane information communication function with the terminal device and completes switching the bearer of the data plane information. | 04-23-2015 |
20150117397 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO ACHIEVE LOSSLESS CALL IN VIEW OF A TEMPORARY RECEPTION ISSUE - A lossless call may be established over a wireless radio network by determining, at a target subscriber device during a received call, that one or more identified media items in a stream of media items of the call being received over a first radio channel was not successfully received, and responsively: continuing to receive first subsequent media items of the call and buffering, instead of rendering at the target subscriber device, the first subsequent media items, requesting the identified media items, receiving by the target subscriber device via an established second radio channel, different from the first radio channel, the identified media items, re-ordering the identified media items chronologically with respect to the buffered first subsequent media items to create the re-ordered subsequent media stream, and rendering, by the target subscriber device, the re-ordered subsequent media stream at a first increased relative rate. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117398 | REDUCED LATENCY DURING CELLULAR REDIRECTION - A user equipment (UE) may achieve faster cellular redirection, which reduces latency of the redirection, and improves throughput and user perception during redirection. In some instances, the UE may speed up the redirection by determining whether a connection release message with redirection information indicating a target radio access technology (RAT), a target cell and/or a target frequency has been received. The UE modifies a connection release complete procedure when the redirection information is received. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117399 | BATON HANDOVER WITH RECEIVE DIVERSITY IN TD-SCDMA - In baton handover in TD-SCDMA communications, a user equipment (UE) may make use of multiple receivers in a receive diversity configuration to reduce call drops during baton handover. Following uplink handover, the UE may tune a first receiver to a target cell while maintaining a second receiver tuned to the source cell. If the UE measures a signal quality of the target cell greater than a signal quality of the source cell the UE tunes the second receiver to the target cell and complete the handover. If the UE measures a signal quality of the source cell greater than a signal quality of the target cell, the UE may switch the first receiver and UL back to the source cell and terminate the handover. Thus the UE may avoid handover to a target cell with poor signal quality. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117400 | SIGNALING NETWORK CAPABILITIES FOR A WIRELESS DEVICE - When a user equipment is performing a packet-switched handover from a source radio access technology (RAT) to target RAT (such as Long Term Evolution) in connected mode, the UE may indicate a UTRA RAT capability based on an operator of the source RAT or an operator of the target RAT. If the operator is associated with a TD-SCDMA network, the UE may indicate a TD-SCDMA capability. If the operator is not associated with a TD-SCDMA network, the UE may indicate a W-CDMA capability. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117401 | CIRCUIT-SWITCHED FALLBACK DELAY MITIGATION - System and methods for mitigating circuit-switched fallback delay. A user equipment may initiate connection of the user equipment to a packet-switched network. A request may be sent by the user equipment to the packet-switched network to access a circuit-switched service. A timer may be started to determine elapsed duration between sending the request and receiving a response from the packet-switched network that confirms resource allocation to access the circuit-switched service. The user equipment may select in response to timer expiration, indicating absence of response to the request, a particular algorithm when implemented initiates connection of the user equipment to a particular circuit-switched network to access the circuit-switched service. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117402 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR DETECTING AND HANDLING SPURIOUS DEDICATED PHYSICAL CONTROL CHANNEL IN SOFT HANDOVER - Aspects of the present disclosure provide an apparatus and methods for detecting and handling a spurious Dedicated Physical Channel (DPCH) of a cell in an active set from a mobile station side. A user equipment determines a signal-to-interference ratio (SIR) for each channel of a plurality of channels associated with cells maintained in an active set. A spurious DPCH has the lowest SIR among the plurality of channels. The user equipment puts the detected spurious DPCH in an exclusion mode in which the spurious DPCH is excluded from at least one of channel decoding or SIRE calculation, while maintaining the cell associated with the spurious DPCH in the active set. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117403 | BASE STATION, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND PROGRAM RECORDING MEDIUM - [Problem] A mobile terminal attempting handover from a cell may execute handover to a cell managed by a base station connected to a core network other than that the current cell belongs to. In such a case, the time needed for the handover process on the mobile terminal becomes longer than the time for handover between cells belonging to the same core network. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117404 | MOBILE STATION AND RADIO BASE STATION - A mobile station (UE) according to the present invention includes a control unit ( | 04-30-2015 |
20150117405 | MOBILE STATION AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - A mobile station (UE) of the invention includes: a reception unit ( | 04-30-2015 |
20150117406 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PACKET-SWITCHED SERVICE HANDOVER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system and, more specifically, to a method and an apparatus for packet-switched (PS) service handover. The method for performing packet-switched service handover in a terminal of a wireless communication system according to one embodiment of the present invention comprises the steps of: receiving handover policy information from a network node; and determining whether or not to perform the PS service handover in accordance with the handover policy information. The handover policy information may include information indicating a PS service handover event. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117407 | Adapting Uplink Transmissions in a Wireless Telecommunications Network - Methods in a node in a wireless telecommunications network are provided. A method in a node in a wireless telecommunications network may include providing an uplink data rate offset value to a serving base station for transmission to a wireless terminal that is in a soft handover. The method may include providing a power budget for the wireless terminal to a non-serving base station of the wireless terminal. Moreover, the method may include providing a Signal-to-Interference-plus-Noise Ratio, SINR, target value to the non-serving base station. Related nodes and wireless terminals are also provided. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117408 | GATEWAY ARRANGEMENTS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - Embodiments related to gateway arrangements for wireless communication networks are disclosed herein. For example, in some embodiments, a network controller computing system may include serving gateway (SGW) control plane circuitry to virtualize control plane functions of an SGW, packet data network gateway (PGW) control plane circuitry to virtualize control plane functions of a PGW, first communication circuitry to establish a first secure communication link between the SGW control plane circuitry and an SGW user plane computing system that is to perform user plane functions of an SGW, and second communication circuitry to establish a second secure communication link between the PGW control plane circuitry and a PGW user plane computing system that is to perform user plane functions of a PGW. Other embodiments may be disclosed and/or claimed. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117409 | COMBINATION CELLULAR AND WI-FI HARDWARE DEVICE - A combination cellular and Wi-Fi hardware device has an IP interface that is configured to communicate with a first cellular network, a Wi-Fi network, or both. The combination cellular and Wi-Fi hardware device is configured to provide the network functionality (e.g., virtualized network cloud) that is required to facilitate communication and data flow between the IP interface and either a second cellular network or a cloud computing infrastructure network. The IF interface is accessed using a single IP address by a mobile device in wireless communication with the combination cellular and Wi-Fi hardware device. The single IP address is maintained when the mobile device switches between using the first cellular network and the Wi-Fi network to communicate with the combination cellular and Wi-Fi hardware device, and vice versa. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117410 | Method of Handling Coverage Enhancement in Wireless Communication System - A method of handling coverage enhancement for a user equipment (UE) of a wireless communication system includes determining whether the UE is in an enhanced coverage mode according to the number of repetitions of a downlink transmission based on which the UE successfully decodes a system information block (SIB); and performing an uplink transmission with repetitions or without repetitions based on whether the UE is in the enhanced coverage mode. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117411 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING WLAN - A method of supporting handover of a terminal by a mobility management entity (MME) of a mobile communication system is provided. The method includes receiving, from a base station, a first message for handover to another network. The first message includes information on a cell to which the terminal is handed over. The method also includes transmitting, to a server, a second message for reporting information related to a location of the terminal and for providing a location continuity based on the first message. A terminal having both a 3GPP communication function and a WiFi function automatically switches on and off a WLAN according to a location, setting, or a pattern of a user, thereby preventing unnecessary battery consumption or performance deterioration and searching for an available WLAN in advance to access the WLAN. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117412 | NETWORK-ADAPTIVE FUNCTION CONTROL METHOD FOR DUAL-MODE MOBILE TERMINAL - A network-adaptive function control method is provided for a dual-mode mobile terminal. The network-adaptive function control method for a dual-mode mobile terminal supports communication via first and second-type networks includes registering at least one function as a network-adaptive; determining, when a function is requested to be activated, whether the requested function is the network-adaptive function. If it is determined that the requested function is the network-adaptive function, it if determined whether the mobile terminal is in the first-type network; and activating, if the mobile terminal is in the first-type network, the requested function in association with the first-type network. The network-adaptive function control method of the present invention allows registering portable IP network-friendly functions that are served only in a portable IP network domain but not in the cellular network domain, thereby restricting handover to the costly cellular network, resulting in reduction of communication cost. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117413 | SELECTING A COMMAND NODE IN A HETEROGENEOUS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention provides a method involving at least one mobile node and a heterogeneous network comprising a plurality of access nodes. One embodiment of the method includes providing at least one first message including information indicative of a selected access node. The access node is selected to provide command services to the at least one mobile node. | 04-30-2015 |
20150124774 | AGGREGATED BEACONS FOR PER STATION CONTROL OF MULTIPLE STATIONS ACROSS MULTIPLE ACCESS POINTS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A technique for providing per station control of multiple stations in a wireless network across multiple access points. A look-up table that assigns a station connected to the access point and at least one communication parameter to each of a plurality of persistent, uniquely-assigned BSSIDs (Basic Service Set Identifiers) is stored. An access point responds to messages addressed one of the plurality of persistent, uniquely-assigned BSSIDs and ignores messages addressed to other BSSIDs. Persistence of the BSSID allows the controller to maintain individual control over each station after moving to a second access point of the plurality of access points. A frame comprising the plurality of BSSIDs corresponding to each connected station aggregated into the frame is generated. The frame is transmitted to the plurality of stations. Responsive to a station of the plurality of stations being handed-off to a different access point, a uniquely-assigned BSSID corresponding to the station is deleted from the look-up table. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124775 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMPROVING DEVICE-TO-DEVICE (D2D) DISCOVERY IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus are disclosed for improving D2D discovery in a wireless communication system. The method includes receiving a resource allocation in a first cell. The method also includes performing a cell reselection to camp on a second cell. The method further includes informing the second cell about information of the resource allocation in the first cell. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124776 | DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD AND APPARATUS IN NETWORK LINKED WITH HETEROGENEOUS SYSTEM - Provided is a data transmission method and apparatus for maximizing data transmission efficiency by transmitting data through a flexible network transition in a network linked with a heterogeneous system. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124777 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING VOICE CALL CONTINUITY USING DIFFERENT NETWORKS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and a method for providing call continuity in a wireless communication system are provided. The apparatus includes a first communication unit for setting a call with a counterpart terminal in a first network, a second communication unit for setting a call with the counterpart terminal in a second network while the call is set in the first network, and a control unit for terminating the call of the first network after the call setup is completed in the second network. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124778 | METHODS, APPARATUSES, RELATED COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT AND DATA STRUCTURE FOR DECIDING ON A SIGNALING SCHEME FOR HANDOVER - A first method (and related first apparatus) includes transmitting, in a handover request message, an indication of a first protocol version; a second method (and related second apparatus) includes receiving, in the handover request message, the indication, deciding, based on the received indication and a second protocol version, on a value of an information element included in a handover request acknowledgement message to be transmitted, the information element indicating usage of a first or second signaling scheme, and transmitting the handover request acknowledgement message including the information element; and in the first method receiving the handover request acknowledgement message including the information element; and a third method (and related third apparatus) including receiving the handover command message including the information element, and configuring according to one of the first and second signaling schemes indicated by the information element. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124779 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR HANDOVER TO CIRCUIT SWITCHED DOMAIN - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method, apparatus, and system for a handover to a circuit switched domain. The method includes: selecting an MSC capable of both CSFB and SRVCC for a UE; and selecting, if a location service of a CS domain triggers an SRVCC procedure for the UE when the UE has a VOIP service in progress, the MSC capable of both CSFB and SRVCC in the SRVCC procedure, so that the UE, after being handed over to the CS domain, accesses the MSC and implements the location service of the CS domain. The apparatus includes: a first selecting module and a second selecting module. The system includes a UE and the apparatus. The embodiments of the present invention enable the UE with the VOIP service in progress to be correctly handed over to the CS domain and implement the location service. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124780 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE STATION, BASE STATION, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication system includes: a mobile station; a first base station that communicates with the mobile station; and a second base station that communicates with the mobile station. The mobile station includes a measuring unit, a calculating unit, and a sending unit. The measuring unit measures a location of the mobile station. The calculating unit calculates, by using location information measured by the measuring unit and location information on the first base station, a distance between the mobile station and the first base station. The sending unit sends, to the second base station based on the distance calculated by the calculating unit and a predetermined threshold, a request signal that is used to request setting of a channel between the second base station and the first base station. | 05-07-2015 |
20150131612 | TIME-SLICED WIFI ASSOCIATIONS FOR MAKE-BEFORE-BREAK HANDOVER - Embodiments of a WiFi system and method for time-sliced associations for make-before-break handover in the WiFi system are generally described herein. In some embodiments, the method monitors metrics of a serving channel of the WiFi system to determine whether to increase a channel scanning rate of target channels of the WiFi system. The channel scanning rate of the target channel may be increased in response to the metrics. A time-sliced association with one or more target cells on the target channel may be performed while an association with a serving cell on the serving channel may be maintained. The wireless client may be transitioned from the serving cell to the target cell in response to the metrics while obscuring the complexity from the device operating system and active applications. | 05-14-2015 |
20150131613 | METHOD OF CONTROLLING SIGNALING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR SUPPORTING THE METHOD - A signaling controlling method that is performed by user equipment in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes: receiving an operation control message from a serving cell, wherein the operation control message includes control information for controlling a user equipment-originated indication; determining based on the control information whether to report the user equipment-originated indication; and generating and transmitting the user equipment-originated indication to the serving cell if it is determined that the user equipment-originated indication is to be reported. | 05-14-2015 |
20150131614 | System and method of supporting one number in SRVCC - Provided are a system and method for supporting one number in SRVCC. The system for supporting one number in SRVCC of the disclosure comprises: an IMS network, a CS network, a first terminal device and a second terminal device, wherein the first terminal device is used for establishing a session between the IMS network and the second terminal device using a subscriber number, and is also used for establishing a session between the CS network and the second terminal device using the subscriber number when being switched from the IMS network to the CS network while it is a calling party. The method can support an SRVCC system to establish sessions among different networks using the same number during domain switching, improve the operating efficiency of the SRVCC system, and facilitate the use by users. | 05-14-2015 |
20150131615 | DELAYED HANDOVER SIGNALLING IN A MOBILE NETWORK - In a mobile network comprising a plurality of base stations and a gateway, a user equipment may perform a handover from a source base station to a target base station. By control signalling, the handover may be notified from the target base station to a control node of the mobile network and then to the gateway so that the gateway may switch to a data path which connects the target base station and the gateway. The notification of the handover may be delayed at the target base station or at the control node, by starting a timer and sending the control signalling for initiating the path switching after expiry of the timer. | 05-14-2015 |
20150131616 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SEARCHING TARGET CELL FOR HANDOVER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is a method and apparatus for searching a target cell for handover in a wireless communication system. The method includes determining a priority of at least one neighboring base station based on the reliability of a direction of a beam allocated to a mobile station, and transmitting a message informing the mobile station of the priority. | 05-14-2015 |
20150131617 | RADIO RESOURCE CONNECTION (RRC) ESTABLISHMENT FOR WIRELESS SYSTEMS - Methods and systems for re-establishing radio contact include, for example, a method for performing a wireless handoff for user equipment (UE) as the UE performs a handoff from a source extended Node-B (e-NB) to a target e-NB is disclosed. The method includes detecting a radio link failure (RLF) between the UE and the source e-NB by the UE, and maintaining an active communication service at a service layer of the UE after detecting the RLF and as the UE performs the handoff from the source e-NB to the target e-NB such that the communication service remains continuously active during the handoff, the communication service supporting a first communication between the UE and a third party. | 05-14-2015 |
20150139181 | Methods for Call Management with Multiple Subscriber Identity Cards and Apparatuses Using the Same - An embodiment of a method for call management, performed by a processing unit of a UE (user equipment), is disclosed. The method is employed in a hardware configuration of at least two subscriber identity cards sharing a radio resource. A PS (packet-switched) service is first provided for the first subscriber identity card. Packet data transmission and reception is handed over to a second PS service with the second subscriber identity card from the first PS service after receiving a call request requesting a CS (circuit-switched) service with the second subscriber identity card. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139182 | System And Method For Differentiated System Continuity When Changing Networks - A method for transferring a communication session from a first network to a second network. The method includes receiving, on the first network, a first request associated with a first user device to transfer a first communication session to a second network and a second request associated with a second user device to transfer a second communication session to the second network, accessing profile information associated with the first user device and the second user device, accessing subscription information associated with the first user device and the second user device, accessing performance requirements associated with each application running on each of the respective first user device and second user device, determining a priority of each of the respective requests based on the accessed profile information, subscription information, and performance requirements; and transferring one or more of the communication sessions to the second network based on the determining step. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139183 | Cell Reselection Trigger Report - Mechanisms are provided for several aspects of network communications relating to a UE reporting cell reselection. These include how the network configures or indicates to the UE that it should report cell reselection to the network; how the UE indicates a cell reselection to the network; and how the RNC indicates to the Node-B that the UE is in need of cell reselection. Implementation of these mechanisms avoids the problems of a UE reselecting a cell and leaving voluminous data at the source cell, which may become lost, and a UE having common E-DCH resources being unable to reselect another cell, even when it leaves a serving cell's operating area. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139184 | System, User Equipment and Method for Implementing Multi-network Joint Transmission - A system, UE and method for implementing multi-network joint transmission are provided. The system includes: a core network and an access network; the access network includes: a 3GPP access network element and a WLAN access network element; the core network comprises: a 3GPP core network element. The 3GPP access network element is connected to the core network element through a network interface, connected to the WLAN access network element through a traffic offload interface, and connected to a UE through a 3GPP wireless interface; and is used for merging received uplink user data, also used for performing traffic offload on downlink user data, to offload part of the downlink user data to the WLAN access network element. The WLAN access network element is connected to the UE through a WLAN wireless interface, for transmitting uplink user data and downlink user data between the 3GPP access network element and the UE. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139185 | PEER-TO-PEER TRAFFIC LOCALIZATION - The present invention relates to a method for localization of peer-to-peer packet data traffic in a mobile network comprising a core network and at least one radio access network (RAN). The method comprises obtaining data traffic information for a packet data connection between two peers located in the RAN and where the connection is passing through a packet gateway node P-GW in the core network. If it is determined that the packet data connection is carrying peer-to-peer traffic, the PG-W requests localization policy information from a policy control function entity PCRF. The PCRF returns localization policy information related to the two peers and if localization is permitted, the P-GW requests a mobile management function entity to move the data traffic from the existing packet data connection to another packet data connection passing through another (local) packet gateway node L-GW which could be located in the same RAN as the peers. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139186 | METHOD FOR OBTAINING POLICY INFORMATION FOR MAKING TRAFFIC DETOUR - The present invention provides a method for obtaining policy information for traffic offload. The method may be performed by user equipment and comprise: receiving, through an Access Point (AP), HotSpot 2.0-related policy information including policy information related to a roaming consortium concluded between Access Point (AP) service providers; checking whether previously received 3GPP-based policy information or configuration information is present; and if there is a conflict, transmitting a policy information request message including the received HotSpot 2.0-related policy information, to a 3GPP-based network node in order to obtain 3GPP-based policy information into which the received HotSpot 2.0-related policy information has been reflected. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139187 | CELL SELECTION - When a user equipment, UE, is in a situation involving selection or reselection of radio cell to use in subsequent communication, in addition to the signal strength, the UE considers the feature set supported in the cell. The type of phone, i.e. a “smart phone”, “feature phone”, “Facebook-only phone” etc. can also be considered together with information about the usage history. That is, the usage pattern of the mobile and web browsing history. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139188 | METHOD, COMPUTER PROGRAM AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMISSION SIGNAL RANK DETERMINATION - The present disclosure relates to a method ( | 05-21-2015 |
20150139189 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING INFORMATION IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention in a heterogeneous network, there is provided an apparatus, comprising a receiver configured to receive information from a local access point, the information comprising system information of a macro base station associated with the local access point. The information may be received responsive to a request and/or the information may comprise full system information. The at least one processing core may cause the apparatus to participate in a procedure with the macro base station based at least in part on the information. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139190 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR NEIGHBOR CELL TRACKING - The client terminals in a mobile wireless communication system typically continually search and keep track of the neighbor cells surrounding the cell from which it may be receiving service. Keeping track of neighbor cells by the client terminal may require periodic measurements on the neighbor cells and these measurements contribute to power consumption in the client terminal. The power consumption for neighbor cell measurements is an important factor when the client terminal either actively receiving service from the network or in standby mode when the client terminal is not actively receiving service from the network. A method and apparatus are presented that enable the client terminal to keep track of the neighbor cells with reduced measurements and thereby with reduced power consumption. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139191 | Method and Device For Handling Handover of a Communications Service - The embodiments herein relate to method in a mobile management entity, referred to as MME, for enabling handover of a communication service between a circuit switched (CS) network and a packet switched (PS) network. The user equipment is located in the CS network and having a communications service in the CS network. Handling is improved by providing communication between the MME and a mobile switching centre server. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139192 | METHOD, SYSTEM, AND DEVICE FOR SWITCHING - Embodiments of the present invention relate to the technical field of wireless communications, and specifically relate to a method, system and device for switching, for use in solving the problem in the prior art of the risk of communication interruption when a user equipment (UE) is switching due to greatly increased frequency and number of times of switching by the UE in an E-UTRAN network architecture. The method of the embodiments of the present invention comprises: a UE receives a DRB reconfiguration message from a macro base station; and the UE keeps a PDCP layer corresponding to all of the DRBs of a control side and of a user side at the macro base station, and switches other layers corresponding to some or all of the DRBs of the user side except the PDCP layer onto at least one base station. Because the embodiments of the present invention reduce the number of times of control side switching by the UE, in the case of increased frequency and number of times of switching by the UE in the E-UTRAN network architecture, the risk of communication interruption is reduced when the UE is switching. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139193 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR VIRTUAL SOFT HANDOFF - In some embodiments, a non-transitory processor-readable medium includes code to cause a processor to receive at a tunnel server, a data unit addressed to a communication device, and define, a first instance of the data unit and a second instance of the data unit. The first instance of the data unit is sent to the communication device via a first tunnel defined between at least the tunnel server and a first base station associated with a first network. The second instance of the data unit is sent to the communication device via a second tunnel defined between at least the tunnel server and a second base station associated with a second network. The second instance of the data unit is dropped by the communication device when the first instance of the data unit is received before the second instance of the data unit. | 05-21-2015 |
20150139194 | PROCESSING APPARATUS, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS, METHOD FOR SWITCHING CONNECTION OF MOBILE STATION, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM STORING PROGRAM - A processing apparatus operates aiming to realize handover to each mobile station while reducing a failure rate of the handover even when PSC Confusion is generated. More specifically, when a connection of the mobile station is switched from a first base station to a second base station, the processing apparatus determines the second base station by selecting from a plurality of base stations according to connection history information indicating a success or a failure of past switching of the connection from the first base station to at least one of the plurality of base stations. | 05-21-2015 |
20150146682 | CELL DEVICE FOR MULTI-NETWORK COMMUNICATION - A device is configured to receive a request to provide data traffic associated with a user device. The device is configured to determine network information associated with a set of networks. The device may be associated with a small cell long term evolution (“LTE”) network, which may connect to the set of networks. The set of networks may include a macro cell LTE network and a fiber optic network. The network information may include information that identifies a condition of the set of networks. The device is configured to identify a particular network, of the set of networks, based on the network information, and provide the data traffic, via the small cell LTE network and the particular network, based on identifying the particular network. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146683 | CALL CONTINUITY USING SHORT-RANGE COMMUNICATIONS HANDOFF - A call is made from a user equipment (UE) device to a first other UE device that is is paired to a short range communications device. The first other UE device monitors the respective connections between short range communications device and the first other UE device and a second other UE device and automatically hands over the telephone call from the first other UE device to the second other UE device when the connection between the short range communications device and the second other UE device is stronger than the connection between the short-range communications device and the other first UE device. The cordless headset 172 is concurrently handed off from the first other UE device to the second other UE device. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146684 | UPLINK TRANSMISSION POWER AND TIMING ADJUSTMENT IN TD-SCDMA BATON HANDOVER - A user equipment (UE) may adjust its uplink transmission power and timing for communications with a target cell while awaiting completion of a baton handover procedure. The amount of adjustments for the uplink transmission power/timing may be based on an amount of time remaining before baton handover failure is declared. The steps size of the adjustments may increase as the time remaining before handover failure becomes smaller. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146685 | PACKET-SWITCHED NETWORK RETURN - Systems and methods for generating a Long Term Evolution network return procedure. A mobile terminal may generate, in absence of redirection instruction from a circuit-switched network, a Long Term Evolution network return procedure that, when instantiated by the mobile terminal, implements connection of the mobile terminal to a Long Term Evolution network based on measured signal strength of at least one Long Term Evolution network access point. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146686 | Method and Apparatus for Interference Control - Methods and apparatuses for interference control have been disclosed. A method for a source cell in a handover procedure is provided. The method comprises: determining restricted subframes in which signal transfer from the source cell to its served user equipments is restricted; and notifying information about the determined restricted subframes to a target cell, wherein the determined restricted subframes are used for scheduling user equipments which are taking handover from the source cell to the target cell. Thus, an improved approach has been provided to decrease the dropping rate in cell soft lock for PCI collision. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146687 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PERFORMING DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for performing device-to-device (D2D) communication in a wireless communication system is provided. A master user equipment sets a D2D link with a slave user equipment. The master user equipment performs D2D communication with the slave user equipment through the D2D link. The master user equipment receives handover information of the slave user equipment from the slave user equipment. The master user equipment transmits the handover information of the slave user equipment to an evolved NodeB of a handover source cell. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146688 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A radio communication system includes a user device, a first base station, a second base station, a switching center, and a gateway device. In a handover operation performed in a situation in which a user-plane path has been established through the first base station, the first base station transmits, to the user device, a radio connection reconfiguration message commanding that a radio bearer be established between the second base station and the user device and receives a radio connection reconfiguration complete message transmitted from the user device. The first base station transmits, to the switching center, a path switching request message requesting that the established user-plane path be changed so as to pass through the second base station. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146689 | HANDOVER PREDICTION USING HISTORICAL DATA - A method in an apparatus | 05-28-2015 |
20150146690 | METHOD FOR DETERMINING ACCESS CONTROL - Examples of the present disclosure provide a method for determining access control, applied in a handoff procedure of a UE. The method includes: if a current service is a LIPA@LN service, and if the UE is in a same local network before and after the handoff, keeping, by a node performing access control determination, service continuity of the LIPA@LN service; if the UE moves out of the local network after the handoff, deactivating, by the node performing the access control determination, the LIPA@LN service; if the current service is a SIPTO@LN only service or a SIPTO@CN@LN service, if the UE is in the same local network before and after the handoff, keeping, by the node performing the access control determination, the service continuity of the SIPTO@LN only service or the SIPTO@CN@LN service; if the UE moves out of the local network after the handoff, determining, by the node performing the access control determination, whether to keep the service continuity of the SIPTO@LN only service or the SIPTO@CN@LN service according to a network policy. According to the technical solution provided by the present disclosure, service continuity of the LIPA service or the SIPTO service can be maintained correctly. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146691 | Scrambling Code Resolution - A code division multiple access wireless network ( | 05-28-2015 |
20150146692 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CELL SWITCHING - Disclosed are a method and an apparatus for transmitting data. A cell switching method can comprise the steps of: allowing a primary (P)-cell base station to enable a first secondary(S)-cell; allowing the P-cell base station to receive channel state information from a second S-cell; allowing the P-cell base station to determine the second S-cell as a switching S-cell on the basis of the channel state information; allowing the P-cell base station to disable the first S-cell and enable the second S-cell. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146693 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTERFERENCE MANAGEMENT - In some aspects, restricted access nodes are assigned to a designated common channel while access terminals that are in active communication with a macro access node may selectively be assigned to the designated channel. In some aspects, an access terminal associated with macro access node may perform a handoff to a different carrier when the access terminal is in the vicinity of a coverage area of a restricted access node. In some aspects, an access terminal associated with a macro access node may perform a handoff to a different carrier based on location information. In some aspects, access to a restricted access node is controlled based on policy and/or based on operation of an access terminal associated with the restricted access node. | 05-28-2015 |
20150296067 | MOBILE TERMINAL, CONTROL METHOD THEREOF, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM - A mobile terminal comprises: a communication unit configured to perform near field communication with a peripheral apparatus; a unit configured to switch from near field communication performed by the communication unit to communication via another communication path; and an obtaining unit configured to transmit authentication information of a fax to the peripheral apparatus, and to obtain a fax data set corresponding to the authentication information from the peripheral apparatus via the another communication path. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296416 | WI-FI DIRECT SERVICE METHOD USING NFC AND DEVICE THEREFOR - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system and more particularly, to a method for performing connection setting for Wi-Fi direct services communication and a device therefor, the method comprising a step of performing device discovery between two devices through an NFC touch. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296418 | Methods and Apparatus for Handover Management of Transfer Control Protocol Proxy Communications - Systems and techniques for transport control protocol proxy mangement during handover of a user device from one base station to another. One or embodiments of the invention provide mechanisms to create a transport control protocol (TCP) proxy during establishment of a new data bearer establishment at an eNodeB, wherein the TCP proxy is integrated with a packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) buffer of the new bearer. The TCP proxy is configured so as to manage delivery of pre-fetched data to a user device so as to prevent TCP connection collapse during handover of the user device from a source eNodeB to a target eNodeB. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296419 | WIRELESS BASE STATION AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a wireless communication system transmitting information to a communication terminal moving through a spot wireless area. In an integrated base station, an external information communication section controls communication with a server. A contents memory section stores contents received from the server. A wireless LAN communication section communicates with the communication terminal. A control section establishes connection with the communication terminal using a first connection not requiring an authentication procedure for connection with the communication terminal, or using a second connection requiring the authentication procedure for connection with the communication terminal. An access control (restriction) section permits access from the communication terminal to the contents memory section and prohibits access to the server when a type of connection with the communication terminal is the first connection, and permits access from the communication terminal to the contents memory section and to the server in the case of the second connection. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296422 | Method and System For Improved PS to CS Handover of a User Equipment - A Mobile Switching Centre, MSC, an Access Transfer Control Function, ATCF, an Access Transfer Gateway, ATGW and respective methods therein are provided for performing a packet-switched, PS, to circuit-switched, CS, handover of a User Equipment, UE, are provided. When the UE is handed over from a PS communication network to a CS communication network, the MSC requests the ATCF controlling the ATGW to bi-casting to both the CS communication network and the PS communication network, and forwarding speech data from the UE to a remote terminal with which the UE is communicating during the PS to CS handover procedure. Once the UE is handed over, the bi-casting and the forwarding are terminated. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296424 | Method for Handing Over a Mobile Relay Node - A UE is adapted to communicate with a further UE using a communication path via a mobile relay node and a source base station by using a first gateway functionality of the source base station. A management unit manages the communication path. The management unit prepares a handover of the mobile relay node from the source base station to the target base station. The management unit allocates resources in the target base station for providing a second gateway functionality for a further communication path for the UE via the mobile relay node and the target base station to the further UE. The management unit establishes the second gateway functionality for the further communication path for the UE via the mobile relay node and the target base station to the further UE. The management unit hands over the mobile relay node from the source base station to the target base station. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296425 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO BASE STATION, AND MOBILE STATION - A mobile station UE is enabled to perform appropriate security processing when the mobile station UE connected to a plurality of radio base stations eNB performs a handover while performing “Inter-site CA”. In a mobile communication system of the present invention, a radio base station eNB# | 10-15-2015 |
20150296427 | METHOD OF DELIVERING POLICY INFORMATION FOR OFFLOADING BETWEEN DIFFERENT TYPES OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE FOR IMPLEMENTING SAME - Disclosed is a method of delivering policy information for offloading between different types of wireless communication systems by a first electronic device. The method includes: performing a tethering function; determining whether to release the tethering function; identifying a first electronic device connected based on the tethering function when the tethering function is released; delivering policy information for offloading between different types of wireless communication systems to the identified first electronic device; and releasing the tethering function after delivering the policy information to the first electronic device. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296431 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR PERFORM HANDOVER IN A HETEROGENOUS NETWORK - A method, a corresponding apparatus, and a computer program product for performing a handover in a heterogeneous network. The method comprises sending, by a source local area base station, one or more handover requests with respect to an ongoing local area an ongoing local area service to one or more neighbor local area base stations and one or more handover requests with respect to an ongoing wide area service to a wide area base station. The method also comprises receiving one or more handover commands with respect to the ongoing local area service from the one or more neighbor local area base stations and one or more messages from the wide area base station, each message including information regarding one of the one or more neighbor local area base stations. The method additionally comprises selecting, based upon the one or more received handover commands and messages, one of the one or more neighbor local area base stations as a target local area base station for service continuity of at least one of the ongoing local area service and the ongoing wide area service. With the claimed inventions, the service continuity of at least one of the ongoing local area service and the ongoing wide area service could be maintained and handover can be completed in a seamless manner. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296433 | APPARATUSES AND METHODS FOR ACCESS DOMAIN SELECTION (ADS) DURING AN INTER-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY (IRAT) PROCEDURE - A mobile communication device with a processor is provided. The processor determines whether an Inter-Radio Access Technology (IRAT) procedure is ongoing when receiving a request for a Mobile Originated (MO) call, starts a first guard timer in response to the IRAT procedure being ongoing, and performs an Access Domain Selection (ADS) for making the MO call in response to the IRAT procedure being completed and the first guard timer not expiring. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296434 | SYSTEMS, METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR OPTIMIZING MACHINE TO MACHINE DEVICE PERFORMANCE BY DYNAMICALLY VARYING SLOT CYCLE INDEX - Systems, methods and apparatus for optimizing machine-to-machine device performance are provided. In one aspect, a method comprises acquiring a pilot signal and determining a clock drift of the device based on the acquired pilot signal. The method further comprises selectively adjusting the frequency with which the device reacquires the pilot signal based at least in part on the determined clock drift. The slot cycle index is reduced when the determined clock drift is greater than a first predetermined fraction of a reacquisition window size. The slot cycle index is reduced when an anticipated clock drift of the device is greater than a second predetermined fraction of a reacquisition window size and the device fails to reacquire the pilot signal, the device is handed off, a finger energy is less than a first predetermined threshold, or a channel estimate value is less than a second predetermined threshold. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296448 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR MESSAGE PROCESSING BETWEEN COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS - A method includes: acquiring a first report message of an operation event in a source system; acquiring a second report message of the operation event in a target system; and correlating the first report message with the second report message according to the first user equipment identifier and the second user equipment identifier, and performing event statistics collection according to the correlated first report message and second report message. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296472 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REDUCING SUCCESSIVE PRE-REGISTRATION ATTEMPTS BY ACCESS TERMINALS - An access terminal pre-registers with a second access network via a first access network to ensure a quick handover in the future. Frequent pre-registration attempts are avoided by implementing a hysteresis timer that restricts when a pre-registration process can be initiated. The hysteresis timer is started when pre-registration is initiated by the access terminal. No new pre-registration attempts are permitted if the hysteresis timer has not expired. An abort condition can cause the hysteresis timer to be aborted early, and a new pre-registration can be initiated. Access points in the first access network may be grouped into one or more pre-registration zones. If the access terminal moves from a first access point to a second access point, a new pre-registration is skipped if the first and second access points have the same pre-registration zone or the second access point is aware of the pre-registration zone for the first access point. | 10-15-2015 |
20150296557 | MTC MONITORING METHOD - One embodiment of the present specification provides a machine type communication (MTC) monitoring method to be implemented by a network node. The MTC monitoring method comprises the steps of: recognizing a drop of at least one bearer in a target base station by the control of a specific monitoring event when the monitoring event is satisfied according to a movement of an MTC device to be processed through one or a plurality of bearers toward a target base station of an invalid region through a packet data network (PDN) connected with a source base station; transferring, to the MTC device, information for indicating an entry into a valid region or information for indicating an activation of the bearers when detecting the escape of the MTC device from the invalid region and entrance into the valid region; and carrying out a procedure for resetting the dropped bearers. | 10-15-2015 |
20150304071 | Interruptions in Wireless Communications - Method and apparatus for reception of data units in a device by means of a first protocol and a second protocol are disclosed. A control function of the second protocol is informed of interruption in a control function of the first protocol. In response thereto a reordering timer of the second protocol is considered as having expired, and a state variable of the second protocol is updated to equal with a highest received state variable. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304798 | Mobility Management Method And System In M2M Network - A mobility management method and system in an M2M network are provided. The method comprises: after an M2M terminal/terminal peripheral has registered to an M2M communication network through a mobility management unit, if the M2M terminal/terminal peripheral switches to an M2M stub network, an M2M gateway acquiring information of the M2M terminal/terminal peripheral from the mobility management unit. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304891 | Signalling Mechanisms for Wireless Device Handover - A serving base station transmits, in response to making a handover decision for a wireless device, a first message to a target base station. The serving base station receives from the target base station a second message comprising configuration parameters of a plurality of cells. The configuration parameters comprise a cell group index for a secondary cell identifying a cell group. The serving base station transmits a third message to the wireless device. The third message comprises configuration parameters and is configured to cause the wireless device to start a synchronization process with the target base station. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304892 | Network Stack Virtualization - Embodiments contemplate network stack virtualization which may be virtualization of a portion of the communication stack, such as the protocol stack, in some embodiments, multiple functionally of independent copies of the protocol stack may be simultaneously running on the terminal and/or serving the needs of different applications. This may allow independent operation from the application point of view, including connectivity to different networks with different identities. Embodiments contemplate that any number of such virtual network stacks can be instantiated, perhaps in some embodiments depending on the characteristics of an active application. Embodiments also contemplate the presentation of multiple allocated internet protocol (IP) addresses that may have sufficient information to enable an intelligent source IP address selection on the WTRU. The WTRU may be able to select an optimum IP address, perhaps in some embodiments depending on which application may be started. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304894 | METHODS, APPARATUSES, RELATED COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT AND DATA STRUCTURE FOR DECIDING ON A SIGNALING SCHEME FOR HANDOVER - A first method (and related first apparatus) includes transmitting, in a handover request message, an indication of a first protocol version; a second method (and related second apparatus) includes receiving, in the handover request message, the indication, deciding, based on the received indication and a second protocol version, on a value of an information element included in a handover request acknowledgement message to be transmitted, the information element indicating usage of a first or second signaling scheme, and transmitting the handover request acknowledgement message including the information element; and in the first method receiving the handover request acknowledgement message including the information element; and a third method (and related third apparatus) including receiving the handover command message including the information element, and configuring according to one of the first and second signaling schemes indicated by the information element. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304896 | HANDOVER FROM D2D TO CELLULAR WHEREBY A PDCP ENTITY IS ASSOCIATED WITH TWO RLC ENTITIES RELATED TO DIFFERENT RADIO BEARERS - The application relates to a mobile terminal radio stack for D2D single channel ( | 10-22-2015 |
20150304897 | SIMULTANEOUS HAND OVER IN DIFFERENT DOMAINS - The teachings relates to method ( | 10-22-2015 |
20150304899 | Method and Apparatuses for Maintaining Service Continuity to a Centralization and Continuity Application Server - A method and apparatus for maintaining service continuity for User Equipment accessing an IP Multimedia Subsystem communication network. A routing identifier is established that identifies a Service Centralization and Continuity Application Server allocated to the User Equipment. The routing identifier is sent to the User Equipment. In the event of disruption to the service between the User Equipment and the Service Centralization and Continuity Application Server, a handover message is sent from the User Equipment via a Circuit Switched access network. The handover message includes the routing identifier, and is then forwarded to the identified Service Centralization and Continuity Application Server. This allows the same Service Centralization and Continuity Application Server to be used after the handover as was used before the handover, thereby providing service continuity. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304901 | Event Context Transfer in a Heterogeneous Communication System - The present invention provides a method involving at least one mobile node and a heterogeneous network comprising a plurality of access nodes. The method includes transferring event context information associated with a mobile node from a first access node to a second access node. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304903 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND MOBILE STATION - The present invention avoids a situation where PDCCH and PUSCH resources for transmitting a “PDCP status report” are wasted, even when a “PDCP re-establishment procedure” is started. A mobile communication method of the present invention comprises the steps of: causing a mobile station UE to discard a “PDCP status report #1” and generate a “PDCP status report #2” when detecting a start trigger for a “PDCP re-establishment” again before completing transmission of the “PDCP status report #1”; and causing the mobile station UE to transmit the “PDCP status report #2” to a radio base station eNB after completing the “PDCP re-establishment”. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304906 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR MAINTAINING INFORMATION REGARDING THE MOVEMENT OF USER TERMINALS - A method of operating a user terminal when attempting to move from one of a cell of a 3GPP network and an AP of a WLAN to the other of a cell of a 3GPP network and an AP of a WLAN, is provided. The method comprises identifying the 3GPP network and the 3GPP cell to the WLAN, and identifying the WLAN and a WLAN AP to the 3GPP network. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304908 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR SELECTING PDN GATEWAY - A method for selecting a PDN gateway PGW is disclosed. The method includes: receiving, by a 3GPP AAA server, a request type indication sent by a PDN gateway PGW, where the request type indication is used for indicating a type of a procedure executed by a user equipment UE or is used for indicating whether an IP address is preserved; and selecting, by the 3GPP AAA server, a target PGW according to the request type indication. Embodiments of the present invention further provide a 3GPP AAA server, a PDN gateway PGW, and a user equipment. By adopting the embodiments of the present invention, a dynamic adjustment of a PGW can be implemented, and an unnecessary PGW reselection procedure is avoided | 10-22-2015 |
20150304909 | BASE STATION DEVICE, TERMINAL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, TRANSMISSION METHOD, RECEPTION METHOD, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND INTEGRATED CIRCUIT - Provided are a communication system and a communication method which efficiently control connecting and switching over for a second base station device and a terminal device and which enable traffic distribution in a communication system including a first base station device, at least one second base station device, and the terminal device which is connected to the first base station device or the second base station device. In the communication system which includes the first base station device, at least one second base station device, and the terminal device connected to the first base station device or the second base station device, a transmission unit of the first base station device transmits channels in the downlink including target base station recognition information and channels in the downlink including system information of the second base station device in order to notify whether or not a subsequent connection destination is the second base station device to the terminal device. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304911 | METHOD AND NODE FOR REDUCING HANDOVER SIGNALING - The present invention relates to a method for supporting handover in a first radio network node of a wireless network. The first radio network node serves wireless devices of a serving cell. The method comprises grouping a plurality of wireless devices in the serving cell into a group, and selecting one of the plurality of wireless devices as a coordinating wireless device for the group. The method also comprises requesting a measurement report from the coordinating wireless device for the group, wherein the measurement report is to support a joint handover decision for the plurality of wireless devices of the group. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304919 | METHOD FOR HANDLING FREQUENCY PRIORITY BASED ON TERMINAL SUPPORTING CHARACTERISTICS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING SAME - Provided in one aspect is a method for handling a frequency priority performed by a terminal in a wireless communication system. The method comprises: receiving minimum priority application request information from a network; and handling a frequency priority for cell reselection on the basis of the minimum priority application request information and the supporting characteristics of the terminal. The minimum priority application request information indicates an application of the minimum priority to a current frequency of the terminal or all frequencies of current radio access technology (RAT) of a cell which the terminal camps on. The supporting characteristic of the terminal is whether the terminal supports the RAT other than the current RAT. The handling of the frequency priority is a variable application of the frequency priority for the cell reselection according to the contents of the minimum priority application request information and the supporting characteristics of the terminal. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304922 | Wlan Offloading Using Offload Preference Indication Information - Systems and methods are disclosed for offloading traffic from a first network to a second network using offload preference indication (OPI) information. The OPI information can be sent to a mobile communication device using the Access Network Discovery and Selection Function (ANDSF) framework or Radio Access Network (RAN) rules. Systems and methods are disclosed for offloading traffic for users in user groups using a variety of techniques, including randomization techniques, assigned offload class techniques, and bitmap allocation techniques. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304925 | METHOD AND TERMINAL FOR APPLYING CHANGED SYSTEM INFORMATION - According to one disclosure of the present specification, a method for applying system information changed in a terminal is presented. The method for applying the changed system information includes the steps of: receiving an indicator providing notice of a change of a system information set from a cell; receiving information on the time when the change of system information is applied; when the indicator is received in subframe n, determining that the changed system information is applied after k periods based on the information from the n subframe. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304930 | WIRELESS NETWORK HANDOVER - A method performed under control of a receiver device may include receiving, from a sender device, connection information regarding a first apparatus that is connected to the sender device via a machine-to-machine network between the sender device and the receiver device; and connecting to the first apparatus based at least in part on the received connection information after the sender device is disconnected from the first apparatus. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304931 | METHOD OF AUTOMATICALLY ADJUSTING MOBILITY PARAMETER - A method of automatically adjusting a mobility parameter is disclosed. In the method, through sending the peer eNB the message containing different handover thresholds, the relative adjustment value corresponding to each threshold and/or the target frequency information to which the handover threshold is adjusted, the peer eNB can learn that which threshold is adjusted by the source eNB, so as to adjust the corresponding parameter. In this way, the accuracy and efficiency of automatic adjustment of the mobility parameter are improved, and the destination eNB can adjust the mobility parameters of all cells working on the same frequency, so as to guarantee that the adjustment of the mobility parameter for handing over from the source cell to the destination cell working on the same frequency has no negative influence. By the method of the present invention, the automatic adjustment of mobility parameter between different frequencies or different access systems becomes available and can be supported in the case of the self-optimization of mobile load balance and the self-optimization of mobile robustness, so as to improve the performance of mobile communication system. | 10-22-2015 |
20150304932 | SMALL CELL INITIAL ACCESS AND PHYSICAL CELL IDENTITY DETERMINATION - A method, system, and computer program product that provides a two-index system for clusters of small cells in a wireless network. A first index is employed for access to and identification of a serving cell within a cluster of small cells. A second index indicates a group of small cells for determining mobility control. The first index may be derived from primary/secondary synchronization signals, or from frequency/time division multiplex signal position. The second index may be indicated in system/master information block signals or predefined as a plurality of small cells identified by the first index for each cell. Determination of physical cell identification is aided by providing a plurality of primary/secondary synchronization (PSS/SSS) signal alternating configurations with indicator, wherein a maximum number of configurations is predefined. Signaling the PSS/SSS configurations by one of broadcast or dedicated signaling, said signaling indicating whether each configuration is one of periodic or aperiodic alternation. | 10-22-2015 |
20150312382 | SWITCHING A NETWORK CONNECTION FROM A FIRST NETWORK PROTOCOL TO A SECOND NETWORK PROTOCOL - Systems and methods for switching between communicating according to a first network protocol and a second network protocol are provided. The provided systems and methods multiplex received communications according to the first and second network protocols and select one of the network protocols based on a quality or throughput of the network protocol without terminating any existing sessions established according to either of the first or second network protocols. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312383 | HANDLING MULTIPATH TRASNMISSION CONTROL PROTOCOL SIGNALLING IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A method and apparatus for handling Multipath Transmission Control Protocol, MPTCP, signaling in a communications network. The communications network includes a first node hosting an MPTCP proxy function, and a second node in a second access network. The second node receives from a mobile terminal an attachment request. The second node then sends a message to a remote database and receives a response, the response including an identity of the first node. An MPTCP data path can then be redirected from the second access network to the MPTCP proxy function. Even in cases where the MPTCP proxy function is located at or between the PDN Gateway and the mobile terminal, the second access can be made aware of the location of the MPTCP proxy function and route MPTCP data traffic accordingly. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312787 | DYNAMIC UPDATE OF UE CAPABILITY FOR INTER-FREQUENCY AND INTER-RAT MEASUREMENTS - A user equipment (UE) provides a capability-type indication for each of one or more UE capabilities. Each indication corresponds to a capability type, the type being one of a persistent capability or a second-type capability. Information corresponding to the capability-type indication may be provided to an eNB associated with the UE by RRC signaling. The UE provides a capability-change indication for each of one or more UE capabilities that has changed capability type. Information corresponding to the capability-change indication may be provided to an eNB by lower layer signaling, RRC signaling, or a combination thereof. Capability change information may be sent to the eNB autonomously by the UE, or in response to an inquiry from the eNB. The inquiry from the eNB may be triggered by the UE. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312805 | ENHANCEMENT OF A CELL RESELECTION PARAMETER IN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS - A cell reselection procedure in heterogeneous networks is enhanced based on utilization of per category cell reselection parameters. In one aspect, a serving access point can categorize a set of neighbor access points based on cell-type and/or cell-profile data of a set of neighbor access points. Further, the serving access point can determine cell reselection parameters for the different categories. As an example, offset data (Qoffset) can be determined for the different categories. The per category cell reselection parameters can be transmitted to user equipment coupled to the serving access point to facilitate cell reselection. In one example, the per category cell reselection parameters reduce operational costs associated with processing and transmission of system parameters. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312808 | Charging Information for WLAN Network Selection in 3GPP-WLAN Data Offloading - A user equipment (UE) may receive charging data and use the charging data in determinations of whether to offload data from a mobile communication network, such as a 3GPP cellular network, to another wireless access network, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN). For example, the UE may receive, from the mobile communication network, charging data regarding one or more WLANs in the vicinity of the UE. The UE may also receive rules regarding whether to offload communication traffic from the cellular communication network to a particular WLAN based on charging data relating to the particular WLAN. The UE may detect one of the WLANs and determine whether to offload communication traffic to the WLAN based at least in part on the received rules and the received charging data regarding the WLAN. The determination may be further based on user preferences saved on the UE regarding the charging data. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312809 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR SELECTING LONG TERM EVOLUTION LTE NETWORK - A method and device for selecting an LTE network, relating to the technical field of communications, are disclosed in the present application are, which makes that a UE can returns to an LTE PLMN registered when CSFB is initiated after the CSFB service, thereby ensuring the continuity of PS service, avoiding an unnecessary inter-PLMN network switch and promoting the user experience. The method provided in the present application mainly comprises: performing, by a UE, a combined registration in the LTE PLMN; initiates, by the UE, a CSFB service to fall back to a 2G/3G network, and receiving an equivalent PLMN list in the 2G/3G network; adding, by the UE, identity information of the LTE PLMN to the equivalent PLMN list; performing, by the UE, a PLMN selection according to the equivalent PLMN list when the CSFB service ends. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312811 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDOVER IN HETEROGENEOUS SYSTEM - Embodiments of the disclosure provide methods and apparatuses for handover in a heterogeneous network. According to the method, a candidate radio connectivity mode for use after handover from a source BS to a first target BS and/or a second target BS is determined; a first handover related message which comprises the candidate radio connectivity mode is sent to the source BS; and in response to receiving a second handover related message, the first target BS and/or the second target BS may be accessed, wherein the source BS is not associated with the first target BS, and wherein the first target BS is a LPN and is associated with the second target BS. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312819 | USER ANCHOR CONTROLLER COMMUNICATION WITHIN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - According to one embodiment of the invention, a non-transitory computer readable medium for improving the scalability and redundancy of a wireless communications network. One embodiment of the non-transitory computer readable medium comprises instructions that configure, by a first controller, a first access point, responsive to a client device associating with the first access point, identify a second controller configured for maintaining information corresponding to the client device, wherein the second controller is different than the first controller that configures the first access point, obtain, by the first access point from the second controller, information corresponding to the client device, and communicate, by the first access point with the client device, based on the information corresponding to the client device. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312820 | SELECTION OF ANCHOR CONTROLLERS FOR ACCESS POINTS WITHIN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - According to one embodiment of the invention, a non-transitory computer readable medium for improving the scalability and redundancy of a wireless communications network. One embodiment of the non-transitory computer readable medium comprises instructions that select a first controller for controlling a configuration of a first access point and a second access point, detect a particular event and, responsive to detecting the particular event, select a second controller for controlling the configuration of the first access point without modifying the selection of the first controller for controlling the configuration of the second access point. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312825 | METHODS, A NETWORK NODE AND A WIRELESS DEVICE FOR SUPPORTING HANDOVER IN A CELLULAR COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A way to support a handover of a wireless device from a serving cell being served by a serving base station to a candidate cell being served by a candidate base station is disclosed. A network node determines a respective value of one or more parameters for affecting a range for soft handover. The range of soft handover is applied by the wireless device to determine if the candidate cell is a subject for soft handover. At least one respective value of the one or more parameters is determined based on output power of a transmitter of the serving base station for serving the serving cell and/or of a transmitter of the candidate base station for serving the candidate cell. The network node provides a sending of the respective value of the one or more parameters to the wireless device. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312830 | PROMOTING WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK (WLAN) ROAMING - The present disclosure describes promoting roaming of a wireless terminal in a wireless local area network (WLAN). The AP obtains signal quality and/or data transmission quality of the wireless terminal periodically, and determines whether the obtained signal quality and/or data transmission quality of the wireless terminal satisfies a predetermined threshold. Upon determining that the predetermined threshold is not satisfied, the AP proactively sends a probe response frame to the wireless terminal. The probe response frame notifies the wireless terminal of a wireless signal strength of the AP to promote roaming to a neighbouring AP. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312834 | HANDLING CONNECTED MODE MOBILITY FROM AREAS BOUNDING MULTI-OPERATOR CORE NETWORK AND NON-MULTI-OPERATOR CORE NETWORK SHARED INFRASTRUCTURE - A method provided in one embodiment includes receiving, at a first network element, a first message including a first network identifier associated with a first network. The first message further includes an indication of an association of the first network identifier with a first user equipment. The method further includes receiving, by the first network element, a second message indicative of an initiated handover of the first user equipment to a second network. The second message includes a second network identifier associated with the second network. The method further includes determining, by the first network element, whether the second network identifier matches the first network identifier, and terminating the initiated handover by the first network element when the second network identifier does not match the first network identifier. | 10-29-2015 |
20150312943 | SCHEDULING SIGNALING TRANSMISSION METHOD AND DEVICE - The present invention provides a scheduling signaling transmission method and device. The method includes: receiving, by UE, a random access response parameter sent by an eNB, where the random access response parameter is used to indicate that scheduling signaling of a random access response is transmitted through an E-PDCCH; and after sending a random access preamble to the eNB, receiving, by the UE through the E-PDCCH according to the random access response parameter, the scheduling signaling of the random access response. According to embodiments of the present invention, impact of inter-cell interference on scheduling signaling of an RAR can be reduced, thereby shortening a time delay of a random access process. | 10-29-2015 |
20150319277 | Method, device and system for automatically switching voice call services - A method, device and system for automatically switching voice call services are described which are capable of intelligently determining IP network service authority states and data connection states of a current calling party and a called party through the cooperation of a terminal and an IP network service server when a user initiates a voice call based on a PLMN network and automatically switching the voice call of the PLMN network to a voice call service of an IP network when the states of the calling party and the called party both meet a set switching condition. By bearing the current call with the IP network instead of the PLMN network, the method, the device and the system disclosed herein achieve the purposes of improving call quality and saving call fee. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319649 | Beamforming Handover Messaging in a Wireless Network - A first base station transmits a message to a second base station after a handover decision for a wireless device supporting beamforming and multiple carrier configurations. The message includes a plurality of measurement configuration parameters for the wireless device. The first base station receives a response from the second base stations. The first base station transmits a handover command to the wireless device subsequent to receiving the response message. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319650 | HANDOVER METHOD BASED ON UPLINK SIGNAL, METHOD FOR CONFIGURING UPLINK SIGNAL, USER EQUIPMENT AND BASE STATION - A handover method based on an uplink signal, a method for configuring an uplink signal, UE and a base station. The handover method includes: transmitting, by a source base station, a triggering message to the UE, to trigger the UE to transmit an uplink signal for handover; receiving notification message(s) transmitted by one or more other base station(s) according to detection of the UL signal; and determining a target base station from the one or more other base station(s) according to the notification message(s), and performing handover of the UE. It is possible to accelerate judging of handover based on measurement of an UL signal, to satisfy handover demand in different scenarios. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319653 | METHODS AND SYSTEM FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and system for performing handover in a third generation (3G) long term evolution (LTE) system are disclosed. A source evolved Node-B (eNode-B) makes a handover decision based on measurements and sends a handover request to a target eNode-B. The target eNode-B sends a handover response to the source eNode-B indicating that a handover should commence. The source eNode-B then sends a handover command to a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU). The handover command includes at least one of reconfiguration information, information regarding timing adjustment, relative timing difference between the source eNode-B and the target eNode-B, information regarding an initial scheduling procedure at the target eNode-B, and measurement information for the target eNode-B. The WTRU then accesses the target eNode-B and exchanges layer 1/2 signaling to perform downlink synchronization, timing adjustment, and uplink and downlink resource assignment based on information included in the handover command. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319654 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A mobile communication system which can transfer information on the number of packets counted up until then by a base station of a mobile source, to a base station of a mobile target, even when a terminal performs a handover. UE moves to a Target eNode B, but a Source eNode B decides to perform a handover, and the Source eNode B includes information on the number of packets counted up until then in a Handover Request message to the Target eNode B, so as to notify the Target eNode B. After receiving a Handover Confirm message from the UE, the Target eNode B includes information on the number of packets received from the Source eNode B in a Handover Complete message transmitted to a CN Node, so as to notify the CN Node. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319655 | HANDLING OF DIFFERENT TYPES OF THRESHOLDS IN MEASUREMENT REPORTING - Methods and apparatus, including computer program products, are provided for handling different types of triggering quantities for a measurement reporting event such that user equipment behavior is predictable. Related apparatus, systems, methods, and articles are also described. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319656 | WIRELESS DEVICE HANDOFF BETWEEN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Examples are disclosed for a wireless device handoff between a first wireless network and a second wireless network. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319659 | METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING MULTIPLE ACCESS NETWORK AND APPARATUS SUPPORTING SAME - Provided is a method for communicating carried out by a terminal in a wireless communication system supporting a multiple access network. The method comprises receiving from a first access network second access network service information, determining whether traffic processing through the second access network is allowed based on the second access network service information, and processing all or a portion of the traffic on the first access network through the second access network. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319663 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, AND NON-TRANSITORY STORAGE MEDIUM STORING INSTRUCTIONS EXECUTABLE BY INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS - An information processing apparatus and a communication terminal can carry out first wireless communication and second wireless communication. The first wireless communication is established when a distance between the information processing apparatus and the communication terminal is equal to or less than a first distance. The information processing apparatus determines whether data communication is to be carried out over the first wireless communication or the second wireless communication. When the data communication is to be carried out over the first wireless communication, the information processing apparatus carries out the data communication over the first wireless communication. When the data communication is to be carried out over the second wireless communication, the information processing apparatus carries out data communication of first setting information with the communication terminal over the first wireless communication to establish the second wireless communication and carries out data communication over the second wireless communication. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319664 | SYSTEMS AND/OR METHODS FOR ANCHOR NODE SELECTION IN NETWORKS USING DISTRIBUTED MOBILITY MANAGEMENT (DMM) - Systems and/or methods may be used to select an anchor node. For example, a device may detect or more anchor nodes that may be available for the device to connect to. The device may determine whether to handover to one of the detected anchor nodes based on capability information including load information of the anchor nodes. The device may connect to a detected anchor node based on the the capability information including the load information. The detected anchor nodes may be grouped and the device may select and connect to an anchor node based on the groupings. The device may also store a history including a route of the device and anchor nodes on the route and may use such information to determine whether to connect to detected anchor node. The device may further use proximity to content to determine whether to connect to a detected anchor node. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319668 | MOBILE HANDOVER MANAGEMENT METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A mobile management handover system includes circuitry that determines available resources of candidate target handover cells of a user device. The circuitry then select a target handover cell from the candidate target handover cells based on at least one of the available resources of each of the candidate target handover cells and a residency duration of the user device within the candidate target handover cells, and requests reservation of the available resources by the target handover cell. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319670 | METHOD FOR SELECTIVELY PROCESSING TRAFFIC IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING MULTIPLE ACCESS NETWORK, AND APPARATUS SUPPORTING SAME - Provided is a method for processing traffic by a terminal in a wireless communication system supporting a multiple access network. The method comprises receiving from a first access network traffic routing information, and processing traffic on the first access network based on the traffic routing information. The traffic routing information indicates whether at least one unit of traffic on the first access network can be processed through a second access network. Processing the traffic based on the traffic routing information involves determining whether the traffic can be processed through the second access network, and processing the traffic through the second access network when the traffic can be processed through the second access network. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319682 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND NETWORK CONNECTION CONTROL METHOD - When a mobile station that is capable of wirelessly connecting directly to a mobile network connects to another mobile network via another mobile station, security is enhanced, so that the legitimate uses of networks are fostered. A first mobile station ( | 11-05-2015 |
20150319683 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND CONNECTION SELECTION CONTROL METHOD - Efficient connection selection is made possible when a mobile station capable of wirelessly connecting directly to a mobile network is also capable of connecting to another mobile network via another mobile station. A first mobile station ( | 11-05-2015 |
20150327124 | Technique for Terminating Call Set Up in a CSFB Situation - Techniques and apparatus are described for controlling set up of a terminating call from an IMS to a UE, in a Circuit Switched Fallback (CSFB) situation. A first MSC receives a terminating call from IMS and tries to page the UE. The UE has moved to the second MSC and performs a Location Update to the second MSC. The second MSC informs the first MSC with a Send Identification message comprising an address of the second MSC. The first MSC maintains the IMS subscription of the UE at Cancel Location and forwards the terminating call to the second MSC. The first MSC acts as relay for subsequent call control messages for calls of the UE. The first and second MSCs are supervising the ongoing calls and as soon as all calls are completed the second MSC registers the UE into IMS and the first MSC de-registers the UE from IMS. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327126 | PACKET DATA PROTOCOL CONTEXT MANAGEMENT FOR HANDOVER FROM CELLULAR NETWORK TO A FEMTO CELL - Packet data protocol (PDP) contexts are managed upon cellular-to-femto handover, wherein femto network has disparate capabilities to support applications with distinct access point names (APNs) and quality of service (QoS) profiles. Based at least on activity factors of applications associated with PDP contexts, a QoS-based ranking of PDP contexts, and subscriber input, cellular network platform selects active PDP contexts to retain and suspend upon handover. A group of active PDP contexts is handed off in accordance with femto coverage capability, with remaining active PDP contexts suspended during handover. When a suspended PDP context, and application associated therewith, is resumed through femto coverage, a PDP context modification is conducted with a new APN and the application is routed to a corresponding femto gateway node and application server. Additionally, femto network platform performs a radio access bearer reconfiguration to meet QoS requirements of the resumed PDP context. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327129 | WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK OFFLOADING THROUGH RADIO ACCESS NETWORK RULES - Methods, systems, and devices are described for Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) offloading through radio access network rules. In one embodiment of a method of wireless communication, a mobile device may determine that Radio Access Network (RAN) assistance information is unavailable, the RAN assistance information including a first set of thresholds for switching a Packet Data Network (PDN) connection of the mobile device from a WLAN to a Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN). The mobile device may further access a second set of thresholds based at least in part on the determining, and the mobile device may determine to switch the PDN connection from the WLAN to the WWAN based at least in part on the second set of thresholds. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327131 | Enhanced Integration Between WI-FI and Mobile Communication Networks - It is presented a method, performed in a wireless terminal being capable of communicating both with a mobile communication network and a Wi-Fi access point. The method comprises: detecting a presence of a Wi-Fi access point; obtaining information comprising at least one link parameter related to a current link between the wireless terminal and a mobile communication network and/or at least one terminal parameter related to the wireless terminal; and transmitting an Access Network Query Protocol, ANQP, message comprising the information to the Wi-Fi access point. A corresponding wireless terminal, computer program computer program product, and Wi-Fi network node are also presented. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327136 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING HAND-OVER IN DRONE NETWORK - The present invention relates to a method for controlling hand-over in a drone network. A method for controlling hand-over in a drone network that is established by a plurality of drones that constitute a formation, and controlled by a ground control station (GCS) that controls the location, configuration and mobility of each of the plurality of drones according to the present invention includes a phase via which the GCS predicts, based on previously stored control information, a drone that is to be newly deployed or transferred from another formation and allocates network connection information to the drone thus predicted; a phase via which the GCS generates a virtual routing table including the drone that is thus predicted to be deployed or transferred; a phase via which the GCS, upon actual deploying or transferring the predicted drone, changes the virtual routing table into an actual routing table; and a phase via which the GCS, upon the drone thus deployed or transferred transmitting a control message of the formation routing protocol, calibrates and optimizes the routing table. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327137 | INTER-NETWORK COMMUNICATION TO AVOID PING-PONGING INTER-RAT IDLE RESELECTION - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided which enable dissimilar radio access networks to exchange loading information that may be used to determine reselection criteria for mobile terminals and/or classes of mobile terminals. A network entity in one network, aware of loading conditions in another network, can determine whether a wireless terminal should attempt to reselect the other network. The method comprises receiving information related to the operational status of a first network at a second network, and determining at the second network whether to direct an idle user equipment in the second network to reselect the first network based on the operational status of the first network. The first and second networks may employ different radio access technologies. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327141 | METHOD FOR RESELECTING CELL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS SUPPORTING SAME - Provided is a method for user equipment reselecting a cell in a wireless communication system. The method comprises: obtaining a public land mobile network (PLMN) list from a serving cell, wherein the PLMN list lists a plurality of PLMNs according to businesses sharing the serving cell; obtaining cell reselection information from the serving cell, wherein the reselection information includes a plurality of cell reselection information sets related to the plurality of PLMNs; and reselecting the cell based on the PLMN list and the cell reselection list. | 11-12-2015 |
20150327172 | APPARATUS AND METHOD - This invention suppresses power consumption of a mobile communication terminal apparatus in data exchange in wireless communications. For this purpose, when wireless communications are established between a mobile communication terminal apparatus ( | 11-12-2015 |
20150334510 | Method of Handling Resource Allocation for MTC and Related Communication Device - A method of performing machine type communication (MTC) for a communication device in a wireless communication system comprises performing a first MTC with a network of the wireless communication system by using a first subband resource of at least one subband resource; and performing a second MTC with the network by using a second subband resource of the at least one subband resource, after performing the first MTC; wherein a carrier frequency of the communication device is switched from a carrier frequency of the first subband resource to a carrier frequency of the second subband resource before performing the second MTC with the network, when the first subband resource and the second subband resource are not in a same maximum bandwidth supported by the communication device. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334603 | MOBILE STATION AND RADIO BASE STATION - An objective is to enable a radio base station eNB to recognize a time point when a transition of an Scell to an active state is completed. A mobile station UE according to the invention includes a transmission unit | 11-19-2015 |
20150334604 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR HANDOVER FOR BASE STATIONS WITH CELLULAR BACKHAUL - Control of handover management at a first base station in a cellular network is provided. A separate, provisioning base station of the cellular network may provide the first base station with a radio backhaul interface to a core network part of the cellular network. Then, handover status information may be communicated to the first base station, the information being based on a handover status for the provisioning base station. Additionally or alternatively, the first base station is configured for operation whilst mobile and a mobility parameter is determined for it, relating to a change in location for the first base station. Handover status information is communicated to the first base station based on the determined mobility parameter. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334605 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes the steps of: sending “INVITE” from a UE# | 11-19-2015 |
20150334606 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MAINTAINING SERVICE CONTINUITY OF USER EQUIPMENT AFTER TRACKING AREA IS UPDATED - Provided are a method and an apparatus for maintaining service continuity of a user UE after a tracking area is updated. In the method, after a UE initiates a TAU request, an MME judges whether an updated target SGW is the same as a source SGW (S | 11-19-2015 |
20150334611 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IDENTIFYING TARGET DENB CELL - Disclosed are a system and a method for identifying a target DeNB cell for handing over to the target DeNB cell during an inband operation of 3GPP(3 | 11-19-2015 |
20150334615 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IDENTIFYING A SUBSCRIBER IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - An example method is provided in one example embodiment and includes receiving, by a first Home eNodeB (HeNB), a first attach request from a user equipment (UE) for attaching a subscriber associated with the UE to a small cell network; determining whether the subscriber has transitioned into the small cell network from a macro cell network; exchanging, based on the determination, a first pair of messages between the first HeNB and the UE to determine an International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) of the subscriber; and exchanging, based on the determination, one or more second pairs of messages between the first HeNB and the UE to advance a sequence number for Non-Access Stratum (NAS) messages for the UE to a value corresponding to a received sequence number for the first attach request from the UE. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334622 | Apparatus and Method to Perform LTE/WLAN Handoff by Keeping LTE Attached or in Suspended State - Systems and methods are disclosed to provide offloading procedures that reduce signaling load. Specifically, embodiments of the present disclosure provide offloading techniques that enable signaling overhead caused by attachment procedures to be avoided when user equipment (UE) reconnects to a cellular network after offloading data to a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN). According to an embodiment, at least one Public Data Network (PDN) is kept connected through the cellular network access when other PDN connections are offloaded to WLAN. According to another embodiment, a PDN connection through cellular network access is suspended, rather than detached, when data is offloaded to WLAN. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334623 | Cell Reselection Based on Information Collected from a Plurality of Mobile Devices - Data provided by an access point of a wireless local area network (“WLAN”) is used to assist a mobile device in cell reselection. If a serving cell of a cellular communications network is unsuitable for providing cellular service, a candidate cell co-located with the serving cell can be selected as the serving cell based on quality of service metrics associated with the serving cell and the candidate cell. The mobile device can be proactively commanded to switch to the candidate cell for receiving cellular service. In some implementations, the quality of service metrics are calculated from call logs collected from mobile devices operating in the cellular communications network. In some implementations, network information regarding serving cell performance can be used with the call logs to generate the quality of service metrics. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334694 | BASE STATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION CONTROLLING METHOD AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A base station apparatus, includes: a processor; and a memory that stores a communication controlling program to be executed by the processor, wherein the processor is operable, based on the communication controlling program, to: receive a first call connection request transmitted from a terminal apparatus; compare a pattern including values of a plurality of parameters extracted from the first call connection request with a characteristic pattern of a second call connection request based on application communication; and perform, when the pattern of the first call connection request and the characteristic pattern coincide with each other, a transmission process to a different apparatus in accordance with the first call connection request after a delay time elapses from a reception timing of the first call connection request. | 11-19-2015 |
20150341828 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MAINTAINING LOCATION CONTINUITY FOR A UE FOLLOWING HANDOVER - Techniques for maintaining location continuity for a user equipment (UE) following handover are described. The UE communicates with a first radio access network (RAN) and is served by a source serving node and a source location server prior to handover. The UE communicates with a second RAN and is served by a target serving node and a target location server after the handover. In an aspect, location continuity may be maintained for the UE by transferring an identity of the target serving node to a location server during handover of the UE. In one design, the target serving node sends its identity to the target location server, which updates a Location and Routing Function (LRF) serving the UE. In another design, for handover from packet-switched domain to circuit-switched domain, the source serving node sends the target serving node identity to the source location server, which updates the LRF. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341829 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO STATION, RADIO TERMINAL, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM - A radio network ( | 11-26-2015 |
20150341835 | Methods and Systems for Wireless Communication in Heterogeneous Networks - Systems, methods, and apparatuses for data and/or control offloading and handover in heterogeneous wireless communication networks are provided. Data and/or control packets can be offloaded to a coordinating base station while a user equipment (UE) remains associated with its serving cell. The packets are still transferred between the serving base station and the core network, and the offloaded data and/or control packets are forwarded from the serving base station to the coordinating base station for transmission to the UE. Furthermore, during a handover process, the serving base station and coordinating base station may independently schedule and send a handover command to the UE to reduce the radio link failure rate. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341836 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION,COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM - A first base station ( | 11-26-2015 |
20150341839 | HUB APPARATUS OF HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK AND METHOD OF OFFLOADING THE SAME - A hub apparatus may be provided for distributing a load of a small cell digital unit to a macro cell digital unit in a heterogeneous network. The hub apparatus includes an offloading controller configured to determine a first small cell, as an offloading target among a plurality of small cells based on a load of the macro cell digital unit and the small cell digital unit, to determine a first digital unit processing a load of the first small cell among at least one macro cell digital unit, to that generate a first control signal that requests connection to the first digital unit and a low-power radio unit of the first small cell, a path change unit connected to each of an antenna, having one side installed in the macro cell and a low-power radio unit installed in each small cell, having the other side connected to each of the macro cell digital unit and the small cell digital unit, configured to form a path connecting the one side and the other side, and configured to change a digital unit connected to a corresponding low-power radio unit based on the first control signal. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341853 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING BEACON TRANSMISSION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for controlling beacon transmission in a wireless communication system. A cellular node may control beacon transmission of an access point (AP) in an infrastructure basic service set (BSS). The cellular node may adjust an beacon interval of a plurality of APs and a start point of the beacon interval of the plurality of APs so that beacon transmissions of the plurality of APs do not overlap each other. Or, a cellular node may control beacon transmission of a general device in an independent BSS. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341888 | Method and System for Registering Femtocells to Provide Service - Aspects of a method and system for registering femtocells to provide service are provided. In this regard, a communication device may be operable to determine a plurality of femtocells within a vicinity of its location. The communication device may be operable to receive information communicated from one or more of the plurality of femtocells, which are managed by a femtocell management entity. One or more of the plurality of femtocells may be selected for transmitting and/or receiving cellular data based on the communicated information. The communicated information may comprise one or more of global navigation system satellite (GNSS) coordinates, an identification number, potential interference, power levels, location, associated communication devices, and/or directionality of antennas of the one or more femtocells. | 11-26-2015 |
20150341897 | DUAL REGISTRATION COORDINATION FOR TUNE AWAY - A method, a device, and a non-transitory storage medium having instructions to receive tune away data from a multimode mobile device and to adjust network processes based on the tune away data including downlink scheduling, uplink scheduling, and handover procedures. | 11-26-2015 |
20150350880 | CHANGING OF MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A subscriber identity is changed for a mobile terminal through an instruction being provided to the mobile terminal to detach from a first mobile communication system, to which the first mobile communication system the mobile terminal is attached using a first subscriber identity, where the instruction is also an instruction to change to a second subscriber identity associated with a second mobile communication system. The mobile terminal receives the instruction via the first mobile communication system, detach from the first mobile communication system attaches to the second mobile communication system using the second subscriber identity. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350958 | CHARGING INFORMATION ACCURACY IN A TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A method for improving charging information accuracy in a telecommunications network with respect to a target user equipment includes: in case of a handover or cell change procedure from the first base transceiver station to the second base transceiver station regarding the target user equipment, transmitting the first non-delivered packet data volume information from the first base transceiver station to the target user equipment and from the target user equipment to the second base transceiver station; and determining, based on the first non-delivered packet data volume information, the second non-delivered packet data volume information. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350959 | REDUCED LATENCY DURING RANDOM ACCESS PROCEDURE - A user equipment (UE) reduces random access procedure delays when reselecting or redirecting from a cell of a first radio access technology (RAT) by preventing a persistence check before initiating the random access procedure. In one instance, the UE prevents the persistence check by preventing collection of system information including a scaling factor used for the persistence check before initiating the random access procedure. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350962 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO STATION, RADIO TERMINAL, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM - A radio network ( | 12-03-2015 |
20150350963 | PSEUDO-FAST RETURN IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method and/or apparatus for wireless communication determines whether circuit switched fall back (CSFB) occurred from a first RAT to a second RAT. A call is handed over from the second RAT to the third RAT and a UE attempts to return directly to the first RAT from the third RAT when the CSFB occurred and the call is released from the third RAT. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350965 | A METHOD AND SYSTEM TO MINIMIZE DELAY IN CIRCUIT-SWITCHED FALLBACK (CSFB) PROCEDURE - A method and system for minimizing delay in circuit-switched fallback (CSFB) procedure is disclosed. The disclosed method provides two different approaches for optimizing the delay during the CSFB procedure. In the first approach, user equipment (UE) receives a Location Area Identifier (LAD along with the Radio Access Technology (RAT) information from the network (LTE network). The UE uses the received RAT information from the network for switching to the target Radio Access Network (RAN) without intimating to the LTE network. In another approach, the UE obtains the RAT information by performing a background scan in idle mode, when the UE receives LAI without RAT information from the network. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350966 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR PROCESSING EMPS IN A CSFB MECHANISM - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method, an apparatus, and a system for processing an eMPS in a CSFB mechanism. The method in the embodiment of the present invention mainly includes: receiving a CSFB access request of a user equipment; determining that the user equipment has a CSFB priority service right according to acquired priority service information of the user equipment; and providing a CSFB access service preferentially for the user equipment with the CSFB priority service right. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350969 | HANDOVER SIGNALING ASSISTANCE - The present invention relates to base stations, methods in a base station, terminals and methods in a terminal for supporting a handover. The invention further relates to computer programs for implementing, in the respective nodes of a wireless network, functionality for supporting a handover. According to one embodiment, a method in a source base station for supporting a handover of a terminal from the source base station to a target base station is provided. The method includes sending to an assisting base station a request for assisting the handover, and communicating handover control information between the terminal and the source base station via the assisting base station. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350970 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR OBTAINING NEIGHBOR RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN NETWORK NODES AND NETWORK DEVICE - The present invention discloses a method and an apparatus for obtaining a neighbor relationship between network nodes, and a network device. The method includes: receiving a message sent by a network node; and parsing the message, to obtain a neighbor relationship between at least two network nodes involved in the message. The present invention further discloses a corresponding apparatus for obtaining a neighbor relationship between network nodes, and network device. According to the message sent by the network node, a core network learns the neighbor relationship between network nodes, and efficiency of performing a service between neighboring network nodes may be improved by using the neighbor relationship. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350974 | ENHANCEMENT FOR BSS TRANSITION, LOAD BALANCING AND AP SELECTION - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. In one aspect, the apparatus may be a station. The apparatus receives a request including at least one information identifier from a first access point (AP) associated with the station. The apparatus collects information indicated by the at least one information identifier from each of a plurality of APs to generate a report including AP information of the plurality of APs. The apparatus sends the report including the AP information of the plurality of APs to the first AP, where the first AP generates a neighbor report including the AP information of the plurality of APs. Other embodiments are also included. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350980 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO BASE STATION CONTROLLER, AND RELOCATION METHOD - Radio base stations connect by radio lines with radio terminals in cells that make up each radio base station and relay data communication realized by the radio terminals on bearers on radio lines. Base station controllers record correspondence information of the data flow of data communication with the radio terminals and the bearers on the radio lines and, by referring to the correspondence information, effects termination of data communication with the radio terminals. When, in a state in which a drift base station controller relays and transfers data communication between radio base stations to which the radio terminals are connected and a serving base station controller, the serving base station controller is transferred to the drift base station controller, the plurality of base station controllers then report to the drift base station controller the correspondence information from the serving base station controller. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350983 | Wi-Fi Calling Using SIP-IMS Handset and Evolved Packet Data Gateway - Wi-Fi calling using a mobile device and an evolved packet data gateway (ePDG) is described herein. For example, a mobile device may determine whether any LTE coverage is available, whether data roaming is available, whether a visited public land mobile network (VPLMN) is available, and whether a DNS query to a visited ePDG (VePDG) is successful. The mobile device may connect to the VePDG responsive to a determination that LTE coverage is available, that data roaming is available, that a VPLMN is available, and that the DNS query to the VePDG is successful. Otherwise, the mobile device may connect to a home ePDG (HePDG). | 12-03-2015 |
20150350984 | ASSISTING RETURN TO A FIRST NETWORK FROM A SECOND NETWORK AFTER PERFORMANCE OF A CIRCUIT SWITCHED FALLBACK PROCEDURE - A method for assisting a wireless communication device to return to a first network from a second network is provided. The method can include the wireless communication device participating in a CSFB procedure to transition from the first network to the second network for servicing of a voice call; receiving a connection release from the second network after termination of the voice call; initiating a reselection procedure to reselect to the first network; determining presence of packet switched data ready for transmission from the wireless communication device before completion of the reselection procedure; holding the packet switched data at the wireless communication device at least until expiry of a reselection timer initiated during the reselection procedure; reselecting to the first network after expiry of the reselection timer; and initiating transmission of the packet switched data on the first network after completing reselection to the first network. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350987 | DELEGATED CHANNEL SWITCHING FOR MESH-TYPE NETWORKS - The invention relates to a channel switching strategy and corresponding protocol for a mesh network which comprises a segment controller, SC, ( | 12-03-2015 |
20150350988 | RADIO RESOURCE CONTROL (RRC) PROTOCOL FOR INTEGRATED WLAN/3GPP RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGIES - An integrated WLAN/WWAN Radio Access Technology (RAT) architecture is described in which signaling used to control the integration of the WLAN/WWAN architecture is performed over the Radio Resource Control (RRC) plane. The integrated architecture may provide a network-controlled framework for performing traffic steering and radio resource management. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350989 | INTERWORKING/CO-EXISTENCE OF INTEGRATED WLAN/3GPP RAT ARCHITECTURES WITH LEGACY WLAN/3GPP INTERWORKING SOLUTIONS - An integrated WLAN/WWAN architecture is described, in which signaling used to control the integration of the WLAN/WWAN architecture is performed over the Radio Resource Control (“RRC”) plane. The integrated architecture may provide a network-controlled framework for performing traffic steering and radio resource management. Additionally, according to the disclosure provided herein, the integrated architecture may interwork with legacy systems (e.g., architectures that do not support the integrated WLAN/WWAN architecture). | 12-03-2015 |
20150350990 | CELLULAR COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, USER TERMINAL, AND CELLULAR BASE STATION - A cellular communication system comprises: a UE configured to perform a WLAN-related process for switching an access network for accommodating a traffic of the UE to an E-UTRAN from a WLAN, on the basis of WLAN control information; and an eNB configured to manage a cell in which the UE exists. The UE transmits, to the eNB, a WLAN Interworking Indication indicating whether or not it is possible to perform the WLAN-related process, on the basis of at least one parameter related to the UE. The eNB having received the WLAN Interworking Indication determines whether or not to provide the UE with the WLAN control information, on the basis of the WLAN Interworking Indication. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350992 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS AND METHODS - Methods and apparatuses for communicating in a wireless network include a signal processor for combining a plurality of signals transmitted by respective eNBs by processing the signals as multipath instances of a single signal. | 12-03-2015 |
20150351072 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR HAND-IN DISAMBIGUATION USING USER EQUIPMENT WIFI LOCATION IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - An example method is provided in one example embodiment and includes receiving a handover request from a first radio network to handover a user equipment (UE) to a second radio network, wherein the handover request includes an international mobile subscriber identity (IMSI) for a user associated with the UE and a pseudo cell identifier (ID); determining a target channel configuration for the UE using the pseudo cell ID; querying a third radio network using the user IMSI to determine a location of the UE, wherein at least one access point in the third radio network is in communication with the UE; and selecting a particular target access point in the second radio network for handover of the UE based, at least in part, on the location of the UE, the target channel configuration for the UE and a location of the particular target access point. | 12-03-2015 |
20150358860 | METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM FOR HANDOVER OF USER EQUIPMENT GROUP - A method includes: determining, according to a measurement report of agent UE and a measurement report of UE in a UE group that are sent by the agent UE, whether the agent UE and the UE in the UE group need to be handed over; when the agent UE and at least one piece of UE in the UE group need to be handed over, sending a handover request message to a T-eNB; receiving a handover configuration message sent by the T-eNB and sending the handover configuration message to the agent UE; and receiving a context release message sent by the T-eNB, and releasing context resources of the agent UE and the to-be-handed-over UE. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358862 | METHOD AND SYSTEM TO REDUCE DELAY IN CIRCUIT SWITCH FALLBACK (CSFB) PROCEDURES WHILE OPERATING WITH MULTI/DUAL SIMS - A method of reducing delay in Circuit Switched FallBack (CSFB) in a Radio Access Technology (RAT) communications network. The method includes initiating, by a terminal, a combined attach procedure by sending an attach request message to the RAT communications network, receiving, by the terminal, an attach accept message along with Location Area Identification (LAI) information from the network in response to the attach request message, checking, by the terminal, network identifier information in a RAT information table based on the received LAI, and selecting a mobile network based on the network identifier information to trigger establishment of a circuit-switched call. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358863 | TERMINAL DEVICE, BASE STATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATIONS METHOD - A terminal device includes a wireless communication unit performing wireless communication; a connection control unit connecting to a first base station device to wirelessly communicate with the first base station device via the wireless communication unit, the first base station serving as a primary, the connection control unit connecting to a second base station device to wirelessly communicate with the second base station device via the wireless communication unit, the second base station device serving as a secondary; a detection unit determining whether quality of wireless communication between the terminal device and the first base station device is in a low state based on a predetermined condition; and a signal transmission control unit wirelessly transmitting via the wireless communication unit, a predetermined signal toward at least either the first or second base station device when the quality is determined to be in the low state by the detection unit. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358864 | METHOD OF HANDOVER IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A terminal starts a first timer for detecting an RLF (Radio Link Failure) when signal strength of a serving base station is lower than a reference value. The terminal triggers a handover without a TTT (Time to Trigger) for handover when signal strength of a target base station is greater than the signal strength of the serving base station by a first offset or more while the first timer is running. The terminal transmits a measurement report message regarding the signal strength of the target base station to the serving base station when a handover is triggered. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358866 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING DUAL CONNECTIVITY IN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK - The present invention relates to a method for performing dual connectivity operation in a heterogeneous network, which includes: transmitting a first message to a second eNB for the dual connectivity operation; and receiving a response for the first message from the second eNB, wherein the response includes E-RAB (E-UTRAN Radio Access Bearer) related information. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358869 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING HANDOVER OF USER EQUIPMENTS ATTACHED TO MOBILE RELAY NODES IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for determining handover of user equipments (UEs) attached to a mobile relay node (RN), which is moving from a source DeNB to the target DeNB, in a wireless communication system is provided. A target donor eNodeB (DeNB) receives a handover request message, and receives an indication including UE context of the UEs attach to the mobile relay node. The target DeNB determines whether to accept or reject the handover of each UE. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358870 | DATA PROCESSING METHOD AND DEVICE - A data processing method is provided for forwarding data in the case of handover between heterogeneous networks. The data processing method includes: when a user equipment (UE) is handed over from an originating network to a target network, receiving, by the originating network, a data forwarding address obtained by the target network; creating a data forwarding tunnel between an originating network gateway and a target network gateway according to the data forwarding address; and forwarding data to the target network through the data forwarding tunnel. A data processing device is also provided. The lossless data processing solution can overcome the problem of data loss in the case of handover between heterogeneous networks in the existing technology, reduces the time of user service interruption and enhances the user experience. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358873 | Enterprise Level Management in a Multi-Femtocell Network - Aspects of a method and system for enterprise level management in a multi-femtocell network are provided. In this regard, one or more endpoint devices may receive traffic management information from a hybrid network controller for enabling handoff of calls and/or communication sessions among femtocells and/or access points. The received traffic management information may comprise set-up instructions, handoff instructions, transmit power, neighbor list information, signal quality thresholds, frequency assignments, transmission time, code assignments and/or antenna pattern assignments. The endpoint device may control handoffs between a communication device external to the communication system and the femtocells, access points and/or end-point devices. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358874 | METHOD FOR CHANGING GATEWAY IN MACHINE-TO-MACHINE (M2M) SYSTEM AND DEVICE THEREFOR - The present invention relates to a gateway changing method performed by a machine-to-machine (M2M) gateway which communicates with at least one M2M device having a constrained capability in an M2M system that includes a first layer and a second layer, and the a device therefor, the method comprising the steps of: receiving a trigger signal for indicating a gateway change through a first layer of the M2M gateway; and transmitting, to an M2M server, a first notification for indicating the gateway change through the first layer of the M2M gateway, wherein the M2M device having the constrained capability is a device that does not have the first layer, data generated in the second layer of the M2M device having the constrained capability is managed or stored in a data structure of a tree structure by the first layer of the M2M gateway, and the data structure that includes the data is retrieved by the M2M server after the notification has been transmitted to the M2M server. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358876 | HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK SWITCHING METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM - Disclosed are a heterogeneous network switching method, device and system, relating to the technique of communication, When a network-side device such as a base station determines that a UE needs to be switched into a non-3GPP network, switch signalling carrying switch indication information is sent to the UE; the switch indication information is used for instructing the UE to switch some of or all of the bearers from a 3GPP network to a non-3GPP network, so that the UE can switch some of all of the bearers from a 3GPP network to a non-3GPP network according to the switch indication information, thus realizing heterogeneous network switching initiated by a network side. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358877 | INTERWORKING AMONG DISSIMILAR RADIO NETWORKS - Embodiments of the invention provide a method, apparatus and computer readable memory for controlling a user equipment (UE), comprising receiving at the UE on a first radio access technology (RAT) from a first access node radio resource control information for a second RAT. Then the UE performs at least one of a) uses the received radio resource control information to configure or reconfigure a module of the UE for communicating on the second RAT, and b) uses the module of the UE to report the received radio resource control information on the second RAT to a second access node. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358880 | METHOD OF CONTROLLING A COMMUNICATION CONTROL ENTITY - A method of controlling a communication control entity in a mobile communication network and a corresponding communication control entity are described. The communication control entity is a part of a pool of communication control entities. In accordance of the invention, when acting as a primary communication control entity and receiving a request for adding a new secondary communication control entity to the overall control procedure, the communication control entity of the invention is arranged to determine whether the requested new secondary communication control entity is a part of the pool or not. If it is a part of the pool, then the primary communication control entity established a direct connection to the access part. The requested communication control entity is not added to the control procedure as a relay. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358882 | Methods and Apparatuses for Managing Radio Access Node Cluster - The present disclosure generally relates to managing a radio access node cluster ( | 12-10-2015 |
20150358886 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD THEREIN - A wireless communication system, and method, including: first, second, and third base stations, and user equipment, the first base station and the second base station performing wireless data connections with the user equipment by adopting different carriers, and a trigger node triggers a transfer procedure in the case of judging a preset transfer condition of transferring a service to the third base station is satisfied. The service is provided by the second base station to the user equipment, so that the user equipment releases the wireless data connection with the second base station and establishes the wireless data connection with the third base station, and thus the first base station and the third base station perform wireless data connections with the user equipment by adopting different carriers, wherein at least part of the service provided by the second base station initially is transferred to the third base station. | 12-10-2015 |
20150358950 | COMMUNICATION METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM - The present invention discloses a communication method, including: sending, by a user equipment, a request message to a micro network node, so that the micro network node sends an indication message to a macro network node; receiving an uplink resource (UG) sent according to the indication message by the macro network node; and sending uplink signaling or uplink data to the macro network node according to the uplink resource (UG). Embodiments of the present invention further provide a corresponding device and system. In technical solutions of the present invention, the micro network node participates in accessing the user equipment to a network, so that a UE can rapidly access the network, which reduces an access delay of the UE. | 12-10-2015 |
20150359009 | PRE-ALLOCATED RANDOM ACCESS IDENTIFIERS - Systems and methods of pre-allocating identifiers to wireless devices for use in requesting resources over a random access channel are described. A wireless communication system includes a random access channel over which wireless devices can anonymously send requests for resources. The base stations receiving and processing the anonymous requests reduces the probability of random access channel collisions and conserves the resources needed to support the anonymous requests by pre-allocating one or more identifiers to select wireless devices. The wireless devices having the pre-allocated codes can transmit a particular code over the random access channel as a request for resources that uniquely identifies the requester. | 12-10-2015 |
20150365850 | Method and apparatus for managing network devices - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, there is provided an apparatus, comprising at least one processing core configured to determine that a service access session has commenced, the at least one processing core configured to cause a network procedure to be triggered to cause attachment of the apparatus to change from a first radio access technology to a second radio access technology, and a transmitter configured to cause, during the service access session, a first settings message and a second settings message to be transmitted to a network in accordance with the second radio access technology, wherein the first settings message comprises an indication that the service access session is in progress. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365852 | SWITCH SUPPORTING METHOD - The present application discloses a switch supporting method comprising: an eNB sends a path switching request message to an MME to notify the MME of information on a bearer remaining unchanged; the MME reserves the bearer remaining unchanged and does not trigger a deactivation process for the bearer remaining unchanged; the MME sends a modify bearer request message to an SGW. With the present application, data loss can be avoided and service continuity is ensured when a UE moves in a small cell scenario. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365856 | MANAGING RADIO RESOURCE CONTROL (RRC) STATE TRANSITIONS AT A USER EQUIPMENT - The present disclosure presents a method and an apparatus for managing radio resource control (RRC) state transitions at a user equipment (UE). For example, the method may include transmitting a reconfiguration complete message to a network entity, starting a reselection delay timer simultaneously with the transmitting of the reconfiguration complete message, identifying initiation of a cell reselection procedure at the UE, delaying the cell reselection procedure at the UE until the UE receives a layer 2 acknowledgement (L2 ACK) message from the network entity, stopping the reselection delay timer in response to receiving the L2 ACK message, and transitioning the UE to a cell_paging channel (cell_PCH) state from a cell_forward access channel (cell_FACH) state after the stopping of the reselection delay timer. As such, managing RRC state transitions at a UE may be achieved. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365857 | MEASUREMENTS IN MULTIPLE CONNECTION SYSTEMS - Systems and techniques for link condition reporting in multiple connection systems. A base station, such as a macro eNodeB (eNB) configures measurement objects and reporting objects for macro and local area links for a user device such as a user equipment (UE). The objects relating to the secondary links are configured for use when the user device is operating in a dual connection mode. Upon detection of a triggering event when the user device is in dual connection mode, the user device reports macro and secondary link information. In some embodiments of the invention, triggering may be based on events related to a specified frequency group, or may be direct measurements related to a specified frequency group. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365858 | Network-Side Device and Macro Base Station-to-Micro Base Station Switching Method - A network-side device and a macro base station to micro base station switching method relate to a universal mobile telecommunications system. The method includes: multiplexing part of scrambling codes in reserved scrambling codes to micro base station cells, and configuring them to a user equipment; a network side creating a SNF−SFN relation list between various base station cells according to existing determined neighbor cell relations and cell synchronization information in a measurement report reported by the user equipment; when the user equipment reports a switching measurement report of a target cell, the network side determining a target cell in actual switching and performing the switching according to the scrambling code information in the switching measurement report, TM and OFF information in the cell synchronization information and the SFN−SFN relation list. The embodiment of the present invention further discloses a network-side device. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365859 | INHIBITING THE TRANSMISSION OF MEASUREMENT REPORTS FROM A UE WHEN A UE IS IN AN INACTIVE MODE AND APPLIES DRX - Methods and apparatus, including computer program products, are provided for determining whether a user equipment is in an inactive connected mode, i.e. applies discontinuous reception DRX mode, during a period of inactive data reception; and disabling a timer for triggering a measurement report at the user equipment, when the user equipment applies DRX mode, wherein the disabled timer inhibits the measurement report related to a target cell from being sent by the user equipment. Related apparatus, systems, methods, and articles are also described. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365870 | MULTIPLE MODEM COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR A MOBILE PLATFORM - A system, method, and device to enable communication between a first and second satellite station and a controller of a mobile platform. The controller includes a processor, a first modem facilitating communication with the first satellite station via a first frequency over a first communication link, and a map of the one or more networks of satellite stations including the second satellite station. The controller utilizes the map of the one or more networks of satellite stations to determine the second satellite station for communicating with the controller. A second modem is coupled to the controller and facilitates communication with the second satellite station via a second frequency over a second communication link, wherein the controller is configured to calculate a time to handoff communication with the mobile communicator from the first communication link to the second communication link. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365871 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING WIRELESS FREQUENCY USAGE - Systems and methods for managing spectrum handoff with multimedia transmissions over cognitive radio networks are disclosed. The methods may include, for example, determining when a primary user is inactive on the one or more frequencies. The methods may also include assigning a secondary user to the one or more frequencies while the primary user is inactive and detecting return by the primary user to the one or more frequencies. The secondary user may, in one embodiment, be interrupted and one or more second frequencies that are inactive may be identified. Further, the secondary user may transition to the one or more second frequencies to resume transmission or reception. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365875 | Selecting a Radio Access Network Cell - A method and apparatus for selecting a radio access network cell for connecting to a communications network. A client device that is connected to a Wi-Fi access network cell sends a request message to a node in the Wi-Fi access network cell. It receives a response from the node that includes information identifying at least one overlapping radio access network cell and a property of the overlapping radio access network cell. On the basis of a comparison between the property of the radio access network cell and a corresponding property of the Wi-Fi access network cell, the node determines whether to remain connected to the Wi-Fi access network cell or to move to the radio access network cell. This has the advantage that a client device that is already associated with a Wi-Fi AP can determine if another access network cell could provide it with a better service, for example if the conditions of the AP change dynamically. | 12-17-2015 |
20150372925 | Method and system for implementing X2 proxy - Disclosed are a method and system for implementing an X2 proxy. The method includes that a function of a next-hop node serving as an X2 proxy of a previous-hop node ( | 12-24-2015 |
20150373552 | IDLE MODE CELL SELECTION FOR LICENSED SHARED ACCESS - A 3GPP LTE protocol enhancement realizes the full benefit of proposed dynamic frequency sharing systems by enhancing current idle mode cell selection mechanisms to support Licensed Shared Access (LSA) cell selection of idle User Equipment (UE) when LSA frequency bands are reclaimed by incumbents. A paging message field, LSA Unavailable is transmitted by Evolved Node Bs for those UEs operating in an idle state. Paging message transmission is repeated for robustness. UEs are also enabled to immediately identify LSA unavailability when a paging message notification of LSA unavailability to idle UEs cannot be transmitted and/or received. A UE comprises a processor and transceiver configured to receive, on a Licensed Shared Access (LSA) frequency band, a paging message notifying the UE of (LSA) frequency band reclamation. The UE performs immediate cell reselection to vacate the reclaimed LSA frequency band and move to the UE operator's licensed primary Long Term Evolution frequency band. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373590 | A Node and Method For a Combined Single Radio Voice Call Continuity and a Packet Switched Handover - Example embodiments presented herein are directed towards a base station, user equipment and Mobility Management Entity, and corresponding methods, for providing handling during a combined Single Radio Voice Call Continuity and Packet Switched Handover procedure. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373591 | Systems, Methods, Apparatuses, and Computer Program Products for Facilitating Voice Call Continuity in Intersystem Handover - Systems, methods, apparatuses, and computer program products are provided for facilitating voice call continuity in intersystem handover. A method may include determining that a user equipment device being handed over from a packet switched network to a circuit switched network is a party to a voice call in an alerting state. The method may further include providing session state information indicating that the user equipment device is a party to a voice call in an alerting state to a network entity on the circuit switched network in response to the determination. Corresponding systems, computer program products and apparatuses are also provided. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373598 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, TERMINAL DEVICE, BASE STATION DEVICE, RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND INTEGRATED CIRCUIT - A measurement object of which a terminal device takes a measurement is selected based on information of whether or not the measurement object included in a measurement configuration message notified by a base station device includes a parameter for a gap configuration or for a cell identification time configuration for small-cell measurement, and receiving power of a cell in which the terminal device itself is present. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373599 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING MOBILITY FOR CELL HAVING SMALL CELL SERVICE AREA IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method and an apparatus for controlling mobility for a cell having a small cell service area in a mobile communication system. A method for controlling mobility of a terminal in a mobile communication system, according to one embodiment of the present invention, can comprise the steps of: performing, by the terminal, a measurement operation; transmitting a measurement result to a base station; determining whether or not a target cell for handover is a cell for which handover is allowed; and skipping the handover if the target cell for handover is the cell for which handover is not allowed. According to one embodiment of the present invention, when the small cells are arranged sparsely or in the form of a cluster within a service area of a macro cell, the possibility of a handover failure can be reduced, and if a radio link failure occurs when handover is omitted, re-connection can be performed quickly by the terminal. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373600 | PAGING RESPONSE VIA AN OFFLOAD CELL - Methods and apparatus, including computer program products, are provided for providing a preference to a user equipment to indicate how the user equipment should respond to a paging message and the like. The method may include receiving, at a user equipment, an indication representative of whether the user equipment should respond to a base station or respond to an access point; and accessing, based on the received indication, at least one of the base station or the access point to enable offloading to the access point. Related apparatus, systems, methods, and articles are also described. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373603 | METHOD FOR STEERING TRAFFIC IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING SAME - Provided is a method for enabling a terminal to handle traffic in a wireless communications system. The method includes the steps of: receiving traffic steering information from a first access network, the traffic steering information containing a first traffic steering rule prescribed by the first access network; evaluating the traffic steering based on at least one of the first traffic steering rule and a second traffic steering rule; and performing the traffic steering between the first access network and a second access network based on the result of the evaluation of the traffic steering. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373607 | APPARATUS, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF TUNNELING DATA RADIO BEARERS VIA A WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK LINK - Some demonstrative embodiments include devices, systems of tunneling data radio bearers via a wireless local area network link. For example, an Evolved Node B (eNB) may communicate with a User Equipment (UE) traffic of a plurality of Data Radio Bearers (DRBs) via a cellular link; establish an offloading tunnel between the UE and the eNB to tunnel the DRBs via a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) link, the offloading tunnel including one or more User Datagram Protocol (UDP) tunneling connections configured to differentiate between the plurality of DRBs; and coordinate with the UE a handover of at least one DRB of the plurality of DRBs to the offloading tunnel. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373613 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING USER EQUIPMENT MOVEMENT DRIVEN CELL SYSTEM LOAD BALANCING - A system and method for managing offer and user equipment movement driven cell system load balancing that overcomes the disadvantages of the prior art. Network elements determine whether a user or user equipment in a first location is within a threshold distance of a second location of better coverage, which is separated from the first location by an intervening region of worse coverage. Upon such a determination, the network can provide a higher level of service as the user moves incrementally between the first and second locations. | 12-24-2015 |
20150382252 | FACILITATING GROUP HANDOVER - There is provided a method, including: receiving, by a target base station, information that a handover of a plurality of user equipment currently connected to a source cell is needed to a target cell; causing a device-to-device, D2D, cluster generation, wherein each generated D2D cluster is controlled by a predetermined user equipment connected to the target cell and acting as a D2D cluster head; determining D2D cluster-specific radio resource commitment information for each generated D2D cluster; indicating corresponding D2D cluster-specific radio resource commitment information to each D2D cluster head; and receiving a handover request from at least one D2D cluster head, wherein the handover request is for handing at least one member of the corresponding D2D cluster over to the target cell. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382254 | METHODS, RADIO BASE STATION AND UE FOR HANDLING CELL RESELECTION - There is provided a method in a radio base station for handling cell reselection for a user equipment, UE, in a wireless communications network. The UE is associated with a first cell of the radio base station, which first cell has a first frequency. The wireless communications network comprises a second cell having a second frequency, which second cell has at least partly overlapping coverage with the first cell, and a third cell having the second frequency, which third cell has at least partly overlapping coverage with the first cell. The radio base station transmits cell reselection priority values to the UE, wherein the cell reselection priority values comprise a first priority value for the second cell, and a second priority value for the third cell. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382256 | IN-DEVICE COEXISTENCE INTERFERENCE REPORT CONTROL METHOD AND APPARATUS OF NETWORK IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An in-device coexistence interference report control method of a network for terminal to inform the network of interference among heterogeneous radio communication modules coexisting in the terminal is provided. The method includes determining, at a terminal when a terminal capability enquiry message is received from a base station, whether the base station supports an In-Device Coexistence (IDC) interference report, transmitting, when the IDC interference report is supported, a terminal capacity information message to the base station, receiving a Radio Resource Control (RRC) connection reconfiguration message including information on whether terminal's IDC interference indicator transmission is permitted from the base station; and transmitting an RRC connection reconfiguration complete message to the base station in response to the RRC connection reconfiguration message. The in-device coexistence interference indication control method is advantageous in preventing the UE from transmitting useless in-device coexistence interference indication messages, resulting in reduction of unnecessary signaling. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382257 | IN-DEVICE COEXISTENCE INTERFERENCE REPORT CONTROL METHOD AND APPARATUS OF NETWORK IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An in-device coexistence interference report control method of a network for terminal to inform the network of interference among heterogeneous radio communication modules coexisting in the terminal is provided. The method includes determining, at a terminal when a terminal capability enquiry message is received from a base station, whether the base station supports an In-Device Coexistence (IDC) interference report, transmitting, when the IDC interference report is supported, a terminal capacity information message to the base station, receiving a Radio Resource Control (RRC) connection reconfiguration message including information on whether terminal's IDC interference indicator transmission is permitted from the base station; and transmitting an RRC connection reconfiguration complete message to the base station in response to the RRC connection reconfiguration message. The in-device coexistence interference indication control method is advantageous in preventing the UE from transmitting useless in-device coexistence interference indication messages, resulting in reduction of unnecessary signaling. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382262 | DATA TRANSMITTING METHOD USING WLAN - A method of receiving data of a user equipment (UE) according to an aspect of the present invention includes: sensing a current location for each specific period, and determining whether the sensed location is included in a specific upper usage-frequency location range; transmitting, through a communication network, information regarding whether the sensed location is included in the upper usage-frequency location range or whether the UE is being charged; upon reception of a wireless local area network (WLAN) access instruction from the communication network, accessing an accessible WLAN; transmitting an Internet protocol (IP) address for the WLAN through the communication network; receiving data in parallel from the communication network and the WLAN; and adjusting data received from the communication network and data received through the WLAN on the basis of information included in an IP header and transmission control protocol (TCP) header of the data. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382270 | Determination of Whether a Handover was necessary Based on Quality of Service - Methods, apparatuses and computer program products are provided, wherein an indication is provided to a second network entity from a first network entity to monitor a quality of service provided to a user equipment handed over from the first network entity to the second network entity. The second network entity monitors the quality of service provided to the user equipment and generates a corresponding indication. The indication of the quality of service provided to the user equipment by the second network entity is then provided by the second network entity to the first network entity. Based on the received indication of the quality of service, a determination as to whether a handover was necessary is made by the first network entity. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382280 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR AUTOMATIC SEAMLESS MOBILITY - A telecommunication system and method for automatically and seamlessly switching voice calls on a wireless mobile device between different wireless network services during the same conversation without user interaction and without being noticeable to the parties on the call. For example, a voice call at a mobile device using the services of a wireless wide area network (e.g., GSM/GPRS cellular network) may be switched over to a wireless local area network (e.g., 802.11 wireless network), and vice versa, while the call is in progress and without any input from the parties on the call. The system and method also provide a mechanism for maintaining a voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) call while the mobile device moves between wireless access points (AP) and has automatic reconnection in case there is a dropped call. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382396 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMPROVING CIRCUIT SWITCHED SERVICE AVAILABILITY TO USER EQUIPMENT - A method and an apparatus are provided for improving availability of a circuit switched (CS) service to a user equipment (UE). The UE sends at least one location area update (LAU) message, to a core network (CN), to initiate an LAU procedure. A release of a CS signaling connection between the UE and the CN is detected due to a failure in the LAU procedure. An ongoing PS signaling connection between the UE and the CN is identified, when the CS signaling connection between the UE and the CN is released. The ongoing PS signaling connection is released. A public land mobile network (PLMN) is selected for obtaining CS services from the core network, when the ongoing PS signaling connection is released. | 12-31-2015 |
20160007235 | Support of Legacy Network Elements in Small Cell System - The present invention addresses apparatuses, methods and computer program product for enabling support of legacy user equipment and legacy network elements in small cell system for LTE and beyond systems. Each small cell uses a unique pair of Physical Cell Identifier and E-UTRAN Cell Global Identifier {PCI, ECGI} in the small cell system. In a handover preparation phase, when an enhanced eNB initiates the handover request procedure, the source eNB includes the pair of {PCI, ECGI} in the handover request message. Upon the reception of the {PCI, ECGI} from the handover request message, the associated eNB determines the target small cell based on the received pair of {PCI, ECGI}. | 01-07-2016 |
20160007236 | Minimisation of Handover Gap Time in the Context of S2A IP Session Mobililty - The application relates to session mobility between 3GPP, such as UMTS and LTE, networks and non-3GPP, such as WLAN, access networks and in particular network-based mobility where the PDN gateway PDN GW acts as the user-plane anchor between the two. This topic is discussed in 3GPP, ongoing work item Study on S2a Mobility based On GTP & WLAN access to EPC, SaMOG, TR 23.852; and TS 23.402. Within the SaMOG Rel-12 study, a number of solutions for handover with IP address preservation have been proposed, see 3GPP TR 23.852 section 8.2. However, the current standards do not prevent that that in case of handover, the UE interface for the source path might be released before the configuration for the target path interface has been configured and the UE might not have any interface at all. Hence, the application proposes that release of the source path resources is delayed until the relevant network node has received an indication that the UE has configured its communication interface for the target path. This indication might be in the form of a timer expiry (S | 01-07-2016 |
20160007239 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR IMPROVING CIRCUIT SWITCHED FALL BACK (CSFB) PERFORMANCE - A method and a system to improve circuit switched fall back (CSFB) performance specified in the 3 | 01-07-2016 |
20160007240 | Procedures for 3GPP Circuit Switched Fallback - Mobile devices, base stations, and/or relay stations may implement CSFB (circuit switched fallback) operations by using RRC (radio resource control) connection release and/or handover procedures. If the CSFB RAT (radio access technology) target is not well configured, the UE may be informed and provisioned by the NW during a CSFB procedure with the information to return to LTE. Having this information, the UE may perform an autonomous search of LTE cells after the CSFB call release, speeding up return to LTE. To minimize potential call failures during CSFB, the UE may autonomously perform an additional cell search, in particular a search for cells on a RAT different from the initial target RAT. This creates an opportunity to prevent call failure of CSFB calls that would otherwise fail. The UE may be provisioned during the CSFB procedure with information to perform the additional cell search, should such a search be necessary. | 01-07-2016 |
20160007242 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTING CELL IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Methods and apparatuses are provided for communicating by a mobility management entity (MME) in a mobile communication system. A method includes receiving, from a target base station, a first message including a first network identification of a target node, in a connected state of a terminal; determining whether the first network identification differs from a second network identification of a source node, in an idle state of the terminal; and transmitting to the source node a second message requesting disconnection, if the first network identification differs from the second network identification of the source node. | 01-07-2016 |
20160007243 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF MOBILITY MANAGEMENT IN SMALL CELL ENVIRONMENT - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system that supports the mobility management in a small cell environment, the wireless communication system includes a user equipment configured to measure a signal strength of multiple small cells around and transmit the measurement result through a serving cell, and a multiple small base stations configured to store user equipment context information in determined preparation cells among the multiple small cells based on the measurement result, in case that the user equipment context information for cell A among the preparation cells is changed, wherein the multiple small base stations update the changed user equipment context information. | 01-07-2016 |
20160007244 | SELECTION OF PACKET DATA PROTOCOL CONTEXT FOR HANDOVER FROM CELLULAR NETWORK TO FEMTO CELL - Packet data protocol (PDP) contexts are managed upon cellular-to-femto handover, wherein femto network has disparate capabilities to support applications with distinct access point names (APNs) and quality of service (QoS) profiles. Based at least on activity factors of applications associated with PDP contexts, a QoS-based ranking of PDP contexts, and subscriber input, cellular network platform selects active PDP contexts to retain and suspend upon handover. A group of active PDP contexts is handed off in accordance with femto coverage capability, with remaining active PDP contexts suspended during handover. When a suspended PDP context, and application associated therewith, is resumed through femto coverage, a PDP context modification is conducted with a new APN and the application is routed to a corresponding femto gateway node and application server. Additionally, femto network platform performs a radio access bearer reconfiguration to meet QoS requirements of the resumed PDP context. | 01-07-2016 |
20160007245 | Methods and Devices for Managing a Cellular Radio Network - In a radio system information is transmitted from a network node to a UE informing the UE about a dedicated pilot signal used in a combined cell when a handover of a User Equipment is performed from a first combined cell to a second combined cell. | 01-07-2016 |
20160007247 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING CHANNEL SWITCH IN NETWORK CONVERGING PLURALITY OF COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS AND APPARATUS FOR SAME - A method for performing a channel switch by user equipment of a first communication system in a network converging a plurality of communication systems, may comprise receiving, a channel switch command message including a switch time and a new channel number, from a base station of the first communication system; transmitting a channel switch response message indicating acceptance of a channel switch when the new channel number is supported by the user equipment, to the base station of the first communication system in a response to the channel switch command message; receiving a channel switch notification message, which notifies of a channel switch, from a base station of the second communication system; and receiving data from the base station of the second communication system via a channel corresponding to the new channel number based on the switch time and the new channel number according to the channel switch notification message. | 01-07-2016 |
20160007248 | WIRELESS CROSS RADIO TECHNOLOGY PLATFORMS DATA CALL RECOVERY - A method, system- or apparatus-adapted to facilitate the recovery and continuation of a data communication active across different wireless technology platforms. The end-users wireless device is adapted and authorised to operate on such different wireless technology platforms managed through a server. Loss of data communication of an adapted wireless device on one wireless-platform is dealt with by allowing reconnection onto a different wireless-platform thereby allowing recovery of the original data communication and a continuation of the same previously originated data call, provided the time between loss of data or loss of coverage and the reconnection to the same or different wireless technology platform by the adapted wireless device is less than the timeout permitted by the adapted wireless device or by the adapted server through which all data communications or data calls are handled through. | 01-07-2016 |
20160007250 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING RECONFIGURATION OF RADIO LINK CONTROL PARAMETERS - A variety of wireless communication methods and apparatus for supporting reconfiguration of radio link control (RLC) parameters are disclosed. A radio resource control (RRC) reconfiguration message is generated that indicates that an RLC unit in a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) or a universal terrestrial radio access network (UTRAN) should be reconfigured from supporting flexible size RLC protocol data units (PDUs) to supporting fixed size RLC PDUs. If an information element (IE) “one sided RLC re-establishment” is present in the RRC reconfiguration message, only a receiving side subassembly in the RLC unit is re-established. Otherwise, both the receiving side subassembly and a transmitting side subassembly in the RLC unit are re-established. Flexible size RLC PDUs may be discarded and a message indicating the discarded flexible size RLC PDUs may be transmitted. The flexible size RLC PDUs may be modified such that they correspond to a set of pre-defined sizes. | 01-07-2016 |
20160007255 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A gateway is described which facilitates a change of communication cell for a mobile device in a communication system, which includes a core network. The gateway receives messages from a base station operating a cell and forwards the messages received from the base station to the core network. The gateway intercepts a message relating to a change of communication cell, from a source cell in which the mobile communication device is located to a target cell, to determine if the core network needs to be notified of the change of cell. When it is determined that the core network needs to be notified, the gateway generates a message for providing information relating to the change of cell to the core network and transmits the message to the core network. | 01-07-2016 |
20160007257 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CHANGING PROXIMITY SERVICE-BASED RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY - The present invention relates to a method and an apparatus for changing a radio access technology (RAT) of a terminal in a wireless communication system. More specifically, the method according to the present invention comprises the steps of: transmitting user traffic session related information when a terminal perceives that a packet switched service will be discontinued while carrying out proximity service (ProSe); and changing, by a first terminal, to a target RAT, in which PS service is not supported. | 01-07-2016 |
20160007260 | CELL RESELECTION METHOD AND USER EQUIPMENT THEREFOR - Provided according to one embodiment of the present specification is a cell reselection method for reducing ping-pong phenomena. The cell reselection method may comprise the steps of: receiving information on ping-pong detection standards; determining the occurrence of ping-pong caused by the repetition of cell reselection between a first cell and a second cell on the basis of the information on ping-pong detection standards; and adjusting the priority of either cell according to the result of the determination. | 01-07-2016 |
20160007382 | PRE-ALLOCATED RANDOM ACCESS IDENTIFIERS - Systems and methods of pre-allocating identifiers to wireless devices for use in requesting resources over a random access channel are described. A wireless communication system includes a random access channel over which wireless devices can anonymously send requests for resources. The base stations receiving and processing the anonymous requests reduces the probability of random access channel collisions and conserves the resources needed to support the anonymous requests by pre-allocating one or more identifiers to select wireless devices. The wireless devices having the pre-allocated codes can transmit a particular code over the random access channel as a request for resources that uniquely identifies the requester. | 01-07-2016 |
20160014102 | Methods and Devices Having a Key Distributor Function for Improving the Speed and Quality of a Handover | 01-14-2016 |
20160014592 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING MOBILITY PARAMETERS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 01-14-2016 |
20160014642 | Circuit-Switched Fallback With Improved Reliability in Pool Overlap Areas | 01-14-2016 |
20160014643 | PROCESSING CIRCUIT SWITCHED SERVICES IN AN EVOLVED PACKET NETWORK | 01-14-2016 |
20160014644 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING VOICE CALL IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND SYSTEM THEREOF | 01-14-2016 |
20160014645 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING VOICE CALL IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND SYSTEM THEREOF | 01-14-2016 |
20160014646 | FAST RADIO LINK RECOVERY FOR LTE NETWORKS | 01-14-2016 |
20160014647 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING A CELL CHANGE PROCEDURE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND A DEVICE THEREFOR | 01-14-2016 |
20160014649 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR COMPUTING AND SENDING RESOURCE REQUESTS AND AVOIDING DEADLOCK SITUATIONS IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 01-14-2016 |
20160014650 | HANDOVER METHODS AND APPARATUS | 01-14-2016 |
20160014652 | ACTIVATION TIME FOR TARGET BASED HIGH SPEED SERVING CELL CHANGE | 01-14-2016 |
20160014658 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR AVOIDING CALL DROPS DURING SERVING RADIO NETWORK SUBSYSTEM (SRNS) RELOCATION PROCEDURE | 01-14-2016 |
20160021557 | Cell Utilization Estimation by a Wireless Device - Estimating loading and potential available throughput a serving cell of a wireless user equipment (UE) device. Physical layer metrics of a channel on which the UE communicates with the serving cell may be measured. Cell utilization of the serving cell may be calculated based at least in part on the measured physical layer metrics. A maximum available throughput of the serving cell may be calculated based on the cell utilization. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021579 | Telecommunication Network Pre-Establishment Service Interruption Response - Telecommunication network components configured to manage a handover of a communication session of user equipment from a packet-switched access network to a circuit-switched access network are described herein. The components may receive a handover request from user equipment, allocate circuit-switched access network resources, and request a session transfer. When the session transfer is invalid, e.g., during a pre-establishment phase of a communication session, the components may reject the transfer within a selected time and provide an invalid-handover message. Components may, in response to an invalid handover request, transmit a rejection of the session transfer and a fallback-trigger message. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021581 | PACKET DATA CONVERGENCE PROTOCOL (PDCP) PLACEMENT - Embodiments contemplate Small Cell Enhancements such as PDCP Placement and impact on control and data plane procedures. Embodiments contemplate small-cell enhancements such as they relate to dual-connectivity scenarios. Different architecture models and their impact on procedural aspects are contemplated. Different RAN, protocol stack and radio bearer (RB) architectures along with their implications are described. These architectures may be applicable to one or more of control plane that may terminate at the macro. Also, a small-cell that may be capable of supporting RLC modes and/or that may be capable of supporting MAC functionality is contemplated. A small-cell may be capable of supporting bidirectional physical channels. Also, there could be an aggregation point (either at the macro eNB or at a different physical or logical RAN node) for S1-U interface termination. The Small Cell eNB (SCeNB) could be in control of the Macro eNB. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021584 | NEIGHBOR CELL SYSTEM INFORMATION PROVISIONING - Embodiments of the present disclosure describe systems, devices and methods for system information acquisition in radio resource connection (RRC) connection reestablishment when Radio Link Failure (RLF) happens. Various embodiments may include a serving cell that provides system information of a neighbor cell to a user equipment (UE). When the UE detects an RLF event, the UE may determine whether the previously received system information is valid and proceed with RRC connection reestablishment based on the determination. Other embodiments may be described or claimed. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021585 | Avoiding Secondary Cell Configuration for High Speed User Equipment - Avoiding secondary cell configuration for high speed user equipment The present invention provides methods, apparatuses and computer program product relating to avoiding Scell configuration for high speed user equipment. The present invention includes determining, at a user equipment located in a coverage area of a first base station and a second base station, a mobility state of the user equipment, if it is determined that the user equipment is in a high mobility state, enabling configuring only a primary serving cell at the first base station. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021587 | CALL INITIATION MESSAGE DELAY DURING HANDOFF PROCESS - A network gateway receives a voice over long term evolution (VoLTE) call establishment request from an internet protocol (IP) multimedia services (IMS) core network for a mobile device. The network gateway queries a serving gateway to determine whether the mobile device is transitioning from a first evolved node B (eNB) to a second eNB. If the mobile device is transitioning, based on the existence of a user plane modify request, the network gateway delays forwarding the received request to a mobility management entity until the serving gateway informs the network gateway that the serving gateway received a first data packet from the mobile device via the second eNB as an indication the transition is complete. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021588 | METHOD FOR TRAFFIC STEERING AND NETWORK ELEMENT - The present invention relates a method for traffic steering in a communication network comprising at least two technology layers. The method comprising utilizing one or more policies for traffic steering, selecting one or more users in a first technology layer according to the selected policies and preparing a movement of one or more selected users to a second technology layer. Moreover, the present invention relates to an apparatus and computer program product. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021590 | RADIO DEVICE AND A METHOD FOR THE TRANSMISSION OF INFORMATION - A radio device for the transmission of information has a radio-device control unit, at least one antenna, an antenna switchover unit and at least one radio unit. The radio device provides a static radio unit and at least one dynamic radio unit, wherein at least two radio units are radio-ready, so that, by means of a switchover signal of the radio-device control unit, a switchover between the radio-ready radio units can be implemented in a real-time manner. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021592 | BEARER CONFIGURATION SIGNALING - The disclosure relates to a method performed in a first network node for enabling dual connectivity for a communication device with the first network node and a second network node, wherein the communication device has at least one radio bearer set up with the first network node. The method comprises providing, to the second network node, a radio resource configuration request for the communication device and limits within which the second network node is to configure radio resources for the communication device, and receiving, from the second network node, a suggested radio resource configuration for the communication device. The disclosure also relates to network nodes, method in second network node and second network node, computer programs and computer program products. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021673 | IMS BASED WWAN-WLAN MOBILITY - Methods, systems, and devices for IMS based WWAN-WLAN mobility are described. A user equipment (UE) may generate channel quality metrics and media performance metrics for a source radio access technology (RAT). The UE may then select a state for the source RAT metrics. The UE may also generate channel quality metrics for a target RAT and select a state for the target RAT. The UE may make a handover decision based on the states of the RATs and on priority levels for the RATs. | 01-21-2016 |
20160029251 | METHOD OF COORDINATING A PATH SWITCH AND NETWORK ELEMENTS ASSOCIATED THEREWITH - In one embodiment, the method includes instructing, by a controller, a switch to change from sending data via a first tunnel to sending data via a second tunnel. The first tunnel is between the switch and a first network element, and the second tunnel is between the switch and a second network element. The method further includes receiving, by the controller, acknowledgement from the switch, and notifying, by the controller, the second network element that packets will no longer be sent via the first tunnel in response to the received acknowledgement. | 01-28-2016 |
20160029252 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - A procedure for starting “Inter-site CA” is performed while minimizing modification of an existing network configuration. A mobile communication method of the invention includes the steps of: causing a radio base station eNB #1 to send a radio base station eNB #11 “CA preparation;” causing the radio base station eNB #11 to send the radio base station eNB #1 “confirmation;” causing the radio base station eNB #1 to send a mobile station UE “RRC connection reconfiguration;” causing the mobile station UE to send the radio base station eNB #11 “RRC connection reconfiguration complete;” and causing the radio base station eNB #11 to send the radio base station eNB #1 “CA addition complete.” | 01-28-2016 |
20160029255 | SWITCH SUPPORTING METHOD - The present application discloses a switch supporting method comprising: an eNB sends a path switching request message to an MME to notify the MME of information on a bearer remaining unchanged; the MME reserves the bearer remaining unchanged and does not trigger a deactivation process for the bearer remaining unchanged; the MME sends a modify bearer request message to an SGW. With the present application, data loss can be avoided and service continuity is ensured when a UE moves in a small cell scenario. | 01-28-2016 |
20160029263 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTING NETWORK AND DISTRIBUTING TRAFFIC IN HETEROGENEOUS COMMUNICATION ENVIRONMENT - According to an embodiment, a method for selecting an access network at user equipment in a mobile communication system includes step of receiving, from a base station, first setting information, and step of selecting the access network based on second setting information if the second setting information is received from the base station, or selecting the access network based on the first setting information if no second setting information is received. Using the proposed method, the user equipment can reduce user's inconvenience and save battery by blocking unnecessary offloading and wireless LAN scanning, and also can improve the quality of use and immediately respond to a cell change by preventing a ping-pong phenomenon. | 01-28-2016 |
20160029264 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTING NETWORK AND DISTRIBUTING TRAFFIC IN HETEROGENEOUS COMMUNICATION ENVIRONMENT - According to an embodiment, a method for selecting an access network at user equipment in a mobile communication system includes step of receiving, from a base station, first setting information, and step of selecting the access network based on second setting information if the second setting information is received from the base station, or selecting the access network based on the first setting information if no second setting information is received. Using the proposed method, the user equipment can reduce user's inconvenience and save battery by blocking unnecessary offloading and wireless LAN scanning, and also can improve the quality of use and immediately respond to a cell change by preventing a ping-pong phenomenon. | 01-28-2016 |
20160029270 | METHODS TO CONTROL MULTIPLE RADIO ACCESS BEARERS IN A WIRELESS DEVICE - A method to control multiple radio access bearers is performed at a mobile wireless communication device when the mobile wireless communication device is connected to a radio network subsystem in a wireless communication network by first and second bidirectional radio access bearers. The mobile wireless communication device transmits a data packet on an uplink of the first bidirectional radio access bearer to the radio network subsystem. When the data packet is not correctly received by the radio network subsystem, the mobile wireless communication device retransmits the data packet repeatedly. After N retransmissions of the data packet, the mobile wireless communication device releases the first bidirectional radio access bearer while maintaining the second bidirectional radio access bearer. The first bidirectional radio access bearer provides a channel to transport packet switched data, and the second bidirectional radio access bearer provides a channel to transport circuit switched data. | 01-28-2016 |
20160029271 | PCRF ASSISTED APN SELECTION - The embodiments herein relate to a method in a Policy and Charging Rules Function, PCRF, node ( | 01-28-2016 |
20160029277 | INTER-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY INTERFERENCE COORDINATION FOR MULTI-STANDARD RADIO ACCESS NETWORKS - A method and system for coordinated interference suppression in a communication system. The communication system implements at least a first radio access technology via a first base station and a second radio access technology via a second base station. The first and second radio access technologies differ from one another. Information relating to an interference signal received at the first base station via the first radio access technology is received at the second base station from a first device associated with the first base station. At a second device associated with the second base station, an interfering user equipment accessing the second base station via the second radio access technology is identified. The identification is based on the information received from the first device associated with the first base station. Interference caused by the identified interfering user equipment is suppressed by the second base station. | 01-28-2016 |
20160029278 | HANDOVER OF MOBILITY MANAGEMENT ENTITY FOR LOAD BALANCING - There is provided a mechanism for executing a handover for a subscriber between mobility management entities for load balancing reasons. A current mobility management entity sends (S | 01-28-2016 |
20160029280 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF COMMUNICATION MODE SWITCH AND SYSTEM - Disclosed herein are an apparatus and method, the method includes: determining a mode switch manner by an eNB according to a predetermined policy; transmitting a first mode switch command by the eNB to UE in D2D communication if the mode switch manner is no packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) parameter exchange, and resetting all PDCP transmitter parameters and PDCP receiver parameters by the eNB to be 0; and transmitting a mode switch preparation command by the eNB to UE in D2D communication if the mode switch manner is full PDCP parameter exchange, so that the UE reports PDCP transmitter parameters, PDCP receiver parameters and a PDCP status report or reports a first missing PDCP reception SN and a corresponding HFN, thereby completing PDCP parameter setting and mode switch. | 01-28-2016 |
20160029281 | Method for Opening Radio Pipeline Capability and Apparatus Thereof - A method for opening radio pipeline capability and a collaborative controller are disclosed. In an embodiment the method includes receiving, by an access network collaborative controller, a request message from a capability opening gateway, wherein the request message carries a service requirement of a first user equipment UE, and controlling, by the collaborative controller, a first radio pipeline device according to the request message so that a radio pipeline resource allocated to the first UE meets the service requirement. | 01-28-2016 |
20160029286 | RADIO RELAY STATION AND CONTROL METHOD - A relay node ( | 01-28-2016 |
20160029303 | NOTIFYING AVAILABILITY OF INTERNET PROTOCOL MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM SERVICES - Methods, systems, and devices are described for indicating, by a multimode access point, an availability of a service on a first RAT to a mobile device via a second RAT. The multimode access point may determine whether a service is available from a base station on the first RAT, e.g., a VoLTE service from a LTE base station. The multimode access point may send an indication to the mobile device of the available services. The mobile device may configure a voice call session based on the available services and initiate the voice call session accordingly. | 01-28-2016 |
20160037380 | TECHNIQUES FOR SCHEDULING COMMUNICATIONS IN WIRELESS NETWORKS WITH TRAFFIC AGGREGATION - Certain aspects of the described aspects relate to scheduling communications in wireless networks using traffic aggregation. A UE communicates with a first access point using a first RAT over a first connection to access a first wireless network, and with a second access point using a second RAT over a second connection. The UE can receive, from the first access point, one or more parameters for scheduling communications with the second access point. The UE can also schedule communications with the second access point based at least in part on the one or more parameters. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037389 | System for Providing Mobile VoIP - A system for providing handoff for a mobile devices comprising a mobile phone programmed to automatically handover between differing data bearers and to optimally detect those bearers in a roaming environment keeping power consumption to a minimum. Repeating means for these mobile devices to extend the range of coverage and the protocol for that coverage. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037394 | METHOD FOR PROCESSING RADIO LINK FAILURE REPORT AND METHOD FOR ADJUSTING MOBILE PARAMETER - A method and a system for processing a Radio Link Failure (RLF) report, where when a User Equipment (UE) encounters an RLF in a first cell controlled by a first evolved base station and selects a second cell controlled by a second evolved base station to re-establish an Radio Resource Connection (RRC), are provided. The method includes sending, by the second evolved base station, the RLF report to every corresponding evolved base station according to the PCI of the first cell having been received from the UE, where the PCI of the first cell, the PCI of a second cell, the CRNTI of the UE in the first cell, and UE authentication information are carried in the RLF report, and authenticating, by every evolved base station the UE according to the UE authentication information. Another method for processing an RLF report, and two methods for adjusting a mobile parameter, are also provided. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037395 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CHANGE OF PRIMARY CELL DURING CARRIER AGGREGATION - Methods for performing change of primary cell during carrier aggregation operation are described. A mobile station (MS) receives a message to change a primary cell and to perform a random access communication with a new primary cell. Upon receiving a random access response message from the new primary cell, the MS starts transmitting a control channel to the new primary cell. In one embodiment, the MS releases the configuration of an uplink control channel and transmits uplink control information through an uplink shared channel. Upon completion of the primary cell change procedure, the MS starts transmission of an uplink control channel to the new primary cell. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037400 | BASE STATION APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ACQUIRING LOAD INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A base station apparatus in a wireless communication system and a method for acquiring load information are provided that make it possible to acquire load information per operator, without changing the standardized interface specifications. In a wireless communication system including base stations ( | 02-04-2016 |
20160037401 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING INACTIVITY INDICATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for transmitting an inactivity indication in a wireless communication system is provided. A user equipment (UE), which transmits/receives Internet protocol (IP) packets of a specific bearer/channel via a first connection with a first node, establishes a second connection with a second node while maintaining the first connection. When the specific bearer/channel is moved from the first node to the second node, the UE transmits an inactivity indication which indicates inactivation of the specific bearer/channel to the first node. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037402 | Mechanism for a Fast Handover Using Resource Pools and Random Access Procedure - An apparatus at least one processor, and at least one memory for storing instructions to be executed by the processor, wherein the at least one memory and the instructions are configured to, with the at least one processor, cause the apparatus at least: to create at least one pool of communication resources for a fast handover procedure, wherein at least one set of communication resources is allocated to a pool of communication resources, and to cause a transmission of information indicating the content of the at least one pool of communication resources to a neighboring cell for allocating the pool of communication resources to the neighboring cell. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037407 | Radio Network Node, a Base Station and Methods Therein - A method in a radio network node ( | 02-04-2016 |
20160037408 | METHOD FOR PROCESSING RADIO LINK FAILURE REPORT AND METHOD FOR ADJUSTING MOBILE PARAMETER - A method and a system for processing a Radio Link Failure (RLF) report, where when a User Equipment (UE) encounters an RLF in a first cell controlled by a first evolved base station and selects a second cell controlled by a second evolved base station to re-establish an Radio Resource Connection (RRC), are provided. The method includes sending, by the second evolved base station, the RLF report to every corresponding evolved base station according to the PCI of the first cell having been received from the UE, where the PCI of the first cell, the PCI of a second cell, the CRNTI of the UE in the first cell, and UE authentication information are carried in the RLF report, and authenticating, by every evolved base station the UE according to the UE authentication information. Another method for processing an RLF report, and two methods for adjusting a mobile parameter, are also provided. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037409 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING HANDOVER OF USER EQUIPMENT IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Defined is a handover procedure of a User Equipment (UE) for which multiple UpLink (UL) carriers requiring different UL Timing Advances (TAs) are aggregated in a mobile communication system. The handover procedure includes admitting execution of handover to a target cell of the UE at the request of a source cell, setting radio resource information to be used by the UE in the target cell and transmitting the set radio resource information to the source cell, determining whether a random access procedure, which is executed, among the multiple UL carriers, with a reference UL carrier or with an UL carrier to which the same UL TA as that of the reference UL carrier is applied, has been completed, and determining that a handover procedure of the UE has been successfully completed if the random access procedure has been completed, and determining that the handover procedure of the UE has failed if the random access procedure fails. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037410 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING HANDOVER OF USER EQUIPMENT IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Defined is a handover procedure of a User Equipment (UE) for which multiple UpLink (UL) carriers requiring different UL Timing Advances (TAs) are aggregated in a mobile communication system. The handover procedure includes admitting execution of handover to a target cell of the UE at the request of a source cell, setting radio resource information to be used by the UE in the target cell and transmitting the set radio resource information to the source cell, determining whether a random access procedure, which is executed, among the multiple UL carriers, with a reference UL carrier or with an UL carrier to which the same UL TA as that of the reference UL carrier is applied, has been completed, and determining that a handover procedure of the UE has been successfully completed if the random access procedure has been completed, and determining that the handover procedure of the UE has failed if the random access procedure fails. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037411 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR RELOCATING ANCHOR GATEWAY IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present disclosure relates to a pre-5 | 02-04-2016 |
20160037412 | METHODS AND DEVICES FOR CONDITIONAL ATTACHMENT TO A NETWORK - A method implemented in a user equipment (UE) for establishing reattachment to a first network includes establishing a data connection to a second network. The method further includes detecting a detachment from the first network. The method further includes entering a conditional state after detecting the detachment from the first network. After entering the conditional state, the method further includes monitoring one or more broadcast transmissions from a network node, extracting broadcast data included in the broadcast transmissions of the first network, applying the extracted broadcast data in a predetermined rule, and if the predetermined rule is satisfied, establishing the reattachment to the first network. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037414 | TRANSMISSION CONTROL FOR USER EQUIPMENT - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. The apparatus establishes a wireless connection to a first network, determines a start time of a tune away procedure, enters a transmission freeze state for a first predetermined interval prior to the start time of the tune away procedure, tunes away from the first network for a second predetermined interval, and tunes back to the first network after the second predetermined interval. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037415 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ENHANCED NETWORK HANDOFF TO WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS - A method of managing a wireless device includes receiving location information via a wireless wide area network interface and identifying a set of access points within connection range of the wireless device via a wireless local area network interface using the location information. The method also includes transmitting information associated with the set of access points to the wireless device via the wireless wide area network interface and transmitting station information associated with the wireless device to an access point within connection range of the wireless device. The method further includes initiating a handoff of the wireless device from the wireless wide area network interface to the wireless local area network interface via the access point based on the information and the station information. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037418 | METHOD FOR ACCESSING A SERVICE UNAVAILABLE THROUGH A NETWORK CELL - A method performed by user equipment (UE) includes receiving a request to access a service unavailable through a first network cell associated with the UE, and receiving a message from an access device associated with the first network cell, wherein the message identifies a plurality of second network cells providing the service. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037420 | SIGNALING VIRTUAL CELL ID SETS - An efficient signaling of virtual cell identifier (ID) sets by base stations is disclosed. A serving base station identifies a set of virtual cell IDs of transmission points from a coordinated multipoint (CoMP) cluster in which a served user equipment (UE) is located along with neighboring transmission points of neighboring CoMP clusters. The serving base station groups the virtual cell IDs available for use in transmission into subsets of virtual cell IDs either according to the primary cell IDs associated with each virtual cell ID or according to the channel state information (CSI) resources associated with each primary cell ID and then transmits each of the subsets of virtual cell IDs to the UE. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037422 | RADIO ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND METHOD - A radio access management system includes a radio access network including a number of base stations, a backhaul network to which the base stations are connected via backhaul links, and a backhaul resource controller configured to acquire information about both the load of the radio access network and of the backhaul network and to at least one of suggest or enforce handovers of user terminals connected to the base stations based on the acquired load information. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037423 | System for Managing Services of WiMax Base Stations - A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, a base station having a wireless transceiver operable in compliance with a Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access protocol, and a controller to manage the wireless transceiver. The controller can be operable to receive a request from a communication device to access the base station, and to direct the communication device to a second base station upon determining that granting wireless access to the communication device reduces an operating performance of the base station below an operating threshold of the base station. Additional embodiments are disclosed. | 02-04-2016 |
20160037534 | CHANNEL SWITCHING METHOD AND CHANNEL RECEPTION METHOD TO INCREASE SPECTRUM USE EFFICIENCY, AND CHANNEL SWITCHING APPARATUS AND CHANNEL RECEPTION APPARATUS USING THE SAME - Provided is a channel switching method and channel reception method to enhance spectrum use efficiency and a channel switching apparatus and channel reception apparatus using the same. The channel switching method may include extracting, based on received information associated with a virtual channel currently viewed by a user, broadcasting data on a corresponding virtual channel in a physical channel, determining communication data to be added to an idle frequency band in the physical channel including the extracted broadcasting data, and transmitting a transmission data stream generated based on communication data and broadcasting data included in the physical channel, wherein the physical channel comprises broadcasting data on a plurality of virtual channels and uses a predetermined frequency band. | 02-04-2016 |
20160044536 | DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD, BASE STATION, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE - The present invention discloses a data transmission method, a base station, and a wireless communications device, which can ensure normal communication between a terminal and a base station in a multi-stream aggregation scenario. The method includes: receiving, by a primary base station, offloading information sent by a wireless communications device, where the wireless communications device is a secondary base station or a terminal; and adjusting, by the primary base station according to the offloading information, offloading data that is allocated to a multi-stream aggregation base station. The present invention is applicable to the communications field. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044544 | CALL PRESERVATION ON HANDOVER - In an example, a wireless communication system and apparatuses thereof are described. In an example long-term evolution (LTE) network, a first base station hands over a connection to a second base station. The first base station may be a (femto) home eNodeB (HeNB) or (macro) eNodeB. The second base station may also be a HeNB or eNodeB connected to a different gateway. The first base station may send “Handover Request” on an X2 connection, identifying the gateway that the second base station is connected to as the correct gateway. After sending a “Handover Request Acknowledgement,” the second base station correctly establishes a tunnel to a connected gateway device. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044545 | FAST RETURN AFTER CIRCUIT SWITCHED FALL BACK (CSFB) RADIO RESOURCE CONTROL CONNECTION FAILURE - A user equipment (UE) improves wireless communication when the UE returns or attempts to return to a first radio access technology (RAT) from a second RAT after a circuit switched fall back (CSFB) call failure due to a radio resource control (RRC) connection failure. In one instance, the UE successfully redirects to the second RAT from a first RAT. The UE then determines that the circuit switched fall back call on the second RAT failed. In response to the determination of the failure, the UE waits for a predetermined amount of time for second RAT re-paging or a user re-initiating the circuit switched call. The UE then performs fast return to the first RAT after the predetermined amount of time expires or in response to a user input. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044546 | REDIRECTION HISTORY BASED CIRCUIT SWITCHED FALL BACK ACROSS MOBILE SWITCHING CENTER POOLS - A user equipment (UE) receives a circuit switched page from a first base station of a first radio access technology (RAT) and a command instructing the UE to redirect from the first base station to a second RAT. The UE identifies a second base station of the second RAT in response to receiving the command. The second base station is the strongest base station in the second RAT and has a location area code. The UE determines whether the location area code corresponds to a location area code associated with a previous successful redirection attempt from the first base station. The UE redirects to the second RAT based at least in part on the determining. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044547 | HANDLING CALL TRANSFER IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and apparatus for handling a call transfer from a circuit switched access network to a packet switched access network. A Mobile Switching Centre Server receives a notification that a call for a terminal requires handover from a circuit switched access network to a packet switched access network. The MSC Server determines whether the terminal is currently registered in an IMS network and/or whether the MSC Server is registered such that it can perform handover from the circuit switched access network to the packet switched access network. If so, then return Single Radio Voice Call Continuity is invoked to perform a handover of the call from the circuit switched access network to the packet switched access network. If not then the MSC Server invokes error handling procedures. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044548 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DOWNLINK SIGNAL OF USER EQUIPMENT HAVING DUAL CONNECTIVITY IN HETEROGENEOUS CELL ENVIRONMENT - Disclosed are a transmission method and a base station comprising: user equipment confirming a handover to be performed; transmitting to a macro cell a data forwarding request message for requesting forwarding of downlink data of a small cell to the user equipment, when the user equipment can establish an X2 or S1 interface with the macro cell to perform the handover; receiving from the macro cell a data forwarding response message for indicating establishment of a wireless bearer with the macro cell; and transmitting the downlink data to the macro cell through the established wireless bearer, based on the data forwarding response message. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044549 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MITIGATING DATA LOSS DURING AUTONOMOUS SYSTEM INFORMATION READING - Techniques for mitigating data loss during autonomous system information (SI) reading by a user equipment (UE) are described. For autonomous SI reading, the UE may autonomously determine when to read system information from neighbor cells and may not inform a serving cell. In one design, the UE may autonomously select a SI reading gap for reading system information from a neighbor cell. During the SI reading gap, the UE may suspend reception of downlink transmission from the serving cell, receive system information from the neighbor cell, and maintain capability to transmit on the uplink to the serving cell. In one design, the serving cell may determine SI reading gaps autonomously selected by the UE for reading system information from neighbor cells. The serving cell may communicate with the UE by accounting for the SI reading gaps of the UE, e.g., may suspend communication with the UE during the SI reading gaps. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044550 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR APPLYING ASSISTANCE INFORMATION FOR TRAFFIC STEERING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for applying assistance information for traffic steering between a 3rd generation partnership project (3GPP) access network and a non-3GPP access network in a wireless communication system is provided. A user equipment (UE) receives assistance information for traffic steering through a dedicated signaling from an eNodeB (eNB), and starts a timer upon entering an idle mode. The UE applies the assistance information received through the dedicated signaling until the timer expires. After the timer expires, the UE applies assistance information received through a broadcast signaling. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044552 | SYSTEMS, METHODS, AND DEVICES FOR PROXIMITY SERVICES FOR MULTI-CARRIER CAPABLE MOBILE DEVICES - A user equipment (UE) is configured to perform cell selection and camp on a first cell in a first frequency resource. The UE is configured to determine that proximity services are supported in a second frequency resource. The first and second wireless frequency resources are within licensed spectrums corresponding to one or more mobile communications networks. The UE is configured to start device-to-device communication on the second frequency resource and send, with the transceiver, a device-to-device message in the second frequency resource. The device-to-device message includes one of a device-to-device discovery message and a device-to-device communication message. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044555 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING NETWORK SWITCHING - Disclosed are a method and an apparatus for determining network switching, relating to communication technology: a UE reports information on user network-switching conditions to a base station, which, on the basis of said information and upon network-switching conditions being fulfilled, determines whether or not to carry out network switching for the UE, thus allowing the determination to carry out network switching to be based on user preferences. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044557 | USER MOBILITY CONTROL FOR HETEROGENEOUS WIRELESS NETWORKS - In a wireless network including a first cell and a second cell, it is determined whether a measure of mobility of a user device meets a mobility criterion, and it is determined whether a size of the second cell meets a cell size criterion. When it is determined that (i) the measure of mobility of the user device meets the mobility criterion and (ii) the size of the second cell meets the cell size criterion, the user device is prevented from being switched from the first cell to the second cell, or at least one of (i) a handover parameter or (ii) a cell reselection parameter is adjusted in order to change a probability that the user device will switch from the first cell to the second cell. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044559 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING HANDOVER REQUEST MESSAGE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for transmitting a handover request message in a wireless communication system is provided. For service differentiation from a small cell and a macro cell, a first macro eNodeB (eNB) transmits a handover request message including a list of first services for a user equipment (UE), which are provided by the first macro eNB, and a list of second services for the UE, which are provided by a small cell eNB which has dual connectivity with the first macro eNB. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044560 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING A CLOUD-BASED MOBILITY IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method and apparatus for providing a cloud-based mobility in a wireless network are disclosed. For example, the method receives a path switching request from a user endpoint device. The method then determines if the path switching request is for a regional hand-off. If the path switching request is for a regional hand-off, the method initiates a virtual machine move request for moving a virtual machine providing a mobility support function for a user of the user endpoint device. The method then determines if a response to the virtual machine move request is received. If the response to the virtual machine request is received, the method performs a user plane update and provides a response to the path switching request. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044562 | METHOD OF SWITCHING CONNECTION TO FEMTOCELL AND WIFI AP IN SDN - A method of switching a connection to a femtocell and a WiFi access point (AP) in software defined networking (SDN) capable of minimizing inconvenience of use by automatically switching a connection to a mobile communication network including the femtocell and a WiFi network connected to the SDN without disconnection of a data service in a state that a user does not recognize is provided. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044565 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ESTABLISHING CONNECTION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for establishing a connection in a wireless communication system is provided. A user equipment (UE) in a connected mode camps on a second cell, transmits a connection request to the second cell, and receives redirection information, which indicates redirection to a first cell or a frequency of the first cell, from the second cell. The UE completes connection with the first cell by transmitting a message. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044566 | Method and Apparatus for Interference Mitigation Configuration in a Wireless Communication Network - According to one aspect of the teachings herein, a wireless communication network sends Interference Mitigation, IM, configuration information to a User Equipment, UE, or other wireless device operating in the network. The IM configuration information indicates a selected IM mode or mode. The IM modes differ with respect to the amount of network assistance required. Advantageously, IM mode selection by the network is based on obtaining capability information for the wireless device, indicating which IM modes are supported by the wireless device, and is further based on evaluating one or more operating parameters, such as network loading or resource availability and signal quality at the wireless device. From among the IM modes supported by the wireless device, the network selects the mode(s) that best complement current operating conditions, and the wireless device in turn restricts its operation to the selected IM modes. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044567 | METHODS FOR 3GPP WLAN INTERWORKING FOR IMPROVED WLAN USAGE THROUGH OFFLOAD - Systems, methods, and instrumentalities are disclosed for bearer management in a wireless network using virtual bearers. Systems, methods, and instrumentalities are also disclosed for managing conflicts between an eNB decision to offload a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) to a WLAN and an ANDSF policy. Systems, methods, and instrumentalities are also disclosed for minimization of drive tests (MDT) for WLAN or during an offload to WLAN. Systems, methods, and instrumentalities are also disclosed for signaling capabilities of a WTRU. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044569 | MEASUREMENT CONFIGURATION FOR HETEROGENOUS NETWORKS - Methods and apparatus, including computer program products, are provided for measurement configuration in heterogeneous networks. In one aspect there is provided a method. The method may include receiving, at a user equipment, configuration information including a range of mobility state values, wherein the range of mobility state values are associated with one or more event reporting criteria; determining, at the user equipment, whether at least one of the range of mobility state values is valid based on a determined mobile state estimation of the user equipment; and determining, based on the determined validity of the range of mobility state values, whether to enable reporting associated with the one or more event reporting criteria. Related apparatus, systems, methods, and articles are also described. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044586 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND COMPUTER PROGRAM FOR HANDLING OVERLAPPING INTERWORKING INFORMATION - Methods and apparatus, including computer program products, are provided for interworking. In one aspect there is provided a method. The method may include receiving interworking information, wherein the interworking information comprises at least one rule associated with network access; and receiving information from a network, wherein the information describes how to use the at least one rule associated with network access. Related apparatus, systems, methods, and articles are also described. | 02-11-2016 |
20160044734 | METHOD FOR REPORTING BUFFER STATUS AND COMMUNICATION DEVICE THEREOF - There is provided a method for a method for reporting buffer status. The method may comprise: identifying a change of a radio bearer; and triggering a buffer status report (BSR), if the change of the radio bearer is identified. | 02-11-2016 |
20160050591 | METHOD AND NETWORK NODE FOR ENABLING AN EXTENDED A BASE STATION IDENTITY - A method in a first network node for sending a message to a second network node or receiving the message from the second network node is provided. The first network node sends ( | 02-18-2016 |
20160050595 | NEIGHBOR SCANNING IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS - An access point includes a transmitter configured to transmit signals, a receiver configured to receive signals, and a timing information device. The timing information device is configured to receive a timing information request from a station associated to the access point, receive timing information for a beacon signal sent by a second access point, and report the timing information to the station. The timing information includes a time difference relative to a known reference time for transmission of the beacon signal and the time difference is an offset in timing units. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050598 | SMALL CELL OFFLOADING COMMAND - A method includes, when operating in a connected state in a first cell such as a macro cell, reporting a presence of a second cell such as a small cell to the macro cell; receiving a first offloading command; storing connected state context information associated with the macro cell; establishing a connected state with the small cell; storing connected state context information associated with the small cell; performing at least one data offloading operation with the small cell and, upon a termination of data offloading operation, reestablishing the connected state with the macro cell using the stored connected state context information associated with the macro cell. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050604 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER PROCEDURE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for performing a handover procedure in a wireless communication system is provided. A first eNodeB (eNB) of a 3rd generation partnership project (3GPP) long term evolution (LTE) system receives information on an access point (AP) of a wireless local area network (WLAN) system, which is located at neighborhood of a second eNB, to which data of the first eNB can be offloaded, from a user equipment (UE) or a second eNB, and decides whether to handover the UE to the second eNB based on the received information on the AP. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050605 | METHOD FOR OFFLOADING TRAFFIC BY MEANS OF WIRELESS LAN IN MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND APPARATUS THEREFOR - The present invention relates to a method for offloading traffic by means of wireless LAN in a mobile communications system and apparatus therefor, and more particularly to a method for a terminal to offload traffic at a bearer level, and to a base station communicating with the terminal. The method for a terminal to offload traffic according to the present invention includes the steps of: while performing a data communication with a base station through a bearer of a first communications network, receiving from the base station an offloading command for offloading a part of traffic to a second communications network; transmitting a report of the offloading to the base station in response to the offloading command; and performing a data communication of the partial traffic with an accessible AP through a bearer of the second communications network without releasing the bearer of the first communications network. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050609 | CHANGING WIRELESS CARRIERS DURING A MOBILE GATEWAY SESSION - A first performance measure is determined of an existing data session between a mobile gateway and a cloud gateway via a first wireless carrier. Second performance measures of others of the wireless carriers are determined during the existing data session. Based on the first performance measure and the second performance measures, the existing data session is continued with the cloud gateway via a second of the wireless carriers. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050638 | PROXY MOBILE NODE CAPABILITY FOR MOBILE IP - A method and system are provided for transmitting information in a Mobile Internet Protocol (IP) environment, which includes a home agent (HA) provided at a home network, a base station (BS) broadcasting a pilot signal, a foreign agent (FA) provided at or associated with the BS, a mobile node (MN) providing the ability to detect and identify itself to a BS, a proxy mobile node (PMN) Identifying the MN wherein the PMN is provided at the BS. If the PMN identifies the MN, the PMN retrieves an IP address for each of the MN, FA and HA and sends a registration request to the FA. The FA relays the registration request to the HA, and the proxy MN is registered with the HA. Thus, the MN functionality is provided transparently to the MN by the PMN. This significantly simplifies the configuration of the MN and the Mobile IP network. | 02-18-2016 |
20160050707 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DATA RADIO BEARER CONFIGURATION IN A HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, an apparatus comprising: at least one processor; and at least one memory including computer program code, wherein the at least one memory and the computer program code are configured to, with the at least one processor, cause the apparatus to perform at least the following: receive information on data radio bearer transmission configuration from a primary serving cell or a secondary serving cell which indicates configuration of data radio bearer transmission in at least one serving cell; and transmit data according to the configuration. | 02-18-2016 |
20160056939 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DATA USING PLURALITY OF CARRIERS IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is a communication method of a User Equipment (UE) in a Dual Connectivity (DC)-based mobile communication system in which a Master Cell Group (MCG) and at least one Secondary Cell Group (SCG) are configured, the method including: receiving measurement gap configuration information relating to a measurement gap used to periodically measure at least one serving cell; determining a first sub-frame included in the measurement gap using a System Frame Number (SFN) of the MCG and the received measurement gap configuration information; and performing measurement on the at least one serving cell during at least one measurement gap sub-frame determined based on the first sub-frame. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057661 | Dynamic Switching from SGLTE to CSFB to Improve Data Throughput - To leverage the potential advantages of configuring an LTE radio access technology (RAT) to acquire services in a CSFB mode, methods implemented in a mobile communication device (e.g., a simultaneous GSM/LTE+GSM communication device) determine whether an available network is capable of supporting circuit-switch fallback (CSFB) operations for the LTE RAT and configure the LTE RAT to acquire services in either a CSFB mode or an SGLTE mode based on the network's capabilities. In response to determining that the mobile communication device has entered a new tracking area in the LTE RAT's network, a mobile communication device processor may determine whether a network available in the new tracking area supports CSFB operations and may configure the LTE RAT to operate in either a CSFB mode or an SGLTE mode based on that determination, thereby potentially improving the LTE RAT's overall performance and quality of services. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057664 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CELL TO DISCOVER ANOTHER CELL - Disclosed are a method and an apparatus for a cell to discover another cell. A method for cell discovery by a discovering cell may comprises the step of: the discovering cell receiving first discovering resource configuration information from a master cell; and the discovering cell receiving a discovering signal from at least one discovering target cell on the basis of the first discovering resource configuration information, wherein the first discovering resource configuration information may comprise information indicating a first time resource for the discovering cell to receive a discovery signal by means of a first frequency band, and information indicating a second time resource for the discovering cell to transmit downlink data to a terminal by means of the first frequency band. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057665 | Carrier Configuration in Wireless Networks - A base station transmits, to a wireless device, at least one first RRC message comprising configuration parameters of a plurality of cells being grouped into a plurality of cell groups. The base station makes a handover decision for the wireless device. The base station transmits a second RRC message causing in the wireless device, modification of a cell group of a cell without explicitly releasing the cell. The second RRC message comprises mobility control information. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057668 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING CELL RESELECTION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for performing cell reselection in a wireless communication system is provided. A user equipment (UE) in an idle mode camps on a second cell, and receives reselection information for dual connectivity, which indicates cell reselection to a first cell or cell reselection to a frequency of the first cell, from the second cell. If the UE supports dual connectivity, the UE performs cell reselection based on the received reselection information for dual connectivity. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057669 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING WIRELESS CONNECTION SWITCHING - A method, apparatus, and computer program product are provided to manage wireless connection switching. In the context of a method, an Access Point (AP) may determine whether to direct at least one User Equipment (UE) connected to a local area AP to be connected to a macro AP and may cause, in an instance in which it is determined to direct the at least one UE to be connected to the macro AP, at least one signal to be transmitted to the at least one UE, the at least one signal being configured to direct the at least one UE to connect to the macro AP. The signal may take many different forms and may encode further information such as the portion of the traffic that should be served by the macro AP, a particular Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH) resource to be used by the UE, and/or other types of information and/or parameters. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057672 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING INFORMATION ON IN-DEVICE COEXISTENCE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for transmitting information on in-device coexistence (IDC) interference in a wireless communication system is provided. A source eNodeB (eNB) initiates handover for a user equipment (UE), which experiences IDC interference at a source cell controlled by the source eNB, to a target eNB; and transmits information on IDC interference to the target eNB. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057673 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, RADIO COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - Provided are a radio communication system, a radio communication apparatus, a radio communication terminal, and a communication method those being capable of facilitating handover of a dual terminal to a base station corresponding to the other communication scheme, thereby improving frequency utilization efficiency of the entire radio communication system that employs a plurality of communication schemes. Specifically, a first radio communication apparatus ( | 02-25-2016 |
20160057675 | SUPPORTING ENHANCED UPLINK TRANSMISSION DURING SOFT HANDOVER - An enhanced uplink user equipment is in soft handover. A radio network controller selects a primary Node-B out of a plurality of Node-Bs supporting the soft handover. The radio network controller receiving successfully received enhanced uplink data packets from the plurality of Node-Bs. The radio network controller reordered the successfully received enhanced uplink data packets for in-sequence deliver. The primary Node-B sends specified scheduling information to the user equipment that the other Node-Bs does not transmit. At least the primary Node-B transmits acknowledgements and negative acknowledgements to the user equipment. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057677 | Traffic Steering in a WLAN Based on Transmit Power Control - Methods and apparatus are disclosed for steering UEs ( | 02-25-2016 |
20160057681 | Load Balancing Method and Device - Embodiments provide a load balancing method and device. The method includes acquiring, by a first device, a load status of an MVNO that shares mobility management network elements. The method also includes performing, by the first device, load balancing among the mobility management network elements according to the load status of the MVNO. According to the embodiments herein, load balancing can be implemented when an MVNO and an MNO share a network resource. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057684 | Co-Channel Deployment of New and Legacy Carrier Types - Methods for changing a carrier type from a first carrier type to a second carrier type are disclosed. An example method may be implemented in one or more nodes of a cellular system that includes a plurality of cells that can each be selectively operated with either a first carrier type or a second carrier type, one of the first and second carrier types either having substantially fewer reference symbols than the other or lacking a control structure supported by the other, or both. The example method begins with determining ( | 02-25-2016 |
20160057687 | INTER/INTRA RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY MOBILITY AND USER-PLANE SPLIT MEASUREMENT CONFIGURATION - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to methods and apparatus for wireless communication, and more particularly, to methods and apparatus for inter/intra RAT mobility and U-plane split measurement configuration based on context and service awareness. For example, in certain aspects, a mobile device may manage at least one data flow between a core network and the mobile device by identifying at least one constraint on selection of an aggregation point for the data flow. The constraint may be based on at least one of a context for the mobile device or a service associated with the data flow. The mobile device may send a report to a first node based on the at least one identified constraint and receive a configuration request to establish a connection with a second node based on the report. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057689 | BASE STATION - A base station according to an embodiment is a base station for performing communication with a user terminal in a self-cell. The base station comprises: a controller configured to control handover of the user terminal to a neighboring base station before setting a power saving communication mode for performing communication with the user terminal while reducing consumed power in the base station. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057691 | SYSTEM AND METHOD EN-ROUTE WIRELESS NETWORK ACCESS - A method, a computer program product, and a computer system for en-route wireless network access are provided. A server receives from a mobile device information of a route along which the mobile device moves. The server determines registered wireless access points along the route. The server sends information of the mobile device and user credentials to one or more providers of the registered wireless access points. From the one or more providers, the server receives connection information of the registered wireless access points. The server sends the connection information to the mobile device. Based on the connection information, the mobile device establishes connectivity with respective ones of the registered wireless access points en-route. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057697 | CELL POSITIONING IN CELLULAR NETWORK - An apparatus, a system and a method for configuring a User Equipment (UE) position. For example, a UE may be configured to receive a cell ID parameter and a cell size parameter, to configure a cell position based on the cell ID, and to configure the UE position based on the cell size. The UE may be configured, for example, to connect to Access points (APs) of a Wireless local Are Network (WLAN) in its close vicinity, e.g., based on the determined position of the UE. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057732 | Dynamic Resource Allocation By Base Station Providing Both Broadcast and Unicast Services - A base station ( | 02-25-2016 |
20160066218 | CIRCUIT SWITCHED FALL BACK IMPROVEMENTS - An improved circuit switched fallback (CSFB) method is disclosed, in which failures following several abnormal cases not anticipated by the 3GGP specification are avoided. User equipment implementing the improved CSFB method demonstrate increased performance in terms of call success rate and hence provide an improved user experience and an edge over LTE modem competitors. The improved CSFB method can be included in the 3GPP standards for such abnormal case handling and CSFB call recovery. | 03-03-2016 |
20160066222 | MULTI-CONNECTIVITY IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - An example technique may include establishing a multiple connection session in a wireless network by a user device, the multiple connection session including a first connection between the user device and a first cell and a second connection between the user device and a second cell, wherein the first connection and the second connection are independent, and wherein one or more downlink data units for the multiple connection session are received by both the first cell and the second cell, controlling sending, by the user device to the first cell, a request to receive a first group of data units of the multiple connection session, and controlling sending, by the user device to the second cell, a request to receive a second group of data units of the multiple connection session, wherein the first group of data units is different than the second group of data units. | 03-03-2016 |
20160066226 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, TERMINAL DEVICE, DATA RECEIVING METHOD, ACCESS POINT AND PROGRAM - [Object] To provide a mechanism that enables a terminal device to receive streaming data stably and that can be more easily implemented. | 03-03-2016 |
20160066227 | ACCESS POINT SELECTION IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - In a wireless network such as Wi-Fi, a wireless access point connected to a client device monitors the quality of the link to the client device. When the client device sends probe frames indicative of the link to the connected access point being too low for continued data connectivity, the access points forwards connection data to a management server. When other access points receive the probe requests, they consult the management server to obtain the low channel quality data and use it as a threshold for determining whether to respond to the client device's probe request. | 03-03-2016 |
20160066228 | METHOD AND UE FOR PERFORMING RANDOM ACCESS TO BASE STATION, AND METHOD AND BASE STATION FOR ESTABLISHING CONNECTION WITH UE - The present disclosure relates to a method used in a UE for performing a random access to a second base station and an associated UE. The UE has been in communications with a first base station. The method includes: obtaining from the first base station a subframe configuration for the UE, which indicates a first set of subframes assigned to communications between the UE and the first base station and a second set of subframes assigned to communications between the UE and the second base station; and performing the random access to the second base station based on the subframe configuration. The present disclosure also relates to a method used in a second base station for establishing a connection with a UE and an associated second base station. | 03-03-2016 |
20160066230 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSFERRING USER EQUIPMENT IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and system for transferring user equipment (UE) in a mobile communication system are disclosed. According to the method, a source core (CN) network determines to transfer a UE that it serves and sends a transfer instruction carrying UE transfer restriction information to the UE; an access network receives a transfer request that is sent by the UE according to the restriction information carried in the transfer instruction; the access network selects a target CN entity that is different from the source CN entity for the UE; and the UE is transferred to the target CN entity. The method and system provided by the disclosure are applicable to user transferring between CN entities in any communication network. The transferring is initiated by a network side entity, and a more preferable CN entity is selected for the UE to provide a better service. | 03-03-2016 |
20160066231 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, METHOD, AND APPARATUS - A core network includes a plurality of nodes that serve as nodes managing mobility of a terminal and that are different with regards to service functions that nodes provide to the terminal. Based on subscriber information and terminal information, a node to be connected to the terminal is selected on the core network side, depending on a service characteristic utilized by the terminal or on a type of the terminal and the terminal is connected to the selected node. | 03-03-2016 |
20160066233 | Method And Apparatus For Improved Dual Connectivity - Various methods and devices are provided to address the need for improved dual connectivity. For example, a network node ( | 03-03-2016 |
20160066234 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING DATA TRANSMISSION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for and apparatus for performing data transmission in a wireless communication system is provided. A wireless device acquires information including a threshold on an action, which is configured for a secondary radio access technologies (RAT) system, checks a condition to be triggered by the threshold and a measurement result of the secondary RAT system, performs a corresponding action according to the condition. The secondary RAT system is used for a User-Plane (U-plane) data, the threshold is changeable by at least one of a network preference including a primary RAT system or the secondary RAT system, a quality of service (QoS) information, and bearer information, the action includes whether an association/disassociation/data transition direction for the secondary RAT system is configured. | 03-03-2016 |
20160066236 | DYNAMIC RADIO COVERAGE AREA TRANSITION MANAGEMENT - In a cellular communication system, a coverage transition Is performed where a compensation service area is expanded to cover an energy saving service area and the energy saving service area is deactivated The coverage transition is managed by transferring user equipment devices (UE devices) from an energy saving service area to a transition service area that at least partially overlaps with the energy saving service area. The UE devices may be transferred using a handover procedure between communication stations where each UE device is assigned communication frequencies for communication with the transition communication station that are not used by the energy saving communication station or the compensation service area, thereby avoiding, or at least minimizing, interference. After all UE devices are transferred from the energy saving service area, the communication stations are configured to deactivate the energy saving service area and to expand the compensation service area to cover the energy saving service area. | 03-03-2016 |
20160066237 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION DEVICE, TERMINAL DEVICE, RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND INTEGRATED CIRCUIT - There is provided a radio communication system in which a first base station device and a second base station device communicate with a terminal device. The terminal device transmits report information corresponding to data transmission of each of the base station devices, to the first base station device and the second base station device. The terminal device transmits report information corresponding to data transmission of the second base station device to the first base station device in a case where occurrence of a problem is detected in a radio link between the second base station device and the terminal device. The first base station device detects occurrence of a problem in the radio link between the second base station device and the terminal device in a case where the report information corresponding to the second base station device is received from the terminal device. | 03-03-2016 |
20160066240 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - Provided is a communication system capable of handover processing, based on a processing priority according to handover classification. The communication system according to the embodiment of the present invention has a base station and a terminal; the terminal transmits handover requests to the base station; and the base station performs handover processing on the basis of the processing priority according to handover classification. | 03-03-2016 |
20160066241 | PDCP Operation for Dual Connection - An apparatus of a communication network detects that a modification of a radio resource control connection for a user equipment is required. The apparatus decides, based on the detected modification requirement, if a re-establishment of a packet data convergence protocol is required for a first radio bearer and/or a second radio bearer, and indicates, in a radio resource control reconfiguration message, the first radio bearer and/or the second radio bearer for which re-establishment of the packet data convergence protocol is required. The user equipment detects, from the radio resource control reconfiguration message, that a modification of a radio resource control connection between the user equipment and the communication network is required, and re-establishes the packet data convergence protocol for the first radio bearer and/or the second radio bearer in accordance with the indication set in the radio resource control reconfiguration message. | 03-03-2016 |
20160066245 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In a method performed by a user equipment for controlling radio access network selection and traffic steering for the user equipment in a heterogeneous communication network, said communication network comprising at least said user equipment, at least one radio access network controller node and at least one ANDSF policy server node with which the user equipment is associated, wherein the method includes the steps of adaptively at least partly suspending or activating provided ANDSF policies to enable switching between radio access network control or ANDSF policy control of radio access network selection and traffic steering for the user equipment. | 03-03-2016 |
20160066362 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE STATION, BASE STATION, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication system, a mobile station, a base station, and a wireless communication method that improve communication efficiency between wireless communication stations are provided. A wireless communication apparatus includes a communication unit, which includes a first logical processing subject and a second logical processing subject that operates in association with the first logical processing subject and which performs multiple communications with a wireless communication apparatus, and includes a notifying unit that notifies the wireless communication apparatus of data related information. The wireless communication apparatus includes a second communication unit that transmits data, and a notifying unit that receives the data related information from the controller and controls an amount of data transmitted by the second communication unit. | 03-03-2016 |
20160073297 | Control of Offloading by the Network - It is provided a method, including checking if a first condition for an offloading a first radio access bearer of a first radio access network of a first radio access technology to a second radio access network of a second radio access technology different from the first radio access technology is fulfilled, wherein the first condition is received for the first radio access bearer, and wherein the first condition includes a grouping information; preventing the offloading of the first radio access bearer to the second radio access network if the first condition is fulfilled. | 03-10-2016 |
20160073299 | Radio Resource Management for Packet-Switched Voice Communication - Techniques are disclosed relating to informing a network that a UE desires packet-switched voice communication. In one embodiment, a method includes receiving first information from a UE device requesting voice communication over a packet-switched network. In this embodiment, the method further includes transmitting, in response to the first information, second information to a base station serving the UE device, wherein the second information indicates that the UE device is requesting voice communication over the packet-switched network. In this embodiment, the transmitting is performed prior to establishment of a dedicated bearer by the base station for the UE device. In this embodiment, the second information operates to configure communications between the base station and the UE device to provide a particular quality of service for the packet-switched voice communication using the dedicated bearer. | 03-10-2016 |
20160073300 | DEVICE STATE DERIVATION - Systems and methods for device state derivation are described. Some implementations include receiving, from a mobile station at a state derivation server, current connectivity characteristics of one or more radio access technologies (RATs) that are serviced by a modem of the mobile station, analyzing the one or more connectivity characteristics to determine one or more of: whether the mobile station is tuning away from a particular RAT to access another RAT or a duration for which the mobile station is tuning away from the particular RAT to access the other RAT, based on the analyzing, determining a current connectivity state of the mobile station, and displaying the current connectivity state at a user interface of a computing device associated with the state derivation server. | 03-10-2016 |
20160073302 | DERIVATION OF EMBMS NEIGHBOR SAI INFORMATION WITH CORRELATION BIT-MAP - A UE receives a list of neighboring cells of a serving cell serving the UE, and a list of SAIs. The list of neighboring cells may be included in a first system information message and the list of SAIs may be included in a second system information message. The first and second messages may be the same message, e.g., SIB | 03-10-2016 |
20160073303 | ACTIVATION PROCEDURE FOR DORMANT CELLS - In an aspect of the disclosure, a method, a computer-readable medium, and an apparatus are provided. The apparatus may be a second base station. The second base station receives a measurement report and a cell identifier, associated with a first base station, from a UE. The second base station determines, based on the cell identifier, that the first base station is in a dormant state. The second base station sends an activation request to the first base station, based on the measurement report, to prompt the first base station to transition from the dormant state to an active state. The second base station further includes handing off the UE to the first base station. | 03-10-2016 |
20160073306 | WIRELESS NETWORK MEASUREMENT SCHEDULING - A user equipment (UE) camped on a first RAT and in a coverage area of a second RAT searches for one or more frequencies of the second RAT and measures one or more detected cells corresponding to the one or more frequencies of the second RAT. When the measurement indicates that cell reselection/handover trigger conditions are met the UE starts a cell reselection timer or time to trigger. The UE schedules a measurement of the neighbor cell during a time instance close to when the reselection timer or time to trigger expires. | 03-10-2016 |
20160073308 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, SGW, TERMINAL COMMUNICATION METHOD AND CONTROL METHOD - A bearer management device that performs control to reliably receive an incoming packet call that is made while a mobile terminal device is moving is provided. A bearer management device ( | 03-10-2016 |
20160073309 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND ROAMING METHOD FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A wireless communication terminal includes: a scanning section configured to, in a case where a roaming is performed to switch a connection to an access point in the course of the movement, perform a scan for an access point from a high-priority scan-band in descending order; and a roaming executing section configured to, in a case where a scanning result of the scanning section indicates that an access point of a roaming destination is present, make a connection. In a case where a scanning result of scanning a scan-band of a priority order indicates that an access point of a roaming destination is not present, the scanning section scans a scan-band of a lower priority order than the priority order. | 03-10-2016 |
20160073314 | REDIRECTION HISTORY BASED CIRCUIT SWITCHED FALL BACK - A user equipment (UE) receives a connection release message from a serving base station of a first radio access technology (RAT), without redirection information. The connection release message is received during a circuit switched fall back procedure from the first RAT to a second RAT. The UE redirects to the second RAT based on redirection history. | 03-10-2016 |
20160073406 | A METHOD FOR ALLOCATION OF FREQUENCY RESOURCES OF DIFFERENT OPERATORS TO USER TERMINALS, AND A BASE STATION AND A USER TERMINAL THEREFOR - The invention concerns a method for allocation of frequency resources (FA, FB) of different operators (OPA, OPB) to user terminals, wherein on a frequency resource (FA, FB) of each operator (OPA, OPB) of said different operators, an indication of said operator allowing user terminals registered at said operator (OPA, OPB) to get access to a signaled cell (CSA, CSB) is transmitted on a broadcast channel (PBCHA, PBCHB), user terminals receive control information only on frequency resources (FA, FB) of an operator (OPA, OPB) at which the user terminals are registered, and said control information comprises an indicator (CIFA, CIFB) allocating to the user terminals a frequency resource (FA, FB) of said frequency resources of an operator (OPA, OPB) at which the user terminals are not registered, and a base station and a user terminal therefor. | 03-10-2016 |
20160080945 | Methods and Systems for Performing Dynamic Spectrum Arbitrage Based on eNodeB Transition States - A dynamic spectrum arbitrage (DSA) system may include a dynamic spectrum policy controller (DPC) and a dynamic spectrum controller (DSC) that together dynamically manage the allocation and use of resources (e.g., spectrum resources) across different networks. The DSC and/or DPC components may be configured to monitor a congestion state of an eNodeB, and intelligently allocate resources, manage user traffic of the eNodeBs, select target eNodeBs for handovers, determine the quality of service (QoS) levels that are to be given to wireless devices attached to the eNodeBs, and/or perform other similar operations to intelligently manage the allocation and use of resources by the various networks. The DPC and/or DSC components may be also configured to perform these and other operations based on the transitions, changes, transition rates, or rates of change in the congestion levels of the network components. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080978 | Method of Enhanced Bearer Continuity for 3GPP System Change - Methods and apparatus are provided for enhanced bearer continuity for the 3GPP network. In one novel aspect, the UE detects missing parameters for the inter-RAT bearer change in an idle state. The UE performs bearer preservation procedures to maintain the bearer continuity. In one embodiment, predefined/preconfigured parameter settings are used. In one embodiment, a mapping rule is used to map the missing parameter to a predefined value based on one or more known parameters. In another embodiment, the missing parameters are obtained from the network. In another embodiment, signaling procedures used to obtain the missing parameters. The signaling procedures include a service request, a UE-initiated bearer modification procedure. In one embodiment, the cell reselection is suspended such that the signaling procedure is performed to obtain the missing parameters before the cell reselection. In another embodiment, a RAU procedure is used upon detecting the missing of parameters. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080981 | FAST WIFI TO LTE HANDOVER - The present invention relates to a network node and a method at the network node of handing over a mobile terminal between a first RAT and a second RAT in a wireless communications network. The invention further relates to a computer program performing the method according to the present invention, and a computer program product comprising computer readable medium having the computer program embodied therein. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080986 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF SIGNALING AND PROCEDURE FOR SEQUENCE HOPPING PATTERN CHANGE DURING HANDOVER - A method and apparatus are provided for updating a sequence hopping (SH) pattern of an uplink channel during handover from a current cell having a current SH pattern. At least one downlink channel of each neighbor cell of the current cell is monitored. Information indicative of the monitored downlink channels of the neighbor cells is transmitted to the current cell. Prior to receiving a handover command from the current cell a target cell from among the neighbor cells is anticipated and a common downlink channel of the anticipated target cell is monitored to determine information representative of a target SH pattern of the target cell. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080987 | Control Channel Transmission Method and Equipment - A control channel transmission method and a piece of equipment, where the method includes configuring, by a communications system, at least two control channels for a user equipment, where at least one of the control channels is a cell-specific control channel and at least one of the control channels is a user equipment-specific control channel; using, by the communications system, the cell-specific control channel and/or user equipment-specific control channel to send information about control over the user equipment. In the embodiments of the present disclosure, a communications system configures at least two control channels for a user equipment (UE). The communications system may use, in a process of reconfiguring a control channel, another control channel to send information about control over the UE to ensure that communication is not interrupted during cell handover of the UE. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080988 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FACILITATING A HAND-IN OF USER EQUIPMENT TO FEMTO CELLS - Aspects are disclosed for facilitating a hand-in to a femto cell. An identifier is assigned to a femto cell in which the identifier is based on a scrambling parameter and a timing parameter. A relationship between the identifier and the femto cell is then communicated. In another embodiment, a user equipment report is received, which includes attributes related to a signal broadcast by a femto cell. An identifier associated with the femto cell is ascertained from an attribute included in the report. The femto cell is then identified based on the identifier. In a further embodiment, a timing parameter is received, and a scrambling parameter is set. A signal including the scrambling parameter is then broadcast according to an offset related to the timing parameter. In yet another embodiment, a femto cell is detected during an active call. An identifier associated with the femto cell is then ascertained and reported. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080989 | Extended Service Set Transitions in Wireless Networks - A mobile device may transition between Extended Service Set (“ESS”) networks seamlessly, such that a consumer never loses the network connection despite the transition. The communication for enabling a transition may be prior to association with that network. The seamless transition may be enabled through the creation and utilization of a central key holder authority that advertises its identity to mobile devices in a pre-associated state. The mobile device can use the key discovery communication along with a key generation method to authenticate and/or associate with a network and transition from one ESS to another. There may be a common root key across ESSs. At each new access point (“AP”) that the mobile device encounters, ESS and key holder identities may be discovered through discovery communications. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080992 | Method of Inter-RAT Bearer Change for 3GPP System - Methods and apparatus are provided for inter-RAT bearer change for the 3GPP network. In one novel aspect, a bearer termination procedure is performed upon detecting one or more triggering events for the inter-RAT bearer modification. In one embodiment, the UE established the 4G EPS bearer. The UE successfully performs a bearer change from 4G to 3G. Subsequently, the UE detects missing mandatory parameters during inter-RAT bearer change from 3G to 2G in an idle state. The UE performs bearer termination by releasing the PDP context. In one embodiment, the PDP context is locally released. In other embodiments, the UE explicitly releases bearer using the PDP context deactivation procedure. The locally released procedure can be triggered by the UE, or by the network, or by both the UE and the network. The explicitly PDP context release procedure can be triggered by the UE, or by the network, or by both the UE and the network. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080994 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS OF MANAGING COMMUNICATION ENDPOINTS - In one embodiment, a method includes receiving a trigger to dynamically modify a serving site of a communication endpoint, wherein the communication endpoint is registered to receive digital communication service from a first serving site. The method further includes determining a stored serving-site selection policy applicable to the communication endpoint. The method also includes selecting a second serving site for the communication endpoint based, at least part, on a stored serving-site selection policy. Also, the method includes determining endpoint-configuration requirements of the second serving site. Furthermore, the method includes dynamically generating endpoint configurations that satisfy the endpoint-configuration requirements of the second serving site. Moreover, the method includes writing the generated endpoint configurations to the communication endpoint. Additionally, the method includes causing the communication endpoint to register to receive digital communication service from the second serving site in place of the first serving site. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080995 | Enhanced Wi-Fi-Cellular Mobility - In some embodiments, a user equipment device (UE) may be configured to perform handover of a communication session from a first packet data network (PDN) to a second PDN. The UE may include a radio and processing circuitry coupled to the radio and configured to interoperate with the radio. The radio may include one or more antennas for performing wireless communications over at least a first packet data network (PDN) (i.e., packet-switched network) and a second PDN. The UE may be configured to communicate over the first PDN according to first context information that was assigned to the UE and initiate a handover operation from the first PDN to the second PDN. In response to initiating the handover operation, the UE may communicate over the second PDN using the first context information for at least a first time duration. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080998 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A user terminal includes a controller configured to perform a network selection operation for selecting an access network in which the user terminal exchanges traffic from among a cellular RAN (Radio Access Network) and a wireless LAN (Local Area Network). The controller performs processes of: receiving wireless LAN identifiers for using the network selection operation, the wireless LAN identifiers broadcasted from a cellular base station, and receiving offload related information for prompting the user terminal to steer the traffic to the wireless LAN, the offload related information broadcasted from the cellular base station. | 03-17-2016 |
20160081000 | Method for Wireless Communication in a Device with Co-Existence Radio - Various methods for wireless communication in a device with co-existed/co-located radios are provided. Multiple communication radio transceivers are co-existed/co-located in a user equipment (UE) having in-device coexistence (IDC) capability, which may result in IDC interference. For example, the UE is equipped with both LTE radio and some ISM band applications such as WiFi and Bluetooth modules. In a first method, the network identifies IDC capability by UE identification (e.g., UE ID). In a second method, the UE intentionally performs cell selection or reselection to cells in non-ISM frequency bands. In a third method, the UE signals the existence of ISM band applications via capability negotiation. In a fourth method, the UE signals the activation of ISM band applications by signaling messages (e.g., RRC message or MAC CE). Under the various methods, the UE and its serving eNB can apply FDM or TDM solutions to mitigate the IDC interference. | 03-17-2016 |
20160081001 | DEVICE AND METHOD IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A system that determines a cell density and cell type in an area corresponding to a location of a user equipment; determines a mobility state of the user equipment based on the determined cell density and the determined cell type; and controls cell reselection for the user equipment based on the determined mobility state of the user equipment. | 03-17-2016 |
20160081062 | METHOD, BASE STATION, TERMINAL AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR SELECTING A COMPONENT CARRIER - A method, base station, terminal and communication system for selecting a component carrier are provided in the present invention. The method includes the following steps: determining the coverage range of each available carrier which can be used by the terminal; determining whether the distribution of the coverage ranges of all available carriers accords with a preset distribution mode; in the case of according with the presetting distribution mode, at least according to a rule which is determined by the distribution mode, determining a component carrier to be used. With the embodiments provided in the invention, a component carrier used by the terminal can be reasonably chosen. | 03-17-2016 |
20160088520 | INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, TERMINAL, COMMUNICATION PROCESSING METHOD, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM - According to one embodiment, an information processing device includes a first circuitry and a second circuitry. The first circuitry specifies information potential to be requested by an application and acquires the information over a network before the information is requested by the application. The second circuitry controls operation of the first circuitry based on a parameter value obtained by measuring a surrounding communication environment or an evaluation value depending on the parameter value. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088523 | PER USER UPLINK MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL ON A WI-FI COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Uplink medium access control on per-wireless device level for a specific user. An access point sends a beacon frame to a wireless device. The beacon frame includes a BSSID that is unique to the wireless device. The beacon frame also includes embedded uplink configurations specifying uplink medium access for the wireless device. In one embodiment, a controller recognizes a device or user associated with the device, and sends corresponding uplink configurations for embedding in a subsequent beacon frame. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088524 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING A HANDOVER BETWEEN UTRA R6 CELLS AND R7 CELLS - A method and apparatus for controlling an optimization of handover procedures between universal terrestrial radio access (UTRA) release 6 (R6) cells and UTRA release 7 (R7) cells are disclosed. When a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) is moving between an R6 cell and an R7 cell, or between R7 cells, a handover is initiated from a source Node-B to a target Node-B. In the R7 cell, the enhanced medium access control (MAC) functionality including flexible radio link control (RLC) protocol data unit (PDU) size and high speed MAC (MAC-hs) segmentation and multiplexing of different priority queues are supported. After the handover, a MAC layer and/or an RLC layer are reconfigured or reset based on functionality supported by the target Node-B. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088525 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SETTING UP CALL IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The time required to set up a voice call in an exemplary embodiment, in which Circuit Switched Fallback (CSFB) is used, is reduced to provide a voice call service to a User Equipment (UE) in a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system. If a voice call occurs in a UE while the UE accesses the LTE system, the UE using CSFB switches to a 2G/3G legacy system, recycles system information for a 2G/3G cell that the UE has accessed before, and immediately proceeds with voice call setup without receiving system information unnecessary for a CSFB process. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088526 | INFORMATION TRANSMISSION METHOD, INFORMATION MODIFICATION METHOD, AND APPARATUSES - The present invention relates to the field of mobile communications technologies, and in particular, to an information transmission method, an information modification method, and apparatuses, so as to solve a technical problem of voice transmission interruption in an SRVCC scenario in the prior art. In embodiments of the present invention, when a UE is in a connected state, a base station is notified of an SRVCC capability of the UE in real time, so that the base station can update the locally stored SRVCC capability of the UE in real time, and then determine, according to an actual situation, whether to initiate an SRVCC process, thereby ensuring a success rate of the SRVCC process and avoiding a possible phenomenon of call drop as far as possible. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088528 | HANDOVER METHOD AND RADIO BASE STATION - In a handover procedure between cells under different radio base stations (eNB), “RRC diversity” is implemented while considering conditions in a PDCP layer and an RLC layer. A handover method of the invention includes the steps of: causing a radio base station (eNB # | 03-24-2016 |
20160088530 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Implementation of “RRC diversity” in a handover procedure between cells under different radio base stations (eNB), while considering conditions in a physical layer, is disclosed. In a mobile communication system including a radio base station (eNB # | 03-24-2016 |
20160088532 | METHOD FOR ACCESSING NETWORK BY USER EQUIPMENT, AND ACCESS DEVICE - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method for accessing a network by a UE, and an access device. The method includes: sending, by a source side access device, an access indication message to a UE, where the access indication message is used to instruct the UE to access a target side access device; or sending, by a source side access device, a first notification message to a target side access device, where the first notification message is used to instruct the target side access device to send, to a UE, access information used to instruct the UE to access the target side access device; and in a process in which the UE accesses the target side access device, maintains a connection between the UE and the source side access device, therefore, a service interruption is not caused. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088533 | Wireless Device Handover Signalling - A first base station transmits, to a second base station and after making a handover decision for a wireless device, a first message. The first message comprises at least one parameter indicating the wireless device supports configuration of a plurality of cell groups. The first base station receives from the second base station a second message comprising first configuration parameters of a plurality of cells grouped into a first plurality of cell groups comprising a first cell group and a second cell group. The first base station transmits, to the wireless device, a third message comprising the first configuration parameters. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088537 | MOBILE STATION - Appropriate decoding processing is performed and “HO command” is thus acquired in implementation of “RRC diversity” in a handover procedure between cells under different radio base stations (eNB). A mobile station (UE) of the invention includes a reception unit ( | 03-24-2016 |
20160088538 | HANDOVER METHOD AND RADIO BASE STATION - In implementation of “RRC diversity” in a handover procedure between cells under different radio base stations (eNB), “HO command” is transmitted in a handover destination cell at an appropriate timing. A handover method of the invention includes: a step A of causing a radio base station (eNB #1) to transmit “HO command” to a mobile station (UE); a step B of causing a radio base station (eNB #10) to start transmission of the “HO command” to the mobile station (UE) based on a scheduling start instruction from the radio base station (eNB); and a step C of causing the radio base station (eNB #1) to repeat transmission of the “HO command” to the mobile station (UE) at a predetermined cycle for a period until the detection of a scheduling stop trigger. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088541 | INFORMATION SENDING AND RECEIVING METHODS AND APPARATUSES, AND INFORMATION TRANSMISSION SYSTEM - Information sending and receiving methods and apparatuses, and an information transmission system are disclosed, which are used to resolve a problem in the prior art that cell-edge UE cannot accurately receive information sent by eNBs. The method includes: acquiring, by at least two eNBs, information to be delivered to UE; scrambling, by using a same scrambling code, the information to be delivered to the UE; and delivering scrambled information to the UE at a same moment. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088542 | Multi-RAT Radio Resource Aggregation with Split Bearer Support - This disclosure relates to aggregation of radio resources provided according to multiple radio interfaces. According to some embodiments, a base station may establish a radio bearer with a wireless user equipment (UE) device. The radio bearer may initially utilize a first radio interface between the base station and the UE. The base station may receive an indication to aggregate radio resources of an access point that utilizes a second radio interface for the UE. Based on the indication to aggregate radio resources for the UE, the base station may redirect at least a portion of data of the radio bearer by way of the access point to be exchanged with the UE using the second radio interface. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088543 | Method and System for Achieving Device-to-Device Communications - A method and system for achieving device-to-device (D2D) communication are disclosed. The method includes: a controlling user side requesting a network side for coordinating current D2D communication resources; the network side determining a new D2D communication resource according to current D2D communication demands and D2D candidate resource information of a controlled user side; and using the new D2D resource to achieve the D2D communication between a controlling user and a controlled user. | 03-24-2016 |
20160088575 | INTERFERENCE COORDINATION METHOD, INTERFERENCE COORDINATION DEVICE AND MEASUREMENT DEVICE - A system that determines to modify transmission power of a first small cell: determines an effect of modifying transmission power of the first small cell on a user equipment that is served by the first small cell; and controls modifying the transmission power of the first small cell based on the determination to modify the transmission power and the determined effect of modifying the transmission power on the user equipment that is served by the first small cell. | 03-24-2016 |
20160095018 | TECHNIQUES FOR ACCESSING A CELL USING AN UNLICENSED RADIO FREQUENCY SPECTRUM BAND - Techniques are described for wireless communication. One method includes winning a contention for access to an unlicensed radio frequency spectrum band, transmitting a request message upon winning the contention for access to the unlicensed radio frequency spectrum band, and receiving a response message over the unlicensed radio frequency spectrum band. The request message is transmitted by a user equipment (UE) on an enhanced physical random access channel (ePRACH), to access a cell that operates in the unlicensed radio frequency spectrum band. The response message is received in response to transmitting the request message. | 03-31-2016 |
20160095019 | FACILITATION OF MOBILITY MANAGEMENT ACROSS VARIOUS RADIO TECHNOLOGIES - A more efficient network can be achieved using software-defined networking to configure routing tables to route data traffic to and from proper cells. User equipment address data and network device internet protocol address data can be utilized to define locators specific to a user equipment device in relation to various network devices. For instance, broadcasted network address data representative of a mobile device identifier address can be received by a first network device from the mobile device, wherein the mobile device identifier address comprises network address data related to an internet protocol address of a second network device, the first network device can determine a third network device capable of a communication with the mobile device, and the communication with the mobile device can be routed by the first network device to the third network device. | 03-31-2016 |
20160095020 | Systems and Methods for Improved Network Scanning for Quality of Service Applications - A user equipment (“UE”) that performs methods to connect to multiple radio access networks (RAN) including a home network RANs and roaming RANs to perform communications. An exemplary method performed by a UE initially connected to a Long Term Evolution radio access network (LTE-RAN) of a home network and registered with a voice over LTE (VoLTE) service of the home network to perform voice communications via the LTE-RAN, includes detecting a service disrupting event preventing VoLTE communication with the LTE-RAN, deregistering from the VoLTE service of the home network, scanning for available bands in the LTE-RAN of the home network and while scanning for the available bands in the LTE-RAN of the home network, connecting to a further radio access network (RAN) of the home network that allows circuit-switched communications with the home network, wherein the UE performs voice communications as circuit-switched communications via the further RAN. | 03-31-2016 |
20160095023 | REDUCING ATTACH DELAY FOR A MULTI-SIM UE - Methods, systems, and devices are described for wireless communication. A modem processor of a user equipment (UE) may receive a switch indication directing the modem to utilize a designated SIM and may access identification (ID) information from the SIM, including ID information for a network operator. The modem processor may then retrieve a stored access point name (APN) associated with the network operator and establish a connection to the data network identified by the stored APN. In some cases, the APN may be stored in the modem processor after a successful connection to the data network using the designated SIM. In some cases, the UE may also identify a network priority rule associated with the network operator of the SIM and establish the connection to the data network based on the priority rule. | 03-31-2016 |
20160095026 | HANDOVER IN HETEROGENEOUS RADIO COMMUNICATION NETWORKS BASED ON SYSTEMATIC IMBALANCE DIFFERENCES - Presented is an apparatus and methods for determining if a determined systematic imbalance difference between a serving base station and one or more candidate base stations exceeds a threshold value and, if so, then using uplink information as part of a handover mechanism. The selective usage of uplink information in the handover mechanism can improve handover performance without unduly adding to complexity and signaling overhead. | 03-31-2016 |
20160095027 | Method and Apparatus for Performing Handover in a Wireless Communication System - A method for performing handover by wireless User Equipment (UE) is provided. The UE includes a Long Term Evolution-Mobile Extreme Convergence (LTE-MXC) application processor, a LTE processor and a Digital Signal Processor (DSP). The UE buffers a set of IP packets when a Radio Access Technology (RAT) indicator is less than a pre-defined threshold and sends the set of IP packets to the LTE processor and the DSP. The LTE processor transmits the set of IP packets to the LTE network and sends acknowledgement signals to the LTE-MXC application processor and the DSP. When the handover is complete, the LTE processor sends the transmission status of the set of IP packets to the DSP. The UE also includes multimode Radio Resource Control (RRC) and. Non-Access Stratum (NAS) modules. | 03-31-2016 |
20160095028 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND WIRELESS BASE STATION DEVICE - In a wireless communication system including a wireless terminal device wirelessly connectible to both a macro-cell base station and a small-cell base station, all the user-plane signals destined for the wireless terminal device are transmitted to the small-cell base station; a VoIP signal among the user-plane signals destined for the wireless terminal device is transmitted to the macro-cell base station; the VoIP signal is wirelessly transmitted from the macro-cell base station to the wireless terminal device; any user-plane signal, among the user-plane signals destined for the wireless terminal device, other than the VoIP signal is wirelessly transmitted from the small-cell base station to the wireless terminal device. | 03-31-2016 |
20160095029 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FACILITATING IMPROVED ACCESS FOR EFFICIENT CELL CHANGE - Various methods are provided for facilitating optimized access for efficient offloading in small cell deployments. One example method may comprise causing receiving an indication enabling direct access of one or more cells, causing access to be performed according to the indication of one or more cells that may be accessed, determine an availability of a small cell that fulfills conditions for direct access, changing to small cell if small cell meets conditions, and performing access to small cell if cell is changed and perform access to a macro cell if cell is not changed. | 03-31-2016 |
20160095033 | METHOD TO OPTIMIZE LTE DATA PERFORMANCE FOR SINGLE RADIO HYBRID TUNE AWAY DEVICES THROUGH DISCARD TIMER - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. The apparatus, e.g., UE, suspends a discarding process of data packets associated with a first RAT during tune away by the UE to a second RAT by stopping a discard timer. The UE restarts the discarding process in response to an occurrence of a triggering event. The triggering event may occur when the UE tunes back to the first RAT, or when a duration of the UE tune away to the second RAT exceeds a threshold. The discarding process may be restarted by resuming the discard timer at the point in time where it was stopped or by resetting the timer to zero. | 03-31-2016 |
20160095034 | SERVICE-SPECIFIC AIR-INTERFACE SELECTION - Methods, systems, and devices are described for wireless communication at a UE. A first radio configuration is received. The first radio configuration for a first service on a first air interface to a first base station. A second radio interface is received. The second radio configuration for a second service on a second air interface to a second base station. A first measurement report is transmitted to the first base station over the first air interface. The first measurement report includes information related to at least one of the first air interface and the second air interface. | 03-31-2016 |
20160095036 | SMOOTH UE TRANSFER WITHIN AN EVOLVED PACKET CORE - Techniques described herein may enable Evolved Packet Core (EPC) devices (e.g., Mobility Management Entities (MMEs), Serving Gateways (SGWs), or Packet Data Network Gateways (PGWs)) to transfer a connection with a User Equipment (UE) from one EPC device to another EPC device without a break in service for the UE. The transfer may occur in response to an EPC device being overloaded, an EPC device being added or removed from a logical group of EPC devices, or in response one EPC device becoming more appropriate for the UE than another EPC device (e.g., due to a change in the geographic location of the UE). EPC devices may be implemented as virtual network functions, and the transfer of the UE may occur while the UE is in an active mode or an idle mode. | 03-31-2016 |
20160095037 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, USER TERMINAL, CELLULAR BASE STATION, AND ACCESS POINT - A communication control method according to a first aspect is a method for performing offloading to switch traffic to be transmitted and received between a user terminal and a cellular base station to a wireless LAN system. The communication control method comprises: a step A in which the user terminal transmits a wireless LAN terminal identifier being an identifier of the user terminal in the wireless LAN system, to the cellular base station; and a step B in which the cellular base station, before performing the offloading, transmits the wireless LAN terminal identifier received from the user terminal to an access point of the wireless LAN system. The wireless LAN terminal identifier is used for wireless authentication of the user terminal at the access point. | 03-31-2016 |
20160100334 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR NON-ACCESS STRATUM MESSAGE PROCESSING DURING HANDOVER IN EVOLVED NETWORK - A method and an apparatus for non-access stratum (NAS) message processing during handover in an evolved network are provided. The method includes the following steps. An evolved packet core (EPC) receives a message which indicates that a UE is being handed over sent by a source evolved NodeB (S-eNB), and stops sending an NAS message to the UE temporarily. The EPC receives a message which indicates that the UE returns to an S-eNB service area sent by the S-eNB. The EPC sends the NAS message to the UE through the S-eNB, if needed. With the method and the apparatus, the EPC can acquire a location of the UE in time in the case of a handover failure of the UE, a time limit of a retransmission timer is set precisely, and a specific implementation for forwarding an NAS message through an X2 interface is provided. | 04-07-2016 |
20160100336 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MANAGING CIRCUIT SWITCHED FALLBACK CALLS - Techniques described herein may enable a wireless cellular network to transfer a call from a packet-switched (PS) portion of the wireless cellular network to a circuit-switched (CS) portion of the wireless cellular network, in a manner that ensures that the CS network receiving the call can actually support the call. For instance, before the wireless cellular network selects RAT for the CS network for transferring a call, the wireless cellular network may identify a call type for the call (e.g., simple voice call, video call, etc.), identify a RAT for the CS network that can support the call type, and proceed to transfer the call to the CS portion of the wireless cellular network that can support the call type, thus ensuring that the call is not dropped as a result of the transfer. | 04-07-2016 |
20160100337 | CIRCUIT SWITCHED FALLBACK METHOD AND DEVICE - The embodiments of the present application discloses a circuit switched fallback method, a UE, an MSC, and an MME. The method includes: sending, by a UE to an MME, a request message for requesting to perform CSFB; receiving, by the UE, a switch command sent by an eNodeB; releasing or holding a default CS call of the UE after the UE switches to the CS domain according to the switch command, where the default CS call is generated by the UE according to the switch command; and by using an MSC, initiating, by the UE, a CS call or receiving a CS call. According to the circuit switched fallback method, the UE, the MSC, and the MME in the embodiments of the present application, circuit switched fallback can be implement in a manner of switching by a UE from a PS domain to a CS domain, and reduce a delay. | 04-07-2016 |
20160100338 | NETWORK HANDOVER METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM - The present invention discloses a network handover method, where after UE in an LTE network requests circuit switched fallback CSFB, an MME instructs an eNB to move the UE from the LTE network to a 2G or 3G network, and requests an MSC to hand over the UE from the LTE network to a CS domain of the 2G or 3G network for the CSFB, so that the 2G or 3G network allocates a CS domain resource to the UE. After handing over to the CS domain, the UE may perform a CS domain call. By using embodiments of the present invention, an access delay is reduced when the UE accesses the CS domain of the 2G or 3G network, duration of an entire voice call is shortened, and user experience is improved. | 04-07-2016 |
20160100339 | PROVIDING CIRCUIT SWITCHED OPERATION IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - In an evolved UMTS terrestrial radio access network (E-UTRAN), paging may be performed using an international mobile subscriber identity (IMSI) or S-temporary mobile subscriber identity (S-TMSI). With the paging, a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) may send an extended service request message to the E-UTRAN and perform circuit switched (CS) fallback. | 04-07-2016 |
20160100343 | CELL DISCOVERY METHOD AND APPARATUS - Embodiments of the present invention provide a cell discovery method and apparatus, where the method includes: determining, by a second network node, modified timing of the second network node according to acquired timing modification information; receiving, by the second network node, uplink resource information of user equipment sent by a first network node; performing, by the second network node, detection on an uplink signal of the user equipment by using the modified timing and according to the uplink resource information; and when detecting proximity of the user equipment, sending, by the second network node, proximity information to the first network node. The cell discovery method and apparatus provided in the embodiments of the present invention prevent from triggering UE to perform unnecessary cell measurement or handover, thereby reducing network signaling load and lowering power consumption of the UE. | 04-07-2016 |
20160100374 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING INFORMATION FOR SYNCHRONIZATION OF USER EQUIPMENT BY BASE STATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR SAME - The present invention relates to a method for transmitting information for synchronization of a user equipment by a base station in a wireless communication system and apparatus for the same. In one embodiment of the present invention, a source base station transmits a request message requesting uplink synchronization information according to a predetermined reference to a target base station, receives a response message including the synchronization information from the target base station in response to the requested message, and transmits the received synchronization information to one or more user equipments which are to move to a cell serviced by the target base station. The synchronization information is used when the user equipments move to the cell serviced by the target base station without a process of acquiring the synchronization information. | 04-07-2016 |
20160105823 | HEADER COMPRESSION OPTIMISATION METHOD DURING AND AFTER HANDOVERS IN CELLULAR COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The present invent on concerns a method for optimizing ROHC RTP (Robust Header Compression Real Time Protocol) compression applied to IP header of data packets stream so as to use more compact formats enable to remain in a steady state, to never discard received packet, and to serve radio resources without requiring to modify ROHC specification. In the method, when handover or mobility procedure is started, new reference values are normally added to a sliding compression window, but no reference value is removed from the window as long as the handover or mobility procedure is on going. After the handover or mobility procedure is complete, when the number of values transmitted on the new radio link are appropriate to cope against the error properties on the new link, all older values can be removed at once from the compression window, thereby reverting to normal window operation. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105824 | DYNAMIC GENERATION OF PER-STATION REALM LISTS FOR HOT SPOT CONNECTIONS - Per-station realm lists are dynamically generating per-station for hot spot connections to access points by roaming stations. A query for a list of realms is received from a roaming station when connecting to a hot spot. Using an MAC address or other station identity, a list of available realms narrowed to a subset of per-station realms sent to the station. Narrowing is performed on-the-fly with respect to at least one aspects. A last N realms are retrieved from a database record searched by MAC address. The list is further narrowed by removing realms that are inaccessible or otherwise recently shown to have bad link quality. Additional ranking factors can narrow or rearrange the realm list based on financial agreements, popularity, trends, and the like. A selection from the list of realms is received from the station. The access point then authenticates the station with the selected realm. If successful, data traffic concerning the station can be forwarded through the hot spot on behalf of the selected realm. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105825 | MOBILITY IN MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - The present disclosure relates to user equipment ( | 04-14-2016 |
20160105828 | Communication Device of Handling Network-based Internet Protocol Flow Mobility - A communication device which communicates with a network apparatus via a packet data network (PDN) connection simultaneously relying on a first access and a second access is disclosed. The communication device comprises a storage unit for storing instructions of transmitting a first message indicating a status of the second access to the network apparatus; and receiving a second message transmitted by the network apparatus, wherein the second message includes configuration indicating transferring one or more Internet Protocol (IP) flows between the first access and the second access, wherein the first access is used to access a cellular network, and the second access is used to access a non-cellular network; and a processing means, coupled to the storage unit, configured to execute the instructions stored in the storage unit. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105835 | MULTI-MODE POWER SAVING - A user equipment (UE) avoids entering a limited service state when the UE enters a weak coverage area where a communication service outage occurs with respect to a first radio access technology (RAT) and a second RAT. In one instance, the UE remains on the first RAT during the communication service outage, based on a location of the UE by preventing switching from the first RAT to a second RAT. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105836 | DYNAMIC RESOURCE ALLOCATION IN A HIGH EFFICIENCY WIRELESS LAN - The present invention relates to a method and apparatus for dynamically allocating resources in a High Efficiency WLAN (Wireless Local Area) (HEW). According to one aspect of the present invention, a method for resource switching in a WLAN may be provided. The method may include receiving, by a station (STA) from an access point (AP), a downlink multiple user (DL MU) frame on a resource indicated by first resource allocation information, the DL MU frame including the first resource allocation information and second resource allocation information for a next MU frame following the DL MU frame, and processing, by the STA, the next MU frame based on a resource indicated by the second resource allocation information. | 04-14-2016 |
20160112905 | MULTISERVICE COMMUNICATION DEVICE WITH DEDICATED CONTROL CHANNEL - A multiservice communication device includes a plurality of transceivers that wirelessly transceive data with a corresponding plurality of networks in accordance with a corresponding plurality of network protocols. A control channel transceiver transceives control channel data with a remote management unit including local control data sent to the management unit and remote control data received from the management unit. A processing module processes the remote control data and generates a least one control signal in response thereto, the at least one control signal for adapting at least one of the plurality of transceivers based on the remote control data. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112910 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR HANDLING DEVICE TO DEVICE (D2D) COMMUNICATION - A system and a method for a base station to reduce signaling overhead in device-to-device (D2D) communication are provided. The method includes a list of one or more destination identities (IDs) in a signaling message from at least one of UE and source base station, receiving a destination index in a buffer status report (BSR) from UE to request dedicated resources for transmitting D2D communication packets to a destination, determining the destination ID corresponding to destination index received in the BSR using the list of one or more destination IDs received from at least one of UE and source base station wherein the destination index is the index of destination ID in the list of destination IDs received, and allocating resources to the UE based on the determined destination ID. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112914 | TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION METHOD OF MTC DEVICE - One embodiment of the present specification provides a transmission and reception method of a machine type communication (MTC) device. The transmission and reception method of an MTC device can comprise the steps of: switching from connectivity with the first cell to connectivity with a second cell if data to be transmitted and received is generated in a state of connectivity with a first cell; transmitting and receiving the data in a state of connectivity with the second cell; and switching from connectivity with the second cell to connectivity with the first cell when the transmission and reception of the data are completed. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112915 | Cell Reselection Method and Apparatus, Base Station - Disclosed are a cell reselection method, comprising: when a source cell determines that a UE meets an initial reselection condition of reselecting a target cell, the source cell performing a local search to find whether a reselection threshold parameter of reselecting the source cell from the target cell exists, if not, reselecting the target cell for the UE, and if yes, further determining whether a corresponding parameter of the UE in the source cell is smaller than or equal to the reselection threshold parameter, if not, not reselecting the target cell for the UE, and if yes, reselecting the target cell for the UE. Further disclosed are a cell reselection apparatus and a base station. The technical solution of the present invention avoids asymmetry of reselection policy between a TD cell and a GSM cell, avoids pingpong reselection between the TD cell and the GSM cell, shortens the duration that the paging of a VE is off during reselection, reduces the network load, and making the VE energy conservative. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112917 | Seamless Roaming in Wireless Networks - A system and method for providing a seamless transition between access points for mobile devices. The method comprises associating a unique identifier for a plurality of mobile stations with a unique identifier for a first network in an acknowledgment table, then, upon receiving a frame from a mobile station, acknowledging the reception of the frame if the frame includes the unique identifier for the mobile station and the unique identifier for the network. The transfer of operation between access points is effectuated through the use of control circuitry which transfers portions of the contents of the acknowledgement table between various access points. This has the effect that the mobile stations does not sense a change in access points and thus the roaming from a first access point to a second access point is seamless. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112919 | SEAMLESS APPLICATION CONNECTIVITY - In some implementations, a request to switch to using a second network connection is received at a first computing device that is currently communicating with a second computing device over a first network connection. While still using the first network connection, the second network connection may be initiated. During a period of transition, the first computing device may communicate with the second computing device using both the first network connection and the second network connection. To use both the first and second network connections, data from the second computing device may be received over the first network connection, and data may be sent to the second computing device over the second network connection. The first computing device may identify an end of the period of transition. In response, the first computing device may communicate with the second computing device using only the second network connection. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112921 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, USER TERMINAL, AND PROCESSOR - A communication control method is a method for performing offload to transfer a traffic load of a cellular base station to an access point. The communication control method comprises a step of maintaining without releasing the first connection, by a user terminal that have established a first connection with the cellular base station, even when the offload is started after establishing a second connection with the access point; and a determining step of determining, by the user terminal, whether the offload is continued or canceled after the offload is started. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112926 | METHOD FOR EFFICIENTLY PERFORMING INTERRAT HANDOVER IN A RADIO ACCESS SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a radio access system, and more particularly, to a method for efficiently performing handover in circumstances in which two networks use different communication methods, and to an apparatus using the method. According to one embodiment of the present invention, a method for performing handover in a first type of cell by a terminal supporting an inter-radio access technology (interRAT) handover (HO) comprises the steps of: searching for cells of a second type that are operating in accordance with a communication type different from that of said first type of cell; receiving a minimal reception signal quality value and signal quality offset information from a second type of base station which is found in step 1; determining whether or not the said found second type of base station is available for service based on a signal quality measurement value, a power compensation value, and said minimal reception signal quality value and signal quality offset information of said found second type of base station; and performing handover to said second type of base station when the latter is determined to be available for service. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112978 | Air-Interface-Based Synchronization Method, Base Station, Control Apparatus, and Wireless Communications System - The present invention discloses an air-interface-based synchronization method, a base station, a control apparatus of the base station, and a wireless communications system. A time difference between base stations is acquired by means of signalling interworking in a non-contention based random access process of user equipment handed over between the base stations, and a time adjustment value of a non-reference base station is acquired according to reference time of a reference base station, so that the non-reference base station performs time adjustment according to the time adjustment value, thereby implementing time synchronization between the non-reference base station and the reference base station. The present invention uses an existing wireless network to simply and effectively implement air-interface-based synchronization between base stations without using an expensive synchronization device, thereby reducing construction costs and maintenance costs and achieving technical effects of cost-effectiveness and convenience. | 04-21-2016 |
20160119347 | Method for Updating Identity Information about Packet Gateway, AAA Server and Packet Gateway - A method for updating identity information of a packet gateway, an authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) server and a packet gateway. The method includes: a decision-making network element receiving a message which carries user equipment (UE) capability indication information and is sent by an information transmission network element; the decision-making network element deciding whether to update identity information of the packet gateway or not according to the UE capability indication information carried in the message and/or local information. The technical solution can be applied to distinguish R11 UE and R12 UE, and to ensure supporting both the R11 UE and the R12 UE normally accessing to a 3GPP core network through a 3GPP access system and a non-3GPP access system simultaneously. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119819 | SESSION AWARE ACCESS POINT LOAD BALANCING - The present disclosure discloses a method and a network device for session aware access point load balancing. Specifically, a network device monitors data corresponding to a plurality of client devices associated with a first access point. Then, the network device determines whether the data matches particular criteria. Responsive to determining that the data matches the particular criteria, the network device select at least a first client device of the plurality of client devices for disassociation and/or de-authentication. Moreover, the network device causes disassociation and/or de-authentication of the first client device from the first access point. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119830 | RADIO TERMINAL, NETWORK APPARATUS, AND METHOD THEREFOR - A radio terminal establishes a control connection with a network, and receives, from the network, a selection policy used for selection of a core network entity that provides a mobility management service or a data transmission service for the radio terminal. Further, the radio terminal selects a target core network entity based on the selection policy, and transmits, to the network, a request message for requesting provision of the mobility management service or the data transmission service by the target core network entity. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119832 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION BASE STATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND WIRELESS MOBILE STATION - Once an MS's destination area has been determined, the MS receives a frequency list of BSs belonging to the destination area from a broadcasting BS before disconnecting the current network connection, and creates and stores several Search Configurations. When performing a cell search upon arrival at the destination area, the MS connects to a broadcasting BS in the destination and receives a frequency list of the BSs belonging to the destination area. The MS compares the frequency list that it maintains with the frequency list broadcasted from the BS in the destination and performs a cell search according to the result of the comparison. This leads to achieving reliable network connection and reducing time to establish connection. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119837 | Mapping Scheme Employed in an Information Centric Network to Manage Domain-Based Security and Mobility - A networking system comprising a virtual group controller in an information centric network configured to enable mobility and security for a plurality of users groups of the information centric network, a plurality of user groups coupled to the virtual group controller and associated with the users, a plurality of agents that are each associated with one of the user groups, and a database for trusted service profile coupled to the virtual group controller, wherein the virtual group controller is configured to interact with the agents to enable mobility for the user groups using a server-less domain-based naming scheme. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119839 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A communication apparatus | 04-28-2016 |
20160119840 | UPLINK SWITCHING OF COMMUNICATION LINKS FOR MOBILE STATIONS IN DUAL CONNECTIVITY - The invention relates to a method for configuring subframes for uplink/downlink communication for a mobile station (UE) not supporting dual uplink but located in a communication system supporting dual connectivity. The UE is connected simultaneously to two base stations via a respective communication link. An uplink transmission pattern is determined, defining whether subframes are usable for uplink communication to the first or second base station or for switching the uplink communication between the two communication links. Based on the determined uplink transmission pattern, and further based on configuration of the mobile station for supporting dual reception or not, a downlink reception is derived for downlink communication between the two base stations and the mobile station, the downlink reception pattern defining whether the subframes are usable for downlink communication from the first or second base station or for switching the downlink communication between the two communication links. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119841 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER BETWEEN CORE NETWORK ENTITIES IN A PACKET-SWITCHED NETWORK - A method and apparatus for performing a L3 handover between CNs in a packet-switched network are provided. When a UE moves from an old RAN to a new RAN, the UE sends a measurement report message including cell information to the old RAN. The old or new RAN determines whether to perform a L3 handover. If the L3 handover is required, a tunnel is established between the new RAN and a new CN. The UE performs a handover from the old RAN to the new RAN, without establishing a tunnel between the new RAN and an old CN. Upon detection of the movement of the UE, the new RAN sends a L2 handover complete message to the old RAN. After moving to the new RAN, the UE acquires a new IP address, performs the L3 handover, and communicates with the new CN through the new RAN. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119845 | OPEN WIRELESS ARCHITECTURE (OWA) UNIFIED AIRBORNE AND TERRESTRIAL COMMUNICATIONS ARCHITECTURE - This invention relates to an Open Wireless Architecture (OWA) unified airborne and terrestrial communications architecture providing optimal high-speed connections with open radio transmission technologies (RTTs) between aircrafts and ground cells, and between different aircrafts in Ad-Hoc or Mesh network group, to construct the multi-dimensional unified information delivery platform across the airborne networks and the terrestrial networks wherein the same OWA mobile device or OWA mobile computer can be used seamlessly and continuously both in the aircrafts and on the ground. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119846 | METHOD OF CONTROLLING COMMUNICATION MODES FOR WIRELESS ENTITY AND USER EQUIPMENT, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING THE SAME - A method of controlling communication modes for a wireless entity and a user equipment (UE), and a communication system using the same method. In one of the exemplary embodiments, the disclosure is directed to a method of controlling communication modes used by a wireless entity. The method would include not limited to receiving traffic loading information of a licensed spectrum used by a cellular network, detecting an interference situation of an unlicensed spectrum, selecting an operating mode from the communication modes according to the traffic loading information and the interference situation, and operating at the selected operating mode on the unlicensed spectrum. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119848 | METHOD FOR SERVICE DATA MANAGEMENT, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM - A service data management method. The method includes: receiving, by the NOA, a service request of a first user equipment UE, and forwarding the service request to the SP server by using the NOC, so that the SP server returns service data requested by the first UE; determining, by the NOA, that the service data has been stored in the NOA, and sending hit indication information to the NOC, so that the NOC replaces a data segment in the service data with preconfigured replacement information, where bandwidth occupied by the preconfigured replacement information is smaller than bandwidth occupied by the data segment; and determining, by the NOA, a corresponding data segment according to received replacement information, and sending the data segment, which has been stored, to the first UE. Solutions provided in embodiments of the present invention can reduce the backhaul bandwidth occupancy. | 04-28-2016 |
20160119967 | RESUMING PACKET SERVICES IN A MOBILE NETWORK - This disclosure relates generally to resuming packet services in a mobile network. A device, method, and/or system may include switching, with user equipment, from communicating with a first radio access network to communicating with a second radio access network, setting, with a processor of the user equipment, a register of the user equipment to initiate packet services with the first radio access network, and transmitting, with the user equipment, a request to a core network node of the first radio access network to resume communications with the first radio access network based, at least in part, on the register. | 04-28-2016 |
20160127086 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING SIGNAL - A method and apparatus for transmitting a signal to a terminal are provided. The method includes: determining at least one of a plurality of resource blocks (RBs) of a frequency resource and a time resource in a subframe that transmits to the terminal; allocating a power rate to each of a first signal and a second signal to transmit to the terminal; and transmitting the first signal and the second signal through the RB according to the allocated power rate. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127955 | TECHNIQUES FOR HANDOVER PROCEDURE MANAGEMENT - Techniques for handover procedure management are described herein. An example method may include monitoring, at a target base station, reference signal information associated with a UE based on a reference signal configuration of the UE received by the target base station from a source base station. Additionally, the example method may include estimating, at the target base station, timing information for the UE based on the reference signal information. Further, the example method may include transmitting, by the target base station, the timing information to the source base station, where the source base station provides the timing information to the UE for handover to the target base station. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127957 | CONTROLLING CONNECTION OF AN IDLE MODE USER EQUIPMENT TO A RADIO ACCESS NETWORK NODE - Methods and apparatus for controlling whether a user equipment attached in idle mode to a first radio access technology should be served by a second radio access technology. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127958 | MOBILITY MANAGEMENT FOR WIRELESS NETWORKS - Systems and methods for mobility management in wireless networks. One method includes identifying a mobility profile for a wireless device, selecting a first active mobility setting and a first idle mobility setting from the mobility profile, and determining instructions for network elements to engage in mobility management for a wireless device in an active state. The method also includes determining instructions for network elements to engage in mobility management for the wireless device in an idle state. Further, the method includes providing instructions to network elements in accordance with the first active mobility setting when the wireless device is in the active state, and providing instructions to network elements in accordance with the first idle mobility setting when the wireless device is in the idle state. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127959 | PDN GATEWAY DEVICE AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - When a handover of a UE ( | 05-05-2016 |
20160127961 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING HANDOVER OF USER EQUIPMENT, BASE STATION, USER EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEM - The present embodiment of the invention discloses a method for controlling handover of user equipment, including: acquiring indication information used for controlling handover of user equipment, where the indication information is used for indicating a cell or base station that can provide a multi-connectivity service to the user equipment; determining, according to the indication information, from the cell or base station that can provide a multi-connectivity service to the user equipment, a target cell or a target base station for handover; and sending a handover request to a base station of the target cell or the target base station. By means of the technical solutions of the present embodiment of the invention, user equipment can be accurately handed over to a base station that provides a multi-connectivity service to the user equipment. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127962 | DYNAMIC MOBILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - The present document describes a dynamic mobility management system. The disclosure describes a mobility management mechanism that is able to maintain the IP address assigned when a session was initiated in the user device to exchange data packets between the end-points of a given data service. This is possible through the management of the distributed mobility anchors, tunnels, interfaces and IP addresses, where a mobile node is configured to bind to the previously accessed mobility access router, such that the previously established network sessions of the mobile node are re-established through said previously accessed mobility access router. The disclosure is applied in the Information and Communication Technology domain, more precisely in the mobility management in communication networks. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127963 | METHODS FOR OPERATING NETWORK NODES AND RELATED NETWORK NODES - According to some embodiments of inventive concepts, a method of operating a first node in a radio access network may be provided. The method may include communicating an authorization for a Proximity Services (ProSe) capability of a wireless device with a second node of the radio access network, wherein the authorization identifies at least one of a plurality of ProSe communication capabilities. The authorization for the ProSe capability of the wireless device may be communicated as an IE of an Initial Context Setup Request message, a UE Context Modification Request message, an S1 Handover Request message, and/or an X2 Handover Request message. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127965 | Device of Handling Proximity Service Application Code - A communication device comprises a processing means configured to execute the instructions of transmitting a first announce request message comprising a proximity service (ProSe) Application ID to a network, when registering to a first public land mobile network (PLMN); receiving a first announcing response message comprising a first ProSe Application Code corresponding to the ProSe Application ID and a value of a first validity timer in response to the first announce request message from the network; switching a registration of the communication device from the first PLMN to a second PLMN; transmitting a second announce request message comprising the ProSe Application ID to the network in response to the switching; and receiving a second announcing response message comprising a second ProSe Application Code corresponding to the ProSe Application ID and a value of a second validity timer in response to the second announce request message from the network. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127966 | OPENFLOW CONTROLLER AND CONTROL METHOD FOR SUPPORTING HANDOVER IN MOBILE IPV6 BASED ON SOFTWARE DEFINITION NETWORK - The openflow controller include a storage device that stores an application to performing a handover based on a handover policy; and a processor that executes the application stored in storage device; wherein in response to execution of the application, the processor decides handover of the mobile node connected to a first mobile access gateway, and selects a second mobile access gateway as a handover target, and in order to allow a localized mobility anchor connected to the openflow controller to deliver data packets to the mobile node through the second mobile access gateway, instead of the first mobile access gateway, the processor sends a message to each of the first mobile access gateway, the second mobile access gateway, and the localized mobility anchor in response the handover policy. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127968 | SHORT MESSAGE TRANSMISSION AND HANDOVER PROCEDURES - The present invention relates to an improved method for handover of a mobile node from E-UTRAN to UTRAN in a scenario where SMS is the only service of the mobile node. The improved handover method allows saving radio resources by establishing the signalling connection for SMS exchange in the target network, and avoiding the data connection in the target network, since it is not used. The MME takes the decision to establish or not the data connection in the target UTRAN, and accordingly instructs the SGSN and UE to set the corresponding PDP contexts for the data connection to a “preserved” state, so as to avoid the establishment of same. Embodiments further relate to improved SMS delivery for IDLE mode UEs that activate ISR so as to avoid the involvement of the MSC server. Instead, packet-switched domain nodes are to be involved only. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127971 | HANDLING OF GAPS IN USE OF A RADIO TRANSCEIVER - A method is disclosed of a wireless communication device comprising a radio transceiver and a first radio access control unit adapted to control operation of the wireless communication device in association with a first network node of a first cellular communication network. The method comprises (during use of the radio transceiver by the first radio access control unit) indicating a worse than actual channel condition to the first network node, monitoring a change in code rate of signals transmitted from the first network node in response to the worse than actual channel condition indication, determining a relation between the worse than actual channel condition indication and the code rate change, and determining an offset value based on the determined relation. The offset value is applicable to offset a channel condition indication value to be transmitted to the first network node in association with a gap in the use of the radio transceiver by the first radio access control unit. Corresponding computer program product, arrangement and wireless communication device are also disclosed, as well as using a server for storing the offset values. | 05-05-2016 |
20160128043 | DYNAMIC MOBILE AD HOC INTERNET OF THINGS (IOT) GATEWAY - The disclosure generally relates to a dynamic ad hoc gateway that can be configured to provide inter-network communication among different Internet of Things (IoT) networks (or subnetworks). For example, in various embodiments, connectivity and capability information may be advertised via a personal IoT network from a first potential gateway to a first device and other potential gateways and connectivity and capability information advertised from the other potential gateways may be similarly received at the first potential gateway via the personal IoT network. The connectivity and capability information advertised from the first potential gateway and the other potential gateways may then be evaluated to determine whether the first potential gateway is an elected gateway and a secure private network and an external interface from the secure private network may be established for one or more devices coupled to the elected gateway. | 05-05-2016 |
20160135089 | HANDLING OF WLAN OFFLOADABILITY INDICATION - A method of wireless communication by a UE includes receiving an indication information; determining, based on the indication information, whether a connection of the UE is authorized to be offloaded from a first channel to a second channel; determining, when the connection is not authorized to be offloaded, whether there is an ongoing handover procedure to offload the connection of the UE from the first channel to the second channel or whether the indication information is received in a message corresponding to a request to deactivate a default evolved packet system (EPS) bearer of the connection of the UE. The method further includes disregarding the indication information when the connection is not authorized to be offloaded and it is determined that either there is an ongoing handover procedure to offload the connection of the UE from the first channel to the second channel or the message corresponds to a request to deactivate a default EPS bearer of the connection. | 05-12-2016 |
20160135093 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR HANDLING SINGLE RADIO VOICE CALL CONTINUITY HANDOVER - A method for handling a SRVCC handover in a wireless communication system includes determining whether a voice session between a UE and an IMS is initiated by a web RTC IMS client or a regular IMS client of the UE, in response to the voice session initiated via the web RTC IMS client, indicating to a serving eNB that the SRVCC handover is not applicable, and in response to the voice session initiated via the regular RTC IMS client, indicating to the serving eNB that the SRVCC handover is applicable. An apparatus for handling a SRVCC handover in a wireless communication system includes a transceiver, and a processor configured to determine whether a voice session between a UE and an IMS is initiated by a web RTC IMS client or a regular IMS client of the UE. | 05-12-2016 |
20160135094 | Event Notification in a Hybrid Network - When a mobile station requests circuit services notifications through a packet switched network, a mobile switching center sets a forwarding indicator. When the MSC detects an event indicative of a change in the status of the mobile station, the MSC sends an event notification to the packet switched network if the forwarding indicator is set to true. In the packet switched network, the base station can use the event notifications to manage communication resources used for packet data communications with the mobile station. | 05-12-2016 |
20160135096 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD - A wireless communication device executes first and second virtual transmission nodes in a wireless communication network. The wireless communication device includes a database for storing identification information of the first and second virtual transmission nodes, and a centralized service unit for accessing the database. When a handover from the first virtual transmission node to the second virtual transmission node occurs, the first virtual transmission node requests the centralized service unit to check whether the second virtual transmission node is co-located in the wireless communication device, and forwards buffered data packets to the second virtual transmission node internally without IPsec processing. | 05-12-2016 |
20160135097 | UE HANDLING OF STALE OR INCOMPLETE PDUS AFTER CELL RESELECTION OR RECONFIGURATION - The disclosure provides for a UE handling messages in wireless communication. The disclosure provides for a UE partially exchanging a first signaling-related message associated with a first UE configuration with a network entity and triggering a state transition message that initiates a change to a second UE configuration different from the first UE configuration. In an aspect, the UE determines that the first message has not been successfully received or successfully transmitted. In an aspect, the UE sends an indication message to coordinate discarding of the first message with the network entity and receives, after sending the indication message, a second signaling-related message associated with the second UE configuration. In another aspect, the UE, after partially sending a signaling-related message, receives a reconfiguration request associated with a second UE configuration. In an aspect, the UE determines that the message has not been successfully transmitted and causes a reconfiguration failure. | 05-12-2016 |
20160135098 | RESOURCE ALLOCATION IN TARGET CELL AFTER HANDOVER - A system is proposed to provide handover in a mobile telecommunications environment, particularly applicable to 3GPP networks, in which a user device, such as a mobile telephone provides a buffer status report to the target base station during a handover procedure. The target base station uses this status report to allocate appropriate resources for uplink data to be transmitted from the user device to the target base station. | 05-12-2016 |
20160135100 | Traffic Steering from a First Access Network to a Second Access Network - There is provided a method in a node in a first access network, the method comprising sending ( | 05-12-2016 |
20160135105 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR UNINTERRUPTED COMMUNICATION ACROSS BLACK SPOTS FOR MULTI INTERFACE MOBILE NODES - A system and method for protection against loss of communication of a mobile node crossing a black spot region is disclosed. The system to prevent loss of communication with the mobile node consists of a mobile node, RF coverage map generator, black spot predictor, and a vertical handover process. The mobile node can experience uninterrupted communication across black spots. This is achieved by executing vertical handover before entering a black spot region, which is anticipated by using RF coverage maps and mobility pattern of the mobile node. | 05-12-2016 |
20160135248 | Methods for Multi-Point Carrier Aggregation Configuration and Data Forwarding - Methods of multi-point carrier aggregation configuration and data forwarding are disclosed. In one embodiment of the invention, a primary connection is established between a UE and a primary base station in a primary cell with a first UE-ID. A second connection is configured between the UE and a second base station in a secondary cell with a second UE-ID. Component carriers from the primary and the second connections are configured and aggregated. Mobility management functions are performed on the primary connection. In another embodiment of the current invention, a first UE data is received from a primary connection with a UE connecting to a first base station, a second UE data is received from a second base station. The first UE data and the second UE data are combined. A third UE data from a network entity is distributed to the first and the second base station. | 05-12-2016 |
20160142896 | Transfer of Emergency Services Session Between Disparate Subsystems - Methods and nodes for coordinating communication sessions are described herein. A method includes providing, by a control system, a signaling anchor point at a domain transfer function in a visited multimedia subsystem for an access signaling leg and a remote access signaling leg for a communication session between a user element and a public service access point and coordinating call signaling for the communication session via the access signaling leg and the remote signaling leg. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142925 | OPTIMIZING A NEIGHBOR LIST - In one embodiment, a neighbor access point list is obtained. Statistics are maintained for a current access point that a client is currently associated with, including previous access points previous clients have roamed from prior to associating with the current access point, and next access points the previous clients associated with. The neighbor access point list for the client is optimized, by determining one or more previous clients that associated with a same previous access point as the client and prioritizing access points in the optimized neighbor access point list, based on the next access points the one or more previous clients associated with. The optimized neighbor access point list is sent to the client. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142943 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COMMUNICATING DELIVER OF DATA PACKETS TO A USER EQUIPMENT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In a communication system ( | 05-19-2016 |
20160142945 | Methods of and Nodes for Selecting a Target Core Network for Handing Over a Voice Session of a Terminal - A method of selecting a target core network of a communication network for handing over a voice session of a terminal from a packet switched source radio access network (RAN) to a target RAN. The voice session is anchored in an Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem, and the selected target core network includes a circuit switched domain which is associated with the target RAN and supports voice session continuity to hand over the voice session from the source RAN to the target RAN. The target RAN is associated with a network identification of the target core network. The method is executed by a node and includes receiving a network identification of at least one target core network associated with at least one target RAN. The target core network is selected based on an indicated support of voice session continuity by the network identification. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142947 | Handover in a Radio Communication Network - The present invention relates to providing a method and a network node that prevents radio bearers from being dropped if a mismatch in RLC Mode exists between source Node and target Node. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142951 | DATA COMPRESSION TECHNIQUES FOR HANDOVER AND RADIO LINK FAILURE RECOVERY - A user equipment (UE) and source base station may use data compression techniques for data packets sent between them. During a handover, the source base station may provide data compression context to a target base station, thus enabling the target base station to continue the data compression following the handover without having to reestablish the data compression context. The source base station may determine data compression capabilities of the UE or the target base station, or both, and may communicate the determined data compression capabilities to the UE or target base station. The source base station may identify at least one gap in a sequence of packets received from the UE, and communicate the existence of the gap to the target base station, which may request retransmission of packets associated with the gap. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142954 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for and apparatus for performing handover in a wireless communication system is provided. A wireless device transmits measurement results configured for a secondary radio access technologies (RAT) system, receives information on routing modification based on the measurement results, from a network entity of a primary RAT system and performs a handover to a target access network according to the information on routing modification. The secondary RAT system is used for a user plane (U-plane) data, and the handover is determined based on at least one of a quality of service (QoS) information, load information about the primary RAT system and secondary RAT system, and a network preference information of the UE. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142955 | METHODS AND NETWORK NODES FOR ENHANCED MOBILITY BETWEEN MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS - The disclosure relates to methods, a wireless device, a radio access node and computer programs for improving wireless device mobility between a first radio access network arranged to operate according to a first radio access technology and a second radio access network arranged to operate according to a second radio access technology. In particular, the disclosure relates to handover preparation procedure to improve handover of a wireless device ( | 05-19-2016 |
20160142957 | CELL ACCESS METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM - Embodiments of the present invention provide a cell access method, an apparatus, and a system, where the method includes: when user equipment camps on a first cell, receiving, by the user equipment, a first signal offset of the first cell and a random access failure threshold of the first cell; attempting, by the user equipment, to perform random access to the first cell, and counting a quantity of random access failures; and if the quantity of random access failures reaches the random access failure threshold, performing cell reselection, by the user equipment, by using the first signal offset for the first cell; and if no cell meets a service condition in cell reselection, performing cell reselection, by the user equipment, without using the first signal offset. Therefore, a service interruption problem of user equipment when random access to a cell fails in the prior art can be resolved. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142969 | First Network Node, Second Network Node, and Methods Therein, of Providing a Last Used Public Land Mobile Network Identifier - A method performed by a first network node of providing a last used PLMN ID in LTE to a second network node, the first network node and the second network node operating in a wireless communications network. The method comprises providing the last used PLMN ID in LTE of a wireless device in the wireless communications network, to the second network node, as soon as a Circuit Switched, CS, call due to a CSFB procedure has been setup. The providing of the PLMN ID is performed by one of: adding information about the last used PLMN ID in LTE to an existing message from the first network node to the second network node, and defining a new message from the first network node to the second network node. The new message comprises the last used PLMN ID in LTE. | 05-19-2016 |
20160143081 | METHOD FOR CONFIGURING DUAL CONNECTIVITY FOR TERMINAL BY BASE STATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR SAME - The present invention relates to a method for configuring dual connectivity for a terminal by a base station in a wireless communication system and an apparatus for the same. The method for configuring the dual connectivity for the terminal by the base station in the wireless communication system according to an embodiment of the present invention comprises: receiving a service request message from a terminal connected to a first base station; transmitting, to a second base station, a handover request message including a request for configuring dual connectivity with the terminal when the service request message includes a service that the first base station cannot support; and transmitting, to the terminal, a connectivity configuration message indicating connectivity between the terminal and the second base station on the basis of a handover response message received from the second base station in response to the handover request message. | 05-19-2016 |
20160150443 | PEER-ASSISTED SEAMLESS MOBILITY FOR PEER-TO-PEER DATA TRAFFIC - Systems and methods are disclosed for maintaining continuity of a peer-to-peer group session. The method may include exchanging a first P2P group session communication with a member of the P2P group via a direct data traffic connection, requesting session data from an application server, conveying the session data to a proxy UE, wherein the proxy UE is a member of the P2P group, and exchanging a second P2P group session communication with the application server in accordance with the session data. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150445 | TECHNIQUES FOR MANAGING INTER-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY HANDOVERS FOR HIGH GAIN USER EQUIPMENT - A method, an apparatus, and a computer-readable medium for wireless communication are provided. The apparatus may include memory and at least one processor, coupled to the memory, configured to determine a power parameter associated with communication using a first radio access technology (RAT). The at least one processor may be further configured to determine a quality parameter associated with the communication using the first RAT. The at least one processor may be further configured to apply, based on the quality parameter, an offset to the power parameter to form a modified power parameter. The at least one processor may be further configured to transmit a measurement report including the modified power parameter. The apparatus may be a wireless device, such as a user equipment (UE) and, more specifically, a high gain UE. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150446 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING ENHANCED SINGLE-RADIO-VOICE-CALL-CONTINUITY - A method and apparatus can be configured to transmit, by a Service-Centralization-and-Continuity Application Server, a message to an Access Transfer Control Function. The method may also include receiving an address from the Access Transfer Control Function. The method may also include transmitting the received address to a Home-Subscriber Server. The address is stored as a Session-Transfer Number. The method may also include retrieving information relating to Single-Radio-Voice-Call-Continuity capability. The method may also include retrieving any address that was previously stored as a Session-Transfer-Number. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150447 | MOBILITY MANAGEMENT METHOD, EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEM - Embodiments of the present invention provide a mobility management method, including: receiving, by a target eNB, a handover request sent by a UE through a source eNB, where the handover request is used to hand over the UE from the source eNB to the target eNB; and sending original configuration information and updated configuration information to the UE. In the present invention, a target eNB sends original configuration information and updated configuration information to UE, so that the UE performs a handover operation through the original configuration information or the updated configuration information selected from the received original configuration information and updated configuration information. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150449 | SECURITY CAPABILITY NEGOTIATION METHOD, SYSTEM, AND EQUIPMENT - A security capability negotiation method is applicable to perform security capability negotiation during a mobile network handover. Moreover, a security capability negotiation system is also provided. Consistent with the provided system and method, it may be unnecessary for the MME to know the security capability of the corresponding eNB in a certain manner during a handover from a 2G/3G network to an LTE network. Meanwhile, during the handover from the LTE network to the 3G network, the SGSN does not need to introduce new requirements. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150450 | CELL SELECTION FOR DEVICES WITH ASYMMETRY BETWEEN UPLINK AND DOWNLINK COMMUNICATIONS - Methods, systems, and devices are described for wireless communication. A user equipment (UE) located at a public land mobile network PLMN border area may modify cell selection parameters in order to leave a current PLMN for a more favorable visitor PLMN (VPLMN). The UE may, for example, identify the border area by monitoring GPS coordinates, identifying a mobile country code (MCC) of a network, searching for a background PLMN after experiencing a number of transmit failures, or by detecting a high block error rate (BLER). Additionally or alternatively, the UE may have certain physical or environmental constraints that create an asymmetry in uplink/downlink conditions, and this asymmetry may be a basis for, or may be accounted for, in modifying cell selection parameters. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150456 | Information Interaction Method, Base Station and Communication System - Embodiments of the present disclosure provide an information interaction method, a base station and a communication system. The information interaction method includes: a first base station notifies a second base station that a second cell is deployed and a first cell is to be shrunk in coverage; and the first base station receives a handover request transmitted by the second cell for handing a UE over to the first cell, the handover request includes reestablishment cell information containing at least information on the second cell. With the embodiments of the present disclosure, not only a reestablishment failure will not be resulted after a handover failure, but also signaling overhead may be saved. | 05-26-2016 |
20160150458 | NETWORK CONFIGURATION METHOD AND APPARATUS AND SYSTEM - A network configuration method and apparatus and a system, the network configuration method includes: receiving, by a target primary eNB of user equipment, a handover request message transmitted by a source primary eNB of the user equipment, the handover request message containing identification indication information or service indication information of the user equipment in a serving eNB before handover; and transmitting, by the target primary eNB of the user equipment, the identification indication information or the service indication information to a target secondary eNB of the user equipment, so that the target secondary eNB performs resource configuration for services of the user equipment according to the identification indication information or the service indication information. With the method, apparatus and system of the embodiments of the present disclosure, waste of resources resulted from repeated reservation of the resources may be avoided. | 05-26-2016 |
20160157135 | Handover Signaling in Wireless Networks | 06-02-2016 |
20160157136 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD | 06-02-2016 |
20160157137 | Intelligent Re-provisioning of Base Stations for Circuit-Switched Fallback | 06-02-2016 |
20160157138 | SELECTION OF A NETWORK ELEMENT | 06-02-2016 |
20160157141 | Method, Device, System and Software Product for Providing System Information to Enable Packet Switched Handover | 06-02-2016 |
20160157142 | LTE DISCOVERY AFTER SYSTEM CHANGE | 06-02-2016 |
20160157145 | Apparatus for Clustering Cells Using Neighbor Relations | 06-02-2016 |
20160157152 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF MANAGING VOICE CALL AND IP MEDIA SESSIONS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK ENVIRONMENT | 06-02-2016 |
20160157154 | USER TERMINAL, CELLULAR BASE STATION, AND PROCESSOR | 06-02-2016 |
20160157156 | COMMUNICATION METHOD IN DUAL CONNECTION MODE, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM | 06-02-2016 |
20160157174 | INTER-RAT COVERAGE DETERMINATION FOR ENERGY SAVING MANAGEMENT | 06-02-2016 |
20160165414 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RELOCATING GROUP OWNER OF PROXIMITY SERVICES GROUP IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for relocating a group owner (GO) of a proximity services (ProSe) group in a wireless communication system is provided. A first user equipment (UE), which is the GO of the ProSe group currently, receives at least one of channel quality of a second UE in the ProSe group or priority of the second UE in the ProSe group, from the second UE. The first UE determines the second UE as a new GO of the ProSe group based on the at least one of the channel quality of the second UE in the ProSe group or priority of the second UE in the ProSe group. Alternatively, the second UE may determine itself as the new GO of the ProSe group if the priority of the second UE in the ProSe group is higher than a priority of the first UE in the ProSe group. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165465 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RECEIVING REFERENCE SIGNAL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for receiving a reference signal (RS) in a wireless communication system are disclosed. The method for performing radio resource measurement (RRM) measurement for one or more sub-bands contained in an entire system band in a wireless communication system, wherein the method is performed by a terminal configured to operate in only one sub-band at a specific time includes: receiving a sub-band list or pattern for the RRM measurement and information regarding a measurement timing or section from a serving cell; and performing the RRM measurement in a radio resource defined by the sub-band list or pattern and information regarding the measurement timing or section within a report period of the RRM measurement, and reporting a result of the RRM measurement to the serving cell. The sub-band list or pattern includes sub-band candidates usable as a dedicated sub-band for the terminal from among sub-bands of the entire system band. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165489 | PS TO CS HANDOVER INDICATOR - The present invention relates to a solution for handling handover of connections for a user equipment from a packet switch network to a circuit switched network. This is provided as a method implemented in a node and system. The method is provided in a telecommunications network connecting user equipment, i.e. UE, communicating wirelessly with the network. The method comprising steps of detecting that handover is required from a packet switched, i.e. PS, based network to a circuit switched, i.e. CS, based network, initiating in a source mobility management node a single radio voice call continuity, i.e. SVRCC, initiating a PC to CS handover for non-voice components with information about voice related parameters and a PS to CS handover indicator, executing hand over, sending an update request to a serving gateway, i.e. SGW, from a target mobility management node with non-voice related parameters and the PS to CS handover indicator, forwarding the update request from the SGW to a packet data network gateway, i.e. PGW, receiving the update request in the PGW, detecting the PS to CS handover indicator, and handling in the PGW the PS to CS handover indicator. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165490 | USER TERMINAL AND BASE STATION - A user terminal comprises: a controller configured to perform control of omitting transmission of a random access preamble signal to a target cell when a base station that manages the target cell receives an uplink signal from the user terminal by CoMP in which a plurality of cells including a source cell and the target cell cooperate with one another to perform communication before a handover procedure is performed. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165491 | A Method and Apparatus for Proxy Algorithm Identity Selection - A method for proxy algorithm identity selection may comprise: selecting, at a first network node, a security algorithm identity for a user equipment which is determined to handover to a second network node, based at least in part on security information of the user equipment and a list of security algorithm identities for the second network node; generating security keys for a communication between the user equipment and the second network node, based at least in part on the selected security algorithm identity; providing the security keys and the selected security algorithm identity to the second network node from the first network node; and sending the selected security algorithm identity to the user equipment from the first network node, in response to a handover acknowledgement from the second network node. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165499 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FORWARDING DATA FOR SMALL CELL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for forwarding data in a wireless communication system is provided. A small cell receives an indication which indicates stopping serving a small cell service from a macro eNodeB (eNB). Upon receiving the indication, the small cell starts to forward data to the macro eNB together with a sequence number (SN) status transfer message. The indication may be received via a form of a message or a form of an information element (IE) in a message. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165503 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, STORAGE APPARATUS, AND CONTROL METHOD - A communication apparatus includes a memory and a processor coupled to the memory and configured to transmit a first content acquisition request to a first server apparatus via a first base station apparatus, receive a content, requested by the first content acquisition request, from the first server apparatus via the first base station apparatus, and change, in a case where coupling is switched from the first base station apparatus to a second base station apparatus in a handover process, a transmission destination address in a second content acquisition request to be transmitted to the second base station apparatus, from a first address of the first server apparatus coupled to the first base station apparatus to a second address of a second server apparatus coupled to the second base station apparatus. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165504 | System, Apparatus And Method For Providing Updating File Through Hereto-Network - A system, an apparatus and method for updating a file through a hereto-network are disclosed, where a first wireless communications network is relied upon to detect a target device and a second wireless communications network is used for transmitting the updating file, so that the target device connected with the first communications network may receive the updating file through the second wireless communications network and update a target data according to the updating file, whereby the technical efficacy where a bandwidth of other devices may not be influenced when the target device downloads the updating file for updating the target data and multiple target devices may be updated simultaneously may be achieved. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165506 | Wireless Local Area Network WLAN User Roaming Method, Apparatus, and System - A wireless local area network (WLAN) user roaming method, apparatus, and system. A foreign access point (FAP) associated after layer 3 roaming of a wireless terminal of the user receives a first packet; the FAP. The user obtains an encapsulation entry of a first roaming tunnel, where a tunnel outer destination IP address in the encapsulation entry of the first roaming tunnel is an Internet Protocol (IP) address of a home access point (HAP) before the roaming of the wireless terminal, and a tunnel outer source IP address in the encapsulation entry of the first roaming tunnel is an IP address of the FAP. The FAP encapsulates the first packet according to the encapsulation entry of the first roaming tunnel, and the FAP sends the encapsulated first packet to the HAP. The user establishes a tunnel between the APs can greatly shorten a forwarding path of the roaming tunnel user. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165507 | Handling of Access Capability Information in a Mobile Network - In a mobile network with a plurality of access networks, a control node which is controlling access of a user equipment to that one of the access networks which is currently used by the user equipment determines an access capability of the user equipment in said access network, e.g. support of voice communication over packet switched access. The control node provides an indication of the determined access capability to a subscriber database associated with the user equipment. The indication may then be retrieved from the subscriber database and be used to control termination of a connection to the user equipment. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165508 | Network Handover Method, Apparatus, Device, and System - Embodiments provide a network handover method, apparatus, device, and system and relate to the communications field. The method is used in a control node and include: acquiring first state information of a WLAN AP that UE accesses and second state information of a cellular network corresponding to a location of the UE. If it is determined that the first state information and the second state information meet a preset first handover condition, the method includes generating first handover information, and sending the first handover information to a handover node, so that the handover node sends, to the UE, a first handover command that is generated according to the first handover information, and the UE attaches to the cellular network indicated by the first handover command, receives an IP address of the UE in the cellular network, and implements a handover from a WLAN to the cellular network. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165509 | SYSTEM FOR TRANSMITTING MESSAGE THROUGH HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS BY GATEWAYS AND METHOD THEREOF - The present invention discloses a system for transmitting a message through heterogeneous networks by gateways and method thereof. After using a wireless communication technology to transmit a message from a node to a gateway, a data transmission technology different from the wireless communication technology is used to transmit the message from the gateway to another gateway in different cells, so as to forward the message from the another gateway to another node by using the wireless communication technology, to decrease traffic generated by exchanging routing message in wireless network, and to achieve the effect of raising available bandwidth in the wireless network. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165511 | MOBILITY CONTROL FUNCTION FOR USER EQUIPMENT - The present invention relates to a method at a first node in a first wireless network comprising a first mobility control function for a User Equipment, UE, connected to the first wireless network. The method includes the step of storing the identity of a second node in a second wireless network to which the UE is connected, the second node including a second mobility control function for the UE. When it is determined that the first mobility control function for the UE is transferring from the first node to a target node the identity of the target node and an indication that mobility control functionality for the UE is transferring from the first node to the target node, is transmitted to the second node or to the UE, or the identity of the second node and an indication that the second node includes the second mobility control function for the UE is transmitted to the target node or to the UE. A target node, upon receiving information relating to a first node at which the first mobility control function of a UE is currently located, an indication that first mobility control function for the UE is to be transferred from the first node to the target node, and an identity of a second node including a second mobility control function for the UE, transmits, to the second node, the identity of the target node and an indication that the first mobility control function for the UE is transferring from the first node to the target node. | 06-09-2016 |
20160174110 | Data Traffic Bearer Selection Based on Backhaul Statistics | 06-16-2016 |
20160174111 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND DEVICES FOR HANDOVER IN MULTI-CELL INTEGRATED NETWORKS | 06-16-2016 |
20160174112 | METHODS, APPARATUSES AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR FAST HANDOVER | 06-16-2016 |
20160174113 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, CORE NETWORK NODE, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND STORAGE MEDIUM | 06-16-2016 |
20160174114 | METHOD FOR EFFICIENTLY UPDATING SECONDARY CARRIER INFORMATION IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM | 06-16-2016 |
20160174119 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND PROGRAM | 06-16-2016 |
20160174120 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, METHOD, AND APPARATUS | 06-16-2016 |
20160174121 | REPLACEMENT SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR BROADBAND WIRELESS NETWORK | 06-16-2016 |
20160174122 | TRANSPORT FORMAT FOR COMMUNICATIONS | 06-16-2016 |
20160174123 | AVOIDING MASS MIGRATION OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICES FROM ONE ACCESS POINT TO ANOTHER | 06-16-2016 |
20160174124 | HANDOFF PROCEDURE IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 06-16-2016 |
20160174291 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO CONTROL HSDPA ACTIVATION/DE-ACTIVATION | 06-16-2016 |
20160182368 | MULTI-NONCE ENABLED INTEREST PACKET DESIGN FOR NAMED-DATA NETWORKING | 06-23-2016 |
20160183129 | Mobility Management of Wireless Networks Based on Multipath Transfer Control Protocol | 06-23-2016 |
20160183131 | LTE Small Cell Handover To Carrier-Grade Wifi | 06-23-2016 |
20160183136 | AGGREGATION OF CARRIERS OF A CELLULAR RADIO NETWORK WITH CARRIERS OF AN AUXILIARY NETWORK | 06-23-2016 |
20160183137 | BASE STATION | 06-23-2016 |
20160183140 | INTERWORKING BETWEEN DIFFERENT RADIO ACCESS NETWORKS FOR USER EQUIPMENT | 06-23-2016 |
20160183142 | MOBILITY ACROSS SATELLITE BEAMS USING L2 CONNECTIVITY | 06-23-2016 |
20160183144 | VOICE HANDOVER BETWEEN WIRELESS NETWORKS | 06-23-2016 |
20160183145 | Seamless Antenna Hanover System and Related Methods for Non-Geosynchronous Satellites | 06-23-2016 |
20160183146 | Method and System for Soft Handoff in Mobile Broadband Systems | 06-23-2016 |
20160183147 | REPORTING BETWEEN BASE STATIONS | 06-23-2016 |
20160183150 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE | 06-23-2016 |
20160183153 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SWITCHING NETWORKS | 06-23-2016 |
20160183154 | COMMUNICATION UNITS, INTEGRATED CIRCUITS AND METHODS THEREFOR | 06-23-2016 |
20160183156 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RELEASING CONNECTION WITH LOCAL GW WHEN UE MOVES OUT OF THE RESIDENTIAL/ENTERPRISE NETWORK COVERAGE | 06-23-2016 |
20160183159 | Service steering method, related device and computer storage medium | 06-23-2016 |
20160183233 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR OPERATING SYSTEM IN CELLULAR MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 06-23-2016 |
20160183242 | TRAFFIC ENGINEERING IN HETEROGENEOUS MILLIMETER-WAVE AND LTE SMALL CELL SYSTEMS | 06-23-2016 |
20160192239 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR LTE MULTI-CARRIER LOAD BALANCING BASED ON USER TRAFFIC PROFILE - A method for load balancing among carriers within a wireless communication network, this method comprising the following steps—collecting information indicative of a user traffic profile, this user traffic profile being associated with a user equipment connected through a first carrier frequency to the wireless communication network; deciding on whether to offload the traffic of the user equipment from the first carrier frequency to a second carrier frequency on the basis of at least the information indicative of the user traffic profile. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192245 | Handover Method, Master Base Station and Slave Base Station - Disclosed are a handover method, a master evolved NodeB (MeNB) and a secondary evolved NodeB (SeNB), wherein, the method is applied to perform a handover on a MeNB for a user equipment (UE) in a multi-connection scenario in which the UE has connections with both a master evolved NodeB (MeNB) and a secondary evolved NodeB (SeNB), including: a source MeNB initiating a handover, and sending a handover command to the UE after receiving a corresponding response, instructing the UE to perform the handover on the MeNB via the handover command, and remaining a connection with the SeNB; after the UE successfully accesses a destination MeNB, the source MeNB or the destination MeNB sending a handover instruction message to the SeNB connected with the UE, the SeNB connected with the UE establishing an association with the destination MeNB according to the handover instruction message. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192246 | CELL HANDOVER METHOD AND DEVICE - Embodiments of the present invention provide a cell handover method and a device. so that the target eNB uses a current serving small node as a user plane serving node after UE is handed over and uses the target eNB as a control plane serving node after the UE is handed over; receiving a handover request acknowledgment sent by the target eNB; and sending offloading configuration information of the current serving small node to the current serving small node, and sending RRC reconfiguration information of the UE to the UE, so that offloading configuration is performed separately by the current serving small node and the UE. This avoids a problem that in a cell handover process, a transmission resource required for transmission increases and a delay is relatively great because the current serving small node forwards a large amount of data to the target eNB. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192249 | Device and Method of Handling Failure in Communications with Multiple Base Stations - A communication device comprises a storage unit for storing instructions and a processing means coupled to the storage unit. The processing means is configured to execute the instructions stored in the storage unit. The instructions comprise being configured to connect to a first base station and a second base station; detecting a connection failure in a first cell of the first base station when performing a secondary cell group (SCG) failure information procedure; performing a radio resource control (RRC) connection reestablishment procedure in response to the detection of the connection failure; and transmitting a SCG failure information message of the SCG failure information procedure to the first base station after transmitting a RRC connection reestablishment complete message of the RRC connection reestablishment procedure, or stopping performing the SCG failure information procedure in response to the connection failure or the RRC connection reestablishment procedure. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192250 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING CSG SERVICE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for supporting a closed subscriber group (CSG) service is provided. A user equipment determines whether a neighbor cell is a CSG member cell for which a CSG whitelist includes a CSG identity of the neighbor cell and PLMN identities of the neighbor cell. The user equipment sends a CSG membership indicator indicating whether the neighbor cell is the CSG member cell. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192252 | MEASUREMENT CONFIGURATION PROCESSING METHOD AND DEVICE - Provided are a method and device for processing measurement configuration. The method includes: after a HO flow or a reselection flow is triggered in a source cell, UE processes a WLAN interworking mechanism measurement configuration in at least one of manners as follows: the UE continues using a current WLAN interworking mechanism measurement configuration; the UE modifies a target frequency point in the current WLAN interworking mechanism measurement configuration into the whole frequency band for measurement; the UE requests for a WLAN interworking mechanism measurement configuration corresponding to a target cell; and the UE suspends WLAN interworking mechanism measurement until the UE receives the WLAN interworking mechanism measurement configuration corresponding to the target cell. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192254 | Layered Mobility - Apparatuses and methods for providing layered mobility are provided. Small cell eNBs belong to a cluster of local area base stations. A source eNB has a connection with user equipment having a first identity related to the connection and receives from the user equipment a request to send a scheduling request to another local area eNB of the cluster, the request including a list of target candidate eNBs. The source eNB determines suitable target eNB(s) from the list and resources for sending a scheduling request; and transmits The target eNB receives a scheduling request from user equipment allocates and sends communication resources to the user equipment and associates the first identity to the connection with the user equipment. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192255 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND TERMINAL APPARATUS - [Object] To enable further power saving in a heterogeneous network. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192258 | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING DATA - A communication terminal is described having a first transceiver configured to provide a first communication channel via a first radio access network, a second transceiver configured to provide a second communication channel via a second radio access network, a size threshold determiner configured to determine a size threshold based on a limit for an average delay of data communications, a size determiner configured to determine a size of data to be communicated, a selector configured to select the first transceiver and the first communication channel or the second transceiver and the second communication channel for communicating the data based on a comparison of the size of the data with the size threshold and a controller configured to control the selected transceiver to communicate the data via the selected communication channel. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192260 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS CONTROL METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A communication apparatus, in a case where a partner apparatus is not in the communicable state in a second mode of a first wireless communication method, specifies a predetermined memory area of the partner apparatus and transmits, to the partner apparatus using a first mode of the first wireless communication method, a communication parameter used for communication between the communication apparatus and the partner apparatus in a second wireless communication method. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192261 | LOW LATENCY AND/OR ENHANCED COMPONENT CARRIER DISCOVERY FOR SERVICES AND HANDOVER - Certain aspects relate to methods and apparatus for discovering whether one or more enhanced capabilities are supported by devices (e.g., user equipment (UE), base station (BS), etc.) in a network. The enhanced capabilities may include, for example, the ability to support certain low latency procedures, enhanced component carrier (eCC) capability, and the like. The devices in the network may perform one or more handover-related procedures (e.g., cell selection/reselection, make-before-break handover, etc.) and/or other procedures (e.g., QoS negotiation, etc.) based, at least in part, on support for the one or more enhanced capabilities. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192262 | COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM RADIO COVERAGE RECONFIGURATION BASED ON AVAILABLE CAPACITY OF A COMPENSATION CELL - In a cellular communication system, a coverage area configuration transition is performed when it is determined that the resources allocated to a compensation service area have sufficient available capacity to serve one or more UE devices being served by an energy saving service area, A coverage area configuration transition includes reducing the coverage of an energy saving service area and expanding the coverage of a compensation service area. A compensation communication station providing the compensation service area sends a request for a coverage area configuration transition to an energy saving communication station. The energy saving communication station may reject the coverage area configuration transition or may accept it and send an expansion notification to the compensation communication station, where the notification at least indicates that the compensation service area can be expanded. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192263 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, METHOD, AND APPARATUS - Using LAPI (low access priority indication) information of an RRC Connection Request from a terminal, a base station selects a specific mobility management node. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192266 | DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM - The present invention provides a data transmission method, where the method is executed by a base station in a communications system, the communications system further includes a wireless local area network access point WLAN AP and user equipment, a bearer used to transmit data of the user equipment is disposed between the base station and a gateway device, a General Packet Radio Service Tunneling Protocol GTP tunnel is disposed between the base station and the WLAN AP, and the method includes: sending, by the base station, first offloading indication information to the WLAN AP, where the first offloading indication information is used for instructing the WLAN AP to transmit the target data between the base station and the user equipment, and the first offloading indication information includes identity information of the user equipment. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192267 | VOWLAN CALL HANDOVER METHOD, UE AND CORE NETWORK NODE - The present disclosure relates to VoWLAN call handover solutions. In one embodiment the method comprising: making a voice call through a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) under whose coverage the UE is located, with a Packet Data Network (PDN) address obtained from a PDN to which the WLAN is connected; determining that a signal quality of the WLAN is not suitable for the voice call anymore; and sending the PDN address to a base station of a mobile communication network covering the UE, for facilitating a core network node of the mobile communication network to perform voice call handover from WLAN to the mobile communication network. The present disclosure also provides a UE and a core network node for implementing the same. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192268 | USER TERMINAL, RADIO BASE STATION, RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD AND CONTROL APPARATUS - The present invention is designed to prevent the deterioration of network quality due to coverage holes between small cells, or deterioration of service quality arising from that, in a HetNet. The radio communication method of the present invention is a radio communication method in a user terminal (UE) that communicates with at least one of a macro base station (MeNB) that forms a macro cell (M) and a small base station (SeNB) that forms a small cell (S) such that the small cell (S) overlaps the macro cell (M) at least in part, and includes the steps of communicating with the small base station (SeNB), and receiving a paging signal from the macro base station (MeNB) in a first carrier frequency (F | 06-30-2016 |
20160192270 | CELL CHANGE METHOD, TERMINAL, AND NETWORK DEVICE - The present disclosure discloses a cell change method, a terminal, and a network device. By implementing this application, a problem that a receiving success rate of the change command cannot be improved when the another intra-frequency measurement event except the event 1D is triggered can be resolved. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192271 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING MEASURING FREQUENCY OF FORBIDDEN REGISTRATION AREA IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for controlling measuring the frequency of a new cell within a forbidden registration area when a User Equipment (UE) enters into the new cell in a mobile communication system are provided. If the UE recognizes the new registration area as forbidden, the UE does not measure the frequency of the current cell for a predetermined reference time, and searches for a suitable cell for a normal service by measuring other frequencies. If no suitable cell in the other frequencies is found, the UE removes a measuring limitation and searches for an acceptable cell for a limited service by measuring frequencies including frequency of the current cell. | 06-30-2016 |
20160192399 | RANDOM ACCESS PROCEDURE FOR HANDOVER - Technology for switching from a wireless local area network (WLAN) to a wireless wide area network (WWAN) is disclosed. A multi-radio access technology (multi-RAT) user equipment (UE) can receive WLAN-specific dedicated physical random access channel (PRACH) allocation information from an evolved node B (eNB) to enable the multi-RAT UE to perform an inter-RAT WLAN-to-WWAN handover. The multi-RAT UE can initiate the inter-RAT WLAN-to-WWAN handover at the multi-RAT UE by performing random access with the eNB using the WLAN-specific dedicated PRACH allocation information. | 06-30-2016 |
20160198364 | Offloading Traffic of a User Equipment Communication Session from a Cellular Communication Network to a Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) | 07-07-2016 |
20160198368 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACCESSING A RANDOM ACCESS CHANNEL BY SELECTIVELY USING DEDICATED OR CONTENTION BASED PREAMBLES DURING HANDOVER | 07-07-2016 |
20160198369 | Handover Delay Optimization | 07-07-2016 |
20160198377 | System and Method for Identifying a Handover Target Cell During Cell Reconfiguration Periods | 07-07-2016 |
20160198378 | Methods and Devices for Performing a Mobile Network Switch | 07-07-2016 |
20160198381 | DEVICE FOR SUPPORTING ON/OFF OF SMALL BASE STATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK | 07-07-2016 |
20160198382 | METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND APPARATUS SUPPORTING SAME | 07-07-2016 |
20160198466 | VEHICULAR COMMUNICATION METHOD AND SYSTEM | 07-07-2016 |
20160198519 | METHODS, APPARATUSES, AND SYSTEM FOR DETERMINING CONNECTION STATE ASSISTIVE PARAMETERS | 07-07-2016 |
20160205495 | CAPABILITY MATCHING METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM | 07-14-2016 |
20160205598 | METHOD FOR PROCESSING RADIO ACCESS, FORWARDING DEVICE, AND NETWORK CONTROLLER | 07-14-2016 |
20160205602 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD | 07-14-2016 |
20160205603 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD | 07-14-2016 |
20160205604 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ALLOCATING RESOURCES FOR SWITCHING BETWEEN MACRO CELL AND SMALL CELL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 07-14-2016 |
20160205608 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING HANDOVER PROCEDURE AND CREATING DATA | 07-14-2016 |
20160255543 | FIRST SERVICE NETWORK NODE, A SECOND SERVICE NETWORK NODE AND METHODS RELATING TO HANDLING OF A SERVICE SESSION | 09-01-2016 |
20160255544 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EFFICIENT SIGNALING AND USAGE OF RESOURCES FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SUPPORTING CIRCUIT SWITCHED AND PACKET SWITCHED SESSIONS | 09-01-2016 |
20160255545 | FLEXIBLE EXTENDED SIGNALING | 09-01-2016 |
20160255547 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ESTABLISHING CELL RESELECTION LIST | 09-01-2016 |
20160255558 | RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, COMMUNICATION METHOD, MOBILE STATION, AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM | 09-01-2016 |
20160255559 | SELECTING A RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY AT A WIRELESS DEVICE | 09-01-2016 |
20160255562 | OPPORTUNISTIC, LOCATION-PREDICTIVE, SERVER-MEDIATED PEER-TO-PEER OFFLOADING | 09-01-2016 |
20160255565 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING CELL VISITED HISTORY AND WIRELESS EQUIPMENT THEREOF | 09-01-2016 |
20160380870 | CONTROL OF CELLULAR NETWORK OPERATION USING INTERFERENCE-BASED METRIC - An interference-based metric is used for control purposes in a cellular network, e.g., for controlling association of a user equipment to a cell of the cellular network. The metric is defined as a ratio of a first value and a second value. The first value represents the strength of a reference signal (RS) transmitted by a base station of the cell as measured by the user equipment. The second value represents the strength of interference (IF) at the user equipment. Depending on the metric, a radio access configuration for the user equipment and the cell is controlled. This may for example involve association of the user equipment to the cell, e.g., in the course of a handover process or idle mode cell selection process. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381517 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING UNICAST REQUEST INDICATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for requesting a unicast bearer setup in a wireless communication system is provided. A user equipment (UE) receives a unicast request indication, which indicates that a target cell does not provide a multimedia broadcast multicast service (MBMS) service in which the UE is interested to the UE, from a network. Upon receiving the unicast request indication, the UE transmits a unicast bearer setup request to the network. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381605 | Method and Device For Handling Handover of a Communications Service - The embodiments herein relate to method in a mobile management entity, referred to as MME, for enabling handover of a communication service between a circuit switched (CS) network and a packet switched (PS) network. The user equipment is located in the CS network and having a communications service in the CS network. Handling is improved by providing communication between the MME and a mobile switching centre server. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381606 | FACILITATION OF WIRELESS NETWORK SESSION CONTINUITY - Internet protocol session continuity can be achieved via an access point registration process. Mobile devices near an access point device that has registered with a base station device can offload wireless communication from the base station device to the access point device. The access point device can be a known access point device that can be secured and subject to session continuity policies of a service provider. The session continuity policies can be stored at a content handover processor, which can oversee the handover processes between the base station device and the mobile device. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381607 | Methods, Radio Network Nodes and a User Equipment | 12-29-2016 |
20160381609 | A NETWORK NODE AND A METHOD THEREIN FOR DETERMINING A MOBILITY CRITERION - A method performed by a network node for determining a mobility criterion related to a wireless communications device in a wireless communications network. The network node obtains an information related to an UL propagation condition associated to the wireless communications device. The network node determines a measure of imbalance between the UL propagation condition and a DL propagation condition associated to the wireless communications device. The measure of imbalance is based on the information related to the UL propagation condition. The network node determines the mobility criterion based on the measure of imbalance between the UL propagation condition and the DL propagation condition. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381611 | BASE STATION AND USER EQUIPMENT - Some techniques for implementing proper RACH-less handover control are provided. One aspect of the present invention relates to a base station including a communication control unit configured to control radio communication with user equipment, a capable cell information storage unit configured to store capable cell information indicating a RACH-less handover capable cell and a RACH-less handover determination unit configured to determine whether the user equipment is RACH-less handover capable. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381612 | METHOD FOR AUTOMATICALLY SWITCHING AN LBS-BASED WIRELESS DATA NETWORK AND MOBILE TERMINAL - A method for automatically switching an LBS-based wireless data network and a mobile terminal may include recording based on LBS, when the mobile terminal enables wireless data, login information and logins of the wireless data network in the current location, updating a network information list, establishing, based on logins, a wireless data network connection priority, searching a corresponding high-priority network when the location is changed, and sending a prompt to switch a network and log into a high-priority wireless data network. | 12-29-2016 |
20160381613 | NETWORK SELECTION METHOD AND USER EQUIPMENT - A network selection method and user equipment, include: falling, by user equipment, from a first LTE cell back to a 2G or 3G network to execute a CS service, where a network type of the first LTE cell is a first type; when the user equipment completes execution of the CS service on the 2G or 3G network, measuring an LTE cell according to LTE network information, to obtain a measurement result of each LTE cell; and selecting, from an LTE cell whose measurement result meets a preset condition, a second LTE cell for accessing an LTE network, where a network type of the second LTE cell is the first type. | 12-29-2016 |
20170237589 | PILOT GROUPING AND ROUTE PROTOCOLS IN MULTI-CARRIER COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS | 08-17-2017 |
20170237783 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR DEDICATED BEARER ESTABLISHMENT HANDLING DURING CALL SETUP FOR LTE | 08-17-2017 |
20170237817 | OUT-OF-BAND SERVICE DISCOVERY INDICATION | 08-17-2017 |
20170238210 | Virtual WLAN Interface for Cellular Data Offloading in a Wireless Device | 08-17-2017 |
20170238213 | TCP CONNECTION ESTABLISHMENT AND HANDOVER | 08-17-2017 |
20170238221 | CELL AVOIDANCE ASSOCIATED WITH LOWER LAYER FAILURES | 08-17-2017 |
20170238222 | INTER-SMALL CELL HANDOVER METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM | 08-17-2017 |
20170238224 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF SUPPORTING CONTINUOUS ACCESS TO CONTENT TRANSMITIED OVER TWO OR MORE NETWORKS | 08-17-2017 |
20170238225 | Method and System for Soft Handoff in Mobile Broadband Systems | 08-17-2017 |
20170238226 | PROGRESSIVE TOGGLING OF RADIO FREQUENCY BAND IN A RELAY NODE | 08-17-2017 |
20170238227 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SELECTING AN ACCESS POINT FOR PERFORMING SERVICES CORRESPONDING TO A CLIENT DEVICE | 08-17-2017 |
20180027456 | BASE STATION | 01-25-2018 |
20180027457 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENHANCING INTER-MENB HANDOVER WITHOUT SENB CHANGE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 01-25-2018 |
20180027458 | EXCHANGING NETWORK SERVER REGISTRATION CREDENTIALS OVER A D2D NETWORK | 01-25-2018 |
20180027459 | Device and Method for Handling a Cellular-Wireless Local Area Network Aggregation | 01-25-2018 |
20180027462 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR BIDIRECTIONAL NETWORK GEOGRAPHY DELIVERY | 01-25-2018 |
20180027463 | Communication Connection Control Method, and Device | 01-25-2018 |
20180027464 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, AND PROGRAM | 01-25-2018 |
20180027465 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR VEHICLES USING BOTH TRACKSIDE WLAN AND CELLULAR NETWORK COMMUNICATION | 01-25-2018 |
20180027469 | USER TERMINAL FOR NETWORK SELECTION IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 01-25-2018 |
20180027478 | A DEVICE AND A METHOD FOR CONTROLLING AN IP CORE NETWORK | 01-25-2018 |
20180027512 | Handling of Hyper Frame Number De-Synchronization Incidents | 01-25-2018 |
20180027528 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING SINGLE-CELL MULTI-TRANSMISSION DATA AND APPARATUS THEREFOR | 01-25-2018 |
20180027610 | A FIRST RADIO ACCESS NODE, A SECOND RADIO ACCESS NODE, A FIRST CORE NETWORK NODE AND METHODS THEREIN FOR PREPARING HANDOVER | 01-25-2018 |
20190149421 | COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 05-16-2019 |
20190149977 | DYNAMIC MOBILITY NETWORK RECOVERY SYSTEM | 05-16-2019 |
20190150037 | Handling of PDCP Version Change | 05-16-2019 |
20190150039 | VOICE CALL MANAGEMENT TECHNIQUES IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS | 05-16-2019 |
20190150040 | Method of Updating Network Detection and Selection Information and Traffic Routing Information | 05-16-2019 |
20190150041 | ACCESS POINT HANDOVER METHOD AND DEVICE | 05-16-2019 |
20190150043 | Access Node, Control Device and Method Thereof | 05-16-2019 |
20190150044 | INTER-SMALL CELL HANDOVER METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM | 05-16-2019 |
20190150045 | HANDOVER METHOD AND APPARATUS | 05-16-2019 |
20190150046 | VEHICLE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, SERVER APPARATUS, MESSAGE TRANSMITTING METHOD, VEHICLE RELATED SERVICE PROVIDING METHOD, AND READABLE MEDIUM | 05-16-2019 |
20190150047 | DYNAMIC RADIO COVERAGE AREA TRANSITION MANAGEMENT | 05-16-2019 |
20190150052 | User Equipment, Network Node and Methods in a Wireless Communications Network | 05-16-2019 |
20190150053 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR IMPLEMENTING HANDOVERS IN A VEHICLE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 05-16-2019 |
20190150054 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION MEDIUM INFORMATION GENERATING DEVICE | 05-16-2019 |
20190150085 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR REDUCING POWER CONSUMPTION IN MULTI ANTENNA SYSTEM | 05-16-2019 |
20190150096 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING UPLINK POWER IN RACH-LESS HANDOVER | 05-16-2019 |
20190150216 | Device and Method of Handling a Cell Selection Procedure | 05-16-2019 |
20190150221 | RADIO ACCESS NETWORK NOTIFICATION AREA CONFIGURATION AND MANAGEMENT | 05-16-2019 |
20220141719 | FAST RETURN TO 5G SYSTEMS (5GS) AFTER HANDOVER TO EVOLVED PACKET SYSTEM (EPS) DUE TO EPS FALLBACK FROM 5GS - Some embodiments of this disclosure include apparatuses and methods for managing a fast return of a user equipment (UE) to 5G systems (5GS) after handover to Evolved Packet System (EPS) due to EPS fallback from 5GS. The method can include at least generating a handover request including an indication indicating a handover reason of no presence of quality of service (QoS) flow for a voice signal to the UE; receiving a handover command generated by an access and mobility management function (AMF) to transfer the UE from the 5GS to the EPS based on the handover request; transmitting the handover command to the UE for the UE to establish a connection with the EPS; and after the flow of the voice signal has terminated, reestablishing a connection with the UE to reconnect the UE to the 5GS, wherein the connection with the BS is re-established based on a target ID of the BS. | 05-05-2022 |
20220141724 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, MOBILE OBJECT, COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM, AND INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD - An information processing apparatus comprises a communication unit configured to communicate with an external device through a mobile communication network, and comprises: a throughput measuring unit; a throughput predicting unit configured to predict a future communication throughput; a communication rate controller; a band information acquiring unit; a communication environment information storage unit by associating; and a detection unit configured to detect at least one of a handover execution and a communication band switching, wherein if the detection unit has detected at least one of a handover execution and a communication band switching, the communication rate controller switches from controlling the communication rate based on a future communication throughput predicted by the throughput predicting unit to controlling the communication rate based on band information acquired by the communication environment information storage unit and the band information acquiring unit. | 05-05-2022 |
20220141728 | NETWORK NODE - A network node includes a control unit that sets an information element in a field included in an inter-network node message for configuring communication with a user apparatus when the field is mandatory in the inter-network node message; and a transmitting unit that transmits, to another network node, the inter-network node message including the field in which the information element is set, wherein, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the field is mandatory in the inter-network node message. | 05-05-2022 |
20220141732 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REPORTING ASSISTANT INFORMATION - The present disclosure relates to methods and apparatuses. According to some embodiments of the disclosure, a method includes: receiving at a base station, assistant information for reestablishing a link for at least one access node associated with an integrated access and backhaul node. | 05-05-2022 |
20220141735 | TECHNIQUES FOR COMMUNICATING MOBILITY INFORMATION - Methods, systems, and devices for providing feedback about radio link failure (RLF) events that includes information about directional beams. A user equipment (UE) may experience an RLF event and lose connectivity with a network. After the UE reestablish a radio resource control (RRC) connection with the network, the UE may transmit an RLF report that include information about directional beams, information about a master node and a secondary node in a dual-connectivity procedure, information associated conditional handover procedures, or information about service time interruptions, or a combination thereof. One or more base stations may be configured to transmit at least portions of the information in the RLF report to other base stations as part of a message that may be an example of an RLF indication or a handover report. The message may be transmitted over an X2 interface or an Xn interface. | 05-05-2022 |
20220141736 | SOURCE ACCESS NODE, TARGET ACCESS NODE AND METHODS FOR ENHANCED HANDOVER - Embodiments herein relate to, e.g., a method performed by a source access node relating to handover of a UE. The source access node sends to a target access node, an initial handover preparation message with a first explicit indicator for the target access node to request an enhanced Make-Before-Break Handover. The source access node receives an handover preparation response message from the target access node, with a second explicit indicator accepting or rejecting the requested enhanced Make-Before-Break Handover. Further, the source access node selects a possible fallback mechanism, upon reception of the handover preparation response message from the target access node indicating rejection or no support of enhanced Make-Before-Break Handover. | 05-05-2022 |
20220141749 | IAB LINK CONTROL METHOD, COMMUNICATION UNIT AND COMPUTER READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM - Disclosed are an IAB link control method, a communication unit and a computer-readable storage medium. The communication unit receives control information sent by a CU, and an operation corresponding to the control information is executed according to the control information, where the communication unit includes at least one of an IAB, a terminal, a DU, a terminal part of an IAB, a DU part of an IAB or a relay. The communication unit performs a corresponding control operation on an IAB link according to the control information sent by the CU, so as to reduce an interruption delay. | 05-05-2022 |
20220141859 | Scheduling of a Primary Cell from a Secondary Cell - A wireless device receives configuration parameters of a primary cell and a secondary cell. The secondary cell may be a scheduling cell for the primary cell. The wireless device may monitor, for scheduling information of the primary cell, search space(s) of the secondary cell based on the secondary cell being activated. The wireless device may receive a DCI via the secondary cell and in response to the monitoring. The DCI may comprise a first field and a second field. A first value of the first field may indicate first scheduling information. A second value of the second field may indicate that the first scheduling information is for scheduling the primary cell. The wireless device may receive or transport a transport block via the primary cell and based on the first scheduling information. | 05-05-2022 |